JP7123894B2 - game machine - Google Patents

Description

The present invention relates to gaming machines.

2. Description of the Related Art Conventionally, there has been known a game machine that has a light-emitting decorative portion and is capable of producing an effect by emitting light from a light source ( see Patent Document 1 ) .

JP 2013-013686 A

In the process of earnestly studying game machines equipped with such light-emitting means, the inventor of the present invention found that it was possible to create new entertainment by devising ways to guide the light emitted from the light-emitting means. I came to the idea that it might be.

SUMMARY OF THE INVENTION The present invention has been made in view of the above points , and an object of the present invention is to create a new entertainment value in a game machine provided with light emitting means .

In order to achieve the above object, the present invention provides the following gaming machine.
a plurality of light emitting means including a first light emitting means and a second light emitting means capable of emitting light;
a first light guide section capable of guiding light emitted from the first light emitting means; a second light guide section capable of guiding light emitted from the second light emitting means; and the first light emitting means a third light guide section capable of guiding light emitted from the light transmitting member;
a distance between the first light emitting means and the translucent member is longer than a distance between the second light emitting means and the translucent member;
The first light guide section and the third light guide section extend in substantially the same direction,
The third light guide has a first end and a second end, and the second light guide is opposite to the first end with respect to the second end. is located in the
A gaming machine characterized by:

(1) a projector (for example, projector device B2);
Adjusting parts for adjusting the traveling direction of the light projected by the projector (for example, connecting parts R1, R2, and R3 between the upper pedestal B220 and the lower pedestal B221, the attachment part of the upper pedestal B220 to the projector cover B1, mounting portion of the mirror mechanism B3 to the reflector holding portion B11, etc.);
an accommodation unit (for example, cabinet G) that accommodates the projector,
The accommodating portion is provided with an opening penetrating the inside and outside of the accommodating portion (for example, the opening G10a of the operation window G10) at a position where the adjusting portion can be operated from the outside, and a recessed portion around the opening. (For example, a peripheral edge portion G10b) is formed, and a closing member (for example, a closing lid G100) capable of closing the opening is fitted into the recess,
The closing member includes protrusions (for example, an upper protrusion G121 and a lower protrusion G122) that protrude toward the inside of the accommodation section along a part of the peripheral edge of the opening provided in the accommodation section. is formed,
A gaming machine characterized by:

According to the invention of (1), the housing section housing the projector is provided with an opening at a position where the adjustment section for adjusting the traveling direction of the light projected by the projector can be operated from the outside, and the opening is provided. A closure member capable of closing the is attached. Therefore, by removing the closing member from the accommodating portion, the opening closed by the closing member can be exposed, and the adjustment portion can be operated from outside the accommodating portion through the opening. become. As a result, even after the projector is fixed inside the accommodation portion, the light projected by the projector can be adjusted by operating the adjusting portion from the outside of the accommodation portion while the projector is still attached inside the accommodation portion. direction can be adjusted. A recess is formed around the opening provided in the housing, and the closing member is fitted into the recess. Here, various devices inside the game machine can be accessed illegally through the slight gap between the concave portion of the housing and the closing member (game media are illegally acquired by so-called slander). There is concern about the possibility that However, according to the invention (1), the closing member is formed with a protruding portion that protrudes toward the inner side of the accommodating portion along a part of the peripheral edge of the opening provided in the accommodating portion. As a result, even if a wire-shaped device tries to enter the game machine through the gap, the protrusion formed on the closing member can prevent the wire-shaped device from entering the game machine. Unauthorized access to the inside of the can be prevented.

According to the present invention, it is possible to create a new entertainment value in a game machine provided with light emitting means .

1 is a front perspective view of a gaming machine; FIG. It is a back side perspective view of a game machine. 1 is a front view of a game machine; FIG. FIG. 4 is a front view of the gaming machine when the upper door mechanism and the lower door mechanism are opened; 1 is an exploded perspective view of a gaming machine; FIG. 1 is an exploded perspective view of a gaming machine; FIG. It is an exploded perspective view of a mirror mechanism. FIG. 4 is an explanatory diagram showing the positional relationship between the projector device and the mirror mechanism; It is explanatory drawing which shows the attachment state of a mirror mechanism. 4 is a longitudinal sectional view of the display unit; FIG. 3 is a block diagram showing the circuit configuration of the projector device; FIG. 1 is an exploded perspective view of a projector device; FIG. FIG. 4 is a plan view showing an upper pedestal and a lower pedestal for fixing the projector device; 14 is a cross-sectional view of the upper pedestal and the lower pedestal along line XXVI-XXVI of FIG. 13; FIG. It is an exploded perspective view of an upper side pedestal and a lower side pedestal. It is a figure for demonstrating the positioning method of an upper side base. It is a figure for demonstrating the attitude|position adjustment method of a lower side base. It is an exploded perspective view of an upper side pedestal and a lower side pedestal. It is a top view which shows the state which assembled|attached the upper side base and the lower side base. FIG. 20 is a diagram of the upper pedestal and the lower pedestal shown in FIG. 19 viewed obliquely from the front; FIG. 20 is a view of the upper pedestal and lower pedestal shown in FIG. 19 as seen obliquely from the rear; 1 is a perspective view of a case that houses internal components of a projector mechanism; FIG. It is a perspective view which shows the state which attached the case to the lower side base. FIG. 4 is a perspective view showing a state in which the upper wall portion of the projector cover is removed; FIG. 4 is a plan view of the projector cover with the top wall removed; FIG. 26 is an exploded view showing a cross-sectional view of the projector cover shown in FIG. 25 along the arrow LL, and a perspective view of a relay plate attached to the projector cover; FIG. 4 is a view of the projector cover with the top wall removed, as viewed obliquely from above; 4 is a front view of the projector cover with the top wall removed; FIG. FIG. 29 is a cross-sectional view of the projector cover shown in FIG. 28 taken along line MM; It is a perspective view of a blind. FIG. 4 is a plan view of the irradiation unit with the upper wall portion of the projector cover removed; 32 is a diagram showing a state in which the opening vicinity fan and the duct cover are removed in a cross section along the arrow NN of the irradiation unit shown in FIG. 31; FIG. 31 is a perspective view showing a state in which an opening vicinity fan and a duct cover are attached to the blind shown in FIG. 30 and a case is arranged; FIG. FIG. 32 is a perspective view showing a state in which the right punching is removed from the irradiation unit shown in FIG. 31; FIG. 33 is a cross-sectional view showing a state in which an opening vicinity fan and a duct cover are attached to the irradiation unit shown in FIG. 32 ; FIG. 36 is a right side view showing a state in which an opening vicinity fan is removed in the cross section of the irradiation unit shown in FIG. 35; FIG. 3 is an exploded perspective view of a duct cover and a fan for the vicinity of an opening; FIG. 4 is an exploded perspective view of the projector cover and the opening vicinity fan as viewed from the rear and below; FIG. 4 is a partially enlarged perspective view of the projector cover and the opening vicinity fan as viewed from the front and below; Fig. 2 is a left perspective view of a state in which a blind and a duct cover are attached; FIG. 4 is a rear perspective view of the projector cover, blinds, and duct cover; 42 is an exploded perspective view of the projector cover, blinds, and duct cover shown in FIG. 41; FIG. 4 is an exploded perspective view of blinds and a duct cover; FIG. It is a figure for demonstrating how to attach an upper door mechanism to a cabinet. FIG. 4 is a diagram for explaining the arrangement positions of an intake fan and an exhaust fan; FIG. 4 illustrates an air flow path that may be formed inside a projector cover; It is a perspective view showing the appearance of the pachinko game machine. It is an exploded perspective view of the pachinko game machine. It is an exploded perspective view showing the decoration unit and the frame member of the pachinko game machine from the front. It is a perspective view showing the appearance of the pachinko game machine. It is an exploded perspective view of the pachinko game machine. 4 is a perspective view showing the appearance of the display unit; FIG. It is a perspective view which shows the internal structure of a display unit. FIG. 54 is a perspective view showing a state in which a projector and a mirror are disassembled from the display unit shown in FIG. 53; 53 is a perspective view showing how light is projected from the projector in a state where the projector and the mirror are disassembled from the display unit shown in FIG. 52; FIG. FIG. 4 is a diagram showing the relationship between the irradiation range of light projected from the projector and the cabinet-side screen; It is the perspective view which looked at the upper door mechanism from the back. It is an exploded perspective view of an upper door mechanism. It is the perspective view which looked at the upper door mechanism from the front. 1 is a front view of a game machine; FIG. (a) is a diagram showing a relationship between an irradiation range of light projected from a projector and a cabinet-side screen. (b) is a diagram showing how light that has not entered the cabinet-side screen enters the door-side right screen. (c) is a diagram showing how light that has not entered the cabinet-side screen enters the door-side left screen. FIG. 4 is a diagram for explaining images displayed on a cabinet-side screen, a door-side right screen, and a door-side left screen; FIG. 4 is a diagram for explaining images displayed on a cabinet-side screen, a door-side right screen, and a door-side left screen; It is a longitudinal cross-sectional view of an upper door mechanism and a cabinet. It is the perspective view which looked at the upper door mechanism from the front. It is the perspective view which looked at the upper door mechanism from the back. It is an exploded perspective view of an upper door mechanism. It is an exploded perspective view of an upper door mechanism. 3 is a rear perspective view of the light-transmitting plate, the screen sheet, the lower pressing member, the upper pressing member, and the lower frame; FIG. FIG. 4 is a perspective view of the lower pressing member and the upper pressing member as seen from the front, while the light-transmitting plate and the screen sheet are seen from the rear; It is the perspective view which looked at the upper pressing member and the upper frame from the downward direction. FIG. 3 is a rear perspective view of the translucent plate, the screen sheet, and the lower frame; FIG. 4 is a rear perspective view of the upper frame, the first structure, the second structure, the third structure, the fourth structure, and the screen sheet; 3 is a rear perspective view of the transparent plate, the screen sheet, the lower frame, the LED substrate, and the light guide member. FIG. 3 is a front perspective view of the transparent plate, the screen sheet, the lower frame, and the light guide member; FIG. FIG. 2 is a front perspective view of a cross section of a transparent plate, a screen sheet, a lower frame, an LED substrate, and a light guide member; It is the perspective view which looked at the upper door mechanism, the hook part, and the front side protrusion member from the back. It is the perspective view which looked at the upper door mechanism, the hook part, and the front side protrusion member from the side. It is the perspective view which looked at the cabinet, the hook part, and the front side projecting member from the side. It is a right side view of the cross section of an upper door mechanism, a cabinet, a hook, and a front side projecting member. It is the perspective view which looked at the upper door mechanism from the downward direction. It is the perspective view which looked at the upper door mechanism and the lower door mechanism from the front. It is the perspective view which looked at the upper door mechanism and the lower door mechanism from the back. FIG. 2 is a front perspective view of the gaming machine with the upper door mechanism and the lower door mechanism removed; FIG. 4 is a side perspective view of light projected from the projector device; It is the perspective view which looked at the irradiation unit from the side. It is the perspective view which looked at the irradiation unit from the back. It is a longitudinal section of a cabinet. Fig. 3 is an exploded perspective view of the irradiation unit, closing lid and back wall of the cabinet; FIG. 4 is a rear view of the gaming machine with the closing lid removed from the rear wall; FIG. 91 is a partially enlarged view around an operation window in the gaming machine shown in FIG. 90; FIG. 12 is an exploded perspective view of the closing lid and back wall of the cabinet; FIG. 12 is an exploded perspective view of the closing lid and back wall of the cabinet; FIG. 4 is a partially enlarged view of the operating window and its surroundings in the game machine with the closing lid attached to the back wall. It is a front view for demonstrating the schematic structure inside a cabinet. FIG. 96 is an exploded perspective view showing a state in which the reel unit is removed from the inside of the cabinet shown in FIG. 95; FIG. 4 is a perspective view showing a state in which the irradiation unit is attached to the back wall of the cabinet; It is the perspective view which looked at the irradiation unit from the side. It is the perspective view which looked at the irradiation unit from the back. It is a longitudinal section of a cabinet. Fig. 3 is an exploded perspective view of the irradiation unit, closing lid and back wall of the cabinet; FIG. 4 is a rear view of the gaming machine with the closing lid removed from the rear wall; 103 is a partially enlarged view around the operation window in the gaming machine shown in FIG. 102; FIG. FIG. 12 is an exploded perspective view of the closing lid and back wall of the cabinet; FIG. 12 is an exploded perspective view of the closing lid and back wall of the cabinet; It is the perspective view which looked at the cover for closure from the back. It is the perspective view which looked at the cover for closure from the front. It is the partial expansion perspective view which looked at the back wall from the front. FIG. 4 is a partially enlarged perspective view showing a state in which the closing lid is attached to the rear wall; 110 is a cross-sectional view showing the closing lid and back wall in the state shown in FIG. 109; FIG. FIG. 4 is a perspective view of a screw for hooking the irradiation unit; FIG. 11 is a partially enlarged perspective view showing a state in which the irradiation unit hooking screw is temporarily fixed to the rear wall; Fig. 2 is a front view of a projector cover plate; FIG. 4 is a partially enlarged perspective view of the projector cover plate as seen from slightly above; 4 is an exploded perspective view of the projector cover and the projector cover plate as seen from the rear; FIG. FIG. 4 is a partially enlarged perspective view of the periphery of the first cavity; FIG. 4 is a partially enlarged perspective view of the periphery of a first engagement projection; FIG. 11 is a cross-sectional view showing a state in which the first engaging projection is accommodated in the first cavity; FIG. 11 is a cross-sectional view showing a state in which the first engaging projection is accommodated in the first cavity; FIG. 10 is a cross-sectional view around the irradiation unit hooking screw and the lid mounting screw in a state where the closing lid and the irradiation unit are mounted on the rear wall; Fig. 10 is a cross-sectional view showing the closing lid, back wall, and projector cover plate; FIG. 4 is an exploded front view showing the periphery of the opening of the rear wall and the projector cover plate; 98 is a partially enlarged front view of the inside of the cabinet in the state shown in FIG. 97; FIG. It is a perspective view of a cover part. FIG. 3 is an exploded perspective view of the projector cover and the duct cover as seen from the left side; 3 is an exploded perspective view of the projector cover and the duct cover as seen from the right side; FIG. FIG. 4 is a cross-sectional view of the duct cover as seen from the rear; It is a sectional view of a cover part. It is a sectional view of a cover part. It is the perspective view which looked at the cover part from the right side. FIG. 4 is a perspective view showing a state in which the cover portion and the case are connected via a duct adapter; It is the perspective view which looked at the duct adapter from the left front. It is the perspective view which looked at the duct adapter from the right rear. Fig. 10 is a left side view of a cross section at the left side of the duct adapter; Fig. 10 is a right side view of a section at the right side of the duct adapter; It is a front view of a duct adapter. Fig. 3 is a left side view of the duct adapter cut near the center of the connecting portion; It is a perspective view of a case. FIG. 4 is a partially enlarged perspective view of the periphery of the right side of the duct adapter; FIG. 4 is a partially enlarged perspective view of the vicinity of the first right protrusion and the second right protrusion of the duct adapter; 141 is a partially enlarged front view of the right protrusion shown in FIG. 140; FIG. FIG. 4 is a perspective view of the duct cover as seen from the rear; FIG. 4 is a partially enlarged perspective view of a state in which the duct adapter is connected to the duct cover, viewed from a direction perpendicular to the front lower wall surface of the duct cover; 144 is a cross-sectional view of the duct cover and duct adapter in the state shown in FIG. 143; FIG. FIG. 4 is a partially enlarged perspective view of the periphery of the adapter engagement groove in the projector cover; FIG. 10 is a partially enlarged perspective view of the periphery of the first protrusion in the projector cover; FIG. 10 is a partially enlarged perspective view of the vicinity of second to fifth protrusions on the projector cover; FIG. 4 is a partially enlarged perspective view showing a state in which the duct adapter is connected to the projector cover; 149 is a cross-sectional view of the projector cover and duct adapter in the state shown in FIG. 148; FIG. FIG. 4 is a cross-sectional view of the duct cover with the punching attached. FIG. 4 is an exploded perspective view of the duct cover and punching as seen from the front; FIG. 4 is an exploded perspective view of the duct cover and punching as seen from the rear; FIG. 4 is an exploded perspective view of the duct cover and punching as seen from below; It is a front view for demonstrating the schematic structure inside a cabinet. 155 is an exploded perspective view showing a state in which the reel unit and the reel adapter are removed from the inside of the cabinet shown in FIG. 154; FIG. (a) is a schematic front view showing a state in which a front door is closed in a gaming machine according to a sixth embodiment. (b) is a schematic front view showing a state in which the front door is closed in the gaming machine according to the seventh embodiment. (c) is a schematic diagram of the inside of the cabinet of the gaming machine according to the sixth embodiment, viewed from the front. (d) is a schematic diagram of the inside of the cabinet of the gaming machine according to the seventh embodiment, viewed from the front. It is the perspective view which looked at the reel adapter from the right front. It is the perspective view which looked at the reel adapter from the right rear. It is a partially enlarged perspective view of the right rear portion of the reel adapter. FIG. 160 is a rear view of the right rear portion shown in FIG. 159; FIG. 160 is a cross-sectional view of the lower projecting portion of the right rear portion shown in FIG. 159; It is the perspective view which looked at the reel adapter from the downward direction. It is the partial expansion perspective view which looked at the reel adapter from the downward direction. It is a front view of a state in which the reel adapter is cut along a vertical plane in the left-right direction. It is the perspective view which looked at the reel adapter from upper direction. FIG. 4 is a partially enlarged perspective view of the periphery of the stepped recess in a state where the reel adapter is cut along a vertical plane in the front-rear direction; It is a perspective view of a reel unit. 168 is a perspective view showing a state in which the right unit is removed from the reel unit shown in FIG. 167; FIG. It is the perspective view which looked at the reel frame from the front. It is the perspective view which looked at the reel frame from the downward direction. It is the perspective view which looked at the reel frame from the back. It is a perspective view of a motor frame. FIG. 4 is a perspective view of a middle board; FIG. 4 is a perspective view showing a state in which the reel adapter is mounted on the middle board; 175 is a perspective view showing a state in which the reel adapter is slightly shifted with respect to the middle board from the state shown in FIG. 174; FIG. FIG. 175 is a partially enlarged perspective view of the periphery of the step recess in a state where the reel adapter and middle board shown in FIG. 174 are cut along a vertical plane in the front-rear direction; 175 is a side perspective view of the reel adapter and middle board shown in FIG. 174; FIG. 178 is a partially enlarged perspective view of the reel adapter and middle board shown in FIG. 177 cut along a vertical plane in the front-rear direction; FIG. FIG. 4 is a perspective view showing a state in which the reel unit is placed on the reel adapter; FIG. 180 is a perspective view showing a state in which the reel adapter is shifted downward with respect to the reel unit from the state shown in FIG. 179; FIG. 180 is a partially enlarged perspective view of the reel adapter and the reel frame in the state shown in FIG. 179 cut along a horizontal vertical plane; FIG. 4 is a cross-sectional view of the reel unit fastened to the reel adapter; FIG. 180 is a rear perspective view of the reel adapter and the reel frame in the state shown in FIG. 179; 184 is a partially enlarged perspective view of the reel adapter and reel frame shown in FIG. 183 cut along a vertical plane in the front-rear direction; FIG. FIG. 4 is a perspective view showing a state in which the reel unit is placed on the middle board; 186 is a partially enlarged perspective view of a state in which the reel unit and middle board shown in FIG. 185 are cut along a vertical plane in the front-rear direction; FIG. Fig. 10 is a front view of the waist panel; Fig. 3 is a front perspective view of the waist panel; Fig. 3 is a rear perspective view of the waist panel; Fig. 4 is an exploded perspective view of the waist panel from the front; Fig. 4 is an exploded perspective view of the waist panel as seen from the rear; FIG. 4 is a perspective view of the lower panel film viewed slightly from above; FIG. 4 is a cross-sectional view of a lower panel film; FIG. 194 is a schematic diagram of a cut surface of the lower panel film shown in FIG. 193; 193 is a perspective view showing a state in which a lower panel frame is arranged on the front side of the lower panel film shown in FIG. 192; FIG. FIG. 4 is a perspective view of the lower panel base as seen from the front and slightly above; It is the perspective view which looked at the lower panel base from the diagonally downward direction. FIG. 4 is a perspective view of the lower panel base as seen from the rear and slightly above; FIG. 4 is a partially enlarged perspective view of the lower panel base as seen from the rear and slightly below; It is the perspective view which looked at the back of a lower panel from slightly upper direction. FIG. 4 is a rear perspective view of the lower panel film; It is the partial expansion perspective view which looked at the back of a lower panel from the rear and slightly downward. It is the perspective view which looked at the lower panel frame from the front. FIG. 4 is a rear view of the lower panel frame; It is the perspective view which looked at the bottom of a lower panel from the front. It is the perspective view which looked at the bottom of a lower panel from the back. It is the perspective view which looked at the lower right panel and the lower left panel from the left rear. It is the perspective view which looked at the lower panel right and lower panel left from the right rear. FIG. 4 is a front perspective view of a state in which the lower panel frame is attached to the lower panel base; FIG. 4 is a rear perspective view of a state in which the lower panel frame is attached to the lower panel base; 211 is a rear perspective view of a state in which the back of the lower panel is locked to the lower panel base and the lower panel frame in the state shown in FIG. 210; FIG. 212 is a cross-sectional view of the lower panel base and the back of the lower panel in the state shown in FIG. 211; FIG. 212 is a rear perspective view of the lower panel base, the lower panel frame, and the lower panel bottom attached to the back of the lower panel in the state shown in FIG. 211; FIG. 214 is a cross-sectional view of the lower panel base, the lower panel back, and the lower panel bottom in the state shown in FIG. 213; FIG. It is the perspective view which looked at the upper door mechanism from the front. It is the perspective view which looked at the upper door mechanism from the back. FIG. 4 is a front perspective view of a state in which the central screen unit and the upper screen unit are removed from the upper door mechanism; FIG. 4 is a rear perspective view of a state in which the central screen unit and the upper screen unit are removed from the upper door mechanism; It is the perspective view which looked at the shielding wall member from the front. It is a partially enlarged perspective view of the periphery of the left side of the shielding wall member. It is the perspective view which looked at the shielding wall member from the back. It is the perspective view which looked at the upper door mechanism from the back. 223 is a perspective view showing a state in which the shielding wall member and the speaker harness protector are removed from the upper door mechanism shown in FIG. 222; FIG. (a) is a schematic diagram showing a state in which light is projected from a projector in this embodiment, as viewed from above. (b) is a schematic diagram showing a state in which light is projected from a projector in another embodiment, viewed from above. FIG. 4 is a perspective view showing a state in which the front panel of the decorative unit is removed from the upper door mechanism; FIG. 4 is a perspective view showing a state in which the speaker harness protector is removed from the upper door mechanism; FIG. 4 is an exploded perspective view of the upper screen unit; FIG. 4 is an exploded perspective view of the upper screen unit; FIG. 4 is a cross-sectional view of the upper screen unit; FIG. 4 is a cross-sectional view of the upper screen unit; FIG. 4 is a cross-sectional view of the upper screen unit; FIG. 4 is a partially enlarged perspective view of the upper door mechanism as seen from the rear and below; FIG. 4 is a perspective view showing a state in which the front panel and speaker grille of the decorative unit are removed from the upper door mechanism; FIG. 4 is a perspective view of a topside light emitting unit; FIG. 4 is a perspective view showing a state in which the first front panel lens, the second front panel lens, and the speaker horn are removed from the top side light emitting unit; FIG. 3 is a top perspective view of the top side substrate, the top side substrate cover, and the top side speaker illumination lens; FIG. 4 is a bottom perspective view of the top side substrate, top side substrate cover, and top side speaker illumination lens; FIG. 10 is a top view showing an installation mode of the lower LEDs in a state where the top side speaker illumination lens is installed on the top side substrate cover; FIG. 10 is a top view showing an installation mode of lower LEDs in a state where the top side speaker illumination lens is removed from the top side substrate cover; FIG. 4 is a cross-sectional view of the top side speaker illumination lens; It is a top view which shows the positional relationship of a lower side LED and a speaker horn. It is the perspective view which looked at the speaker horn from the front. It is the perspective view which looked at the speaker horn from the back. It is a perspective view showing the peripheral structure of the speaker. It is a front view which shows the peripheral structure of a speaker. 245 is a perspective view showing a state in which the speaker horn, the speaker seal, the speaker holder, the speaker, and the speaker harness protector are removed from the state shown in FIG. 244; FIG. 3 is a perspective view showing a state in which the speaker horn, speaker seal, speaker holder, and speaker are assembled; FIG. 248 is a perspective view showing a state in which the speaker horn is removed from the state shown in FIG. 247; FIG. 4 is a front view of the speaker seal, speaker holder, and speaker; FIG. 4 is a perspective view of a speaker seal; FIG. FIG. 4 is a perspective view of the central screen sheet and the rear light-transmitting plate viewed from the rear and above; FIG. 4 is a cross-sectional view of a central screen sheet and a rear translucent plate; (a) is a schematic diagram showing from above how light projected from a projector is incident on a rear translucent plate in the present embodiment. (b) is a schematic diagram showing from above how light projected from a projector is incident on a rear translucent plate in another embodiment. FIG. 4 is a cross-sectional view of a central screen sheet and a rear translucent plate; It is the perspective view which looked at the rear side translucent plate from the back and the downward direction. It is the partial expansion perspective view which looked at the rear side translucent plate from the back and the downward direction. It is the perspective view which looked at the rear side translucent plate from the front and the downward direction. It is the partial expansion perspective view which looked at the rear side translucent plate from the front and the downward direction. It is a partial expansion perspective view of the periphery of a 1st reinforcement projection. FIG. 4 is a partially enlarged perspective view showing a state in which the first reinforcing projections and the second reinforcing projections are in contact with the central screen sheet; It is a front view of an upper door mechanism. Fig. 10 is a front perspective view of a state in which the main screen unit is removed from the upper door mechanism; It is a front view of a decoration unit. 4 is an exploded perspective view of the decoration unit; FIG. 4 is an exploded perspective view of the decoration unit; FIG. FIG. 2 is a cross-sectional view of a decorative screen unit; It is a front view of a decorative frame. FIG. 4 is a side view showing how light projected from the projector device is incident on the decorative screen sheet; 4 is a cross-sectional view of the decoration unit; FIG. FIG. 4 is a front view showing a state in which the screen unit and the navigation lamp unit are assembled; It is the perspective view which looked at the decoration frame from the back. It is a front view of a front side translucent plate. It is the perspective view which looked at the navigation lamp cover from the front. 4 is a front view of the main screen sheet; FIG. FIG. 4 is a rear view showing a state in which the front translucent plate is removed from the state in which the screen unit and the navigation lamp cover are assembled; Fig. 2 is a rear perspective view of the cover member, the lens member, and the decorative screen sheet; Fig. 3 is a front perspective view of the cover member, the lens member, and the decorative screen sheet; It is the perspective view which looked at the upper door mechanism from back and upper direction. It is the perspective view which looked at the shielding wall member from the front. It is the perspective view which looked at the shielding wall member from back and upper direction. 279 is a perspective view showing a state in which the shielding wall member is removed from the upper door mechanism shown in FIG. 278; FIG. It is the perspective view which looked at the front panel from the back. It is the perspective view which looked at the navigation lamp unit from the front. Fig. 2 is a front perspective view of a state in which a navigation lamp cover and a navigation lamp lens are removed from the navigation lamp unit; 285 is a front perspective view showing a state in which the navigation lamp board cover is removed from the state shown in FIG. 284; FIG. 286 is a front perspective view of the state shown in FIG. 285 with the navigation lamp LED board removed; FIG. 286 is a rear perspective view of the state shown in FIG. 285 with the navigation lamp LED board removed; FIG. FIG. 4 is a front perspective view of the decoration unit board cover; Fig. 3 is a front perspective view of a navigation lamp LED board and a navigation lamp board cover; Fig. 2 is a front perspective view of a navigation lamp LED board, a navigation lamp board cover, and five decoration units; 4 is a cross-sectional view of a navigation lamp LED board, a navigation lamp board cover, and a decoration unit; FIG. 3 is a rear perspective view of the navigation lamp LED board, the navigation lamp board cover, and the navigation lamp lens. FIG. 293 is an exploded perspective view showing the navigation lamp LED board, the navigation lamp board cover, and the navigation lamp lens shown in FIG. 292; FIG. Fig. 3 is an exploded perspective view of the navigation lamp substrate cover and the navigation lamp lens as viewed from the front and below; FIG. 4 is a partially enlarged perspective view of the navigation lamp board cover as seen from the rear and below; 3 is a cross-sectional view of a navigation lamp LED board, a navigation lamp board cover, and a navigation lamp lens; FIG. FIG. 4 is a perspective view showing a state in which a light shielding sheet is installed on the navigation lamp board cover; 298 is a perspective view showing a state in which the light shielding sheet is removed from the state shown in FIG. 297; FIG. It is the perspective view which looked at the state which removed the shielding wall member from the upper door mechanism from the back and above. It is a perspective view of an upper door mechanism. FIG. 4 is a perspective view showing a state in which the bonus lamp unit is removed from the upper door mechanism; 302 is a perspective view showing a state in which the front panel and the rear duct are removed from the state shown in FIG. 301; FIG. FIG. 4 is a perspective view of a bonus lamp unit; 4 is a perspective view showing a state in which the first bonus lamp lens and the second bonus lamp lens are removed from the bonus lamp unit; FIG. FIG. 4 is a perspective view of a bonus lamp board cover, a bonus lamp board, and a front duct; 4 is an exploded perspective view of the front duct; FIG. It is a bottom view of a front side duct base. FIG. 4 is a partially enlarged perspective view of the front duct base as seen from above; FIG. 4 is a partially enlarged perspective view of the front duct base as seen from below; FIG. 4 is a perspective view of the front duct cover as seen from the rear and below; FIG. 4 is a perspective view of the front duct as seen from the rear and below; It is a front view which expands and shows a front panel partially. FIG. 4 is a perspective view of a rear duct base; FIG. 4 is a perspective view of the rear duct cover as seen from the front and below; FIG. 4 is a rear perspective view of the rear duct and duct seal; FIG. 4 is a front perspective view of a state in which a duct seal is attached to a rear duct; It is the perspective view which looked at the upper door mechanism slightly from the downward direction. Fig. 10 is a cross-sectional view of the bonus lamp unit, front panel, rear duct and duct seal; It is a front view of a front side translucent plate. FIG. 4 is a schematic diagram for explaining how the decoration unit is attached; FIG. 4 is a schematic diagram for explaining an arrangement mode of a front duct base; It is a perspective view of an upper door mechanism. It is a front view of a right decoration unit. FIG. 10 is a perspective view showing the right light emitting unit removed from the right decoration unit and the right light emitting unit disassembled; It is the perspective view which looked at the right side 1st lens from the front. It is the perspective view which looked at the right side 1st lens from the downward direction and the left. It is a partial expansion perspective view of the 3rd protrusion part vicinity. It is a partial expansion perspective view of the 3rd protrusion part vicinity. It is a partial expansion perspective view of the vicinity of the first protrusion and the second protrusion. It is a partial expansion perspective view of the vicinity of the first protrusion and the second protrusion. FIG. 4 is a partially enlarged perspective view of the front surface of the first right lens; It is the perspective view which looked at the right side 1st lens from back. FIG. 4 is a cross-sectional view of the right first lens as seen from the rear; FIG. 3 is a rear perspective view of the right first lens, the first side illumination LED, and the second side illumination LED; 335 is a partially enlarged perspective view of the right first lens, the first side illumination LED, and the second side illumination LED shown in FIG. 334; FIG. FIG. 335 is a cross-sectional view of the right first lens, the first side-illumination LED, and the second side-illumination LED shown in FIG. 334; FIG. 335 is a cross-sectional view of the right first lens, the first side-illumination LED, and the second side-illumination LED shown in FIG. 334; It is the perspective view which looked at the right side 2nd lens from the downward direction and the right. It is the perspective view which looked at the right side 2nd lens from the downward direction and the left. It is the perspective view which looked at the right side 2nd lens from the back. It is the partial expansion perspective view which looked at the right side 2nd lens from the back. FIG. 4 is a cross-sectional view of the right light emitting unit; It is the perspective view which looked at the right side 3rd lens from the front. It is the perspective view which looked at the right side 3rd lens from back. It is a perspective view which shows the external appearance of an upper door mechanism typically. FIG. 4 is an exploded perspective view of an upper door mechanism and a display unit; 4 is an exploded front view of the screen unit; FIG. (a) is a front view of a screen unit. (b) is a plan view of the left screen portion, the right screen portion, and the center screen portion of the screen unit. (c) is a plan view of the left screen portion, the right screen portion, and the center screen portion of the screen unit. FIG. 4 is a side view showing the main configuration of the screen unit; (a) is a side view showing the main configuration of the screen unit. (b) is a front view showing the main configuration of the screen unit. (a) is a figure which shows an example of the image displayed on a screen unit. (b) is a diagram showing an example of an image displayed on the screen unit. (a) is a front view schematically showing an upper door mechanism and a display unit. (b) is a side view of the upper door mechanism and display unit shown in (a). 352(a) is an exploded perspective view of the upper door mechanism and the display unit; FIG. (a) is an exploded perspective view of the rotating screen unit as seen from the rear. (b) is an exploded perspective view of the rotating screen portion as seen from the front. It is a schematic diagram for demonstrating the arrangement|positioning state of a rotating screen part. (a) is a figure which shows an example of the image displayed on a flat screen part. (b) is a diagram showing an example of an image displayed on the curved screen section. (a) is a schematic diagram for explaining an arrangement state of a rotating screen unit. (b) is a diagram showing an example of an effect performed in the state shown in (a). FIG. 4 is an exploded perspective view of an upper door mechanism and a display unit; (a) is a front view schematically showing an upper door mechanism and a display unit. (b) is a side view of the upper door mechanism and display unit shown in (a). (a) is the perspective view which looked at the rear screen part from the front. (b) is a perspective view of the rear screen portion as seen from the rear. (a) is a front view schematically showing an upper door mechanism and a display unit. (b) is a side view of the upper door mechanism and display unit shown in (a). 359(a) is a diagram showing an example of an effect performed in the state shown in FIG. 359. FIG. 361(b) is a diagram showing an example of an effect performed in the state shown in FIG. 361. FIG. (a) is a front view schematically showing an upper door mechanism and a display unit. (b) is a side view of the upper door mechanism and display unit shown in (a). It is a figure which shows an example of the production|presentation using a half mirror. (a) is a front view schematically showing an upper door mechanism and a display unit. (b) is a side view of the upper door mechanism and display unit shown in (a). (a) is a front view schematically showing an upper door mechanism and a display unit. (b) is a side view of the upper door mechanism and display unit shown in (a). (a) is a front view schematically showing an upper door mechanism and a display unit. (b) is a side view of the upper door mechanism and display unit shown in (a). It is a figure which shows an example of the production|presentation using an illumination unit. It is a figure which shows an example of the production|presentation using an illumination unit. (a) is a front view schematically showing an upper door mechanism and a display unit. (b) is a side view of the upper door mechanism and display unit shown in (a). It is a figure which shows an example of the production|presentation using an illumination unit. (a) is a front view schematically showing an upper door mechanism and a display unit. (b) is a side view of the upper door mechanism and display unit shown in (a). It is a figure which shows an example of the production|presentation using an illumination unit. (a) is a front view schematically showing an upper door mechanism and a display unit. (b) is a side view of the upper door mechanism and display unit shown in (a). It is a figure which shows an example of the production|presentation using an illumination unit. (a) is a front view schematically showing an upper door mechanism and a display unit. (b) is a side view of the upper door mechanism and display unit shown in (a). It is a figure which shows an example of the production|presentation using an illumination unit.

[First embodiment]
A first embodiment of the present invention will be described below with reference to the drawings.
As shown in FIGS. 1 to 5, gaming machine 1 is a so-called pachi-slot machine. The gaming machine 1 is capable of playing games using game media such as coins, medals, game balls, tokens, etc., as well as cards storing information on game values, which are given or given to players. , and the description below assumes that medals are used.

In the following description, the side (direction) facing the player from the gaming machine 1 is referred to as the front side (front direction) of the gaming machine 1, and the opposite side to the front side is referred to as the rear side (rear direction, depth direction). The right side and left side as seen from the player are referred to as the right side (right direction) and the left side (left direction) of the gaming machine 1, respectively. A direction including the front side and the rear side is referred to as a front-rear direction or a thickness direction, and a direction including the right side and the left side is referred to as a left-right direction or a width direction. A direction perpendicular to the front-rear direction (thickness direction) and the left-right direction (width direction) is referred to as the vertical direction or the height direction.

As shown in FIGS. 1 and 2, the appearance of the gaming machine 1 is composed of a rectangular box-shaped housing 2 . The housing 2 includes a metal cabinet G having a rectangular opening on the front side as a game machine main body, an upper door mechanism UD arranged in the upper front part of the cabinet G, and a lower door mechanism UD arranged in the lower front part of the cabinet G. and a door mechanism DD.

In addition, two openings G41 are formed in the top wall G4 of the cabinet G so as to penetrate vertically at a predetermined interval in the horizontal direction. A wooden plate member G42 is attached to the top wall G4 so as to block the two openings G41.

As shown in FIG. 3, the upper door mechanism UD and the lower door mechanism DD are formed so as to correspond to the shape and size of the opening of the cabinet G. As shown in FIG. The upper door mechanism UD and the lower door mechanism DD are provided so as to be able to close the upper and lower portions of the opening in the cabinet G. As shown in FIG. The upper door mechanism UD has an upper display window UD1 in the center. A transparent panel UD11 that transmits light is provided in the upper display window UD1.

The lower door mechanism DD is provided with a main display window DD4 formed as a rectangular opening substantially at the center of the upper portion. A reel unit RU attached from the inside of the cabinet G is mounted on the back side of the main display window DD4. Furthermore, a main control board MS is attached to the rear surface of the reel unit RU.

The reel unit RU is mainly composed of three reels RL (left reel), RC (middle reel), and RR (right reel) each having a plurality of types of patterns drawn on its outer peripheral surface. These reels RL, RC, and RR are arranged in parallel (in a horizontal row) so that they can rotate in the vertical direction at a constant speed. As for the reels RL, RC, RR, the operation of each reel RL, RC, RR and the symbols drawn on each reel RL, RC, RR can be visually recognized through the main display window DD4.

A transparent panel DD41 made of a rectangular acrylic plate or the like is attached and fixed to the surface of the main display window DD4 so that a player or the like cannot touch the reel unit RU. Below the main display window DD4, substantially horizontal first, second and third pedestals DD2a, DD2b and DD2c are formed. A first pedestal DD2a located on the right side of the main display window DD4 is provided with a medal slot DD5 for inserting medals. The medal slot DD5 is an opening into which the player inserts medals. The medals inserted from the medal insertion slot DD5 are credited or bet on the game.

A maximum BET button DD8 (also referred to as a MAXBET button) as a valid line setting means for betting credited medals is provided on the second pedestal portion DD2b located on the left side of the main display window DD4. When the maximum BET button DD8 is pressed, "3" is selected as the number of inserted medals.

A liquid crystal display device DD20 is provided on the third pedestal portion DD2c located on the front side of the main display window DD4. The liquid crystal display device DD20 is a so-called touch panel in which a touch sensor panel as a touch-type position input device is arranged on the panel surface of a liquid crystal display panel (liquid crystal panel). The touch sensor panel may be, for example, a capacitive type that detects contact with a part of the human body (such as a fingertip) or an electrostatic pen and outputs a detection signal, or It may be of a type that detects contact with a hard substance such as a pen tip and outputs a detection signal, or of another type or structure (in-cell structure, etc.).

The liquid crystal display device DD20 functions as an SUI (smart user interface), and on its display screen, game information such as the number of games played is displayed as the game progresses. Alternatively, a message, an input key, or the like for requesting input is displayed.

In the liquid crystal display device DD20, it is also possible to display, on the display screen thereof, contents (effect information) corresponding to game-related effects, for example, as the game progresses. Further, as the liquid crystal display device DD20, for example, an attachment having a function as a production accessory, or a dedicated attachment such as a jog dial or a push button may be attached. Also, the liquid crystal display device DD20 can be omitted by allocating its functions to a display unit A or the like, which will be described later.

On the front side of the maximum bet button DD8, there is provided a start lever DD6 for rotating the reels RL, RC, and RR by the player's operation and for starting the variable display of symbols in the main display window DD4. The start lever DD6 is attached so as to be tiltable within a predetermined angle range.

On the right side of the start lever DD6 and on the front side of the liquid crystal display device DD20, there are three stop buttons DD7L for stopping the rotation of the three reels RL, RC, and RR by the player's pressing operation (stopping operation). , DD7C and DD7R are provided.

A C/P button DD13 is provided on the left side of the maximum BET button DD8. The C/P button DD13 is for switching the credit/payout of the medals the player has won in the game by pressing the button. When payout is selected by switching the C/P button DD13 (non-credit state), medals are dispensed from a medal payout opening DD14 (cancellation chute) provided in the coin guard plate portion on the lower side of the lower door mechanism DD. The paid-out medals are accumulated in the medal receiving part DD15.

Below the start lever DD6 and the stop buttons DD7L, DD7C, and DD7R, a waist panel DD18 (waist light guide plate) is arranged. The waist panel DD18 is configured as a decorative panel using an acrylic plate or the like. The waist panel DD18 is printed with a name representing the model of the game machine 1 and various patterns.

A speaker DD25L and a speaker DD25R are provided on the left and right sides of the medal payout port DD14, respectively. The speakers DD25L and DD25R notify the player of various information about the game by voice, music, and other sounds. A first sub-display device DD19L and a second sub-display device DD19R are arranged on the left and right sides of the main display window DD4, respectively. These sub-display devices DD19L and DD19R display, for example, the number of medals to be paid out and the number of credited remaining medals when winning is established. Normally, the maximum number of medals to be credited to the gaming machine 1 is 50, so the number of credits of 50 or less is displayed. When the maximum number of medals of 50 has been credited, the inserted medals are directly paid out from the medal payout opening DD14. Also, the sub-display devices DD19L and DD19R may have a touch panel on the front surface.

As shown in FIG. 4, the interior of the cabinet G is partitioned into an upper space and a lower space by an intermediate support plate G1. That is, the intermediate support plate G1 functions as a partition plate that divides the interior of the cabinet G into an upper space and a lower space. The upper space is a space on the rear side of the upper door mechanism UD inside the cabinet G, and accommodates the display unit A and the like. The lower space is a space behind the lower door mechanism DD in the cabinet G, and includes a reel unit RU, a main control board MS that controls the operation of the entire game machine 1, and a sub-control device SS (see FIG. 11). etc. are accommodated. The main control board MS constitutes a circuit (main control circuit) that controls the main flow of the game in the gaming machine 1, such as determining the internal winning combination, rotating and stopping the reels RL, RC, and RR, and determining whether or not there is a prize. do. The sub-control device SS constitutes a circuit (sub-control circuit) that controls execution of effects such as video display.

(Display unit A)
As shown in FIG. 5, the display unit A is replaceably mounted on an intermediate support plate G1 inside the cabinet G. As shown in FIG. The display unit A is a so-called projection mapping device having an illumination unit B that emits illumination light for image display and a screen device C that makes an image appear by being illuminated with the illumination light from the illumination unit B.

Here, the projection mapping device is for projecting an image onto the surface of a three-dimensional object such as a structure or a natural object. etc.), and by projecting an image according to the presentation information, which is generated based on the shape, to enable an advanced and powerful presentation.

The display unit A has a housing A1 with an opening formed in front. The housing A1 is composed of a projector cover B1 forming an upper portion of the irradiation unit B and a screen housing C10 of the screen device C. As shown in FIG. The screen housing C10 has a box-like shape having a bottom plate C1, a right side plate C2, a left side plate C3, and a back plate C4. The projector cover B1 is replaceably attached to the upper surface of the screen housing C10.

(Display unit A: irradiation unit B)
As shown in FIG. 6, the irradiation unit B includes a projector device B2 that emits irradiation light forward, and a screen device that is arranged in front of the projector device B2 and arranged diagonally below and behind the irradiation light from the projector device B2. It has a mirror mechanism B3 that reflects light in the direction of C, and a projector cover B1 that accommodates the projector device B2 and the mirror mechanism B3.

(Display unit A: irradiation unit B: projector device B2)
The projector device B2 is mounted on the projector cover B1 while being covered by a case B22, and arranged in the rear part of the cabinet G. As shown in FIG. The projector device B2 is attached to the projector cover B1 via a flat upper pedestal B220 and a lower pedestal B221 that are horizontally arranged. The entire upper surface of the case B22 is open. Accordingly, the lens unit B21 and the optical mechanism B24 (see FIG. 12) accommodated in the case B22 are positioned on the lower surface of the lower pedestal B221. The lens unit B21 is arranged so that the illumination light emitted from the plurality of LED light sources of the optical mechanism B24 and reflected by a DMD (Digital Micromirror Device) is emitted toward the forward mirror mechanism B3 via a lens or the like. there is Details of the projector device B2 will be described later with reference to FIGS. 11 to 17. FIG.

(Display unit A: irradiation unit B: mirror mechanism B3)
As shown in FIG. 6, a mirror mechanism B3 is arranged in front of the projector device B2 (in the emission direction of the irradiation light). As shown in FIG. 7, the mirror mechanism B3 has a mirror holder B31, an optical mirror B32 housed in the mirror holder B31, and mirror stoppers B33 and B34 for fixing both ends of the optical mirror B32 to the mirror holder B31. is doing. As also shown in FIG. 8, the mirror holder B31 has a plate-like shape with a rectangular front surface. An angle adjustment hole B311 is formed in each corner of the mirror holder B31, and a concave portion B312 is formed on the front surface around the angle adjustment hole B311. Mounting holes B314 and B314 are vertically symmetrically formed between the angle adjustment holes B311 and B311 in the vertical direction.

On the other hand, a mirror holder B313 is formed on the rear surface of the mirror holder B31. The mirror holding portion B313 is formed in the central portion and is formed in a size that does not overlap with the angle adjusting hole B311 and the mounting hole B314. Mirror stoppers B33 and B34 are provided on the left and right sides of the mirror holding portion B313, respectively. The mirror stoppers B33 and B34 have angle adjustment holes B331 and B341 and mounting holes B334 and B344, respectively. The angle adjusting holes B331 and B341 and the mounting holes B334 and B344 in the mirror stoppers B33 and B34 are arranged so as to correspond to the angle adjusting holes B311 and B311 and the mounting holes B314 and B314 in the mirror holder B31.

The mirror stoppers B33 and B34 are formed so as to partially overlap the mirror holder B313. As a result, the mirror stoppers B33 and B34 come into contact with both lateral sides of the optical mirror B32 fitted in the mirror holder B313, and are screwed to the mirror holder B31 through the mounting holes B314, B334 and B344. , the optical mirror B32 is held by the mirror holder B31.

As shown in FIG. 9, the mirror mechanism B3 configured as described above is provided on the inner surface of the reflector holding portion B11 of the projector cover B1. The reflector holding portion B11 is formed at the center of the front surface of the projector cover B1, and is arranged so as to be exposed to the front side when the upper door mechanism UD is opened. The reflector holding portion B11 has an angle adjustment hole B111. The angle adjustment hole B111 is formed at a position corresponding to the angle adjustment hole B311 of the mirror mechanism B3.

A screw (not shown) is inserted through the angle adjustment hole B111 of the reflector holder B11 from the front side, and this screw penetrates the angle adjustment hole B311 of the mirror holder B31. The angle adjustment holes B331 and B341 of the mirror stoppers B33 and B34 are formed as screw holes into which screws can be screwed. It is screwed into the angle adjusting holes B331 and B341.

Then, when the screw is rotated in a direction in which the screw engagement with the angle adjustment holes B331 and B341 is loosened, the distance between the reflector holding portion B11 and the mirror stoppers B33 and B34 is increased. On the other hand, when the screw is rotated in a direction to tighten the screw engagement with the angle adjustment holes B331 and B341, the distance between the reflector holding portion B11 and the mirror stoppers B33 and B34 is reduced.

As described above, the mirror holder B31 and the mirror stoppers B33 and B34 are screwed together via the mounting holes B314, B334 and B344. B32 is sandwiched. In this way, the mirror holder B31, the optical mirror B32, and the mirror stoppers B33 and B34 are integrated as the mirror mechanism B3, and the rotation of the screw changes the distance between the reflector holder B11 and the mirror stoppers B33 and B34. Thereby, the distance between the reflector holding portion B11 and the mirror mechanism B3 can be increased or decreased. Since the angle adjustment holes B311, 331, and B341 are arranged in four directions corresponding to the corner portions of the mirror mechanism B3, the reflector holding portion B11 and the mirror mechanism are arranged at the arrangement positions of the angle adjustment holes B311, 331, and B341. By increasing or decreasing the distance to B3, it is possible to finely adjust the reflection angle of the optical mirror B32 with respect to the traveling direction of the irradiation light emitted from the projector device B2.

A spring (not shown) is provided between the reflector holder B11 and the mirror holder B31. The rear end surface of the spring contacts the concave portion B312 of the mirror holder B31, and the front end surface of the spring contacts the inner wall surface (rear wall surface) of the reflector holding portion B11. is sandwiched between A screw inserted through the angle adjustment hole B111 of the reflector holding portion B11 passes through the spring. As a result, even if the distance between the reflector holding portion B11 and the mirror mechanism B3 increases as the screw rotates, the screw head abuts the angle adjustment hole B111 of the reflector holding portion B11 due to the biasing force of the spring. It is possible to prevent the screw head from protruding from the angle adjustment hole B111 and the positional relationship between the reflector holding portion B11 and the screw from collapsing.

(Display unit A: irradiation unit B: projector cover B1)
As shown in FIG. 10, the projector device B2 and the mirror mechanism B3 are housed in the projector cover B1. The lower surface B2a of the projector device B2 has, at its front portion, an inclined surface B2a1 that inclines upward from the rear to the front. As shown in FIG. 8, the projector cover B1 includes an upper wall portion B12 arranged horizontally, a reflector holding portion B11 arranged in front of the upper wall portion B12, and arranged symmetrically in the left-right direction of the upper wall portion B12. and the side wall portions B13, B13. The front portion of the upper wall portion B12 protrudes forward from the cabinet G (see FIG. 5). A reflector holding portion B11 is formed in the central portion of the front portion of the upper wall portion B12 so as to protrude forward. there is

(Display unit A: screen device C)
The irradiation unit B configured as described above is connected to the upper surface of the screen device C by screwing. For example, screws are screwed into the upper surfaces of the right side plate C2 and the left side plate C3 of the screen device C via screw holes formed in the projector cover B1 (see FIG. 5). As a result, the display unit A can unitize the irradiation unit B and the screen device C and handle them integrally.

Inside the screen housing C10, a plurality of screen mechanisms that make an image appear by irradiating the irradiation light from the irradiation unit B are provided so that the irradiation target can be switched. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 10, a fixed screen mechanism D, a front screen mechanism E1, and a reel screen mechanism F1 are provided as a plurality of screen mechanisms. The fixed screen mechanism D, the front screen mechanism E1, and the reel screen mechanism F1 are each formed by applying a screen paint to a base material, and have a projection surface capable of displaying an image.

The projection planes of the fixed screen mechanism D, the front screen mechanism E1, and the reel screen mechanism F1 have different shapes from each other in order to diversify image expression. Specifically, the projection surfaces of the fixed screen mechanism D and the front screen mechanism E1 are flat, whereas the projection surface of the reel screen mechanism F1 has an arc shape in side view. The front screen mechanism E1 and the reel screen mechanism F1 are movable screens whose positions are displaced relative to the projector device B2 and the mirror mechanism B3. (not shown).

(Display Unit A: Irradiation Unit B: Electrical and Optical Configuration of Projector Device B2)
As shown in FIG. 11, the projector device B2 includes, as electrical components, a projector control board B23, an optical mechanism B24, and a relay board CK. The above-described sub control device SS is connected to the projector device B2 via the relay board CK. The sub-control device SS controls the projector control board B23 according to the performance operation of the screen and the character object, and projects the irradiation light onto the screen and the character object via the optical mechanism B24, thereby producing a visual effect. Display video. In the process of assembling the display unit A and the like, an adjustment PC (personal computer) 1000 is connected to the relay board CK of the projector device B2. This adjustment PC (personal computer) 1000 is used to adjust the position of the irradiation light projected by the projector device B2 and to perform focus initial setting. In this embodiment, the adjustment PC 1000 is used as the adjustment device for the projector device B2. , or a dedicated terminal device.

The projector control board B23 includes a control LSI 230 , an EEPROM (registered trademark) 231 , a DLP (registered trademark) control circuit 232 and an LED driver 233 . The optical mechanism B24 includes, as components arranged around the lens unit B21, an LED light source emitting light of each color of R (red), G (green), and B (blue), a DMD, and the projection lens 210 of the lens unit B21. A focus mechanism or the like for performing focus adjustment is provided (not shown).

The control LSI 230 controls the DLP control circuit 232 to project the irradiation light based on the command from the sub-controller SS. The control LSI 230 controls the focus mechanism to move the projection lens 210 in the optical axis direction based on a command from the sub-controller SS, thereby performing focus adjustment when projecting the irradiation light. The EEPROM 231 stores a control program by the control LSI 230 and data relating to setting and adjustment of the projector apparatus B2.

The DLP system of the projector device B2 is mainly composed of the DLP control circuit 232, the LED driver 233, and the LED light source and DMD of the optical mechanism B24.

Under the control of the DLP control circuit 232, the light reflected by the DMD in a predetermined direction proceeds to the lens unit B21, passes through the projection lens 210, enters the mirror mechanism B3, and is finally reflected by the mirror mechanism B3. is guided to the projection target by As a result, the illumination light is projected onto the screen and the character object to be projected, and an image corresponding to the presentation is formed.

In this embodiment, the projector device B2 is configured as a so-called DLP projector. Further, the projector device B2 increases the projection distance to the projection target by reflecting the irradiation light by the mirror mechanism B3, and shortens the projection distance of the irradiation light as much as possible by setting the contrast ratio to 1000:1, for example. ing. As a result, the display unit A including the projector device B2 is configured to be less expensive and smaller, and can be easily installed in the limited space in the cabinet G of the game machine 1. FIG.

(Display Unit A: Irradiation Unit B: Mechanical Configuration of Projector Device B2)
As shown in FIG. 12, the projector device B2 has a case B22, a lens unit cover B222, an under cover B223, an upper pedestal B220, and a lower pedestal B221 as exterior components. A lens unit cover B222 is attached to the front opening B22k of the case B22. An undercover B223 is arranged to cover the lower surface of the case B22. The undercover B223 is supported by the lower pedestal B221 via a stay B223a, and is also fixed to a suitable portion of the lower surface of the case B22. The projector device B2 is attached to the lower surface of the upper wall portion B12 (see FIG. 8) of the projector cover B1 via the upper pedestal B220 and the lower pedestal B221. In this embodiment, an upper pedestal B220 is fixed to the lower surface of the upper wall portion B12, and a lower pedestal B221 is attached to the upper end so as to cover the upper opening of the case B22. A lower pedestal B221 is connected. A procedure for adjusting the attachment of the projector device B2 will be described later.

In addition, the projector apparatus B2 includes, as internal components, a lens unit B21, an LED board (not shown) mounted with an LED light source, a DMD board (not shown) mounted with a DMD, and a plurality of heat sinks 243R, 243G, and 243B. , 243D, intake fans 244A and 244B, an exhaust fan 245, and a projector control board B23. The case B22 accommodates the lens unit B21 while covering the projection lens 210 of the lens unit B21 with a lens unit cover B222, and also includes an LED board, a DMD board, a plurality of heat sinks 243R, 243G, 243B, and 243D, and an intake fan. 244A, 244B and an exhaust fan 245 are accommodated. The projector control board B23 is fixed to the bottom surface of the case B22.

Such a projector device B2 is controlled by the sub-controller SS so that the sub-controller SS transmits image data relating to images such as effects, and projects the image onto a screen or a character object. On the other hand, the sub-control device SS controls the screen drive mechanisms E2 and F2 to move the screen mechanisms E1 and F1 according to the contents of the presentation.

Here, the sub-control device SS controls the projector device B2 according to the movement of the screen mechanisms E1 and F1 due to the effect, and the image is projected onto the projection surfaces of the moved screen mechanisms E1 and F1 and the projection surface of the fixed screen mechanism D. Adjust the focus so that the image is projected clearly.

The heat sinks 243R, 243G, 243B partially contact the back surface of the LED substrate. A heat sink 243D partially contacts the backside of the DMD substrate. In this embodiment, the heat sinks 243R, 243G, 243B, and 243D have relatively large fin external sizes, while the heat sinks 243B and 243D are relatively small. These heat sinks 243R, 243G, 243B, and 243D dissipate the heat generated in each of the LED substrate and the DMD substrate into the air, thereby effectively preventing the temperature of the optical elements and the substrate from increasing to the extent that the optical characteristics are significantly changed. Dissipates heat well. The heat sinks 243R, 243G, 243B, and 243D, which are heat dissipating members, are made of a highly heat-conductive aluminum material to enhance the heat dissipating effect, and have a plurality of heat dissipating fins to increase the contact area with the air.

The intake fan 244A is arranged so as to be close to the rear surface of the right front portion of the case B22, and is close to the heat sink 243R. The intake fan 244B is arranged close to the rear surface of the left side of the case B22 and is close to the heat sink 243D. The exhaust fan 245 is arranged close to the back surface of the rear part of the case B22 and is close to the heat sink 243G.

An intake port B22A is provided in the right front portion of the case B22 where the intake fan 244A is adjacent, and an exhaust port B22E is provided in the right rear portion of the case B22 where the heat sink 243R is adjacent to the intake port B22A. It is An intake port B22B is provided in a portion of the left side of the case B22 near the intake fan 244B, and the other portion of the left side of the case B22 is provided in the case B22 so as to be aligned with the intake port B22B. An intake port B22C is provided so that air reaches the three heat sinks 243G, 243B, and 243D through the empty space. An exhaust port B22D is provided in the rear portion of the case B22 where the exhaust fan 245 is close.

That is, in the case B22 of the projector device B2, after the air is forcibly taken in by the intake fan 244A through the intake port B22A, a flow of air is formed that takes heat from the heat sink 243R and is exhausted from the exhaust port B22E. . Further, in the case B22, after forcibly sucking air from the air intake port B22B by the air intake fan 244B, heat is forcibly taken from the heat sinks 243D, 243B, and 243G by the air exhaust fan 245 from the air exhaust port B22D. A flow of air is formed which is exhausted to the Further, in the case B22, after being sucked from the intake port B22C, a flow of air is formed that is forcibly exhausted from the exhaust port B22D by the exhaust fan 245 while taking heat mainly from the heat sinks 243G and 243B. .

The projector control board B23 is attached to the lower surface of the case B22 while being covered with an undercover B223. A control LSI 230, an EEPROM 231, a DLP control circuit 232, an LED driver 233, and the like are mounted on the projector control board B23. The projector control board B23 is electrically connected to the LED board and DMD board arranged in the case B22, and also to the focus mechanism.

(Display Unit A: Irradiation Unit B: Adjusting Position and Posture of Projector Device B2)
As shown in FIGS. 13 to 15, the upper pedestal B220 is a sheet metal member fixed to the upper wall portion B12 (see FIG. 8) of the projector cover B1. formed by bending downward and outward, the left end portion 2201a and the right end portion 2201b extending to the left and right sides with a step from the main body portion 2200, and the main body portion 2200 partially extending from the rear side to the rear side. It has a rear end 2202 that protrudes. The body portion 2200 and the rear end portion 2202 are provided with three connection holes 2200A for connecting the lower base B221. These three connecting holes 2200A are arranged so as not to be positioned on the same straight line within a plane (within a horizontal plane) along main body portion 2200 . Each of the left end portion 2201a and the right end portion 2201b is provided with a plurality of square holes 2201c for fixing to the lower surface of the upper wall portion B12 by screwing. In this embodiment, three square holes 2201c are arranged in each of the left end portion 2201a and the right end portion 2201b, and are provided at regular intervals in the front-rear direction. The vertical and horizontal inner diameter dimensions of the square hole 2201c are larger than the screw shaft diameter of the mounting screw T (see FIG. 16) inserted and fastened therein.

The lower pedestal B221 is a sheet metal member that generally corresponds to the main body portion 2200 and the rear end portion 2202 of the upper pedestal B220. Three connecting screw portions 2210 are integrally formed on the lower base B221 so as to protrude upward corresponding to the three connecting holes 2200A. These three connecting screw portions 2210 are also arranged so as not to be positioned on the same straight line in the plane (inside the horizontal plane) along the lower base B221. The lower pedestal B221 has a coil spring 2211 fitted to each of the connecting screw portions 2210, and the tip of the connecting screw portion 2210 is inserted into the connecting hole 2200A, and the coil spring 2211 is sandwiched between the body portion 2200 and the rear end portion 2202. In this state, a nut 2213 is fastened from the upper surface side of the upper pedestal B220 to the tip of the connection screw portion 2210 via a washer 2212, thereby connecting the upper pedestal B220 in a suspended state. Further, as shown in FIG. 12, the lower pedestal B221 is provided with a plurality of screw holes 2214 for screwing the case B22 and a plurality of screw holes 2215 for screwing the stay B223a. The lower pedestal B221 is connected to the lower surface of the upper pedestal B220 while supporting the undercover B223 via the case B22 and the stay B223a.

That is, as shown in FIGS. 12 to 15, the upper pedestal B220 and the lower pedestal B221 are connected at three connecting portions R1, R2, and R3 so that the distance therebetween can be adjusted. Each of the connecting portions R1, R2, R3 is composed of the connecting hole 2200A of the upper base B220, the connecting screw portion 2210 of the lower base B221, the coil spring 2211, the washer 2212, and the nut 2213.

By using such an upper pedestal B220 and a lower pedestal B221, the projector device B2 is attached to the upper wall portion B12 of the projector cover B1 so that the positioning and the optical axis can be adjusted.

FIG. 16 shows how the upper pedestal B220 is attached to the upper wall portion B12 of the projector cover B1. The lower diagram of FIG. 16(a) shows a state in which the mounting screw T is inserted and tightened into the square hole 2201c of the upper base B220, and the upper diagram of FIG. 16(a) 2 is a cross-sectional view taken along line BB' shown in the lower figure of FIG. Although FIG. 16 shows the periphery of the square hole 2201c formed in the left end portion 2201a of the upper base B220, the periphery of the remaining square holes 2201c in the left end portion 2201a and the right end portion 2201b is the same.

As shown in FIG. 16A, the mounting screw T is inserted into the rectangular hole 2201c from below, and the mounting screw T is arranged substantially in the center of the rectangular hole 2201c. The mounting screw T is screwed to the nut N located on the upper surface side of the upper wall portion B12 via a washer W arranged so as to follow the upper surface of the upper wall portion B12 and the lower surface of the left end portion 2201a. As a result, the left end portion 2201a of the upper base B220 is attached to the upper wall portion B12 of the projector cover B1 by screwing. The right end portion 2201b of the upper base B220 is also attached to the upper wall portion B12 of the projector cover B1 by similar screwing.

Here, the hatched portion indicated by symbol A in FIG. 16(a) is the gap formed between the screw shaft of the mounting screw T and the square hole 2201c. In FIG. 16(a), the screw shaft of the mounting screw T is arranged and fixed substantially in the center of the rectangular hole 2201c. At this time, the threaded shaft of the mounting screw T can be moved within the shaded range (adjustment range) of symbol A. As shown in FIG. That is, by finely adjusting the relative position of the mounting screw T to the square hole 2201c within the opening range of the square hole 2201c, the left end portion 2201a of the upper pedestal B220 is positioned and adjusted with respect to the upper wall portion B12 of the projector cover B1. be able to. Similarly, the right end portion 2201b of the upper pedestal B220 can also be positioned and adjusted with respect to the upper wall portion B12 of the projector cover B1.

16(b) shows a state in which the left end portion 2201a of the upper base B220 is shifted in the direction of arrow E with respect to FIG. 16(a). The upper diagram of FIG. 16(b) is a cross-sectional view taken along the line D-D' shown in the lower diagram of FIG. 16(b). In the state shown in FIG. 16(b), the screw shaft of the mounting screw T is displaced relatively to the left within the opening range of the square hole 2201c, and within the hatched area (adjustment range) indicated by symbol C, can be moved with

Thus, the upper pedestal B220 is attached to the upper wall portion B12 of the projector cover B1 while being positioned and adjusted within a predetermined adjustment range that is the opening range of the square hole 2201c. That is, the projector apparatus B2 has a plurality of square holes 2201c provided in the left end portion 2201a and the right end portion 2201b of the upper base B220, so that the mounting position relative to the upper wall portion B12 is adjusted in the left-right direction and the front-rear direction. As a result, the direction of the light emitted from the projector device B2 is easily adjusted so as to be perpendicular to the left-right direction and coincide with the front-rear direction as the reference direction.

FIG. 17 shows the connection structure of the lower pedestal B221 with respect to the upper pedestal B220. FIG. 17 is a cross-sectional view showing a state in which the lower pedestal B221 is connected to the upper pedestal B220 by the connecting hole 2200A, the connecting screw portion 2210, the coil spring 2211, the washer 2212, and the nut 2213 at the connecting portion R2. Although FIG. 17 shows one connecting portion R2, the remaining connecting portions R1 and R3 are the same.

The connecting screw portion 2210 of the lower pedestal B221 is inserted into the connecting hole 2200A from the lower surface side of the main body portion 2200 of the upper pedestal B220 and screwed to the nut 2213 via the washer 2212 arranged on the upper surface side of the main body portion 2200. be. A coil spring 2211 is fitted around the connecting screw portion 2210, and this coil spring 2211 is sandwiched between the lower surface of the main body portion 2200 and the upper surface of the lower pedestal B221 at the periphery of the connecting hole 2200A. The coil spring 2211 urges the portion near the connecting portion R2 between the upper pedestal B220 and the lower pedestal B221 in the direction (vertical direction) away from each other. It is possible to prevent loosening at the joined portion.

In such a connecting portion R2, by appropriately turning the nut 2213 in the direction of tightening or loosening, the distance between the upper pedestal B220 and the lower pedestal B221 can be changed while being biased by the coil spring 2211. Specifically, when the nut 2213 is turned in the tightening direction, the distance between the upper pedestal B220 and the lower pedestal B221 in the connecting portion R2 is narrowed. At this time, the upper pedestal B220 is fixed to the upper wall portion B12 (not shown in FIG. 17). Therefore, the portion of the lower pedestal B221 near the connecting portion R2 is displaced toward the upper pedestal B220 by appropriately tightening the nut 2213, and the height position is adjusted higher. On the other hand, when the nut 2213 is turned in the loosening direction, the distance between the upper pedestal B220 and the lower pedestal B221 in the connecting portion R2 is increased. That is, the portion of the lower pedestal B221 near the connecting portion R2 is displaced away from the upper pedestal B220 by appropriately loosening the nut 2213, and the height position is adjusted lower.

At the other connecting portions R1 and R3 as well, the height position of the lower base B221 near the connecting portions R1 and R3 can be easily adjusted by appropriately adjusting the amount of tightening of the nuts 2213 in the same manner as described above. Such connecting portions R1, R2, and R3 are arranged so that they are not positioned on the same straight line in the plane (within the horizontal plane) along the upper pedestal B220 and the lower pedestal B221. are arranged as That is, since the height position of the lower pedestal B221 can be finely adjusted by tightening the nuts 2213 at each of the three connecting portions R1, R2, and R3, the posture of the lower pedestal B221 can be adjusted in the front-rear direction, The degree of inclination in the three-dimensional space can be adjusted in both the left-right direction and the up-down direction.

Such attitude adjustment of the lower pedestal B221 is performed while irradiating the screen or the like with light from the projector device B2 supported by the lower pedestal B221. At that time, an image is projected on a screen or the like by the irradiation light, and the attitude of the lower pedestal B221 is adjusted while checking the image. Thereby, the optical axis direction of the light emitted from the projector device B2 is adjusted so that an image is projected on the surface of a screen or the like in an appropriate display mode. That is, the direction of the optical axis can be adjusted in advance by adjusting the posture of the lower pedestal B221 so that so-called trapezoidal distortion does not occur in the image display mode.

The adjustment of the optical axis direction and the like are performed using the adjustment PC 1000 (see FIG. 11) connected to the projector apparatus B2. The projector device B2 attached to the upper wall portion B12 via the upper pedestal B220 and the lower pedestal B221 undergoes adjustment of the optical axis direction and a check of the image displayed on the screen or the like during inspection at the factory. , various adjustments necessary for projecting and displaying the image are performed. The adjustment PC 1000 is temporarily connected to the relay board CK of the projector apparatus B2 during adjustment work (see FIG. 11). When the PC 1000 for adjustment is operated, optical parameters relating to the projection position of the irradiation light, focus adjustment, etc. in the projector device B2 are changed according to a predetermined command transmitted from the PC 1000 for adjustment. The projection positions and optical parameters appropriately adjusted in this manner are stored in the EEPROM 231 of the projector device B2 as horizontal and vertical adjustment value data (see FIG. 11). The horizontal and vertical adjustment value data stored in the EEPROM 231 remain unchanged even when the power is not supplied to the projector device B2 and the game machine 1 is installed in the game hall due to transportation after shipment from the factory. can be used.

As is clear from the above, the projector device B2 is positioned in the left-right direction and the front-rear direction mainly according to the mounting position on the upper wall portion B12 of the upper pedestal B220, and is positioned within the three-dimensional space of the lower pedestal B221. The direction of the optical axis is adjusted according to the attitude of the .

In this embodiment, the connecting portions for connecting the upper pedestal B220 and the lower pedestal B221 are provided at three locations. You may make it provide a connection part above. In this embodiment, the upper base B220 is provided with the connecting hole 2200A and the lower base B221 is provided with the connecting screw portion 2210, but these connecting holes and the connecting screw portion may be provided upside down. The connection screw portion is not limited to being integrally formed with the base as in the present embodiment, and may be any one that can be fixed to one of the bases. For example, the connecting screw portion may be a bolt that penetrates through the lower pedestal and is fixed.

The gaming machine 1 according to the first embodiment has been described above as one embodiment of the present invention. The gaming machine 1 according to the first embodiment has the following features.

(1-1) a display unit (display unit A) for displaying images;
a main body (cabinet G) housing the display unit (display unit A) and having an opening on the front;
an openable door (upper door mechanism UD) attached to the main body (cabinet G) so as to be openable,
The display unit (display unit A) is
a projector (projector device B2) capable of projecting an image;
a reflecting mirror (mirror mechanism B3) that reflects light emitted from the projector (projector device B2);
A screen (fixed screen mechanism D, front screen mechanism E1, reel screen mechanism F1) capable of displaying an image projected by the projector (projector device B2) based on the light reflected by the reflecting mirror (mirror mechanism B3) and
The projector (projector device B2), the reflecting mirror (mirror mechanism B3), and the screen (fixed screen mechanism D, front screen mechanism E1, reel screen mechanism F1) are unitized,
The position of the reflecting mirror (mirror mechanism B3) can be adjusted from the outside of the display unit (display unit A) with the opening/closing door (upper door mechanism UD) opened.
A gaming machine characterized by:

According to the gaming machine 1 according to the first embodiment, the display unit A includes a projector device B2, a mirror mechanism B3, a fixed screen mechanism D, a front screen mechanism E1, and a reel screen mechanism F1. The position of the mirror mechanism B3 can be adjusted from the outside of the display unit A with the upper door mechanism UD opened. Therefore, since the position of the mirror mechanism B3 can be adjusted even after the display unit A is installed in the cabinet G of the game machine 1, the position of the image projected by the projector device B2 is not appropriate. Even in this case, the projection position can be adjusted.

(1-2) The gaming machine of (1-1) above,
The projector (projector device B2) and the screen (fixed screen mechanism D, front screen mechanism E1, reel screen mechanism F1) are fixed at predetermined positions in the display unit (display unit A),
The projector (projector device B2) is arranged above the screen (fixed screen mechanism D, front screen mechanism E1, reel screen mechanism F1), and can emit light forward,
The reflecting mirror (mirror mechanism B3) is arranged in front of the projector (projector device B2) so as to be able to reflect the light emitted from the projector (projector device B2) obliquely downward and rearward. It is possible to adjust the reflection direction of the light by changing the degree of engagement of the screw exposed toward the opening side of the part (cabinet G).

According to the gaming machine 1 according to the first embodiment, the projector device B2, the fixed screen mechanism D, the front screen mechanism E1, and the reel screen mechanism F1 are fixed at predetermined positions in the display unit A. On the other hand, the mirror mechanism B3 is provided with a screw for adjusting the reflection direction of light, and the screw is exposed toward the opening side of the cabinet G. Therefore, even after the display unit A is installed in the cabinet G of the game machine 1, the light reflection direction (angle) can be changed by loosening or tightening the screw with the upper door mechanism UD open. can be adjusted. Accordingly, even when the position of the image projected by the projector device B2 is not appropriate, the projection position can be adjusted.

(2-1) a projection device (projector device B2) for projecting an image with irradiated light;
a plurality of projection planes capable of displaying images projected by the projection device;
a drive mechanism (front screen drive mechanism E2, reel screen drive mechanism F2) that displaces at least one of the plurality of projection planes as a movable projection plane;
an upper wall (upper wall portion B12) located above the projection device,
The plurality of projection planes are subjected to surface processing,
The drive mechanism is configured to displace the movable projection surface relative to the projection device,
An upper pedestal (upper pedestal B220) and a lower pedestal (lower pedestal B221) are provided between the projection device and the upper wall,
The upper pedestal is attached to the upper wall so that the in-plane position can be adjusted, and the lower pedestal supports the projection device and is adjustable in three or more positions with respect to the upper pedestal. A game machine characterized by being attached to a.

According to the gaming machine 1 according to the first embodiment, the projector device B2 appropriately adjusts the in-plane position of the upper pedestal B220 with respect to the upper wall B12, thereby properly adjusting the upper wall B12 via the upper pedestal B220. By appropriately adjusting the vertical spacing of the lower pedestal B221 with respect to the upper pedestal B220 positioned on the upper wall portion B12 with three or more connecting portions R1, R2, and R3, It is mounted so that the posture supported via this lower base B221 is appropriate. Therefore, the in-plane arrangement position and the in-space orientation of the projector device B2 can be easily adjusted using the upper pedestal B220 and the lower pedestal B221, and high-quality images with high image visual effects can be projected onto a plurality of projection surfaces. can be projected.

(2-2) The gaming machine of (2-1) above,
The upper pedestal and the lower pedestal are connected to each other at three or more connecting portions (connecting portions R1, R2, R3) that are not on the same straight line,
Each of the plurality of connecting portions includes:
a connection screw portion (connection screw portion 2210) protruding from one of the upper pedestal and the lower pedestal and screwed through the other;
and a coil spring (coil spring 2211) that is externally fitted to the connecting screw portion and arranged between the upper pedestal and the lower pedestal.

According to the gaming machine 1 according to the first embodiment, the upper pedestal B220 and the lower pedestal B221 have three or more connecting portions R1, R2, and R3 that are not on the same straight line. Individual adjustment is possible only by adjusting the amount of screw tightening, and the interval after adjustment is kept constant by the elastic biasing force of the coil spring 2211, so the front-rear direction, the left-right direction, and the up-down direction that are perpendicular to each other in the space. The posture of the projector device B2 can be finely adjusted with respect to the three axial directions, and the projector device B2 can be held in a proper posture in any of the vertical direction, the horizontal direction, and the front-rear direction, for example.

[Second embodiment]
The first embodiment has been described above. A second embodiment will be described below. A basic configuration of the gaming machine 1 according to the second embodiment is the same as that of the gaming machine 1 according to the first embodiment. In the following description, the same components as those of the gaming machine 1 according to the first embodiment are denoted by the same reference numerals. In addition, the description of the parts to which the description of the first embodiment applies also to the second embodiment will be omitted.

<Upper Pedestal B220 and Lower Pedestal B221>
The upper pedestal B220 and the lower pedestal B221 according to the present embodiment have configurations different from those of the upper pedestal B220 and the lower pedestal B221 according to the first embodiment.

FIG. 18 is an exploded perspective view of an upper pedestal and a lower pedestal. FIG. 19 is a plan view showing the assembled state of the upper pedestal and the lower pedestal. 20 is a diagram of the upper pedestal and the lower pedestal shown in FIG. 19 viewed obliquely from the front. FIG. 21 is a view of the upper pedestal and the lower pedestal shown in FIG. 19 as viewed obliquely from the rear. FIG. 22 is a perspective view of a case housing the internal components of the projector mechanism. FIG. 23 is a perspective view showing a state where the case is attached to the lower pedestal.

As shown in FIGS. 18 and 19, the upper pedestal B220 has a shape in which a rectangular opening is provided in a sheet metal member that is rectangular in plan view. As shown in FIG. 19, the opening is formed in a substantially rectangular shape surrounded by sides A, B, C, and D. As shown in FIG.

A square hole 2201c is provided in each of the right and left portions of the upper base B220. The square hole 2201c is a hole for fixing the upper base B220 to the relay plate B300 (see FIG. 26) by screwing.

In the first embodiment, when attaching the projector device B2 to the projector cover B1, the projector device B2 is directly fixed to the projector cover B1 by screwing the upper pedestal B220 to the upper wall portion B12 of the projector cover B1. explained. In contrast, in the present embodiment, a relay plate B300 is interposed between the upper base B220 and the projector cover B1.

The vertical and horizontal inner diameter dimensions of the rectangular hole 2201c are larger than the screw shaft diameter of the mounting screw T inserted and fastened therein. FIG. 19 also shows a fixing plate B321 used when fixing the upper base B220 to the relay plate B300. In this embodiment, the relay plate B300 and the upper pedestal B220 are fastened using a fixing plate B321 and cap bolts. Although the fixing plate B321 was not shown in the first embodiment, conventionally known members can be appropriately selected and used for fastening the relay plate B300 and the upper base B220.

Further, the upper pedestal B220 is provided with three connecting holes 2200A for connecting the lower pedestal B221. 2200 A of three connection holes are arrange|positioned so that it may not be located on the same straight line in the plane (inside of a horizontal plane) along upper base B220.

The lower pedestal B221 includes a rectangular main body B221a having a rectangular opening in the center, a right side B221b and a left side B221c extending forward with a step from the main body B221a, and a main body B221a. is a sheet metal member provided with a rear end portion B221d extending rearward with a step.

As shown in FIG. 20, the right side portion B221b is formed by bending the right front end of the main body portion B221a downward and outward. The left side portion B221c is formed by bending the left front end of the main body portion B221a downward and outward. As shown in FIG. 21, the rear end portion B221d is formed by bending the rear end of the main body portion B221a downward and bending a part of the downwardly bent portion outward. The right side portion B221b, the left side portion B221c, and the rear end portion B221d are formed so as to be positioned on the same plane.

Connection screw portions 2210 are integrally formed on the right side portion B221b, the left side portion B221c, and the rear end portion B221d so as to protrude upward corresponding to the three connection holes 2200A of the upper base B220. The three connecting screw portions 2210 are arranged so as not to be positioned on the same straight line within a plane (within a horizontal plane) along the right side portion B221b, the left side portion B221c, and the rear end portion B221d.

As in the first embodiment, the upper pedestal B220 and the lower pedestal B221 are connected at each of the three connecting portions corresponding to the three connecting holes 2200A and the three connecting screw portions 2210 so that the mutual spacing can be adjusted. be done. The three connecting portions are each composed of a connecting hole 2200A, a connecting screw portion 2210, a coil spring 2211, a washer 2212, and a nut 2213 (see FIG. 12).

Further, as shown in FIG. 18, the lower pedestal B221 is provided with a plurality of screw holes 2214 for screwing the case B22. As the case B22, it is possible to adopt a case having the same configuration as in the first embodiment, but in this embodiment, as shown in FIG. there is

As in the first embodiment, the case B22 accommodates a lens unit B21 (see FIG. 12), an LED board, a DMD board, a heat sink, an intake fan, etc., which are internal components of the projector apparatus B2. A projector control board B23 (see FIG. 12) is fixed to the bottom surface of the case B22.

A lens unit cover B222 (see FIG. 12) is attached to a front opening B22k provided on the front surface of the case B22. The lens unit B21 is accommodated in the case B22 with the projection lens 210 (see FIG. 12) covered by the lens unit cover B222.

In addition, although not shown, the case B22 has two intake fans 244A at a location to the left of the center in the horizontal direction (near the right end of the left side B221c when attached to the lower pedestal B221 (see FIG. 23)). 244B are arranged in a line in front and back. A heat sink is provided on the left side of the two intake fans 244A and 244B.

Further, an intake port B22A is provided on the right side of the case B22 (see FIG. 22), and an exhaust port B22E is provided on the left side of the case B22 (see FIG. 23). As a result, in the case B22, a flow of air is formed that is forcibly taken in by the intake fans 244A and 244B through the intake port B22A and then exhausted from the exhaust port B22E while removing heat from the heat sink.

As shown in FIG. 23, the case B22 is attached to the lower pedestal B221 by screw fastening, and the upper end surface (the upper wall portion B22F shown in FIG. 22) is the inner surface of the main body portion B221a of the lower pedestal B221. is in contact with Further, in a state where the upper pedestal B220 and the lower pedestal B221 are connected, the main body portion B221a of the lower pedestal B221 is located above the upper pedestal B220. As a result, the upper wall portion B22F of the case B22 is also positioned above the upper pedestal B220.

In this respect, in the first embodiment, the upper end of the case B22 is attached to the lower pedestal B221, and the upper pedestal B220 is arranged above it. Therefore, the case B22 could not be arranged in the space formed between the upper pedestal B220 and the lower pedestal B221. In contrast, in the present embodiment, an opening is formed in the upper pedestal B220, and the upper end of the case B22 is arranged so that the upper end (upper wall portion B22F) of the case B22 is inserted upward through the opening. (Upper wall portion B22F) can be positioned above the upper pedestal B220. This makes it possible to effectively utilize the space for arranging the case B22.

By moving the case B22 (projector apparatus B2) relative to the upper pedestal B220 upward in this manner, the front portion provided on the front surface of the case B22 A part of the upper base B220 is arranged in front of the opening B22k (see FIG. 22) (see FIG. 23). That is, a part of the upper pedestal B220 is arranged in front of the projection lens 210 (see FIG. 12) installed so as to correspond to the front opening B22k. As a result, it seems that the light emitted from the projection lens 210 is blocked by the upper base B220.

However, the illuminating light is not blocked in this way. That is, in this embodiment, the irradiation light is emitted from the portion below the optical axis of the projection lens 210 . In other words, only the lower half of the projection lens 210 (the portion below the horizontal plane passing through the central portion of the projection lens 210 in the vertical direction) is used when the irradiation light is emitted. The light emission position of such a projection lens 210 is different from that of a conventionally known projector (see, for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2008-058875).

As described above, in this embodiment, the upper half of the projection lens 210 is not used when the irradiation light is emitted, and the irradiation light is emitted from the portion below the optical axis of the projection lens 210, as shown in FIG. The upper pedestal B<b>220 arranged in front of the projection lens 210 is present above the optical axis of the projection lens 210 . Therefore, the course of the light emitted from the projection lens 210 is below the upper pedestal B220, and the irradiation light is not blocked by the upper pedestal B220.

Further, the lower pedestal B221 is bent downward to form a right side B221b, a left side B221c, and a rear end B221d. The upper pedestal B220 and the lower pedestal B221 can be connected so that the upper pedestal B220 is arranged. As a result, while the configurations of the upper pedestal B220 and the lower pedestal B221 are changed from those of the first embodiment, the configuration of the three connecting portions can be the same as that of the first embodiment.

Therefore, the adjustment of the optical axis direction of the light emitted from the projector device B2 can also be performed by the same method as in the first embodiment. Such adjustment of the optical axis direction and the like requires a sophisticated computer program, and development of the program incurs a large amount of cost. In the present embodiment, the same program as in the first embodiment can be used to adjust the optical axis direction, etc., so it is possible to suppress the occurrence of new costs.

Further, in the present embodiment, the case B22 is described as having the upper wall portion B22F. good. Further, the method of attaching the case B22 to the lower pedestal B221 is not particularly limited, and the case B22 is attached to the lower pedestal B221 by using the stay B223a (see FIG. 12) as in the first embodiment. You can do it.

As described above, in the present embodiment, by disposing a portion of the case B22 above the upper pedestal B220, the case B22 can be moved upward compared to the first embodiment. , a new space can be created in the lower region of the case B22. Such an effect is obtained by changing the structure of the upper base B220 from that of the first embodiment, and the same structure as that of the first embodiment can be adopted for the projector cover B1.

However, in this embodiment, in consideration of other effects, a projector cover B1 having a configuration different from that of the first embodiment is adopted. The projector cover B1 according to this embodiment will be described below.

<Projector cover B1>
FIG. 24 is a perspective view showing a state in which the upper wall portion of the projector cover is removed. FIG. 25 is a plan view of the projector cover with the top wall removed. 26 is an exploded view showing a cross-sectional view of the projector cover shown in FIG. 25 taken along line LL, and a perspective view of a relay plate attached to the projector cover. FIG. 27 is a view of the projector cover with the top wall removed, as viewed obliquely from above. FIG. 28 is a front view of the projector cover with the top wall removed. FIG. 29 is a cross-sectional view of the projector cover shown in FIG. 28 taken along line MM.

As shown in FIG. 24, the projector cover B1 has a generally bilaterally symmetrical structure, and has a relay plate mounting portion B301 inside. The relay plate attachment portion B301 is formed so as to protrude inward from the inner surface of each of the left and right side wall portions B13, B13. The relay plate mounting portion B301 is formed so as to have a step, and includes a relay plate mounting surface B301a formed on the front and rear sides, a position adjustment surface B301d formed above the relay plate mounting surface B301a, and a front surface B301b. and a connection portion B301e for connecting the rear relay plate mounting surface B301a and the position adjustment surface B301d.

A mounting hole B301b is formed in the relay plate mounting surface B301a. A position adjustment hole B301c is formed in the position adjustment surface B301d. The attachment hole B301b is a screw hole for attaching the relay plate B300 to the relay plate attachment portion B301 by screwing. The position adjustment hole B301c is formed at a position facing the square hole 2201c (see FIG. 18) of the upper base B220 when the relay plate B300 is attached to the relay plate mounting portion B301.

As shown in FIG. 26, the relay plate B300 includes a main body B300A, a front side B300B extending forward with a step from the main body B300A, and a rearward extending with a step from the main body B300A. It has a rear side B300C. The front side portion B300B is formed by bending the front end of the main body portion B300A downward and forward. The rear side portion B300C is formed by bending the rear end of the main body portion B300A downward and rearward. Thus, the shape of the relay plate B300 corresponds to the step provided in the relay plate mounting portion B301 of the projector cover B1.

A first through hole B300a is formed in the body portion B300A. A second through hole B300b is formed in each of the front side portion B300B and the rear side portion B300C. The first through hole B300a is a hole through which a cap bolt is inserted when the relay plate B300 is attached to the upper base B220. On the other hand, the second through hole B300b is a hole through which a screw is inserted when the relay plate B300 is attached to the relay plate mounting portion B301 by screw fastening.

Further, as shown in FIG. 24, openings B400 (a right opening B400a and a left opening B400b) whose upper side is open are provided on both left and right sides in front of the projector cover B1. The right opening B400a has a shape similar to a hexagon formed by sides E to J (see FIG. 25) when viewed from above.

As shown in FIG. 27, with sides E to J as upper ends, wall surfaces (wall surface B401e, wall surface B401f, wall surface B401g, wall surface B401h, wall surface B401i, and wall surface B401j) extending downward from each side are formed. ing. A wall surface B401j (see FIG. 24) formed continuously from the side J is shorter in the vertical direction than the other wall surfaces B401e to B401i. A wall surface B401e formed continuously from the side E continues to the rear inside the projector cover B1 and forms part of the inner surface 403 (see FIG. 29) of the projector cover B1.

Further, as shown in FIG. 26, a cavity B402 is formed below the position adjustment surface B301d of the relay plate mounting portion B301.

FIG. 29 is a cross-sectional view taken along a horizontal plane (a plane above the relay plate mounting surface B301a and below the position adjustment surface B301d) passing through the connection portion B301e.

As shown in FIG. 29, an opening B400 (a right opening B400a and a left opening B400b) opened toward the upper side of the projector cover B1 and a cavity 402 formed below the position adjustment surface B301d of the relay plate mounting portion B301. , inside the projector cover B1.

<Space Formation by Projector Cover B1 and Blind B500>
In this embodiment, a blind B500 is employed as a member provided on the lower side of the projector cover B1 instead of the perforated plate B15 (see FIG. 10) in the first embodiment.

Figure 30 is a perspective view of the blind. FIG. 31 is a plan view of the irradiation unit with the upper wall portion of the projector cover removed. 32 is a diagram showing a state in which the fan for the vicinity of the opening and the duct cover are removed in a cross section along the arrow NN of the irradiation unit shown in FIG. 31. FIG.

As shown in FIG. 30, the blind B500 has a substantially symmetrical structure, and is formed to have a substantially horizontal first horizontal portion B501 and a slope continuously with the first horizontal portion B501. a second horizontal portion B502b formed substantially horizontally continuously with the first inclined portion B502a; and a second horizontal portion B502b formed so as to have an inclination continuously with the second horizontal portion B502b. A third horizontal portion B502d formed substantially horizontally continuously with the inclined portion B502c, the second inclined portion B502c, and a rear portion of the third horizontal portion B502d so that the width in the horizontal direction is the same as that of the third horizontal portion B502d. It has a rear wall portion B503 erected upward from the end, an outer wall portion B504 forming the outer wall of the blind B500, and an inner wall portion B505 facing the outer wall portion B504.

The outer wall portion B504 is continuous with the first inclined portion B502a, the second horizontal portion B502b, the second inclined portion B502c, the third horizontal portion B502d, and the rear wall portion B503. The inner wall portion B505 is continuous with the first inclined portion B502a and the second horizontal portion B502b. In addition, the first inclined portion B502a, the second horizontal portion B502b, the second inclined portion B502c, and the third horizontal portion B502d are raised in a certain range near the outer wall portion B504, and are higher than the inner portion of the range. It has a structure that

In addition, the blind B500 has a small room B507 that is rectangular in plan view. The small room B507 is a space surrounded by a front wall portion B507a, an outer wall portion B507b, a rear wall portion B507d, and an inner wall portion B505 which are formed in the vertical direction. The front wall portion B507a is erected from the second horizontal portion B502b and extends in the left-right direction. The outer wall portion B507b is erected from the second horizontal portion B502b, the second inclined portion B502c, and the third horizontal portion B502d, extends in the front-rear direction, and is continuous with the rear wall portion B503. The rear wall portion B507d is erected so as to form substantially the same plane as the rear wall portion B503.

In this way, the small room B507 is formed so as to straddle the second horizontal portion B502b, the second inclined portion B502c, and the third horizontal portion B502d. The width in the left-right direction is narrower than the width in the left-right direction of the first inclined portion B502a by the length of the width in the left-right direction of the front wall portion B507a. A U-shaped notch 507c with an open top is formed in the outer wall portion B507b. Further, the upper ends of the front wall portion B507a, the outer wall portion B507b, and the rear wall portion B507d are lower than the upper edge B505a of the inner wall portion B505.

The first horizontal portion B501 includes a first wall portion B501a that slightly stands upward at the front end thereof, a second wall portion B501b that continues rearward from the inner portion of the first wall portion B501a, A third wall portion B501c that continues obliquely rearward from the second wall portion B501b, a fourth wall portion B501d that continues rearward from the third wall portion B501c, and a continuous wall portion B501d that continues inward from the fourth wall portion B501d. A fifth wall portion B501e is formed. The fifth wall portion B501e is continuous with the inner wall portion B505.

A screw hole B506 for attaching the blind B500 to the projector cover B1 by screwing is formed in an area surrounded by the third wall portion B501c, the fourth wall portion B501d, and the fifth wall portion B501e.

As shown in FIG. 32, in a state where the blind B500 is attached to the lower side of the projector cover B1, the surface of the first wall portion B501a of the blind B500 is continuous with the wall surface B401f of the projector cover B1 and the second wall portion B401f of the blind B500. The surface of the wall portion B501b is continuous with the wall surface B401g of the projector cover B1, the surface of the third wall portion B501c of the blind B500 is continuous with the wall surface B401h of the projector cover B1, and the surface of the fourth wall portion B501d of the blind B500 is continuous. , and the wall surface B401i of the projector cover B1.

Also, although not shown in FIG. 32, the surface of the fifth wall portion B501e of the blind B500 is substantially flush with the surface B402a (see FIG. 29) present in front of the cavity B402 (see FIG. 26) of the projector cover B1. placed above. A certain gap exists between the upper end of the fifth wall portion B501e and the lower end of the surface B402a. As will be described later, the gap is filled with a duct cover B600 (duct cover B650) (see FIG. 36). Furthermore, the inner surface of the outer wall portion B504 of the blind B500 is continuous with the inner surface 403 (see FIG. 29) of the projector cover B1.

As described above, a space P (see FIG. 32) is formed by the projector cover B1 and the blind B500. The space P is covered with a projector cover B1 on the top and a blind B500 on the bottom. In addition, on the sides of the space P, the first wall portion B501a to the fifth wall portion B501e of the blind B500, the inner wall portion B505, the rear wall portion B503, the outer wall portion B504, and the wall surfaces B401f to B401i of the projector cover B1, It is surrounded by surfaces B402a and B402b existing in front and rear of the cavity B402, an inner surface 403, and the like.

An upper portion of the space P is connected to the external space of the projector cover B1 through an opening B400 (see FIG. 24), and the internal space Q of the projector cover B1 (see FIG. 29) through a cavity B402. ) are connected. The cavity B402 forms part of the space P when the projector cover B1 and the blind B500 are assembled.

As shown in FIGS. 31 and 32, the openings B400 (right opening B400a and left opening B400b) are provided with punchings B450 (right punching B450a and left punching B450b) having a mesh structure. As a result, it is possible to prevent foreign matter from entering the space P through the opening B400 to some extent.

<Formation of air flow path and liquid storage space>
33 is a perspective view showing a state in which an opening vicinity fan and a duct cover are attached to the blind shown in FIG. 30 and a case is arranged. FIG. 34 is a perspective view showing a state in which the right punching is removed from the irradiation unit shown in FIG. 31. FIG. 35 is a cross-sectional view showing a state in which an opening vicinity fan and a duct cover are attached to the irradiation unit shown in FIG. 32. FIG. 36 is a right side view showing a state in which the opening vicinity fan is removed in the cross section of the irradiation unit shown in FIG. 35. FIG.

As shown in FIG. 33, a duct cover B600 is arranged substantially horizontally on the upper right side of the blind B500. The duct cover B600 is a plate-like member, and its external shape when viewed from above is the rear wall portion B503, the outer wall portion B504, the inner wall portion B505 of the blind B500, and the front wall portion B507a and the outer wall portion B507b of the small room B507. (Refer to FIG. 30) It has a shape that approximates a figure that includes the respective upper edges. Thereby, the duct cover B600 covers the blind B500 from above.

A duct cover B650 is arranged substantially horizontally on the upper left side of the blind B500. The duct cover B650 is a plate-like member, and has a different outer shape from the top view than the duct cover B600 (see FIG. 40), but like the duct cover B600 covers the blinds B500 from above.

As shown in FIG. 35, the space P (see FIG. 32) formed by the projector cover B1 and the blind B500 consists of a space P1 above the duct cover B600 (duct cover B650) and a space below the duct cover B600. and P2. For the sake of clarity, the duct cover B600 is hatched in FIG.

Further, as shown in FIG. 33, an opening vicinity fan B700 is placed in front of the upper side of the duct cover B600. The opening vicinity fan B700 is a fan for intake air, and is configured to allow the air present in front of the opening vicinity fan B700 to pass through the air passage portion B710 (see FIG. 37) and move rearward. It has become.

As shown in FIGS. 34 and 35, when the projector cover B1 is attached to the blind B500, the opening vicinity fan B700 is positioned near the right opening B400a of the projector cover B1. For the sake of clarity, in FIGS. 34 and 35, the opening vicinity fan B700 is shaded.

Here, although not shown, in this embodiment, when the display unit A is attached to the cabinet G, the front portion of the irradiation unit B protrudes forward from the cabinet G, and the portion of the irradiation unit B protruding from the cabinet G is , is accommodated in the upper door mechanism UD (see FIG. 1). Two openings (not shown) formed in the upper wall of the upper door mechanism UD are respectively positioned directly above the two openings B400 (right opening B400a and left opening B400b) of the projector cover B1.

Further, as shown in FIG. 35, the air intake B22A (see FIG. 22) of the case B22 is arranged so as to be close to the cavity B402 (the right cavity B402 of the two cavities B402). Although not shown, the exhaust port B22E (see FIG. 23) of the case B22 is similarly arranged so as to be close to the cavity B402 (the left cavity B402 of the two cavities B402).

As a result, in the present embodiment, air enters the upper door mechanism UD from the outside of the gaming machine 1 through the opening (the right opening of the two openings) formed in the upper surface wall of the upper door mechanism UD. is taken in. This air moves downward inside the upper door mechanism UD and is taken into the projector cover B1 through the opening B400 (right opening B400a) of the projector cover B1.

The air that has entered the interior of the projector cover B1 is located above the duct cover B600 in the space P (the right space P of the two spaces P, see FIG. 32) formed by the projector cover B1 and the blind B500. After moving backward through the space P1 (see FIG. 35), it turns to the inside of the projector cover B1, passes through the cavity B402 (the right cavity B402 of the two cavities B402), and enters the intake port B22A. It enters the inside of the case B22 via.

The air that has entered the case B22 moves leftward while absorbing the heat generated in the case B22, and exits the case B22 through the exhaust port B22E.

After passing through the cavity B402 (the left cavity B402 of the two cavities B402), the air exiting the case B22 changes course forward and enters the space P (the left space of the two spaces P). P) moves forward in the space P1 above the duct cover B650. The air then exits the projector cover B1 through the opening B400 (left opening B400b) of the projector cover B1.

After moving upward inside the upper door mechanism UD, the air coming out of the projector cover B1 passes through an opening (the left opening of the two openings) formed in the upper surface wall of the upper door mechanism UD. , and released to the outside of the gaming machine 1 .

Among the air flows described above, the air flow paths inside the projector cover B1 are indicated by thick arrows in FIG. Also, the flow of air in the space P1 is indicated by an arrow A in FIG. In this embodiment, heat generated in the projector device B2 can be discharged to the outside of the game machine 1 by forming such an air flow path.

Here, as described above, the openings formed in the top wall of the upper door mechanism UD are located directly above the openings B400 (right opening B400a and left opening B400b) of the projector cover B1. That is, when the opening of the upper door mechanism UD and the opening B400 of the projector cover B1 are viewed from above, at least a portion of them overlap.

Therefore, when a foreign substance such as a liquid enters the gaming machine 1 through the opening of the upper door mechanism UD, the foreign substance enters the inside of the projector cover B1. However, according to this embodiment, even in such a case, it is possible to prevent the foreign matter from entering the case B22. A case where the liquid L is introduced from the opening of the upper door mechanism UD will be described below as an example.

The liquid L introduced from the opening of the upper door mechanism UD passes through the opening B400 (right opening B400a) of the projector cover B1 and falls onto the first horizontal portion B501 (see FIG. 30) of the blind B500.

Here, as described with reference to FIG. 32, the upper end of the fifth wall portion B501e of the blind B500 and the lower end of the surface B402a (see FIG. 29) present in front of the cavity B402 (see FIG. 26) of the projector cover B1. A certain gap exists between them, and the thickness of the duct cover B600 substantially matches the length of the gap. The duct cover B600 is arranged so as to contact both the upper end of the fifth wall portion B501e and the lower end of the surface B402a to fill the gap. As a result, a gap corresponding to the height of the fifth wall portion B501e of the blind B500 is formed between the first horizontal portion B501 of the blind B500 and the duct cover B600. The liquid L passes through the gap and flows from the first horizontal portion B501 toward the first inclined portion B502a.

Since the first inclined portion B502a and the second inclined portion B502c of the blind B500 have an inclination that descends toward the rear, the liquid L flows through the first inclined portion B502a, the second horizontal portion B502b, and the second inclined portion B502b. It flows backward through the inclined portion B502c and the third horizontal portion B502d. Thus, the liquid L flows on the surfaces of the first horizontal portion B501, the first inclined portion B502a, the second horizontal portion B502b, the second inclined portion B502c, and the third horizontal portion B502d. Such a flow of the liquid L is indicated by an arrow L in FIG.

The liquid L flowing backward collides with the rear wall portion B503 and is stored in the area surrounded by the rear wall portion B503, the outer wall portion B504, and the outer wall portion B507b (and the inner wall portion B505) (FIG. 36). reference). This area is included in the space P2 (see FIG. 35) below the duct cover B600 in the space P (see FIG. 32) formed by the projector cover B1 and the blind B500. For the sake of clarity, in FIG. 36, the stored liquid L is shaded.

Here, the space P1 shown in FIG. 35 and the internal space Q (see FIG. 29) of the projector cover B1 are connected via the opening B510 shown in FIG. As shown in FIG. 36, the opening B510 has a shape similar to a rectangle formed by sides K to N when viewed from the side.

A side K forming the lower end of the opening B510 corresponds to the upper edge B505a (see FIG. 30) of the inner wall portion B505 of the blind B500. As shown in FIG. 30, the upper edge B505a (lower end of the opening 510) of the inner wall portion B505 includes a first horizontal portion B501, a first inclined portion B502a, a second horizontal portion B502b, a second inclined portion B502c, and It is located above the third horizontal portion B502d (the path of the liquid L).

Although not shown in the figure, the right end of the duct cover B600 is placed on the upper edge of the outer wall B504 of the blind B500, and the left end is in contact with the outer surface of the inner wall B505 of the blind B500. The blind B500 is arranged so as to be in contact with the main surface B610 (see FIG. 37) of the blind B500 and the upper edge B505a of the inner wall portion B505 of the blind B500 (see FIG. 33). As a result, the internal space Q of the projector cover B1 and the storage space (space P2) of the liquid L are separated by the duct cover B600, and the liquid L flows through the internal space Q of the projector cover B1 (the inside of the case B22) through the opening B510. ) is becoming more difficult to invade.

<Mounting structure and mounting position of fan near opening>
FIG. 37 is an exploded perspective view of a duct cover and an opening vicinity fan. FIG. 38 is an exploded perspective view of the projector cover and the fan near the opening viewed from the rear and below. FIG. 39 is a partially enlarged perspective view of the projector cover and the opening vicinity fan as viewed from the front and below.

As shown in FIG. 37, the duct cover B600 includes a main surface B610, a fan installation structure B620, a rear side portion B630, wiring openings B640 (B640a and B640b), screw holes B650 (B650a and B650b), It has

The main surface B610 has a shape obtained by notching a left rear corner portion of a rectangular shape in top view. The fan installation structure B620 is a structure for installing the opening vicinity fan B700, and is formed on the front right side of the main surface B610. The rear side portion B630 is formed to extend rearward from the right rear portion of the main surface B610. The wiring opening B640 is a hole for inserting a wiring that connects various functional components (such as the sub-controller SS) arranged outside the projector cover B1 and the projector device B2. The screw hole B650 is a hole for attaching the duct cover B600 to the projector cover B1 by screwing.

The fan installation structure B620 includes a front engaging portion B621 erected at the front end of a principal surface B610, a left rear engaging portion B622 erected from the principal surface B610 behind the front engaging portion B621, and a right rear engaging portion B621. A side engaging portion B623 and a lower engaging portion B624 (a lower left engaging portion B624a, a lower middle engaging portion B624b, and a lower and a right engaging portion B624c).

The lower left engaging portion B624a and the lower middle engaging portion B624b connect the rear surface of the front engaging portion B621 and the front surface of the left rear engaging portion B622. The lower right engaging portion B624c connects the rear surface of the front engaging portion B621 and the front surface of the right rear engaging portion B623.

An upper edge B621a of the front engaging portion B621, an upper edge B622a of the left rear engaging portion B622, and an upper edge B623a of the right rear engaging portion B623 are each formed in a curved shape. The opening vicinity fan B700 has a circular air passage portion B710. The upper edge B621a, the upper edge B622a, and the upper edge B623a are formed in a shape (arc shape) corresponding to the shape of the air passage portion B710. For the sake of clarity, in FIG. 37, the upper edge B621a and the upper edge B622a are hatched, and the air passage portion B710 is shaded.

As shown in FIG. 38, a structure (fan installation structure) for installing the opening vicinity fan B700 is formed so as to protrude downward from the ceiling inside the projector cover B1. Specifically, the projector cover B1 includes a front engaging portion B421 formed along the rear end of the opening B400, a rear engaging portion B422 formed rearward of the front engaging portion B421, It has an extending upper engaging portion B423 (an upper left engaging portion B423a, an upper middle engaging portion B423b, and an upper right engaging portion B423c).

The upper engaging portion B423 connects the rear surface of the front engaging portion B421 and the front surface of the rear engaging portion B422. As for the downward projection length from the ceiling portion inside the projector cover B1, the front side engaging portion B421 and the rear side engaging portion B422 are longer than the upper side engaging portion B423.

A lower edge B421a of the front engaging portion B421 and a lower edge B422a of the rear engaging portion B422 are curved. The lower edge B421a and the lower edge B422a are formed in a shape (arcuate shape) corresponding to the shape of the air passing portion B710 of the fan B700 for the vicinity of the opening. For the sake of clarity, in FIG. 38, the lower edge B421a and the lower edge B422a are hatched.

The opening vicinity fan B700 is held between the fan installation structure B620 of the duct cover B600 and the fan installation structure of the projector cover B1 described above.

Specifically, the distance between the front engaging portion B621 and the left rear engaging portion B622 of the duct cover B600, the distance between the front engaging portion B621 and the right rear engaging portion B623, and the front engaging portion of the projector cover B1 The distance between the joining portion B421 and the rear engaging portion B422 is approximately equal to the length of the opening vicinity fan B700 in the front-rear direction.

As a result, the left front surface of the opening vicinity fan B700 contacts the rear surface of the front engaging portion B621 of the duct cover B600, and the left rear surface of the opening vicinity fan B700 contacts the left rear engaging portion B622 of the duct cover B600. The opening vicinity fan B700 abuts on the front surface and is sandwiched between the front engaging portion B621 and the left rear engaging portion B622 of the duct cover B600. The right front surface of the opening vicinity fan B700 contacts the rear surface of the front engaging portion B621 of the duct cover B600, and the right rear surface of the opening vicinity fan B700 contacts the front surface of the right rear engaging portion B623 of the duct cover B600. , and the opening vicinity fan B700 is sandwiched between the front engaging portion B621 and the right rear engaging portion B623 of the duct cover B600.

Further, the front surface of the opening vicinity fan B700 contacts the rear surface of the front engaging portion B421 of the projector cover B1, and the rear surface of the opening vicinity fan B700 contacts the front surface of the rear engaging portion B422 of the projector cover B1. , the opening vicinity fan B700 is sandwiched between the front engaging portion B421 and the rear engaging portion B422 of the projector cover B1.

In addition, the three lower engaging portions B624 (lower left engaging portion B624a, lower middle engaging portion B624b, and lower right engaging portion B624c) of the duct cover B600 extend upward from the main surface B610. are approximately equal to each other. The three upper engaging portions B423 (upper left engaging portion B423a, upper middle engaging portion B423b, and upper right engaging portion B423c) of the projector cover B1 extend downward from the ceiling portion inside the projector cover B1. are approximately equal to each other. The distance between the lower engaging portion B624 of the duct cover B600 and the upper engaging portion B423 of the projector cover B1 is substantially equal to the vertical length of the opening vicinity fan B700.

As a result, the lower surface of the opening vicinity fan B700 is connected to the three lower engaging portions B624 (lower left engaging portion B624a, lower middle engaging portion B624b, and lower right engaging portion B624c) of the duct cover B600. ), and the upper surface of the opening vicinity fan B700 engages with the three upper engaging portions B423 (upper left engaging portion B423a, upper middle engaging portion B423b, and upper right engaging portion B423c) of the projector cover B1. ), and the opening vicinity fan B700 is sandwiched between the lower engaging portion B624 of the duct cover B600 and the upper engaging portion B423 of the projector cover B1.

As described above, the opening vicinity fan B700 is fixed by being sandwiched between the duct cover B600 and the projector cover B1 from the front-rear direction and the up-down direction.

In the state where the near-opening fan B700 is fixed, the front edge of the air passing portion B710 is aligned with the upper edge B621a of the front engaging portion B621 of the duct cover B600 and the lower edge B421a of the front engaging portion B421 of the projector cover B1. (see Figures 34 and 39). Also, although not shown, the outer edge on the back side of the air passage portion B710 is the upper edge B622a of the left rear engaging portion B622 and the upper edge B623a of the right rear engaging portion B623 of the duct cover B600, and the projector cover B1. It is positioned along the lower edge B422a of the rear engaging portion B422.

In other words, the air passing portion B710 includes, in a front view, the front engaging portion B621, the left rear engaging portion B622, and the right rear engaging portion B623 of the duct cover B600, and the front engaging portion of the projector cover B1. It does not overlap with B421 and the rear engaging portion B422. In other words, the air passing portion B710 includes the front engaging portion B621, the left rear engaging portion B622, and the right rear engaging portion B623 of the duct cover B600, and the front engaging portion B421 and B421 of the projector cover B1. It is not covered with the rear side engaging portion B422. As a result, the maximum area of the air passing portion can be ensured.

On the other hand, the peripheral edge of the air passage portion B710, the upper edge of the engaging portion of the duct cover B600 (upper edge B621a, upper edge B622a, and upper edge B623a), and the lower edge of the engaging portion of the projector cover B1 (lower edge) B421a and the lower edge B422a) are aligned to increase the area of the portion where the opening vicinity fan B700 and the duct cover B600 contact and the area of the portion where the opening vicinity fan B700 and the projector cover B1 contact. By doing so, the opening vicinity fan B700 can be stably fixed.

As shown in FIG. 39, the front surface of the front engaging portion B421 of the projector cover B1 is a wall surface B401j (see FIG. 24) formed downward from the rear edge (side j shown in FIG. 25) of the right opening B400a. ) are consistent with As a result, the opening vicinity fan B700 is arranged behind the rear edge (side j shown in FIG. 25) of the right opening B400a by the thickness of the front engaging portion B421 in the front-rear direction. Therefore, since the opening vicinity fan B700 is located in a position further back than the right opening B400a, even if liquid enters from the right opening B400a of the projector cover B1, the liquid is unlikely to be directly applied to the opening vicinity fan B700. It's like On the other hand, since the opening vicinity fan B700 is arranged close to the right opening B400a, air is easily taken in from the outside of the projector cover B1 through the right opening B400a. As a result, the heat generated in the projector device B2 can be efficiently discharged.

While the left rear engaging portion B622 and the right rear engaging portion B623 of the duct cover B600 are configured separately, the front engaging portion B621 is connected without being separated from the left and right portions. shape. As a result, even if liquid enters from the right opening B400a of the projector cover B1, it is difficult for the liquid to enter the rear.

Also, the length of the rear edge (side j shown in FIG. 25) of the right opening B400a in the projector cover B1, the length in the left-right direction of the front engaging portion B621 in the duct cover B600, and the left rear engagement in the duct cover B600 The length from the left end of the portion B622 to the right end of the right rear engaging portion B623, the left-right length of the front engaging portion B421 on the projector cover B1, and the left-right length of the rear engaging portion B422 on the projector cover B1. In addition, the lengths in the left-right direction of the opening vicinity fan B700 are all substantially equal. As a result, the midway space from the right opening B400a of the projector cover B1 to the space P1 (see FIG. 35) (the cross section when the space P1 is cut along the vertical plane in the left-right direction) is substantially eliminated by the opening vicinity fan B700. It is buried. In this respect as well, the maximum area of the air passing portion is ensured, and the cooling efficiency of the projector device B2 can be enhanced.

<Liquid storage and discharge>
FIG. 40 is a left perspective view of a state in which the blind and the duct cover are attached. FIG. 41 is a rear perspective view of the projector cover, blinds, and duct cover. 42 is an exploded perspective view of the projector cover, blinds and duct cover shown in FIG. 41. FIG. Figure 43 is an exploded perspective view of the blind and duct cover;

FIG. 43 shows the blind B500 viewed from the front and above, and the duct cover B600 viewed from the rear and below.

As described above, of the space P (see FIG. 32) formed by the projector cover B1 and the blind B500, the space P2 (see FIG. 35) below the duct cover B600 enters the interior of the projector cover B1. It is possible to store liquid (see Figure 36).

As described with reference to FIG. 30, the blind B500 includes a first horizontal portion B501, a first inclined portion B502a, a second horizontal portion B502b, a second inclined portion B502c, a third horizontal portion B502d, and a small room B507. is formed. As a result, while increasing the volume of liquid that can be stored, it is possible to secure a space for arranging the screen device C (see FIG. 5) below the blind B500 and maintain the strength of the blind B500. there is

In particular, in the present embodiment, the presence of the small chamber B507 increases the strength of the blind B500 and allows liquid to be stored in the small chamber B507 as well. That is, as described above, the notch 507c is formed in the small chamber B507, and when the amount of liquid stored exceeds a certain amount, the liquid flows into the small chamber B507 through the notch 507c. In this way, by storing the liquid in the small chambers B507 provided as ribs, the space inside the blind B500 is effectively utilized.

As shown in FIG. 40, the duct cover B650 has a shape in which the left front corner portion of the top view rectangular shape is cut away. For the sake of clarity, FIG. 40 shows the duct cover B650 hatched. As described with reference to FIG. 33, the duct cover B600 is arranged along the front wall portion B507a and the outer wall portion B507b (see FIG. 30) of the small room B507 when viewed from above. On the other hand, the duct cover B650 is shorter in the longitudinal direction than the duct cover B600, and the rear end of the duct cover B650 is positioned forward of the small room B507.

Although not shown, the rear end of the duct cover B650 is positioned from the surface B402b (see FIG. 29) existing behind the cavity B402 (see FIG. 26) of the projector cover B1, that is, from the side N of the opening B510 shown in FIG. are also placed behind. As a result, the duct cover B650, like the duct cover B600, separates the internal space Q of the projector cover B1 from the storage space (space P2) for the liquid L, and the liquid L flows through the opening B510 into the projector cover B1. Intrusion into the internal space Q (inside the case B22) is less likely to occur.

Here, the liquid stored in the blind B500 is discharged using a discharge mechanism provided with a tube communicating from the blind B500 to the outside of the gaming machine 1 . The tube is inserted into the blind B500 by passing through the liquid discharge hole S. The liquid discharge hole S will be described below.

As shown in FIG. 41, the liquid discharge hole S is provided on the back side of the irradiation unit B. As shown in FIG. Specifically, as shown in FIGS. 42 and 43, the liquid discharge holes S are the wiring opening B411 of the projector cover B1, the wiring opening B510a and the wiring opening B511a of the blind B500, and the rear side of the duct cover B600. and a side portion B630 (see FIG. 37).

The wiring opening B411 is formed as a notch with an open bottom in the rear side wall portion B410 forming the rear surface of the projector cover B1.

The wiring opening B510a is formed as a notch with an open top in the first rear side wall portion B510 forming the rear surface of the blind B500. The wiring opening B511a is formed as a notch with an open top in the second rear side wall portion B511 formed in front of the first rear side wall portion B510 of the blind B500. The second rear side wall portion B511 is formed so as to stand from the rear end of a horizontal plane B508 formed continuously rearward from the upper end of the rear wall portion B503. The first rear side wall portion B510 is formed to stand from the rear end of a horizontal plane B509 that is continuously formed rearward from the lower end of the second rear side wall portion B511.

The rear side portion B630 of the duct cover B600 has a back surface B631, and downward protrusions B632a and B632b projecting downward from both left and right edges of the surface B631. The downward projecting portion B632a and the downward projecting portion B632b are opposed to each other so as to be substantially parallel with a certain distance therebetween, and a space is formed between the downward projecting portion B632a and the downward projecting portion B632b. .

When the projector cover B1, the blind B500, and the duct cover B600 are assembled, the wiring opening B411 of the projector cover B1, the wiring opening B510a and the wiring opening B511a of the blind B500, and the downward protrusion of the duct cover B600. The space formed between the B632a and the downward projecting portion B632b overlaps when viewed from the rear. A hole S) is formed. Since the duct cover B650 does not have the rear side portion B630 (see FIG. 40), the right liquid discharge hole S of the two liquid discharge holes S shown in FIG. , and the wiring opening B510a and the wiring opening B511a of the blind B500.

A tube for discharging the liquid stored in the blind B500 is inserted through the liquid discharge hole S, and various functional parts (sub-control device SS, etc.) other than the irradiation unit B are connected to the projector device B2, etc. Wiring for doing is also inserted. The wires are connected to the projector device B2 and the opening vicinity fan B700 by passing through the wiring openings B640a and B640b (see FIG. 37).

Here, the wiring openings B640a and B640b are formed outside (near the right end) of the duct cover B600. It is located at a distance from the opening B510 (see FIG. 36) that opens toward it. This makes it difficult for the liquid stored in the blind B500 to enter the internal space Q (inside the case B22) of the projector cover B1 via the wiring openings B640a and B640b.

The gaming machine 1 according to the second embodiment has been described above as one embodiment of the present invention.

2. Description of the Related Art Conventionally, there has been known a gaming machine capable of producing an effect by displaying an image projected by a projection device such as a projector on a screen (see Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2012-147828). According to such a game machine, it is possible to display images on the same level as a liquid crystal display device, and at the same time, compared to a liquid crystal display device or the like, it is possible to reduce the cost when the display surface is enlarged. Further, by appropriately changing the shape of the screen, it becomes possible to express images that cannot be achieved with a liquid crystal display device.

However, the projection device tends to generate heat and reach a high temperature more easily than a liquid crystal display device or the like.

SUMMARY OF THE INVENTION It is an object of the present invention to provide a gaming machine capable of efficiently dissipating heat generated by a projection device capable of projecting images. and

In this respect, the gaming machine 1 according to the second embodiment has the following features.

(3-1) a screen (fixed screen mechanism D, front screen mechanism E1, reel screen mechanism F1);
a projector (projector device B2) that projects light for displaying an image on the screen;
a cover member (projector cover B1 and blind B500) arranged to surround the projector;
a main body (cabinet G) having an opening on the front;
an opening/closing door (upper door mechanism UD) provided with a display area (upper display window UD1) for allowing an image displayed on the screen to be visible;
a fan (opening vicinity fan B700) arranged inside the cover member;
a partition member (duct cover B600) that partitions the internal space of the cover member,
The cover member has a first opening (right opening B400a) opened toward the outer space of the cover member and a first space (space Q) formed inside the cover member. A second opening (opening B510) is formed,
The partition member partitions a space communicating with the first opening inside the cover member into a second space (space P1) and a third space (space P2),
the first space and the second space communicate through the second opening;
The fan is arranged in the second space,
The projector is arranged in the first space,
A gaming machine characterized by:

According to the gaming machine 1 according to the second embodiment, the cover member (projector cover B1 and blind B500) arranged to surround the projector (projector device B2) includes the cover member (projector cover B1 and blind B500). A first opening (right opening B400a) opened toward the external space, and a second opening opened toward the internal space (first space (space Q)) of the cover member (projector cover B1 and blind B500). An opening (opening B510) is formed. The space communicating from the first opening (right opening B400a) inside the cover member (projector cover B1 and blind B500) is divided into a second space (space P1) and a third space ( It is partitioned into a space P2). The first space (space Q) and the second space (space P1) communicate through a second opening (opening B510). The projector (projector device B2) is arranged in the first space (space Q), and the fan (opening vicinity fan B700) is arranged in the second space (space P1). As a result, air can be moved between the outer space and the inner space of the cover member (projector cover B1 and blind B500) via the second space (space P1). The heat generated by the projector (projector device B2) can be efficiently released through the flow of .

On the other hand, since the fan (opening vicinity fan B700) is arranged in the second space (space P1), provisionally, through the first opening (right opening B400a), cover members (projector cover B1 and Even if foreign matter enters the interior of the blind B500), the presence of the fan (opening vicinity fan B700) causes the foreign matter to enter the direction (first space (space) where the projector (projector device B2) is arranged. Intrusion into Q) side) can be made less likely. Furthermore, the third space (space P2) is separated from the second space (space P1) (space communicating with the first space (space Q) in which the projector (projector device B2) exists) with a partition member (duct cover B600). ), if a foreign object enters the third space (space P2), the foreign object enters the second space (space P1) from the third space (space P2). You can prevent it from slipping. As a result, the projector (projector device B2) can be protected from foreign matter such as liquid that has entered from the outside of the gaming machine, and the cause of the projector (projector device B2) breaking down can be eliminated. Security can be improved by suppressing unauthorized access through the opening (right opening B400a).

(4-1) a screen (fixed screen mechanism D, front screen mechanism E1, reel screen mechanism F1);
a projector (projector device B2) that projects light for displaying an image on the screen;
a cover member (projector cover B1 and blind B500) arranged to surround the projector;
a main body (cabinet G) having an opening on the front;
an opening/closing door (upper door mechanism UD) provided with a display area (upper display window UD1) for allowing an image displayed on the screen to be visible;
a fan (opening vicinity fan B700) arranged inside the cover member,
The cover member has a first opening (right opening B400a) opened toward the outer space of the cover member and a first space (space Q) formed inside the cover member. A second opening (opening B510) is formed,
The first space and a second space (space P) communicating from the first opening inside the cover member communicate through the second opening,
The projector is arranged in the first space,
A fan installation member (duct cover B600) for installing the fan is provided in the second space,
The fan is sandwiched between the inner portion of the cover member and the fan installation member in the second space,
A gaming machine characterized by:

According to the gaming machine 1 according to the second embodiment, the cover member (projector cover B1 and blind B500) arranged to surround the projector (projector device B2) includes the cover member (projector cover B1 and blind B500). A first opening (right opening B400a) opened toward the external space, and a second opening opened toward the internal space (first space (space Q)) of the cover member (projector cover B1 and blind B500). An opening (opening B510) is formed. The first space (space Q) and the second space (space P) (the space communicated from the first opening (right opening B400a) inside the cover member (projector cover B1 and blind B500)) are communicated through an opening (opening B510). The projector (projector device B2) is arranged in the first space (space Q), and the fan (opening vicinity fan B700) is arranged in the second space (space P). As a result, air can be moved between the outer space and the inner space of the cover member (projector cover B1 and blind B500) via the second space (space P). The heat generated by the projector (projector device B2) can be efficiently released through the flow of . In particular, the second space (space P) is provided with a fan installation member (duct cover B600) for installing a fan (opening vicinity fan B700), and the fan (opening vicinity fan B700) is , and is sandwiched between the inner portion of the cover member (projector cover B1 and blind B500) and the fan installation member (duct cover B600) in the second space (space P). In this regard, if a structure such as screws and claws is separately provided when installing the fan (opening vicinity fan B700), a new space (in the left-right direction) is required for the structure. On the other hand, according to the gaming machine 1 according to the second embodiment, it is possible to install the fan (opening vicinity fan B700) in a space-saving manner, and the passage of air in the second space (space P) is possible. The maximum possible space can be secured. As a result, it is possible to increase the efficiency of air movement between the outer space and the inner space of the cover member (projector cover B1 and blind B500), and the function of the fan (opening vicinity fan B700) can be maximized. At the same time, the cooling effect of the projector (projector device B2) can be improved.

(4-2) The gaming machine of (4-1) above,
The fan installation member is formed with a fan installation portion (fan installation structure B620) having a shape corresponding to the shape of the air passage portion (air passage portion B710) of the fan.
It is characterized by

According to the gaming machine 1 according to the second embodiment, the fan installation portion (fan installation structure B620) has a shape corresponding to the shape of the air-passable portion (air passage portion B710) of the fan (opening vicinity fan B700). , it is possible to prevent the passage of air from being obstructed by the fan installation portion (fan installation structure B620). As a result, the cooling effect of the projector (projector apparatus B2) can be further improved while maximizing the suction force of the fan (opening vicinity fan B700).

(5-1) a screen (fixed screen mechanism D, front screen mechanism E1, reel screen mechanism F1);
a projector (projector device B2) that projects light for displaying an image on the screen;
a cover member (projector cover B1 and blind B500) arranged to surround the projector;
a main body (cabinet G) having an opening on the front;
an opening/closing door (upper door mechanism UD) attached to the main body so as to be openable and closable and provided with a display area (upper display window UD1) for making an image displayed on the screen visible; ,
The cover member has a first opening (right opening B400a) opened toward the outer space of the cover member and a first space (space Q) formed inside the cover member. A second opening (opening B510) is formed,
The first space and a second space (space P) communicating from the first opening inside the cover member communicate through the second opening,
The projector is arranged in the first space,
The second space can store liquid by being closed at the bottom,
The cover member further includes wiring openings (the wiring opening B411 of the projector cover B1 and the wiring opening B411 of the projector cover B1 and the wiring of the blind B500) for inserting the wiring that connects the equipment arranged outside the cover member and the projector. an opening B510a for wiring and an opening B511a for wiring are formed,
the second space and the outer space of the cover member communicate with each other through the wiring opening,
A mechanism (a tube provided in a discharge mechanism) for discharging the liquid stored in the second space to the outside of the cover member can be inserted through the wiring opening,
A gaming machine characterized by:

According to the gaming machine 1 according to the second embodiment, the cover member (projector cover B1 and blind B500) arranged to surround the projector (projector device B2) includes the cover member (projector cover B1 and blind B500). A first opening (right opening B400a) opened toward the external space, and a second opening opened toward the internal space (first space (space Q)) of the cover member (projector cover B1 and blind B500). An opening (opening B510) is formed. The first space (space Q) and the second space (space P) (the space communicated from the first opening (right opening B400a) inside the cover member (projector cover B1 and blind B500)) are communicated through an opening (opening B510). The projector (projector device B2) is arranged in the first space (space Q). As a result, air can be moved between the outer space and the inner space of the cover member (projector cover B1 and blind B500) via the second space (space P). The heat generated by the projector (projector device B2) can be efficiently released through the flow of .

Further, according to the game machine 1 according to the second embodiment, the cover member (projector cover B1 and blind B500) includes a device and a projector (projector device) arranged outside the cover member (projector cover B1 and blind B500). B2) are formed with wiring openings (the wiring opening B411 of the projector cover B1, and the wiring opening B510a and the wiring opening B511a of the blind B500) for inserting the wiring connecting the second space. (Space P) and the external space of the cover member (projector cover B1 and blind B500) are the wiring openings (the wiring opening B411 of the projector cover B1 and the wiring opening B510a and the wiring opening B511a of the blind B500). communicated through The second space (space P) can store the liquid by closing the lower part thereof, while the liquid stored in the second space (space P) is blocked by the wiring opening (projector cover). It is possible to discharge to the outside of the cover member (the projector cover B1 and the blind B500) through the wiring opening B411 of B1 and the wiring openings B510a and B511a of the blind B500. As a result, if a liquid (such as a drink poured by a player) enters the inside of the cover member (projector cover B1 and blind B500) from the outside of the game machine through the first opening (right opening B400a). Even in the case of the second space (space P), the liquid can be retained in the second space (space P), and the liquid is prevented from entering equipment outside the second space (space P). can do. In addition, by properly discharging the stored liquid from the wiring openings (the wiring opening B411 of the projector cover B1, and the wiring opening B510a and the wiring opening B511a of the blind B500), the liquid storage amount can be reduced to a certain limit or less. It is possible to keep As a result, the excess liquid is accumulated in the second space (space P), and the liquid enters the installation space (first space) of the projector (projector device B2). situation can be avoided. Thus, according to the gaming machine 1 according to the second embodiment, it is possible to prevent the projector (projector device B2) and other devices from being damaged by the liquid. Since the internal temperature of the gaming machine 1 is relatively high (approximately 60° C.), the stored liquid naturally evaporates if left undisturbed without being discharged using the mechanism described above. Therefore, it is not essential to provide the ejection mechanism, and the cover member (projector cover B1 and blind B500) has wiring openings (wiring opening B411 of projector cover B1, wiring opening B510a of blind B500 and wiring opening B411). The opening B511a) may not be formed.

(6-1) a screen (fixed screen mechanism D, front screen mechanism E1, reel screen mechanism F1);
a projector (projector device B2) that projects light for displaying an image on the screen;
a cover member (projector cover B1 and blind B500) arranged to surround the projector;
a main body (cabinet G) having an opening on the front;
an opening/closing door (upper door mechanism UD) provided with a display area (upper display window UD1) for allowing an image displayed on the screen to be visible;
a fan (opening vicinity fan B700) arranged inside the cover member,
The cover member has a first opening (right opening B400a) opened toward the outer space of the cover member and a first space (space Q) formed inside the cover member. A second opening (opening B510) is formed, and an opening edge (projector cover A front engaging portion B421) of B1 is formed,
The first space and a second space (space P) communicating from the first opening inside the cover member communicate through the second opening,
The projector is arranged in the first space,
The fan is arranged to contact the opening edge in the second space,
A gaming machine characterized by:

According to the gaming machine 1 according to the second embodiment, the cover member (projector cover B1 and blind B500) arranged to surround the projector (projector device B2) includes the cover member (projector cover B1 and blind B500). A first opening (right opening B400a) opened toward the external space, and a second opening opened toward the internal space (first space (space Q)) of the cover member (projector cover B1 and blind B500). An opening (opening B510) is formed. The first space (space Q) and the second space (space P) (the space communicated from the first opening (right opening B400a) inside the cover member (projector cover B1 and blind B500)) are communicated through an opening (opening B510). The projector (projector device B2) is arranged in the first space (space Q), and the fan (opening vicinity fan B700) is arranged in the second space (space P). As a result, air can be moved between the outer space and the inner space of the cover member (projector cover B1 and blind B500) via the second space (space P). The heat generated by the projector (projector device B2) can be efficiently released through the flow of . In particular, the cover member (projector cover B1 and blind B500) has a part of the peripheral edge (side j shown in FIG. 25) of the first opening (right opening B400a) to the inner side of the cover member (projector cover B1 and blind B500). The opening edge (the front engaging portion B421 of the projector cover B1) is formed continuously toward the opening edge (the front engaging portion B421 of the projector cover B1). It is arranged so as to abut against the front engaging portion B421) of B1. As a result, if a foreign substance such as a liquid (for example, a drink poured by a player) enters the inside of the cover member (projector cover B1 and blind B500) through the first opening (right opening B400a) Even so, it is possible to prevent the foreign matter from coming into direct contact with the fan (opening vicinity fan B700). On the other hand, by moving the installation position of the fan (opening vicinity fan B700) as close to the first opening (right opening B400a) as possible, the outer space and the inner space of the cover member (projector cover B1 and blind B500) are separated. It is possible to smoothly move the air between and improve the cooling effect of the projector (projector device B2).

In the second embodiment, when the display unit A is attached to the cabinet G, the front portion of the irradiation unit B protrudes forward of the cabinet G, and the portion of the irradiation unit B protruding from the cabinet G is the upper door mechanism UD (Fig. 1) was explained as being housed in In this way, when the front portion of the irradiation unit B protrudes forward of the cabinet G, it is desirable to employ a configuration in which the upper door mechanism UD is attached to the cabinet G as shown in FIG.

FIG. 44 is a diagram for explaining how to attach the upper door mechanism to the cabinet. According to this configuration, the hook UD120 is a member that protrudes rearward from the upper door mechanism UD, and is attached to the upper door mechanism UD by screwing. On the other hand, the inner surface of the side wall G2 of the cabinet G is provided with an inwardly projecting member G2a (for example, a screw or the like screwed into the inner surface of the side wall G2).

When attaching the upper door mechanism UD to the cabinet G (closing the upper door mechanism UD with respect to the cabinet G), first, the lower surface of the upper wall of the upper door mechanism UD is placed on the upper surface of the front projecting member G120 and hooked. The notch of the portion UD120 is hooked on the inner surface side protruding member G2a. By closing the lower door mechanism DD with respect to the cabinet G in this state, the upper door mechanism UD is pushed backward by the lower door mechanism DD. As a result, the upper door mechanism UD is also closed with respect to the cabinet G. By adopting such a configuration, the internal space of the upper door mechanism UD and the cabinet G can be effectively utilized.

In the second embodiment, air flows between the internal space and the external space of the gaming machine 1 through the opening formed in the upper wall of the upper door mechanism UD. Alternatively, the air may flow through an opening G41 (see FIG. 1) formed in the top wall G4 of the cabinet G. In this case, for example, when the display unit A is attached to the cabinet G, the opening G41 formed in the top wall G4 of the cabinet G should be positioned right above the opening B400 of the projector cover B1.

In addition, in order to minimize the amount of foreign matter entering inside the gaming machine 1 from the opening formed above the opening B400 of the projector cover B1 (the opening formed in the upper door mechanism UD or the cabinet G), the opening is should be smaller than the opening B400 of the projector cover B1, and the opening should be provided with some measures (for example, installation of a mesh structure similar to the punching B450) to prevent foreign matter from entering. desirable.

Further, in the second embodiment, the intake fans 244A and 244B are provided in the projector device B2 (inside the case B22), and the opening vicinity fan B700 is provided outside the projector device B2 (inside the projector cover B1). is arranged. In the present invention, the arrangement position of the fan is not particularly limited, and the fan is provided only in the projector device B2 (inside the case B22), and the fan is provided outside the projector device B2 (inside the projector cover B1). It may not be arranged. Conversely, the fan may be provided only outside the projector device B2 (inside the projector cover B1), and not provided in the projector device B2 (inside the case B22).

FIG. 45 is a diagram for explaining the arrangement positions of the intake fan and the exhaust fan. In this modified example, the configurations of the projector cover B1 and the blinds B500 are slightly different from those in the second embodiment. Since the basic configuration is the same, detailed description will be omitted. A sloped portion B502 is formed in place of , and a small room B507 is not formed. In addition, the rear wall portion B503 of the blind B500 is positioned further forward than in the second embodiment, and the front side surface of the rear wall portion B503 is continuous with the surface B402b present behind the cavity B402 of the projector cover B1. .

The intake fan can be arranged at a desired position in the space P (the right space P of the two spaces P) formed by the projector cover B1 and the blind B500.

In FIG. 45, as the arrangement positions of the intake fans, an area surrounded by a dotted line indicated by F(R ₁ ), an area surrounded by a dotted line indicated by F(R ₂ ), and an area surrounded by a dotted line indicated by F(R ₃ ) are shown. and a region surrounded by a dotted line indicated by F(R ₄ ).

The area surrounded by the dotted line indicated by F(R ₁ ) is located near the right opening B510 (see FIG. 36), and when the intake fan is arranged in this area, the intake fan It is close to the intake port B22A (see FIG. 22) provided on the right side of the B22. Thereby, the air taken in from the outside of the projector cover B1 can be efficiently sent into the inside of the case B22 (projector device B2).

The area surrounded by the dotted line indicated by F(R ₂ ) is the area on the right side of the area surrounded by the dotted line indicated by F(R ₁ ), and is the part where the wall surface B401i of the projector cover B1 is extended rearward. When the intake fan is arranged in the region surrounded by the dotted line indicated by F(R ₂ ), the traveling direction of the air that has moved backward in the space P can be smoothly changed inward.

The area surrounded by the dotted line indicated by F(R ₃ ) is the front area of the area surrounded by the dotted line indicated by F(R ₂ ), and is the area below the wall surface B401j (see FIG. 24) of the projector cover B1. be. When the intake fan is arranged in the area surrounded by the dotted line indicated by F(R ₃ ), the air taken into the interior of the projector cover B1 through the opening B400 can smoothly flow rearward. .

The area surrounded by the dotted line indicated by F(R ₄ ) is the front area of the area surrounded by the dotted line indicated by F(R ₃ ) and is the area below the opening B400. When the intake fan is arranged in the area surrounded by the dotted line indicated by F(R ₄ ), air can be smoothly taken into the interior of the projector cover B1.

Also, the exhaust fan can be arranged at a desired position in the space P (the left space P of the two spaces P) formed by the projector cover B1 and the blind B500.

FIG. 45 exemplifies an area surrounded by dotted lines indicated by F(L ₁ ) and an area surrounded by dotted lines indicated by F(L ₂ ) as the arrangement positions of the exhaust fans.

The region surrounded by the dotted line indicated by F(L ₁ ) is located near the left opening B510, and when an exhaust fan is arranged in this region, the exhaust fan is located on the left side of the case B22. It is close to the provided exhaust port B22E (see FIG. 23). As a result, the air warmed by the heat generated by the projector device B2 can be efficiently sent out of the projector device B2.

The area surrounded by the dotted line indicated by F(L ₂ ) is the area below the wall surface B401j of the projector cover B1. When an exhaust fan is arranged in the region surrounded by the dotted line indicated by F(L ₂ ), the traveling direction of the air coming out of the case B22 can be smoothly changed forward.

As for the intake fan and the exhaust fan described above with reference to FIG. 45, both the intake fan and the exhaust fan may be arranged, or only the intake fan may be arranged. Alternatively, only the exhaust fan may be provided.

In addition, the intake fan has an area surrounded by a dotted line indicated by F(R ₁ ), an area surrounded by a dotted line indicated by F(R ₂ ), an area surrounded by a dotted line indicated by F(R ₃ ), and , F(R ₄ ), and may be provided in only one of the regions surrounded by dotted lines, or may be provided in two or more of these regions. good too. The exhaust fan may be arranged only in one of the area surrounded by the dotted line indicated by F(L ₁ ) and the area surrounded by the dotted line indicated by F(L ₂ ), It is good also as arrange|positioning in both area|regions.

It should be noted that in the second embodiment, the description has been made on the assumption that the air flow path indicated by the thick arrow in FIG. 29 is formed inside the projector cover B1. However, the air inside the projector cover B1 does not necessarily have to flow along the path completely.

Air channels that can be formed other than the air channels shown in FIG. 29 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 46 is a diagram showing air flow paths that may be formed inside the projector cover.

As indicated by _an arrow X1 in FIG. 46, for example, air warmed by heat generated by the projector device B2 may flow out of the case B22 through the intake port B22A. The air flowing out from the air intake _B22A in this manner may move to the rear of the projector cover B1 as indicated by the arrow X2. Further, as indicated by an arrow X3 _, there may be an air flow such that the air exiting from the case B22 through the exhaust port B22E goes rearward.

Since the rear of the projector cover B1 is open _, the air that has moved rearward as indicated by arrow _X2 or arrow X3 is discharged to the outside of the projector cover B1. In order to smoothly discharge the air from behind the projector cover B1, an exhaust fan may be provided in the area behind the projector cover B1.

In the second embodiment, the partition members (duct cover B600 and duct cover B650) are provided to separate the air flow path and the liquid storage space. B600 and duct cover B650) are not essential.

According to the game machine 1 according to the modification, the inclined portion B502 has an inclination that descends toward the rear, so the rear portion of the inclined portion B502 is the upper edge B505a (opening 510) is longer than the front portion, and the liquid L is stored in such a rear portion of the inclined portion B502 (a region away from the bottom end of the opening 510). Therefore, even if the duct cover B600 and the duct cover B650 are not provided, it is possible to prevent the liquid R from entering the internal space Q (inside the case B22) of the projector cover B1 through the opening B510. can do.

Furthermore, the gaming machine 1 according to the modification has the following features.

(7-1) a projector capable of projecting an image (projector device B2);
a cover member (projector cover B1 and blind B500) arranged to surround the projector;
a screen (fixed screen mechanism D, front screen mechanism E1, reel screen mechanism F1) capable of displaying images projected by the projector;
a main body (cabinet G) having an opening on the front;
an opening/closing door (upper door mechanism UD) provided with a display area (upper display window UD1) through which the screen can be visually recognized, which is attached to the main body so as to be openable and closable;
The cover member (projector cover B1) has a first opening (the right opening B400 of the two openings B400) and a second opening (the left opening B400 of the two openings B400). An opening B400) of is formed,
Inside the cover member, a first space (the right space P of the two spaces P) is formed communicating with the first opening, and a second space communicating with the second opening is formed. 2 spaces (space P on the left side of the two spaces P) are formed,
The first space opens in a direction different from the upward direction (left direction) by a third opening (the right opening B510 of the two openings B510) formed inside the cover member. On the other hand, the second space is opened in a direction different from the upward direction (right direction) by a fourth opening (the left opening B510 of the two openings B510) formed inside the cover member. and
The first opening (right opening B400) communicates with the third opening (right opening B510), while the second opening (left opening B400) and the fourth opening (left opening B400) communicate with each other. B510) is in communication with
The projector is arranged between the third opening (right opening B510) and the fourth opening (left opening B510),
The cover member (blind B500) includes a lower end portion (horizontal portion B501 and inclined portion B502) that defines the lower end of the first space (right space P), and the lower end portion defines the first opening. It has an inclined portion (inclined portion B502) having an inclination that descends as it moves away from the immediate bottom of
At least part of the inclined portion is located below the lower end of the third opening (the upper edge B505a of the inner wall portion B505),
A gaming machine characterized by:

According to the game machine 1 according to the modification, the cover member (projector cover B1) arranged to surround the projector (projector device B2) has a first opening (right opening B400) opened upward. ) and a second opening (left opening B400). Further, inside the cover member (projector cover B1), a third opening (right opening B510) and a fourth opening (left opening B510) that open in a direction (horizontal direction) different from the upward direction are formed. ing. The first opening (right opening B400) communicates with the third opening (right opening B510), thereby forming a first space (right space P), while the second opening The (left opening B400) and the fourth opening (left opening B510) communicate with each other, thereby forming a second space (left space P). A projector (projector device B2) is arranged between the third opening (right opening B510) and the fourth opening (left opening B510). As a result, the air that has flowed from the outside of the cover member (projector cover B1) through the first opening (right opening B400) flows into the first space (right space P) and the third opening (right opening). B510) via the projector (projector device B2), via the fourth opening (left opening B510) and the second space (left space P) to the second opening (left is emitted to the outside of the cover member (projector cover B1) through the opening B400). When the air passes through the projector (projector device B2), it is warmed by absorbing the heat generated by the projector (projector device B2), and high-temperature air has a property of going upward. Therefore, the air that has passed through the projector (projector device B2) rises in the second space (left space P) and reaches the second opening ( It will be discharged smoothly from the left opening B400). As a result, the heat generated by the projector (projector device B2) can be efficiently released through such air flow, and the cooling efficiency of the projector (projector device B2) can be enhanced.

Further, according to the gaming machine 1 according to the modification, the cover member (blind B500) includes a lower end portion (horizontal portion B501 and inclined portion B502) that defines the lower end of the first space (right space P). In addition, the lower end portion (horizontal portion B501 and inclined portion B502) is provided with an inclined portion (inclined portion B502) that slopes downward as it separates from directly below the first opening (right opening B400). Therefore, when a liquid (such as a drink poured by a player) enters the inside of the cover member (projector cover B1 and blind B500) from the outside of the gaming machine through the first opening (right opening B400). , the liquid flows down the slant portion (slant portion B502) as it moves away from the portion immediately below the first opening (right opening B400). Here, since at least part of the inclined portion (inclined portion B502) is located below the lower end (upper edge B505a of the inner wall portion B505) of the third opening (right opening B510), the liquid is inclined. (inclined portion B502) and reaches below the lower end (upper end edge B505a of the inner wall portion B505) of the third opening (right opening B510), the liquid flows through the third opening (right Since the lower end (the upper edge B505a of the inner wall portion B505) exists upward, the liquid hardly passes through the third opening (the opening B510 on the right side), and the liquid passes through the projector It is difficult for the user to intrude into the direction where (projector device B2) is arranged. In this way, according to the game machine 1 according to the modified example, it is possible to protect the projector (projector device B2) from foreign matter such as liquid that enters from the outside of the game machine.

(7-2) The gaming machine of (7-1) above,
Above the first opening and the second opening, a fifth opening (the right opening G41 of the two openings G41 ) and a sixth opening (the left opening G41 of the two openings G41) are formed,
It is characterized by

According to the game machine 1 according to the modification, the upper surface (upper surface wall G4) of the main body (cabinet G) is provided with the first opening (right opening B400) and the second opening of the cover member (projector cover B1). A fifth opening (right opening G41) and a sixth opening (left opening G41) are formed above each of the openings (left opening B400). As a result, air is taken into the inside of the game machine from above the outside of the game machine through the fifth opening (right opening G41) of the main body (cabinet G), and the air is introduced into the inside of the game machine through the first opening of the cover member (projector cover B1). After letting this air flow into the inside of the cover member (projector cover B1) through the (right opening B400), the air that has passed through the projector (projector device B2) is transferred to the second opening of the cover member (projector cover B1). It can be discharged to the upper part of the game machine through the opening (left opening B400) and the sixth opening (left opening G41) of the main body (cabinet G). As described above, in the game machine 1 according to the modification, the discharge destination of the air heated by passing through the projector (projector device B2) is the outside of the game machine. If the water is discharged from the back side of the game arcade, the island equipment installed in the game arcade may be filled with heat, which may adversely affect the control of the game machine. In addition, if the air is discharged from the side of the game machine, the heated air will be taken into the adjacent game machine, resulting in a vicious circle of warm air between the adjacent game machines. It is considered that the cooling efficiency of (projector device B2) cannot be improved. Furthermore, if the air is discharged to the front of the gaming machine, there is a risk that hot air will be blown to the player's face. In this regard, according to the gaming machine 1 according to the modification, it is possible to create an air flow for releasing heat generated by the projector (projector device B2) without causing such a problem.

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine 1 according to the modification, the fifth opening (right opening G41) and the sixth opening (left opening G41) exists above the first opening (right opening B400) and the second opening (left opening B400) formed in the cover member (projector cover B1), so the fifth opening ( When a foreign object enters from the outside of the game machine through the right opening G41) or the sixth opening (left opening G41), the foreign object enters the first opening (right opening B400) or the second opening. It is easy to enter the cover member (projector cover B1 and blind B500) through the opening (left opening B400). Therefore, there is concern that foreign matter that has entered the inside of the cover member (projector cover B1 and blind B500) may reach the projector (projector device B2) and adversely affect the projector (projector device B2). For example, when the player pours a drink through the fifth opening (right opening G41), the drink passes through the first space (right space P) and the third opening (right opening B510). If the virus penetrates into the interior of the projector (projector device B2), the projector (projector device B2) may break down. In this respect, according to the game machine 1 according to the modification, the cover member (projector cover B1 and the blind B500), the liquid flows along the inclined portion (the inclined portion B502) as described above, so that such a situation does not occur. can be prevented.

(7-3) The gaming machine of (7-1) or (7-2),
A space whose bottom is closed is formed by the inclined portion (the inclined portion B502) and the wall portions (the rear wall portion B503, the outer wall portion B504, and the inner wall portion B505) that are continuous with the inclined portion.
It is characterized by

According to the gaming machine 1 according to the modification, the inclined portion (inclined portion B502) and the wall portion (rear wall portion B503, outer wall portion B504, and inner wall portion B505) continuous with the inclined portion (inclined portion B502) Since the closed space is formed, the liquid flowing down the inclined portion (the inclined portion B502) can be stored in the space. As a result, as long as the liquid surface of the stored liquid is below the lower end (upper edge B505a of the inner wall portion B505) of the third opening (right opening B510), the third opening (right opening B510) It is possible to prevent liquid from entering the installation space of the projector (projector device B2) through the .

(8-1) a projector capable of projecting an image (projector device B2);
a cover member (projector cover B1 and blind B500) arranged to surround the projector;
a screen (fixed screen mechanism D, front screen mechanism E1, reel screen mechanism F1) capable of displaying images projected by the projector;
a main body (cabinet G) having an opening on the front;
an opening/closing door (upper door mechanism UD) provided with a display area (upper display window UD1) through which the screen can be visually recognized, which is attached to the main body so as to be openable and closable;
The cover member (projector cover B1) has a first opening (the right opening B400 of the two openings B400) and a second opening (the left opening B400 of the two openings B400). An opening B400) of is formed,
Inside the cover member, a first space (the right space P of the two spaces P) is formed communicating with the first opening, and a second space communicating with the second opening is formed. 2 spaces (space P on the left side of the two spaces P) are formed,
The first space opens in a direction different from the upward direction (left direction) by a third opening (the right opening B510 of the two openings B510) formed inside the cover member. On the other hand, the second space is opened in a direction different from the upward direction (right direction) by a fourth opening (the left opening B510 of the two openings B510) formed inside the cover member. and
The first opening (right opening B400) communicates with the third opening (right opening B510), while the second opening (left opening B400) and the fourth opening (left opening B400) communicate with each other. B510) is in communication with
The projector is arranged between the third opening (right opening B510) and the fourth opening (left opening B510).
A gaming machine characterized by:

According to the game machine 1 according to the modification, the cover member (projector cover B1) arranged to surround the projector (projector device B2) has a first opening (right opening B400) opened upward. ) and a second opening (left opening B400). Further, inside the cover member (projector cover B1), a third opening (right opening B510) and a fourth opening (left opening B510) that open in a direction (horizontal direction) different from the upward direction are formed. ing. The first opening (right opening B400) communicates with the third opening (right opening B510), thereby forming a first space (right space P), while the second opening The (left opening B400) and the fourth opening (left opening B510) communicate with each other, thereby forming a second space (left space P). A projector (projector device B2) is arranged between the third opening (right opening B510) and the fourth opening (left opening B510). As a result, the air that has flowed from the outside of the cover member (projector cover B1) through the first opening (right opening B400) flows into the first space (right space P) and the third opening (right opening). B510) via the projector (projector device B2), via the fourth opening (left opening B510) and the second space (left space P) to the second opening (left is emitted to the outside of the cover member (projector cover B1) through the opening B400). When the air passes through the projector (projector device B2), it is warmed by absorbing the heat generated by the projector (projector device B2), and high-temperature air has a property of going upward. Therefore, the air that has passed through the projector (projector device B2) rises in the second space (left space P) and reaches the second opening ( It will be discharged smoothly from the left opening B400). As a result, the heat generated by the projector (projector device B2) can be efficiently released through such air flow, and the cooling efficiency of the projector (projector device B2) can be improved.

(8-2) The gaming machine of (8-1) above,
The projector includes a first vent (air intake B22A), a second vent (exhaust vent B22E), and a fan (air intake) disposed between the first vent and the second vent. and fans 244A and 244B) for
While the first ventilation port (intake port B22A) and the third opening (right side opening B510) face each other, the second ventilation port (exhaust port B22E) and the fourth opening (left side opening) B510), the projector is arranged so as to face
It is characterized by

According to the gaming machine 1 according to the modification, the projector (projector device B2) is provided with the first ventilation port (intake port B22A) and the second ventilation port (exhaust port B22E). Fans (intake fans 244A and 244B) are provided between the air inlet (air inlet B22A) and the second air outlet (air outlet B22E), and the first air outlet (air inlet B22A) is the first 3 (right opening B510) and the second vent (exhaust port B22E) faces the fourth opening (left opening B510). By forcibly inhaling air using fans (intake fans 244A and 244B), the air flow as described above can be created smoothly.

(8-3) The gaming machine of (8-1) or (8-2),
Above the first opening and the second opening, a fifth opening (the right opening G41 of the two openings G41 ) and a sixth opening (the left opening G41 of the two openings G41) are formed,
wherein the projector is housed in the main body so as to be arranged above the screen;
It is characterized by

According to the game machine 1 according to the modification, the upper surface (upper surface wall G4) of the main body (cabinet G) is provided with the first opening (right opening B400) and the second opening of the cover member (projector cover B1). A fifth opening (right opening G41) and a sixth opening (left opening G41) are formed above each of the openings (left opening B400). As a result, air is taken into the inside of the game machine from above the outside of the game machine through the fifth opening (right opening G41) of the main body (cabinet G), and the air is introduced into the inside of the game machine through the first opening of the cover member (projector cover B1). After letting this air flow into the inside of the cover member (projector cover B1) through the (right opening B400), the air that has passed through the projector (projector device B2) is transferred to the second opening of the cover member (projector cover B1). It can be discharged to the upper part of the game machine through the opening (left opening B400) and the sixth opening (left opening G41) of the main body (cabinet G). As described above, in the game machine 1 according to the modification, the discharge destination of the air heated by passing through the projector (projector device B2) is the outside of the game machine. If the water is discharged from the back side of the game arcade, the island equipment installed in the game arcade may be filled with heat, which may adversely affect the control of the game machine. In addition, if the air is discharged from the side of the game machine, the heated air will be taken into the adjacent game machine, resulting in a vicious circle of warm air between the adjacent game machines. It is considered that the cooling efficiency of (projector device B2) cannot be improved. Furthermore, if the air is discharged to the front of the gaming machine, there is a risk that hot air will be blown to the player's face. In this regard, according to the gaming machine 1 according to the modification, it is possible to create an air flow for releasing heat generated by the projector (projector device B2) without causing such a problem.

Further, according to the gaming machine 1 according to the modification, the projector (projector device B2) is arranged above the screen (fixed screen mechanism D, front screen mechanism E1, reel screen mechanism F1). Cabinet G), and the projector (projector device B2) is placed close to the upper surface of the main body (upper surface wall G4 of cabinet G). Therefore, the distance between the fifth opening (right opening G41) and the sixth opening (left opening G41) formed in the top surface of the main body (top wall G4 of cabinet G) and the projector (projector device B2) is also As a result, the number of members and devices existing between the fifth opening (right opening G41) and sixth opening (left opening G41) and the projector (projector apparatus B2) is relatively small. there is Therefore, in designing a flow path such that the air taken in from the fifth opening (right opening G41) is discharged from the sixth opening (left opening G41) via the projector (projector device B2), There is no need to create a complicated detour route to avoid the members and devices existing in the air flow path, and the air flow path can be designed relatively easily.

As described above, in the embodiment described above, the case where the present invention is applied to a pachislot gaming machine has been described. Modifications in which the present invention is applied to a pachinko game machine will be described below with reference to FIGS. 47 to 51. FIG.

FIG. 47 is a perspective view showing the appearance of a pachinko game machine. FIG. 48 is an exploded perspective view of the pachinko game machine. FIG. 49 is an exploded perspective view showing the decoration unit and the frame member of the pachinko game machine from the front.

As shown in FIGS. 47 and 48, the pachinko game machine 6100 includes a glass door 6111, a wooden frame 6112, a base door 6113, a game board 6114, a plate unit 6115, a shooting device 6122 for shooting game balls, and various control boards. It is composed of a board unit 6123 including a game ball, a ball payout unit that provides a game ball as a game value, and the like.

The glass door 6111 described above is pivotally attached to the base door 6113 so as to be openable and closable. An opening 6116 is formed in the center of the glass door 6111, and the opening 6116 is provided with protective glass 6124 having transparency. A base door 6113 is pivotally attached to the front of the wooden frame 6112 described above.

The dish unit 6115 described above is arranged on the base door 6113 so as to be positioned below the glass door 6111 . The plate unit 6115 is provided with an upper plate 6125 above it and a lower plate 6126 below it. The upper plate 6125 and the lower plate 6126 are formed with payout openings 6131A and 6131B for lending game balls and paying out game balls (prize balls). The balls are discharged, and in particular, game balls to be shot to the game area 6141 are stored in the upper tray 6125 .

The firing device 6122 described above is mounted on the base door 6113 so as to be positioned to the side of the pan unit 6115 . The shooting device 6122 is provided with a shooting handle 6132 that can be operated by the player, and the pachinko game can be played by operating the shooting handle 6132 by the player. When the shooting handle 6132 is gripped by the player and rotated clockwise, power is supplied to the shooting motor according to the rotation angle, and game balls stored in the upper tray 6125 are released. It is fired sequentially on the game board.

The game board 6114 described above is arranged in front of the base door 6113 so as to be positioned behind the protective glass 6124 . The game board 6114 has, on its front surface, a game area 6141 in which the launched game ball can roll. This game area 6141 is an area surrounded by guide rails and the like, in which game balls can roll. In this way, the game ball shot by the shooting device 6122 is guided by the guide rails provided on the game board, moves to the upper part of the game board 6114, and then moves to the upper part of the game board 6114. It will flow down from the top to the bottom of the game board while changing its traveling direction due to collision with.

As shown in FIG. 47, a decoration unit 6258 is provided in the upper area of the front surface of the glass door 6111 . Decoration unit 6258 is arranged to protrude forward of pachinko gaming machine 6100 .

A cavity is formed inside the decoration unit 6258, and the irradiation unit B described in the above embodiment is arranged in the cavity. 47 shows a state in which the interior of the decoration unit 6258 is seen through from above the decoration unit 6258. FIG.

As shown in FIG. 48, a screen device C (see FIG. 5) is arranged on the back side of the game board 6114 . As a result, the screen of the screen device C (the fixed screen mechanism D, the front screen mechanism E1, and the reel screen mechanism F1) is irradiated with the light emitted from the projector device B2 of the irradiation unit B, as in the above-described embodiment. It is possible to do so.

The decoration unit 6258 is attached to the top of the frame member 6211 (see FIG. 49). Although not shown, the frame member 6211 is fixed to the rear side of the glass door 6111 .

As shown in FIG. 49, the irradiation unit B is attached to the top of the frame member 6211. As shown in FIG. By attaching the decoration unit 6258 to the frame member 6211 while the irradiation unit B is attached to the frame member 6211 , the irradiation unit B is housed in the interior space of the decoration unit 6258 .

In addition, on both the left and right sides of the irradiation unit B, a speaker 6152 and a speaker holder 6152A are integrally attached to the upper portion of the frame member 6211 . On the other hand, the decorative unit 6258 is provided with speaker holes 6151A and 6151B on the right and left sides, respectively. The speaker holes 6151A and 6151B are formed as mesh openings.

In the state where the decoration unit 6258 is attached to the frame member 6211, the speaker holes 6151A and 6151B respectively cover the front of the speaker 6152, and the sound generated from the speaker 6152 is transmitted through the speaker holes 6151A and 6151B. It can be released outside the pachinko game machine 6100 .

Here, the speaker hole 6151A also functions as a vent for taking in air from the outside of the pachinko gaming machine 6100 . As shown in FIG. 49, an intake fan 6244 is arranged on the front right side of the irradiation unit B. As shown in FIG. As a result, air is taken into the inside of the pachinko gaming machine 6100 from the outside front of the pachinko gaming machine 6100 via the speaker hole 6151A.

As in the second embodiment, this air is taken into the interior of the projector cover B1 through the opening B400R (the right opening B400 of the two openings B400) of the projector cover B1, and is generated by the projector device B2. It proceeds inside the projector cover B1 while absorbing the heat generated, and exits the projector cover B1 through the opening B400L (the left opening B400 of the two openings B400).

The air coming out of the projector cover B1 passes through the through hole 6245 formed in the frame member 6211, moves backward, and is released from the back side of the pachinko game machine 6100 to the outside.

The air flow described above is indicated by arrows in FIGS. 47 and 49. FIG. In the second embodiment, a case has been described where air is taken in from above the outside of the gaming machine 1 and air is discharged above the outside of the gaming machine 1 . On the other hand, in this modified example, the air is taken in from the outside front of the pachinko gaming machine 6100 and the air is discharged to the outside rear of the pachinko gaming machine 6100 . As described above, in the present invention, the direction of intake and discharge of air for cooling the projector is not particularly limited, and can be appropriately designed according to the layout position of the projector, the structure around the projector, and the like.

Since pachinko machines have a shorter depth in the longitudinal direction than pachislot machines, when another pachinko machine is installed behind one pachinko machine on the same island facility , there is a relatively large space between these pachinko machines. Therefore, even if the air heated by the projector is discharged from the back side of the pachinko game machine, it is considered that the island facilities of the pachinko game machine do not accumulate as much heat as the island facilities of the pachislot machine.

Hereinafter, as another modified example, the case of taking in air from the right side of the pachinko gaming machine 6100 and discharging the air to the left side of the pachinko gaming machine 6100 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 50 is a perspective view showing the appearance of a pachinko game machine.

As shown in FIG. 50, the decoration unit 6258 has an opening 6300R on its right side. As a result, air is taken into the inside of the pachinko gaming machine 6100 from the outside right side of the pachinko gaming machine 6100 via the opening 6300R.

This air is taken into the interior of the projector cover B1 through the opening B400R (the right opening B400 of the two openings B400) of the projector cover B1, and is generated in the projector device B2, as in the modified example described above. It proceeds inside the projector cover B1 while absorbing the heat generated, and exits the projector cover B1 through the opening B400L (the left opening B400 of the two openings B400).

Although not shown in the drawing, an opening (opening 6300L) is also formed on the left side of the decoration unit 6258, similarly to the right side. As a result, the air coming out of the projector cover B1 through the opening B400L is released outside the pachinko game machine 6100 through the opening 6300L.

Such air flow is indicated by arrows in FIG. In this modification, it is conceivable that the heated air may be taken into the adjacent game machine due to the fact that the air discharge direction is set to the side of the game machine. In order to prevent such a situation from occurring, when the direction of air discharge is set to the side of the game machine, for example, the width of the decoration unit 6258 in the left-right direction may be shortened to prevent the occurrence of one pachinko. It is desirable that the exhaust port (opening 6300L) in the game machine and the intake port (opening 6300R) in the pachinko game machine installed next to the pachinko game machine are separated from each other to some extent.

Another modification will be described below with reference to FIG. FIG. 51 is an exploded perspective view of the pachinko game machine.

In the modified example described above, it is assumed that the irradiation unit B is attached to the frame member 6211 . On the other hand, in the example shown in FIG. 51, the irradiation unit B is attached to the base door 6113 . A speaker 6152 is also attached to the base door 6113 . Also in such a modified example, an air flow path similar to that in the example described above can be formed.

Although FIG. 51 shows that the irradiation unit B is attached to the front side of the base door 6113 , the irradiation unit B may be attached to the rear side of the base door 6113 . In the present invention, the irradiation unit B may be installed in front of the game board or may be installed in the rear of the game board. When the irradiation unit B is installed behind the game board, the irradiation unit B can be arranged by forming a space on the back side of the game board and utilizing the space.

For example, an opening is provided in the center of the game board, and the irradiation unit is disposed on the base door, the game board, or other rear member of the pachinko game machine so that the front part of the irradiation unit penetrates through the opening. good too. In that case, the game board of a conventionally existing general pachinko machine (a pachinko machine having an opening in the center of the game board, through which the liquid crystal display device, etc. behind the game board can be seen) can be used as it is. For example, by removing the liquid crystal display device, installing the screen mechanism, and installing the irradiation unit on the rear member of the game board, etc., the irradiation unit and screen mechanism can be installed while maintaining the shape of the game board as before. It is possible to create a new gaming machine with When adopting such a configuration, since a part of the front of the irradiation unit protrudes forward from the game board, it is possible to secure a larger space behind the pachinko game machine. By doing so, it is possible to reduce the temperature rise in the island facility when pachinko game machines with irradiation units are installed in the entire island facility in a small game hall. Furthermore, in front of the irradiation unit visible to the player (for example, around the reflector holding portion B11), a decorative member such as a logo corresponding to the model is arranged, or a small-sized liquid crystal display device for auxiliary decoration. By arranging an illumination board or the like, the irradiation unit can be hidden so that it cannot be seen by the player, and the performance effect can be further enhanced.

In addition, the screen device C may be installed in a state attached to the irradiation unit B, or may be installed in a state separated from the irradiation unit B. FIG.

In the modification described above, the direction of air discharge is the rear or side of the gaming machine, but the air may be discharged from above the gaming machine as in the second embodiment. When the air is discharged upward, for example, an opening for discharge may be formed in the upper surface of the decoration unit 6258 (the glass door 6111). In this case, when the irradiation unit B is installed behind the game board, an opening may be appropriately formed in the game board in order to secure an air passage.

In the present invention, it is possible to appropriately form openings in the member existing on the air flow path according to the direction of taking in air, the direction of discharging air, and the path through which air flows. A tubular duct may be provided according to the air flow path.

In addition, an intake fan and/or an exhaust fan can be appropriately arranged in order to smoothen the flow of air. For example, an intake fan (eg, the intake fan 6244 in FIG. 49) may be provided between an opening for taking in air (eg, an opening 6300R in FIG. 50) and an opening B400R in the projector cover B1. It is possible to dispose an exhaust fan between the opening for discharging (for example, the opening 6300L in FIG. 50) and the opening B400L of the projector cover B1. However, if the fan provided inside the irradiation unit B can sufficiently perform the intake and exhaust, the fan does not have to be provided outside the irradiation unit B.

In the modified example described above, the projector cover B1 described with reference to FIG. 45 is illustrated, but the configuration of the projector cover is not particularly limited. Also, a projector cover having an opening for discharging the air can be used as appropriate. These openings can be formed in any position such as the front, rear, top, bottom, or sides of the projector cover, and the positions for forming the openings are appropriately determined in consideration of the cooling efficiency of the projector. be able to. Furthermore, the projector may be arranged inside the gaming machine in an exposed state without being covered by the projector cover, and the cooling air taken in from the outside of the gaming machine may be supplied directly to the projector (via the projector cover). It can also be configured to hit the

[Third Embodiment]
The first embodiment and the second embodiment have been described above. A third embodiment will be described below. The basic configuration of the gaming machine 1 according to the third embodiment is the same as the gaming machines 1 according to the first and second embodiments. In the following description, the same components as those of the gaming machine 1 according to the first embodiment and the second embodiment are denoted by the same reference numerals. In addition, descriptions of the portions to which the descriptions of the first and second embodiments apply also to the third embodiment will be omitted.

<Display unit 9000>
FIG. 52 is a perspective view showing the appearance of the display unit. FIG. 53 is a perspective view showing the internal structure of the display unit. 54 is a perspective view showing a state in which a projector and a mirror are disassembled from the display unit shown in FIG. 53. FIG. 55 is a perspective view showing how light is projected from the projector when the projector and the mirror are disassembled from the display unit shown in FIG. 52. FIG.

A display unit 9000 shown in FIG. 52 is replaceably placed on the intermediate support plate G1 (see FIG. 5) in the cabinet G, like the display unit A described in the first embodiment.

As shown in FIGS. 52 to 54, the display unit 9000 includes a unit housing 9010, a projector 9020, a mirror 9030, and a cabinet-side screen 9040. FIG.

The unit housing 9010 includes a horizontally arranged bottom plate 9011, a right side plate 9012 standing on the right end of the bottom plate 9011, a left side plate 9013 standing on the left end of the bottom plate 9011, and a rear end of the bottom plate 9011. and a back plate 9014 erected on the part. A right side plate 9012, a left side plate 9013, and a back plate 9014 are connected to a bottom plate 9011 by screwing to form a box-shaped housing with an open front side and a top side.

A projector installation member 9015 for installing the projector 9020 is attached to the back plate 9014 . The projector 9020 is installed in the unit housing 9010 by being engaged with the front portion of the projector installation member 9015 .

The projector 9020 has the same configuration (for example, a lens having the same configuration as the projection lens 210) as the projector device B2 (see FIG. 12) described in the first embodiment, and projects light including an image. It is possible to The projector 9020 is installed so that the lens faces downward, so that the light projected from the projector 9020 travels downward.

A mirror installation portion 9016 for installing a mirror 9030 is formed below the projector installation member 9015 . The mirror installation portion 9016 has inclined sides 9016 a and 9016 b that are inclined from the back plate 9014 to the bottom plate 9011 .

Mirror 9030 has the same configuration as optical mirror B32 (see FIG. 7) described in the first embodiment, and can reflect light projected from projector 9020 . The mirror 9030 is installed along the inclined sides 9016 a and 9016 b of the mirror installation portion 9016 . As a result, the mirror 9030 assumes a tilted posture in which the front side is lower than the rear side.

As a result, the light projected from projector 9020 and traveling downward is reflected forward by mirror 9030 (see FIG. 55). In FIG. 55, the light irradiation range is indicated by oblique lines. Note that the relative positional relationship between projector 9020 and mirror 9030 shown in FIG. 55 corresponds to the state shown in FIG. It is the same as the positional relationship. That is, FIG. 55 is an exploded view showing projector 9020 and mirror 9030 in the state shown in FIG. 53 while maintaining their relative positional relationship.

A front portion of the bottom plate 9011 is erected by fitting a cabinet-side screen 9040 thereon. As a result, the light projected from the projector 9020 and reflected forward by the rear mirror 9030 enters the cabinet-side screen 9040 from the rear (rear side).

The cabinet-side screen 9040 has a rectangular shape when viewed from the front, and is formed to have a uniform thickness over the entire surface. The cabinet-side screen 9040 is of a transmissive type that is displayed by projecting a projection image from the rear. and a display surface 9040b on the front side on which a projection image is projected by transmitting light incident on the surface 9040a. The cabinet-side screen 9040 is mainly made of, for example, a translucent glass plate, an acrylic plate, or a resin film, and exhibits a milky white, translucent, or gray color when not projected.

When the light projected from the projector 9020 is incident on the incident surface 9040a of the cabinet-side screen 9040, an image (still image or moving image) related to the game is displayed on the display surface 9040b of the cabinet-side screen 9040. be done. A moving image is composed of a large number of still images, and is obtained by continuously changing the large number of still images over time. In this specification, moving images and videos are synonymous.

<Relationship between light irradiation range and cabinet-side screen 9040>
FIG. 56 is a diagram showing the relationship between the irradiation range of light projected from the projector and the cabinet-side screen.

In FIG. 56, the cabinet-side screen 9040 (display surface 9040b) is shaded. The irradiation range of light projected from the projector 9020 is wider than that of the cabinet-side screen 9040 . Specifically, the light projected from the projector 9020 is incident on the entire surface of the cabinet-side screen 9040 (incident surface 9040a) (shaded area in FIG. 56) and passes through the peripheral area of the cabinet-side screen 9040. In FIG. 56, the peripheral area of the cabinet-side screen 9040 in the irradiation range of the light projected from the projector 9020 is indicated by oblique lines.

Of the light projected from the projector 9020 , light that has not entered the cabinet-side screen 9040 and has passed through the shaded area in FIG. Part of the light traveling forward from the cabinet-side screen 9040 enters the door-side right screen 9050 and the door-side left screen 9060 of the upper door mechanism UD as described below (Fig. 61 (b) and (c)).

<Upper door mechanism UD>
FIG. 57 is a rear perspective view of the upper door mechanism. FIG. 58 is an exploded perspective view of the upper door mechanism. FIG. 59 is a front perspective view of the upper door mechanism. FIG. 60 is a front view of the game machine.

As described in the first embodiment, the interior of the cabinet G is partitioned into an upper space and a lower space by the intermediate support plate G1 (see FIG. 5). The upper door mechanism UD shown in FIG. 57 is arranged in front of the upper space in the cabinet G, similarly to the upper door mechanism UD (see FIG. 4) according to the first embodiment, and closes the upper part of the opening in the cabinet G. is provided so that

As shown in FIG. 58, the upper door mechanism UD has a panel base HH forming the skeleton of the upper door mechanism UD. Panel mechanisms HA, HB, HC, HD, HE, HF, and HG are provided on the front side of the panel base HH. In addition, the upper door mechanism UD has an upper display window UD1 (see FIG. 3) in the central portion (a position overlapping the cabinet-side screen 9040 when viewed from the front), and the upper display window UD1 has a transparent panel UD11. is provided. As a result, when an image is displayed on the cabinet-side screen 9040, the image can be viewed by the player.

As shown in FIGS. 59 and 60, a door-side right screen 9050 is provided at a slightly recessed position on the right side of the transparent panel UD11 (upper display window UD1). A door-side left screen 9060 is provided at a slightly recessed position on the left side of the transparent panel UD11 (upper display window UD1). The door-side right screen 9050 and the door-side left screen 9060 have substantially the same shape.

The door-side right screen 9050 and the door-side left screen 9060 have a flat screen curved shape (for example, a semi-cylindrical shape obtained by dividing a cylinder in half), and have the reel screen mechanism described in the first embodiment. Similar to the shape of F1 (see FIG. 10) in side view, the shape in top view (bottom view) is an arc shape. The door-side right screen 9050 and the door-side left screen 9060 are formed to have a uniform thickness over the entire surface.

The door-side right screen 9050 and the door-side left screen 9060 are transmissive screens that are displayed by projecting a projection image from behind, similarly to the cabinet-side screen 9040 . The door-side right screen 9050 and the door-side left screen 9060 are made mainly of translucent glass plates, acrylic plates, or resin films, for example, and exhibit a milky white, translucent, or gray color when not projected.

The door-side right screen 9050 has a rear-side incident surface 9050a on which light projected from the projector 9020 is incident, and a front-side display surface 9050b on which a projection image is projected by transmitting the light incident on the incident surface 9050a. , has The door-side left screen 9060 has a rear-side entrance surface 9060a on which light projected from the projector 9020 is incident, and a front-side display surface 9060b on which a projection image is projected by transmitting the light incident on the entrance surface 9060a. , has

The door-side right screen 9050 and the door-side left screen 9060 are arranged so that the center of curvature is on the rear side. That is, the entrance surface 9050a and the display surface 9050b of the door-side right screen 9050, and the entrance surface 9060a and the display surface 9060b of the door-side left screen 9060 are convex to the downstream side in the traveling direction of the light projected from the projector 9020. there is

FIG. 57 shows the positional relationship between the door-side right screen 9050 and the door-side left screen 9060 and the cabinet-side screen 9040 arranged inside the cabinet G when the upper door mechanism UD is closed. In the drawing, the cabinet-side screen 9040 is indicated by phantom lines.

As shown in FIG. 57, the side forming the left end of door-side right screen 9050 (side 9050c shown in FIG. 60) and the side forming the right end of cabinet-side screen 9040 (side 9040c shown in FIG. 52) are adjacent to each other. (or substantially abutting), and the side 9050c of the door-side right screen 9050 is positioned slightly to the right of the side 9040c of the cabinet-side screen 9040 . Further, the side forming the right end of the door-side left screen 9060 (side 9060c shown in FIG. 60) and the side forming the left end of the cabinet-side screen 9040 (side 9040d shown in FIG. ), and the side 9060c of the door-side left screen 9060 is positioned slightly to the left of the side 9040d of the cabinet-side screen 9040. As shown in FIG.

A side 9050c of the door-side right screen 9050, a side 9060c of the door-side left screen 9060, and sides 9040c and 9040d of the cabinet-side screen 9040 are substantially at the same position in the front-rear direction. That is, the rear end (side 9050c) of the door-side right screen 9050 and the rear end (side 9060c) of the door-side left screen 9060 are positioned substantially on the same plane as the display surface 9040b of the cabinet-side screen 9040, respectively. Since the door-side right screen 9050 and the door-side left screen 9060 are curved so as to protrude forward, the door-side right screen 9050 and the door-side left screen 9060 are positioned in front of the cabinet-side screen 9040 as a whole. will be located.

In addition, the side forming the lower end of the door-side right screen 9050 (side 9050d shown in FIG. 60), the side forming the lower end of the door-side left screen 9060 (side 9060d shown in FIG. 60), and the lower end of the cabinet-side screen 9040 (the side 9040e shown in FIG. 52) are substantially the same in the vertical direction (those three sides are positioned substantially on the same plane). In addition, the vertical lengths of the door-side right screen 9050 and the door-side left screen 9060 (sides 9050c and 9060c) are longer than the vertical lengths of the cabinet-side screen 9040 (sides 9040c and 9040d). there is As a result, the door-side right screen 9050 , the door-side left screen 9060 , and the cabinet-side screen 9040 are positioned at substantially the same height at their lower ends, and the door-side right screen 9050 and the door-side left screen 9060 are positioned higher than the cabinet-side screen 9040 . has a taller configuration.

<Display of images on cabinet-side screen 9040, door-side right screen 9050, and door-side left screen 9060>
FIG. 61(a) is a diagram showing the relationship between the irradiation range of light projected from the projector and the cabinet-side screen. FIG. 61(b) is a diagram showing how light that has not entered the cabinet-side screen enters the door-side right screen. FIG. 61(c) is a diagram showing how light that has not entered the cabinet-side screen enters the door-side left screen. 62 and 63 are diagrams for explaining images displayed on the cabinet-side screen, the door-side right screen, and the door-side left screen.

In FIG. 61(a), for convenience, the shaded area in FIG. and region III). Area I is an area located on the right side of the cabinet-side screen 9040 . Region II is a region located on the left side of cabinet-side screen 9040 . A region III is a region located above the cabinet-side screen 9040 . In FIG. 61(a), as in FIG. 56, the cabinet-side screen 9040 (display surface 9040b) is shaded.

As described above, part of the light projected from projector 9020 enters incident surface 9040 a of cabinet-side screen 9040 . As a result, an image is displayed on the display surface 9040b of the cabinet-side screen 9040. FIG.

Further, as shown in FIG. 61(b), of the light projected from the projector 9020, the light that did not enter the cabinet-side screen 9040 and passed through the region I in FIG. incident surface 9050a. As a result, an image is displayed on the display surface 9050b of the door-side right screen 9050. FIG.

Similarly, as shown in FIG. 61(c), of the light projected from the projector 9020, the light that did not enter the cabinet-side screen 9040 and passed through the area II in FIG. 9060 is incident on the incident surface 9060a. As a result, an image is displayed on the display surface 9060b of the door-side left screen 9060. FIG.

As described above, images (still images and moving images related to games) are displayed on the cabinet-side screen 9040, the door-side right screen 9050, and the door-side left screen 9060, respectively. In this embodiment, each image displayed on the three screens (the cabinet-side screen 9040, the door-side right screen 9050, and the door-side left screen 9060) corresponds to one image data, and one image is displayed. The data can be used to display images on each of the three screens.

62 and 63 show such image data. A hatched area (area A) in FIG. 62( a ) contains information indicating an image displayed on the cabinet-side screen 9040 . A hatched area (area B) in FIG. 62( a ) contains information indicating an image displayed on the door-side right screen 9050 . A hatched area (area C) in FIG. 62( a ) contains information indicating an image displayed on the door-side left screen 9060 . The remaining area (area D) in FIG. 62(a) contains information with a pixel value of zero. A pixel value corresponds to the light transmittance of a pixel formed on a liquid crystal panel of the projector 9020 . A pixel value of 0 indicates the minimum light transmittance, and the display surface of the screen corresponding to an area with a pixel value of 0 is black.

FIG. 62(b) shows an example of image data. The image data shown in FIG. 62(b) includes information indicating effect image 9100 in area A, information indicating fireworks image 9101 in area B, and information indicating character image 9102 in area C. FIG. The area corresponding to the hatched portion in the drawing includes information with a pixel value of 0. FIG. By using such image data, an effect image 9100 is displayed on the cabinet-side screen 9040, a firework image 9101 is displayed on the door-side right screen 9050, and a character image 9102 is displayed on the door-side left screen 9060.

As described above, in the present embodiment, the rear end (side 9050c) of the door-side right screen 9050, the rear end (side 9060c) of the door-side left screen 9060, and the display surface 9040b of the cabinet-side screen 9040 are The positions in the front-rear direction are substantially the same. As a result, the cabinet-side screen 9040, the door-side right screen 9050, and the door-side left screen 9060 have approximately the same distance in the front-rear direction from the projector 9020, so that the focal points do not deviate significantly. It has become.

FIG. 63(a) shows another example of image data. The image data shown in FIG. 63(a) includes information indicating effect image 9100 in area A, information indicating decorative image 9110 in area B, and information indicating decorative image 9111 in area C. . The area corresponding to the hatched portion in the drawing includes information with a pixel value of 0. FIG. By using such image data, the effect image 9100 is displayed on the cabinet-side screen 9040, the decorative image 9110 is displayed on the door-side right screen 9050, and the decorative image 9111 is displayed on the door-side left screen 9060. .

FIG. 63(b) shows yet another example of image data. The image data shown in FIG. 63(b) includes information indicating a decorative image 9110 in area B, and information indicating a decorative image 9111 in area C. The image data shown in FIG. The area corresponding to the hatched portion in the drawing contains information with a pixel value of 0. FIG. By using such image data, a decorative image 9110 is displayed on the door-side right screen 9050 and a decorative image 9111 is displayed on the door-side left screen 9060 .

The gaming machine 1 according to the third embodiment has been described above as one embodiment of the present invention.

2. Description of the Related Art Conventionally, there is known a game machine capable of producing effects by using a projector (see Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 6-035066 and Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2009-240459). According to such a gaming machine, a game image is projected from a projector onto a projection surface such as a screen, so that the image is displayed on the screen instead of the liquid crystal display device.

However, in a game machine in which an image is projected onto a screen from such a projector, there is a problem that the presentation is poor due to the flatness of the screen.

SUMMARY OF THE INVENTION It is an object of the present invention to provide a game machine capable of performing a variety of presentations.

In this regard, the gaming machine 1 according to the third embodiment has the following features.

(9-1) screens (cabinet-side screen 9040, door-side right screen 9050, and door-side left screen 9060);
a projector (projector 9020) that projects light for displaying an image on the screen;
The screen is arranged so that light projected by the projector is incident from the back side, and an image can be displayed on the front side by the light incident from the back side,
As the screens, a first screen (cabinet-side screen 9040) and a second screen (door-side right screen 9050 and door-side left screen 9060) arranged to the side, above, or below the first screen in front view. is provided,
In the projector, the first screen, and the second screen, part of the light projected by the projector enters the first screen, while part of the light projected by the projector enters the second screen. arranged so that at least part of the light that does not enter the first screen enters the second screen;
A gaming machine characterized by:

According to the gaming machine 1 according to the third embodiment, the second screen (the door-side right screen 9050 and the door-side left screen 9060) is arranged to the side of the first screen (the cabinet-side screen 9040) in front view. there is Part of the light projected by the projector (projector 9020) is made incident on the first screen (cabinet-side screen 9040), while the light projected by the projector (projector 9020) is projected onto the first screen (cabinet side screen 9040). At least part of the light that does not enter the side screen 9040) can enter the second screen (door-side right screen 9050 and door-side left screen 9060).

Therefore, it is possible to display images on the first screen (cabinet-side screen 9040) and the second screen (door-side right screen 9050 and door-side left screen 9060), respectively, and these images are viewed by the player. In this case, they are displayed in a positional relationship such that they are lined up on the left and right. This allows the player to visually see through the images displayed on these two screens (first screen (cabinet side screen 9040) and second screen (door side right screen 9050 and door side left screen 9060)). It is possible to entertain, and various production expressions can be performed.

(9-2) The gaming machine of (9-1) above,
a main body (cabinet G) housing the first screen (cabinet-side screen 9040) and having an opening on the front;
an opening/closing door (upper door mechanism UD) provided with a display area (upper display window UD1) for allowing an image displayed on the first screen to be visible; with
The second screen (door-side right screen 9050 and door-side left screen 9060) is provided on the opening and closing door,
It is characterized by

In general, the opening and closing doors of game machines are decorated (shaped) in accordance with the machine model, and such decorations incur a large amount of cost. In addition, every time we develop a new model (for each project), if we try to shape the opening and closing doors and change the decoration, the corresponding cost will increase.

In this regard, according to the gaming machine 1 according to the third embodiment, the opening/closing door (upper door mechanism UD) is provided with the second screen (the door-side right screen 9050 and the door-side left screen 9060). By displaying an image (an image similar to the decoration in appearance) on (the door-side right screen 9050 and the door-side left screen 9060), it is necessary to decorate the opening/closing door (upper door mechanism UD) peculiar to the model concerned. You can also get the same visual effect as when you decorate it. Therefore, it is possible to employ a simple opening/closing door (upper door mechanism UD) that does not have any decoration, and the cost for decoration can be suppressed. When developing a new model, there is no need to change the decoration of the opening/closing door (upper door mechanism UD) on a large scale. ) should be prepared. As a result, if the images displayed on the second screen (the door-side right screen 9050 and the door-side left screen 9060) are adapted to the new model, it is possible to obtain the same effect as the decoration change. Cost can be reduced.

In the third embodiment, of the light projected from the projector 9020, the light that has passed through area I (the area located on the right side of the cabinet-side screen 9040) in FIG. , out of the light projected from the projector 9020, light passing through the region II (the region located on the left side of the cabinet-side screen 9040) in FIG. It has been described that the right screen 9050 and the door-side left screen 9060 are respectively arranged. That is, the door-side right screen 9050 and the door-side left screen 9060 (second screen) are arranged on the side of the cabinet-side screen 9040 (first screen) when viewed from the front.

In the present invention, the positional relationship between the first screen (cabinet-side screen) and the second screen is not limited to this example. It may be arranged. For example, while the door-side upper screen is provided above the transparent panel UD11 (upper display window UD1), the light projected from the projector 9020 may be projected in the area III (above the cabinet-side screen 9040) in FIG. area) is incident on the door-side upper screen. Further, while the door-side lower screen is provided below the transparent panel UD11 (upper display window UD1), the light projected from the projector 9020 is located below the cabinet-side screen (for example, FIG. ) facing the area III with the cabinet-side screen 9040 interposed therebetween) may be incident on the door-side lower screen. As the second screen in the present invention, all four screens, that is, the door-side right screen, the door-side left screen, the door-side upper screen, and the door-side lower screen, may be provided, or any of the four screens may be provided. There may be one, two, or three screens of . In addition, a screen arranged on the side of such a cabinet side screen (door side right screen or door side left screen) and a screen arranged above or below the cabinet side screen (door side upper screen or door side lower screen) screen) may be configured as one screen. For example, the door-side right screen, the door-side left screen, and the door-side upper screen may be configured to be integrated.

In the present invention, the arrangement position of the second screen (door-side right screen, door-side left screen, door-side upper screen, and door-side lower screen) in the opening/closing door (upper door mechanism UD) is not particularly limited. That is, the second screen (door-side right screen, door-side left screen, door-side upper screen, and door-side lower screen) is provided in a region adjacent to the first screen (cabinet-side screen) when viewed from the front. Alternatively, it may be provided in a region separated from the first screen (cabinet-side screen) to some extent. For example, the top panel mechanism HA, the upper left panel mechanism HB, the upper right panel mechanism HC, the left side panel mechanism HD, the right side panel mechanism HE (see FIG. 60), etc. are changed in structure, and the position is changed to the door side. An upper screen, a door-side left screen, a door-side right screen, or the like may be provided. As a result, if the light projected from the projector is incident on the back side of these screens and the image is displayed on the front side, the area corresponding to the arrangement position of these panel mechanisms can be used with a model-specific design or Such design and information can be easily changed by displaying model information and appropriately using image data.

The top panel mechanism HA is arranged at the upper end of the upper door mechanism UD, the left lateral panel mechanism HD is arranged at the left end of the upper door mechanism UD, and the right lateral panel mechanism HE is arranged at the right end of the upper door mechanism UD. When the second screen (door-side upper screen, door-side left screen, door-side right screen, etc.) is provided at these positions (area along the outer periphery of the upper door mechanism UD) , it is necessary to widen the irradiation range of the light projected from the projector (see FIG. 56). For example, it is possible to adopt a configuration in which the illumination range is maximized and the entire upper door mechanism UD is illuminated (assuming no cabinet-side screen is provided). In order to widen the irradiation range, for example, the arrangement position and inclination of the mirror 9030 may be adjusted. By adjusting the relative positional relationship between the projector 9020 and the mirror 9030, the irradiation range can be changed as appropriate. Arrangement positions of the panel mechanism HD, the right lateral panel mechanism HE, etc. (the area along the outer periphery of the upper door mechanism UD) are reached (so that the light is irradiated over a wide range of the upper door mechanism UD). It is possible to design As described above, in the present invention, only the portion of the opening/closing door (upper door mechanism UD) that is adjacent to the first screen (cabinet-side screen) when viewed from the front is illuminated by the light projected from the projector. Alternatively, the outer peripheral portion of the opening/closing door (upper door mechanism UD) may be illuminated in a wider range.

In the third embodiment, as an example of image data, area A, area B, and area C shown in FIG. 9101 and character image 9102). The image data used in the present invention is not limited to this example. image data may be used. By using such image data, a part of one image (for example, effect image 9100) is displayed on each of the cabinet-side screen 9040, the door-side right screen 9050, and the door-side left screen 9060. By integrating some of the images displayed in , the one image (for example, the effect image 9100) is configured. Thus, in the present invention, different images are provided on the cabinet-side screen and the screens arranged in the peripheral area (the door-side right screen, the door-side left screen, the door-side upper screen, the door-side lower screen, etc.). may be displayed individually, or the images displayed on each screen may be combined to form a single video representation as a whole.

In addition, in the third embodiment, the door-side right screen 9050 and the door-side left screen 9060 (second screen) are provided in an exposed state on the front side of the game machine 1 (the door-side right screen 9050 and the door-side left screen No other member is provided on the front side of the screen 9060). As a result, when an image is displayed on the door-side right screen 9050 and the door-side left screen 9060, the image can be visually recognized by the player. However, in the present invention, a transparent panel may be provided on the front side of the second screen (door-side right screen and door-side left screen). If it is a transparent panel, it is considered that the image displayed on the second screen is not obstructed from the player's field of vision, and that there is no hindrance to the player's visual recognition of the image. On the other hand, by covering the second screen with the transparent panel, it is possible to secure the rigidity of the game machine and prevent the second screen from being damaged. When the transparent panel is provided, the shape of the transparent panel is not particularly limited, but for example, a transparent panel having unevenness can be adopted. This makes it possible to add a three-dimensional effect to the images displayed on the second screen (door-side right screen and door-side left screen). can be created.

Further, in the third embodiment, the shape of the door-side right screen 9050 and the door-side left screen 9060 has been described as being a shape obtained by bending a flat screen (the shape is an arc when viewed from above). However, the shape of the second screen (door-side right screen, door-side left screen, and door-side upper screen) in the present invention is not particularly limited, and screens having any shape can be appropriately employed. For example, the second screen may be a flat-shaped screen such as the cabinet-side screen 9040, a screen having unevenness, or a rounded-shaped screen. , it may be an angular shaped screen.

[Fourth Embodiment]
The first to third embodiments have been described above. A fourth embodiment will be described below. The basic configuration of the gaming machine 1 according to the fourth embodiment is the same as the gaming machine 1 according to the first to third embodiments. In the following description, the same components as those of the gaming machine 1 according to the first to third embodiments are denoted by the same reference numerals. In addition, the description of the portions that the descriptions of the first to third embodiments apply to the fourth embodiment will be omitted.

<Light irradiation range and screen placement position>
Figure 64 is a vertical cross-sectional view of the upper door mechanism and cabinet.

In FIG. 64, the irradiation range of light projected from the projector 9020 is indicated using a dashed line. As in the third embodiment, the light projected from the projector 9020 travels downward and is then reflected forward by the mirror 9030 (see FIG. 55).

In the third embodiment, it is assumed that part of the light traveling forward in this way enters the cabinet-side screen 9040 (see FIG. 53) from behind (back side). In contrast, in the fourth embodiment, the cabinet-side screen 9040 is not provided, and all the light projected from the projector 9020 reaches the upper door mechanism UD.

As will be described later, the upper door mechanism UD is provided with a screen sheet 1046, a screen sheet 1056, and a screen sheet 1057 (see FIGS. 67 and 68). The light projected from the projector 9020 is incident on each of the screen sheets 1046, 1056, and 1057 from behind (rear side), and an image is displayed on the front side (display surface) of these screen sheets. will be displayed. Details will be described below.

<Upper door mechanism UD>
FIG. 65 is a front perspective view of the upper door mechanism. FIG. 66 is a rear perspective view of the upper door mechanism.

As shown in FIGS. 65 and 66, the upper door mechanism UD is provided with a screen unit 1040, a decoration unit 1050, and an indirect lighting unit 1060. FIG. Each unit will be described below.

<Screen unit 1040>
FIG. 67 is an exploded perspective view of the upper door mechanism. FIG. 68 is an exploded perspective view of the upper door mechanism. FIG. 69 is a rear perspective view of the transparent plate, the screen sheet, the lower pressing member, the upper pressing member, and the lower frame. FIG. 70 is a perspective view of the lower pressing member and the upper pressing member as seen from the front, while the transparent plate and the screen sheet are seen from the rear. FIG. 71 is a perspective view of the upper pressing member and the upper frame as seen from below. FIG. 72 is a perspective view of the translucent plate, the screen sheet, and the lower frame as seen from the rear.

It should be noted that FIG. 67 shows each component of the upper door mechanism UD as viewed obliquely from the front. FIG. 68 shows the components of the upper door mechanism UD as seen obliquely from behind. FIG. 69 shows the transparent plate 1045, the screen sheet 1046, the lower pressing member UD101, and the upper pressing member UD102 assembled together, and the lower frame UD100 existing alone. there is In FIG. 70, the transparent plate 1045 and the screen sheet 1046 are shown assembled, and the lower pressing member UD101 and the upper pressing member UD102 are shown independently. FIG. 71 shows how the upper pressing member UD102 and the upper frame UD110 exist independently. FIG. 72 shows the light-transmitting plate 1045, the screen sheet 1046, and the lower frame UD100 assembled together.

As shown in FIGS. 67 and 68, the screen unit 1040 includes a translucent plate 1045 and a screen sheet 1046. As shown in FIGS.

The light-transmitting plate 1045 is mainly made of resin such as a light-transmitting acrylic plate or a glass plate, and is formed to have a uniform thickness over the entire surface. The light-transmitting plate 1045 includes a flat portion 1045a located in the center, curved portions 1045b continuously formed toward the rear from both left and right side edges of the flat portion 1045a, and curved portions 1045b extending rearward from the rear ends of the curved portions 1045b. and a side portion 1045c formed continuously. The planar portion 1045a and the side portion 1045c are formed in a planar shape, and their surfaces are substantially perpendicular to each other. The curved portion 1045b has a flat plate curved shape, like the door-side right screen 9050 and the door-side left screen 9060 (see FIG. 58) in the third embodiment.

The screen sheet 1046 is a transmissive screen that is displayed by projecting a projection image from behind. ), the projector 9020 has a rear-side entrance surface on which light projected from the projector 9020 is incident, and a front-side display surface on which a projection image is projected by transmitting the light incident on the entrance surface. The screen sheet 1046 is mainly made of, for example, a translucent glass plate, an acrylic plate, or a resin film, and is formed to have a uniform thickness over the entire surface. exhibit color.

The screen sheet 1046 has a flat portion 1046a located in the center and curved portions 1046b continuously formed rearward from both left and right side edges of the flat portion 1046a. The planar portion 1046a is formed in a planar shape, and the curved portion 1046b has a shape in which a flat plate is curved. The plane portion 1046a and the curved portion 1046b of the screen sheet 1046 have substantially the same size and shape as the plane portion 1045a and the curved portion 1045b of the light-transmitting plate 1045, respectively.

The screen sheet 1046 is arranged on the back side of the transparent plate 1045 . Specifically, the rear-side surface of the plane portion 1045a of the light-transmitting plate 1045 and the front-side surface of the plane portion 1046a of the screen sheet 1046 are in close contact with each other, and the rear-side surface of the curved portion 1045b of the light-transmitting plate 1045 , and the front surface of the curved portion 1046b of the screen sheet 1046 are in close contact with each other.

When the light projected from the projector 9020 is incident on the incident surface (surface on the back side) of the screen sheet 1046, an image (still image or moving image) is displayed. The light-transmitting plate 1045 is transparent, and there is no structure in front of the light-transmitting plate 1045 that blocks the view of the player. becomes visible from

Further, the screen sheet 1046 has a flat portion 1046a and a curved portion 1046b, and since the flat portion 1046a and the curved portion 1046b are positioned differently in the depth direction, images are projected onto both the flat portion 1046a and the curved portion 1046b. By displaying, the entire image displayed on the screen sheet 1046 can be given a three-dimensional effect. Further, the light-transmitting plate 1045 and the screen sheet 1046 have curved portions 1045b and 1046b formed by forming (forming in an open space), respectively. , deformation of the image can be suppressed.

The light-transmitting plate 1045 and the screen sheet 1046 configured as described above are pressed by the lower frame UD100 and the upper frame UD110 in a state in which the lower portion is pressed by the lower pressing member UD101 and the upper portion is pressed by the upper pressing member UD102. Supported.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 69, the lower frame UD100 is formed as a U-shaped member, and includes a bottom plate UD100a that is horizontally arranged and a front end of the bottom plate UD100a that slightly protrudes upward. a right side portion UD100c extending vertically at the right end of the bottom plate UD100a; and a left side portion UD100d extending vertically at the left end of the bottom plate UD100a. The transparent plate 1045 and the screen sheet 1046 are placed on the bottom plate UD100a with the transparent plate 1045 in contact with the bottom plate UD100a, the right side UD100c, and the left side UD100d. In this state, the front lower portion of the transparent plate 1045 contacts the wall portion UD100b. The wall portion UD 100b has a shape corresponding to the plane portion 1045a, the curved portion 1045b, and the side portion 1045c of the light-transmitting plate 1045 so that the entire lower front surface of the light-transmitting plate 1045 can come into contact therewith.

As shown in FIG. 70, the lower pressing member UD101 is formed in a plate shape, and its front side surface (pressing surface UD101a) corresponds to the screen sheet 1046 and has a flat portion and a curved shape. and a formed portion. With the transparent plate 1045 and the screen sheet 1046 placed on the bottom plate UD100a of the lower frame UD100, the lower pressing member UD101 is fixed to the lower frame UD100. It is sandwiched between the wall portion UD100b and the transparent plate 1045 and the pressing surface UD101a of the lower pressing member UD101, and pressed by the pressing surface UD101a. The lower pressing member UD101 can be attached to the lower frame UD100 by screwing a screw through the screw insertion hole UD101b (see FIG. 69) into the screw hole UD100e of the lower frame UD100.

Further, as shown in FIG. 71, the upper frame UD110 is formed as a member having a substantially rectangular outer shape when viewed from the front. and a projecting wall portion UD110b. With the upper frame UD110 fixed to the lower frame UD100, the transparent plate 1045 and the screen sheet 1046 are such that the upper edge of the transparent plate 1045 contacts the bottom surface UD110a of the upper frame UD110, and the front surface of the transparent plate 1045 The upper portion is positioned so as to abut on the wall portion UD110b of the upper frame UD110. The wall portion UD110b has a shape corresponding to the light-transmitting plate 1045 so that the front upper portion of the light-transmitting plate 1045 can come into contact with the light-transmitting plate 1045 over a certain range.

The front side surface (pressing surface UD102a, see FIG. 70) of the upper pressing member UD102 has a planar portion and a curved portion corresponding to the screen sheet 1046. As shown in FIG. With its upper surface in contact with the bottom surface UD110a of the upper frame UD110, the upper pressing member UD102 inserts a screw through the screw insertion hole UD102b (see FIG. 71) into the screw hole formed in the bottom surface UD110a of the upper frame UD110. It is attached to the upper frame UD110 by screwing it into the UD110c. As a result, the upper portion of the screen sheet 1046 is sandwiched between the wall portion UD110b of the upper frame UD110, the translucent plate 1045, and the pressing surface UD102a of the upper pressing member UD102, and pressed by the pressing surface UD102a.

As described above, the screen sheet 1046 is pressed at its lower portion by the lower pressing member UD101 and at its upper portion by the upper pressing member UD102. The pressing surface UD101a of the lower pressing member UD101 and the pressing surface UD102a of the upper pressing member UD102 each have a curved portion corresponding to the shape of the screen sheet 1046. FIG. As a result, it is possible to bring the screen sheet 1046 into close contact with the transparent plate 1045 while suppressing the formation of a gap between the transparent plate 1045 and the screen sheet 1046 and the occurrence of wrinkles in the screen sheet 1046 . As a result, it is possible to prevent the image visually recognized by the player from being disturbed.

As shown in FIG. 72, when the light-transmitting plate 1045 and the screen sheet 1046 are in close contact with each other and viewed from the rear, the plane portion 1045a and the curved portion 1045b of the light-transmitting plate 1045 are the same as the plane portion of the screen sheet 1046. 1046a and the curved portion 1046b, the side portion 1045c of the transparent plate 1045 is not covered with the screen sheet 1046 and is exposed.

Although not shown, a cabinet G is arranged behind the translucent plate 1045 and the screen sheet 1046 . Therefore, between the rear end of the screen sheet 1046 and the front end of the cabinet G (side wall G2), there is a gap corresponding to at least the length of the side surface portion 1045c of the translucent plate 1045 in the front-rear direction. For clarity, such gaps are shown hatched in FIG.

An image is displayed on the portion of the light-transmitting plate 1045 covered by the screen sheet 1046 (flat portion 1045a and curved portion 1045b), while the portion of the light-transmitting plate 1045 not covered by the screen sheet 1046 is exposed. No image is displayed on (the side portion 1045c, that is, the hatched portion in FIG. 72). As a result, it is possible to give the player the impression that the image stands out at a position spaced forward from the front end of the cabinet G (side wall G2), thus realizing a variety of image expressions. be able to.

<Decoration unit 1050>
FIG. 73 is a rear perspective view of the upper frame, the first structure, the second structure, the third structure, the fourth structure, and the screen sheet.

73, the first structural body 1051, the second structural body 1052, the third structural body 1053, and the fourth structural body 1054 are shown assembled. , and the screen sheet 1057 are shown to exist independently.

As shown in FIG. 73, the decoration unit 1050 includes a first structure 1051 arranged in the center, a second structure 1052 arranged around the first structure 1051, and adjacent to the second structure 1052. It has a third structure 1053, a fourth structure 1054 adjacent to the third structure 1053, and a screen sheet 1056 and a screen sheet 1057 arranged behind these structures.

The first structure 1051, the second structure 1052, the third structure 1053, and the fourth structure 1054 are attached to the upper frame UD110 by screw fastening. The screen sheet 1056 is arranged behind the first structure 1051 and the second structure 1052 while being pressed by the pressing member UD111. The screen sheet 1057 is arranged on the back side of the third structure 1053 while being pressed by the pressing member UD111. The screen sheet 1056 and the screen sheet 1057 are arranged adjacent to each other and have a shape that allows them to be fitted together at their adjacent portions. The fourth structure 1054 is arranged on the rear side of the speaker housing portion UD110d of the upper frame UD110, and a speaker (not shown) is arranged along with the fourth structure 1054 on the rear side of the speaker housing portion UD110d.

The first structural body 1051 is made of a translucent material (for example, acrylic resin, etc.) and formed into a predetermined three-dimensional shape (for example, letter shape). The second structure 1052 is made of a translucent material (for example, acrylic resin, etc.) and formed into a predetermined three-dimensional shape (for example, a shape imitating flame). The third structural body 1053 is made of a translucent material (for example, acrylic resin, etc.) and formed into a predetermined three-dimensional shape (for example, a shape imitating a chain). The fourth structure 1054 is made of a translucent material (for example, acrylic resin, etc.) and formed into a predetermined three-dimensional shape (for example, a shape imitating a chain).

The screen sheet 1056 and the screen sheet 1057 are transmissive screens on which a projection image is projected from the rear and displayed. and a display surface on the front side onto which a projection image is projected by transmitting light incident on the incident surface. The screen sheet 1056 and the screen sheet 1057 are mainly made of, for example, a translucent glass plate, an acrylic plate, or a resin film, and are formed to have a uniform thickness over the entire surface. It is transparent or has a gray color.

When the light projected from the projector 9020 is incident on the incident surface (surface on the back side) of the screen sheet 1056 and the screen sheet 1057, the display surface (surface on the front side) of the screen sheet 1056 and the screen sheet 1057 is illuminated. , an image (still image or moving image) relating to the game is displayed.

Here, the third structure 1053 has a structure in which a half mirror (magic mirror) is formed on the front side thereof. A half mirror can be formed by attaching a semi-transmissive film sheet to the surface of a substrate or vapor-depositing a metal film by a conventionally known method. It has the property of reflecting and partially transmitting.

By arranging such a half-mirror on the front side of the screen sheet 1057, when no light is projected from the projector 9020, objects existing around the third structure 1053 are reflected. It will present an appearance like a part that has been subjected to. As an object existing around the third structure 1053, for example, a structure having a shape imitating a chain as shown in FIG. 65 can be provided. Note that the structure having a chain-like shape may be provided in the vicinity of the third structure 1053, or the third structure 1053 (half mirror) itself may be formed in the shape. On the other hand, when light is projected from the projector 9020, the image displayed on the screen sheet 1057 is reflected on the half mirror. For example, the screen sheet 1057 displays an image in which an object existing around the third structure 1053 or an object having a shape similar to the shape of the third structure 1053 (a chain-like shape) is flowing and moving. As a result, it is possible to produce an effect as if the object, which was stationary when no light was projected from the projector 9020, is moving. Thus, according to the above configuration, it is possible to create an attractive presentation by both the modeled object and the image related to the modeled object.

The screen sheet 1056 also has a diffusion layer for diffusing light and a prism layer in which a plurality of unit prisms having a convex shape on the incident surface side are arranged. As a result, the light projected from the projector 9020 is diffused, and together with the shaped object placed on the front side of the screen sheet 1056, an attractive presentation can be performed. For example, as shown in FIG. 65, when the first structure 1051 is formed in the shape of the character "GOD", by displaying an image corresponding to the character "GOD" on the screen sheet 1056, the character "GOD" is displayed. It is possible to create an appearance in which the characters "" are sparkling. The center of the light projected from the projector 9020 (irradiation light emitted near the optical axis of the projection lens) is incident on the screen sheet 1046, and the screen sheet 1056 is arranged at a position away from the center of the angle of view. However, by providing a prism layer with a high light-condensing effect, it is possible to prevent the brightness of the image displayed on the screen sheet 1056 from lowering. A half mirror may be arranged on the front side of the screen sheet 1056 as well as the screen sheet 1057 .

<Indirect lighting unit 1060>
FIG. 74 is a rear perspective view of the transparent plate, the screen sheet, the lower frame, the LED substrate, and the light guide member. FIG. 75 is a front perspective view of the transparent plate, the screen sheet, the lower frame, and the light guide member. FIG. 76 is a front perspective view of cross sections of the transparent plate, the screen sheet, the lower frame, the LED substrate, and the light guide member.

Note that FIG. 74 shows the light-transmitting plate 1045, the screen sheet 1046, the lower frame UD100, the LED substrate 1061, and the light-guiding member 1062 after removing the light-guiding member 1062 from the assembled state. . In FIG. 75, the light-transmitting plate 1045, the screen sheet 1046, the lower frame UD100, and the light guide member 1062 are shown in the vicinity of the light guide member 1062 when the position of the lower frame UD100 is slightly shifted from the assembled state. is shown enlarged. In FIG. 76, the light-transmitting plate 1045, the screen sheet 1046, the lower frame UD100, the LED substrate 1061, and the light guide member 1062 are cut horizontally, and the vicinity of the light guide member 1062 is enlarged. is shown.

As shown in FIG. 66, the indirect lighting units 1060 are arranged along the right side UD100c and the left side UD100d of the lower frame UD100, and each indirect lighting unit 1060 has a symmetrical configuration. there is

As shown in FIG. 74, the indirect lighting unit 1060 includes an LED board 1061 and a light guide member 1062. As shown in FIG.

The LED board 1061 is arranged substantially parallel to the side portion 1045c on the slightly left side of the right side portion UD100c and the slightly right side of the left side portion UD100d of the lower frame UD100 (slightly inside the side portion 1045c of the transparent plate 1045). . A plurality of LEDs 1061a are provided on the LED substrate 1061 at regular intervals in the vertical direction. Specifically, the LED 1061a of the LED board 1061 arranged near the right side UD 100c is arranged to emit light rightward, and the LED 1061a of the LED board 1061 arranged near the left side UD 100d emits light leftward. installed to emit light to The LED board 1061 is arranged so that a part thereof overlaps the side surface portion 1045c of the light-transmitting plate 1045 in a side view, but the installation position of the LEDs 1061a is behind the rear end of the side surface portion 1045c. Thus, the light emitted from the LED 1061a is not blocked by the side portion 1045c. In addition, the LED board 1061 is arranged slightly apart from the side surface portion 1045c.

The light guide member 1062 is a member having substantially the same height as the right side portion UD100c and the left side portion UD100d of the lower frame UD100, and is formed with a plurality of openings 1062a that open inward in the vertical direction. The light guide member 1062 has screw holes 1062b formed in the upper portion and the lower portion thereof, and the light guide member 1062 is fixed to the LED substrate 1061 by screws inserted through the screw holes 1061b formed in the LED substrate 1061. be done. This allows light emitted from the LED 1061a to enter the light guide member 1062 through the opening 1062a.

Further, the light guide member 1062 is fixed to the lower frame UD100 by a screw inserted through a screw hole 1062c formed in its upper portion and a screw hole UD100f formed in the right side UD100c (left side UD100d) of the lower frame UD100. be done.

Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 75, the light guide member 1062 is formed with a plurality of openings 1062d that open forward in the vertical direction. The opening 1062a shown in FIG. 74 and the opening 1062d shown in FIG. A right side portion UD100c (a left side portion UD100d) of the lower frame UD100 is formed with a plurality of openings UD100g that penetrate in the front-rear direction. Accordingly, when the light guide member 1062 is attached to the lower frame UD100, the opening 1062d of the light guide member 1062 and the opening UD100g of the lower frame UD100 communicate with each other.

As shown in FIG. 76, the inside of the light guide member 1062 is a reflector that changes the traveling direction of the light emitted from the LED 1061a. The light emitted from the LED 1061a passes through the opening 1062a of the light guide member 1062 and enters the inside of the light guide member 1062, then changes its traveling direction from sideways to forward and passes through the opening 1062d of the light guide member 1062. , is emitted forward from the opening UD100g of the right side UD100c (left side UD100d). Arrows in FIG. 76 indicate traveling directions of light emitted from the LED 1061a.

Here, as shown in FIG. 76, the right side portion UD100c (left side portion UD100d) of the lower frame UD100 is in contact with the side surface portion 1045c of the transparent plate 1045. As shown in FIG. In addition, the rear end of the right side portion UD 100c (left side portion UD 100d) and the rear end of the side portion 1045c have substantially the same position in the front-rear direction. It is shorter than the longitudinal length of the portion 1045c. Further, although not shown, a cabinet G is arranged on the rear side of the right side UD100c (left side UD100d) of the lower frame UD100. The front end of the cabinet G (side wall G2) is close to (substantially abuts) the rear end of the right side UD 100c (left side UD 100d). positioned substantially on the same plane.

The indirect lighting unit 1060 is arranged along the side surface portion 1045c of the translucent plate 1045 so as to have the above positional relationship with the surrounding members. The light emitted from the LED 1061a is emitted forward along the side surface portion 1045c of the transparent plate 1045. As shown in FIG. As described with reference to FIG. 72, the side surface portion 1045c of the translucent plate 1045 is not covered with the screen sheet 1046, and no image is displayed on this portion (hatched portion in FIG. 72), so the image stands out. Such an impression can be given to the player. In the present embodiment, light from the LED 1061a is emitted from such a portion where no image is displayed (along the side surface portion 1045c of the translucent plate 1045). By emphasizing the boundary with the part that is not exposed, it is possible to give the player the impression that the image stands out more remarkably.

<Attachment of Upper Door Mechanism UD to Cabinet G>
FIG. 77 is a rear perspective view of the upper door mechanism, the hook, and the front projecting member. FIG. 78 is a side perspective view of the upper door mechanism, the hook, and the front protruding member. FIG. 79 is a side perspective view of the cabinet, the hook, and the front projecting member. FIG. 80 is a cross-sectional right side view of the upper door mechanism, the cabinet, the hook, and the front projecting member. FIG. 81 is a perspective view of the upper door mechanism as seen from below. FIG. 82 is a front perspective view of the upper door mechanism and the lower door mechanism. FIG. 83 is a rear perspective view of the upper door mechanism and the lower door mechanism.

Note that FIG. 77 shows a state in which the hook UD120 and the front-side projecting member G120 are removed from the upper door mechanism UD. In FIG. 78, the hook UD120 is shown attached to the upper door mechanism UD, and the front-side protruding member G120 is shown removed from the upper door mechanism UD. FIG. 79 shows how the hook UD120 and the front projecting member G120 are attached to the cabinet G. As shown in FIG. FIG. 80 shows a state in which the upper door mechanism UD, the cabinet G, the hook UD120, and the front-side protruding member G120 are cut along a vertical plane in the front-rear direction when the upper door mechanism UD is closed with respect to the cabinet G. ing. For the sake of clarity, in FIG. 80, the hooking portion UD120 and the front-side projecting member G120 are hatched. FIG. 81 shows a state in which each component of the upper door mechanism UD is assembled. FIG. 82 shows the state in which the upper door mechanism UD and the lower door mechanism DD are not assembled and viewed from different directions, and the lower door mechanism DD is observed from an angle closer to the side. is doing. 83 shows a state in which the upper door mechanism UD and the lower door mechanism DD are closed with respect to the cabinet G. FIG.

The upper door mechanism UD is attached to the cabinet G by a hook UD120 and a front projecting member G120.

As shown in FIGS. 77 and 78, the hook UD120 is a member that protrudes rearward from the upper frame UD110, and a notch UD120b that is open downward is formed in the main surface UD120a. A screw hole UD120c is formed in a plane orthogonal to the main surface UD120a of the hook UD120, and the hook UD120 is attached to the upper frame UD110 by screwing. By fixing the hook UD120 to the upper frame UD110, the main surface UD120a is arranged along the front-rear direction.

The front-side protruding member G120 has a main surface G120a arranged horizontally, a front-end central portion G120b formed by bending upward the vicinity of the center of the front end of the main surface G120a, and a front-end right side of the main surface G120a by bending upward. The formed front end right side G120c, the front end left side G120d formed by bending the front end left side of the main surface G120a upward, and the front end of the main surface G120a between the front end central portion G120b and the front end right side G120c. and a right mounting portion G120e formed by bending backward, and a left mounting portion G120f formed by bending the front end of the main surface G120a upward and rearward between the front end central portion G120b and the front end left side G120d. and a rear side portion G120g formed by bending downward the rear portions of both the left end and the right end of the main surface G120a.

The right front end portion G120c and the left front end portion G120d are formed behind the central front end portion G120b, and the heights of the central front end portion G120b, the right front end portion G120c, and the left front end portion G120d are substantially the same. Further, the right mounting portion G120e and the left mounting portion G120f are formed behind the front right side portion G120c and the front left side portion G120d, respectively, and the heights of the right mounting portion G120e and the left mounting portion G120f are , are substantially the same, and their heights are higher than the heights of the front end center portion G120b, the front end right side portion G120c, and the front end left side portion G120d. Further, the right placement portion G120e and the left placement portion G120f have surfaces arranged horizontally.

A screw hole G120h is formed in the rear side portion G120g, and the front-side projecting member G120 is attached to the side wall G2 of the cabinet G from the inside by a screw inserted through the screw hole G120h. As shown in FIGS. 79 and 80, by fixing the front-side projecting member G120 to the cabinet G, the front portions of the main surface UD120a (front-end central portion G120b, front-end right portion G120c, front-end left portion G120d, right (including the mounting portion G120e and the left mounting portion G120f) projects forward from the cabinet G. As shown in FIG.

On the other hand, the inner surface of the side wall G2 of the cabinet G is provided with an inwardly projecting member G2a (for example, a screw or the like screwed into the inner surface of the side wall G2). UD120b is hooked on the inner surface side projecting member G2a. Thereby, the hook UD120 is locked to the cabinet G. As shown in FIG.

As shown in FIG. 81, the lower frame UD100 has a lower side surface UD100h as a surface facing downward of the bottom plate UD100a (see FIG. 69). A plurality of downward protrusions UD100i that protrude downward are formed on the lower side surface UD100h. The downward projecting portion UD100i has a substantially rectangular parallelepiped shape and extends forward from the rear end of the lower side surface UD100h. A screw hole UD100e (see FIG. 69) is formed at the rear end of the downward projecting portion UD100i.

As shown in FIG. 82, the lower door mechanism DD has an upper plate DD100 horizontally arranged in the left-right direction on its upper portion. As shown in FIG. 83, in a state in which the upper door mechanism UD and the lower door mechanism DD are closed with respect to the cabinet G, the rear edge DD100a of the upper plate DD100 extends from the lower protruding portion UD100i formed on the lower frame UD100. It is close (substantially in contact) with the front end.

Since the upper door mechanism UD and the lower door mechanism DD are configured as described above, when attaching the upper door mechanism UD to the cabinet G (closing the upper door mechanism UD with respect to the cabinet G), first, the upper frame While placing the lower surface of the upper wall of the UD 110 on the upper surfaces of the right mounting portion G120e and the left mounting portion G120f of the front projecting member G120, the notch UD120b of the hooking portion UD120 is hooked to the inner projecting member G2a. By closing the lower door mechanism DD with respect to the cabinet G in this state, the rear edge DD100a of the upper plate DD100 of the lower door mechanism DD hits the downward projecting portion UD100i of the lower frame UD100, and the upper door mechanism UD is pushed backward. be As a result, the upper door mechanism UD is also closed with respect to the cabinet G.

In this embodiment, since the upper door mechanism UD can be closed as described above, the upper door mechanism UD is not provided with a hinge for coupling with the cabinet G. FIG. When a hinge is provided, the range in which an image can be displayed is limited in the side portion of the gaming machine. A wide range in the door mechanism UD can be secured as an image display area. Specifically, the range up to the rear end of the screen sheet 1046 (the rear ends of the curved portions 1045b on both the left and right sides of the transparent plate 1045) is included in the irradiation range in the left-right direction of the light projected from the projector 9020. becomes possible. As a result, a powerful performance can be performed on a large screen.

Three screens, screen sheet 1046, screen sheet 1056, and screen sheet 1057, are provided. Similar to the third embodiment, information indicating an image displayed on each screen is converted into one piece of image data. If included (see FIGS. 62 and 63), images can be displayed on each of the three screens by using the one image data.

When the upper door mechanism UD is closed as described above, a slight gap is formed between the upper door mechanism UD and the cabinet G (see FIG. 80), but foreign matter may enter through the gap. Even if the foreign matter comes inside the cabinet G, the presence of the front-side projecting member G120 can prevent the foreign matter from entering the interior of the cabinet G. As shown in FIG.

[Fifth embodiment]
The first to fourth embodiments have been described above. The fifth embodiment will be described below. The basic configuration of the gaming machine 1 according to the fifth embodiment is the same as the gaming machine 1 according to the first to fourth embodiments. In the following description, the same components as those of the gaming machine 1 according to the first to fourth embodiments are denoted by the same reference numerals. In addition, descriptions of the portions that the descriptions of the first to fourth embodiments apply to the fifth embodiment will be omitted.

<Light irradiation range and screen placement position>
FIG. 84 is a front perspective view of the gaming machine with the upper door mechanism and the lower door mechanism removed. FIG. 85 is a side perspective view of light projected from the projector device.

As shown in FIG. 84, inside the cabinet G, an irradiation unit B is arranged. As in the first embodiment (see FIG. 6), the irradiation unit B includes a projector device B2 that emits irradiation light, a mirror mechanism B3 that reflects the irradiation light emitted from the projector device B2, a projector device B2 and a mirror. and a projector cover B1 that houses the mechanism B3.

The configuration of the projector cover B1 is different from that of the first embodiment, and the reflector holding portion B11 (see FIG. 10) is formed above the projector B2, not in front of the projector B2 (see FIG. 88). . As in the first embodiment, a mirror mechanism B3 is provided on the inner surface of the reflector holder B11, and the mirror mechanism B3 is an optical mirror B32 capable of reflecting light projected from the projector device B2. (See FIG. 7).

In this embodiment, the mirror mechanism B3 (optical mirror B32) is tilted such that the rearward direction is lower than the forward direction, corresponding to the shape and formation position of the reflector holding portion B11. placed above. Note that the configuration of the mirror mechanism B3 itself is the same as that of the first embodiment, so detailed description thereof will be omitted.

The projector device B2 is fixed to the projector cover B1 in a posture having a tilt (a steeper tilt than the optical mirror B32) such that the rear is lower than the front.

As a result, the light projected from the projector device B2 and traveling upward is reflected forward by the mirror mechanism B3 (optical mirror B32) (see FIG. 85). In FIG. 85, the light irradiation range is indicated by oblique lines. As in the fourth embodiment, all light reflected by the mirror mechanism B3 (optical mirror B32) and traveling forward reaches the upper door mechanism UD. The upper door mechanism UD has a configuration similar to that of the fourth embodiment, and the light projected from the projector device B2 is projected onto screen sheets 1046, 1056, and 1057 (see FIGS. 65 to 68). , and an image is displayed on the front side (display surface) of these screen sheets.

<Adjustment of traveling direction of irradiation light>
FIG. 86 is a side perspective view of the irradiation unit. FIG. 87 is a perspective view of the irradiation unit as seen from the rear.

As described in the first embodiment, the projector device B2 is mounted on the projector cover B1 via the upper pedestal B220 and the lower pedestal B221 while being covered by the case B22 (see FIG. 12).

Specifically, a square hole 2201c is provided in each of the right and left portions of the upper base B220 (see FIG. 13). The upper pedestal B220 is attached to the projector cover B1 with attachment screws T (see FIG. 16) inserted into the square holes 2201c. FIG. 16 shows how the mounting screw T is inserted from below the square hole 2201c. ) is inserted. The upper pedestal B220 may be attached to another member fixed inside the cabinet G instead of the projector cover B1.

The lower pedestal B221 is provided with a plurality of screw holes 2214 for screwing the case B22 (see FIG. 12), and the case B22 is attached to the lower pedestal B221 from below by screwing. be done. The configuration of the case B22 is not particularly limited, but in this embodiment, the case B22 (see FIG. 22) having a rectangular parallelepiped box shape is employed. The case B22 accommodates a lens unit B21 (see FIG. 12), an LED board, a DMD board, a heat sink, an intake fan, etc., which are internal components of the projector device B2. (see FIG. 12) is fixed.

Here, the square hole 2201c formed in the upper pedestal B220 has a longitudinal and lateral inner diameter dimension larger than the screw shaft diameter of the mounting screw T. As shown in FIG. As a result, the mounting position of the projector device B2 with respect to the projector cover B1 can be adjusted in the left-right direction and the front-rear direction. The details of the method for adjusting the mounting position of the projector device B2 are the same as those described with reference to FIG.

The upper pedestal B220 and the lower pedestal B221 are connected at three connecting portions R1, R2, and R3 corresponding to the three connecting holes 2200A and the three connecting screw portions 2210 (see FIGS. 12 and 14). . As a result, the upper pedestal B220 and the lower pedestal B221 can adjust the mutual spacing at each of the connecting portions R1, R2, and R3. The connecting portions R1, R2, and R3 are arranged so as not to be positioned on the same straight line in the plane (within the horizontal plane) along the upper pedestal B220 and the lower pedestal B221. By appropriately changing the distance between the pedestal B220 and the lower pedestal B221, it is possible to adjust the inclination of the lower pedestal B221 with respect to the upper pedestal B220 in the three-dimensional space. The details of the method for adjusting the distance between the upper pedestal B220 and the lower pedestal B221 in each of the connecting portions R1, R2, and R3 are as described with reference to FIG. 17, so description thereof will be omitted here.

By using such upper pedestal B220 and lower pedestal B221, it is possible to appropriately adjust the in-plane position of the upper pedestal B220 with respect to the projector cover B1, and it is possible to arrange the projector device B2 at an appropriate position. . In addition, it is possible to appropriately adjust the inclination of the lower pedestal B221 with respect to the upper pedestal B220, and the posture of the case B22 (the lens unit B21, which is an internal component of the projector device B2, etc.) supported by the lower pedestal B221 can be changed. can be made appropriate. In this way, the projector device B2 is configured to be able to change its position and attitude within the cabinet G and adjust the emission position, traveling direction, and irradiation range of the irradiation light.

As shown in FIG. 86, the upper pedestal B220 and the lower pedestal B221 are arranged behind the projector cover B1. The projector cover B1 has a shape in which the rears of the upper pedestal B220 and the lower pedestal B221 are opened. As a result, the connecting portions R1, R2, and R3 between the upper pedestal B220 and the lower pedestal B221 are exposed rearward. Although not shown, the mounting screw T (see FIG. 16) inserted into the square hole 2201c of the upper base B220 is also exposed rearward.

As shown in FIG. 87, the reflector holding portion B11 of the projector cover B1 is arranged above the upper pedestal B220 and the lower pedestal B221. The projector cover B1 has a shape in which the upper side and the rear side of the reflector holding portion B11 are opened.

An angle adjustment hole B111 (see FIG. 9) is formed in the reflector holding portion B11, and a screw (not shown) is inserted through the angle adjustment hole B111 from above (rear side). As described in the first embodiment, by loosening or tightening the screw, the distance between the reflector holding portion B11 and the mirror mechanism B3 can be changed. As a result, the position (orientation) of the optical mirror B32 held on the inner surface of the reflector holding portion B11 is changed, and the reflection angle of the irradiation light emitted from the projector device B2 (the traveling direction of the irradiation light after reflection) is adjusted. It is possible to

<Operation window G10 and closing lid G100>
FIG. 88 is a vertical cross-sectional view of the cabinet. Figure 89 is an exploded perspective view of the illumination unit, closing lid and back wall of the cabinet; FIG. 90 is a rear view of the gaming machine with the closing lid removed from the rear wall. FIG. 91 is a partially enlarged view around the operation window in the game machine shown in FIG. 90. FIG. Figure 92 is an exploded perspective view of the closing lid and back wall of the cabinet; Figure 93 is an exploded perspective view of the closing lid and back wall of the cabinet; FIG. 94 is a partially enlarged view of the vicinity of the operation window in the game machine with the closing lid attached to the back wall.

As shown in FIG. 88, when the irradiation unit B is arranged inside the cabinet G, the upper pedestal B220 and the lower pedestal B221 are arranged behind the cabinet G, and the upper pedestal B220 and the lower pedestal B221 are arranged. The connecting portions R1, R2, R3 are positioned so as to face the closing lid G100 attached to the cabinet G (back wall G3). Although not shown, the mounting screw T inserted into the square hole 2201c of the upper pedestal B220 is also positioned to face the closing lid G100. A space in which other members do not exist is formed behind the upper pedestal B220.

Further, in the upper rear portion of the cabinet G, a reflector holding portion B11 of the projector cover B1 is arranged. A space in which no other member exists is formed above and behind the reflector holding portion B11, and the space is connected to the rear space of the upper base B220. In FIG. 88, hatched lines indicate the irradiation range of the light projected from the projector device B2.

The irradiation unit B is attached to the rear wall G3 by screw fastening. As shown in FIG. 87, screw holes B100a to B100d for inserting screws are formed in the rear portion of the projector cover B1. When the irradiation unit B is attached to the rear wall G3, a surface B110a having the screw hole B100a, a surface B110b having the screw hole B100b, and a surface B110c having the screw holes B100c and B10d are formed. , respectively abut on the inner surface (surface on the front side) of the rear wall G3. These surfaces B110a to B110c are formed separately from each other, so that the projector cover B1 has a shape in which the rear space of the upper base B220 and the upper and rear spaces of the reflector holding portion B11 are opened. ing.

As shown in FIG. 89, the rear wall G3 of the cabinet G is formed with an operation window G10. The operation window G10 is formed as an opening through which the inside of the cabinet G can be visually recognized from the outside. The operation window G10 can be closed with a closing lid G100.

As shown in FIG. 90, when the closing lid G100 is removed from the rear wall G3 and viewed from the front from the rear, the connecting portions R1 and R2 between the upper pedestal B220 and the lower pedestal B221 are seen through the operation window G10. , R3 (especially the nut 2213, see FIG. 17) and the head (not shown) of the mounting screw T inserted into the square hole 2201c of the upper base B220 can be seen through the operation window G10. As a result, the nut 2213 can be operated from the outside of the cabinet G, and the attitude of the projector apparatus B2 can be adjusted by turning the nut 2213 as appropriate. Further, by operating the mounting screw T from the outside of the cabinet G, it is possible to move the position of the mounting screw T within the opening range of the square hole 2201c formed in the upper pedestal B220. can be adjusted.

Further, as shown in FIG. 91, when the closing lid G100 is removed from the rear wall G3 and the vicinity of the operation window G10 is looked up from the lower rear side, the angle of the reflector holding portion B11 is seen through the operation window G10. The head (not shown) of the screw inserted through the adjustment hole B111 can also be visually recognized. As a result, the screw can be operated from outside the cabinet G, and the attitude of the mirror mechanism B3 can be adjusted by appropriately turning the screw.

The structures of the operation window G10 and the closing lid G100 will be described below. FIG. 92 shows the operation window G10 and the closing lid G100 viewed obliquely from behind. FIG. 93 shows a state in which the operation window G10 and the closing lid G100 are viewed obliquely from the front.

As shown in FIG. 92, the operation window G10 includes an opening G10a formed in a horizontally long rectangular shape as a through hole penetrating in the front-rear direction, and an outer surface (rear side) of the rear wall G3 of the cabinet G at the periphery of the opening G10a. The peripheral edge portion G10b formed to have a square-shaped surface at a position recessed with respect to the surface of the peripheral edge portion G10b, the four screw holes G10c formed in the peripheral edge portion G10b, the outer edge of the peripheral edge portion G10b and the back wall and a connecting portion G10d that connects with the outer surface of G3. As shown in FIG. 93, the peripheral portion G10b cannot be seen from the front, but the screw hole G10c can be seen from the front because it penetrates the rear wall G3. A state in which a screw hole G10c is formed on the side is shown.

In other words, the operation window G10 configured as described above has a shape in which a concave portion is formed with respect to the outer surface of the rear wall G3, and an opening is formed by penetrating most of the concave portion. have. The opening corresponds to the opening G10a, and the portion of the recess in which no opening is formed corresponds to the peripheral edge portion G10b. The peripheral portion G10b is formed as a flat surface (vertical surface) substantially parallel to the outer surface of the rear wall G3, and the connection portion G10d is formed as a horizontal and vertical flat surface.

The closing lid G100 is configured as a plate-like member, and includes a rear surface G100a formed in a horizontally long rectangular shape, a front surface G100b formed on the opposite side of the rear surface G100a, and four bosses provided on the front surface G100b. and a peripheral edge portion G100d formed so as to extend forward from the peripheral edge of the rear surface G100a. The rear surface G100a and the front surface G100b are formed as flat surfaces in the vertical direction.

The outer shape of the closing lid G100 (back surface G100a) is substantially the same as the outer shape of the peripheral edge portion G10b of the operation window G10 (similar shape slightly smaller than the peripheral edge portion G10b). is also getting bigger. Thus, by fitting the closing lid G100 into the recess (attaching the closing lid G100 to the rear wall G3 so as to fill the recess), the opening G10a of the operation window G10 can be closed. It's becoming

More specifically, when the closing lid G100 is arranged such that the peripheral edge portion G100d of the closing lid G100 is aligned with the connection portion G10d of the operation window G10, the four screw holes G10c of the operation window G10 and the closing lid G100 are aligned with the connecting portion G10d of the operation window G10. The four boss portions G100c of the lid G100 overlap each other, and each screw hole G10c is positioned in front of each boss portion G100c. In this state, the closing lid G100 is attached to the cabinet G (back wall G3) by screwing the screw inserted through the screw hole G10c from the front side (inside the cabinet G) into the hole formed in the boss G100c. be done. As a result, the opening G10a of the operation window G10 is closed by the closing lid G100. Since the screws for fastening the closing lid G100 to the rear wall G3 are screwed from the inside of the cabinet G (so that the screw heads are positioned inside the cabinet G), the inside of the cabinet G is secured. can be ensured.

When adjusting the positions and attitudes of the projector device B2 and the mirror mechanism B3, the screws fastening the closing lid G100 and the rear wall G3 are removed with the upper door mechanism UD and the lower door mechanism DD opened. The fastening of the screw can be released by operating from the front side and turning appropriately. As a result, the closing lid G100 can be removed from the back wall G3, and the operation window G10 (opening G10a) closed by the closing lid G100 can be exposed. In this state, the attachment is inserted from the outside (rear side) of the cabinet G into the connecting portions R1, R2, and R3 between the upper pedestal B220 and the lower pedestal B221 and the square hole 2201c of the upper pedestal B220 through the opening G10a. By operating the screw T and the screw inserted through the angle adjustment hole B111 of the projector cover B1 (reflector holder B11), the positions and postures of the projector device B2 and the mirror mechanism B3 can be adjusted.

Here, in the closing lid G100, the length from the front surface G100b to the front end of the peripheral edge portion G100d (the forward projection length of the peripheral edge portion G100d when the front surface G100b is used as a reference) and the tip of the boss portion G100c from the front surface G100b is equal to the length (height of the boss G100c). Therefore, when the closing lid G100 is arranged so that the front end of the peripheral edge portion G100d of the closing lid G100 abuts the peripheral edge portion G10b of the operation window G10, the tip of the boss portion G100c of the closing lid G100 also serves as an operating window. It comes into contact with the peripheral edge portion G10b of the window G10.

FIG. 94 shows how the closing lid G100 is arranged in such a state. In FIG. 94, the shaded portion indicates the closing lid G100 (the front surface G100b), and the shaded portion indicates the rear wall G3 (periphery of the opening G10a). A space S is formed between the hatched portion (the front surface G100b of the closing lid G100) and the hatched portion (periphery of the opening G10a), and the width of the space S (the length in the front-rear direction) This corresponds to the "forward projection length of the peripheral edge portion G100d" and the "height of the boss portion G100c".

By adopting such a configuration, the closing lid G100 can be stably attached to the rear wall G3, and the closing lid G100 (the front end of the peripheral edge portion G100d) and the rear wall G3 (the operation window G10) can be separated from each other. It is possible to avoid the formation of a gap with the peripheral edge portion G10b) of, and prevent fraudulent activity through the gap.

Further, the peripheral edge portion G10b of the operation window G10 is formed to have a step with respect to the outer surface of the rear wall G3 by the length of the connection portion G10d in the front-rear direction. The length of the portion G100d in the front-rear direction (the forward projection length of the peripheral portion G100d with respect to the back surface G100a) substantially matches the length of the connection portion G10d of the operation window G10 in the front-rear direction (the operation window It is slightly shorter than the length in the front-rear direction of the connecting portion G10d of G10). The longitudinal length of the peripheral edge portion G100d of the closing lid G100 and the longitudinal length of the connection portion G10d of the operation window G10 are constant over the entire circumference. As a result, when the closing lid G100 is attached to the rear wall G3, the rear surface G100a of the closing lid G100 forms substantially the same plane as the outer surface of the rear wall G3 (slightly lower than the outer surface of the rear wall G3). ), making it difficult to recognize the existence of the closing lid G100 from the outside.

The gaming machine 1 according to the fifth embodiment has been described above as one embodiment of the present invention.

2. Description of the Related Art Conventionally, there is known a gaming machine capable of producing effects by using a projector (see Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 6-035066 and Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2009-240459). According to such a game machine, a game image is projected from a projector onto a projection surface such as a screen, so that the image is displayed on the screen instead of the liquid crystal display device.

However, conventionally, in a gaming machine equipped with such a projector, once the projector is fixed inside the gaming machine, it has been difficult to make fine adjustments to the projector thereafter.

SUMMARY OF THE INVENTION It is an object of the present invention to provide a gaming machine in which the projector can be adjusted while the projector is installed inside.

In this regard, the gaming machine 1 according to the fifth embodiment has the following features.

(10-1) screens (screen sheet 1046, screen sheet 1056, and screen sheet 1057);
a projector (internal components of the projector device B2 (lens unit B21, etc.)) that projects light for displaying an image on the screen;
Adjustment units for adjusting the traveling direction of the light projected by the projector (connection portions R1, R2, and R3 between the upper pedestal B220 and the lower pedestal B221, attachment portion of the upper pedestal B220 to the projector cover B1, mirror mechanism B3 attachment part to the reflector holding part B11, etc.),
an accommodation unit (cabinet G) that accommodates the projector,
The accommodation portion is provided with an opening (opening G10a of the operation window G10) at a position where the adjusting portion can be operated from the outside, and a closing member (closing lid G100) capable of closing the opening is attached. there is
A gaming machine characterized by:

According to the gaming machine 1 according to the fifth embodiment, the housing section (cabinet G) housing the projector (internal components of the projector device B2 (lens unit B21, etc.)) includes the projector (internal components of the projector device B2). (lens unit B21, etc.)) for adjusting the traveling direction of the light projected by the controller (connecting parts R1, R2, and R3 between the upper pedestal B220 and the lower pedestal B221, and connecting the upper pedestal B220 to the projector cover B1 An opening (opening G10a of the operation window G10) is provided at a position where the attachment portion, the attachment portion of the mirror mechanism B3 to the reflector holding portion B11, etc.) can be operated from the outside, and the opening (the opening G10a of the operation window G10 ) is attached (a closing lid G100). Therefore, the opening (the opening G10a of the operation window G10) blocked by the closing member (the closing lid G100) can be made to appear by removing the closing member (the closing lid G100) from the storage section (cabinet G). through the opening (the opening G10a of the operation window G10) from the outside of the housing portion (cabinet G), the adjusting portion (connecting portions R1, R2, R3 between the upper pedestal B220 and the lower pedestal B221 , the attachment portion of the upper base B220 to the projector cover B1, the attachment portion of the mirror mechanism B3 to the reflector holding portion B11, etc.). As a result, even after the projector (the internal components of the projector device B2 (lens unit B21, etc.)) is fixed inside the housing section (cabinet G), the projector (the internal components of the projector device B2 (lens unit B21, etc.) etc.)) is attached inside the housing portion (cabinet G), the adjustment portion (connecting portions R1, R2, R3 between the upper pedestal B220 and the lower pedestal B221, the upper side By operating the mounting portion of the base B220 to the projector cover B1, the mounting portion of the mirror mechanism B3 to the reflector holding portion B11, etc.), the projector (internal components of the projector device B2 (lens unit B21, etc.)) projects It is possible to adjust the traveling direction of the light.

(10-2) screens (screen sheet 1046, screen sheet 1056, and screen sheet 1057);
a projector (internal components of the projector device B2 (lens unit B21, etc.)) that projects light for displaying an image on the screen;
Adjustment units for adjusting the traveling direction of the light projected by the projector (connection portions R1, R2, and R3 between the upper pedestal B220 and the lower pedestal B221, attachment portion of the upper pedestal B220 to the projector cover B1, mirror mechanism B3 attachment part to the reflector holding part B11, etc.),
a main body (cabinet G) housing the projector and having an opening on the front;
an opening and closing door (upper door mechanism UD) attached to the main body so as to be openable and closable and provided with a display area for making an image displayed on the screen visible;
Separately from the front surface, the main body portion is provided with an opening (opening G10a of the operation window G10) at a position where the adjustment portion can be operated from the outside, and a closing member (closing lid G100) is attached,
A gaming machine characterized by:

According to the gaming machine 1 according to the fifth embodiment, the main body (cabinet G) housing the projector (internal components of the projector device B2 (lens unit B21, etc.)) includes the projector (internal components of the projector device B2). (lens unit B21, etc.)) for adjusting the traveling direction of the light projected by the controller (connecting parts R1, R2, and R3 between the upper pedestal B220 and the lower pedestal B221, and connecting the upper pedestal B220 to the projector cover B1 An opening (opening G10a of the operation window G10) is provided at a position where the attachment portion, the attachment portion of the mirror mechanism B3 to the reflector holding portion B11, etc.) can be operated from the outside, and the opening (the opening G10a of the operation window G10 ) is attached (a closing lid G100). Therefore, by removing the closing member (closing lid G100) from the main body (cabinet G), the opening (opening G10a of the operation window G10) closed by the closing member (closing lid G100) can be revealed. through the opening (the opening G10a of the operation window G10) from the outside of the main body (cabinet G). , the attachment portion of the upper base B220 to the projector cover B1, the attachment portion of the mirror mechanism B3 to the reflector holding portion B11, etc.). As a result, even after the projector (internal components of the projector device B2 (lens unit B21, etc.)) is fixed inside the main body (cabinet G), the projector (internal components of the projector device B2 (lens unit B21, etc.) etc.)) is attached inside the main body (cabinet G), the adjusting parts (connecting parts R1, R2, R3 between the upper pedestal B220 and the lower pedestal B221, the upper By operating the mounting portion of the base B220 to the projector cover B1, the mounting portion of the mirror mechanism B3 to the reflector holding portion B11, etc.), the projector (internal components of the projector device B2 (lens unit B21, etc.)) projects It is possible to adjust the traveling direction of the light.

(10-3) The gaming machine of (10-2),
The closing member (closing lid G100) is attached to the main body by screwing from the inside of the main body.
It is characterized by

According to the gaming machine 1 according to the fifth embodiment, the closing member (closing lid G100) is attached to the main body (cabinet G) by screwing from the inside of the main body (cabinet G). Therefore, in order to remove the closing member (closing lid G100) from the main body (cabinet G), it is necessary to unscrew it from the inside of the main body (cabinet G). As a result, it is possible to prevent the closing member (closing lid G100) from being removed from the outside of the main body (cabinet G). It is possible to prevent fraudulent actions from outside the main body (cabinet G).

In the present invention, the method of attaching the closing member (closure lid G100) to the main body (cabinet G) is not particularly limited, and the closing member (closure lid G100) is attached from the inside of the main body (cabinet G). It may be attached to the main body (cabinet G) by screwing, or may be attached to the main body (cabinet G) by screwing from the outside of the main body (cabinet G). Also, the closing member (closing lid G100) may be attached to the main body (cabinet G) by a method other than screwing. For example, a guide member for allowing the closing member (closing lid G100) to slide along the wall surface (inner or outer side surface of the rear wall G3) of the main body (cabinet G) may be provided in the cabinet G ( A rail may be formed inside or outside the rear wall G3), and the closing member (closing lid G100) may be locked on the guide member. A closed state in which the opening (opening G10a of the operation window G10) is closed by the closing member (closing lid G100) sliding on the guide member in the left-right direction (or in the front-rear direction) and the opening (operation window If the opening G10a) of G10 is configured to be switched between the open state and the open state, it is possible to operate the adjustment unit from the outside of the main body (cabinet G) in the open state, similar to the fifth embodiment. In addition, the traveling direction of the light projected by the projector can be adjusted. In view of such effects, in the present invention, the structure of the closing member (closure lid G100) is not essential, and the body portion (cabinet G) is not attached with the closing member (closure lid G100). The opening (the opening G10a of the operation window G10) provided in the (cabinet G) may be configured to be open at all times.

In the fifth embodiment, the opening G10a of the operation window G10 is formed in the rear wall G3 of the cabinet G, and the closing lid G10 is attached. In the present invention, an opening (opening G10a of the operation window G10) is provided in any wall surface (for example, the back wall G3, the side wall G2, the top wall G4, etc.) constituting the main body (cabinet G), and the opening is closed. It is possible to configure so as to attach a member (closing lid G100). For example, instead of the back wall G3 of the cabinet G, the side wall G2 or the top wall G4 may be provided with an opening (opening G10a of the operation window G10) and attached with a closing member (closure lid G100). In such a configuration, adjustment parts (for example, connecting parts R1, R2, and R3 between the upper pedestal B220 and the lower pedestal B221, the attachment part of the upper pedestal B220 to the projector cover B1, the reflector of the mirror mechanism B3, attachment portion to the holding portion B11, etc.) may be arranged in the vicinity of the side wall G2 or the top wall G4. Note that when an opening (opening G10a of the operation window G10) is provided in the upper wall G4 and a closing member (closure cover G100) is attached, the opening G41 and the plate member G42 (see FIG. 1) are respectively attached to the operation window G10. Alternatively, a configuration corresponding to the opening G10a of the operation window G10 and the closing lid G10 may be adopted separately without forming the opening G41 and the plate member G42. You can do it.

In addition, openings (openings G10a of the operation window G10) are provided in a plurality of wall surfaces (for example, two or three wall surfaces among the rear wall G3, the side wall G2, and the top wall G4) of the main body (cabinet G). may be provided, and a closing member (closure lid G100) may be attached. For example, adjustment parts for adjusting the position (orientation) of the projector device B2 (for example, connecting parts R1, R2, and R3 between the upper pedestal B220 and the lower pedestal B221, and the attachment part of the upper pedestal B220 to the projector cover B1 etc.), an opening G10a of an operation window G10 is provided on the back wall G3 of the cabinet G and a closing lid G10 is attached, while adjusting the position (orientation) of the mirror mechanism B3. An opening G10a of an operation window G10 is provided in the upper wall G4 of the cabinet G, and a closing lid G10 is attached so that the portion (for example, the attachment portion of the mirror mechanism B3 to the reflector holding portion B11, etc.) can be operated from the outside. You can do it.

In addition, a plurality of openings (opening G10a of the operation window G10) are provided in one wall surface (for example, the back wall G3, the side wall G2, or the top wall G4) of the main body (cabinet G), and each opening is A closing member (closing lid G100) that can be closed may be attached. For example, adjustment parts for adjusting the position (orientation) of the projector device B2 (for example, connecting parts R1, R2, and R3 between the upper pedestal B220 and the lower pedestal B221, and the attachment part of the upper pedestal B220 to the projector cover B1 etc.), a first opening is provided near the center of the rear wall G3 of the cabinet G and a first closing lid capable of closing the first opening is attached so that the mirror mechanism B3 can be operated from the outside. A second opening is provided above the first opening so that an adjusting portion for adjusting the position (orientation) (for example, a portion of the mirror mechanism B3 attached to the reflector holding portion B11) can be operated from the outside. A second closing lid capable of closing the second opening may be attached. When a plurality of openings are provided, as many closing members as the number of openings that can individually close each opening may be attached, or only one closing member capable of simultaneously closing a plurality of openings may be attached.

When performing such adjustment from the outside of the main body (cabinet G), the opening (the opening G10a of the operation window G10) from the outside of the main body (cabinet G) is opened from the front in order to facilitate the adjustment operation. When viewed, members to be adjusted (for example, the nuts 2213 at the connecting portions R1, R2, and R3 between the upper pedestal B220 and the lower pedestal B221, the mounting screw T inserted into the square hole 2201c of the upper pedestal B220, It is desirable that the member is arranged so that the screw or the like inserted through the angle adjustment hole B111 of the reflector holding portion B11 can be visually recognized through the opening (the opening G10a of the operation window G10) (Fig. 90 reference). When a plurality of members to be adjusted are provided, when the opening (the opening G10a of the operation window G10) is viewed from the outside of the main body (cabinet G), all of these members are visible. (For example, the entire upper pedestal B220 is visible). When a plurality of members to be adjusted are provided, for example, the opening (the opening G10a of the operation window G10) is made to have a diameter larger than the distance between these members (the distance between the farthest members). should be This facilitates making adjustments to these members. However, when the opening (the opening G10a of the operation window G10) is viewed from the outside of the main body (cabinet G), the member to be adjusted can be visually recognized through the opening (the opening G10a of the operation window G10). It is not necessary to become For example, when the opening (the opening G10a of the operation window G10) is viewed from the outside of the main body (cabinet G), the angle adjustment hole B111 of the member to be adjusted (for example, the projector cover B1 (reflector holding portion B11)) Even if the screw inserted through the cabinet) cannot be seen, if the member can be visually recognized when looking into the inside of the main body (cabinet G) from a different angle (see FIG. 91), If a space is formed between the member and the opening (the opening G10a of the operation window G10) in which no other member exists, the member can be operated from the outside. In the present invention, the member to be adjusted (adjustment screw, nut, etc.) and the opening (opening G10a of the operation window G10) may be configured to have such a positional relationship.

In the above-described embodiment, the interior of the cabinet G is partitioned into an upper space and a lower space by the intermediate support plate G1, and the upper space (the space behind the upper door mechanism UD) is the display unit A (illumination Unit B) is housed, while the control board (main control board MS, sub-control device SS, etc.) is housed in the lower space (the space on the rear side of the lower door mechanism DD) (see FIG. 5). ). However, in the present invention, the interior of the main body (cabinet G) does not need to be divided into an upper space and a lower space. There is no need to distinguish the space in which the controller SS, etc.) is accommodated. For example, the control board (main control board MS or sub-controller SS) may be arranged in the space (see FIG. 88) behind the reflector holding portion B11 (mirror mechanism B3) of the projector cover B1. As a result, the space in the main body (cabinet G) can be effectively used, and the phenomenon that the heat generated from the control board (main control board MS or sub-controller SS) stays in the lower space can be alleviated. . The opening/closing door in the present invention may be composed of a plurality of doors (the upper door mechanism UD and the lower door mechanism DD), or may be composed of one door.

[Sixth embodiment]
The first to fifth embodiments have been described above. The sixth embodiment will be described below. The basic configuration of the gaming machine 1 according to the sixth embodiment is the same as the gaming machine 1 according to the first to fifth embodiments. In the following description, the same components as those of the gaming machine 1 according to the first to fifth embodiments are denoted by the same reference numerals. In addition, the description of the parts that the descriptions of the first to fifth embodiments apply to the sixth embodiment will be omitted.

<Overview of the inside of the cabinet G>
FIG. 95 is a front view for explaining the schematic configuration inside the cabinet. 96 is an exploded perspective view showing a state in which the reel unit is removed from the inside of the cabinet shown in FIG. 95. FIG. FIG. 97 is a perspective view showing a state in which the irradiation unit is attached to the rear wall of the cabinet.

In the above-described embodiment, the interior of the cabinet G is partitioned into an upper space and a lower space by the intermediate support plate G1, and the display unit A (illumination unit B) is provided in the upper space (the space behind the upper door mechanism UD). ) is housed, while the control board (main control board MS, sub-control device SS, etc.) is housed in the lower space (the space on the rear side of the lower door mechanism DD) (FIGS. 4 and 5). reference). On the other hand, in the sixth embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 95 and 96, the intermediate support plate G1 is not provided, and a middle board 4000 is provided instead.

The middle board 4000 is arranged slightly below the center of the cabinet G in the vertical direction. A reel unit RU is placed on the upper surface of the middle board 4000 . That is, in the above-described embodiment, the reel unit RU is arranged below the intermediate support plate G1 (see FIG. 4), whereas in this embodiment, the reel unit RU is arranged above the middle board 4000. there is

In the above-described embodiment, the upper door mechanism UD and the lower door mechanism DD are provided as doors for closing the opening of the cabinet G. The entire opening at G is configured to be closed. Although not shown, a main display window DD4 (see FIG. 3) is provided approximately in the center of the front door in the vertical direction. The formation position of the main display window DD4 and the arrangement position of the reel unit RU (reel RL) substantially match when viewed from the front. , and the symbols drawn on the reels RL, RC, and RR can be visually recognized.

As shown in FIG. 97, an irradiation unit B is attached to the upper part of the rear wall G3 of the cabinet G. As shown in FIG. Thereby, the irradiation unit B is arranged above the reel unit RU. 95 and 96 show a state in which the irradiation unit B is removed from the inside of the cabinet G, and illustration of the irradiation unit B is omitted. In addition, FIG. 97 shows only the irradiation unit B and the back wall G3, and omits illustration of the configuration other than the irradiation unit B and the back wall G3. As in the fifth embodiment, an operation window G10 is formed in the rear wall G3, and the operation window G10 is closed by a closing lid G100 (see FIG. 89). The irradiation unit B is arranged in the front space of the closing lid G100.

Although not shown, the main control board MS (see FIG. 4) is attached to the inner surface of the right side wall G2R of the cabinet G, and the sub control device SS (see FIG. 4) is attached to the inner surface of the left side wall G2L of the cabinet G. 11) is attached. Thereby, the main control board MS is positioned on the right side of the irradiation unit B, and the sub-controller SS is positioned on the left side of the irradiation unit B. FIG.

As in the first embodiment (see FIG. 6), the irradiation unit B includes a projector device B2 that emits irradiation light, a mirror mechanism B3 that reflects the irradiation light emitted from the projector device B2, a projector device B2 and a mirror. and a projector cover B1 that houses the mechanism B3. The structure of the projector cover B1 differs from that of the first embodiment, and the reflector holding portion B11 (see FIG. 10) is formed above the projector device B2, not in front of the projector device B2 (see FIG. 100). .

As in the first embodiment, a mirror mechanism B3 is provided on the inner surface of the reflector holder B11, and the mirror mechanism B3 is an optical mirror B32 capable of reflecting light projected from the projector device B2. (See FIG. 7). In the present embodiment, the mirror mechanism B3 (optical mirror B32) is tilted so that the rear side is lower than the front side, corresponding to the shape and formation position of the reflector holding portion B11. placed above.

The projector device B2 is fixed to the projector cover B1 in a posture having a tilt (a steeper tilt than the optical mirror B32) such that the rear is lower than the front. Thus, similarly to the fifth embodiment, light projected from the projector device B2 and traveling upward is reflected forward by the mirror mechanism B3 (optical mirror B32) (see FIG. 85). The light reflected by the mirror mechanism B3 (optical mirror B32) and traveling forward enters the screen (not shown) from behind (back side), and an image is displayed on the front side (display surface) of the screen. will be

As described above, the travel path of the light projected from the projector device B2 is basically the same as in the fifth embodiment. The screen may be provided inside the cabinet G like the cabinet-side screen 9040 (see FIG. 52), or the screen sheet 1046, the screen sheet 1056, and the screen sheet 1057 (see FIGS. 65 to 68). It may be provided on the front door as shown.

<Adjustment of traveling direction of irradiation light>
FIG. 98 is a side perspective view of the irradiation unit. FIG. 99 is a perspective view of the irradiation unit as seen from the rear.

As described in the first embodiment, the projector device B2 is mounted on the projector cover B1 via the upper pedestal B220 and the lower pedestal B221 while being covered by the case B22 (see FIG. 12). Specifically, square holes 2201c are provided in the right and left portions of the upper base B220 (see FIG. 13). The upper pedestal B220 is attached to the projector cover B1 with attachment screws T (see FIG. 16) inserted into the square holes 2201c. As in the fifth embodiment, the mounting screw T is inserted from above the square hole 2201c (so that the screw head faces the upper rear side).

The lower pedestal B221 is provided with a plurality of screw holes 2214 for screwing the case B22 (see FIG. 12), and the case B22 is attached to the lower pedestal B221 from below by screwing. be done. As for the configuration of the case B22, the case B22 (see FIG. 22) having a rectangular parallelepiped box shape is adopted as in the fifth embodiment. The case B22 accommodates a lens unit B21 (see FIG. 12), an LED board, a DMD board, a heat sink, an intake fan, etc., which are internal components of the projector apparatus B2.

Here, the square hole 2201c formed in the upper pedestal B220 has a longitudinal and lateral inner diameter dimension larger than the screw shaft diameter of the mounting screw T. As shown in FIG. As a result, the mounting position of the projector device B2 with respect to the projector cover B1 can be adjusted in the left-right direction and the front-rear direction. The details of the method for adjusting the mounting position of the projector device B2 are the same as those described with reference to FIG.

The upper pedestal B220 and the lower pedestal B221 are connected at three connecting portions R1, R2, and R3 corresponding to the three connecting holes 2200A and the three connecting screw portions 2210 (see FIGS. 12 and 14). . As a result, the upper pedestal B220 and the lower pedestal B221 can adjust the mutual spacing at each of the connecting portions R1, R2, and R3. As in the fifth embodiment, by appropriately changing the distance between the upper pedestal B220 and the lower pedestal B221 at each of the connecting portions R1, R2, and R3, the distance between the upper pedestal B220 and the lower pedestal B221 in the three-dimensional space It is possible to adjust the degree of inclination. The details of the method for adjusting the distance between the upper pedestal B220 and the lower pedestal B221 in each of the connecting portions R1, R2, and R3 are as described with reference to FIG. 17, so description thereof will be omitted here.

Further, the reflector holding portion B11 and the mirror holder B31 are connected at three connecting portions R4, R5 and R6. Although not shown, the reflector holding portion B11 is formed with three holes similar to the connecting hole 2200A, and the mirror holder B31 is formed with three projecting structures similar to the connecting screw portion 2210. The connecting portions R4, R5 and R6 correspond to these three holes and three projecting structures and have the same configuration as the connecting portions R1, R2 and R3.

Thereby, the distance between the reflector holding portion B11 and the mirror holder B31 can be adjusted at each of the connecting portions R4, R5, and R6. In this respect, in the above-described embodiment, the reflector is held on the inner surface of the reflector holding portion B11 by loosening or tightening the screw inserted through the angle adjustment hole B111 (see FIG. 9) formed in the reflector holding portion B11. It has been explained that the position (orientation) of the optical mirror B32 is changed. In contrast, in the present embodiment, by appropriately changing the distance between the reflector holder B11 and the mirror holder B31 at each of the connecting portions R4, R5, and R6, the mirror holder B31 (optical mirror B32) relative to the reflector holder B11 is can adjust the degree of inclination in the three-dimensional space.

As described above, the projector device B2 is configured to be able to change its position and attitude within the cabinet G and adjust the emission position, traveling direction, and irradiation range of the irradiation light. Further, the mirror mechanism B3 changes the position (orientation) of the optical mirror B32 held on the inner surface of the reflector holding portion B11, thereby changing the reflection angle of the irradiation light emitted from the projector device B2 (the progress of the irradiation light after reflection). direction) can be adjusted.

As shown in FIG. 98, the upper pedestal B220 and the lower pedestal B221 are arranged behind the projector cover B1. The projector cover B1 has a shape in which the rears of the upper pedestal B220 and the lower pedestal B221 are opened. As a result, the connecting portions R1, R2, and R3 between the upper pedestal B220 and the lower pedestal B221 are exposed rearward. Also, the mounting screw T inserted into the square hole 2201c of the upper base B220 is exposed rearward.

A projector cover plate B1000 is attached to the back side of the projector cover B1. A screw T faces the opening. In other words, the connecting portions R1, R2, R3 and the mounting screws T are exposed rearwardly so as not to be hindered by the projector cover plate B1000.

Further, as shown in FIG. 99, the reflector holding portion B11 of the projector cover B1 is arranged above the upper pedestal B220 and the lower pedestal B221. The projector cover B1 has a shape in which the upper side and the rear side of the reflector holding portion B11 are opened.

<Operation window G10 and closing lid G100>
FIG. 100 is a vertical cross-sectional view of the cabinet. Figure 101 is an exploded perspective view of the illumination unit, closing lid and back wall of the cabinet; FIG. 102 is a rear view of the gaming machine with the closing lid removed from the rear wall. FIG. 103 is a partially enlarged view around the operation window in the gaming machine shown in FIG. 102. FIG. FIG. 104 is an exploded perspective view of the closing lid and back wall of the cabinet; Figure 105 is an exploded perspective view of the closing lid and back wall of the cabinet;

As shown in FIG. 100, when the irradiation unit B is arranged inside the cabinet G, the upper pedestal B220 and the lower pedestal B221 are arranged behind the cabinet G, and the upper pedestal B220 and the lower pedestal B221 are arranged. The connecting portions R1, R2, R3 are positioned so as to face the closing lid G100 attached to the cabinet G (back wall G3). Although not shown, the mounting screw T inserted into the square hole 2201c of the upper base B220 is also positioned to face the closing lid G100. A space in which other members do not exist is formed behind the upper base B220.

Further, in the upper rear portion of the cabinet G, a reflector holding portion B11 of the projector cover B1 is arranged. A space in which no other member exists is formed above and behind the reflector holding portion B11, and the space is connected to the rear space of the upper base B220.

The projector cover B1 has the same external configuration as that of the fifth embodiment, and is attached to the rear wall G3 via the projector cover plate B1000 arranged on the rear side. Specifically, the projector cover plate B1000 is attached to the rear wall G3 by screw fastening, and the projector cover B1 is connected to the projector cover plate B1000 by screw fastening. Thereby, the entire irradiation unit B is fixed to the rear wall G3.

As described above, the projector cover plate B1000 has a shape with an opening in the center. As a result, the irradiation unit B has a shape in which the rear space of the upper pedestal B220 and the upper and rear spaces of the reflector holding portion B11 are opened as a whole. 100, the illustration of the projector cover plate B1000 and the side wall G2 of the cabinet G is omitted, and the irradiation range of the light projected from the projector device B2 is indicated by oblique lines. 101 shows a state in which the projector cover plate B1000 is removed from the irradiation unit B. As shown in FIG.

As shown in FIG. 101, the rear wall G3 of the cabinet G is formed with an operation window G10. The operation window G10 is formed as an opening through which the inside of the cabinet G can be visually recognized from the outside. The operation window G10 can be closed with a closing lid G100.

As shown in FIG. 102, when the closing lid G100 is removed from the rear wall G3 and viewed from the front from the rear, the connecting portions R1 and R2 between the upper pedestal B220 and the lower pedestal B221 are seen through the operation window G10. , R3 (especially the nut 2213, see FIG. 17) and the head of the mounting screw T inserted into the square hole 2201c of the upper base B220 can be seen through the operation window G10. As a result, the nut 2213 can be operated from the outside of the cabinet G, and the orientation of the projector apparatus B2 can be adjusted by turning the nut 2213 as appropriate. Further, by operating the mounting screws T from the outside of the cabinet G, it is possible to move the positions of the mounting screws T within the opening range of the rectangular holes 2201c formed in the upper base B220. can be adjusted.

Further, as shown in FIG. 103, when the closing lid G100 is removed from the rear wall G3, and the vicinity of the operation window G10 is looked up from the lower rear side, the reflector holder B11 and the mirror can be seen through the operation window G10. The connecting portions R4, R5, R6 (particularly the nut 2213, see FIG. 17) with the holder B31 can be seen through the operation window G10. As a result, the nut 2213 can be operated from the outside of the cabinet G, and the posture of the mirror mechanism B3 can be adjusted by turning the nut 2213 appropriately.

The structures of the operation window G10 and the closing lid G100 will be described below. FIG. 104 shows the operation window G10 and the closing lid G100 viewed obliquely from behind. FIG. 105 shows the operation window G10 and the closing lid G100 viewed obliquely from the front.

As shown in FIG. 104, the operation window G10 includes an opening G10a formed in a horizontally long rectangular shape as a through hole penetrating in the front-rear direction, and an outer surface (rear side) of the rear wall G3 of the cabinet G at the periphery of the opening G10a. surface), four screw holes G10c formed in the peripheral edge G10b, the outer edge of the peripheral edge G10b and the back wall and a connecting portion G10d that connects with the outer surface of G3. As shown in FIG. 105, the peripheral portion G10b cannot be seen from the front, but the screw hole G10c can be seen from the front because it penetrates the rear wall G3. A state in which a screw hole G10c is formed on the side is shown.

In other words, the operation window G10 configured as described above has a shape in which a concave portion is formed with respect to the outer surface of the rear wall G3, and an opening is formed by penetrating most of the concave portion. have. The opening corresponds to the opening G10a, and the portion of the recess in which no opening is formed corresponds to the peripheral edge portion G10b. The peripheral edge portion G10b is formed as a flat surface (vertical surface) substantially parallel to the outer surface of the rear wall G3, and the connection portion G10d is formed as a horizontal and vertical flat surface.

The closing lid G100 is configured as a plate-like member, and includes a rear surface G100a formed in a horizontally long rectangular shape, a front surface G100b formed on the opposite side of the rear surface G100a, and four bosses provided on the front surface G100b. and a peripheral edge portion G100d formed so as to extend forward from the peripheral edge of the rear surface G100a. The rear surface G100a and the front surface G100b are formed as flat surfaces in the vertical direction.

The outer shape of the closing lid G100 (back surface G100a) is substantially the same as the outer shape of the peripheral edge portion G10b of the operation window G10 (similar shape slightly smaller than the peripheral edge portion G10b). is also getting bigger. Thus, by fitting the closing lid G100 into the recess (attaching the closing lid G100 to the rear wall G3 so as to fill the recess), the opening G10a of the operation window G10 can be closed. It's becoming

More specifically, when the closing lid G100 is arranged such that the peripheral edge portion G100d of the closing lid G100 is aligned with the connection portion G10d of the operation window G10, the four screw holes G10c of the operation window G10 and the closing lid G100 are aligned with the connecting portion G10d of the operation window G10. The four boss portions G100c of the lid G100 overlap each other, and each screw hole G10c is positioned in front of each boss portion G100c. In this state, the closing lid G100 is attached to the cabinet G (back wall G3) by screwing the screw inserted through the screw hole G10c from the front side (inside the cabinet G) into the hole formed in the boss G100c. be done. As a result, the opening G10a of the operation window G10 is closed by the closing lid G100. Since the screws for fastening the closing lid G100 to the rear wall G3 are screwed from the inside of the cabinet G (so that the screw heads are positioned inside the cabinet G), the inside of the cabinet G is secured. can be ensured.

When adjusting the positions and postures of the projector device B2 and the mirror mechanism B3, the screws fastening the closing lid G100 and the rear wall G3 are operated from the front side with the front door opened. By turning it, the fastening of the screw can be released. As a result, the closing lid G100 can be removed from the rear wall G3, and the operation window G10 (opening G10a) closed by the closing lid G100 can be exposed. In this state, the attachment is inserted from the outside (rear side) of the cabinet G into the connecting portions R1, R2, and R3 between the upper pedestal B220 and the lower pedestal B221 and the square hole 2201c of the upper pedestal B220 through the opening G10a. The positions and attitudes of the projector device B2 and the mirror mechanism B3 can be adjusted by operating the screws T and the connecting portions R4, R5, and R6 between the reflector holding portion B11 and the mirror holder B31.

<Locking of the closing lid G100 to the rear wall G3>
FIG. 106 is a perspective view of the closing lid as seen from the rear. FIG. 107 is a front perspective view of the closing lid. FIG. 108 is a partially enlarged perspective view of the back wall viewed from the front. FIG. 109 is a partially enlarged perspective view showing a state in which the closing lid is attached to the back wall. 110 is a cross-sectional view showing the closing lid and back wall in the state shown in FIG. 109; FIG.

As shown in FIG. 106, the closing lid G100 has a substantially bilaterally symmetrical structure, and includes a first engaging projection G101 and a first opening G102 formed in the vicinity of the left end in rear view, and a first opening G102. A first recess G103 formed on the right side of the opening G102, a second engaging protrusion G111 and a second opening G112 formed near the right end in rear view, and a second recess formed on the left side of the second opening G112. G113 and.

Each of the first opening G102 and the second opening G112 is formed in a vertically long rectangular shape as a through hole penetrating in the front-rear direction. The first engagement protrusion G101 is formed to protrude forward in the portion where the first opening G102 is formed. The second engagement protrusion G111 is formed to protrude forward at the portion where the second opening G112 is formed. The first recess G103 and the second recess G113 each have a shape recessed with respect to the rear surface G100a of the closing lid G100, and are formed in a rectangular shape.

As shown in FIG. 107, the first engaging projection G101 is formed to have a U-shape when viewed from above, and extends vertically. The length substantially matches the length of the long side of the first opening G102. The U-shape is composed of two straight portions and a curved portion connecting the ends of the two straight portions. As a result, the first engagement protrusion G101 has an inner surface G107 (a left surface in front view) closer to the center of the closing lid G100 and a surface corresponding to the two linear portions. It has an outer side surface G108 (a right side surface in a front view) farther from the center. The rear end portion of the inner surface G107 is along the long side G102a of the first opening G102 (long side of the closing lid G100 central side of the two long sides forming the peripheral edge of the first opening G102), and the outer surface The rear end of G108 is positioned near the center of the first opening G102.

An upper locking piece G108a and a lower locking piece G108b are formed slightly forward of the center in the front-rear direction on the outer side surface G108 (see FIG. 117). The upper locking piece G108a and the lower locking piece G108b are formed as projections protruding on the side opposite to the center of the closing lid G100 (right side in FIG. 107). A protrusion G108c is also formed on the rear end portion of the outer surface G108. The upper locking piece G108a has an engaging surface G108d on the rear side, and the lower locking piece G108b has an engaging surface G108e on the rear side (see FIG. 106).

Similarly, the second engaging projection G111 is formed to have a U-shape when viewed from the top and extends in the vertical direction, and the vertical length of the second engaging projection G111 is It substantially matches the length of the long side of the second opening G112. The U-shape is composed of two straight portions and a curved portion connecting the ends of the two straight portions. As a result, the second engaging protrusion G111 has an inner surface G117 (right surface in front view) closer to the center of the closing lid G100 and a surface corresponding to the two linear portions. It has an outer surface G118 farther from the center (left surface in front view). The rear end portion of the inner surface G117 is along the long side G112a of the second opening G112 (the long side on the center side of the closing lid G100 among the two long sides forming the peripheral edge of the second opening G112), and the outer surface The rear end of G118 is positioned near the center of the second opening G112.

Although the detailed structure of the second engaging projection G111 is not clear from FIG. 107, it is bilaterally symmetrical to the first engaging projection G101. That is, an upper locking piece G118a and a lower locking piece G118b are formed slightly forward of the center in the front-rear direction on the outer side surface G118. The upper locking piece G118a and the lower locking piece G118b are formed as projections protruding on the side opposite to the center of the closing lid G100 (left side in FIG. 107). A protrusion G118c is also formed on the rear end portion of the outer surface G118. The upper locking piece G118a has an engaging surface G118d on the rear side, and the lower locking piece G118b has an engaging surface G118e on the rear side.

In FIG. 107, a first protrusion G109 is formed on the left side of the first engaging protrusion G101, and a second protrusion G119 is formed on the right side of the second engaging protrusion G111. The first protrusion G109 and the second protrusion G119 correspond to the first recess G103 and the second recess G113 (see FIG. 106), respectively. It has a shape projecting forward with respect to the front surface G100b.

Further, an upper protruding portion G121 is formed substantially parallel to the upper edge portion G100e slightly below the upper edge portion G100e that constitutes the upper edge (upper side) of the rectangular peripheral edge portion G100d. A lower protrusion G122 is formed substantially parallel to the lower edge G100f slightly above the lower edge G100f that forms the lower edge (lower side) of the peripheral edge G100d.

Here, as shown in FIG. 104, strictly speaking, the shape of the opening G10a formed in the rear wall G3 of the cabinet G is not rectangular, and the peripheral edge G10b has a part (the left side in the rear view) It has a notched shape. As shown in FIG. 108, the notch G10e forms a right edge G10f. The right edge portion G10f is a part of the peripheral edge of the opening G10a (the portion connecting the inner surface G3a of the rear wall G3 and the peripheral edge portion G10b), and constitutes the right edge of the peripheral edge in a front view. The inner surface G3a of the rear wall G3 is the front surface of the rear wall G3. For the sake of clarity, FIG. 108 shows the right edge G10f with oblique lines.

The notch portion G10e is a portion with which the first engaging protrusion G101 of the closing lid G100 engages. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 109, when the closing lid G100 is attached to the rear wall G3, the engagement surface G108d of the upper engagement piece G108a and the lower engagement surface G108d of the first engagement protrusion G101 The engaging surface G108e (see FIG. 106) of the piece G108b abuts the inner surface G3a (the portion along the right edge G10f) of the rear wall G3, and the outer surface G108 of the first engaging projection G101 (the engaging surface G108d and A portion continuous with the engaging surface G108e) contacts the right edge G10f of the rear wall G3 (see FIG. 118).

Similarly, the second engaging protrusion G111 of the closing lid G100 is engaged near the left edge G10g. The left edge portion G10g is a part of the peripheral edge of the opening G10a (the portion connecting the inner surface G3a of the back wall G3 and the peripheral edge portion G10b), and constitutes the left edge of the peripheral edge in a front view. Specifically, although not shown, when the closing lid G100 is attached to the rear wall G3, the engaging surface G118d of the upper locking piece G118a and the lower locking piece G118b of the second engaging projection G111 The engagement surface G118e contacts the inner surface G3a (the portion along the left edge G10g) of the rear wall G3, and the outer surface G118 of the second engagement protrusion G111 (the portion continuous with the engagement surface G118d and the engagement surface G118e). ) contacts the left edge G10g of the rear wall G3.

As described above, the upper locking piece G108a and the lower locking piece G108b of the first engaging projection G101, and the upper locking piece G118a and the lower locking piece G118b of the second engaging projection G111, The closing lid G100 is locked to the rear wall G3.

FIG. 110 shows a state in which the closing lid G100 is fixed to the rear wall G3, and is cut along a plane passing through the first concave portion G103 of the closing lid G100 (vertical plane in the front-rear direction). As shown in FIG. 110, the front end of the peripheral edge portion G100d of the closing lid G100 abuts the peripheral edge portion G10b of the operation window G10.

Here, the length from the front surface G100b of the closing lid G100 to the front end of the lower protrusion G122 (the forward protrusion length of the lower protrusion G122 when the front surface G100b is used as a reference) is It is longer than the length to the front end of G100d (the forward projection length of the peripheral portion G100d when the front surface G100b is used as a reference). Thereby, the front end of the lower projecting portion G122 is positioned between the peripheral edge portion G10b of the rear wall G3 and the inner side surface G3a.

In addition, the length from the front surface G100b of the closing lid G100 to the front end of the upper projection G121 (the forward projection length of the upper projection G121 when the front surface G100b is used as a reference) is It is longer than the length to the front end of the lower projecting portion G122 (the forward projecting length of the lower projecting portion G122 when the front surface G100b is used as a reference). As a result, the front end of the upper projecting portion G121 is positioned forward of the inner surface G3a of the rear wall G3.

The lower surface of the lower protruding portion G122 and the lower edge portion G10h of the opening G10a are in proximity (substantially abutting), and the upper surface of the upper protruding portion G121 and the upper edge portion G10i of the opening G10a are in proximity (substantially abutting). )is doing. For example, the gap between the lower surface of the lower protrusion G122 and the lower edge G10h of the opening G10a and the gap between the upper surface of the upper protrusion G121 and the upper edge G10i of the opening G10a are the peripheral edge G100d of the closing lid G100. It is smaller than the thickness in the vertical direction in

As a result, when a slight gap is generated between the front end of the peripheral edge portion G100d of the closing lid G100 and the peripheral edge portion G10b of the operation window G10, the gap between the peripheral edge portion G100d of the closing lid G100 and the rear wall G3 is reduced. Even if a wire-shaped device tries to enter through the gap with the connecting portion G10d, the upper projecting portion G121 or the lower projecting portion G122 becomes an obstacle to prevent the entry. Therefore, it is possible to prevent fraudulent acts from being carried out through the gap.

The peripheral edge portion G100d of the closing lid G100 and the connecting portion G10d of the back wall G3 are basically in contact with each other, but there is a gap between the peripheral edge portion G100d of the closing lid G100 and the connecting portion G10d of the back wall G3. , a slight gap (for example, smaller than the thickness in the vertical direction of the peripheral edge portion G100d of the closing lid G100) may be formed. In this specification, the term “abutting” is a concept that includes a case of substantially abutting and a case of being close to each other.

<Attachment of irradiation unit B and closing lid G100 to rear wall G3>
The irradiation unit B and the closing lid G100 are attached to the rear wall G3 through the following steps (i) to (v).

(i) Temporarily attach (temporarily fasten) the irradiation unit hooking screw 5000 to the rear wall G3.
(ii) The irradiation unit B is hooked on the screw 5000 for hooking the irradiation unit.
(iii) The irradiation unit B is fixed to the rear wall G3 by fastening using the irradiation unit hooking screw 5000 .
(iv) Temporarily attach (temporarily fasten) the closing lid G100 to the rear wall G3 by locking using the first engagement protrusion G101 and the second engagement protrusion G111.
(v) Fixing the closing lid G100 to the rear wall G3 by fastening using the lid mounting screws 5100;

The steps (i) to (v) will be described below with reference to FIGS. 111 to 115. FIG.

FIG. 111 is a perspective view of an irradiation unit hooking screw. FIG. 112 is a partially enlarged perspective view showing a state in which the irradiation unit hooking screw is temporarily fixed to the rear wall. FIG. 113 is a front view of the projector cover plate. FIG. 114 is a partially enlarged perspective view of the projector cover plate viewed slightly from above. FIG. 115 is an exploded perspective view of the projector cover and projector cover plate viewed from the rear.

As shown in FIG. 108, two irradiation unit hooking screw holes 5010 and two irradiation unit fastening screw holes 5020 are formed in the rear wall G3. The two irradiation unit hooking screw holes 5010 are provided near the upper two corners of the opening G10a and above the upper two screw holes G10c. The two irradiation unit fastening screw holes 5020 are provided near the two lower corners of the opening G10a and below the two lower screw holes G10c.

An irradiation unit hooking screw 5000 is screwed into the irradiation unit hooking screw hole 5010 . As shown in FIG. 111, the irradiation unit hooking screw 5000 includes a screw portion 5001 and a head portion 5002 . The screw portion 5001 has a cylindrical shape extending in a predetermined direction. The head 5002 has a shape that bulges around the threaded portion 5001 when viewed from the front in the extending direction (axial direction) of the threaded portion 5001 . The head portion 5002 includes a head body 5003 and a washer portion 5004. Both the head body 5003 and the washer portion 5004 have a larger diameter than the screw portion 5001, and the diameter of the washer portion 5004 is equal to that of the head portion. It is larger than the diameter of main body 5003 .

FIG. 112 shows the rear wall G3 and the irradiation unit hooking screw 5000 at the time when the step (i) is performed. In this state, compared to the state in which the irradiation unit B and the closing lid G100 are attached to the rear wall G3 (the state in which the gaming machine 1 is completely assembled), the irradiation unit hooking screw 5000 is attached loosely. The screwing amount (degree of screwing) of the irradiation unit hooking screw 5000 to the rear wall G3 is small. As shown in FIG. 112, part of the screw portion 5001 and the entire head portion 5002 of the irradiation unit hooking screw 5000 protrude forward from the inner surface G3a of the rear wall G3.

In the step (ii) above, the rear side of the irradiation unit B is hooked on the projecting screw 5000 for hooking the irradiation unit. As described above, the projector cover plate B1000 is attached to the rear side of the projector cover B1 (see FIG. 98).

As shown in FIG. 113, the projector cover plate B1000 has a shape in which a rectangular opening B1001 is provided in a plate-like member that is rectangular when viewed from the front. Two lid-fastening screw holes B1002 are formed in the projector cover plate B1000 on the right side and the left side of the opening B1001, respectively.

Further, the projector cover plate B1000 is formed with two irradiation unit hooking screw holes B1010 and two cabinet fastening screw holes B1020. The two irradiation unit hooking screw holes B1010 are provided near the upper two corners of the opening B1001 and above the upper two cover fastening screw holes B1002. The two cabinet fastening screw holes B1020 are provided near the lower two corners of the opening B1001 and below the two lower lid fastening screw holes B1002.

As shown in FIG. 114, the irradiation unit hooking screw hole B1010 is formed as a through hole penetrating in the front-rear direction. The irradiation unit hooking screw hole B1010 is composed of an upper portion B1010a located on the upper side and a lower portion B1010b formed continuously with the upper portion B1010a, and has a gourd shape as a whole. . For the sake of clarity, in FIG. 114, the boundary between the upper portion B1010a and the lower portion B1010b (straight line connecting the recesses) is indicated by an imaginary line. The diameter of the lower portion B1010b is larger than the diameter of the upper portion B1010a.

Around the irradiation unit hooking screw hole B1010, a peripheral wall portion B1011 is formed at a position recessed from the main surface B1005 of the projector cover plate B1000. In other words, the vicinity of the irradiation unit hooking screw hole B1010 has a shape in which an elliptical recess that is recessed with respect to the main surface B1005 is formed, and an opening is formed by penetrating most of the recess. ing. The opening corresponds to the irradiation unit hooking screw hole B1010, and the portion of the recess in which the opening is not formed corresponds to the peripheral wall portion B1011. For the sake of clarity, in FIG. 114, the peripheral wall portion B1011 is hatched.

A peripheral wall portion B1003 is formed around the lid fastening screw hole B1002 at a position recessed from the main surface B1005 of the projector cover plate B1000. In other words, in the vicinity of the lid-fastening screw hole B1002, an elliptical recess that is recessed from the main surface B1005 is formed, and an opening is formed by partially penetrating the recess. there is The opening corresponds to the lid fastening screw hole B1002, and the portion of the recess in which no opening is formed corresponds to the peripheral wall portion B1003. For easy understanding, the peripheral wall portion B1003 is shaded in FIG. 114 .

In step (ii) above, the irradiation unit is mounted so that the irradiation unit hooking screw hole B1010 of the projector cover plate B1000 and the irradiation unit hooking screw 5000 (see FIG. 112) protruding from the rear wall G3 overlap each other. Bring B closer to the rear wall G3. The diameter of the upper side portion B1010a of the irradiation unit hooking screw hole B1010 is smaller than the diameter of the head portion 5002 (the washer portion 5004) of the irradiation unit hooking screw 5000, but the diameter of the lower side portion B1010b of the irradiation unit hooking screw hole B1010 The diameter is larger than the diameter of the head portion 5002 (the washer portion 5004).

Specifically, in the upper portion B1010a, the lengths in the horizontal direction and the vertical direction (the lengths of the longest portions) are smaller than the diameter of the washer portion 5004, whereas in the lower portion B1010b, the lengths in the horizontal direction and the vertical direction are smaller than the diameter of the washer portion 5004. The length in each direction (the length of the longest portion) is larger than the diameter of washer portion 5004 . As a result, the head 5002 of the irradiation unit hooking screw 5000 cannot be inserted into the upper portion B1010a, but can be inserted into the lower portion B1010b.

When the irradiation unit B is moved slightly downward while the head 5002 of the irradiation unit hooking screw 5000 is inserted into the lower side portion B1010b, the screw portion 5001 of the irradiation unit hooking screw 5000 and the irradiation unit hooking screw hole B1010 are aligned. It abuts on the upper edge portion B1010c of the (upper portion B1010a). The upper edge portion B1010c is a part of the peripheral edge of the upper portion B1010a (the portion that connects the peripheral wall portion B1011 and the rear peripheral edge portion B1012 of the irradiation unit hooking screw hole B1010), and corresponds to the upper end of the upper portion B1010a. . For the sake of clarity, in FIG. 115, the back-side peripheral edge B1012 is hatched. In this way, the projector cover plate B1000 can be hooked on the screw 5000 for hooking the irradiation unit.

As shown in FIG. 113, the projector cover plate B1000 is formed with two upper unit fastening screw holes B1030 and two lower unit fastening screw holes B1031. As shown in FIG. 115, the projector cover B1 is formed with two plate fastening upper boss portions B1040 and two plate fastening lower boss portions B1041.

The formation position of the plate fastening upper boss portion B1040 corresponds to the formation position of the unit fastening upper screw hole B1030. Screwed into the formed hole. Further, the formation position of the plate fastening lower boss portion B1041 corresponds to the formation position of the unit fastening lower screw hole B1031, and the screw inserted through the unit fastening lower screw hole B1031 is used for plate fastening. It is screwed into a hole formed in the lower boss B1041. As a result, the projector cover plate B1000 is fixed to the projector cover B1 by screw fastening.

In the projector cover B1, the portion where the plate fastening upper boss portion B1040 is formed and the portion where the plate fastening lower boss portion B1041 is formed are connected by an inclined portion B1042. The slant portion B1042 is formed so as to have a sloping attitude such that the front side is higher than the rear side. A pedestal mounting portion B1043 is formed on the back side of the inclined portion B1042 to serve as a mounting portion for the upper pedestal B220. As a result, the projector apparatus B2 is also arranged in a tilted posture such that the front side is higher than the rear side.

Due to the inclination of the inclined portion B1042, the plate fastening upper boss portion B1040 is positioned forward of the plate fastening lower boss portion B1041. On the other hand, the projector cover plate B1000 is formed with screw hole protrusions B1035 having a structure protruding from the main surface B1005. The unit fastening upper screw hole B1030 is formed at the tip of the screw hole protrusion B1035. As a result, the upper unit fastening screw hole B1030 is positioned forward of the lower unit fastening screw hole B1031.

In this way, the upper unit fastening screw hole B1030 and the lower unit fastening screw hole B1030 are provided at the formation positions of the upper plate fastening boss portion B1040 and the lower plate fastening boss portion B1041 (boss portions whose positions are different from each other in the front-rear direction). It is possible to match the formation position of the screw hole B1031. The projector cover plate B1000 is arranged vertically (substantially parallel to the rear wall G3 and the closing lid G100).

As described above, in step (ii) above, the projector cover plate B1000 is hooked on the irradiation unit hooking screw 5000 . After that, in step (iii) above, the projector cover plate B1000 (irradiation unit B) is fixed to the rear wall G3 by screwing. Specifically, as described above, when the step (ii) is performed, the screwing amount (degree of engagement) of the irradiation unit hooking screw 5000 with respect to the rear wall G3 is small, but the screw is By increasing the degree of bonding, the screws are securely fastened.

In addition, when the projector cover plate B1000 is hooked on the irradiation unit hooking screw 5000, the irradiation unit fastening screw hole 5020 (see FIG. 108) of the rear wall G3 and the cabinet fastening screw hole B1020 (see FIG. 108) of the projector cover plate B1000 ( See FIG. 113) are superimposed. In this state, the screw (irradiation unit fastening screw) inserted through the cabinet fastening screw hole B1020 is screwed into the irradiation unit fastening screw hole 5020 to reinforce the fixed state between the rear wall G3 and the projector cover plate B1000. be able to.

The diameter of the cabinet fastening screw hole B1020 is smaller than the diameter of the head (not shown) of the irradiation unit fastening screw. Therefore, the irradiation unit fastening screws cannot be inserted into the cabinet fastening screw holes B1020 from the rear side of the projector cover plate B1000, and can be inserted only from the front side of the projector cover plate B1000. The irradiation unit fastening screw has the same configuration as the irradiation unit hooking screw 5000 .

After the irradiation unit B is attached to the rear wall G3 in the steps (i) to (iii) as described above, the closing lid G100 is engaged with the rear wall G3 in the step (iv). stop.

Specifically, the side surfaces of the first concave portion G103 and the second concave portion G113 (see FIG. 106) are grasped with the left and right thumbs, respectively, and the outer surface G108 of the first engaging protrusion G101 and the second engaging protrusion G111 are The closing lid G100 is gripped by gripping the outer surface G118 (see FIG. 107) with the left and right index fingers or middle fingers. Then, the closing lid G100 is brought close to the back wall G3 from the back side, and the front portions of the outer side surface G108 and the outer side surface G118 (the upper locking piece G108a and the lower locking piece G108b, and the upper locking piece G118a and The closing lid G100 is arranged so that the lower locking piece G118b (frontward) is along the right edge G10f and left edge G10g (see FIG. 108) of the rear wall G3.

In this state, by pushing the closing lid G100 forward, as shown in FIG. 109, the closing lid G100 is locked to the rear wall G3. At this time, it is preferable to apply a force toward the center of the closing lid G100 while placing a finger on the projection G108c formed on the outer surface G108 and the projection G118c formed on the outer surface G118, as necessary. As a result, the outer surface G108 and the outer surface G118 are slightly deformed toward the center of the closing lid G100, and the locking can be performed smoothly.

When the closing lid G100 is locked to the back wall G3, the boss G100c (see FIG. 107) of the closing lid G100, the screw hole G10c (see FIG. 108) of the back wall G3, and the lid of the projector cover plate B1000. It overlaps with the fastening screw hole B1002 (see FIG. 113). In the step (v), in this state, the screw (cover attachment screw 5100 shown in FIG. 120) passed through the lid fastening screw hole B1002 and the screw hole G10c is screwed into the boss portion G100c. As a result, the closing lid G100 and the irradiation unit B can be integrally fixed to the rear wall G3. Note that unlike the irradiation unit hooking screw 5000, the lid attachment screw 5100 does not include a washer (the head portion consists only of the head body).

<Layout relationship around rear wall G3>
FIG. 116 is a partially enlarged perspective view of the periphery of the first cavity. FIG. 117 is a partially enlarged perspective view of the periphery of the first engaging protrusion. FIG. 118 is a cross-sectional view showing a state in which the first engaging protrusion is accommodated in the first cavity; FIG. 119 is a cross-sectional view showing a state in which the first engaging projection is accommodated in the first cavity; FIG. 120 is a cross-sectional view around the irradiation unit hooking screw and the lid mounting screw in a state where the closing lid and the irradiation unit are mounted on the rear wall. FIG. 121 is a cross-sectional view showing the closing lid, back wall, and projector cover plate. FIG. 122 is an exploded front view showing the periphery of the opening of the rear wall and the projector cover plate. 123 is a partially enlarged front view of the inside of the cabinet in the state shown in FIG. 97; FIG.

As shown in FIG. 115, a first cavity B1050 and a second cavity B1060 are formed on the rear side of the projector cover plate B1000. The first cavity B1050 and the second cavity B1060 each have a rectangular parallelepiped shape, and are formed as recesses that are recessed with respect to the surrounding surfaces (vertical surfaces including the rear peripheral edge B1012 and the like). That is, the recess has a shape in which one surface (the surface on the back side) of the rectangular parallelepiped is open, and the first cavity B1050 and the second cavity B1060 are surrounded by the remaining five surfaces of the rectangular parallelepiped. part.

As shown in FIG. 116, in the first cavity B1050, the five surfaces (wall portions) are composed of a front wall portion B1050a, an upper wall portion B1050b, a lower wall portion B1050c, and left and right side wall portions B1050d and B1050e. ing. For clarity, FIG. 116 shows the trailing edges B1050f of these walls B1050a-e hatched.

As shown in FIG. 117, the closing lid G100 is provided with a side protrusion G130 that protrudes forward with respect to the front surface G100b on the side of the first engagement protrusion G101 (left side in front view). . The lateral protrusion G130 has a plate-like shape, and the forward protrusion length of the lateral protrusion G130 when the front surface G100b is used as a reference is longer than the protrusion length of the first engaging protrusion G101. It's getting shorter. The lateral projecting portion G130 has a side surface G130a facing the inner surface G107 of the first engaging projection G101, and a contact surface G130b formed continuously with the side surface G130a and substantially parallel to the front surface G100b. there is For the sake of clarity, the contact surface G130b is hatched in FIG. 117 .

A downward protrusion G131 that protrudes forward with respect to the front surface G100b is formed below the first engagement protrusion G101. The downward projecting portion G131 is configured such that the projecting length of the left portion is longer than the projecting length of the right portion. For the sake of clarity, in FIG. 117, the upper surface G131a of the downward projecting portion G131 is hatched, and the front end surface G131b in the left portion is black. Above the first engagement protrusion G101, an upward protrusion G132 is formed that protrudes forward with respect to the front surface G100b. Similar to the downward projecting part G131, the upward projecting part G132 is configured such that the projecting length of the left side portion is longer than the projecting length of the right side portion.

In FIG. 118, in a state in which the closing lid G100 and the projector cover plate B1000 (irradiation unit B) are attached to the rear wall G3, the horizontal plane passing through the upper locking piece G108a of the first engaging protrusion G101 is cut. showing the situation. In FIG. 119, in a state where the closing lid G100 and the projector cover plate B1000 (irradiation unit B) are attached to the rear wall G3, the upper locking piece G108a and the lower locking piece of the first engagement protrusion G101 are shown. It shows a state of cutting along a vertical plane (a plane in the front-rear direction) passing through G108b.

For the sake of clarity, in FIG. 118, the cut surfaces of the first engaging protrusion G101 and the lateral protrusion G130 are hatched. The cross section of B1050e is shaded, and the cross section of the rear wall G3 is black. In FIG. 119, the upper end of the first engaging protrusion G101 is hatched, and the cut surfaces of the front wall portion B1050a, the upper wall portion B1050b, and the lower wall portion B1050c that constitute the first cavity B1050 are shaded. The lower right edge G10j of the rear wall G3 is shown in black. The right edge lower side portion G10j is part of the peripheral edge of the opening G10a (the portion connecting the inner surface G3a of the rear wall G3 and the peripheral edge portion G10b), and is continuous from the lower end of the right edge portion G10f (see FIG. 108). It is formed as a horizontal plane.

As shown in FIGS. 118 and 119, the first engagement protrusion G101 is accommodated in the first cavity B1050 of the projector cover plate B1000, and includes the front wall portion B1050a, the upper wall portion B1050b, the lower wall portion B1050c, and the left and right sides. are surrounded by side wall portions B1050d and B1050e.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 118, the front side of the first engaging protrusion G101 is covered with a front wall portion B1050a. In addition, the rear edge B1050f (see FIG. 116) of the side wall portion B1050d abuts (substantially abuts) the contact surface 130b (see FIG. 117) of the closing lid G100 (side protruding portion G130). B1050d and side projecting portion G130 are arranged so as to be continuous. As a result, the left side of the first engaging protrusion G101 is covered with the side wall portion B1050d and the lateral protrusion G130. Further, the rear edge B1050f (see FIG. 116) of the side wall portion B1050e abuts (substantially abuts) the inner side surface G3a of the rear wall G3. As a result, the right side of the first engaging protrusion G101 is covered with the side wall portion B1050e and the rear wall G3.

Further, as shown in FIG. 119, the rear edge B1050f (see FIG. 116) of the lower wall portion B1050c abuts on the front end surface G131b (see FIG. 117) of the closing lid G100 (the downward projecting portion G131) on the left side. (substantially abuts), and the right side portion abuts (substantially abuts) with the inner surface G3a of the rear wall G3. The upper surface of the lower wall portion B1050c and the right edge lower side portion G10j are arranged so as to be continuous and are positioned substantially on the same plane. Thereby, the lower side of the first engaging protrusion G101 is covered with the lower wall portion B1050c, the downward protrusion G131, and the rear wall G3. Similarly, although not shown, the upper side of the first engagement protrusion G101 is covered with the upper wall portion B1050b, the upward protrusion G132, and the rear wall G3.

As described above, the front, side, upper and lower portions of the first engaging protrusion G101 are all surrounded by walls. Similarly, the front, side, upper and lower sides of the second engaging protrusion G111 are all surrounded by walls. As a result, even if a wire-shaped instrument tries to enter through the gaps such as the first opening G102 and the second opening G112 (see FIG. 106), these walls will be a hindrance and prevent the penetration. is now possible. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the act from being carried out through the gap.

In FIG. 120, in a state in which the closing lid G100 and the projector cover plate B1000 (irradiation unit B) are attached to the back wall G3, It shows a state cut along a vertical plane (a plane in the front-rear direction). For the sake of clarity, in FIG. 120, the irradiation unit hooking screw 5000, the lid mounting screw 5100, and the cut surface of the rear wall G3 are hatched, and the cut surface of the projector cover plate B1000 is shaded. A cut surface of the closing lid G100 is shown in black.

As shown in FIG. 120, the washer portion 5004 of the irradiation unit hooking screw 5000 is present in front of the peripheral wall portion B1011 of the projector cover plate B1000. That is, the peripheral wall portion B1011 is in contact with the surface of the washer portion 5004 on the back side. Therefore, even if the projector cover plate B1000 (irradiation unit B) tries to move forward, the periphery wall portion B1011 is locked by the washer portion 5004, and the movement of the irradiation unit B is restricted. Thereby, the irradiation unit B can be firmly attached to the rear wall G3.

Also in the process of assembling the game machine 1, when hooking the irradiation unit B on the screw 5000 for hooking the irradiation unit (see step (ii) above), the peripheral wall portion B1011 is arranged on the back side of the washer portion 5004. become. As a result, similarly to the above, even if the projector cover plate B1000 (irradiation unit B) tries to move forward, the peripheral wall portion B1011 is locked by the washer portion 5004, and the hooked state can be stabilized. As a result, the screw 5000 for hooking the irradiation unit can be smoothly fastened.

Note that FIG. 120 shows a state in which there is a gap between the screw portion 5001 and the washer portion 5004 of the irradiation unit hooking screw 5000 and the projector cover plate B1000. One or both of the upper end of and the upper end of the washer portion 5004 may be in contact with the projector cover plate B1000. That is, the projector cover plate B1000 (irradiation unit B) may be hooked on the screw 5000 for hooking the irradiation unit. In the drawings, for convenience, the screw portion may be shown thinner than it actually is.

Further, the heads of the lid attachment screws 5100 are present in front of the peripheral wall portion B1003 of the projector cover plate B1000. That is, the peripheral wall portion B1003 is in contact with the surface of the head on the back side. Therefore, even if the projector cover plate B1000 (irradiation unit B) tries to move forward, the peripheral wall portion B1003 is locked by the screw head, and the movement of the irradiation unit B is restricted. Thereby, the attachment strength of the irradiation unit B to the rear wall G3 can be increased.

In FIG. 121, in a state where the closing lid G100 and the projector cover plate B1000 (irradiation unit B) are attached to the back wall G3, the plane passing through the first concave portion G103 of the closing lid G100 (the vertical plane in the front-rear direction) It shows how it is cut with . FIG. 110 shows the state before the projector cover plate B1000 (irradiation unit B) is attached, while FIG. 121 shows the state after the projector cover plate B1000 (irradiation unit B) is attached. For the sake of clarity, in FIG. 121, the inner surface G3a of the rear wall G3 is hatched.

As described with reference to FIG. 110, the front end of the upper projecting portion G121 of the closing lid G100 is positioned forward of the inner surface G3a of the rear wall G3. As shown in FIG. 121, the rear side of the upper portion of the opening B1001 (see FIG. 113) in the projector cover plate B1000 is substantially in contact with the inner surface G3a of the rear wall G3. The upper surface of the portion of the upper protrusion G121 that protrudes forward from the inner surface G3a is substantially in contact with the upper edge B1001a of the opening B1001 of the projector cover plate B1000. As a result, the structure is such that it is even more difficult for a wire-shaped device to enter, and it is possible to effectively prevent trolling.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 115, a substrate setting portion B1070 is provided below the opening B1001 on the rear side of the projector cover plate B1000. A projector control board B23 (see FIG. 12) is fixed to the board setting portion B1070. As shown in FIG. 121, the lower portion of the opening B1001 in the projector cover plate B1000 has its back side substantially in contact with the inner side surface G3a of the back wall G3. Therefore, the projector control board B23 is arranged in the space formed between the back side of the projector cover plate B1000 and the inner side surface G3a of the back wall G3.

As described with reference to FIG. 104, the peripheral edge portion G10b of the rear wall G3 has a shape in which a portion thereof (left side portion in rear view) is notched. As a result, the opening G10a has a laterally asymmetrical shape. In this regard, it is assumed that the hatched portion shown in FIG. 122 is formed as the opening G10a so that the opening G10a has a symmetrical shape. In this case, the two screw holes G10c on the right must be formed further to the right. Then, as a result, the irradiation unit B is arranged on the right side. According to this embodiment, the space on the right side of the irradiation unit B can be effectively utilized by not using the hatched portion shown in FIG. 122 as the opening G10a.

As shown in FIG. 123, when viewed from the front, the distance (R1) between the right end of the irradiation unit B (projector cover plate B1000) and the right end of the rear wall G3 (the inner surface of the right side wall G2R of the cabinet G) is (projector cover plate B1000) and the left end of the rear wall G3 (inner surface of the left side wall G2L of the cabinet G) (R2).

Here, as described above, the main control board MS (see FIG. 4) is attached to the inner surface of the right side wall G2R of the cabinet G. As shown in FIG. In the vicinity of the installation location of the main control board MS, it is necessary to have a space for opening and sealing the caulking, but according to this embodiment, the space can be secured.

Since the opening G10a of the rear wall G3 is left-right asymmetrical, the distance between the right edge G10f of the opening G10a and the two screw holes G10c on the right side (the distance in the left-right direction) is the left edge of the opening G10a. It is shorter than the distance (the distance in the left-right direction) between the portion G10g and the two screw holes G10c on the left side. Corresponding to this, in the state where the closing lid G100 is attached to the rear wall G3, the distance (the distance in the left-right direction) between the first engaging protrusion G101 and the two screw holes G10c on the right side is It is shorter than the distance (the distance in the left-right direction) between the second engaging protrusion G111 and the two screw holes G10c on the left side.

Here, as shown in FIG. 122, in the projector cover plate B1000, the left edge of the front wall portion B1050a forming the first cavity B1050 (see FIG. 115) is positioned to the left of the right edge portion B1001b of the opening B1001. However, the distance between the left edge of the front wall portion B1050a and the right edge portion B1001b of the opening B1001 is small (the positions in the left-right direction are generally the same). On the other hand, the right edge of the front wall portion B1060a that forms the second cavity B1060 (see FIG. 115) is located considerably to the right of the left edge B1001c of the opening B1001, and is about the right half of the second cavity B1060. are formed to protrude into the opening B1001. For clarity, in FIG. 122, the front wall portion B1050a and the front wall portion B1060a are hatched.

That is, the first cavity B1050 and the second cavity B1060 have different relative positional relationships with respect to the opening B1001, and the distance between the right edge of the front wall portion B1060a and the left edge portion B1001c of the opening B1001 is It is larger than the interval between the left edge of B1050a and the right edge B1001b of the opening B1001. Corresponding to this, the distance (horizontal direction distance) between the first cavity B1050 (front wall portion B1050a) and the two lid fastening screw holes B1002 on the right side is the second cavity B1060 (front wall portion B1060a). ) and the two lid-fastening screw holes B1002 on the left side (distance in the left-right direction).

As a result, the formation positions of the first cavity B1050 and the second cavity B1060 of the projector cover plate B1000 correspond to the formation positions of the first engagement protrusion G101 and the second engagement protrusion G111 of the closing lid G100, and The formation position of the lid fastening screw hole B1002 of the projector cover plate B1000 can correspond to the formation position of the screw hole G10c of the rear wall G3.

<Space formation by projector cover B1 and duct cover B2100>
FIG. 124 is a perspective view of the cover portion. FIG. 125 is an exploded perspective view of the projector cover and duct cover viewed from the left. FIG. 126 is an exploded perspective view of the projector cover and duct cover viewed from the right side. FIG. 127 is a cross-sectional view of the duct cover viewed from the rear. FIG. 128 is a cross-sectional view of the cover portion. FIG. 129 is a cross-sectional view of the cover portion. FIG. 130 is a perspective view of the cover viewed from the right side.

As shown in FIG. 124, a duct cover B2100 is attached to the left portion of the projector cover B1. The duct cover B2100 is a configuration adopted in place of the blind B500 (see FIG. 30). A space P (see FIG. 32) is formed inside the structure (cover portion B2000) constituted by the projector cover B1 and the duct cover B2100, and air can pass through the space P. It's becoming The space P in this embodiment will be described below.

As shown in FIG. 125, the projector cover B1 has a left side wall portion B2201 forming the left end of the projector cover B1. As shown in FIG. 126, the left inner wall surface B2201a, which is the inner surface (right surface) of the left wall portion B2201, generally includes sides P, Q, R, S, T, U, V, And, it is formed in a figure shape surrounded by sides W. As shown in FIG.

The projector cover B1 also has a right side wall portion B2202 formed substantially parallel to the left side wall portion B2201. The shape of the right side wall portion B2202 is such that the trapezoidal shape shown in the hatched portion in FIG. 125 is cut out from the shape of the left side wall portion B2201. As a result, the surface (left surface) of the right side wall portion B2202 facing the left inner wall surface B2201a is divided into an upper right inner wall surface B2202a and a lower right inner wall surface B2202b.

Further, the projector cover B1 includes a lower wall surface B2203 connecting the lower end (side S) of the left inner wall surface B2201a and the lower end of the lower right inner wall surface B2202b, and the rear end of the lower wall surface 2203 upward (side T ) continuously formed rear wall surface B2204, an inclined wall surface B2205 continuously formed from the upper end of the rear wall surface B2204 obliquely forward and upward (along side U), and an inclined wall surface A front wall surface B2206 formed continuously upward (along side V) from the front end of B2205, and an upper side continuously formed forward (along side W) from the upper end of the front wall surface B2206 It has a wall surface B2207.

The upper part of the rear wall surface B2204 and the right end of the inclined wall surface B2205 are continuous with the upper right inner wall surface B2202a. The front wall surface B2206 extends to the right of the upper right inner wall surface B2202a. An opening wall surface B2208 substantially parallel to the upper wall surface B2207 is formed on the right side of the upper right inner wall surface B2202a. The rear end of the opening wall surface B2208 matches the lower end of the front wall surface B2206, and the left end of the opening wall surface B2208 matches the upper end of the upper right inner wall surface B2202a. The right end of the front wall surface B2206 and the right end of the opening wall surface B2208 are connected by an opening wall surface B2209.

The outer shape of the duct cover B2100 when viewed from the front corresponds to the wall surfaces of the projector cover B1 (left inner wall surface B2201a, upper right inner wall surface B2202a, lower right inner wall surface B2202b, lower wall surface B2203, side wall surface B2204, inclined wall surface B2205, and , front side wall surface B2206). As a result, the duct cover B2100 as a whole has a shape that can be fitted to the front side of the projector cover B1.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 125, the duct cover B2100 has a left side wall portion B2101 forming the left end of the duct cover B2100. The shape of the left side wall portion B2101 corresponds to the shape of the left side wall portion B2201 of the projector cover B1. R). The outer edge of the left side wall portion B2101 includes a side X substantially parallel to the side P, a side Y substantially parallel to the side Q, and a side Z substantially parallel to the side R.

Further, the duct cover B2100 has an upper right wall portion B2102 and a lower right wall portion B2103 which are formed substantially parallel to the left wall portion B2101. The upper right wall portion B2102 and the lower right wall portion B2103 are portions that are continuous with the right side wall portion B2202 of the projector cover B1 when the duct cover B2100 is attached to the projector cover B1. The outer edge of the upper right wall portion B2102 includes a side x substantially parallel to the side X, a side y substantially parallel to the side Y, and a side z substantially parallel to the side Z. For the sake of clarity, in FIG. 126, the upper right wall portion B2102 and the lower right wall portion B2103 are hatched.

The duct cover B2100 includes a front lower wall portion B2104 formed continuously from the front end (side Z) of the lower portion of the left side wall portion B2101 toward the right side, and a front end (side Z) of the upper portion of the left side wall portion B2101. X) and a front upper wall portion B2205 continuously formed toward the right side. The front lower wall portion B2104 and the front upper wall portion B2105 are each formed in a rectangular shape. A lower right wall portion B2103 is continuously formed in a lower right portion of the front lower wall portion B2104. A lower portion (a portion including side z) of the upper right wall portion B2102 is continuously formed on the upper right portion of the front lower wall portion B2104.

The length of the front upper wall portion B2105 in the left-right direction is shorter than the length of the front lower wall portion B2104 in the left-right direction. The right end of the inclined wall portion B2106 continuously formed from the right end of the front upper wall portion B2105 toward the right side coincides with the side x forming the outer edge of the upper right wall portion B2102. The upper end of the front lower wall portion B2104 and the lower ends of the front upper wall portion B2105 and the inclined wall portion B2106 are connected by an inclined wall portion B2107. The right end of the inclined wall portion B2107 coincides with the side y forming the outer edge of the upper right wall portion B2102.

Further, the duct cover B2100 has an opening B2108 above the front upper wall portion B2105 and the inclined wall portion B2106. The opening B2108 has a shape in which two opposing surfaces (a surface on the front side and a surface on the back side) of a rectangular parallelepiped are opened. A lower wall surface B2108a constituting the lower wall of the rectangular parallelepiped has a shape obtained by cutting out the shape shown in the hatched portion in FIG. Further, the left wall surface B2108b forming the side wall of the rectangular parallelepiped is continuous with the inner surface (left inner wall surface B2101a) of the left wall portion B2101 (is part of the left inner wall surface B2101a). Note that FIG. 127 shows a state in which the opening B2108 is cut along a horizontal plane.

Screw holes B2110 are formed on the right and left sides of the opening B2108 in the duct cover B2100, respectively. A screw hole B2111 is formed in the lower portion of the front lower wall portion B2104. On the other hand, boss portions B2210 are respectively formed on the right and left sides of the front wall surface B2206 of the projector cover B1. A boss portion B2211 is formed on the lower wall surface B2203 so as to partially protrude.

The formation positions of the screw holes B2110 and B2111 in the duct cover B2100 respectively correspond to the formation positions of the boss portions B2210 and B2211 in the projector cover B1. The duct cover B2100 is attached to the projector cover B1 by screwing screws inserted through the screw holes B2110 and B2111 into the holes formed in the boss portions B2210 and B2211.

When the duct cover B2100 is attached to the projector cover B1, the rear edge of the left side wall B2101 of the duct cover B2100 fits into the front edge of the left side wall B2201 of the projector cover B1. As a result, the inner surface (left inner wall surface B2201a) of the left wall portion B2201 of the projector cover B1 and the inner surface (left inner wall surface B2101a) of the left wall portion B2101 of the duct cover B2100 are substantially continuous.

FIG. 128 shows the cover portion 2000 shown in FIG. 124 cut along a vertical plane in the front-rear direction slightly to the right of the left side wall portion B2201 of the projector cover B1 and the left side wall portion B2101 of the duct cover B2100. FIG. 129 shows how the cover portion 2000 shown in FIG. 124 is cut along a horizontal plane passing through the screw hole B2110.

As shown in FIG. 128, the upper right inner wall surface B2202a of the projector cover B1 and the inner surface (upper right wall surface B2102a) of the upper right wall portion B2102 of the duct cover B2100 are substantially continuous, and the lower right inner wall surface B2202b of the projector cover B1 and the duct cover are substantially continuous. The inner surface (lower right wall surface B2103a) of the lower right wall portion B2103 at B2100 is substantially continuous.

Further, the duct cover B2100 is formed with a lower wall portion B2109 continuing rearward from the lower end of the front lower wall portion B2104. It is substantially continuous with the inner side surface (lower side wall surface B2109a). Further, the upper wall surface 2207 of the projector cover B1 and the upper wall (upper wall surface B2108c) of the opening B2108 of the duct cover B2100 are substantially continuous.

128, the lower wall surface B2203 of the projector cover B1, the upper right wall surface B2102a and the lower right wall surface B2103a of the duct cover B2100 are hatched, and the front lower wall portion B2104 of the duct cover B2100 is shaded. , the upper right inner wall surface B2202a and lower right inner wall surface B2202b of the projector cover B1, and the lower wall surface B2109a of the duct cover B2100 are shown in black. Actually, the boss portion B2211 is arranged on the upper portion of the lower wall surface B2109a, but for the sake of convenience, the lower wall surface B2109a is shown ignoring the presence of the boss portion B2211.

Further, as shown in FIG. 129, the opening wall surface B2208 of the projector cover B1 and the lower wall (lower wall surface B2108a) of the opening B2108 of the duct cover B2100 are substantially continuous, and the opening wall surface B2209 of the projector cover B1 and the duct cover are substantially continuous. The right wall (right wall surface B2108d) of the opening B2108 in B2100 is substantially continuous. For clarity, in FIG. 129, the front wall surface B2206 of the projector cover B1, the lower wall surface B2108a and the right wall surface B2108d of the duct cover B2100 are hatched, and the opening wall surface B2208 of the projector cover B1 is shaded. The opening wall surface B2209 of the cover B1 is shown in black.

As described above, a space P (see FIG. 128) is formed by the projector cover B1 and the duct cover B2100 (cover portion B2000). The space P is a left inner wall surface B2101a, an upper right inner wall surface B2202a, a lower right inner wall surface B2202b, a lower wall surface B2203, a rear wall surface B2204, an inclined wall surface B2205, a front wall surface B2206, an upper wall surface B2207, and an opening wall surface B2208. , and the opening wall surface B2209, the left inner wall surface B2101a, the upper right wall surface B2102a, the lower right wall surface B2103a of the duct cover B2100, the inner surface of the front lower wall portion B2104 (front lower wall surface B2104a), and the front upper wall portion B2205. The inner surface (front upper wall surface B2205a), the inner surface of the inclined wall portion B2106 (inclined wall surface B2106a), the inner surface of the inclined wall portion B2107 (inclined wall surface B2107a), the wall surfaces B2108a to d constituting the opening B2108, and the lower It is surrounded by side wall surface B2109a.

A front portion of the space P is connected to the external space of the cover portion B2000 through the opening B2108e. The opening B2108e is a portion surrounded by the front edges of the wall surfaces B2108a to B2108d forming the opening B2108. For clarity, FIG. 130 shows the front edge of each wall surface B2108a-d in black.

A part of the right side portion of the space P is connected to the external space of the cover portion B2000 through the opening B2010. The opening B2010 has a shape similar to a figure formed by sides a to f shown in FIG. Side a corresponds to the lower edge of the upper right inner wall surface B2202a of the projector cover B1 (the upper side of the four sides forming the trapezoid shown in the shaded area in FIG. 125). The side b corresponds to the right edge of the rear wall surface B2204 of the projector cover B1 (the rear side of the four sides forming the trapezoid indicated by hatching in FIG. 125). The side c corresponds to the upper edge of the lower right inner wall surface B2202b of the projector cover B1 (the lower side of the four sides forming the trapezoid indicated by hatching in FIG. 125). The side d corresponds to the upper edge of the lower right wall surface B2103a of the duct cover B2100. The side e corresponds to the right edge of the front lower wall surface B2104a of the duct cover B2100. The side f corresponds to the lower edge of the upper right wall surface B2102a of the duct cover B2100.

In the outer space of the cover portion B2000, an intake port B22A (see FIG. 22) of the case B22 is arranged near the opening B2010. As a result, air is drawn into the cabinet G from the outside of the gaming machine 1 through an opening (not shown) formed in the cabinet G or the upper wall of the front door or the like. This air is taken into the cover portion B2000 through the opening B2108e of the duct cover B2100. After entering the cover portion B2000, the air moves rearward and downward in the space P, passes through the opening B2010, and enters the case B22 through the intake port B22A. The air that has entered the case B22 moves rightward while absorbing heat generated in the case B22, and exits the case B22 through the exhaust port B22E. The air coming out of the case B22 is released to the outside of the game machine 1 through an opening formed in the cabinet G or the upper wall of the front door or the like.

In this manner, the heat generated in the projector device B2 can be discharged to the outside of the gaming machine 1. FIG. In the second embodiment, the intake port B22A is provided on the right side of the case B22, while the exhaust port B22E is provided on the left side of the case B22 (see FIGS. 22 and 23). On the other hand, in the present embodiment, an intake port B22A is provided on the left side of the case B22, while an exhaust port B22E is provided on the right side of the case B22 (see FIG. 138).

In addition, in order to facilitate the formation of the air flow as described above, an intake fan or an exhaust fan may be provided as appropriate. For example, a fan similar to the opening vicinity fan B700 (see FIG. 33) may be installed in the opening B2108 of the duct cover B2100. Also, by disposing a member similar to the duct cover B600 (see FIG. 35) in the space P, the space P may be divided into an air passage space (space P1) and a liquid storage space (space P2).

<Duct adapter B2500>
FIG. 131 is a perspective view showing a state in which the cover portion and the case are connected via a duct adapter; FIG. 132 is a perspective view of the duct adapter as seen from the front left. FIG. 133 is a perspective view of the duct adapter as seen from the rear right. FIG. 134 is a left side view in section at the left side of the duct adapter; FIG. 135 is a right side view in section at the right side of the duct adapter; FIG. 136 is a front view of the duct adapter; FIG. 137 is a left side view of the duct adapter cut near the center of the connecting portion.

As shown in FIG. 131, a duct adapter B2500 is arranged between the cover portion B2000 and the case B22. For the sake of clarity, the duct adapter B2500 is hatched in FIG.

As shown in FIGS. 132 and 133, the duct adapter B2500 includes a left side B2510, a right side B2520, and a connecting portion B2530. The left side B2510 and the right side B2520 are connected by the connecting portion B2530. ing.

The left side portion B2510 has a flat left main body portion B2511 and an upper left side portion B2512 formed by bending the upper portion of the main body portion B2511 obliquely rightward. A left opening B2513 penetrating in the left-right direction is formed in the left main body B2511. The right side portion B2520 has a flat right main body portion B2521, and a right opening B2522 penetrating in the left-right direction is formed in the right main body portion B2521.

The left side B2510 has flat left side B2510a and right side B2510b. In FIG. 132, the front edge B2510c of the left side B2510 is hatched. In FIG. 133, the rear edge B2510d of the left side B2510 is hatched, and the right edge B2512a is black.

In FIG. 134, the left opening B2513 is shaded. The left opening B2513 has a rectangular shape with slightly rounded corners. In FIG. 135, the right opening B2522 is shaded. The right opening B2522 has a rectangular shape with slightly rounded corners. The shape of the right opening B2522 is substantially similar to the shape of the left opening B2513, but the right opening B2522 is slightly smaller than the left opening B2513.

The lower edge of the left side B2510 has a structure that protrudes slightly downward. Thereby, a downward projecting portion B2511a is formed in the left main body portion B2511. For the sake of clarity, FIG. 134 shows the downward protrusion B2511a with oblique lines.

A cavity B2531 (see FIG. 139) is formed inside the connecting portion B2530, and the cavity B2531 communicates with the left opening B2513 and the right opening B2522. The connecting portion B2530 includes a connecting upper side portion B2532 that defines the upper end of the cavity B2531, a connecting lower side portion B2533 that defines the lower end of the cavity B2531, a connecting front side portion B2534 that defines the front end of the cavity B2531, and a rear end of the cavity B2531. and a connecting rear side portion B2535 that defines the . The upper connection part B2532, the lower connection part B2533, the front connection part B2534, and the rear connection part B2535 form a cylindrical shape with left and right sides open.

As shown in FIG. 136, the upper and lower portions of the connecting portion B2530 have a recessed shape. Specifically, the vicinity of the center in the left-right direction (point A) in the upper portion of the front coupling side portion B2534 is below the point of contact B between the front coupling side portion B2534 and the left side portion B2510 and the point of contact C between the front coupling side portion B2534 and the right side portion B2520. is positioned in In addition, the vicinity of the center in the left-right direction (point D) in the lower portion of the front side portion B2534 is positioned above the contact point E between the front side portion B2534 and the left side portion B2510 and the contact point F between the front side portion B2534 and the right side B2520. It is

That is, the connecting upper portion B2532 has a downward slope from the connection portion with the left side portion B2510 toward the center, and has a downward slope from the connection portion with the right side portion B2520 toward the center. there is In addition, the connection lower side portion B2533 has an upward slope from the connection portion with the left side portion B2510 toward the center, and has an upward slope from the connection portion with the right side portion B2520 toward the center. ing.

Similarly, the connecting front side portion B2534 has an inclination toward the rear from the connection portion with the left side portion B2510 toward the center, and has an inclination toward the rear from the connection portion with the right side portion B2520 toward the center. ing. In addition, the connection rear side portion B2535 has an inclination toward the front from the connection portion with the left side portion B2510 toward the center, and has an inclination toward the front from the connection portion with the right side portion B2520 toward the center. ing.

As a result, the connection upper side portion B2532, the connection lower side portion B2533, the connection front side portion B2534, and the connection rear side portion B2535 are respectively formed with an inclined surface near the left side B2510 and an inclined surface near the right side B2520 with the vicinity of the center as a boundary. 180° (for example, about 120° to 175° or about 150° to 170°).

As a result, as shown in FIG. 137, when the duct adapter B2500 is cut near the center of the connecting portion B2530 in the left-right direction, the opening corresponding to the cross section (cross-sectional opening B2536) is smaller than the left side opening B2513. . Specifically, the cross-sectional opening B2536 has a rectangular shape, and both the vertical side (long side) and the front-rear side (short side) are shorter than the left side opening B2513. In order to make it easier to understand, in FIG. 137, the cross-sectional opening B2536 is hatched, and the inner surfaces of the connecting upper side portion B2532, the connecting lower side portion B2533, the connecting front side portion B2534, and the connecting rear side portion B2535 are indicated in black. there is

In addition, the thickness of the connecting portion B2530 (connecting upper side portion B2532, connecting lower side portion B2533, connecting front side portion B2534, and connecting rear side portion B2535) is the same as the thickness of the left side portion B2510 (left body portion B2511 and upper left side portion B2512) and the right side portion B2510. It is smaller than the thickness of the portion B2520 (right main body portion B2521). Specifically, the thickness of the left side portion B2510 and the right side portion B2520 is about 3 to 5 mm (eg, 4 mm), while the thickness of the connecting portion B2530 is about 0.5 to 1.2 mm (eg, 0.7 mm). ~ 1.0 mm). The left side portion B2510, the right side portion B2520, and the connecting portion B2530 are formed with a uniform thickness as a whole.

The duct adapter B2500 configured as described above is made of an elastic member (rubber). As a result, the duct adapter B2500 can be flexibly deformed (has elasticity) when force is applied from the right side or left side, and has a repulsive force to return to its original shape. Synthetic rubber such as urethane rubber (polyurethane) or silicon rubber can be appropriately used as the material of the duct adapter B2500. The members (projector cover B1, duct cover B2100, and case B22) connected to the duct adapter B2500 are made of a material different from rubber (for example, a thermoplastic resin such as ABS resin). Flexible deformation like the duct adapter B2500 is impossible.

<Locking of Duct Adapter B2500 to Case B22>
FIG. 138 is a perspective view of the case. FIG. 139 is a partially enlarged perspective view of the periphery of the right side of the duct adapter. FIG. 140 is a partially enlarged perspective view of the vicinity of the first right protrusion and the second right protrusion of the duct adapter. 141 is a partially enlarged front view of the right protrusion shown in FIG. 140; FIG.

As shown in FIG. 138, an intake port B22A is formed in the left side surface B22X of the case B22. The intake port B22A is composed of a large number of slits B2022. Each slit B2022 is formed in a rectangular shape as a through hole penetrating the left side B22X of the case B22 in the left-right direction. Note that FIG. 138 shows the inside of the case B22 as seen through.

As shown in FIG. 139, a right side portion B2520 of the duct adapter B2500 is formed with three right side protrusions B2523 (a first right side protrusion B2523a, a second right side protrusion B2523b, and a third right side protrusion B2523c). ing. These right protrusions B2523 are formed as protrusions protruding rightward from a right main surface B2524 formed around the right opening B2522.

The first right protrusion B2523a and the second right protrusion B2523b are each formed slightly above the upper edge of the right opening B2522 so as to extend in the front-rear direction. The third right protrusion B2523c is formed slightly below the lower edge of the right opening B2522 so as to extend in the front-rear direction. In FIG. 139, for convenience, the direction along the long side of the right opening B2522 is shown as the up-down direction, and the direction along the short side of the right opening B2522 is shown as the front-rear direction.

Each of the first right protrusion B2523a, the second right protrusion B2523b, and the third right protrusion B2523c has a rectangular parallelepiped shape with a rounded vertex. Moreover, the projecting directions of the first right projecting portion B2523a, the second right projecting portion B2523b, and the third right projecting portion B2523c are substantially perpendicular to the right main surface B2524.

When the duct adapter B2500 is connected to the case B22 (the assembly of the game machine 1 is completed), the right main surface B2524 of the duct adapter B2500 and the left side surface B22X of the case B22 are substantially in contact with each other. The extending directions of the first right protrusion B2523a, the second right protrusion B2523b, and the third right protrusion B2523c are substantially parallel to the long side direction of the rectangular slit B2022 formed in the case B22. The size and shape of the first right protrusion B2523a, the second right protrusion B2523b, and the third right protrusion B2523c are substantially the same as the size and shape of the slit B2022. size and shape).

As a result, the first right protrusion B2523a, the second right protrusion B2523b, and the third right protrusion B2523c are each inserted into the case B22 via the slit B2022. In FIG. 138, the slits B2022 into which the first right protrusion B2523a, the second right protrusion B2523b, and the third right protrusion B2523c are inserted are shown as the slit B2022a, the slit B2022b, and the slit B2022c, respectively. .

As shown in FIGS. 140 and 141, the right projecting portion B2523 has a projecting upper surface B2523d and a projecting lower surface B2523e projecting rightward from the right main surface B2524. The projecting upper surface B2523d and the projecting lower surface B2523e are respectively formed in a direction perpendicular to the right main surface B2524, and constitute the upper surface and the lower surface of the right projecting portion B2523. Note that the first right protrusion B2523a, the second right protrusion B2523b, and the third right protrusion B2523c have substantially the same structure. This will be described as part B2523.

An upper protruding portion B2523f is formed in the vicinity of the center in the projecting direction of the right projecting portion B2523 on the projecting upper surface B2523d. The upper protruding portion B2523f has a protruding shape with respect to the flat projecting upper surface B2523d. Similarly, the projecting lower surface B2523e is formed with a lower protruding portion B2523g near the center in the projecting direction of the right projecting portion B2523. The lower raised portion B2523g has a raised shape with respect to the flat projecting lower surface B2523e. For the sake of clarity, in FIG. 141, the upper protruding portion B2523f and the lower protruding portion B2523g are hatched.

The distance between the projecting upper surface B2523d and the projecting lower surface B2523e is substantially the same length as the short side of the slit B2022 formed in the case B22. Therefore, when the duct adapter B2500 is connected to the case B22 (the right protrusion B2523 is inserted into the slit B2022), if a force is applied in the direction of removing the right protrusion B2523 from the slit B2022, the upper protrusion B2523f and the lower raised portion B2523g are locked by the peripheral portion of the slit B2022. As a result, the connection state between the duct adapter B2500 and the case B22 is maintained, making it difficult for the duct adapter B2500 to come off from the case B22.

Note that, as shown in FIG. 139, the third right protrusion B2523c is formed at a position symmetrical to the second right protrusion B2523b with respect to the right opening B2522, whereas the first right protrusion B2523 is positioned below the right opening B2522. No protrusion (right protrusion B2523) is formed at a position symmetrical to the right protrusion B2523a. Therefore, the right protrusion B2523 is not inserted into the slit B2022d (see FIG. 138) formed in the case B22. Thereby, it is possible to secure a space in the vicinity of the slit B2022d inside the case B22, and the space can be used to efficiently arrange wiring inside the case B22.

<Locking of the duct adapter B2500 to the cover portion B2000>
FIG. 142 is a perspective view of the duct cover as seen from the rear. FIG. 143 is a partially enlarged perspective view of the state in which the duct adapter is connected to the duct cover, viewed from a direction perpendicular to the front lower wall surface of the duct cover. 144 is a sectional view of the duct cover and duct adapter in the state shown in FIG. 143; FIG. FIG. 145 is a partially enlarged perspective view of the periphery of the adapter engagement groove in the projector cover. FIG. 146 is a partially enlarged perspective view of the periphery of the first protrusion in the projector cover. FIG. 147 is a partially enlarged perspective view of the periphery of the second to fifth projections on the projector cover. FIG. 148 is a partially enlarged perspective view showing the duct adapter connected to the projector cover. 149 is a sectional view of the projector cover and duct adapter in the state shown in FIG. 148; FIG.

As shown in FIG. 142, a right upright portion B2031 and a left upright portion B2032 are formed on the front lower wall surface B2104a (see FIG. 127) of the duct cover B2100. The right erected portion B2031 and the left erected portion B2032 are erected in a direction perpendicular to the front lower wall surface B2104a. The left side wall portion B2101 is also erected with respect to the front lower wall surface B2104a, but the height (protrusion length) of the right side wall portion B2031 and the left side wall portion B2032 with respect to the front lower wall surface B2104a is the same as that of the left side wall portion B2101. is lower than

The right standing portion B2031 extends in a direction substantially parallel to the right edge (side e shown in FIG. 130) of the front lower wall surface B2104a. The left standing portion B2032 includes a left standing body portion B2032a extending in a direction substantially parallel to the right side standing portion B2031, and a left standing bending portion bending and extending from the end of the left standing body portion B2032a. B2032b and. Of the ends of the left standing main body portion B2032a, the end opposite to the connecting portion with the left standing bent portion B2032b is continuous with the lower wall surface B2109a (see FIG. 127). Of the ends of the left erected bent portion B2032b, the end opposite to the connecting portion with the left erected main body portion B2032a is continuous with the upper right wall surface B2102a (see FIG. 128).

As shown in FIGS. 143 and 144, when the duct adapter B2500 is connected to the duct cover B2100 (when the gaming machine 1 is completely assembled), the left side B2510 of the duct adapter B2500 and the right side standing portion B2031 are aligned. It is arranged between the left standing portion B2032.

For the sake of clarity, in FIG. 143, the left side portion B2510 is hatched, and the right standing portion B2031 and the left standing portion B2032 are shown in black. FIG. 144 shows a state cut along a plane that is perpendicular to the front lower wall surface B2104a and perpendicular to the extending direction of the right erected portion B2031 and the left erected main body portion B2032a. While showing with oblique lines, the cross section of the duct adapter B2500 is shown in black.

Specifically, the left side surface B2510a (see FIG. 132) of the left side portion B2510 of the duct adapter B2500 substantially abuts the right wall surface of the left standing body portion B2032a of the duct cover B2100. Also, the right side surface B2510b (see FIG. 133) of the left side portion B2510 of the duct adapter B2500 substantially contacts the left side wall surface of the right standing portion B2031 of the duct cover B2100. In addition, the front edge B2510c (see FIG. 132) of the left side portion B2510 of the duct adapter B2500 approximately coincides with a portion of the front lower wall surface B2104a of the duct cover B2100 (between the right side standing portion B2031 and the left side standing portion B2032). touch.

Here, the distance between the left side B2510a and the right side B2510b of the duct adapter B2500 (thickness of the left body portion B2511) is the distance between the left side standing body portion B2032a and the right side standing portion B2031 of the duct cover B2100 (left side standing). the distance between the right wall surface of the main body portion B2032a and the left wall surface of the right standing portion B2031). That is, the thickness of the left body portion B2511 is slightly shorter than the distance between the right wall surface of the left standing body portion B2032a and the left wall surface of the right standing portion B2031, and the difference therebetween is 1/1 of the thickness of the left body portion B2511. 5 or less (or 1/10 or less, 1/20 or less, etc.).

As a result, when the duct adapter B2500 is connected to the duct cover B2100 and a rightward or leftward force is applied, the left main body B2511 is locked by the right upright portion B2031 or the left upright main body B2032a. be. As a result, the connected state between the duct adapter B2500 and the duct cover B2100 is maintained, making it difficult for the duct adapter B2500 to come off the duct cover B2100.

As shown in FIG. 143, the degree of bending of the left standing bending portion B2032b with respect to the left standing main body portion B2032a is substantially the same as the bending degree of the upper left side portion B2512 with respect to the left main body portion B2511 of the duct adapter B2500. ing. As a result, the upper left side portion B2512 and the left standing bent portion B2032b are arranged so as to substantially contact each other.

As shown in FIGS. 145 to 147, the projector cover B1 is formed with an adapter engaging groove B2040. The adapter engagement groove B2040 is formed across the lower wall surface B2203, the rear wall surface B2204, and the upper right inner wall surface B2202a. For the sake of clarity, in FIG. 145, the adapter engagement groove B2040 is hatched.

The adapter engaging groove B2040 is formed as a recess recessed from the surrounding surface, and is composed of a groove bottom B2040a, and an outer wall surface B2040b and an inner wall surface B2040c that connect the groove bottom B2040a and the surrounding surface. . The outer wall surface B2040b and the inner wall surface B2040c are formed substantially parallel to each other. 146 and 147, the outer wall surface B2040b and the inner wall surface B2040c are shaded.

At the edge of the adapter engagement groove B2040, there are a first protrusion B2041 (first outer protrusion B2041a and first inner protrusion B2041b), a second protrusion B2042 (second outer protrusion B2042a and second inner protrusion B2042b), and a third protrusion B2043. (third outer protrusion B2043a and third inner protrusion B2043b), fourth outer protrusion B2044 (fourth outer protrusion B2044a and fourth inner protrusion B2044b), and fifth outer protrusion B2045 (fifth outer protrusion B2045a and fifth inner protrusion B2045a A protrusion B2045b) is formed.

The first outer protrusion B2041a, the second outer protrusion B2042a, the third outer protrusion B2043a, the fourth outer protrusion B2044a, and the fifth outer protrusion B2045a are connected to a part of the outer wall surface B2040b, and the adapter engagement groove B2040 are formed as projections projecting in a direction perpendicular to the peripheral surface of the . On the other hand, the first inner protrusion B2041b, the second inner protrusion B2042b, the third inner protrusion B2043b, the fourth inner protrusion B2044b, and the fifth inner protrusion B2045b are formed so as to be continuous with a part of the inner wall surface B2040c. It is formed as a projection projecting in a direction perpendicular to the surface around the groove B2040.

As shown in FIGS. 148 and 149, when the duct adapter B2500 is connected to the projector cover B1 (the assembly of the game machine 1 is completed), the left side B2510 of the duct adapter B2500 fits into the adapter engagement groove B2040. placed along. In FIG. 149, the left side B2510 is cut along a plane parallel to the left side B2510a and the right side B2510b (a plane passing through the connecting portion B2530), and the right side B2510b is shaded for clarity.

Specifically, the left side surface B2510a (see FIG. 132) of the left side portion B2510 of the duct adapter B2500 substantially contacts the outer wall surface B2040b of the projector cover B1. Also, the right side surface B2510b (see FIG. 133) of the left side portion B2510 of the duct adapter B2500 substantially contacts the inner wall surface B2040c of the projector cover B1. Also, the rear edge B2510d (see FIG. 133) of the left side portion B2510 of the duct adapter B2500 substantially contacts the groove bottom B2040a formed on the rear wall surface B2204 of the projector cover B1.

Further, the downward protrusion B2511a (see FIG. 134) of the left side B2510 of the duct adapter B2500 substantially contacts the groove bottom B2040a formed on the lower wall surface B2203 of the projector cover B1. Also, the right edge B2512a (see FIG. 133) of the left side portion B2510 of the duct adapter B2500 substantially contacts the groove bottom B2040a formed on the upper right inner wall surface B2202a of the projector cover B1.

Note that the adapter engagement groove B2040 has a curved shape from the rear wall surface B2204 to the upper right inner wall surface B2202a. The degree of bending is substantially the same as the degree of bending of the upper left side portion B2512 with respect to the left body portion B2511 of the duct adapter B2500. As a result, the entire left side portion B2510 (rear end edge B2510d) of the duct adapter B2500 can be fitted into the adapter engaging groove B2040.

Here, the distance between the left side B2510a and the right side B2510b of the duct adapter B2500 (the thickness of the left side B2510) is the distance between the outer wall surface B2040b and the inner wall surface B2040c of the projector cover B1 (the width of the adapter engaging groove B2040). They are almost identical. That is, the thickness of the left side B2510 is slightly shorter than the width of the adapter engaging groove B2040, and the difference is 1/5 or less (or 1/10 or less, 1/20 or less, etc.) of the thickness of the left side B2510. It has become.

As a result, when the duct adapter B2500 is connected to the projector cover B1 and a leftward or rightward force is applied, the left side portion B2510 is locked by the outer wall surface B2040b or the inner wall surface B2040c. As a result, the connection state between the duct adapter B2500 and the projector cover B1 is maintained, making it difficult for the duct adapter B2500 to come off the projector cover B1.

In addition, since the first protrusion B2041, the second protrusion B2042, the third protrusion B2043, the fourth outer protrusion B2044, and the fifth outer protrusion B2045 are formed on the edge of the adapter engagement groove B2040, the duct adapter B2500 The left side portion B2510 of the adapter engagement groove B2040 is easily maintained in a fitted state.

Furthermore, although it is not clear from the figure, the portion of the outer wall surface B2040b that is integrated with each of the second outer protrusion B2042a, the third outer protrusion B2043a, and the fourth outer protrusion B2044a is compared with the other portions. As a result, it has a slightly protruding shape (projecting toward the inner wall surface B2040c side). Similarly, the portion of the inner wall surface B2040c that is integrated with each of the second inner protrusion B2042b, the third inner protrusion B2043b, and the fourth inner protrusion B2044b is slightly raised compared to the other portions. (protruding toward the outer wall surface B2040b side). This makes it easier for the duct adapter B2500 to be locked by these protrusions.

A downward projecting portion B2511a (see FIG. 134) is formed at the lower edge of the left side portion B2510 of the duct adapter B2500, so that the lower edge is formed to have a step. Similarly, the right edge B2512a (see FIG. 134) of the left side portion B2510 of the duct adapter B2500 is also formed to have a step (see FIG. 132). These step portions are respectively a connection portion between the lower wall surface B2203 of the projector cover B1 and the lower wall surface B2109a of the duct cover B2100, and the connection portion between the upper right inner wall surface B2202a of the projector cover B1 and the upper right wall surface B2102a of the duct cover B2100. Located at the connecting part. This makes it easier for the left side portion B2510 of the duct adapter B2500 to fit into these connecting portions.

<Punching B450>
FIG. 150 is a cross-sectional view of the duct cover with the punching attached. FIG. 151 is an exploded perspective view of the duct cover and punching as seen from the front. FIG. 152 is an exploded perspective view of the duct cover and punching as seen from the rear. FIG. 153 is an exploded perspective view of the duct cover and punching from below.

As shown in FIG. 150, a punching B450 (see FIGS. 31 and 32) is arranged in the opening B2108 of the duct cover B2100. In FIG. 150, in order to make it easier to understand that the punching B450 is attached, the opening B2108 is shown cut along a horizontal plane (a plane passing through the screw hole B2110), and the upper surface of the punching B450 is hatched.

As shown in FIG. 151, a right protrusion B2121 is formed on a right wall surface B2108d of the opening B2108. The right protrusion B2121 protrudes from the right wall surface B2108d toward the inside (left side) of the opening B2108 and extends in the front-rear direction (the direction substantially parallel to the lower wall surface B2108a). The right protrusion B2121 has a rectangular parallelepiped shape with a rounded vertex. For the sake of clarity, in FIG. 151, the left side surface of the right protrusion B2121 is shaded.

The right protruding portion B2121 is formed slightly above the lower wall surface B2108a, and a certain distance exists between the right protruding portion B2121 and the lower wall surface B2108a. A right protrusion B2122 is formed between the right protrusion B2121 and the lower wall surface B2108a. The right protrusion B2122 protrudes from the right wall surface B2108d toward the inside (left side) of the opening B2108. The length from the right wall surface B2108d to the left end of the right protrusion B2122 (the length of protrusion to the left of the right protrusion B2122 when the right wall surface B2108d is used as a reference) is the length from the right wall surface B2108d to the left end of the right protrusion B2121 ( length of protrusion to the left of the right protrusion B2121 when the right wall surface B2108d is used as a reference).

The upper end of the right protrusion B2122 is continuous with the lower surface of the right protrusion B2121, and the lower end of the right protrusion B2122 is continuous with the lower wall surface B2108a. Also, the front end of the right protrusion B2108f is continuous with the front edge of the right wall surface B2108d (see FIG. 130).

As shown in FIG. 152, a left front protrusion B2123 is formed on the left wall surface B2108b of the opening B2108. The left forward protrusion B2123 protrudes from the left wall surface B2108b toward the inside of the opening B2108 (right side in front view, left side in FIG. 152) and extends in the front-rear direction (direction substantially parallel to the lower wall surface B2108a). ing. The left forward projecting portion B2123 has a rectangular parallelepiped shape with a rounded vertex.

The left forward projecting portion B2123 is formed slightly above the lower wall surface B2108a, and a constant gap exists between the left forward projecting portion B2123 and the lower wall surface B2108a. A left protrusion B2124 is formed between the left forward protrusion B2123 and the lower wall surface B2108a. The left protrusion B2124 protrudes from the left wall surface B2108b toward the inside of the opening B2108 (right side in front view, left side in FIG. 152). The length from the left wall surface B2108b to the right end of the left protrusion B2124 (the length of protrusion to the right of the left protrusion B2124 when the left wall surface B2108b is used as a reference) is the length from the left wall surface B2108b to the right end of the left forward protrusion B2123. (the length of protrusion to the right of the left front protrusion B2123 when the left wall surface B2108b is used as a reference).

The upper end of the left protrusion B2124 is continuous with the lower surface of the left forward protrusion B2123, and the lower end of the left protrusion B2124 is continuous with the lower wall surface B2108a. In addition, the front end of the left forward projecting portion B2123 is continuous with the front edge of the left wall surface B2108b (see FIG. 130).

The length in the front-rear direction of the left front projecting portion B2123 is shorter than the length in the front-rear direction of the right projecting portion B2121. Also, the shape and formation position of the left projection B2124 are bilaterally symmetrical with the shape and formation position of the right projection B2122. It should be noted that the shape of the right projection B2122 and the shape of the left projection B2124 are arcuate in plan view (an arc connecting the ends of the arc), similar to the upper protruding portion B2523f and the lower protruding portion B2523g (see FIG. 141). 153). In FIG. 153, the opening B2108 is cut along a horizontal plane passing through the right protrusion B2122 and the left protrusion B2124, and the right protrusion B2121 and the left front protrusion B2123 are hatched.

Further, as shown in FIG. 152, a left rear projecting portion B2125 is formed on the left wall surface B2108b of the opening B2108. The left rear protrusion B2125 protrudes from the left wall surface B2108b toward the inside of the opening B2108 (right side in front view, left side in FIG. 152) and extends in the front-rear direction (direction substantially parallel to the lower wall surface B2108a). ing. The left rear projecting portion B2125 has a rectangular parallelepiped shape with a rounded vertex. The upper surface of the left rear projecting portion B2125 is integrated with the lower wall surface B2108a.

The length from the left wall surface B2108b to the right end of the left rear protrusion B2125 (the length of protrusion to the right of the left rear protrusion B2125 when the left wall surface B2108b is used as a reference) is the right end of the left front protrusion B2123 from the left wall surface B2108b. (the length of protrusion to the right of the left front protrusion B2123 when the left wall surface B2108b is used as a reference).

The front end of the left rear projection B2125 is positioned slightly rearward from the rear end of the left front projection B2123. For the sake of clarity, in FIG. 152, the right side surface of the left forward projecting portion B2123 and the right side surface of the left rear projecting portion B2125 are hatched.

As shown in FIG. 150, the punching B450 has a shape obtained by notching the front portion of a rectangular flat plate, and is formed with a large number of through holes B451. As a result, the punching B450 can prevent foreign matter from entering the space P (see FIG. 128) while securing an air passage inside the space P (see FIG. 128). . In addition, in FIG. 150, the lower wall surface B2108a is in an exposed state corresponding to the notch shape in the front portion of the punching B450.

The thickness of the punching B450 is slightly thinner than the distance between the lower surface of the right side projecting portion B2121 and the lower wall surface B2108a and the distance between the lower surface of the left forward projecting portion B2123 and the lower wall surface B2108a. As a result, the punching B450 has its right portion positioned between the lower surface of the right side projecting portion B2121 and the lower wall surface B2108a, and its left portion positioned between the lower surface of the left forward projecting portion B2123 and the lower wall surface B2108a. . The bottom surface of the punching B450 contacts the bottom wall surface B2108a, and the top surface of the punching B450 also substantially contacts the bottom surface of the right side projecting portion B2121 and the bottom surface of the left forward projecting portion B2123.

The length of the punching B450 in the left-right direction is slightly shorter than the distance between the right wall surface B2108d and the left wall surface B2108b, and is substantially the same as the distance between the left end of the right projection B2122 and the right end of the left projection B2124. As a result, the right edge of the punching B450 substantially contacts the left end of the right projection B2122, and the left edge of the punching B450 substantially contacts the right end of the left projection B2124.

As described above, the punching B450 can be slid forward while being arranged between the lower wall surface B2108a and the right protrusion B2121 and the left front protrusion B2123. Foreign matter and the like adhering to the punching B450 can be removed (cleaned) while the punching B450 is moved forward.

Here, a slide locking protrusion B452 protruding upward is formed at the left rear corner portion of the punching B450. The length from the upper surface of the punching B450 to the upper end of the slide locking projection B452 (the upward projection length of the slide locking projection B452 when the upper surface of the punching B450 is used as a reference) longer than the length of the direction. As a result, with the punching B450 arranged in the opening B2108, the upper end of the slide locking projection B452 is positioned above the upper surface of the left forward projecting portion B2123.

Therefore, when the punching B450 is slid forward, the front surface of the slide locking projection B452 comes into contact with the rear end of the left front projecting portion B2123. As a result, the slide locking protrusion B452 is locked by the left front protrusion B2123, and the punching B450 is restricted from moving further forward. This can prevent the punching B450 from slipping out of the opening B2108.

In addition, since the punching B450 is disposed in a state where the front ends of the right side portion and the left side portion thereof protrude forward from the front edge of the lower wall surface B2108a (see FIG. 150), by pulling these protruding portions, It is easy to slide. Further, as described above, the right protrusion B2122 and the left protrusion B2124 are arcuate and have rounded tips, so that the punching B450 can slide smoothly.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 153, the punching B450 is formed with a notch B453 on each side. The notch B453 is fitted with the right protrusion B2122 and the left protrusion B2124 while the punching B450 is arranged in the opening B2108. This allows the punching B450 to be stably attached to the opening B2108. Furthermore, the left rear portion of the lower wall surface B2108a has a notched shape (see FIG. 127), but the punching B450 is placed on the left rear protrusion B2125, so that the punching B450 can be stably mounted. can be placed.

Although the punching B450 has been described as being attached to the opening B2108, the punching B450 can be arranged at any position in the gaming machine 1 where foreign matter is likely to enter. For example, a mesh-like portion covering the speaker (a structure for releasing sound generated from the speaker to the outside of the game machine, for example, speaker holes 6151A and 6151B shown in FIG. 49) may be formed by punching B450.

The gaming machine 1 according to the sixth embodiment has been described above as one embodiment of the present invention.

<Appendix A>
2. Description of the Related Art Conventionally, there is known a gaming machine capable of producing effects by using a projector (see Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 6-035066 and Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2009-240459). According to such a game machine, a game image is projected from a projector onto a projection surface such as a screen, so that the image is displayed on the screen instead of the liquid crystal display device.

In a game machine equipped with such a projector, it is important that the projector is arranged at an appropriate position. In other words, if the projector is not placed at an appropriate position, there will be a gap between the image projected by the projector and the projection surface such as the screen. turn into.

SUMMARY OF THE INVENTION It is an object of the present invention to provide a game machine capable of arranging a projector at an appropriate position.

In this respect, the gaming machine 1 according to the sixth embodiment has the following features.

(A-1) a projector (projector device B2);
a housing portion (cabinet G) housing the projector;
a connecting member (projector cover plate B1000) attached to the accommodation portion,
The projector and the accommodation section are connected via the connecting member,
The accommodating portion is provided with a projecting portion (irradiation unit hooking screw 5000) projecting toward the inside of the accommodating portion, while the connecting member has a structure in which the projector is attached to the connecting member. A hole (irradiation unit hooking screw hole B1010) into which the projection can be inserted is formed from the opposite side (rear side) to the arranged side,
The connecting member is fixed to the accommodating portion in a state of being hooked on the projecting portion inserted into the hole,
A gaming machine characterized by:

According to the game machine 1 according to the sixth embodiment, the accommodating portion (cabinet G) that accommodates the projector (projector device B2) has a projecting portion (illumination unit A hooking screw 5000) is provided, and a connecting member (projector cover plate B1000) for connecting the projector (projector apparatus B2) and the housing portion (cabinet G) is provided with the connecting member (projector cover plate B1000). A hole (irradiation unit hooking screw hole B1010) into which the projecting portion (irradiation unit hooking screw 5000) can be inserted from the opposite side (rear side) of the side where the projector (projector device B2) is arranged with respect to the plate B1000). ) is formed. Then, the connecting member (projector cover plate B1000) is hooked on the projecting portion (irradiation unit hooking screw 5000) inserted in the hole (irradiation unit hooking screw hole B1010), and the housing portion (cabinet G ). Therefore, the connecting member (projector cover plate B1000) is hooked on the protruding portion (irradiation unit hooking screw 5000) to align the connecting member (projector cover plate B1000) so that the projector (projector device B2) can be properly operated. can be placed in any position.

(A-2) a projector (projector device B2);
a housing portion (cabinet G) housing the projector;
a connecting member (projector cover plate B1000) attached to the accommodation portion,
the projector and the housing section are connected via the connecting member,
The accommodating portion is provided with a projecting portion (irradiation unit hooking screw 5000) projecting toward the inside of the accommodating portion, while the connecting member penetrates from one side to the other side. A through hole (irradiation unit hooking screw hole B1010) is formed,
The through-hole includes a first region (lower portion B1010b) and a second region (upper portion B1010a) formed continuously with the first region,
When viewed from the front in the direction in which the through hole is formed, the first region is larger than the protrusion, and the second region is smaller than the protrusion.
A gaming machine characterized by:

According to the game machine 1 according to the sixth embodiment, the accommodating portion (cabinet G) that accommodates the projector (projector device B2) has a projecting portion (illumination unit A hooking screw 5000) is provided, while a connecting member (projector cover plate B1000) for connecting the projector (projector device B2) and the housing portion (cabinet G) is provided with one side to the other side. A through-hole (irradiation unit hooking screw hole B1010) penetrating through is formed. The through hole (irradiation unit hooking screw hole B1010) is formed in the first region (lower side portion B1010b) and the second region (upper side portion B1010b) formed continuously with the first region (lower side portion B1010b). When viewed from the front in the direction in which the through hole (irradiation unit hooking screw hole B1010) is formed, the first region (lower side portion B1010b) is a projecting portion (irradiation unit hooking screw 5000), and the second region (upper portion B1010a) is smaller than the projecting portion (irradiation unit hooking screw 5000). Therefore, the projecting portion (irradiation unit hooking screw 5000) can be inserted into the first area (lower side portion B1010b). It can be engaged with a unit hooking screw 5000). By aligning the connection member (projector cover plate B1000) using such an engaged state, the projector (projector device B2) can be arranged at an appropriate position.

(A-3) a projector (projector device B2);
a housing portion (cabinet G) housing the projector;
a connecting member (projector cover plate B1000) attached to the housing,
The projector is arranged in an inclined posture such that a side (front side) of the projector is higher in a predetermined direction,
the projector and the housing unit are connected via the connecting member,
The accommodating portion is provided with a projecting portion (irradiation unit hooking screw 5000) projecting toward the inside of the accommodating portion, while the connecting member is formed with a recess recessed from the surroundings. At the same time, a through hole (irradiation unit hooking screw hole B1010) is formed by penetrating a part of the recess,
The projecting portion includes a bulging portion (washer portion 5004) that bulges around in the projecting direction,
The bulging portion is arranged on the predetermined direction side with respect to a non-penetrating portion (peripheral edge wall portion B1011), which is a portion of the recess in which the through hole is not formed,
A gaming machine characterized by:

According to the game machine 1 according to the sixth embodiment, the accommodating portion (cabinet G) that accommodates the projector (projector device B2) has a projecting portion (illumination unit A hooking screw 5000) is provided, while a connecting member (projector cover plate B1000) for connecting the projector (projector device B2) and the housing portion (cabinet G) has a recess recessed from the surroundings. A through hole (irradiation unit hooking screw hole B1010) is formed by penetrating a part of the concave portion. The protruding portion (irradiation unit hooking screw 5000) provided in the housing portion (cabinet G) has a protruding portion (a washer portion 5004) that protrudes in the protruding direction. Here, the projector (projector device B2) is arranged in an inclined posture such that the predetermined direction side (front side) is higher. 5004) is for a non-penetrating portion (peripheral edge wall portion B1011), which is a portion in which a through hole (irradiation unit hooking screw hole B1010) is not formed in a concave portion formed in a connecting member (projector cover plate B1000). are arranged on the predetermined direction side (front side). Therefore, even when a force is applied to move the non-penetrating portion (peripheral wall portion B1011) in the predetermined direction (front side), the non-penetrating portion (peripheral wall portion B1011) is moved by the bulging portion (washer portion 5004). Movement of the non-penetrating portion (peripheral edge wall portion B1011) can be restricted due to the locking. As a result, it is possible to prevent the connecting member (projector cover plate B1000) from being misaligned with respect to the accommodation section (cabinet G), and the projector (projector device B2) can be arranged at an appropriate position. can.

(A-4) a projector (projector device B2);
Adjustment units for adjusting the traveling direction of the light projected by the projector (connection portions R1, R2, and R3 between the upper pedestal B220 and the lower pedestal B221, attachment portion of the upper pedestal B220 to the projector cover B1, mirror mechanism B3 attachment part to the reflector holding part B11, etc.),
a housing portion (cabinet G) housing the projector;
a connecting member (projector cover plate B1000) attached to the housing,
The projector and the accommodation section are connected via the connecting member,
The connecting member is fixed to the accommodating portion by a first screw (irradiation unit hooking screw 5000) and a second screw (cover mounting screw 5100),
The accommodating portion is provided with an opening (opening G10a of the operation window G10) at a position where the adjusting portion can be operated from the outside, and a closing member (closing lid G100) capable of closing the opening is attached. cage,
The connecting member includes a first screw insertion portion (irradiation unit hooking screw hole B1010) into which a portion of the first screw can be inserted, and a second screw insertion portion into which a portion of the second screw can be inserted. A screw insertion portion (cover fastening screw hole B1002) is formed,
A third screw insertion portion (irradiation unit hooking screw hole 5010) into which a part of the first screw can be inserted is formed in the accommodation portion,
A fourth screw insertion portion (boss portion G100c) into which a part of the second screw can be inserted is formed in the closing member,
When the first screw insertion portion is engaged with the first screw partially inserted into the third screw insertion portion in a state in which the connecting member is not attached to the accommodation portion, the third The second screw insertion portion and the fourth screw insertion portion are arranged to face each other,
A gaming machine characterized by:

According to the gaming machine 1 according to the sixth embodiment, the accommodating portion (cabinet G) that accommodates the projector (projector device B2) has a housing for adjusting the traveling direction of the light projected by the projector (projector device B2). Adjusting parts (connection parts R1, R2, R3 between the upper pedestal B220 and the lower pedestal B221, the attachment part of the upper pedestal B220 to the projector cover B1, the attachment part of the mirror mechanism B3 to the reflector holding part B11, etc.) An opening (opening G10a of the operation window G10) is provided at an operable position, and a closing member (closing lid G100) capable of closing the opening (opening G10a of the operation window G10) is attached. Further, a connecting member (projector cover plate B1000) for connecting the projector (projector apparatus B2) and the accommodation section (cabinet G) includes a first screw (irradiation unit hooking screw 5000) and a second screw ( It is fixed to the housing portion (cabinet G) by means of lid mounting screws 5100). The connecting member (projector cover plate B1000) has a first screw insertion portion (irradiation unit hooking screw hole B1010) into which a part of the first screw (irradiation unit hooking screw 5000) can be inserted, and a second A second screw insertion part (cover fastening screw hole B1002) into which a part of the screw (cover attachment screw 5100) can be inserted is formed. A third screw insertion portion (irradiation unit hooking screw hole 5010) into which a part of the unit hooking screw 5000) can be inserted is formed, and the closing member (closing lid G100) is provided with a second screw (cover A fourth screw insertion portion (boss portion G100c) into which a part of the mounting screw 5100) can be inserted is formed. Here, in a state in which the connecting member (projector cover plate B1000) is not attached to the housing portion (cabinet G), the first When the screw (irradiation unit hooking screw 5000) is engaged with the first screw insertion portion (irradiation unit hooking screw hole B1010), the second screw insertion portion (lid fastening screw hole B1002) and the fourth screw insertion portion (boss portion G100c) are arranged so as to face each other. In other words, the connecting member (projector cover By arranging the plate B1000) and the closing member (closure lid G100), it is possible to align the connection member (projector cover plate B1000), thereby allowing the projector (projector device B2) to be properly controlled. can be placed in position. In addition, a screw (second screw (cover attachment screw 5100)) for fixing the connecting member (projector cover plate B1000) to the accommodation portion (cabinet G) and a closing member (closing lid G100) are accommodated. By also using the screws for fixing to the part (cabinet G), it is possible to reduce the number of screws used around the housing part (cabinet G), and the configuration can be simplified. .

In the sixth embodiment, the accommodating portion (the rear wall G3 of the cabinet G) and the projecting portion (the irradiation unit hooking screw 5000) are configured by separate members. In the present invention, the housing portion (the rear wall G3 of the cabinet G) and the projecting portion (the irradiation unit hooking screw 5000) may be integrally formed as one member. That is, the housing portion (cabinet G) itself may be configured to have a protruding structure that protrudes toward the inside of the housing portion (cabinet G).

<Appendix B>
2. Description of the Related Art Conventionally, there is known a game machine capable of producing effects by using a projector (see Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 6-035066 and Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2009-240459). According to such a gaming machine, a game image is projected from a projector onto a projection surface such as a screen, so that the image is displayed on the screen instead of the liquid crystal display device.

However, conventionally, in a gaming machine equipped with such a projector, once the projector is fixed inside the gaming machine, it has been difficult to make fine adjustments to the projector thereafter.

SUMMARY OF THE INVENTION It is an object of the present invention to provide a gaming machine in which the projector can be adjusted while the projector is installed inside.

In this regard, the gaming machine 1 according to the sixth embodiment has the following features.

(B-1) a projector (projector device B2);
Adjustment units for adjusting the traveling direction of the light projected by the projector (connection portions R1, R2, and R3 between the upper pedestal B220 and the lower pedestal B221, attachment portion of the upper pedestal B220 to the projector cover B1, mirror mechanism B3 attachment part to the reflector holding part B11, etc.),
an accommodation unit (cabinet G) that accommodates the projector,
The accommodation portion is provided with an opening (opening G10a of the operation window G10) at a position where the adjusting portion can be operated from the outside, and a closing member (closing lid G100) capable of closing the opening is attached. cage,
The closing member includes locking pieces (upper locking piece G108a and lower locking piece G108b, and upper locking piece G118a and A lower locking piece G118b) is formed,
The closing member is locked by the locking piece and fixed to the accommodating portion by a screw.
A gaming machine characterized by:

According to the gaming machine 1 according to the sixth embodiment, the accommodating portion (cabinet G) that accommodates the projector (projector device B2) has a housing for adjusting the traveling direction of the light projected by the projector (projector device B2). Adjusting parts (connection parts R1, R2, R3 between the upper pedestal B220 and the lower pedestal B221, the attachment part of the upper pedestal B220 to the projector cover B1, the attachment part of the mirror mechanism B3 to the reflector holding part B11, etc.) An opening (opening G10a of the operation window G10) is provided at an operable position, and a closing member (closing lid G100) capable of closing the opening (opening G10a of the operation window G10) is attached. Therefore, the opening (the opening G10a of the operation window G10) blocked by the closing member (the closing lid G100) can be made to appear by removing the closing member (the closing lid G100) from the storage section (cabinet G). through the opening (the opening G10a of the operation window G10) from the outside of the housing portion (cabinet G), the adjusting portion (connecting portions R1, R2, R3 between the upper pedestal B220 and the lower pedestal B221 , the attachment portion of the upper base B220 to the projector cover B1, the attachment portion of the mirror mechanism B3 to the reflector holding portion B11, etc.). As a result, even after the projector (projector device B2) is fixed inside the housing portion (cabinet G), the projector (projector device B2) can be accommodated while being attached inside the housing portion (cabinet G). From the outside of the unit (cabinet G) to the adjustment unit (connection portions R1, R2, R3 between the upper pedestal B220 and the lower pedestal B221, the attachment portion of the upper pedestal B220 to the projector cover B1, the reflector holding portion B11 of the mirror mechanism B3 , etc.), the traveling direction of the light projected by the projector (projector device B2) can be adjusted. The closing member (closing lid G100) has a locking piece (upper locking piece) that can be locked to a part of the peripheral edge of the opening (opening G10a of the operation window G10) provided in the housing (cabinet G). A piece G108a and a lower locking piece G108b, and an upper locking piece G118a and a lower locking piece G118b) are formed. and lower locking piece G108b, and upper locking piece G118a and lower locking piece G118b), and are fixed to the housing (cabinet G) by screws. Therefore, by locking the closing member (closure lid G100) to the accommodation portion (cabinet G), it is possible to perform screw fastening in a state of being temporarily fixed, and the closure member (closure lid G100) can be accommodated. It can be easily attached to the unit (cabinet G).

(B-2) a projector (projector device B2);
Adjustment units for adjusting the traveling direction of the light projected by the projector (connection portions R1, R2, and R3 between the upper pedestal B220 and the lower pedestal B221, attachment portion of the upper pedestal B220 to the projector cover B1, mirror mechanism B3 attachment part to the reflector holding part B11, etc.),
a housing portion (cabinet G) housing the projector;
a connecting member (projector cover plate B1000) attached to the housing,
The projector and the accommodation section are connected via the connecting member,
The accommodation portion is provided with an opening (opening G10a of the operation window G10) at a position where the adjusting portion can be operated from the outside, and a closing member (closing lid G100) capable of closing the opening is attached. cage,
The closing member is provided with openings (first opening G102 and second opening G112), and protrusions (first engagement protrusion G101 and second engagement protrusion G101) that protrude toward the inside of the accommodation section. G111) are provided in the projecting portion, and the engaging portions (the upper locking piece G108a and the lower locking piece G108b, and the upper locking piece G118a and the lower locking piece G118a and the lower locking piece G118b) is formed,
The connecting member is formed with a housing recess (a first cavity B1050 and a second cavity B1060) for housing the protrusion, and the protrusion is arranged so as to be surrounded by the connecting member. ,
A gaming machine characterized by:

According to the gaming machine 1 according to the sixth embodiment, the accommodating portion (cabinet G) that accommodates the projector (projector device B2) has a housing for adjusting the traveling direction of the light projected by the projector (projector device B2). Adjusting parts (connection parts R1, R2, R3 between the upper pedestal B220 and the lower pedestal B221, the attachment part of the upper pedestal B220 to the projector cover B1, the attachment part of the mirror mechanism B3 to the reflector holding part B11, etc.) An opening (opening G10a of the operation window G10) is provided at an operable position, and a closing member (closing lid G100) capable of closing the opening (opening G10a of the operation window G10) is attached. Therefore, the opening (the opening G10a of the operation window G10) blocked by the closing member (the closing lid G100) can be made to appear by removing the closing member (the closing lid G100) from the storage section (cabinet G). through the opening (the opening G10a of the operation window G10) from the outside of the housing portion (cabinet G), the adjusting portion (connecting portions R1, R2, R3 between the upper pedestal B220 and the lower pedestal B221 , the attachment portion of the upper base B220 to the projector cover B1, the attachment portion of the mirror mechanism B3 to the reflector holding portion B11, etc.). As a result, even after the projector (projector device B2) is fixed inside the housing portion (cabinet G), the projector (projector device B2) can be accommodated while being attached inside the housing portion (cabinet G). From the outside of the unit (cabinet G) to the adjustment unit (connection portions R1, R2, R3 between the upper pedestal B220 and the lower pedestal B221, the attachment portion of the upper pedestal B220 to the projector cover B1, the reflector holding portion B11 of the mirror mechanism B3 , etc.), the traveling direction of the light projected by the projector (projector device B2) can be adjusted. Further, the closing member (closing lid G100) is provided with protrusions (first engaging protrusion G101 and second engaging protrusion G111) that protrude toward the inside of the housing portion (cabinet G). Engaging portions (upper locking piece G108a and lower locking piece G108b, and , an upper locking piece G118a and a lower locking piece G118b) are formed. Therefore, by engaging the closing member (closing lid G100) with the accommodating portion (cabinet G), the closing member (closing lid G100) can be attached to the accommodating portion (cabinet G). Here, the closing member (closing lid G100) is provided with openings (first opening G102 and second opening G112). There is concern about the possibility of unauthorized access to various devices existing in the Internet (illegal acquisition of game media through so-called cheating). However, according to the gaming machine 1 according to the sixth embodiment, the connecting member (projector cover plate B1000) for connecting the projector (projector device B2) and the housing portion (cabinet G) has a projecting portion (second A storage recess (first cavity B1050 and second cavity B1060) for storing the first engagement protrusion G101 and second engagement protrusion G111) is formed, and the protrusions (first engagement protrusion G101 and second engagement protrusion G101 and second cavity B1060) are formed. The engaging protrusion G111) is arranged so as to be surrounded by the connecting member (projector cover plate B1000). As a result, even if a wire-shaped device is to enter the gaming machine from the opening (the first opening G102 and the second opening G112), the protrusion (the first engaging protrusion G101 and the The connecting member (projector cover plate B1000) that surrounds the second engaging protrusion G111) can prevent such intrusion and prevent unauthorized access to the interior of the gaming machine.

(B-3) a projector (projector device B2);
Adjustment parts for adjusting the traveling direction of the light projected by the projector (connection parts R1, R2, R3 between the upper pedestal B220 and the lower pedestal B221, attachment part of the upper pedestal B220 to the projector cover B1, mirror mechanism B3 attachment part to the reflector holding part B11, etc.),
a housing portion (cabinet G) housing the projector;
a connecting member (projector cover plate B1000) attached to the housing,
The projector and the accommodation section are connected via the connecting member,
The accommodating portion is provided with an opening (opening G10a of the operation window G10) at a position where the adjusting portion can be operated from the outside, and a closing member (closing lid G100) capable of closing the opening is attached. cage,
Engaging portions (upper locking piece G108a and lower locking piece G108b, and upper locking piece G118a and lower locking piece G118b) to be engaged with the accommodating portion are formed in the closing member. cage,
The closing member is fixed to the accommodating portion by one screw (cover attachment screw 5100), and the connecting member is also fixed to the accommodating portion by the one screw.
A gaming machine characterized by:

According to the gaming machine 1 according to the sixth embodiment, the accommodating portion (cabinet G) that accommodates the projector (projector device B2) has a housing for adjusting the traveling direction of the light projected by the projector (projector device B2). Adjusting parts (connection parts R1, R2, R3 between the upper pedestal B220 and the lower pedestal B221, the attachment part of the upper pedestal B220 to the projector cover B1, the attachment part of the mirror mechanism B3 to the reflector holding part B11, etc.) An opening (opening G10a of the operation window G10) is provided at an operable position, and a closing member (closing lid G100) capable of closing the opening (opening G10a of the operation window G10) is attached. Therefore, the opening (the opening G10a of the operation window G10) blocked by the closing member (the closing lid G100) can be made to appear by removing the closing member (the closing lid G100) from the storage section (cabinet G). through the opening (the opening G10a of the operation window G10) from the outside of the housing portion (cabinet G), the adjusting portion (connecting portions R1, R2, R3 between the upper pedestal B220 and the lower pedestal B221 , the attachment portion of the upper base B220 to the projector cover B1, the attachment portion of the mirror mechanism B3 to the reflector holding portion B11, etc.). As a result, even after the projector (projector device B2) is fixed inside the housing portion (cabinet G), the projector (projector device B2) can be accommodated while being attached inside the housing portion (cabinet G). From the outside of the unit (cabinet G) to the adjustment unit (connection portions R1, R2, R3 between the upper pedestal B220 and the lower pedestal B221, the attachment portion of the upper pedestal B220 to the projector cover B1, the reflector holding portion B11 of the mirror mechanism B3 , etc.), the traveling direction of the light projected by the projector (projector device B2) can be adjusted. The closing member (closing lid G100) is fixed to the housing portion (cabinet G) by one screw (cover mounting screw 5100). Engaging portions (upper locking piece G108a and lower locking piece G108b, and upper locking piece G118a and lower locking piece G118b) to be engaged with (cabinet G) are formed. Therefore, by engaging the closing member (closure lid G100) with the housing portion (cabinet G), it is possible to perform screw fastening in a provisionally fixed state. It can be easily attached to the unit (cabinet G). Furthermore, the connecting member (projector cover plate B1000) for connecting the projector (projector device B2) and the accommodation section (cabinet G) also includes the one screw (cover mounting screw 5100) (closing member (closing cover G100) is fixed to the housing (cabinet G) by the same screw as the screw for fixing G100) to the housing (cabinet G). This makes it possible to reduce the number of screws used to fix the connecting member (projector cover plate B1000) and the closing member (closure lid G100) to the housing portion (cabinet G). A simple configuration can be achieved.

(B-4) a projector (projector device B2);
Adjustment units for adjusting the traveling direction of the light projected by the projector (connection portions R1, R2, and R3 between the upper pedestal B220 and the lower pedestal B221, attachment portion of the upper pedestal B220 to the projector cover B1, mirror mechanism B3 attachment part to the reflector holding part B11, etc.),
an accommodation unit (cabinet G) that accommodates the projector,
The accommodation portion is provided with an opening (opening G10a of the operation window G10) penetrating the inside and outside of the accommodation portion at a position where the adjustment portion can be operated from the outside, and a concave portion (peripheral edge) is provided around the opening. A portion G10b) is formed, and a closing member (closing lid G100) capable of closing the opening is fitted into the recess,
The closing member is formed with protrusions (an upper protrusion G121 and a lower protrusion G122) that protrude toward the inside of the accommodation section along a part of the peripheral edge of the opening provided in the accommodation section. has been
A gaming machine characterized by:

According to the gaming machine 1 according to the sixth embodiment, the accommodating portion (cabinet G) that accommodates the projector (projector device B2) has a housing for adjusting the traveling direction of the light projected by the projector (projector device B2). Adjusting parts (connection parts R1, R2, R3 between the upper pedestal B220 and the lower pedestal B221, the attachment part of the upper pedestal B220 to the projector cover B1, the attachment part of the mirror mechanism B3 to the reflector holding part B11, etc.) An opening (opening G10a of the operation window G10) is provided at an operable position, and a closing member (closing lid G100) capable of closing the opening (opening G10a of the operation window G10) is attached. Therefore, the opening (the opening G10a of the operation window G10) blocked by the closing member (the closing lid G100) can be made to appear by removing the closing member (the closing lid G100) from the storage section (cabinet G). through the opening (the opening G10a of the operation window G10) from the outside of the housing portion (cabinet G), the adjusting portion (connecting portions R1, R2, R3 between the upper pedestal B220 and the lower pedestal B221 , the attachment portion of the upper base B220 to the projector cover B1, the attachment portion of the mirror mechanism B3 to the reflector holding portion B11, etc.). As a result, even after the projector (projector device B2) is fixed inside the housing portion (cabinet G), the projector (projector device B2) can be accommodated while being attached inside the housing portion (cabinet G). From the outside of the unit (cabinet G) to the adjustment unit (connection portions R1, R2, R3 between the upper pedestal B220 and the lower pedestal B221, the attachment portion of the upper pedestal B220 to the projector cover B1, the reflector holding portion B11 of the mirror mechanism B3 , etc.), the traveling direction of the light projected by the projector (projector device B2) can be adjusted. In addition, a recess (peripheral edge G10b) is formed around the opening (opening G10a of the operation window G10) provided in the housing (cabinet G), and the closing member (closing lid G100) (peripheral portion G10b). Here, unauthorized access to various devices existing inside the gaming machine is possible through a slight gap formed between the concave portion (peripheral edge portion G10b) of the housing portion (cabinet G) and the closing member (closing lid G100). There is a concern that the game media may be acquired illegally through so-called cheating. However, according to the gaming machine 1 according to the sixth embodiment, the closing member (closure lid G100) has a portion of the peripheral edge of the opening (opening G10a of the operation window G10) provided in the housing portion (cabinet G). Protrusions (an upper protrusion G121 and a lower protrusion G122) protruding toward the inside of the accommodating portion (cabinet G) are formed along the portion. As a result, even if a wire-shaped device were to enter the game machine through the gap, the projecting portions (the upper projecting portion G121 and the lower projecting portion G121) formed on the closing member (the closing lid G100) The side protrusion G122) can block the intrusion and prevent unauthorized access to the inside of the gaming machine.

<Appendix C>
2. Description of the Related Art Conventionally, there is known a game machine capable of producing effects by using a projector (see Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 6-035066 and Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2009-240459). According to such a gaming machine, a game image is projected from a projector onto a projection surface such as a screen, so that the image is displayed on the screen instead of the liquid crystal display device.

However, since projectors tend to generate heat and reach high temperatures more easily than liquid crystal display devices and the like, there is a problem that the projectors do not function properly unless the generated heat is dissipated.

SUMMARY OF THE INVENTION It is an object of the present invention to provide a gaming machine capable of dissipating heat generated by a projector.

In this regard, the gaming machine 1 according to the sixth embodiment has the following features.

(C-1) a projector (projector device B2);
a first space forming portion (cover portion B2000) having a first air passage space (space P) through which air can pass;
a second space forming portion (duct adapter B2500) having a second air passage space (cavity B2531) through which air can pass;
A first opening (opening B2108e) and a second opening (opening B2010) are formed in the first space forming portion, and the first opening (opening B2108e) and the second opening (opening B2010) are formed so as to communicate with the first opening and the second opening. 1 air passage space is formed,
A third opening (left side opening B2513) and a fourth opening (right side opening B2522) are formed in the second space forming portion, and are communicated with the third opening and the fourth opening. The second air passage space is formed,
The first space forming section and the projector are connected by the second space forming section,
The first air passage space and the second air passage space are in communication via the second opening and the third opening,
The second space forming part has elasticity,
A gaming machine characterized by:

According to the gaming machine 1 according to the sixth embodiment, the first opening (opening B2108e) and the second opening (opening B2010) are formed in the first space forming portion (cover portion B2000). A first air passage space (space P) is formed so as to communicate with the first opening (opening B2108e) and the second opening (opening B2010). A third opening (left opening B2513) and a fourth opening (right opening B2522) are formed in the second space forming portion (duct adapter B2500), and the third opening (left opening B2513) and the fourth opening (B2513) are formed. A second air passage space (cavity B2531) is formed so as to communicate with the opening of (right side opening B2522). The first air passage space (space P) and the second air passage space (cavity B2531) communicate through a second opening (opening B2010) and a third opening (left opening B2513). The projector apparatus B2) is connected by a second space forming section (duct adapter B2500). As a result, the air that has passed through the first air passage space (space P) and the second air passage space (cavity B2531) can flow into the projector (projector device B2). Heat generated in the projector device B2) can be released. In addition, even after the projector (projector device B2) is once connected to the second space forming section (duct adapter B2500), the projector (projector device B2) may be required to adjust the traveling direction of the light projected by the projector (projector device B2). Situations such as fine adjustment of the position of device B2) are also envisioned. In this regard, since the second space forming section (duct adapter B2500) has elasticity and is deformable, it can flexibly cope with such position adjustment of the projector (projector device B2).

For example, the projector (projector device B2) can project by operating the adjustment units (connecting portions R1, R2, and R3 between the upper pedestal B220 and the lower pedestal B221, the attachment portion of the upper pedestal B220 to the projector cover B1, etc.). When adjusting the traveling direction of the emitted light, it is necessary to move the projector (projector device B2) within a range of about 5 mm. In this regard, if a synthetic rubber such as urethane rubber is used as the material of the second space forming section (duct adapter B2500), the second space forming section (duct adapter B2500) can be used to move the projector (projector device B2). It can be flexibly deformed within a range, and the traveling direction of light can be smoothly adjusted without creating a gap due to the movement.

(C-2) a projector (projector device B2);
a space forming portion (cover portion B2000) having an air passage space (space P) through which air can pass;
and an elastic member (duct adapter B2500) having elasticity,
The elastic member is arranged between the space forming unit and the projector,
A first opening (left opening B2513) and a second opening (right opening B2522) are formed in the elastic member, and a space (cavity) is formed so as to communicate with the first opening and the second opening. B2531) is formed,
The air passage space communicates with the space formed in the elastic member,
The area of the opening (cross-sectional opening B2536) corresponding to the cross section when the elastic member is cut between the first opening and the second opening is the area of the first opening and the area of the second opening. less than the area of
A gaming machine characterized by:

According to the gaming machine 1 according to the sixth embodiment, the elastic member (duct adapter B2500) is arranged between the space forming portion (cover portion B2000) and the projector (projector device B2). A first opening (left opening B2513) and a second opening (right opening B2522) are formed in the adapter B2500), and the first opening (left opening B2513) and the second opening (right opening B2522) are formed. A space (cavity B2531) is formed so as to communicate with. The space (cavity B2531) communicates with the air passage space (space P) formed in the space forming portion (cover portion B2000). As a result, the air passing through the space (space P) formed in the space forming portion (cover portion B2000) and the space (cavity B2531) formed in the elastic member (duct adapter B2500) flows into the projector (projector device B2). Heat generated by the projector (projector device B2) can be released through the flow of air. In addition, the elastic member (duct adapter B2500) has elasticity and can be deformed according to the relative positional relationship between the space forming section (cover section B2000) and the projector (projector device B2). Therefore, the work of arranging the elastic member (duct adapter B2500) between the space forming section (cover section B2000) and the projector (projector device B2) can be performed smoothly. Furthermore, when the elastic member (duct adapter B2500) is cut between the first opening (left opening B2513) and the second opening (right opening B2522) (the central portion of the elastic member (duct adapter B2500)) is smaller than the area of the first opening (left opening B2513) and the area of the second opening (right opening B2522). That is, the elastic member (duct adapter B2500) has a shape in which the portion near the center is depressed. As a result, the elastic member (duct adapter B2500) can be deformed along the depression when an external force is applied. can be done.

Furthermore, according to the gaming machine 1 according to the sixth embodiment, the thickness of the connection portion B2530 (the connection upper side portion B2532, the connection lower side portion B2533, the connection front side portion B2534, and the connection rear side portion B2535) is 0.5 to It is about 1.2 mm (eg, 0.7 to 1.0 mm), which is considerably thinner than the thickness (eg, 4 mm) of the left side portion B2510 and the right side portion B2520. As a result, flexibility (stretchability) can be fully exhibited, and the efficiency of arranging the elastic member (duct adapter B2500) can be further improved.

In the sixth embodiment, an opening (cross-sectional opening B2536 ) is smaller than the area of the first opening (left opening B2513) and the area of the second opening (right opening B2522). In the present invention, the area of the opening corresponding to the cross section (sectional opening B2536) is not particularly limited, and the area of the first opening (left opening B2513) and the area of the second opening (right opening B2522) It may be substantially the same as at least one area, or larger than at least one of the area of the first opening (left opening B2513) and the area of the second opening (right opening B2522). good too. For example, the connection upper side portion B2532, the connection lower side portion B2533, the connection front side portion B2534, and the connection rear side portion B2535 are each configured so that the surface near the right side portion B2520 is substantially perpendicular to the right side main surface B2524. You may In this case, the area of the opening (cross-sectional opening B2536) corresponding to the cross section is approximately equal to the area of the second opening (right opening B2522).

(C-3) a projector (projector device B2);
a case (case B22) that houses the projector;
a space forming portion (cover portion B2000) having an air passage space (space P) through which air can pass;
and an elastic member (duct adapter B2500) having elasticity,
The elastic member is arranged between the space forming portion and the case,
A first opening (left opening B2513) and a second opening (right opening B2522) are formed in the elastic member, and a space (cavity) is formed so as to communicate with the first opening and the second opening. B2531) is formed, and the first opening is arranged on the space forming part side, while the second opening is arranged on the case side,
The air passage space communicates with the space formed in the elastic member,
The case is formed with a vent (intake port B22A) for taking in air,
Locking portions (first right protrusion B2523a, second right protrusion B2523b, and third right protrusion B2523c) that can be inserted into the vent are formed on the second opening side of the elastic member. and the elastic member can be locked by the locking portion inserted into the vent.
A gaming machine characterized by:

According to the gaming machine 1 according to the sixth embodiment, the elastic member (duct adapter B2500) is arranged between the space forming portion (cover portion B2000) and the case for accommodating the projector (case B22). A first opening (left opening B2513) and a second opening (right opening B2522) are formed in the member (duct adapter B2500), and the first opening (left opening B2513) and the second opening (right opening B2513) are formed in the member (duct adapter B2500). A space (cavity B2531) is formed so as to communicate with the opening B2522). The space (cavity B2531) communicates with the air passage space (space P) formed in the space forming portion (cover portion B2000). As a result, the air passing through the space (space P) formed in the space forming portion (cover portion B2000) and the space (cavity B2531) formed in the elastic member (duct adapter B2500) flows into the projector (projector device B2). Heat generated by the projector (projector device B2) can be released through the flow of air. In addition, the elastic member (duct adapter B2500) has elasticity and can be deformed according to the relative positional relationship between the space forming portion (cover portion B2000) and the case (case B22). , the work of arranging the elastic member (duct adapter B2500) between the space forming portion (cover portion B2000) and the case (case B22) can be performed smoothly. Furthermore, the case (case B22) is formed with a vent (intake port B22A) for taking in air, and the second opening (right side opening B2522) in the elastic member (duct adapter B2500) (case (case B22) B22) side) is formed with locking portions (first right protrusion B2523a, second right protrusion B2523b, and third right protrusion B2523c) that can be inserted into the vent (intake port B22A). , the elastic member (duct adapter B2500) is engaged by the locking portions (first right protrusion B2523a, second right protrusion B2523b, and third right protrusion B2523c) inserted into the ventilation port (intake port B22A). can be stopped. As a result, the elastic member (duct adapter B2500) is connected to the case (case B22) via the engaging portions (first right protrusion B2523a, second right protrusion B2523b, and third right protrusion B2523c). is possible, it is possible to more efficiently perform the work of arranging the elastic member (duct adapter B2500) as described above.

In the sixth embodiment, the size and shape of the locking portion (right protrusion B2523) are substantially the same as the size and shape of the vent (slit B2022). In the present invention, the size and shape of the locking portion (right protrusion B2523) is such that it can be press-fitted into the vent (slit B2022), and after press-fitting, it does not come off easily (locked). ) can be appropriately adopted. For example, the length in the short side direction (the distance between the upper projection B2523d and the lower projection B2523e) of the locking portion (right projection B2523) is set to be substantially the same length as the short side of the vent (slit B2022), and the locking portion The length in the long side direction (extending direction) of (the right protrusion B2523) may be configured to be shorter than the long side of the vent (slit B2022). In addition, while the length of the long side direction (extending direction) of the locking portion (right side protrusion B2523) is substantially the same as the long side of the vent (slit B2022), the end portion in the extending direction is raised upward It may be raised like a portion B2523f and a lower raised portion B2523g. The position where such a raised portion (protrusion for locking) is formed is not particularly limited, and the locking piece may be provided at an arbitrary position on the locking portion (right side projection B2523).

(C-4) a projector (projector device B2);
a space forming portion (cover portion B2000) having an air passage space (space P) through which air can pass;
and an elastic member (duct adapter B2500) having elasticity,
The elastic member is arranged between the space forming unit and the projector,
A first opening (left opening B2513) and a second opening (right opening B2522) are formed in the elastic member, and a space (cavity) is formed so as to communicate with the first opening and the second opening. B2531) is formed, and the first opening is arranged on the space forming part side, while the second opening is arranged on the projector side,
The air passage space communicates with the space formed in the elastic member,
An engaging portion (left side portion B2510) that can be engaged with the space forming portion is formed on the first opening side of the elastic member, while two projecting portions (right side portion B2510) are formed in the space forming portion. Upright part B2031 and left upright part B2032, first outer protrusion B2041a and first inner protrusion B2041b, second outer protrusion B2042a and second inner protrusion B2042b, third outer protrusion B2043a and third inner protrusion B2043b, fourth outer side a protrusion B2044a and a fourth inner protrusion B2044b, a fifth outer protrusion B2045a and a fifth inner protrusion B2045b) are formed, and the locking portion is disposed between the two protrusions;
A gaming machine characterized by:

According to the gaming machine 1 according to the sixth embodiment, the elastic member (duct adapter B2500) is arranged between the space forming portion (cover portion B2000) and the projector (projector device B2). A first opening (left opening B2513) and a second opening (right opening B2522) are formed in the adapter B2500), and the first opening (left opening B2513) and the second opening (right opening B2522) are formed. A space (cavity B2531) is formed so as to communicate with. The space (cavity B2531) communicates with the air passage space (space P) formed in the space forming portion (cover portion B2000). As a result, the air passing through the space (space P) formed in the space forming portion (cover portion B2000) and the space (cavity B2531) formed in the elastic member (duct adapter B2500) flows into the projector (projector device B2). Heat generated by the projector (projector device B2) can be released through the flow of air. In addition, the elastic member (duct adapter B2500) has elasticity and can be deformed according to the relative positional relationship between the space forming section (cover section B2000) and the projector (projector device B2). Therefore, the work of arranging the elastic member (duct adapter B2500) between the space forming section (cover section B2000) and the projector (projector device B2) can be performed smoothly. Furthermore, a locking portion that can be locked to the space forming portion (cover portion B2000) is provided on the first opening (left side opening B2513) side (space forming portion (cover portion B2000) side) of the elastic member (duct adapter B2500). (left side portion B2510) is formed, while the space forming portion (cover portion B2000) has two protrusions (right side standing portion B2031 and left side standing portion B2032, first outer protrusion B2041a and first inner protrusion B2041b, second outer protrusion B2042a and second inner protrusion B2042b, third outer protrusion B2043a and third inner protrusion B2043b, fourth outer protrusion B2044a and fourth inner protrusion B2044b, fifth outer protrusion B2045a and fifth inner protrusion B2045b) is formed, and the locking portion (left side portion B2510) is connected to the two protrusions (right side standing portion B2031 and left side standing portion B2032, first outer protrusion B2041a and first inner protrusion B2041b, second outer protrusion B2042a and second inner protrusion B2042b, third outer protrusion B2043a and third inner protrusion B2043b, fourth outer protrusion B2044a and fourth inner protrusion B2044b, fifth outer protrusion B2045a and fifth inner protrusion B2045b). As a result, the engaging portion (left side portion B2510) is replaced by the two protrusions (right side standing portion B2031 and left side standing portion B2032, first outer protrusion B2041a and first inner protrusion B2041b, second outer protrusion B2042a and second outer protrusion B2042a). Positioning is performed by arranging between the inner protrusion B2042b, the third outer protrusion B2043a and the third inner protrusion B2043b, the fourth outer protrusion B2044a and the fourth inner protrusion B2044b, the fifth outer protrusion B2045a and the fifth inner protrusion B2045b). Therefore, the work of arranging the elastic member (duct adapter B2500) as described above can be performed more efficiently.

Furthermore, according to the gaming machine 1 according to the sixth embodiment, the thickness of the locking portion (left side portion B2510) is about 3 to 5 mm (for example, 4 mm), and the connecting portion B2530 (connecting upper side portion B2532, connecting lower side It is considerably thicker than the thickness (for example, 0.7 to 1.0 mm) of the portion B2533, the connection front side portion B2534, and the connection rear side portion B2535). As a result, two protrusions (right side standing portion B2031 and left side standing portion B2032, first outer protrusion B2041a and first inner protrusion B2041b, second outer protrusion B2042a and second inner protrusion B2042b, third outer protrusion B2043a and (3rd inner projection B2043b, fourth outer projection B2044a and fourth inner projection B2044b, fifth outer projection B2045a and fifth inner projection B2045b) to stably lock the locking portion (left side portion B2510) is possible, and the efficiency of the work for arranging the elastic member (duct adapter B2500) can be further improved.

In the sixth embodiment, an image is displayed on the screen by the light projected from the projector (projector device B2) entering the screen. In the present invention, part or all of the light projected from the projector (projector device B2) may illuminate an object other than the screen, and the illuminated object may be a part of the gaming machine. However, it may be an object existing outside the gaming machine. For example, part of the light projected from the projector (projector device B2) (for example, light passing around the screen) may reach the player and illuminate the clothes worn by the player. good. If part or all of the light projected from the projector (projector device B2) illuminates an object other than the screen, the screen may not be provided.

In addition, in the sixth embodiment, the projection (irradiation unit hooking screw 5000) is provided in the housing (cabinet G), while the connection member (projector cover plate B1000: irradiation unit B) is provided with a hole (irradiation unit A hooking screw hole B1010) is formed, and by inserting the projecting portion (irradiation unit hooking screw 5000) of the housing portion (cabinet G) into the hole of the irradiation unit B (irradiation unit hooking screw hole B1010), It has been described that the irradiation unit B is hooked on the projecting portion (irradiation unit hooking screw 5000). In the present invention, on the contrary, the connecting member (projector cover plate B1000: irradiation unit) is provided with the projecting portion, while the housing portion (cabinet G) is provided with a hole (for example, similar to the screw hole B1010 for hooking the irradiation unit). A hole having a shape of ) is formed, and by inserting the projecting portion of the irradiation unit into the hole (recess) of the housing portion (cabinet G), the irradiation unit may be hooked to the hole.

Further, in the sixth embodiment, the connection member (projector cover plate B1000: irradiation unit B) is attached to the housing portion (cabinet G) by screwing. In the present invention, the method of attaching the irradiation unit and the housing section (cabinet G) is not particularly limited, and the irradiation unit may be fixed to the housing section (cabinet G) by engagement instead of screw fastening. Also, the irradiation unit may be directly fixed to the housing portion (cabinet G), or may be indirectly fixed by interposing another member. For example, another member (intervening member) is arranged between the irradiation unit and the housing (cabinet G), and the intervening member is screwed to the housing (cabinet G), while the irradiation unit is locked to the intervening member. It is also possible to

Further, in the sixth embodiment, the air taken into the cabinet G from the outside of the game machine 1 is taken into the inside of the cover part B2000 through the opening B2108e of the duct cover B2100, and the inside of the cover part B2000 (space P), it enters the case B22 through the intake port B22A, proceeds inside the case B22 while absorbing heat generated in the case B22, and exits the case B22 through the exhaust port B22E. . The projector device B2 can be cooled through such air flow. In the present invention, the air for cooling the projector (projector device B2) can be taken into the space forming section (cover section B2000) from any space within the housing section (cabinet G). At that time, the air that existed outside the game machine until just before may be taken into the space forming part (cover part B2000), or the air that had been staying inside the game machine for a certain period of time may be taken into the space forming part (cover (B2000). Further, as in the second embodiment (contrary to the sixth embodiment), the intake port B22A may be provided on the right side of the case B22, while the exhaust port B22E may be provided on the left side of the case B22. That is, in the sixth embodiment, the air after passing through the space forming portion (cover portion B2000) flows into the case B22. It may be configured to flow into the section B2000). Further, in cooling the projector (projector device B2), the space forming portion (cover portion B2000) is not an essential component, and air can be introduced into the case B22 without providing the space forming portion (cover portion B2000). may be

[Seventh embodiment]
The first to sixth embodiments have been described above. The seventh embodiment will be described below. The basic configuration of the gaming machine 1 according to the seventh embodiment is the same as the gaming machine 1 according to the first to sixth embodiments. In the following description, the same components as those of the game machine 1 according to the first to sixth embodiments are denoted by the same reference numerals. In addition, the description of the parts that the descriptions of the first to sixth embodiments are applicable to the seventh embodiment will be omitted.

<Adjusting the height of the reel unit>
FIG. 154 is a front view for explaining the schematic configuration inside the cabinet. 155 is an exploded perspective view showing a state in which the reel unit and the reel adapter are removed from the inside of the cabinet shown in FIG. 154; FIG. FIG. 156(a) is a schematic front view of the state in which the front door is closed in the gaming machine according to the sixth embodiment. FIG. 156(b) is a schematic front view showing a state in which the front door is closed in the gaming machine according to the seventh embodiment. FIG. 156(c) is a schematic front view of the inside of the cabinet of the gaming machine according to the sixth embodiment. FIG. 156(d) is a schematic front view of the inside of the cabinet of the gaming machine according to the seventh embodiment.

In the above-described embodiment, the gaming machine equipped with the display unit A (projection mapping device) has been described, but the gaming machine 1 according to the seventh embodiment is not equipped with the projection mapping device. Specifically, in the above-described embodiment, the irradiation unit B is arranged in the upper space inside the cabinet G, and the screen is provided in the upper space or the upper part (upper door mechanism UD) of the front door. (See FIGS. 4, 5, 64, 97, etc.). On the other hand, in this embodiment, the irradiation unit B is not arranged in the upper space inside the cabinet G, and no screen is provided in the upper space or the upper part of the front door.

In the above-described embodiment (the form in which the projection mapping device is installed), the upper part of the game machine 1 is used to display the image projected from the projector on the screen. A player can visually recognize an image displayed on the screen through a window (for example, an upper display window UD1 shown in FIG. 3). Below the window (the window for making the image displayed on the screen visible), a main display window DD4 (the operation of each reel RL, RC, RR and the display on each reel RL, RC, RR) A window is provided to make the design visible.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, since the projection mapping device is not installed, no window is formed for making the image displayed on the screen visible. DD4 is formed above the embodiment described above. This improves the visibility of the operation of each reel RL, RC, RR and the symbols drawn on each reel RL, RC, RR.

Here, as shown in FIGS. 154 and 155, in this embodiment, the reel adapter 6000 is mounted on the upper surface of the middle board 4000, and the reel unit RU is mounted on the upper surface of the reel adapter 6000. FIG. That is, in the sixth embodiment, the reel unit RU is directly mounted on the middle board 4000 (see FIGS. 95 and 96). , the reel adapter 6000 is interposed. The internal configuration of the cabinet G is basically the same between the sixth embodiment and the present embodiment except for the reel adapter 6000 . In addition, in this embodiment, since the irradiation unit B is not provided, the operation window G10 is not formed in the rear wall G3.

As shown in FIGS. 156(a) and 156(b), in this embodiment, the main display window DD4 is positioned upward by a distance d (approximately 3 to 10 cm, for example, 6 cm) compared to the sixth embodiment. formed. On the other hand, as shown in FIGS. 156(c) and 156(d), the placement position (height) of the middle board 4000 in the cabinet G is the same between the sixth embodiment and this embodiment. In addition, in this embodiment, the reel adapter 6000 is interposed between the middle board 4000 and the reel unit RU. It is above the height of the adapter 6000 (distance d).

As a result, in this embodiment, both the main display window DD4 and the reel unit RU are positioned higher by the distance d than in the sixth embodiment. As a result, as in the sixth embodiment, the formation position of the main display window DD4 and the arrangement position of the reel unit RU (reel RL) substantially match (overlap) when viewed from the front. As a result, the action of each reel RL, RC, RR and the symbols drawn on each reel RL, RC, RR can be easily recognized by the player.

Note that FIGS. 156(a) and 156(b) show only the main display window DD4 and the reel unit RU, and omit other configurations. In FIG. 156(c), only the middle board 4000 and the reel unit RU are shown, and illustration of other configurations is omitted. In FIG. 156(d), only the middle board 4000, the reel adapter 6000, and the reel unit RU are shown, and the illustration of other configurations is omitted.

<Reel Adapter 6000>
FIG. 157 is a perspective view of the reel adapter as seen from the front right. FIG. 158 is a perspective view of the reel adapter as seen from the rear right. FIG. 159 is a partially enlarged perspective view of the right rear portion of the reel adapter; 160 is a rear view of the right rear portion shown in FIG. 159; FIG. 161 is a cross-sectional view of the lower projecting portion of the right rear portion shown in FIG. 159; FIG. FIG. 162 is a perspective view of the reel adapter viewed from below. FIG. 163 is a partially enlarged perspective view of the reel adapter as seen from below. FIG. 164 is a front view of the reel adapter cut along a horizontal vertical plane. FIG. 165 is a perspective view of the reel adapter viewed from above. FIG. 166 is a partially enlarged perspective view of the periphery of the step recess in a state in which the reel adapter is cut along the vertical plane in the front-rear direction.

As shown in FIGS. 157 and 158, the reel adapter 6000 has a box-like external shape, and has an upper surface 6001, a front surface 6002, and a rear surface, respectively. and a rear surface 6003 . A right portion (right rear surface 6003R) and a left portion (left rear surface 6003L) of the rear surface 6003 are each formed to have a step with respect to a central portion of the rear surface 6003 (middle rear surface 6003C).

In addition, the reel adapter 6000 has a right rear portion 6010 and a left rear portion 6020 as structures protruding rearward at the right side portion and the left side portion of the rear end, respectively. The right rear portion 6010 includes an upper protrusion portion 6011 that protrudes rearward from the right rear surface 6003R at the upper portion of the right rear surface 6003R, a lower protrusion portion 6012 that protrudes rearward from the right rear surface 6003R at the lower portion of the right rear surface 6003R, have.

The left rear portion 6020 includes an upper protrusion portion 6021 that protrudes rearward from the left rear surface 6003L at the upper portion of the left rear surface 6003L, a lower protrusion portion 6022 that protrudes rearward from the left rear surface 6003L at the lower portion of the left rear surface 6003L, have. Since the left rear portion 6020 has substantially the same structure as the right rear portion 6010, only the right rear portion 6010 will be described below.

As shown in FIG. 159, the upper projecting portion 6011 includes a right side portion 6011a and a left side portion 6011b extending in the vertical direction, and a connecting portion 6011c extending in the horizontal direction and connecting the right side portion 6011a and the left side portion 6011b. ,have. The lower projecting portion 6012 has a rectangular parallelepiped shape with a rounded rear upper portion. For clarity, in FIG. 159, the rear end surface of the upper protrusion 6011 and the rear end surface of the lower protrusion 6012 are hatched.

As shown in FIG. 160, the lower end of the connection portion 6011c is positioned above the top surface 6001, thereby forming an opening 6013 surrounded by the right side portion 6011a, the left side portion 6011b, the connection portion 6011c, and the top surface 6001. formed. For the sake of clarity, in FIG. 160, the rear end surface of the upper protrusion 6011 and the rear end surface of the lower protrusion 6012 are indicated by oblique lines, and the opening 6013 is indicated by shading. Although not shown, the upper protruding portion 6021 similarly has a right side portion 6021a, a left side portion 6021b, and a connection portion 6021c, and an opening surrounded by the right side portion 6021a, the left side portion 6021b, the connection portion 6021c, and the upper surface 6001. 6023 is formed.

FIG. 161 shows a state in which the lower protruding portion 6012 is cut along a vertical plane (plane in the left-right direction), and the cut plane is shown by oblique lines. As shown in FIG. 161, the lower protruding portion 6012 has a protruding upper surface 6012a that protrudes rearward from the right rear surface 6003R. The projecting upper surface 6012 a is formed to have a slope that is slightly lower in the rear direction, and constitutes the upper surface of the lower projecting portion 6012 . An upper raised portion 6012b is formed on the protruding upper surface 6012a. The upper protruding portion 6012b has a protruding shape with respect to the flat protruding upper surface 6012a.

As shown in FIGS. 157 and 158, the upper surface 6001 of the reel adapter 6000 is formed with three upper surface recesses 6030 (an upper left surface recess 6030L, a middle upper surface recess 6030C, and an upper right surface recess 6030R). The left top surface recess 6030L, the middle top surface recess 6030C, and the right top surface recess 6030R are each formed as a recess recessed with respect to the top surface 6001, and one surface ( It has a shape in which the upper surface) is open.

The left upper surface recess 6030L, the middle upper surface recess 6030C, and the right upper surface recess 6030R are formed so as to be aligned in the left-right direction. A recess non-formation region 6001a, a recess non-formation region 6001b, a recess non-formation region 6001c, and a recess non-formation region 6001d are respectively formed between the top recess 6030C and the right top recess 6030R and on the right side of the top right recess 6030R. It is The recess non-formation region 6001 a , recess non-formation region 6001 b , recess non-formation region 6001 c , and recess non-formation region 6001 d are part of the upper surface 6001 .

As shown in FIGS. 162 and 163, on the back side of the reel adapter 6000, three rear surface projections 6031 (left rear surface projection 6031L, middle rear surface projection 6031C, and right rear surface projection 6031R) are formed. . The left rear convex portion 6031L, the intermediate rear convex portion 6031C, and the right rear convex portion 6031R correspond to the upper left concave portion 6030L, the intermediate upper concave portion 6030C, and the right upper concave portion 6030R, respectively. It has a shape projecting downward with respect to the back surface 6004 (the surface opposite to the top surface 6001) according to the recesses of the middle top surface recess 6030C and the right top surface recess 6030R.

The rear convex portion 6031 has a bottom surface 6031a formed substantially parallel to the rear surface 6004 and side surfaces 6031b connecting the rear surface 6004 and the bottom surface 6031a. Further, on the back side of the reel adapter 6000, a rib 6032 is formed that protrudes downward (substantially perpendicularly) with respect to the back surface 6004 or the bottom surface 6031a. The rib 6032 is composed of left and right ribs 6032a extending in the left and right direction and five front and rear ribs 6032b extending in the front and rear direction.

For the sake of clarity, in FIG. 163, side surfaces of the ribs 6032 (surfaces substantially perpendicular to the back surface 6004 or the bottom surface 6031a) are hatched. The left and right ribs 6032a cross each of the five front and rear ribs 6032b below the bottom surface 6031a. A portion of the rib 6032 protruding downward from the back surface 6004 is continuous with the side surface 6031b, and the portion protruding downward from the back surface 6004 is integrated with the portion protruding downward from the bottom surface 6031a.

FIG. 164 shows a state in which the reel adapter 6000 is cut along a vertical plane (plane in the left-right direction) passing through the right and left ribs 6032a, and the cut plane is indicated by oblique lines. As shown in FIG. 164, the length from the bottom surface 6030a (see FIG. 157) of the upper surface recess 6030 in the portion of the left and right ribs 6032a protruding downward from the bottom surface 6031a to the lower end of the left and right ribs 6032a (r in the figure) is shorter than the length (R in the figure) from the upper surface 6001 to the lower ends of the left and right ribs 6032a in the portion protruding downward from the back surface 6004 .

Here, R is the length including the distance between the top surface 6001 and the back surface 6004 (the thickness of the reel adapter 6000 in the top recess non-forming region), and r is the distance between the bottom surface 6030a and the bottom surface 6031a (the top recess forming region is the length including the thickness of the reel adapter 6000 in ). The thickness of these reel adapters 6000 is substantially uniform. Therefore, of the left and right ribs 6032a, the length from the bottom surface 6031a to the lower end of the left and right ribs 6032a in the portion protruding downward from the bottom surface 6031a (the length of downward protrusion of the left and right ribs 6032a when the bottom surface 6031a is used as a reference) is , the length from the back surface 6004 to the lower ends of the left and right ribs 6032a at the portions protruding downward from the back surface 6004 (the downward protrusion length of the left and right ribs 6032a when the back surface 6004 is used as a reference).

Similarly, of the front and rear ribs 6032b, the length from the bottom surface 6031a to the lower end of the front and rear ribs 6032b in the portion that protrudes downward from the bottom surface 6031a (the downward projection length of the front and rear ribs 6032b when the bottom surface 6031a is used as a reference) is shorter than the length from the back surface 6004 to the lower ends of the front and rear ribs 6032b in the portions protruding downward from the back surface 6004 (the downward projection length of the front and rear ribs 6032b when the back surface 6004 is used as a reference). The downward projection length of the front and rear ribs 6032b when the bottom surface 6031a is used as a reference is substantially the same as the downward projection length of the left and right ribs 6032a when the bottom surface 6031a is used as a reference.

As shown in FIGS. 157 and 165, the front surface 6002 of the reel adapter 6000 is formed with two step recesses 6040 (a left step recess 6040L and a right step recess 6040R). The left side stepped recess 6040L and the right side stepped recess 6040R are each formed to have a step. and a lower wall surface 6040b formed substantially parallel to the upper wall surface 6040a. For clarity, in FIG. 165, the upper wall surface 6040a and the lower wall surface 6040b are shaded.

FIG. 166 shows how the reel adapter 6000 is cut along the vertical plane (front-back direction plane) passing through the left stepped recess 6040L. As shown in FIG. 166, a lower projection 6041 is formed in the lower portion of the step recess 6040 . A front surface 6041a of the lower protrusion 6041 is continuously formed downward from the lower end of the lower wall surface 6040b. For the sake of clarity, in FIG. 166, the cut surface of the lower projection 6041 is shown in black, and the cut surfaces other than the lower projection 6041 are shown in oblique lines. The lower end of the lower wall surface 6040b is substantially at the same height as the lower end of the area where the step recess 6040 is not formed on the front surface 6002, and the lower protrusion 6041 is a portion protruding downward from these lower ends.

157 and 165, two screw hole recesses 6050 (a left screw hole recess 6050L and a right screw hole recess 6050R) are formed in the front surface 6002 of the reel adapter 6000. The left screw hole recess 6050L and the right screw hole recess 6050R each include a lower surface 6050a that defines the lower end and a side surface 6050b that is tapered toward the bottom. A screw hole 6050c is formed in the lower surface 6050a so as to penetrate to the rear side.

Also, as shown in FIGS. 157 and 165, three front upper recesses 6060 (left front upper recess 6060L, middle front upper recess 6060C, and right front upper recess 6060R) are provided on the upper part of the front face 6002 of the reel adapter 6000. formed. The left front upper concave portion 6060L, the middle front upper concave portion 6060C, and the right front upper concave portion 6060R each have a shape obtained by notching the boundary portion between the front surface 6002 and the upper surface 6001 into a rectangular parallelepiped shape. The left side of the left front upper recess 6060L communicates with the left stepped recess 6040L, and the left side of the right front upper recess 6060R communicates with the right screw hole recess 6050R.

<Reel unit RU>
FIG. 167 is a perspective view of the reel unit. 168 is a perspective view showing a state in which the right unit is removed from the reel unit shown in FIG. 167; FIG. FIG. 169 is a perspective view of the reel frame viewed from the front. FIG. 170 is a perspective view of the reel frame viewed from below. FIG. 171 is a perspective view of the reel frame as seen from the rear. FIG. 172 is a perspective view of the motor frame.

As shown in FIGS. 167 and 168, the reel unit RU includes a reel frame R10, a left unit R30L, a middle unit R30C, and a right unit R30R. are housed in Since the left unit R30L, the middle unit R30C, and the right unit R30R have the same configuration, the configuration of the right unit R30R will be mainly described below.

The right unit R30R includes a right reel RR, a right motor frame R50R and a right front guard R70R. FIG. 168 shows a state where the right motor frame R50R and right front guard R70R are removed from the right unit R30R. The right reel RR has a cylindrical right reel drum R31R, and a right reel band R32R on which a plurality of patterns are arranged is wound around and fixed to the right reel drum R31R. Further, although not shown, inside the right reel drum R31R, a rotating gear having the same central axis as that of the right reel drum R31R is arranged.

The right motor frame R50R is arranged on the right side of the right reel RR. An opening R51R is formed in the center of the right motor frame R50R, and a motor cover R52R is attached so as to fill the opening R51R. The motor cover R52R accommodates the motor driving section while covering it. Although not shown, the motor driving section has a stepping motor and a driving gear that meshes with the rotating gear.

The driving force of the stepping motor is transmitted to the right reel RR via the driving gear and rotating gear. Thus, the right motor frame R50R supports the stepping motor and rotatably supports the right reel RR. The right front guard R70R is arranged on the lower front side of the right reel RR and covers part of the symbols arranged on the right reel RR.

Similarly, the left unit R30L has a left reel RL, a left motor frame R50L and a left front guard R70L. The left motor frame R50L supports the stepping motor and rotatably supports the left reel RL. The left front guard R70L is arranged on the lower front side of the left reel RL and covers part of the symbols arranged on the left reel RL.

The middle unit R30C includes a middle reel RC, a middle motor frame R50C, and a middle front guard R70C. The middle motor frame R50C supports the stepping motor and rotatably supports the middle reel RC. The middle front guard R70C is arranged at the front side lower part of the middle reel RC, and covers part of the symbols arranged on the middle reel RC.

As shown in FIG. 169, the reel frame R10 is shaped like a box with an open front side. The reel frame R10 has three first lower surfaces R11 (left first lower surface R11L, middle first lower surface R11C) as surfaces that define the lower ends of the housing spaces for the left unit R30L, middle unit R30C, and right unit R30R. , and right first lower surface R11R) and three second lower surfaces R12 (left second lower surface R12L, middle second lower surface R12C, and right second lower surface R12R). For the sake of clarity, in FIG. 169, the second lower surface R12 is shaded.

The second left lower surface R12L, the second middle lower surface R12C, and the second right lower surface R12R are the right sides of the first left lower surface R11L, the first middle lower surface R11C, and the first right lower surface R11R, respectively. , are formed as recesses that are slightly recessed with respect to these first lower side faces R11. A left reel RL, a middle reel RC, and a right reel RR are arranged above the left first lower surface R11L, the middle first lower surface R11C, and the right first lower surface R11R, respectively. A left motor frame R50L, a middle motor frame R50C, and a right motor frame R50R are placed on the left second lower surface R12L, the middle second lower surface R12C, and the right second lower surface R12R, respectively.

These first lower surface R11 and second lower surface R12 are formed substantially flat. In addition, the reel frame R10 has a downward protruding portion that protrudes downward (in a direction substantially perpendicular to the first lower side surface R11 and the second lower side surface R12) at the front ends of the first lower side surface R11 and the second lower side surface R12. It has R13. The downward projection R13 has three mounting holes R14 (a left mounting hole R14L, a middle mounting hole R14C, and a right mounting hole R14R) and one screw hole R15 extending forward and backward through the downward projection R13. It is formed so as to penetrate in the direction.

A pair of protrusions R16 are formed on the front side of the downward projecting portion R13 at predetermined intervals on the left and right sides of the left mounting hole R14L, the middle mounting hole R14C, and the right mounting hole R14R. . Further, as shown in FIG. 170, on the rear side of the downward projecting portion R13, one each on the left and right near the periphery of the left mounting hole R14L, the middle mounting hole R14C, and the right mounting hole R14R. A protrusion R17 is formed.

The reel frame R10 has three first back sides R18 (left first back side R18L, middle first back side R18C, and right first back surface R18R) and three second back surfaces R19 (left second back surface R19L, middle second back surface R19C, and right second back surface R19R). The first left rear surface R18L, the first middle rear surface R18C, and the first right rear surface R18R correspond to the first left lower surface R11L, the first middle lower surface R11C, and the first right lower surface R11R, respectively. The left second back side R19L, the middle second back side R19C, and the right second back side R19R are respectively the left second bottom side R12L, the middle second bottom side R12C, and the right second bottom side R12C. It corresponds to side surface R12R.

The left second back surface R19L, the middle second back surface R19C, and the right second back surface R19R are recesses in the left second bottom surface R12L, the middle second bottom surface R12C, and the right second bottom surface R12R, respectively. , it has a shape that protrudes slightly downward with respect to the left first back side surface R18L, the middle first back side surface R18C, and the right first back side surface R18R.

The first rear side surface R18 and the second rear side surface R19 are formed substantially flat, and are continuous with the downward projecting portion R13 at the front end and continuous with the rear wall portion R20 at the rear end. The downward protruding portion R13 and the rear wall portion R20 are formed in a direction substantially perpendicular to the first rear side surface R18 and the second rear side surface R19, respectively. A lower edge of the rear wall portion R20 is positioned on the same plane as the second rear side surface R19.

As shown in FIG. 171, the reel frame R10 has two rear projections R21 (right rear projection R21R and left rear projection R21L) projecting rearward from the rear wall portion R20. The rear protruding portion R21 has a protruding upper surface R21a that protrudes rearward from the rear wall portion R20. The protruding upper surface R21a is formed so as to have an inclination that is slightly lower toward the rear, and constitutes the upper surface of the rear protruding portion R21. An upper raised portion R21b is formed on the protruding upper surface R21a. The upper protruding portion R21b has a protruding shape with respect to the flat protruding upper surface R21a. The size and shape of the right rear projection R21R and the left rear projection R21L are approximately the same as the size and shape of the lower projection 6012 and the lower projection 6022 (see FIG. 158) of the reel adapter 6000, respectively. ing.

As shown in FIG. 172, the motor frame R50 (the left motor frame R50L, the middle motor frame R50C, and the right motor frame R50R) has a mounting surface R52 as a surface that defines the lower end. For the sake of clarity, in FIG. 172, the placement surface R52 is hatched. The width of the mounting surface R52 in the left-right direction is substantially the same as the width in the left-right direction of the second lower surface R12 of the reel frame R10.

The left motor frame R50L, the middle motor frame R50C, and the right motor frame R50R have their mounting surfaces R52 in contact with the left second lower surface R12L, the middle second lower surface R12C, and the right second lower surface R12R, respectively. It is housed in the reel frame R10 in this state. As a result, the motor frame R50 is supported by the reel frame R10, and as a result, the reels RL, RC, RR and stepping motors are also supported by the reel frame R10.

Further, the motor frame R50 has a downward projecting portion R53 projecting downward (in a direction substantially perpendicular to the mounting surface R52) at the front end of the mounting surface R52. A mounting hole R54 is formed in the downward projecting portion R53 so as to penetrate the downward projecting portion R53 in the front-rear direction. The lateral width of the downward projecting portion R53 corresponds to the distance between the pair of projections R16 formed on the downward projecting portion R13 of the reel frame R10.

When the motor frame R50 is accommodated in the reel frame R10 (the assembly of the game machine 1 is completed), the downward projecting portion R53 of the motor frame R50 forms a pair of projections on the front side of the downward projecting portion R13 of the reel frame R10. The mounting hole R54 formed in the downward projecting portion R53 and the mounting hole R14 formed in the downward projecting portion R13 overlap each other. In this state, the motor frame R50 is fastened to the reel frame R10 using fastening members inserted through the mounting holes R54 and R14. In this embodiment, Niflach (registered trademark) is used as the fastening member.

<Middle board 4000>
Figure 173 is a perspective view of the middle board.

As shown in FIG. 173, the middle board 4000 has a plate-like shape, and has a first upper surface 4010, a second upper surface 4030, a third upper surface 4050, a fourth upper surface 4070, and a fourth upper surface 4070. 5 top surface 4080 . The second upper surface 4030 , the third upper surface 4050 , the fourth upper surface 4070 , and the fifth upper surface 4080 are each formed as recesses recessed with respect to the first upper surface 4010 . For clarity, the first upper surface 4010 is hatched in FIG. 173 .

A right mounting wall portion 4001 is erected on the right portion of the rear edge of the middle board 4000 . A screw hole 4002 is formed in the right mounting wall portion 4001 . A left mounting wall portion 4003 is erected on the left portion of the rear edge of the middle board 4000 . A screw hole 4004 is formed in the left mounting wall portion 4003 . The middle board 4000 is attached to the rear wall G3 of the cabinet G with screws passing through the screw holes 4002 and 4004. As shown in FIG.

Also, the middle board 4000 is attached to another member (not shown) by means of screws inserted through four screw holes 4005 formed in the first upper surface 4010 . The other members are attached to the right side wall G2R and the left side wall G2L of the cabinet G, thereby fixing the middle board 4000 to the right side wall G2R and the left side wall G2L.

The second upper surface 4030 is formed in front of the right mounting wall portion 4001 . A rectangular opening 4031 is formed in the second top surface 4030 , and along the rear edge (rear side) of the opening 4031 , a right side opening is formed in a direction substantially perpendicular to the second top surface 4030 . A setting portion 4032 is erected. A rectangular opening 4033 is formed in the central portion of the right opening-equipped standing portion 4032 . The size and shape of the opening 4033 are substantially the same as the size and shape of the opening 6013 (see FIG. 160) formed by the upper projecting portion 6011 of the reel adapter 6000 . Also, the lower edge of the opening 4033 has substantially the same height as the first upper surface 4010 .

The third upper surface 4050 is formed in front of the left mounting wall portion 4003 . A rectangular opening 4051 is formed in the third upper surface 4050 , and along the rear edge (rear side) of the opening 4051 , a left opening is formed in a direction substantially perpendicular to the third upper surface 4050 . A setting portion 4052 is erected. A rectangular opening 4053 is formed in the central portion of the left opening-equipped standing portion 4052 . The size and shape of the opening 4053 are substantially the same as the size and shape of the opening 4033 formed in the right opening-equipped standing portion 4032 . Also, the lower edge of the opening 4053 has substantially the same height as the first upper surface 4010 .

The fourth upper surface 4070 is formed in front of the second upper surface 4030 and the third upper surface 4050 so as to extend in the left-right direction. The fifth upper surface 4080 is formed in front of the fourth upper surface 4070 and extends to the front end of the middle board 4000 . The fifth upper surface 4080 includes a first raised surface 4081, a second raised surface 4082, a third raised surface 4083, and a fourth raised surface 4084 as raised portions with respect to the surrounding surfaces.

The second raised surface 4082 is formed with a front hole 4082a, a rear hole 4082b and a notch 4082c. The front side hole 4082a and the rear side hole 4082b are formed in a rectangular shape with slightly rounded corners as through holes that penetrate the middle board 4000 in the vertical direction. The front hole 4082a and the rear hole 4082b each extend in the left-right direction, and the extending direction of the front hole 4082a and the extending direction of the rear hole 4082b are substantially parallel. The front hole 4082a and the rear hole 4082b are substantially identical in size and shape.

Similarly, the third raised surface 4083 is formed with a front hole 4083a, a rear hole 4083b, and a notch 4083c. The front side hole 4083a and the rear side hole 4083b are formed in a rectangular shape with slightly rounded corners as through holes that penetrate the middle board 4000 in the vertical direction. The front hole 4083a and the rear hole 4083b each extend in the left-right direction, and the extending direction of the front hole 4083a and the extending direction of the rear hole 4083b are substantially parallel. The front hole 4083a and the rear hole 4083b are substantially the same in size and shape. A notch 4084 a is formed in the fourth raised surface 4084 .

A screw hole 4085 is formed between the first raised surface 4081 and the second raised surface 4082 . A screw hole 4086 is formed between the second raised surface 4082 and the third raised surface 4083 . A screw hole 4087 is formed between the third raised surface 4083 and the fourth raised surface 4084 .

The first upper surface 4010, the second upper surface 4030, the third upper surface 4050, the fourth upper surface 4070, and the fifth upper surface 4080 (first raised surface 4081, second raised surface 4082, third raised surface 4083, and , including the fourth raised surface 4084) are all substantially flat and arranged substantially horizontally.

<Placement of Reel Adapter 6000 on Middle Board 4000>
FIG. 174 is a perspective view showing a state in which the reel adapter is placed on the middle board. 175 is a perspective view showing a state in which the reel adapter is slightly displaced with respect to the middle board from the state shown in FIG. 174; FIG. 176 is a partially enlarged perspective view of the periphery of the step recess in a state where the reel adapter and middle board shown in FIG. 174 are cut along the vertical plane in the front-rear direction. FIG. 177 is a side perspective view of the reel adapter and middle board shown in FIG. 174; FIG. 178 is a partially enlarged perspective view of the reel adapter and middle board shown in FIG. 177 cut along a vertical plane in the front-rear direction; FIG.

When the reel adapter 6000 is placed on the middle board 4000 (see FIG. 174, the gaming machine 1 is completely assembled), the top surface 6001, the front surface 6002, the rear surface 6003, and the lower ends of the side surfaces 6005 of the reel adapter 6000 are The edge and the lower edge of the portion of the rib 6032 (see FIG. 163) protruding downward from the bottom surface 6031a abut on the first upper surface 4010 (see FIG. 173) of the middle board 4000. As shown in FIG.

In this state, the left screw hole recess 6050L of the reel adapter 6000 is arranged above the portion of the fifth upper surface 4080 of the middle board 4000 located between the first raised surface 4081 and the second raised surface 4082. , the right screw hole recess 6050R of the reel adapter 6000 is arranged above the portion of the fifth upper surface 4080 of the middle board 4000 located between the third raised surface 4083 and the fourth raised surface 4084 (FIG. 175). reference).

At this time, the screw holes 6050c of the screw hole recesses 6050 (the left screw hole recess 6050L and the right screw hole recess 6050R) overlap the screw holes 4085 and 4087 of the middle board 4000, and these screw holes are inserted. The reel adapter 6000 is fastened to the middle board 4000 using the threaded screw. Although not shown, a portion protruding downward is formed on the back side of the lower surface 6050a (see FIG. 165) of the screw hole recess 6050, and this portion abuts on the fifth upper surface 4080 to stabilize the screw hole. screw fastening can be performed.

FIG. 176 shows how the reel adapter 6000 and the middle board 4000 are cut along the vertical plane (front-rear plane) passing through the left step recess 6040L with the reel adapter 6000 placed on the middle board 4000. FIG. As shown in FIG. 176, in this state, the lower protrusion 6041 (see FIG. 166) formed in the lower portion of the left step recess 6040L of the reel adapter 6000 is inserted into the front hole 4082a of the middle board 4000. Similarly, although not shown, the lower protrusion 6041 formed at the lower portion of the right step recess 6040R of the reel adapter 6000 is inserted into the front hole 4083a of the middle board 4000. As shown in FIG.

The size and shape of the lower projection 6041 correspond to the size and shape of the front hole 4082a and the front hole 4083a. The projection 6041 is substantially in contact with or in close proximity to the wall portions (wall portions formed in the front-rear direction and the left-right direction) forming the peripheral edges of the front hole 4082a and the front hole 4083a, and the lower projection 6041 and the peripheral wall portion are in contact with each other. is a predetermined distance (eg, 0.5 mm, 0.3 mm, 0.1 mm, etc.) or less. As a result, the movement of the lower protrusion 6041 in the front-rear direction and the left-right direction is restricted, and when the reel adapter 6000 is placed on the middle board 4000, positional deviation in the front-rear direction and the left-right direction is suppressed, and alignment is performed. It can be carried out.

In addition, although the lower projection 6041 is inserted into the front hole 4082a and the front hole 4083a in this embodiment, the lower projection 6041 may be inserted into the rear hole 4082b and the rear hole 4083b in other embodiments. There is also Specifically, in this embodiment, the front door is not equipped with a liquid crystal display device, but the present invention can also be applied to a gaming machine equipped with a liquid crystal display device. When the liquid crystal display device is mounted on the front door, the thickness of the front door increases, and it is necessary to arrange the reel unit RU at the rear by the increased thickness of the front door.

In this regard, if the reel adapter 6000 is placed on the middle board 4000 so that the lower projections 6041 are inserted into the rear holes 4082b and 4083b, the reel unit RU can be positioned more rearward than in this embodiment. is possible, and it is possible to easily cope with such design changes. The screw hole 6050c of the reel adapter 6000 has an elliptical shape elongated in the front-rear direction. As a result, when the lower projection 6041 is inserted into the front hole 4082a and the front hole 4083a, and when the lower projection 6041 is inserted into the rear hole 4082b and the rear hole 4083b, the reel can be The screw hole 6050c of the adapter 6000 overlaps with the screw holes 4085 and 4087 of the middle board 4000. As shown in FIG.

177, when the reel adapter 6000 is placed on the middle board 4000, the lower protruding portion 6012 (see FIG. 158) of the reel adapter 6000 is aligned with the right opening erected portion of the middle board 4000. It is inserted into an opening 4033 (see FIG. 173) formed in 4032 , and part of the lower protruding portion 6012 protrudes rearward from the opening 4033 . Similarly, the lower protruding portion 6022 (see FIG. 158) of the reel adapter 6000 is inserted into the opening 4053 (see FIG. 173) formed in the left standing portion 4052 with an opening of the middle board 4000, and the lower protruding portion 6022 is A part protrudes rearward from the opening 4053 .

FIG. 178 shows how the reel adapter 6000 and the middle board 4000 are cut along a plane (vertical plane in the front-rear direction) passing through the highest portion of the upper raised portion 6012b (see FIG. 161) of the lower protruding portion 6012. FIG. For the sake of clarity, the cut surface of the middle board 4000 and the right opening-equipped standing portion 4032 are shown in black, the rear side surface of the right mounting wall portion 4001 of the middle board 4000 is shown in diagonal lines, and the cut surface of the reel adapter 6000 is shown. are shaded, and the portion of the lower protruding portion 6012 of the reel adapter 6000 other than the cut surface is hatched.

As shown in FIG. 178, the upper end of the lower protruding portion 6012 is substantially in contact with or close to the upper edge of the opening 4033, and the distance between the upper end of the lower protruding portion 6012 and the upper edge of the opening 4033 is a predetermined distance (for example, , 0.5 mm, 0.3 mm, 0.1 mm, etc.). Although not shown, the upper end of the lower protruding portion 6022 similarly abuts or is close to the upper edge of the opening 4053, and the distance between the upper end of the lower protruding portion 6022 and the upper edge of the opening 4053 is a predetermined distance (for example, , 0.5 mm, 0.3 mm, 0.1 mm, etc.). As a result, the upward movement of the lower protruding portion 6012 and the lower protruding portion 6022 is restricted, and when the reel adapter 6000 is placed on the middle board 4000, it is possible to prevent vertical positional deviation and correct alignment. It can be carried out.

<Placement of Reel Unit RU on Reel Adapter 6000>
FIG. 179 is a perspective view showing a state in which the reel unit is placed on the reel adapter. 180 is a perspective view showing a state in which the reel adapter is shifted downward with respect to the reel unit from the state shown in FIG. 179; FIG. 181 is a partially enlarged perspective view of the reel adapter and the reel frame in the state shown in FIG. 179 cut along a horizontal vertical plane. FIG. FIG. 182 is a cross-sectional view of the reel unit fastened to the reel adapter. 183 is a rear perspective view of the reel adapter and reel frame in the state shown in FIG. 179. FIG. 184 is a partially enlarged perspective view of the reel adapter and reel frame shown in FIG. 183 cut along a vertical plane in the front-rear direction; FIG.

When the reel unit RU is placed on the reel adapter 6000 (see FIG. 179, the gaming machine 1 is completely assembled), the left reel RL, the middle reel RC, and the right reel RR are connected to the reel adapter 6000 respectively. 6000 are located above the upper left recess 6030L, middle upper recess 6030C, and upper right recess 6030R (see FIG. 157). In addition, the left motor frame R50L, the middle motor frame R50C, and the right motor frame R50R (see FIG. 168) correspond to the non-recessed area 6001b, non-recessed area 6001c, and non-recessed area 6001d of the reel adapter 6000, respectively. (see FIG. 157) (see FIG. 180). Note that FIG. 180 shows a state in which the left front guard R70L, the middle front guard R70C, and the right front guard R70R are removed from the reel unit RU.

FIG. 181 shows how the reel adapter 6000 and the reel frame R10 are cut along a plane (horizontal vertical plane) passing through the upper left recess 6030L, the middle upper recess 6030C, and the upper right recess 6030R. As shown in FIG. 181, in this state, the left second back surface R19L, the middle second back surface R19C, and the right second back surface R19R (see FIG. 170) of the reel frame R10 are each connected to the reel adapter 6000. 6001b, 6001c, and 6001d. 181, the cut surface of the reel frame R10 is hatched, the cut surface of the reel adapter 6000 is shown in black, and the left second lower surface R12L, middle second lower surface R12C, and right second lower surface R12C are shown in FIG. 2 lower side R12R (the front side corresponding to the left second back side R19L, the middle second back side R19C, and the right second back side R19R, see FIG. 169) is shaded.

In FIG. 182, in a state in which the reel unit RU is fastened to the reel adapter 6000 (a state in which the assembly of the gaming machine 1 is completed), a vertical plane (front-rear direction) passing through the right front upper concave portion 6060R (see FIG. 157) of the reel adapter 6000 ) is shown. 182, the cut surface of the reel adapter 6000 is hatched, the cut surface of the reel frame R10 is black, the cut surface of the right motor frame R50R is hatched, and the fastening member R100R (see FIG. 182) is shown for clarity. 180) is shaded.

As described above, when the motor frame R50 is accommodated in the reel frame R10 (the assembly of the game machine 1 is completed), the downward projecting portion R53 (see FIG. 172) of the motor frame R50 is positioned below the reel frame R10. The mounting hole R54 formed in the downward projecting portion R53 and the mounting hole R14 formed in the downward projecting portion R13 overlap with each other. In this state, a fastening member (Nif Latch (registered trademark) in this embodiment, fastening members R100L, 100C, and 100R shown in FIG. 180) inserted through the mounting hole R54 and the mounting hole R14 is used to rotate the motor. A frame R50 is fastened to the reel frame R10.

As shown in FIG. 182, a mounting hole R54 formed in the downward projecting portion R53 of the right motor frame R50R and a right mounting hole R14R formed in the downward projecting portion R13 of the reel frame R10 are located on the right front surface of the reel adapter 6000. It is arranged on the front side of the upper recess 6060R, and part of the fastening member R100R is accommodated in the right front upper recess 6060R. Further, the rear side surface of the downward projection R53 of the right motor frame R50R and the front side surface of the downward projection R13 of the reel frame R10 are in contact with each other, and the rear surface of the downward projection R13 of the reel frame R10 is in contact with each other. and the front surface 6002 (see FIG. 157) of the reel adapter 6000 are in contact with each other.

Note that FIG. 182 shows that a part of the fastening member R100R for fastening the right motor frame R50R to the reel frame R10 is housed in the right front upper concave portion 6060R of the reel adapter 6000. A part of the fastening member R100L for fastening the left motor frame R50L to the reel frame R10 is accommodated in the left front upper concave portion 6060L of the reel adapter 6000, and is used for fastening the middle motor frame R50C to the reel frame R10. Part of the fastening member R100C is housed in the middle front upper concave portion 6060C of the reel adapter 6000. As shown in FIG.

Further, as described above, the screw hole R15 is formed in the downward projecting portion R13 of the reel frame R10, while the boss portion 6070 is formed in the upper portion of the reel adapter 6000 (see FIG. 180). When the reel unit RU is mounted on the reel adapter 6000, the screw hole R15 overlaps the boss portion 6070, and the screw inserted through the screw hole R15 is screwed into the hole formed in the boss portion 6070. A reel unit RU is fastened to the reel adapter 6000 .

183, when the reel unit RU (reel frame R10) is mounted on the reel adapter 6000, the right rear protrusion R21R (see FIG. 171) of the reel frame R10 is positioned above the reel adapter 6000. It is inserted into an opening 6013 (see FIG. 160) formed by the protrusion 6011, and a part of the right rear protrusion R21R protrudes rearward of the opening 6013. As shown in FIG. Similarly, the left rear projection R21L (see FIG. 171) of the reel frame R10 is inserted into the opening 6023 formed by the upper projection 6021 of the reel adapter 6000, and a part of the left rear projection R21L extends rearward of the opening 6023. It stands out.

FIG. 184 shows how the reel adapter 6000 and the reel frame R10 are cut along a plane (vertical plane in the front-rear direction) passing through the highest portion of the upper protrusion R21b (see FIG. 171) of the right rear protrusion R21R. For clarity, the cut surface of the reel adapter 6000 and the rear end surface of the upper projection 6011 (see FIG. 159) are shown in black, the cut surface of the reel frame R10 is shaded, and the right rear projection R21R of the reel frame R10 is shown. The portion other than the cut surface is hatched.

As shown in FIG. 184, the upper end of the right rear projecting portion R21R is substantially in contact with or close to the lower end of the connecting portion 6011c of the upper projecting portion 6011, and the distance between the upper end of the right rear projecting portion R21R and the lower end of the connecting portion 6011c. is a predetermined distance (eg, 0.5 mm, 0.3 mm, 0.1 mm, etc.) or less. Although not shown, similarly, the upper end of the left rear projection R21L is substantially in contact with or close to the lower end of the connection portion 6021c of the upper projection 6021, and the distance between the upper end of the left rear projection R21L and the lower end of the connection portion 6021c is is a predetermined distance (eg, 0.5 mm, 0.3 mm, 0.1 mm, etc.) or less. As a result, the upward movement of the right rear projection R21R and the left rear projection R21L is restricted, and when the reel unit RU (reel frame R10) is placed on the reel adapter 6000, displacement in the vertical direction is suppressed. Alignment can be performed at the same time.

<Placement of Reel Unit RU on Middle Board 4000>
FIG. 185 is a perspective view showing the reel unit placed on the middle board. 186 is a partially enlarged perspective view of the reel unit and middle board shown in FIG. 185 cut along a vertical plane in the front-rear direction. FIG.

As described above, in this embodiment, the reel adapter 6000 is interposed between the middle board 4000 and the reel unit RU. (see Figures 95 and 96). FIG. 185 shows a state in which the reel unit RU is mounted on the middle board 4000 in the sixth embodiment.

As shown in FIG. 185, when the reel unit RU is placed on the middle board 4000, the right rear projecting portion R21R (see FIG. 171) of the reel frame R10 is aligned with the right opening standing portion 4032 of the middle board 4000. It is inserted into the formed opening 4033 (see FIG. 173), and a part of the right rear protrusion R21R protrudes rearward from the opening 4033. As shown in FIG. Similarly, the left rear projecting portion R21L (see FIG. 171) of the reel frame R10 is inserted into the opening 4053 (see FIG. 173) formed in the left standing portion 4052 with opening of the middle board 4000, and the left rear projecting portion R21L is inserted into the opening 4053 (see FIG. 173). A part protrudes rearward from the opening 4053 .

FIG. 186 shows how the reel unit RU and middle board 4000 are cut along a plane (vertical plane in the front-rear direction) passing through the highest portion of the upper protrusion R21b (see FIG. 171) of the right rear projection R21R. For the sake of clarity, the cut surface of the middle board 4000 and the right opening-equipped standing portion 4032 are shown in black, the back side surface of the right mounting wall portion 4001 of the middle board 4000 is shown in diagonal lines, and the cut surface of the reel frame R10 is shown. are shaded, and the portion of the right rear projection R21R of the reel frame R10 other than the cut surface is hatched.

As shown in FIG. 186, the upper end of the right rear projection R21R is substantially in contact with or close to the upper edge of the opening 4033, and the distance between the upper end of the right rear projection R21R and the upper edge of the opening 4033 is a predetermined distance (for example, , 0.5 mm, 0.3 mm, 0.1 mm, etc.). Although not shown, similarly, the upper end of the left rear projection R21L is substantially in contact with or close to the upper edge of the opening 4053, and the distance between the upper end of the left rear projection R21L and the upper edge of the opening 4053 is a predetermined distance (for example, , 0.5 mm, 0.3 mm, 0.1 mm, etc.). As a result, the upward movement of the right rear protrusion R21R and the left rear protrusion R21L is restricted, and when the reel unit RU is placed on the middle board 4000, positional deviation in the vertical direction is suppressed and alignment is performed. It can be carried out.

The gaming machine 1 according to the seventh embodiment has been described above as one embodiment of the present invention.

<Appendix D>
Conventionally, a plurality of reels each having a plurality of patterns arranged on its surface are inserted with game medals, coins, etc. (“medals, etc.”), and it is detected that the start lever has been operated by the player, and a plurality of reels are generated. Detects that the player has pressed a start switch requesting the start of rotation of the reel and a stop button provided corresponding to each of a plurality of reels, and outputs a signal requesting the rotation of the reel to stop. a stepping motor provided corresponding to each of a plurality of reels to transmit the respective driving force to each reel; and the operation of the stepping motor based on signals output from the start switch and the stop switch. and a reel control unit for controlling the rotation and stopping of each reel, and when it detects that the start lever has been operated, a lottery is conducted based on a random number value, and the result of this lottery ("internal winning combination") 2. Description of the Related Art There is known a so-called pachislot gaming machine that stops the rotation of reels based on the detection timing of operation of a stop button.

As such a conventional game machine, there is known a game machine capable of easily changing the layout of the front door (see JP-A-2013-128839).

However, even if the layout of the front door can be easily changed, if the position of the reel (variable display) is changed, it is necessary to change the design inside the housing significantly. There was a problem that the cost would increase.

SUMMARY OF THE INVENTION It is an object of the present invention to provide a game machine capable of easily changing the position of a variable display portion at a low cost.

In this regard, the gaming machine 1 according to the seventh embodiment has the following features.

(D-1) a variable display unit (reel unit RU) having a variable display section (left reel RL, middle reel RC, and right reel RR) capable of variably displaying a plurality of pieces of identification information;
A viewable area (main display window DD4) that allows a player to view the variable display of the variable display unit;
a mounting member (reel adapter 6000) having a predetermined height on which the variable display unit is mounted;
and an installation portion (middle board 4000) where the placement member is installed,
The installation portion and the visible region are vertically separated from each other by a predetermined distance,
The placement member is installed on the installation portion, and the variable display unit is arranged on the placement member,
The vertical position of the variable display unit is fixed so that the variable display portion can be easily viewed through the visible region.
A gaming machine characterized by:

According to the gaming machine 1 according to the seventh embodiment, the variable display section (left reel RL, middle reel RC, and right reel RR) can be displayed by the player through the visible area (main display window DD4). The visible region (main display window DD4) and the installation portion (middle board 4000) are spaced apart by a predetermined distance in the vertical direction. A mounting member (reel adapter 6000) is mounted on the mounting portion (middle board 4000), and the variable display unit (reel unit RU) is arranged on the mounting member (reel adapter 6000). The mounting member (reel adapter 6000) has a predetermined height, and the variable display portions (left reel RL, middle reel RC, and right reel RR) are visible through the visible area (main display window DD4). The position in the vertical direction of the variable display unit (reel unit RU) is fixed so that it can be easily visually recognized. That is, by interposing the mounting member (reel adapter 6000) between the installation portion (middle board 4000) and the variable display unit (reel unit RU), the variable display unit (reel unit RU) can be positioned higher. , and this allows the arrangement positions of the variable display portions (the left reel RL, the middle reel RC, and the right reel RR) to correspond to the height of the visible area (the main display window DD4). Therefore, as a result of using the mounting member (reel adapter 6000), it is possible to create a situation in which the player can easily view the variable display of the variable display portions (left reel RL, middle reel RC, and right reel RR). , and it is possible to easily change the positions of the variable display portions (the left reel RL, the middle reel RC, and the right reel RR) at low cost.

In the seventh embodiment, the visible area (main display window DD4) and the variable display portion (left reel RL, middle reel RC, and right reel RR) are superimposed when viewed from the front. “Overlapping” means that when viewed from a predetermined direction, the position of at least a part of the variable display portions (left reel RL, middle reel RC, and right reel RR) matches the visible region (main display window DD4). This means that at least part of the variable display portions (left reel RL, middle reel RC, and right reel RR) are visible through the visible area (main display window DD4). In the present invention, the visible area (main display window DD4) and the variable display portion (left reel RL, middle reel RC, and right reel RR) do not need to completely match when viewed from the front. . For example, when the player is arranged to look down on the variable display portions (left reel RL, middle reel RC, and right reel RR) from obliquely above via the visible area (main display window DD4) ( For example, when the present invention is applied to a game machine in which a large liquid crystal is provided and reels are small and arranged low (below the liquid crystal), when viewed obliquely from above, the variable display (left reel RL, middle reel RC, and right reel RR) are aligned with the visible region (main display window DD4), the variable display portions (left reel RL, middle reel RC and at least part of the right reel RR) may be visible through the visible area (main display window DD4). Also, when the player is arranged to look up at the variable display portions (left reel RL, middle reel RC, and right reel RR) through the visible area (main display window DD4) from diagonally below ( For example, when the present invention is applied to a game machine in which the reels are arranged slightly near the top of the housing (above the liquid crystal), the variable display section (left reel RL, middle reel RC, and right reel RR) is aligned with the visible area (main display window DD4), so that the variable display portions (left reel RL, middle reel RC, and At least part of the right reel RR) may be visible through the visible area (main display window DD4).

In the present invention, when the variable display portions (left reel RL, middle reel RC, and right reel RR) are viewed from a height assumed as the player's line of sight (assumed viewpoint position), the variable display is performed. The parts (left reel RL, middle reel RC, and right reel RR) are at a height that makes them easy to see (for example, when the player looks down at the reels, the reels are arranged slightly lower than the main display window). It is possible to design the height of the placement member (reel adapter 6000) such that the reels are positioned slightly higher than the main display window when the player looks up at the reels. In addition, in the present invention, by interposing the mounting member (reel adapter 6000), the variable display unit (reel unit RU) is not only positioned upward (raised upward), but also as a result of raising (raised (compared to before), the variable display unit (reel unit RU) may be positioned obliquely upward. That is, the mounting surface of the mounting member (reel adapter 6000) has a structure for tilting the variable display unit (reel unit RU), and the variable display unit (reel unit RU) is mounted on the mounting surface. When placed, the variable display parts (left reel RL, middle reel RC, and right reel RR) are at an angle that makes it easier for the player to see them (for example, the reels are slightly tilted toward the player's assumed viewpoint position). It may be configured such that it is arranged such that it is tilted. For example, an inclined portion may be provided on the top surface of the mounting member (reel adapter 6000) (the top surface of the mounting member may be configured to have an inclination). In this case, the visible area (main display window DD4) may also be arranged in an inclined state. For example, the upper surface of the mounting member (reel adapter 6000) may be configured to have an inclination substantially perpendicular to the inclination of the visible area (main display window DD4).

(D-1') The gaming machine of (D-1),
The mounting member includes a first position defining portion (upper protruding portion 6011 and upper protruding portion 6021) and a second position defining portion (lower protruding portion 6012 and lower protruding portion 6022),
The variable display unit includes a third position regulating portion (right rear projection R21R and left rear projection R21L),
The installation portion includes a fourth position regulating portion (a right-side opening-equipped standing portion 4032 and a left-side opening-equipped standing portion 4052),
The first position defining section and the third position defining section define relative positions between the mounting member and the variable display unit within a predetermined range,
The second position regulating section and the fourth position regulating section define a relative position between the placement member and the installation section within a predetermined range,
When the variable display unit is installed on the installation section without the placement member, the third position regulating section and the fourth position regulating section are positioned relative to each other between the variable display unit and the installation section. It is possible to define a specific position within a predetermined range,
It is characterized by

According to the gaming machine 1 according to the seventh embodiment, the mounting member (reel adapter 6000) includes the first position defining portion (upper protrusion 6011 and upper protrusion 6021) and the second position defining portion (lower protrusion). 6012 and lower projecting portion 6022), the variable display unit (reel unit RU) has a third position defining portion (right rear projecting portion R21R and left rear projecting portion R21L), and the installation portion (middle board 4000) has , and a fourth position regulating portion (right side opening-equipped standing portion 4032 and left side opening-equipped standing portion 4052). The first position regulating portion (upper projection 6011 and upper projection 6021) and the third position regulating portion (right rear projection R21R and left rear projection R21L) are formed by a mounting member (reel adapter 6000) and a variable display unit ( The position relative to the reel unit RU) is defined within a predetermined range, and the second position defining portion (lower protruding portion 6012 and lower protruding portion 6022) and the fourth position defining portion (upright with right opening) are provided. The portion 4032 and the standing portion 4052 with the left opening define the relative positions of the mounting member (reel adapter 6000) and the mounting portion (middle board 4000) within a predetermined range. As a result, the mounting member (reel adapter 6000) is mounted using the first position defining portion (upper protrusion 6011 and upper protrusion 6021) and the third position defining portion (right rear protrusion R21R and left rear protrusion R21L). and the variable display unit (reel unit RU). Using the installation portion 4032 and the standing installation portion 4052 with the left opening, the mounting member (reel adapter 6000) and the installation portion (middle board 4000) can be aligned. Here, if the variable display unit (reel unit RU) is installed on the installation portion (middle board 4000) without interposing the mounting member (reel adapter 6000), the third position regulating portion (right rear projecting portion R21R and left rear projecting portion R21L) and the fourth position regulating portion (right-side opening-equipped standing portion 4032 and left-side opening-equipped standing portion 4052) are connected to the variable display unit (reel unit RU) and the installation portion (middle board 4000). It is possible to define the relative position with the within a predetermined range. As a result, in this case, the third position regulating portion (the right rear projection R21R and the left rear projection R21L) and the fourth position regulating portion (the right opening-equipped standing portion 4032 and the left opening-equipped standing portion 4052) are can be used to align the variable display unit (reel unit RU) and the installation portion (middle board 4000). Therefore, the variable display unit (reel unit RU) can be placed on the installation portion (middle board 4000) via the mounting member (reel adapter 6000), while the variable display unit (reel unit RU) can be placed on the mounting portion (middle board 4000) via the mounting member (reel adapter 6000). It is also possible to arrange directly on the installation section (middle board 4000) without installing. Therefore, regardless of the position change (with or without the mounting member (reel adapter 6000)) of the variable display portions (left reel RL, middle reel RC, and right reel RR), the common variable display unit (reel unit RU) and It is possible to use the installation part (middle board 4000), and it is possible to more easily change the position of the variable display part (left reel RL, middle reel RC, and right reel RR), and further reduce the cost. You can try to go down.

(D-2) a variable display unit (reel unit RU) having a variable display section (left reel RL, middle reel RC, and right reel RR) capable of variably displaying a plurality of pieces of identification information;
A viewable area (main display window DD4) that allows a player to view the variable display of the variable display unit;
an installation portion (middle board 4000) arranged below the visible area by a predetermined distance;
an intervening member (reel adapter 6000) arranged between the variable display unit and the installation portion,
The intervening member has a height corresponding to the predetermined distance,
The intervening member is installed in the installation portion, and the variable display unit is arranged on the intervening member,
The intervening member has recesses (upper left recess 6030L, middle upper recess 6030C, and upper right recess 6030R) on its upper surface, and ribs (left and right ribs 6032a and front and rear ribs 6032b) on its bottom surface. The length of the provided rib is shorter than the length of the rib provided on the back side of the region where the recess is not formed,
A gaming machine characterized by:

According to the gaming machine 1 according to the seventh embodiment, the variable display section (left reel RL, middle reel RC, and right reel RR) can be displayed by the player through the visible area (main display window DD4). The installation portion (middle board 4000) is arranged below the visible area (main display window DD4) by a predetermined distance. An intervening member (reel adapter 6000) is installed on the installation portion (middle board 4000), and the variable display unit (reel unit RU) is arranged on the intervening member (reel adapter 6000). Here, since the intervening member (reel adapter 6000) has a height corresponding to the predetermined distance, the variable display unit (reel unit RU) (variable display section (left reel RL, middle reel RC, and The arrangement position of the right reel RR)) can be made to correspond to the height of the visible area (main display window DD4). Therefore, as a result of using the intervening member (reel adapter 6000), it is possible to create a situation in which the player can easily view the variable display of the variable display portions (left reel RL, middle reel RC, and right reel RR). It is possible to change the positions of the variable display portions (the left reel RL, the middle reel RC, and the right reel RR) easily and at low cost. Further, according to the gaming machine 1 according to the seventh embodiment, the intervening member (reel adapter 6000) has recesses (upper left recess 6030L, middle upper recess 6030C, and upper right recess 6030R) on the upper surface, and the bottom surface ribs (left and right ribs 6032a and front and rear ribs 6032b) provided on the back side of the recesses (upper left recess 6030L, middle upper recess 6030C, and upper right recess 6030R) (left and right ribs 6032a and front and rear ribs 6032b). ) is the length of the ribs (left and right ribs 6032a and front and rear ribs 6032b) provided on the back side of the region where the recesses (upper left recess 6030L, middle upper recess 6030C, and right upper recess 6030R) are not formed. shorter than it is long. In this regard, the variable display unit (reel unit RU) is arranged on the intervening member (reel adapter 6000), and the intervening member (reel adapter 6000) receives a corresponding load accompanying the variable display unit (reel unit RU). However, the inventor of the present invention forms the recesses (upper left recess 6030L, middle upper recess 6030C, and upper right recess 6030R) and ribs (left and right ribs 6032a and front and rear ribs 6032b) in this manner, It has been found that sufficient strength can be obtained to withstand the load. In addition, the inventors of the present invention differed in the length of the ribs (the left and right ribs 6032a and the front and rear ribs 6032b) in this manner, so that the intervening member (reel adapter 6000) can be was found to be easier to remove from the mold. As a result, the strength of the intervening member (reel adapter 6000) can be improved while the intervening member (reel adapter 6000) is efficiently molded.

(D-2') The gaming machine of (D-2),
The intervening member includes a first position defining portion (upper protruding portion 6011 and upper protruding portion 6021) and a second position defining portion (lower protruding portion 6012 and lower protruding portion 6022),
The variable display unit includes a third position regulating portion (right rear projection R21R and left rear projection R21L),
The installation portion includes a fourth position regulating portion (a right-side opening-equipped standing portion 4032 and a left-side opening-equipped standing portion 4052),
one of the first position defining portion and the third position defining portion is insertable into the other;
one of the second position defining portion and the fourth position defining portion is insertable into the other;
When the variable display unit is installed on the installation portion without the intervention member, either one of the third position defining portion and the fourth position defining portion can be inserted into the other. ,
It is characterized by

According to the gaming machine 1 according to the seventh embodiment, the intervening member (reel adapter 6000) includes the first position defining portion (upper protruding portion 6011 and upper protruding portion 6021) and the second position defining portion (lower protruding portion 6012). and lower projecting portion 6022), the variable display unit (reel unit RU) includes a third position defining portion (right rear projecting portion R21R and left rear projecting portion R21L), and the installation portion (middle board 4000) includes: It is provided with a fourth position regulating portion (a right opening erected portion 4032 and a left opening erected portion 4052). One of the first position defining portion (upper protrusion 6011 and upper protrusion 6021) and the third position defining portion (right rear protrusion R21R and left rear protrusion R21L) is insertable into the other, Any one of the second position regulating portion (lower protruding portion 6012 and lower protruding portion 6022) and the fourth position regulating portion (right opening with standing portion 4032 and left opening with standing portion 4052) can be inserted into As a result, using the first position defining portion (upper protruding portion 6011 and upper protruding portion 6021) and the third position defining portion (right rear protruding portion R21R and left rear protruding portion R21L) (by inserting one into the other) ), the intermediate member (reel adapter 6000) and the variable display unit (reel unit RU) can be aligned, and the second position defining portion (lower projecting portion 6012 and lower projecting portion 6022) and the second Using the 4-position regulating portions (upright portion with right opening 4032 and upright portion with left opening 4052) (by inserting one into the other), the intervening member (reel adapter 6000) and the installation portion (middle board 4000) are separated. can be aligned with the Here, if the variable display unit (reel unit RU) is installed on the installation portion (middle board 4000) without an intermediate member (reel adapter 6000), the third position defining portion (right rear projecting portion R21R and left rear projecting portion R21L) and the fourth position regulating portion (right opening-equipped erect portion 4032 and left opening-equipped erect portion 4052) can be inserted into the other. As a result, in this case, the third position regulating portion (the right rear projection R21R and the left rear projection R21L) and the fourth position regulating portion (the right opening-equipped standing portion 4032 and the left opening-equipped standing portion 4052) are By using (by inserting one into the other), it is possible to align the variable display unit (reel unit RU) and the installation portion (middle board 4000). Therefore, the variable display unit (reel unit RU) can be placed on the installation portion (middle board 4000) via an intervening member (reel adapter 6000), while the variable display unit (reel unit RU) can be placed on the installation portion (middle board 4000) without intervening an intervening member (reel adapter 6000). It is also possible to arrange directly on the installation section (middle board 4000). Therefore, the common variable display unit (reel unit RU) and the installation (middle board 4000) can be used, and the positions of the variable display portions (left reel RL, middle reel RC, and right reel RR) can be changed more easily, and the cost can be further reduced. can be achieved.

In the seventh embodiment, the third position defining portion (the right rear protrusion R21R and the left rear protrusion R21L) can be inserted into the first position defining portion (the upper protrusion 6011 and the upper protrusion 6021), and the second position The defining portions (lower protruding portion 6012 and lower protruding portion 6022) can be inserted into the fourth position defining portion (upright portion with right opening 4032 and upright portion with left opening 4052), and the third position defining portion ( The right rear protrusion R21R and the left rear protrusion R21L) have been described as being insertable into the fourth position regulating section (the right opening-equipped standing portion 4032 and the left opening-equipped standing portion 4052). In the present invention, the first position defining portion (structure protruding in a predetermined direction) may be insertable into the third position defining portion (opening or recess), or the fourth position defining portion (structure protruding in a predetermined direction) may be inserted into the third position defining portion (opening or recess). structure) can be inserted into the second position-defining portion (opening or recess), or the fourth position-defining portion (structure protruding in a predetermined direction) can be inserted into the third position-defining portion (opening or recess). It may be insertable.

(D-3) A plurality of variable display sections (left reel RL, middle reel RC, and right reel RR) capable of variably displaying a plurality of pieces of identification information, and a plurality of drive sections for driving each of the variable display sections. a variable display unit (reel unit RU) having (a motor drive section) and a plurality of support members (a left motor frame R50L, a middle motor frame R50C, and a right motor frame R50R) that support each of the drive sections;
an installation portion (middle board 4000) arranged below the variable display unit;
an intervening member (reel adapter 6000) arranged between the variable display unit and the installation portion,
The intervening member is installed on the installation portion, and the variable display unit is arranged on the intervening member,
At the top of the intervening member, there are three recesses in the left-right direction: a first recess (upper left recess 6030L), a second recess (middle upper recess 6030C), and a third recess (upper right recess 6030R). are formed side by side,
the second recess between the first recess and the second recess, between the second recess and the third recess, and in the third recess in the upper portion of the intervening member On the side opposite to the recessed portion non-formed regions (non-recessed region 6001b, non-recessed region 6001c, and non-recessed region 6001d) where the recesses are not formed are formed,
Each of the plurality of variable display portions is positioned above the recess, and each of the plurality of support members is positioned above the non-recess formation region.
A gaming machine characterized by:

According to the gaming machine 1 according to the seventh embodiment, the installation section (middle board 4000) is arranged below the variable display unit (reel unit RU), and the intervening member (reel adapter 6000) is installed, and the variable display unit (reel unit RU) is arranged on the intermediate member (reel adapter 6000). As a result, the variable display unit (reel unit RU) is positioned higher by the height of the intervening member (reel adapter 6000) than when the intervening member (reel adapter 6000) is not installed. That is, by interposing an intervening member (reel adapter 6000) between the installation portion (middle board 4000) and the variable display unit (reel unit RU), the variable display portions (left reel RL, middle reel RC, and right (Reel RR) can be obtained, and this makes it possible to easily change the positions of the variable display portions (the left reel RL, the middle reel RC, and the right reel RR) at a low cost. can. Further, according to the gaming machine 1 according to the seventh embodiment, the upper part of the intervening member (reel adapter 6000) has a first concave portion (left upper concave portion 6030L), a second concave portion (middle upper concave portion 6030C), and , and a third recess (upper right surface recess 6030R) are formed so as to be aligned in the left-right direction. Thereby, it is possible to provide a wall portion in the height direction of the intervening member (reel adapter 6000), thereby improving the strength of the intervening member (reel adapter 6000). Furthermore, according to the gaming machine 1 according to the seventh embodiment, in the upper part of the intervening member (reel adapter 6000), between the first recess (upper left recess 6030L) and the second recess (middle upper recess 6030C) , between the second recess (middle upper surface recess 6030C) and the third recess (upper right surface recess 6030R), and between the second recess (middle upper surface recess 6030C) in the third recess (upper right surface recess 6030R) On the opposite sides of the two, recess non-formation regions (non-recess formation region 6001b, non-recess formation region 6001c, and non-recess formation region 6001d) where no recess is formed are formed. Here, the variable display unit (reel unit RU) includes a plurality of variable display portions (left reel RL, middle reel RC, and right reel RR) and each variable display portion (left reel RL, middle reel RC, and A plurality of drive units (motor drive units) for driving the right reel RR), and a plurality of support members (a left motor frame R50L, a middle motor frame R50C, and a right motor frame R50R), and a plurality of variable display portions (left reel RL, middle reel RC, and right reel RR) are respectively provided with recesses (upper left surface recess 6030L, middle upper surface recess 6030C, and right The plurality of support members (the left motor frame R50L, the middle motor frame R50C, and the right motor frame R50R) are positioned above the upper surface recessed portion 6030R), and each of the plurality of support members (the left motor frame R50L, the middle motor frame R50C, and the right motor frame R50R) has a recessed portion non-formed region (a recessed portion non-formed region 6001b, a recessed portion non-formed region 6001b, It is located above the region 6001c and the non-recessed region 6001d). The support members (left motor frame R50L, middle motor frame R50C, and right motor frame R50R) support the drive section (motor drive section). , middle motor frame R50C, and right motor frame R50R), a corresponding load due to the drive unit (motor drive unit) is generated, but the supporting members (left motor frame R50L, middle motor frame R50C , and the right motor frame R50R) above the non-recessed regions (the non-recessed region 6001b, the non-recessed region 6001c, and the non-recessed region 6001d). It is possible to prevent As a result, the load can be distributed, and the support members (left motor frame R50L, middle motor frame R50C, and right motor frame R50R) (drive section (motor drive section)) can be supported in a well-balanced manner.

(D-4) A variable display portion (left reel RL, middle reel RC, and right reel RR) capable of variably displaying a plurality of pieces of identification information; a variable display unit (reel unit RU) having a motor frame R50C and a right motor frame R50R) and a housing portion (reel frame R10) housing the variable display portion and the support member;
an installation portion (middle board 4000) arranged below the variable display unit;
an intervening member (reel adapter 6000) arranged between the variable display unit and the installation portion,
The intervening member is installed on the installation portion, and the variable display unit is arranged on the intervening member,
A plurality of recesses (left front upper recess 6060L, middle front upper recess 6060C, and right front upper recess 6060R) are formed on the front side of the intervening member,
The support member is attached to the accommodating portion using an attachment member (fastening member R100L, 100C, 100R),
Mounting holes (mounting hole R54 and mounting hole R14) through which at least part of the mounting member is inserted are formed in the support member and the housing portion, respectively,
A part of the mounting member inserted through the mounting hole is arranged in the recess,
A gaming machine characterized by:

According to the gaming machine 1 according to the seventh embodiment, the installation section (middle board 4000) is arranged below the variable display unit (reel unit RU), and the intervening member (reel adapter 6000) is installed, and the variable display unit (reel unit RU) is arranged on the intermediate member (reel adapter 6000). As a result, the variable display unit (reel unit RU) is positioned higher by the height of the intervening member (reel adapter 6000) than when the intervening member (reel adapter 6000) is not installed. That is, by interposing an intervening member (reel adapter 6000) between the installation portion (middle board 4000) and the variable display unit (reel unit RU), the variable display portions (left reel RL, middle reel RC, and right (Reel RR) can be obtained, and this makes it possible to easily change the positions of the variable display portions (the left reel RL, the middle reel RC, and the right reel RR) at a low cost. can. Further, according to the gaming machine 1 according to the seventh embodiment, the variable display unit (reel unit RU) includes a support member (left motor frame R50L, middle motor frame R50C, and right motor frame R50R), variable display units (left reel RL, middle reel RC, and right reel RR), and supporting members (left motor frame R50L, middle motor frame R50C, and a housing portion (reel frame R10) housing the right motor frame R50R), and the support members (the left motor frame R50L, the middle motor frame R50C, and the right motor frame R50R) are provided with the support members ( left motor frame R50L, middle motor frame R50C, and right motor frame R50R) and mounting holes (mounting holes R54 and mounting holes R14) respectively formed in the accommodation portion (reel frame R10). It is attached to the housing portion (reel frame R10) using attachment members (fastening members R100L, 100C, 100R). As a result, when the support members (left motor frame R50L, middle motor frame R50C, and right motor frame R50R) are attached to the accommodation portion (reel frame R10), the attachment holes (attachment hole R54 and attachment hole R14) A part of the mounting member (fastening member R100L, 100C, 100R) that has been inserted protrudes in the opposite direction to the mounting direction. Here, if the front side of the intervening member (reel adapter 6000) is not formed with recesses at positions corresponding to the mounting holes (mounting hole R54 and mounting hole R14), the projecting mounting member In order to secure the arrangement space for (fastening members R100L, 100C, 100R), an intervening member (reel adapter 6000) and a variable display unit (reel unit RU) (support members (left motor frame R50L, middle motor frame R50C, and , right motor frame R50R) or housing portion (reel frame R10)). However, according to the gaming machine 1 according to the seventh embodiment, on the front side of the intervening member (reel adapter 6000), there are a plurality of recesses (the left front upper recess 6060L, the middle front upper recess 6060C, and the right front upper recess). 6060R) is formed, and a part of the mounting member (fastening member R100L, 100C, 100R) inserted through the mounting hole (mounting hole R54 and mounting hole R14) is the recess (left front upper recess 6060L , middle front upper recess 6060C, and right front upper recess 6060R). Therefore, the intervening member (reel adapter 6000) and the variable display unit (reel unit RU) (supporting member (left motor frame R50L, middle motor frame R50C, and right motor frame R50R) or housing portion (reel frame R10)) Even if they are placed in contact with each other, the recesses (left front upper recess 6060L, middle front upper recess 6060C, and right front upper recess 6060R) are attached to the mounting members (fastening members R100L, 100C, 100R). Since it can be used as an arrangement space, arrangement in such a contact state can be realized. As a result, it is possible to fix the intervening member (reel adapter 6000) and the variable display unit (reel unit RU) while they are in contact with each other. RU) can be increased in mounting strength.

In the seventh embodiment, it has been described that Niflach (registered trademark) is used as the mounting members (fastening members R100L, 100C, 100R). In the present invention, conventionally well-known mounting members such as (button type) panel fasteners can be appropriately employed in addition to general screws.

In the seventh embodiment, the number of reels adopted as the variable display portion (the left reel RL, the middle reel RC, and the right reel RR) is three. However, in the present invention, the number of reels is not limited to this, and may be one, two, or four or more. Further, the mounting member (intervening member: reel adapter 6000) can be provided with recesses (upper surface recesses 6030) in a number corresponding to the number of reels (the same number as the number of reels).

In addition, the mounting member (intervening member: reel adapter 6000) in the present invention is used when adding one reel (for example, a housing on the premise that three reels are arranged, and four reels are installed. It may also be used when modifying the mounted housing). In such a case, although the original housing has an installation portion for installing three reels, there is no installation portion for installing one additional reel, so the additional In some cases, it may be necessary to provide an installation portion for installing one reel to be added, or it may be necessary to adjust the height of one additional reel. In such a case, a mounting member (intervening member: reel adapter 6000) may be used in the placement portion of the reel to be added.

Further, in the seventh embodiment, the variable display unit (reel unit RU) is provided with the main reel (variable display portion for game progress and prize winning), and the height of the main reel is adjusted. However, in the present invention, in order to adjust the height of the performance reel (variable display device for performance, sub-reel) that does not affect the winning, the mounting member (intervening member: reel adapter 6000) is used as in the seventh embodiment. ) or the like may be used. In addition, the mechanism may be employed for a reel for effect (reel for effect such as suggesting degree of expectation for a game) in a pachinko game machine.

Further, in the seventh embodiment, the variable display unit (reel unit RU) is mounted on the mounting member (intervening member: reel adapter 6000). However, in the present invention, game machine components other than the variable display unit (reel unit RU) may be placed on a pedestal mechanism similar to the placement member (intervening member: reel adapter 6000). For example, a mounting member for height adjustment (intervening member: reel adapter 6000) having the same function as in the seventh embodiment can be used so that the movable decorative unit for presentation and the like can be easily seen by the player. may be The movable decorative portion may move only inside the game machine, or may move from inside the game machine to outside (above or in front of the game machine). In this way, by adjusting the height using the mounting member (intervening member: reel adapter 6000) for the placement of various game machine components, the housing of the pachislot game machine and the game machine frame (outer frame) of the pachinko game machine can be adjusted. Since there is no need to make a drastic design change of the frame, main body frame), it is possible to reduce costs when manufacturing a new game machine.

Further, in the seventh embodiment, the placement member (intervening member: reel adapter 6000) is arranged on the installation portion (middle board 4000). The installation portion in the present invention is not limited to the middle board, and any member capable of installing the installation member (intervening member: reel adapter 6000) can be appropriately employed. For example, the bottom plate of the housing (cabinet) is adopted as the installation portion, the mounting member (intervening member: reel adapter 6000) is installed on the bottom plate, and the mounting member (intervening member: reel adapter 6000) is placed on the A configuration in which a variable display unit (reel unit RU) is placed may be employed. Further, in the present invention, when the mounting member (intervening member: reel adapter 6000) is installed on a member other than the middle board, the middle board may not be provided in the housing (cabinet). For example, in a managed gaming machine that does not use game media such as medals and allows games to be played only using gaming values managed by electronic data, parts such as hoppers are not required. Instead, the mounting member (intervening member: reel adapter 6000) may be installed on the bottom plate of the housing.

In the seventh embodiment, the installation portion (middle board 4000) is attached to the rear wall G3 of the cabinet G and fixed to the right side wall G2R and left side wall G2L. In the present invention, the installation portion (middle board 4000) may be fixed to any of the plates (back plate, left and right plates, bottom plate, etc.) constituting the housing (cabinet). It may be attached only to the right side wall G2R and the left side wall G2L, or may be attached to only one of the right side wall G2R and the left side wall G2L.

Another example of the installation part in the present invention is a middle door. The middle door is a small door (a door placed between the front door and the cabinet) located behind the front door (front door). A unit (reel unit RU) is mounted. In this example, a mounting member (intervening member: reel adapter 6000) is mounted on an installation portion provided on the middle door, and a variable display unit (reel unit RU) is mounted on the mounting member (intervening member: reel adapter 6000). may be placed.

[Eighth Embodiment]
The first to seventh embodiments have been described above. The eighth embodiment will be described below. The basic configuration of the gaming machine 1 according to the eighth embodiment is the same as the gaming machine 1 according to the first to seventh embodiments. In the following description, the same components as those of the gaming machine 1 according to the first to seventh embodiments are denoted by the same reference numerals. In addition, descriptions of the parts that the descriptions of the first to seventh embodiments apply to the eighth embodiment will be omitted.

<Waist panel 7000>
FIG. 187 is a front view of the waist panel; FIG. 188 is a front perspective view of the waist panel; FIG. 189 is a rear perspective view of the waist panel; FIG. 190 is an exploded front perspective view of the waist panel; FIG. 191 is an exploded rear perspective view of the waist panel;

In the first embodiment, the lower door mechanism DD (see FIG. 1) is provided with the waist panel DD18 (see FIG. 3). On the other hand, in the eighth embodiment, the waist panel 7000 shown in FIG. 187 is provided in the area below the center of the front door.

As shown in FIGS. 187-191, the waist panel 7000 includes a lower panel film 7100, a lower panel base 7200, a lower panel frame 7300 (lower right panel frame 7300R and lower left panel frame 7300L), and a lower panel back 7400. , bottom panel bottom 7500 , bottom panel right 7600 , and bottom panel left 7700 .

The lower panel base 7200 is arranged on the front side of the lower panel film 7100, the lower panel frame 7300 is arranged on the front side of the lower panel base 7200, and the lower panel back 7400 is arranged on the rear side of the lower panel film 7100. , the bottom panel bottom 7500 is arranged on the back side of the bottom portion of the bottom panel back 7400 . A lower right panel 7600 and a lower left panel 7700 also form the right and left portions (right side wall and left side wall) of the waist panel 7000, respectively. Although not shown, on the back side of the lower panel back 7400 and above the lower panel bottom 7500, a light emitting mechanism in which a plurality of LEDs are installed on an LED substrate may be arranged.

The lower panel base 7200 is made of a translucent material (for example, acrylic resin), and is decorated with a three-dimensional shape (not shown) (for example, a character shape representing a logo or the like depending on the model). there is The lower panel film 7100 is formed of a translucent material (for example, acrylic resin), and is provided with a pattern or picture (for example, a pattern or picture corresponding to the decoration applied to the lower panel base 7200). there is The lower panel film 7100 can be constructed by printing light-shielding ink on a pattern printing sheet.

Similar to the lower panel film 7100 and lower panel base 7200, the lower panel back 7400, lower panel bottom 7500, lower panel right 7600, and lower panel left 7700 are also translucent. On the other hand, the lower panel frame 7300 does not have translucency, and the portion of the lower panel film 7100 and the lower panel base 7200 that overlaps the lower panel frame 7300 when viewed from the front is the lower panel frame 7300. Covered and invisible. In FIG. 187, the lower panel frame 7300 is shown in black. The lower panel frame 7300 is decorated with a three-dimensional decoration having unevenness.

<Lower panel film 7100>
FIG. 192 is a perspective view of the lower panel film seen from slightly above. Figure 193 is a cross-sectional view of the lower panel film. 194 is a schematic diagram of a cut surface of the lower panel film shown in FIG. 193. FIG. 195 is a perspective view showing a state in which a lower panel frame is arranged on the front side of the lower panel film shown in FIG. 192. FIG.

As shown in FIGS. 192-194, the lower panel film 7100 has a curved shape of a flexible flat sheet. FIG. 193 shows a state in which the lower panel film 7100 is cut in a horizontal plane, and the cut plane is shown thick for easy understanding.

Specifically, the lower panel film 7100 has a central portion 7101 extending to the left and right, and a right curved portion 7102 formed to have a curved shape from the right end (point A shown in FIG. 193) of the central portion 7101 to the rear. , the left curved portion 7103 formed in a curved shape from the left end (point B shown in FIG. 193) of the central portion 7101 toward the rear, and the right curved portion 7102 (rear end: point C shown in FIG. 193). It has a right rear portion 7104 extending rearward and a left rear portion 7105 extending rearward from the left end (rear end: point D shown in FIG. 193) of the left curved portion 7103 .

The lower panel film 7100 has a substantially symmetrical shape, except that a notch 7102a is formed in the upper portion of the right curved portion 7102. As shown in FIG. Also, the central portion 7101, the right curved portion 7102, and the left curved portion 7103 are each curved such that the center of curvature is on the back side. The central portion 7101 is only slightly curved, and the curvatures of the right curved portion 7102 and the left curved portion 7103 are considerably larger than the curvature of the central portion 7101 . For example, the radius of curvature of the right curved portion 7102 and the left curved portion 7103 is 1/5 or less (or 1/10 or less, 1/20 or less, 1/50 or less, 1/100 or less, etc.) of the curvature radius of the central portion 7101. ).

Curvature is a quantity that represents the degree of curvature of a curve or curved surface, and the degree of local curvature can be approximated to a circle, and the radius of the approximated circle is called the radius of curvature. For example, the curvature of a circumference of radius r is 1/r and the radius of curvature is r. The steeper the curve, the greater the curvature and the smaller the radius of curvature. If the curve is an arc, the radius of curvature can be represented by the radius of the arc. On the other hand, if the curve is different from the arc, the radius of curvature can be represented by a predetermined function representing the degree of curvature of the curve. can be done.

The curvature at any position on the right curved portion 7102 and any position on the left curved portion 7103 is greater than the curvature at any position on the central portion 7101 . Correspondingly, the horizontal length of the right curved portion 7102 and the horizontal length of the left curved portion 7103 (r ₂ shown in FIG. 194(a)) are the same as the horizontal length of the central portion 7101. (r ₁ shown in FIG. 194(a)), whereas the length in the front-rear direction at the right curved portion 7102 and the length in the front-rear direction at the left curved portion 7103 (r ₄ shown in FIG. 194(a)) ) is longer than the longitudinal length of the central portion 7101 (r ₃ shown in FIG. 194(a)).

In addition, a straight line (L ₂ (Y) shown in FIG. 194(b)) perpendicular to a tangent line (L ₁ (Y) shown in FIG. 194(b)) at an arbitrary point Y on the right curved portion 7102 and _The angle (β shown in FIG. 194(b)) formed by the direction straight line (L shown in FIG. 194(b)) is the tangent line (L1 (X)) perpendicular to the straight line (L ₂ (X) shown in FIG. 194 (b)) and the straight line (L shown in FIG. 194 (b)) in the front-rear direction (L shown in FIG. 194 (b)) It is larger than α) shown.

Similarly, although not shown, the angle formed by a straight line perpendicular to the tangent line at an arbitrary point on the left curved portion 7103 and a straight line in the front-rear direction (L shown in FIG. 194(b)) is A straight line (L 2 (X) shown in FIG. 194(b)) perpendicular to the tangent line (L ₁ (X) shown in FIG. 194(b)) at an arbitrary point X and a straight line (L ₂ (X) shown in FIG. 194(b)) in the front-back direction ( ) is larger than the angle (α shown in FIG. 194(b)) with L) shown in FIG.

FIG. 195 shows the lower panel film 7100 and the lower panel frame 7300 (the lower right panel frame 7300R and the lower left panel frame 7300L) with the waist panel 7000 assembled while maintaining their relative positional relationship. , and illustration of other components is omitted. For clarity, the lower right panel frame 7300R and the lower left panel frame 7300L are shown in black.

As shown in FIG. 195, the lower right panel frame 7300R and the lower left panel frame 7300L are arranged at positions that partially overlap the right curved portion 7102 and the left curved portion 7103 of the lower panel film 7100 in front view. there is As a result, the right curved portion 7102 and the left curved portion 7103 are partially hidden.

<Lower panel base 7200>
FIG. 196 is a perspective view of the lower panel base viewed from the front and slightly above. FIG. 197 is a perspective view of the lower panel base seen obliquely from below. FIG. 198 is a perspective view of the lower panel base viewed from the rear and slightly above. FIG. 199 is a partially enlarged perspective view of the lower panel base viewed from the rear and slightly below.

As shown in FIGS. 196 to 198, the lower panel base 7200 includes a main body portion 7210 having a curved shape corresponding to the lower panel film 7100 and a lower side portion 7220 formed by bending the lower end of the main body portion 7210 backward. and have

The lower side portion 7220 includes a first inclined portion 7221 formed continuously obliquely rearward from the lower end of the main body portion 7210, and a first inclined portion continuous obliquely rearward from the rear end of the first inclined portion 7221. It has a second inclined portion 7222 formed to have a gentler inclination than 7221 and a horizontal portion 7223 continuously formed rearward from the rear end of the second inclined portion 7222 . The horizontal portion 7223 is arranged substantially horizontally. For clarity, in FIG. 197, the first inclined portion 7221 is shaded, the second inclined portion 7222 is hatched, and the horizontal portion 7223 is black.

The main body portion 7210 includes a central portion 7211 that extends left and right, a right curved portion 7212 that is curved from the right end of the central portion 7211 to the rear, and a curved portion that is curved from the left end of the central portion 7211 to the rear. a left curved portion 7213 formed in the above manner, a right rear portion 7214 extending rearward from the right end of the right curved portion 7212, and a left rear portion 7215 extending rearward from the left end of the left curved portion 7213; ing.

In the assembled state of the waist panel 7000, the central portion 7211, the right curved portion 7212, the left curved portion 7213, the right rear portion 7214, and the left rear portion 7215 correspond to the central portion 7101, the right curved portion of the lower panel film 7100, respectively. It is arranged so as to face (overlap in front view) the portion 7102, the left curved portion 7103, the right rear portion 7104, and the left rear portion 7105 (see FIG. 192).

The right curved portion 7212 has three screw holes 7230 (screw holes 7230a, 7230b, 7230c) and one temporary fixing hole 7235 formed therein. The left curved portion 7213 has three screw holes 7240 (screw holes 7240a, 7240b, 7240c) and one temporary fixing hole 7245 formed therein. These screw holes 7230 and 7240 and the temporary fixing holes 7235 and 7245 are formed as through holes penetrating in the front-rear direction.

As shown in FIG. 199, a peripheral wall portion 7231 is formed around the screw hole 7230 at a recessed position with respect to the rear surface 7216 of the body portion 7210 . In other words, the vicinity of the screw hole 7230 has a shape in which a circular recess 7232 recessed from the rear surface 7216 is formed, and an opening is formed by partially penetrating the recess 7232 . The opening corresponds to the screw hole 7230 , and the portion of the recess 7232 where the opening is not formed corresponds to the peripheral wall portion 7231 .

A peripheral edge wall portion 7236 is formed around the temporary fixing hole 7235 at a recessed position with respect to the back surface 7216 of the main body portion 7210 . In other words, in the vicinity of the temporary fixing hole 7235, an elliptical recess 7237 recessed from the rear surface 7216 is formed, and an opening is formed by partially penetrating the recess 7237. there is The opening corresponds to the temporary fixing hole 7235 , and the portion of the recess 7237 where the opening is not formed corresponds to the peripheral wall portion 7236 .

As described above, the concave portion formed around the screw hole 7230 and around the temporary fixing hole 7235 is similar to that around the irradiation unit hooking screw hole B1010 and the lid fastening screw hole described in the sixth embodiment. The same explanation as that of the recess formed around B1002 (see FIG. 114) is valid. For clarity, in FIG. 199, the peripheral wall portion 7231 and the peripheral wall portion 7236 are hatched. Although not shown, recesses 7242 and 7247 are similarly formed around the screw hole 7240 and around the temporary fixing hole 7245, respectively.

The lower panel base 7200 also has an upper edge 7250 formed by slightly bending the upper end of the main body 7210 rearward. The upper edge portion 7250 has locking projections 7251 (right locking projection 7251R and left locking projection 7251L) formed by protruding rearward portions on the right and left sides of the center. is doing.

The right locking projection 7251R and the left locking projection 7251L are each formed in a rectangular shape with rounded corners and arranged substantially horizontally. In addition, the right locking protrusion 7251R and the left locking protrusion 7251L are provided with locking holes 7252 (right locking hole 7252R and left locking hole 7252R and left locking hole 7252R and left locking protrusion 7251L) as rectangular through-holes penetrating in the vertical direction, respectively. 7252L) are formed.

In addition, the lower panel base 7200 has a horizontal portion 7217 formed continuously rearward from the lower end of the central portion 7211 (back surface 7216). The horizontal portion 7217 is arranged substantially horizontally. For clarity, the horizontal portion 7217 is shaded in FIG. 198 .

The lower side portion 7220 has a right side portion 7225 formed by bending the right end slightly upward and outward, and a left side portion 7226 formed by bending the left end upward and outward. A boss portion 7233 is formed on the front portion of the right side portion 7225 (below the right curved portion 7212), and a boss portion 7243 is formed on the front portion of the left side portion 7226 (below the left curved portion 7213).

The right rear portion 7214 has an upper right edge 7214a and a lower right edge 7214b formed by bending the rear end slightly to the right. The upper right edge portion 7214a and the lower right edge portion 7214b are separated vertically. The left rear portion 7215 has an upper left edge 7215a and a lower left edge 7215b formed by slightly bending the rear end to the left. The upper left edge portion 7215a and the lower left edge portion 7215b are separated vertically.

Screw holes 7234 ( Screw holes 7234a, 7234b, 7234c) are formed. Screw holes 7244 ( Screw holes 7244a, 7244b, 7244c) are formed.

At the rear end of the lower portion 7220, two engaging pieces 7260 are formed that protrude rearward and are bent downward. The waist panel 7000 is attached to the front door by locking the locking piece 7260 to the front door. A notch 7212 a is formed in the upper portion of the right curved portion 7212 . The notch 7212a has a shape similar to the notch 7102a (see FIG. 192) of the lower panel film 7100, and is arranged so as to overlap the notch 7102a.

<Lower panel back 7400>
FIG. 200 is a perspective view of the back of the lower panel viewed slightly from above. FIG. 201 is a rear perspective view of the lower panel film. FIG. 202 is a partially enlarged perspective view of the back of the lower panel viewed from the rear and slightly below.

As shown in FIG. 200, the lower panel back 7400 has a curved shape corresponding to the lower panel film 7100 . Specifically, the lower panel back 7400 includes a central portion 7401 extending to the left and right, a right curved portion 7402 formed in a curved shape from the right end of the central portion 7401 to the rear, and A left curved portion 7403 formed in a curved shape toward the right curved portion 7402, a right rear portion 7404 extending rearward from the right end of the right curved portion 7402, and a left rear portion 7405 extending rearward from the left end of the left curved portion 7403. and have

In the assembled state of the waist panel 7000, the central portion 7401, the right curved portion 7402, the left curved portion 7403, the right rear portion 7404, and the left rear portion 7405 correspond to the central portion 7101, the right curved portion of the lower panel film 7100, respectively. It is arranged so as to face (overlap in front view) the portion 7102, the left curved portion 7103, the right rear portion 7104, and the left rear portion 7105 (see FIG. 192).

Also, as shown in FIGS. 201 and 202, the bottom panel back 7400 has a top edge 7450 formed by slightly bending the top edge backward. The upper edge portion 7450 has locking projections 7451 (right locking projection 7451R and left locking projection 7451L) formed by protruding rearward portions on the right and left sides of the center. is doing.

The right locking protrusion 7451R and the left locking protrusion 7451L are each formed in a rectangular shape with rounded corners and are arranged substantially horizontally. Further, locking pieces 7452 (right locking piece 7452R and left locking piece 7452L) are formed on the right locking projection 7251R and the left locking projection 7251L, respectively. The right locking piece 7452R and the left locking piece 7452L are formed in a rectangular shape in a plan view as projections erected from the upper surfaces 7451a of the right locking projection 7451R and the left locking projection 7451L, respectively. ing.

In addition, the lower panel back 7400 includes a horizontal portion 7411 formed continuously from the lower end of the central portion 7401 (back surface 7410) toward the rear, and a vertical portion 7411 formed substantially perpendicular to the horizontal portion 7411 below the horizontal portion 7411. 7412 and . The horizontal portion 7411 is arranged substantially horizontally, and the vertical portion 7412 is arranged substantially vertically. For clarity, the horizontal portion 7411 is hatched in FIG. 201 .

A plurality of rear protruding portions 7413 are formed at approximately equal intervals on the back side of the vertical portion 7412 . The rear protruding portion 7413 is formed as a protrusion that protrudes rearward from the vertical portion 7412 and extends in the vertical direction. The rear edge of the horizontal portion 7411 and the rear protruding portion 7413 are formed continuously and positioned substantially on the same plane.

A notch 7402a is formed in the upper portion of the right curved portion 7402. As shown in FIG. The notch 7402a has a shape similar to the notch 7102a of the lower panel film 7100, and is arranged so as to overlap the notch 7102a.

<Lower panel frame 7300>
FIG. 203 is a front perspective view of the lower panel frame. Figure 204 is a rear view of the lower panel frame.

As shown in FIGS. 203 and 204, the lower panel frames 7300 (lower right panel frame 7300R and lower left panel frame 7300L) each have a columnar shape extending in the vertical direction.

Three screw fastening boss portions 7310 (screw fastening boss portions 7310a, 7310b, 7310c) and one temporary fixing boss portion 7315 are formed on the rear side of the lower right panel frame 7300R. . Three screw fastening boss portions 7320 (screw fastening boss portions 7320a, 7320b, 7320c) and one temporary fixing boss portion 7325 are formed on the rear side of the lower left panel frame 7300L.

A notch 7301 is formed in the upper portion of the lower right panel frame 7300R. The notch 7301 has a shape similar to the notch 7102a (see FIG. 192) of the lower panel film 7100, and is arranged so as to overlap the notch 7102a.

<Bottom panel bottom 7500>
FIG. 205 is a front perspective view of the bottom of the lower panel. FIG. 206 is a perspective view of the bottom of the lower panel viewed from the rear.

As shown in FIGS. 205 and 206, the lower panel bottom 7500 is formed as a member extending in the left-right direction, and includes a front side portion 7501 formed in a substantially vertical direction and a front side portion 7501 extending obliquely rearward from the upper end of the front side portion 7501. A first inclined portion 7502 continuously formed toward the rear end of the first inclined portion 7502, an upper portion 7503 continuously formed rearward from the rear end of the first inclined portion 7502 and substantially horizontally formed, and a lower end of the front side portion 7501 obliquely rearward. and a second inclined portion 7504 formed continuously from the rear end of the second inclined portion 7504 toward the obliquely rearward direction so as to have a gentler inclination than the second inclined portion 7504 . It has three sloped portions 7505 and a lower side portion 7506 that is continuous from the rear end of the third sloped portion 7505 toward the rear and is formed in a substantially horizontal direction.

For clarity, in FIG. 205, the front surface 7501a of the front side portion 7501 is hatched and the upper surface of the upper portion 7503 is shaded. In FIG. 206, the upper surface of the upper portion 7503 is hatched, the upper surface of the lower portion 7506 is hatched, and the rear surface 7501b (the surface opposite to the front surface 7501a) of the front side portion 7501 is shown in black.

A right side portion 7510 having an L shape in side view is formed at the right end of the lower panel bottom 7500 , and a left side portion 7520 having an inverted L shape in side view is formed at the left end of the bottom panel bottom 7500 . A right edge bent portion 7511, which is a portion of the right side portion 7510 that extends in the front-rear direction, has a shape that is formed by slightly bending the right end of the lower side portion 7506 to the right. Similarly, a left edge bent portion 7521, which is a portion of the left side portion 7520 that extends in the front-rear direction, has a shape that is formed by slightly bending the left end of the lower side portion 7506 to the left.

A screw hole 7512 is formed in the upper portion of the right side portion 7510 (near the right end of the upper portion 7503), and a screw hole 7522 is formed in the upper portion of the left side portion 7520 (near the left end of the upper portion 7503).

<Bottom panel right 7600 and bottom panel left 7700>
FIG. 207 is a perspective view of the lower right panel and the lower left panel as seen from the rear left side. FIG. 208 is a perspective view of the lower right panel and the lower left panel as seen from the rear right side.

As shown in FIGS. 207 and 208, the right lower panel 7600 includes a right side wall 7601 that constitutes the right side of the waist panel 7000, and triangular protrusions that protrude forward and left from the right side wall 7601. 7602 and . The lower left panel 7700 has a left side wall 7701 forming the left side portion of the waist panel 7000 and a triangular protrusion 7702 formed to protrude forward and right from the left side wall 7701 .

A boss portion 7610 is formed along the left edge of the inner surface (left surface) of the lower panel right 7600, and boss portions 7611 are formed on the upper and lower portions. A boss portion 7710 is formed along the right edge of the inner surface (right side surface) of the lower left panel 7700, and boss portions 7711 are formed at the upper and lower portions. Holes formed in boss portion 7611 and boss portion 7711 are threaded with screws for fastening waist panel 7000 to the front door.

<Assembly of Waist Panel 7000>
FIG. 209 is a front perspective view of the lower panel frame attached to the lower panel base. FIG. 210 is a rear perspective view of the lower panel frame attached to the lower panel base. 211 is a rear perspective view of a state in which the back of the lower panel is locked to the lower panel base and the lower panel frame in the state shown in FIG. 210; FIG. 212 is a cross-sectional view of the lower panel base and the back of the lower panel in the state shown in FIG. 211; FIG. 213 is a rear perspective view of the state shown in FIG. 211, in which the lower panel base, the lower panel frame, and the lower panel bottom are attached to the back side of the lower panel; FIG. 214 is a cross-sectional view of the lower panel base, lower panel back, and lower panel bottom in the state shown in FIG. 213. FIG.

The waist panel 7000 is assembled through the following steps (i) to (v).
(i) Attach the lower panel frame 7300 (lower right panel frame 7300R and lower left panel frame 7300L) to the lower panel base 7200;
(ii) placing the lower panel film 7100 on the rear side of the lower panel base 7200;
(iii) locking the bottom panel back 7400 to the bottom panel base 7200;
(iv) attach the bottom panel bottom 7500 to the bottom panel base 7200;
(v) Attach lower panel right 7600 and lower panel left 7700 to lower panel base 7200;

In the step (i) above, first, a hole formed in the temporary fixing boss portion 7315 of the lower right panel frame 7300R and a hole formed in the temporary fixing boss portion 7325 of the lower left panel frame 7300L (see FIG. 204). ), respectively, a temporary fixing member 7800 (see FIG. 210) is press-fitted. Then, the lower panel base 7200 is brought closer to the lower right panel frame 7300R and the lower left panel frame 7300L in which the temporary fixing members 7800 are press-fitted, and the temporary fixing holes 7235 and 7245 of the lower panel base 7200 ( 198), the temporary fixing member 7800 is press-fitted. As a result, the lower right panel frame 7300R and the lower left panel frame 7300L are temporarily attached (temporarily fixed) to the lower panel base 7200 via the temporary fixing member 7800 .

In this state, the screw holes 7230 (screw holes 7230a, 7230b, 7230c shown in FIG. 198) of the lower panel base 7200 and the screw fastening bosses 7310 (screw fastening bosses 7310a shown in FIG. 204) of the lower right panel frame 7300R are screwed together. , 7310b, 7310c) are superimposed, and screw holes 7240 (screw holes 7240a, 7240b, 7240c shown in FIG. 198) of the lower panel base 7200 and screw fastening bosses 7320 (screws shown in FIG. 204) of the lower left panel frame 7300L The lower panel base 7200 and the lower panel frame 7300 are arranged so that the fastening boss portions 7320a, 7320b, 7320c) overlap each other. A screw 7810 (see FIG. 210) inserted through the screw hole 7230 and the screw hole 7240 is screwed into the hole formed in the screw fastening boss portion 7310 and the screw fastening boss portion 7320 from the rear side. As a result, the lower right panel frame 7300R and the lower left panel frame 7300L are fixed to the lower panel base 7200 by screw fastening.

At that time, since the lower panel base 7200 and the lower panel frame 7300 are temporarily fixed using the temporary fixing member 7800, the lower panel base 7200 and the lower panel frame 7300 are maintained while maintaining their relative positional relationship. The panel base 7200 can be turned upside down for screw fastening, which facilitates the mounting work. The holes formed in the temporary fixing boss portion 7315 and the temporary fixing boss portion 7325 are formed in the screw fastening boss portion 7310 and the screw fastening boss portion 7320 so that the temporary fixing member 7800 can be press-fitted. The temporary fixing holes 7235 and 7245 are larger than the screw holes 7230 and 7240 .

Here, as described above, in the lower panel base 7200, recesses (recesses 7232 and 7242) are formed around the screw holes 7230 and 7240 (see FIG. 199). As a result, the screws 7810 used for fastening the lower panel base 7200 and the lower panel frame 7300 are accommodated in the recesses, and the rear ends of the screws 7810 (ends on the head side of the screws) are attached to the lower panel base. It is positioned forward of the back surface 7216 of 7200 (screw 7810 does not protrude backward beyond back surface 7216). Similarly, in the lower panel base 7200, recesses (recesses 7237 and 7247) are formed around the temporary fixing holes 7235 and 7245 (see FIG. 199). As a result, the temporary fixing member 7800 used for temporarily fixing the lower panel base 7200 and the lower panel frame 7300 is accommodated in the recess, and the rear end of the temporary fixing member 7800 is positioned at the rear surface 7216 of the lower panel base 7200. (the temporary fixing member 7800 does not protrude backward beyond the rear surface 7216).

When the lower panel frame 7300 (lower right panel frame 7300R and lower left panel frame 7300L) is attached to the lower panel base 7200 as described above, the lower right panel frame 7300R is attached to the right curved portion 7212 of the lower panel base 7200. and the front side of the left curved portion 7213 of the lower left panel frame 7300L (see FIG. 209).

In this state, in step (ii) above, the lower panel film 7100 is pressed against the lower panel base 7200 from the rear side of the lower panel base 7200 . The central portion 7101, the right curved portion 7102, the left curved portion 7103, the right rear portion 7104, and the left rear portion 7105 (see FIG. 192) of the lower panel film 7100 correspond to the central portion 7211 of the lower panel base 7200. The lower panel film 7100 is arranged to face the right curved portion 7212, the left curved portion 7213, the right rear portion 7214, and the left rear portion 7215 (see FIG. 196).

In this state, in the step (iii) above, the central portion 7401, the right curved portion 7402, the left curved portion 7403, the right rear portion 7404, and the left rear portion 7405 (see FIG. 200) of the lower panel back 7400 are , the central portion 7101, the right curved portion 7102, the left curved portion 7103, the right rear portion 7104, and the left rear portion 7105 (see FIG. 192) of the lower panel film 7100. Lower panel back 7400 is placed. Then, the right locking piece 7452R and left locking piece 7452L (see FIG. 200) of the lower panel back 7400 are inserted into the right locking hole 7252R and left locking hole 7252L (see FIG. 196) of the lower panel base 7200, respectively. By doing so, the lower panel back 7400 is locked to the lower panel base 7200 (see FIG. 211).

FIG. 212 shows how the lower panel base 7200 and the lower panel back 7400 are cut along a vertical plane in the front-rear direction (a plane passing through the right locking piece 7452R) at the time when the step (iii) above is completed, for easy understanding. Therefore, the cut surface of the lower panel back 7400 is indicated by diagonal lines, and the cut surface of the lower panel base 7200 is indicated by black. As shown in FIG. 212, the rear ends of the right locking piece 7452R and the left locking piece 7452L are substantially in contact with the rear edges of the right locking hole 7252R and the left locking hole 7252L, and move toward the rear of the lower panel back 7400. As shown in FIG. movement is restricted. In addition, the upper surface 7451a (see FIG. 202) of the right locking projection 7451R and the left locking projection 7451L of the lower panel back 7400 is aligned with the right locking projection 7251R and the left locking projection of the lower panel base 7200. 7251L substantially contacts the lower surface 7251a (see FIG. 199), and upward movement of the lower panel back 7400 is restricted. In addition, the lower surface of the horizontal portion 7411 (see FIG. 201) of the lower panel back 7400 substantially contacts the upper surface of the horizontal portion 7217 (see FIG. 198) of the lower panel base 7200, and the vertical portion 7412 (see FIG. 201) of the lower panel back 7400 ) substantially contacts the upper surface of the first inclined portion 7221 (see FIG. 197) of the lower panel base 7200, and the downward movement of the lower panel back 7400 is restricted. A lower end of the vertical portion 7412 is formed to have the same inclination as the first inclined portion 7221 . In addition, the front side of the vertical portion 7412 of the lower panel back 7400 substantially contacts the rear edge of the horizontal portion 7217 of the lower panel base 7200, and the forward movement of the lower panel back 7400 is restricted.

At this time, the space formed between the back surface 7216 of the lower panel base 7200 (see FIG. 198) and the front surface 7420 of the lower panel back surface 7400 (the surface opposite to the back surface 7410, see FIG. 200) has a lower A panel film 7100 is placed. As a result, the front surface of the lower panel film 7100 substantially contacts the rear surface 7216 of the lower panel base 7200 , and the rear surface of the lower panel film 7100 substantially contacts the front surface 7420 of the lower panel rear surface 7400 . As shown in FIG. 212, the lower panel base 7200 and the lower panel back 7400 are arranged in close proximity (substantially abutting). It can be accommodated in the gap created between the lower panel base 7200 and the lower panel back 7400 . The lower panel film 7100, the lower panel base 7200, and the lower panel back 7400 have substantially the same curved shape, and the space formed between the lower panel base 7200 and the lower panel back 7400 is It is filled with the panel film 7100 so that there is almost no gap.

After that, in step (iv) above, the boss portion 7233 and boss portion 7243 (see FIG. 198) of the lower panel base 7200 and the screw holes 7512 and 7522 (see FIG. 205) of the lower panel bottom 7500 overlap each other. A lower panel bottom 7500 is arranged on the rear side of the lower panel back 7400 as shown. At this time, the lower side portion 7506 (see FIG. 206) of the lower panel bottom 7500 is placed on the horizontal portion 7223 (see FIG. 197) of the lower panel base 7200, and the right edge bent portion 7511 and the left edge bent portion of the lower panel bottom 7500 are placed. The portion 7521 (see FIG. 206) is placed on the right side 7225 and the left side 7226 (see FIG. 198) of the panel base 7200 (see FIG. 213). Then, screws 7820 (see FIG. 213) inserted through the screw holes 7512 and 7522 are screwed into the holes formed in the boss portions 7233 and 7243 from the rear side. As a result, the lower panel bottom 7500 is fixed to the lower panel base 7200 by screwing.

In FIG. 214, when the step (iv) is completed, the lower panel base 7200, the lower panel back 7400, and the lower panel lower 7500 are in the vertical plane in the front-rear direction (passing through the rear protrusion 7413 of the lower panel back 7400). In order to make it easier to understand, the cut surface of the lower panel base 7200 is indicated by hatching, the cut surface of the lower panel back 7400 is indicated by hatching, and the cut surface of the lower panel bottom 7500 is indicated by black. ing. As shown in FIG. 214, the front side portion 7501 (see FIG. 205) of the lower panel bottom 7500 substantially abuts the rear protruding portion 7413 (see FIG. 201) of the bottom panel back 7400, and the second inclined portion of the lower panel bottom 7500 7504, the third sloped portion 7505 and the lower side portion 7506 (see FIG. 206) are respectively the first sloped portion 7221, the second sloped portion 7222 and the horizontal portion 7223 (see FIG. 197) of the lower panel base 7200. Almost abutting. As a result, the lower panel back 7400 is sandwiched between the lower panel base 7200 and the lower panel bottom 7500, making it difficult to come off even when a shock is applied, for example, when the front door is opened or closed. .

In this state, in step (v) above, the screw holes 7234 (screw holes 7234a, 7234b, and 7234c shown in FIG. 198) of the lower panel base 7200 and the boss portion 7610 (see FIG. 207) of the right lower panel 7600 overlap. Position the lower panel right 7600 so that it does. Then, the screw inserted through the screw hole 7234 from the rear side is screwed into the hole formed in the boss portion 7610 . As a result, the right lower panel 7600 is fixed to the lower panel base 7200 by screwing. Further, the lower left panel 7700 is arranged so that the screw holes 7244 (screw holes 7244a, 7244b, 7244c shown in FIG. 198) of the lower panel base 7200 and the boss portion 7710 (see FIG. 208) of the lower left panel 7700 overlap. do. Then, the screw inserted through the screw hole 7244 from the rear side is screwed into the hole formed in the boss portion 7710 . As a result, the lower left panel 7700 is fixed to the lower panel base 7200 by screwing.

As described above, the assembly of the waist panel 7000 is completed, and the waist panel 7000 is completed. The lower end of the lower right panel frame 7300R has a shape that can be fitted to the front portion of the projecting portion 7602 (see FIG. 207) of the lower panel right 7600, and the lower end of the lower left panel frame 7300L is the lower panel left 7700. 208 (see FIG. 187).

The gaming machine 1 according to the eighth embodiment has been described above as one embodiment of the present invention.

<Appendix E>
2. Description of the Related Art Conventionally, there is known a game machine provided with a curved decorative sheet (see Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2005-198777). According to such a gaming machine, it is possible for the player to visually recognize the decoration applied to the decorative sheet, and the decorativeness of the gaming machine can be enhanced.

However, when a flat printed sheet is arranged in a curved shape, the curved portion looks distorted, resulting in an unattractive appearance and a poor design. On the other hand, in order to improve the appearance, it is conceivable to create a design assuming a curved state, but it is difficult to create such a design, and even if it is possible to create a design. Even so, there is a problem that the number of man-hours required for development is increased.

SUMMARY OF THE INVENTION It is an object of the present invention to provide a game machine capable of easily realizing good-looking visibility.

In this regard, the gaming machine 1 according to the eighth embodiment has the following features.

(E-1-1) A gaming machine comprising a viewing target portion (lower panel film 7100) to be viewed by a player,
The visual recognition target portion includes a first region (central portion 7101) and a second region (right curved portion 7102 and left curved portion 7103), and a visual recognition target surface formed across the first region and the second region. and
The portion of the visual recognition target surface formed in the first region is formed in the first direction (the direction of L ₁ (X) shown in FIG. 194(b)),
The portion of the visual recognition target surface formed in the second region is oriented in a second direction (L ₁ (Y) direction shown in FIG. 194(b)) different from the first direction. ), and
Shielding members (lower right panel frame 7300R and lower left panel frame 7300L) that make at least part of the second region difficult to see are arranged on the outer side of the gaming machine than the visible target portion.
A gaming machine characterized by:

According to the gaming machine 1 according to the eighth embodiment, the visual recognition target portion (lower panel film 7100) to be visually recognized by the player includes the first region (central portion 7101) and the second region (right curved portion 7102). and left curved portion 7103), and has a viewing target surface formed across the first region (central portion 7101) and the second region (right curved portion 7102 and left curved portion 7103). The part formed in the second region (the right curved portion 7102 and the left curved portion 7103) of the visual recognition target surface has a direction of surface formation compared to the portion formed in the first region (the central portion 7101). is different. Further, on the outer side of the game machine than the visual recognition target portion (lower panel film 7100), a shielding member (lower right A panel frame 7300R and a lower left panel frame 7300L) are arranged. As a result, even if the appearance of the portion formed in the second region (the right curved portion 7102 and the left curved portion 7103) of the viewing target surface is poor, the portion is covered by the shielding member (lower right panel). It can be hidden by the frame 7300R and the lower left panel frame 7300L), and good visibility can be easily realized.

(E-1-1') The gaming machine of (E-1-1),
The visual recognition target surface has a curved shape,
The degree of curvature of the portion of the visual recognition target surface formed in the second region is greater than the degree of curvature of the portion of the visual recognition target surface formed in the first region.
It is characterized by

According to the gaming machine 1 according to the eighth embodiment, the visual recognition target surface has a curved shape, and is formed in the second regions (the right curved portion 7102 and the left curved portion 7103) of the visual recognition target surface. The degree of curvature of the portion where the object is located is greater than the degree of curvature of the portion formed in the first region (central portion 7101) of the visual recognition target surface. As a result, even if the portion formed in the second region (the right curved portion 7102 and the left curved portion 7103) of the visual recognition target surface looks distorted, the portion is covered by the shielding member (lower right panel frame). 7300R and lower left panel frame 7300L), and good visibility can be easily achieved.

The present invention can also be applied to gaming machines having the following features.
(E-1-1'') The gaming machine of (E-1-1),
The visual recognition target part is configured by joining a plurality of members,
the second region corresponds to a joint portion between one of the plurality of members and another member;
The first region corresponds to a portion other than the joint,
It is characterized by

According to the game machine, the visual recognition target portion is configured by joining a plurality of members, and the second region corresponds to a joint portion between one member and another member among the plurality of members. is doing. As a result, even if the portion formed in the second region of the visual recognition target surface (the joint portion between one member and the other member among the plurality of members) looks distorted, The part can be hidden by the shielding member, and good visibility can be easily achieved.

The present invention is not particularly limited as long as the shielding member is arranged so as to make it difficult to visually recognize a region having a surface formation direction different from that of other regions in the visual recognition target portion. Also in the game machine (E-1-1''), the direction of surface formation at the joint portion is different from the direction of surface formation at the portion other than the joint portion, and thus the present invention is applicable. In addition to the above embodiments, for example, when unevenness occurs in the viewing target part due to molding problems, it is possible to apply a mode in which a shielding member is arranged so as to make the unevenness difficult to see. be. In this case as well, the present invention can be applied because the direction of surface formation is different between the uneven area and other areas. In addition, in the joint portion and the concave-convex portion, the direction of the tangent line in the region is different from the direction of the tangent line in the other region (see FIG. 194(b)). However, it is also possible to apply a form in which shielding members are arranged so as to make an area different from other areas difficult to see. In addition, in the joint portion and the concave-convex portion, the angle of incidence of light on the region is different from the angle of incidence of light on the other regions (see FIG. 194(b)). It is also possible to apply a mode in which the shielding member is arranged so as to make it difficult to visually recognize an area where the incident angle of light is different from that of other areas. In addition, in the joint portion and the concave-convex portion, the traveling direction of the light incident on the region is different from the traveling direction of the light incident on the other regions. It is also possible to apply a mode in which shielding members are arranged so as to make it difficult to see an area whose direction is different from that of other areas.

(E-1-2) a visible target sheet (lower panel film 7100), at least a portion of which is visible to the player;
a cover member (lower panel base 7200) positioned on the outer side of the game machine from the visual recognition target sheet;
and a shielding member (lower right panel frame 7300R and lower left panel frame 7300L) fixed to the cover member,
The visual recognition target sheet has curved portions (a right curved portion 7102 and a left curved portion 7103) at least in part,
At least part of the curved portion of the visual recognition target sheet becomes difficult to visually recognize due to the shielding member.
A gaming machine characterized by:

According to the gaming machine 1 according to the eighth embodiment, the visual recognition target sheet (lower panel film 7100) visible to the player has curved portions (right curved portion 7102 and left curved portion 7103) at least partially. ing. On the other hand, the cover member (lower panel base 7200) is positioned on the outer side of the game machine from the visual recognition target sheet (lower panel film 7100), and the cover member (lower panel base 7200) has a shielding member. (lower right panel frame 7300R and lower left panel frame 7300L) are fixed. At least part of the curved portion (right curved portion 7102 and left curved portion 7103) of the sheet to be viewed (lower panel film 7100) is made difficult to be recognized by the shielding member (lower right panel frame 7300R and lower left panel frame 7300L). is configured to As a result, even if the curved portions (the right curved portion 7102 and the left curved portion 7103) of the sheet to be viewed (the lower panel film 7100) appear distorted, the portions are covered by the shielding members (the lower right panel frame 7300R and the It can be hidden by the lower left panel frame 7300L), and good visibility can be easily achieved.

(E-2-1) a viewing target portion (lower panel film 7100) to be viewed by a player;
a cover member (lower panel base 7200) arranged on the surface side of the visual recognition target portion;
and a shielding member (lower right panel frame 7300R and lower left panel frame 7300L) arranged on the surface side of the cover member,
The visual recognition target portion includes a first region (central portion 7101) and a second region (right curved portion 7102 and left curved portion 7103), and is positioned in a predetermined direction (forward direction) with respect to the first region and the second region. Assuming that light is incident from the first region, the traveling direction of the light incident on the first region is different from the traveling direction of the light incident on the second region,
The shielding member is fixed to the cover member by a fixing member (screw 7810) that can be attached from the back side of the cover member,
The cover member has an opening (screw hole 7230 and screw hole 7240) that accommodates the fixing member so that the fixing member does not interfere with the visual recognition target part,
At least part of the second region in the viewing target portion becomes difficult to see due to the shielding member,
A gaming machine characterized by:

According to the gaming machine 1 according to the eighth embodiment, the visual recognition target portion (lower panel film 7100) to be visually recognized by the player includes the first region (central portion 7101) and the second region (right curved portion 7102). and left curved portion 7103). The traveling direction of the light incident on (the right curved portion 7102 and the left curved portion 7103) is different from the traveling direction of the light incident on the first region (central portion 7101). At least part of the second region (right curved portion 7102 and left curved portion 7103) in the visible portion (lower panel film 7100) becomes difficult to see due to the shielding members (lower right panel frame 7300R and lower left panel frame 7300L). is configured as As a result, even if the second region (right curved portion 7102 and left curved portion 7103) of the viewing target portion (lower panel film 7100) looks distorted, the portion is covered by the shielding member (lower right panel frame 7300R). and lower left panel frame 7300L), and good visibility can be easily achieved. In addition, a cover member (lower panel base 7200) is arranged on the surface side of the visual recognition target portion (lower panel film 7100), and the shielding members (lower right panel frame 7300R and lower left panel frame 7300L) are arranged on the cover member ( It is arranged on the surface side of the lower panel base 7200). Specifically, the shielding members (lower right panel frame 7300R and lower left panel frame 7300L) are fixed to the cover member (lower panel base 7200) by fixing members (screws 7810) that can be attached from the back side of the cover member (lower panel base 7200). The cover member (lower panel base 7200) has an opening (screw hole 7230 and screw holes 7240). As a result, it is possible to prevent the fixing member (screw 7810) from interfering with the visual recognition target portion (lower panel film 7100). It is possible to suppress deterioration of the visibility of the film 7100).

(E-2-2) a visual recognition target sheet (lower panel film 7100) having a curved portion (right curved portion 7102 and left curved portion 7103) having a predetermined curved shape at least partially;
a cover member (lower panel base 7200) arranged on the surface side of the visual recognition target sheet;
and a shielding member (lower right panel frame 7300R and lower left panel frame 7300L) fixed to the cover member,
The shielding member is fixed to the cover member by a fixing member (screw 7810) that can be attached from the back side of the cover member,
The cover member has an opening (screw hole 7230 and screw hole 7240) that accommodates the fixing member so that the fixing member does not interfere with the visual recognition target sheet,
At least part of the bent portion becomes difficult to see due to the shielding member,
A gaming machine characterized by:

According to the gaming machine 1 according to the eighth embodiment, the viewing target sheet (lower panel film 7100) is at least partially formed with curved portions (right curved portion 7102 and left curved portion 7103) having a predetermined curved shape. It is On the other hand, a cover member (lower panel base 7200) is arranged on the surface side of the visual recognition target sheet (lower panel film 7100), and a shielding member (lower right panel frame 7300R and lower left panel frame 7300L) are fixed. At least part of the curved portion (right curved portion 7102 and left curved portion 7103) of the sheet to be viewed (lower panel film 7100) is made difficult to be recognized by the shielding member (lower right panel frame 7300R and lower left panel frame 7300L). is configured to As a result, even if the curved portions (the right curved portion 7102 and the left curved portion 7103) of the sheet to be viewed (the lower panel film 7100) appear distorted, the portions are covered by the shielding members (the lower right panel frame 7300R and the It can be hidden by the lower left panel frame 7300L), and good visibility can be easily achieved. In addition, the shielding members (lower right panel frame 7300R and lower left panel frame 7300L) are fixed to the cover member (lower panel base 7200) by fixing members (screws 7810) that can be attached from the back side of the cover member (lower panel base 7200). The cover member (lower panel base 7200) has openings (screw holes 7230 and screw holes 7230 and screw holes 7240). As a result, it is possible to prevent the fixing member (screw 7810) from interfering with the visual recognition target sheet (lower panel film 7100). It is possible to suppress deterioration of the visibility of the film 7100).

In the eighth embodiment, the shielding members (lower right panel frame 7300R and lower left panel frame 7300L) are attached to the cover member (lower panel base 7200) by fixing members (screws 7810) that can be attached from the back side of the cover member (lower panel base 7200). 7200). In the present invention, the method of fixing the shielding members (lower right panel frame 7300R and lower left panel frame 7300L) is not particularly limited, and they can be attached to arbitrary members by arbitrary means. For example, by providing locking claws on the rear side of the shielding members (lower right panel frame 7300R and lower left panel frame 7300L), the shielding member (lower panel base 7200) on the surface side or other members is provided. The members (lower right panel frame 7300R and lower left panel frame 7300L) may be locked.

(E-3-1) a viewing target portion (lower panel film 7100) to be viewed by a player;
a first member (lower panel base 7200) arranged on the surface side of the visual recognition target portion;
a shielding member (lower right panel frame 7300R and lower left panel frame 7300L) arranged on the surface side of the first member;
A second member (lower panel back 7400) arranged on the back side of the visible target part,
The visual recognition target portion includes a first region (central portion 7101) and a second region (right curved portion 7102 and left curved portion 7103), and is positioned in a predetermined direction (forward direction) with respect to the first region and the second region. 194(b)) is larger than the incident angle (α shown in FIG. 194(b)) in the first region. ,
At least part of the second region in the visual recognition target portion becomes difficult to be visually recognized by the shielding member,
The first member and the second member are locked by locking portions (right locking piece 7452R and left locking piece 7452L, and right locking hole 7252R and left locking hole 7252L).
A gaming machine characterized by:

According to the gaming machine 1 according to the eighth embodiment, the visual recognition target portion (lower panel film 7100) to be visually recognized by the player includes the first region (central portion 7101) and the second region (right curved portion 7102). and left curved portion 7103). The incident angle (β shown in FIG. 194B) in the second region (the right curved portion 7102 and the left curved portion 7103) is greater than the incident angle (α shown in FIG. 194B) in the (central portion 7101). It's getting bigger. At least part of the second region (right curved portion 7102 and left curved portion 7103) in the visible portion (lower panel film 7100) becomes difficult to see due to the shielding members (lower right panel frame 7300R and lower left panel frame 7300L). is configured as As a result, even if the second region (right curved portion 7102 and left curved portion 7103) of the viewing target portion (lower panel film 7100) looks distorted, the portion is covered by the shielding member (lower right panel frame 7300R). and lower left panel frame 7300L), and good visibility can be easily realized. In addition, a first member (lower panel base 7200) is arranged on the surface side of the viewing target portion (lower panel film 7100), and the shielding members (lower right panel frame 7300R and lower left panel frame 7300L) It is arranged on the surface side of the member (lower panel base 7200). On the other hand, the second member (lower panel back 7400) is arranged on the back side of the visual recognition target portion (lower panel film 7100), and the first member (lower panel base 7200) and the second member (lower panel back 7400) are arranged. ) are locked by locking portions (right locking piece 7452R and left locking piece 7452L, and right locking hole 7252R and left locking hole 7252L). As a result, the visual recognition target portion (lower panel film 7100) is arranged between the first member (lower panel base 7200) and the second member (lower panel back 7400), while the second member (lower panel back 7400) ) is locked to the first member (lower panel base 7200), there is no need to screw the second member (lower panel back 7400) to the first member (lower panel base 7200). Here, if the first member (lower panel base 7200) and the second member (lower panel back 7400) were to be fastened using screws, there would be individual differences in the size of the screw holes. As a result, when the screw is tightened strongly, the visible target portion (lower panel film 7100) is pushed by the first member (lower panel base 7200) and the second member (lower panel back 7400), so that the visible target There is concern that the portion (lower panel film 7100) may be distorted. In this regard, according to the gaming machine 1 according to the eighth embodiment, it is possible to prevent such a situation from occurring, and such a distortion may cause the visual recognition target portion (lower panel film). 7100) can be suppressed from deteriorating in visibility.

(E-3-2) a visual recognition target sheet (lower panel film 7100) having a curved portion (right curved portion 7102 and left curved portion 7103) formed at least partially with a predetermined curvature;
a first member (lower panel base 7200) arranged on the surface side of the visual recognition target sheet;
a shielding member (lower right panel frame 7300R and lower left panel frame 7300L) arranged on the surface side of the first member;
a second member (lower panel back 7400) arranged on the back side of the visual recognition target sheet,
At least part of the bent portion becomes difficult to see due to the shielding member,
The first member and the second member are locked by locking portions (right locking piece 7452R and left locking piece 7452L, and right locking hole 7252R and left locking hole 7252L).
A gaming machine characterized by:

According to the gaming machine 1 according to the eighth embodiment, the viewing target sheet (lower panel film 7100) is at least partially formed with curved portions (right curved portion 7102 and left curved portion 7103) having a predetermined curvature. ing. On the other hand, the first member (lower panel base 7200) is arranged on the surface side of the visual recognition target sheet (lower panel film 7100), and the shielding member is arranged on the surface side of the first member (lower panel base 7200). (lower right panel frame 7300R and lower left panel frame 7300L) are arranged. At least part of the curved portion (right curved portion 7102 and left curved portion 7103) of the sheet to be viewed (lower panel film 7100) is made difficult to be recognized by the shielding member (lower right panel frame 7300R and lower left panel frame 7300L). is configured to As a result, even if the curved portions (the right curved portion 7102 and the left curved portion 7103) of the sheet to be viewed (the lower panel film 7100) appear distorted, the portions are covered by the shielding members (the lower right panel frame 7300R and the It can be hidden by the lower left panel frame 7300L), and good visibility can be easily realized. A second member (lower panel back 7400) is arranged on the back side of the visual recognition target sheet (lower panel film 7100), and the first member (lower panel base 7200) and the second member (lower panel back 7400) are arranged. ) are locked by locking portions (right locking piece 7452R and left locking piece 7452L, and right locking hole 7252R and left locking hole 7252L). As a result, the visual recognition target sheet (lower panel film 7100) is arranged between the first member (lower panel base 7200) and the second member (lower panel back 7400), while the second member (lower panel back 7400) ) is locked to the first member (lower panel base 7200), there is no need to screw the second member (lower panel back 7400) to the first member (lower panel base 7200). Here, if the first member (lower panel base 7200) and the second member (lower panel back 7400) were to be fastened using screws, there would be individual differences in the size of the screw holes. As a result, when the screw is tightened strongly, the sheet to be viewed (lower panel film 7100) is pushed by the first member (lower panel base 7200) and the second member (lower panel back 7400). There is concern that the sheet (lower panel film 7100) may be distorted. In this respect, according to the gaming machine 1 according to the eighth embodiment, it is possible to prevent such a situation from occurring, and the visible object sheet (lower panel film) due to such distortion 7100) can be suppressed from deteriorating in visibility.

(E-4-1) a viewing target portion (lower panel film 7100) to be viewed by a player;
a first member (lower panel base 7200) arranged on the surface side of the visual recognition target portion;
a shielding member (lower right panel frame 7300R and lower left panel frame 7300L) arranged on the surface side of the first member;
a second member (lower panel back 7400) arranged on the back side of the visual recognition target part;
A third member (lower panel bottom 7500) arranged on the back side of the second member,
The visual recognition target portion includes a first region (central portion 7101) and a second region (right curved portion 7102 and left curved portion 7103), and a visual recognition target surface formed across the first region and the second region. and
A first tangent line (L 1 (L ₁ ( X)) and a second tangent line (L ₁ (Y) shown in FIG. 194(b)) are drawn, the direction of the first tangent line and the direction of the second tangent line are different,
At least part of the second region in the visual recognition target portion becomes difficult to be visually recognized by the shielding member,
The first member and the second member are locked by locking portions (right locking piece 7452R and left locking piece 7452L, and right locking hole 7252R and left locking hole 7252L),
The first member and the third member are fixed by a fixing member (screw 7820),
A gaming machine characterized by:

According to the gaming machine 1 according to the eighth embodiment, the visual recognition target portion (lower panel film 7100) to be visually recognized by the player includes the first region (central portion 7101) and the second region (right curved portion 7102). and left curved portion 7103), and has a viewing target surface formed across the first region (central portion 7101) and the second region (right curved portion 7102 and left curved portion 7103). In the portion formed in the first region (the central portion 7101) and the portion formed in the second region (the right curved portion 7102 and the left curved portion 7103) of the visual recognition target surface, the first When the tangent (L ₁ (X) shown in FIG. 194(b)) and the second tangent (L ₁ (Y) shown in FIG. 194(b)) are drawn, the first tangent (FIG. 194(b) is different from the direction of the _{second tangent line (L 1 (} Y) shown in FIG. 194(b)). That is, the portion formed in the second region (the right curved portion 7102 and the left curved portion 7103) of the viewing target surface has a larger surface formation than the portion formed in the first region (the central portion 7101). direction is different. At least part of the second region (right curved portion 7102 and left curved portion 7103) in the visible portion (lower panel film 7100) becomes difficult to see due to the shielding members (lower right panel frame 7300R and lower left panel frame 7300L). is configured as As a result, even if the appearance of the portion formed in the second region (the right curved portion 7102 and the left curved portion 7103) of the viewing target surface is poor, the portion is covered by the shielding member (lower right panel). It can be hidden by the frame 7300R and the lower left panel frame 7300L), and good visibility can be easily realized. In addition, a first member (lower panel base 7200) is arranged on the surface side of the viewing target portion (lower panel film 7100), and the shielding members (lower right panel frame 7300R and lower left panel frame 7300L) It is arranged on the surface side of the member (lower panel base 7200). On the other hand, the second member (lower panel back 7400) is arranged on the back side of the visual recognition target portion (lower panel film 7100), and the first member (lower panel base 7200) and the second member (lower panel back 7400) are arranged. ) are locked by locking portions (right locking piece 7452R and left locking piece 7452L, and right locking hole 7252R and left locking hole 7252L). As a result, the visual recognition target portion (lower panel film 7100) is arranged between the first member (lower panel base 7200) and the second member (lower panel back 7400), while the second member (lower panel back 7400) ) is locked to the first member (lower panel base 7200), there is no need to screw the second member (lower panel back 7400) to the first member (lower panel base 7200). Here, if the first member (lower panel base 7200) and the second member (lower panel back 7400) were to be fastened using screws, there would be individual differences in the size of the screw holes. As a result, when the screw is tightened strongly, the visible target portion (lower panel film 7100) is pushed by the first member (lower panel base 7200) and the second member (lower panel back 7400), so that the visible target There is concern that the portion (lower panel film 7100) may be distorted. In this regard, according to the gaming machine 1 according to the eighth embodiment, it is possible to prevent such a situation from occurring, and such a distortion may cause the visual recognition target portion (lower panel film). 7100) can be suppressed from deteriorating in visibility. Furthermore, the third member (bottom panel bottom 7500) is arranged on the back side of the second member (bottom panel back 7400), and the first member (bottom panel base 7200) and the third member (bottom panel bottom 7500) are arranged. ) are fixed by a fixing member (screw 7820). As a result, between the first member (lower panel base 7200) and the third member (lower panel bottom 7500), the visible part (lower panel film 7100) and the second member (lower panel back 7400) are stably positioned. It is possible to arrange it, and the visibility of the visual recognition target portion (lower panel film 7100) can be maintained in a high state.

(E-4-2) a visual recognition target sheet (lower panel film 7100) having a curved portion (right curved portion 7102 and left curved portion 7103) formed at least partially with a predetermined curvature;
a first member (lower panel base 7200) arranged on the surface side of the visual recognition target sheet;
a shielding member (lower right panel frame 7300R and lower left panel frame 7300L) arranged on the surface side of the first member;
a second member (lower panel back 7400) arranged on the back side of the visual recognition target sheet;
A third member (lower panel bottom 7500) arranged on the back side of the second member,
At least part of the bent portion becomes difficult to see due to the shielding member,
The first member and the second member are locked by locking portions (right locking piece 7452R and left locking piece 7452L, and right locking hole 7252R and left locking hole 7252L),
The first member and the third member are fixed by a fixing member (screw 7820),
A gaming machine characterized by:

According to the gaming machine 1 according to the eighth embodiment, the viewing target sheet (lower panel film 7100) is at least partially formed with curved portions (right curved portion 7102 and left curved portion 7103) having a predetermined curvature. ing. On the other hand, the first member (lower panel base 7200) is arranged on the surface side of the visual recognition target sheet (lower panel film 7100), and the shielding member is arranged on the surface side of the first member (lower panel base 7200). (lower right panel frame 7300R and lower left panel frame 7300L) are arranged. At least part of the curved portion (right curved portion 7102 and left curved portion 7103) of the sheet to be viewed (lower panel film 7100) is made difficult to be recognized by the shielding member (lower right panel frame 7300R and lower left panel frame 7300L). is configured to As a result, even if the curved portions (the right curved portion 7102 and the left curved portion 7103) of the sheet to be viewed (the lower panel film 7100) appear distorted, the portions are covered by the shielding members (the lower right panel frame 7300R and the It can be hidden by the lower left panel frame 7300L), and good visibility can be easily achieved. A second member (lower panel back 7400) is arranged on the back side of the visual recognition target sheet (lower panel film 7100), and the first member (lower panel base 7200) and the second member (lower panel back 7400) are arranged. ) are locked by locking portions (right locking piece 7452R and left locking piece 7452L, and right locking hole 7252R and left locking hole 7252L). As a result, the visual recognition target sheet (lower panel film 7100) is arranged between the first member (lower panel base 7200) and the second member (lower panel back 7400), while the second member (lower panel back 7400) ) is locked to the first member (lower panel base 7200), there is no need to screw the second member (lower panel back 7400) to the first member (lower panel base 7200). Here, if the first member (lower panel base 7200) and the second member (lower panel back 7400) were to be fastened using screws, there would be individual differences in the size of the screw holes. As a result, when the screw is tightened strongly, the sheet to be viewed (lower panel film 7100) is pushed by the first member (lower panel base 7200) and the second member (lower panel back 7400). There is concern that the sheet (lower panel film 7100) may be distorted. In this respect, according to the gaming machine 1 according to the eighth embodiment, it is possible to prevent such a situation from occurring, and the visible object sheet (lower panel film) due to such distortion 7100) can be suppressed from deteriorating in visibility. Furthermore, the third member (bottom panel bottom 7500) is arranged on the back side of the second member (bottom panel back 7400), and the first member (bottom panel base 7200) and the third member (bottom panel bottom 7500) are arranged. ) are fixed by a fixing member (screw 7820). As a result, the visual recognition target sheet (lower panel film 7100) and the second member (lower panel back 7400) are stably placed between the first member (lower panel base 7200) and the third member (lower panel lower 7500). It is possible to arrange it, and the visibility of the visual recognition target sheet (lower panel film 7100) can be maintained in a high state.

In the eighth embodiment, the shielding members (the lower right panel frame 7300R and the lower left panel frame 7300L) make at least a part of the visual recognition target portion (the visual recognition target sheet: the lower panel film 7100 included in the waist panel 7000) difficult to view. described as something. The visual recognition target part (visual recognition target sheet) in the present invention is not limited to the decorative sheet (lower panel film 7100) provided on the waist panel (decorative unit provided at the bottom of the front door), and the top panel (top of the front door It may be a decorative sheet provided in a provided decorative unit (see FIG. 65). In addition, the visual recognition target part (visual recognition target sheet) in the present invention is not limited to a sheet on which decoration (pattern or pattern) is applied in advance, and a sheet (screen, screen, etc.) capable of displaying an image corresponding to the pattern or pattern. For example, it may be a screen sheet 1046) shown in FIG.

In addition, in the eighth embodiment, the shielding members (lower right panel frame 7300R and lower left panel frame 7300L) are divided into the shielding member (lower right panel frame 7300R) arranged on the right side and the shielding member (lower left panel frame 7300R) arranged on the left side. 7300L). In the present invention, only one of the right shielding member (lower right panel frame 7300R) and the left shielding member (lower left panel frame 7300L) may be provided. For example, of the left curved portion (left curved portion 7103) and the right curved portion (right curved portion 7102), the appearance of the left curved portion (left curved portion 7103) is a problem in terms of design. If the appearance of the curved portion (right curved portion 7102) does not matter, only the left shielding member (lower left panel frame 7300L) is arranged so that only the left curved portion (left curved portion 7103) is difficult to see. It is also possible to

A case in which the appearance of the bend does not matter is, for example, a case in which the bend is merely colored. For example, a predetermined pattern is drawn on the entire visual recognition target portion (visual recognition target sheet: lower panel film 7100), and the predetermined pattern includes a main portion (outline, etc.) constituting the pattern and a single color. and the part that is only colored (monochromatic part). In such an example, if the part of the predetermined pattern that is arranged in the curved portion is the above-mentioned monochromatic portion, the shielding member (lower panel frame) that makes the curved portion difficult to see should not be arranged. may be

Regarding the placement position of the shielding member (lower panel frame), considering the viewpoint of the player, it is reasonable to arrange the shielding member (lower panel frame) so that the curved portion with the maximum curvature is difficult to see. However, in the present invention, the placement position of the shielding member (lower panel frame) is not limited to the surface side (front) of the curved portion where the curvature is maximum. For example, when the visual recognition target portion (visual recognition target sheet) has a first curved portion and a second curved portion, and the curvature of the first curved portion is greater than the curvature of the second curved portion, the first While the shielding member (lower panel frame) is not arranged in front of the bend (player side), the shielding member (lower panel frame) is arranged in front of the second bend (player side). good. For example, in the case where the main portion is arranged in the second curved portion of the predetermined pattern, while the monochromatic portion is arranged in the first curved portion, the shielding member (lower panel frame) may be arranged in this way. In the present invention, the arrangement position of the shielding member (lower panel frame) can be appropriately determined in consideration of the beauty created comprehensively by the visual recognition target portion (visual recognition target sheet) and the shielding member (lower panel frame). It is possible.

Also, the shielding members (lower right panel frame 7300R and lower left panel frame 7300L) may be decorated. The decorations applied to the shielding members (lower right panel frame 7300R and lower left panel frame 7300L) include decorations applied to the visible part (visible target sheet: lower panel film 7100) (for example, a logo depending on the model). Designs such as corresponding patterns and patterns) and decorations having relevance. Also, the color of the shielding members (lower right panel frame 7300R and lower left panel frame 7300L) can be the same as or similar to the color of the visual recognition target portion (visual recognition target sheet: lower panel film 7100). As a result, it is possible to achieve harmony with the design of the visual recognition target portion (visual recognition target sheet: lower panel film 7100) without making the shielding members (lower right panel frame 7300R and lower left panel frame 7300L) conspicuous. can enhance the aesthetics of

On the other hand, the shielding members (lower right panel frame 7300R and lower left panel frame 7300L) may be plated with silver, gold, or the like. As a result, it is possible to reliably shield the curved portions (the right curved portion 7102 and the left curved portion 7103) while emphasizing the three-dimensional decoration of the shielding members (the lower right panel frame 7300R and the lower left panel frame 7300L).

In addition, the shielding members (lower right panel frame 7300R and lower left panel frame 7300L) are arranged as protruding three-dimensional decorations in the decorative unit (lumbar panel). is installed in the game hall, the shielding member (the lower right panel frame 7300R and the lower left panel frame 7300L) is used by the player who is considering which game machine to play in the game hall. It's easy to catch the eye. Therefore, in order to appeal the presence and attractiveness of the gaming machine to players, shielding members (lower right panel frame 7300R and lower left panel frame 7300L) display the model name, manufacturer logo, and game information (for example, the probability of winning a bonus). or a part of the payout table), etc. may be displayed (written). Also, the shielding members (lower right panel frame 7300R and lower left panel frame 7300L) may be provided with decoration sheets, and characters, items, etc. related to content adopted in the game machine may be printed on the decoration sheets. Also, the shielding members (the lower right panel frame 7300R and the lower left panel frame 7300L) themselves may be formed in a three-dimensional shape (shape corresponding to characters, items, etc.) having relevance to the content. As a result, it is possible to increase the degree of attention to the gaming machine.

The decoration (design, color, etc.) applied to the shielding members (lower right panel frame 7300R and lower left panel frame 7300L) has been described above. may be employed, a plurality of them may be employed in combination, or other devices may be employed in combination. The cover member (lower panel base 7200) may be decorated, or may be transparent and colorless. When the cover member (lower panel base 7200) is decorated, the cover member (lower panel base 7200) constitutes the visual recognition target portion in the present invention together with the visual recognition target sheet (lower panel film 7100).

Further, in the eighth embodiment, when a plurality of curved portions (right curved portion 7102 and left curved portion 7103) are provided apart from each other, a plurality of shielding members are provided so as to individually make each curved portion difficult to see. (The lower right panel frame 7300R and the lower left panel frame 7300L) have been described as being spaced apart from each other. In the present invention, when a plurality of bending portions (right bending portion 7102 and left bending portion 7103) are provided apart from each other in this way, the plurality of bending portions (right bending portion 7102 and left bending portion 7103) are As a shielding member (lower panel frame) that makes it difficult to see, a plurality of shielding parts (for example, the lower right panel frame 7300R and the lower left panel frame 7300L) for making each bent part difficult to see, and the plurality of shielding A shielding member (for example, a right A lower panel frame 7300R, a lower left panel frame 7300L, a part extending left and right so as to connect the upper parts of the lower right panel frame 7300R and the lower left panel frame 7300L, and lower parts of the lower right panel frame 7300R and the lower left panel frame 7300L. A single panel frame configured by a portion extending to the left and right so as to connect the .

In addition, in the present invention, shielding members (lower right panel frame 7300R and lower left panel frame 7300R and lower left panel frame 7300L), a shielding member (additional panel frame) may be provided. As such an additional panel frame, for example, a panel frame having a predetermined shape (for example, a V shape) is provided on the surface side of the first region (central portion 7101) in the viewing target portion (lower panel film 7100), and the lower right panel The frame 7300R, the lower left panel frame 7300L, and the additional panel frame may function as an integrated three-dimensional decoration (create an integrated three-dimensional effect). For that purpose, a panel frame (decoration) may be added to the surface side (the front side of the waist panel) of the visible part (lower panel film 7100), and the design of the additional panel frame itself and the cover member of the additional panel frame ( Only by designing the mounting structure to the lower panel base 7200) or the like, it is possible to create the three-dimensional effect. In this respect, when adding a three-dimensional decoration to the space on the back side of the visible part (lower panel film 7100) (back side of the waist panel), it is necessary to change the layout of wiring, medal shoots, substrates, etc. , According to the method of adding a panel frame (decoration) to the surface side (front side of the waist panel) of the visible target part (lower panel film 7100) as described above, such a change in arrangement is unnecessary, and relatively The appearance of the game machine can be renewed at low cost and in a short development period.

In addition, in the present invention, between the shielding member (lower right panel frame 7300R and lower left panel frame 7300L) and the cover member (lower panel base 7200), some game machine component is arranged or the shielding member (lower right Game machine components may be arranged in the panel frame 7300R and the lower left panel frame 7300L). In that case, it is preferable to employ shielding members (panel frames) that are larger than the shielding members (lower right panel frame 7300R and lower left panel frame 7300L) described in the eighth embodiment. This makes it possible to add such gaming machine components. Such a gaming machine component may be provided on either one of the right shielding member (panel frame) and the left shielding member (panel frame), or may be provided on both shielding members (panel frame). may be provided. When game machine components are provided on both left and right shielding members (panel frames), the same game machine components may be provided on the left and right, or different game machine components may be provided on the left and right. Also, when three or more shielding members (panel frames) are provided, the game machine component may be provided only on any one shielding member (panel frame), or any plurality of shielding members (panel frames) may be provided. frame) may be provided with game machine components, or all the shielding members (panel frames) may be provided with game machine components. Also, one shielding member (panel frame) may be provided with only one gaming machine component (mechanism), or may be provided with a plurality of mechanisms.

For example, a light-emitting substrate can be cited as the gaming machine component. By installing LEDs on the light-emitting substrate and controlling the light emission of the LEDs, it is possible to light the shielding member (panel frame) and enhance the presentation effect. In addition to the light-emitting substrate (first light-emitting substrate), a light-emitting substrate (second light-emitting substrate) is also provided on the back side of the portion not shielded by the shielding member (panel frame) of the viewing target portion (lower panel film 7100). ) may be provided. Light emission by the first light emission substrate and light emission by the second light emission substrate (light emission effect pattern) may be performed as an integrated light emission pattern (both light emission, both light emission, etc.), or light emission by each light emission substrate. may be controlled separately. For example, the three-dimensional decoration of the shielding member (panel frame) can be emphasized by performing an effect such as turning off the light in the part not shielded by the shielding member (panel frame), while making the shielding member (panel frame) emit light. . In the case of providing such a light emitting board, an opening for passing the harness for power supply and connection to the production control unit (sub control device SS) is provided at the bottom of the waist panel (bottom panel 7500, etc.) should be provided. A polarizing member such as a light diffusion sheet may be provided together with the light emitting substrate, or the front surface or side surface of the shielding member (panel frame) may be processed for polarizing. The curved portions (right curved portion 7102 and left curved portion 7103) of the viewing target portion (lower panel film 7100) may be shielded by the light emitting substrate itself, or the curved portions (right curved portion 7102 and left curved portion 7102) may be shielded by the light emitting substrate itself. A member (a sheet, a plate, or the like) may be provided for shielding the curved portion 7103). As the light emitting effect by the light emitting board, it is possible to perform an effect suggesting a game state, an effect notifying predetermined information (information advantageous to the player, bonus winning, etc.), and the like. It is good also as reporting.

Further, examples of the game machine components include game operating units (start lever, stop button, checkout button, bet button, etc.). For example, a part of the game operation unit is arranged on the front surface of the shielding member (panel frame), and a sensor for detecting that the game operation unit is operated inside the shielding member (panel frame). It is possible to place a substrate or the like. Such a design makes it possible to effectively utilize the space when, for example, the shielding member (panel frame) is large and the control panel section (operating means placement section) on the waist panel is narrow. The curved portions (the right curved portion 7102 and the left curved portion 7103) of the viewing target portion (the lower panel film 7100) may be shielded by the game machine component itself, or the curved portion ( A member (sheet, plate, or the like) for shielding the right curved portion 7102 and the left curved portion 7103 may be provided.

Further, examples of the gaming machine components include production operation units (production buttons, production levers, jog dials, etc.). For example, while the operation part for presentation is arranged in front of the shielding member (panel frame), a sensor, a substrate, etc. for detecting that the operation part for presentation is operated is installed inside the shielding member (panel frame). can be placed. For example, while providing a normal effect button (first effect button) on the control panel portion (operation means placement portion), a second effect button is provided on the shielding member (panel frame), and the target of the operation instruction at the time of operation effect Depending on which one of the first production button and the second production button is the operation means to be, the degree of expectation of winning etc. In the event that the player wins, the expectation may be high, the win may be determined, etc.). The curved portions (right curved portion 7102 and left curved portion 7103) of the viewing target portion (lower panel film 7100) may be shielded by the game machine component itself, or may be covered by the curved portion ( A member (a sheet, a plate, or the like) for shielding the right curved portion 7102 and the left curved portion 7103 may be provided.

Further, examples of the gaming machine components include a vibration mechanism (motor, solenoid, etc.) for vibrating the shielding member (panel frame). By vibrating the shielding member (panel frame) using the vibrating mechanism, an effect or the like of suggesting or announcing the game state or degree of expectation may be performed. In addition, by arranging both the vibration mechanism and the operation unit for effect on the shielding member (panel frame), vibration is transmitted to the player's hand when operating the operation unit for effect (when pressing the button). You may In addition, when such a vibration mechanism is provided, a cushioning member for shock absorption (made of synthetic rubber such as urethane rubber or silicon rubber) is placed between the shielding member (panel frame) and the cover member (lower panel base 7200). sheets, etc.) may be arranged. The curved portions (right curved portion 7102 and left curved portion 7103) of the viewing target portion (lower panel film 7100) may be shielded by the game machine component itself, or may be covered by the curved portion ( A member (a sheet, a plate, or the like) for shielding the right curved portion 7102 and the left curved portion 7103 may be provided.

Further, as the game machine components, for example, a speaker can be cited. When the speaker is arranged, one or both of the front surface and the side surface of the shielding member (panel frame) may be provided with an opening for outputting sound (mesh-like portion on the surface of the speaker). By arranging speakers on both the right shielding member (panel frame) and the left shielding member (panel frame), it is possible to perform a powerful sound effect with a stereo sound source from a position close to the player. The curved portions (right curved portion 7102 and left curved portion 7103) of the viewing target portion (lower panel film 7100) may be shielded by the game machine component itself, or may be covered by the curved portion ( A member (a sheet, a plate, or the like) for shielding the right curved portion 7102 and the left curved portion 7103 may be provided.

Further, examples of the gaming machine components include an air blowing mechanism (a fan such as a sirocco fan). When installing a blower mechanism, it is possible to create an effect of blowing air toward the player by providing an opening for ventilation in either or both of the front and side surfaces of the shielding member (panel frame). It can be configured as As a result, it is possible to perform the game state, the degree of expectation, or the like as a sensible effect.

Further, examples of the gaming machine components include a drive mechanism. For example, the shielding member (panel frame) may function as a movable accessory by providing a driving source (motor, solenoid, etc.) while providing a movable decorative portion on a part of the shielding member (panel frame). In addition, the game machine components include, for example, a sensor (proximity sensor such as an infrared sensor) capable of detecting when the player brings his hand close to him, and a touch sensor (touch panel) capable of detecting when the player makes contact with his hand. ) etc. can be mentioned. By arranging such a sensor, it may be used for an effect operation. In addition, an image display unit can be cited as an example of the gaming machine component. For example, an effect may be produced by arranging a small liquid crystal screen.

[Ninth Embodiment]
The first to eighth embodiments have been described above. The ninth embodiment will be described below. The basic configuration of the gaming machine 1 according to the ninth embodiment is the same as the gaming machine 1 according to the first to eighth embodiments. In the following description, the same components as those of the game machine 1 according to the first to eighth embodiments are denoted by the same reference numerals. In addition, descriptions of the portions that the descriptions of the first to eighth embodiments apply to the ninth embodiment will be omitted.

<Light irradiation range and screen placement position>
In this embodiment, similarly to the fourth embodiment, the light projected from the projector 9020 travels downward and is then reflected forward by the mirror 9030 (see FIG. 64). All the light projected from the projector 9020 reaches the upper door mechanism UD.

The upper door mechanism UD is provided with a central screen sheet 8012 and an upper screen sheet 8023 (see FIGS. 217 and 218). The light projected from the projector 9020 is incident on the center screen sheet 8012 and the upper screen sheet 8023 from behind (rear side), and an image is displayed on the front side (display surface) of these screen sheets. become. Details will be described below.

<Upper door mechanism UD>
FIG. 215 is a front perspective view of the upper door mechanism. FIG. 216 is a rear perspective view of the upper door mechanism. FIG. 217 is a front perspective view of the state in which the central screen unit and the upper screen unit are removed from the upper door mechanism. FIG. 218 is a rear perspective view of the state in which the central screen unit and the upper screen unit are removed from the upper door mechanism.

As shown in FIGS. 215 and 216, the upper door mechanism UD is provided with a central screen unit 8010 and an upper screen unit 8020. As shown in FIGS. As shown in FIGS. 217 and 218, the central screen unit 8010 includes a front translucent plate 8011, a central screen sheet 8012, and a rear translucent plate 8013. FIG. The upper screen unit 8020 has an outer lens 8021 , an inner lens 8022 and an upper screen sheet 8023 .

The front light-transmitting plate 8011 is mainly made of a light-transmitting resin such as an acrylic plate, a glass plate, or the like, and is formed to have a uniform thickness over the entire surface. Like the light-transmitting plate 1045 (see FIG. 67) in the fourth embodiment, the front light-transmitting plate 8011 continues rearward from the flat portion 8011a located in the center and both the left and right side edges of the flat portion 8011a. and a curved portion 8011b formed by The flat portion 8011a is formed in a flat shape, and the curved portion 8011b has a flat plate curved shape like the door-side right screen 9050 and the door-side left screen 9060 (see FIG. 59) in the third embodiment. ing.

The central screen sheet 8012 is a transmissive screen on which a projected image is projected from behind, and the screens in the third embodiment (the cabinet-side screen 9040, the door-side right screen 9050, and the door-side left screen 9060), it has a rear-side entrance surface on which light projected from the projector 9020 is incident, and a front-side display surface on which a projection image is projected by transmitting the light incident on the entrance surface. The central screen sheet 8012 is mainly made of, for example, a translucent glass plate, an acrylic plate, or a resin film, and is formed so as to have a uniform thickness over the entire surface. It has a gray color.

The central screen sheet 8012, like the screen sheet 1046 (see FIG. 67) in the fourth embodiment, is formed continuously from the flat portion 8012a located in the center and both the left and right side edges of the flat portion 8012a toward the rear. and a curved portion 8012b. The planar portion 8012a is formed in a planar shape, and the curved portion 8012b has a shape in which a flat plate is curved. The plane portion 8012a and the curved portion 8012b of the screen sheet 8012 have substantially the same size and shape as the plane portion 8011a and the curved portion 8011b of the front transparent plate 8011 .

The rear light-transmitting plate 8013 is mainly made of a light-transmitting resin such as an acrylic plate, a glass plate, or the like, and is formed to have a uniform thickness over the entire surface. The rear light-transmitting plate 8013 includes a flat portion 8013a located in the center and curved portions 8013b continuously formed rearward from both left and right side edges of the flat portion 8013a. The planar portion 8013a is formed in a planar shape, and the curved portion 8013b has a shape in which a flat plate is curved. The planar portion 8013a and the curved portion 8013b of the rear transparent plate 8013 have substantially the same size and shape as the planar portion 8012a and the curved portion 8012b of the central screen sheet 8012 .

The central screen sheet 8012 is arranged behind the front transparent plate 8011 , and the rear transparent plate 8013 is arranged behind the central screen sheet 8012 . Specifically, the rear side surface of the plane portion 8011a of the front light-transmitting plate 8011 and the front side surface of the plane portion 8012a of the central screen sheet 8012 are in close contact with each other, and the rear side of the curved portion 8011b of the front side light-transmitting plate 8011 The side surface and the front side surface of the curved portion 8012b of the central screen sheet 8012 are in close contact with each other. In addition, the back side surface of the flat portion 8012a of the central screen sheet 8012 and the front side surface of the flat portion 8013a of the rear light-transmitting plate 8013 are in close contact with each other, and the back side surface of the curved portion 8012b of the central screen sheet 8012 is in close contact. , and the front surface of the curved portion 8013b of the rear light-transmitting plate 8013 are in close contact with each other.

Since the rear light-transmitting plate 8013 is translucent, the light projected from the projector 9020 passes through the rear light-transmitting plate 8013 and reaches the incident surface (surface on the back side) of the central screen sheet 8012. Incident. As a result, an image (still image or moving image) relating to the game is displayed on the display surface (surface on the front side) of the central screen sheet 8012 . The front light-transmitting plate 8011 is formed transparent, and there is no structure in front of the front light-transmitting plate 8011 that blocks the view of the player. , becomes visible to the player.

The rear light-transmitting plate 8013 has an upper portion 8013c above the flat portion 8013a. A circular upper screen unit installation opening 8013d is formed in the upper part 8013c, and the upper screen unit 8020 is attached so as to fill the upper screen unit installation opening 8013d.

Light projected from the projector 9020 is incident on the incident surface (surface on the back side) of the upper screen sheet 8023 . As a result, an image related to the game (for example, an image corresponding to predetermined characters) is displayed on the display surface (front surface) of the upper screen sheet 8023 . The outer lens 8021 and the inner lens 8022 are transparent, and there is no structure in front of these lenses that blocks the player's field of vision. , becomes visible to the player. The upper screen unit 8020 will be detailed later.

Note that the upper screen unit 8020 forms part of the decoration unit 8000 . The decoration unit 8000 is provided in the upper part of the upper door mechanism UD so as to protrude forward.

<Adjustment of irradiation range by shielding wall member 8030>
FIG. 219 is a front perspective view of the shielding wall member. FIG. 220 is a partially enlarged perspective view of the periphery of the left side of the shielding wall member. FIG. 221 is a rear perspective view of the shielding wall member. FIG. 222 is a rear perspective view of the upper door mechanism. 223 is a perspective view showing a state in which the shielding wall member and the speaker harness protector are removed from the upper door mechanism shown in FIG. 222. FIG. FIG. 224(a) is a schematic diagram showing a state in which light is projected from the projector in this embodiment, viewed from above. FIG. 224(b) is a schematic diagram showing a state in which light is projected from a projector in another embodiment, viewed from above. FIG. 225 is a perspective view showing a state in which the front panel of the decorative unit is removed from the upper door mechanism; FIG. 226 is a perspective view showing a state in which the speaker harness protector is removed from the upper door mechanism.

As shown in FIGS. 219 to 221, the shielding wall member 8030 has a generally bilaterally symmetrical structure and has a rectangular annular shape with an open center. Specifically, the shielding wall member 8030 includes a lower portion 8032 , a left portion 8033 , a right portion 8034 , and an upper portion 8035 arranged around the light passage opening 8031 .

The lower side portion 8032 has a lower side surface 8032a. The lower side surface 8032a constitutes the upper surface of the lower side portion 8032 (the surface facing the light passage opening 8031) and is formed substantially horizontally. Although not shown, the lower side surface 8032a is textured to form fine unevenness. Texture processing is processing in which a texture (wrinkle pattern) is formed on the surface, and the processing is performed as light diffusion processing.

As shown in FIG. 220, the left side portion 8033 has a first left inner wall surface 8033a, a second left inner wall surface 8033b, a third left inner wall surface 8033c, and a fourth left inner wall surface 8033d. The first left inner wall surface 8033a, the second left inner wall surface 8033b, the third left inner wall surface 8033c, and the fourth left inner wall surface 8033d form the right surface (surface facing the light passage opening 8031) of the left part 8033. , and formed in a substantially vertical direction. For the sake of clarity, FIG. 220 shows the left side portion 8033 cut along a horizontal plane.

The first left inner wall surface 8033a is formed continuously from the right end of the front end surface of the left side portion 8033 obliquely rearward. The second left inner wall surface 8033b is continuously formed rearward from the rear end (right end) of the first left inner wall surface 8033a with a steeper slope than the first left inner wall surface 8033a. The third left inner wall surface 8033c continues rearward from the rear end of the second left inner wall surface 8033b with a steeper slope than the first left inner wall surface 8033a and a gentler slope than the second left inner wall surface 8033b. It is The fourth left inner wall surface 8033d is continuously formed rearward from the rear end of the third left inner wall surface 8033c with a steeper inclination than the second left inner wall surface 8033b.

The left side portion 8033 has a left rear end portion 8033e formed by slightly bending the rear end to the right. The front surface 8033f of the left rear end portion 8033e is continuously formed rightward from the rear end of the fourth left inner wall surface 8033d. The front surface 8033f and the fourth left inner wall surface 8033d are substantially orthogonal. The length of the fourth left inner wall surface 8033d in the front-rear direction becomes shorter as it goes upward. A front surface 8033f of 8033e is continuous with the third left inner wall surface 8033c.

Similarly, although detailed description is omitted, the right side portion 8034 includes a first right inner wall surface 8034a, a second right inner wall surface 8034b, a third right inner wall surface 8034c, a fourth right inner wall surface 8034d, and a right rear end portion. 8034e. A first right inner wall surface 8034a, a second right inner wall surface 8034b, a third right inner wall surface 8034c, a fourth right inner wall surface 8034d, and a right rear end portion 8034e are formed of a first left inner wall surface 8033a and a second left inner wall surface 8034e, respectively. It is symmetrical with the wall surface 8033b, the third left inner wall surface 8033c, the fourth left inner wall surface 8033d, and the left rear end portion 8033e.

The left rear end portion 8033e and the right rear end portion 8034e are each formed substantially vertically. For clarity, in FIG. 221, the rear surface 8033g of the left rear end 8033e and the rear surface 8034g of the right rear end 8034e are hatched.

As shown in FIGS. 222 and 223 , the lower part 8032 of the shielding wall member 8030 is arranged above the relay board 8006 and the relay board cover 8007 . As a result, the relay board 8006 and the relay board cover 8007 are substantially completely covered with the lower side portion 8032 (lower side surface 8032a). The longitudinal position of the front edge 8032b of the lower part 8032 of the shielding wall member 8030 substantially coincides with the longitudinal position of the rear edge of the lower part 8013d of the rear translucent plate 8013 . That is, the front edge 8032b of the lower part 8032 substantially coincides with the rear edge of the lower part 8013d in plan view, and the lower part 8032 and the lower part 8013d are arranged without any gap. The lower part 8013d of the rear light-transmitting plate 8013 is formed continuously rearward from the lower ends of the flat part 8013a and the curved part 8013b, and is arranged substantially horizontally.

A right side portion 8034 of the shielding wall member 8030 is arranged on the left side of the right LED board 8008R and the right key receiving member 8009R. As a result, the upper portions of the right LED board 8008R and the right key receiving member 8009R are formed into the right side portion 8034 (the first right inner wall surface 8034a, the second right inner wall surface 8034b, the third right inner wall surface 8034c, and the fourth right inner wall surface). 8034d) almost completely. Although not shown, a plurality of LEDs are installed on the right surface of the right LED substrate 8008R so as to emit light rightward.

Similarly, although not shown, the left side portion 8033 of the shielding wall member 8030 is arranged on the right side of the left LED board 8008L and the left key receiving member 8009L. As a result, the upper portions of the left LED board 8008L and the left key receiving member 8009L are formed into the left side portion 8033 (first left inner wall surface 8033a, second left inner wall surface 8033b, third left inner wall surface 8033c, and fourth left inner wall surface 8033c). 8033d) almost completely. Although not shown, a plurality of LEDs are installed on the left surface of the left LED substrate 8008L so as to emit light leftward.

The right LED board 8008R and the left LED board 8008L each constitute a light emitting unit (for example, an indirect lighting unit 1060 shown in FIG. 66), and light emitted from the LEDs is changed in its traveling direction by a light guide member. After that, it is released to the outside of the gaming machine 1 .

Here, as described above, light projected from projector 9020 (light reflected by mirror 9030) travels forward (the side where central screen sheet 8012 is arranged) (see FIG. 64). In FIG. 224, such a light irradiation range is indicated by oblique lines.

In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 224( a ), most of the light reflected by the mirror 9030 passes through the light passage opening 8031 of the shielding wall member 8030 and reaches the central screen sheet 8012 . On the other hand, part of the light reflected by the mirror 9030 is incident on the left side 8033 (right side of the left rear end 8033e) and right side 8034 (left side of the right rear end 8034e) of the shielding wall member 8030. do. Since the shielding wall member 8030 does not transmit light, the light cannot pass through the left side 8033 and the right side 8034, and is reflected by the left side 8033 and the right side 8034. The sheet 8012 is not reached.

On the other hand, another embodiment shown in FIG. 224(b) has the same configuration as this embodiment except that the shielding wall member 8030 is not provided. 224(b) is wider than the irradiation range shown in FIG. 224(a). It's becoming Specifically, in FIG. 224(a), the area I and the area II are not in the irradiation range, whereas in FIG. 224(b) the area I and the area II are in the irradiation range. Area I and area II are areas positioned at the periphery of the central screen sheet 8012 in a front view.

In region I, a left LED board 8008L and a left key receiving member 8009L are arranged. A right LED board 8008R and a right key receiving member 8009R are arranged in region II. Therefore, in another embodiment, part of the light projected from the projector 9020 is reflected by the left LED board 8008L and the left key receiving member 8009L, and the right LED board 8008R and the right key receiving member 8009R. Circumstances can occur where the light is incident on the central screen sheet 8012 . On the other hand, in this embodiment, since area I and area II are not included in the irradiation range, part of the light projected from the projector 9020 is projected onto the left LED substrate 8008L, the left key receiving member 8009L, and the right LED substrate 8008L. It is possible to prevent a situation in which the light is reflected by the substrate 8008R and the right key receiving member 8009R (reflected light enters the central screen sheet 8012).

In this embodiment, the light reflected by the mirror 9030 is reflected by the first left inner wall surface 8033a, the second left inner wall surface 8033b, the third left inner wall surface 8033c, the fourth left inner wall surface 8033d, and the first left inner wall surface 8033d. These inner wall surfaces are formed so as not to enter the right inner wall surface 8034a, the second right inner wall surface 8034b, the third right inner wall surface 8034c, and the fourth right inner wall surface 8034d. However, the present invention is not limited to this example, and may be configured such that part of the light reflected by the mirror 9030 enters these inner wall surfaces. In this case, part of the light may be configured to enter the curved portion 8012b of the central screen sheet 8012 (not enter the flat portion 8012a) after being reflected by these inner wall surfaces. In this embodiment, the curved portion 8012b may be included in the irradiation range or may not be included in the irradiation range.

221, the upper portion 8035 of the shielding wall member 8030 is formed with a right ventilation opening 8036R and a left ventilation opening 8036L. The right ventilation opening 8036R and the left ventilation opening 8036L are formed so that air can pass through them in the front-rear direction. For clarity, right vent opening 8036R and left vent opening 8036L are hatched in FIG.

Also, as shown in FIG. 225, the front panel 8001 of the decorative unit 8000 has a top wall 8001a. The front panel 8001 is a member that forms the skeleton of the decoration unit 8000 . A plurality of right vent holes 8002R and left vent holes 8002L are formed in the top wall 8001a. Right vent 8002R and left vent 8002L have a shape corresponding to the pattern carved around these vents. Inside the decoration unit 8000, a right cavity 8003R and a left cavity 8003L are formed. Right vent 8002R and left vent 8002L communicate with right cavity 8003R and left cavity 8003L, respectively. Right cavity 8003R and left cavity 8003L communicate with right vent opening 8036R and left vent opening 8036L, respectively.

As a result, air is taken into the cabinet G from the outside of the gaming machine 1 via the left vent 8002L, the left cavity 8003L, and the left vent opening 8036L, for example. This air enters the inside of the case B22 through the intake port B22A (see FIG. 22). The air entering the case B22 moves to the right while absorbing the heat generated in the case B22, and exits the case B22 through the exhaust port B22E (see FIG. 23). The air coming out of the case B22 is released to the outside of the game machine 1 through the right ventilation opening 8036R, the right cavity 8003R, and the right ventilation port 8002R.

In this manner, the heat generated in the projector 9020 can be discharged to the outside of the game machine 1. FIG. In the second embodiment, the case B22 is provided with the air inlet B22A on the right side, while the case B22 is provided with the air outlet B22E on the left side. On the other hand, in the present embodiment, as in the sixth embodiment, an intake port B22A is provided on the left side of the case B22, while an exhaust port B22E is provided on the right side of the case B22 (see FIG. 138). .

Further, as shown in FIG. 221, the boundary portion (upper right corner portion 8040R) between the right side portion 8034 and the upper side portion 8035 of the shielding wall member 8030 has a structure that bulges toward the light passage opening 8031 side. A speaker opening 8041 is formed in the upper right corner 8040R. For clarity, in FIG. 221, the speaker opening 8041 is hatched. FIG. 226 shows that part of the speaker 8042 is exposed through the speaker opening 8041 .

Below the speaker opening 8041, there is provided a speaker inclined portion 8043 that slopes downward toward the rear. Thus, a harness arrangement space 8044 is formed above the speaker inclined portion 8043 . As shown in FIG. 226, a harness 8045 for connection to a speaker 8042 is arranged in the harness arrangement space 8044 . Harness 8045 is connected to speaker 8042 through speaker opening 8041 .

A speaker harness protector 8046 is arranged on the rear side of the speaker opening 8041 . The speaker harness protector 8046 generally has a structure in which a predetermined level difference is formed by a surface in the front-back direction and a surface in the up-down direction. As a result, the harness arrangement space 8044 is closed by the speaker harness protector 8046 , and the harness 8045 is surrounded by the wall composed of the speaker inclined portion 8043 and the speaker harness protector 8046 .

Similarly, a speaker opening 8041 and a speaker inclined portion 8043 are formed at a boundary portion (upper left corner portion 8040L) between the left side portion 8033 and the upper side portion 8035 of the shielding wall member 8030 . Since the upper left corner portion 8040L has a symmetrical structure with the upper right corner portion 8040R, detailed description thereof will be omitted.

<Upper screen unit 8020>
227 and 228 are exploded perspective views of the upper screen unit. 229-231 are cross-sectional views of the upper screen unit. FIG. 232 is a partially enlarged perspective view of the upper door mechanism as seen from the rear and below.

FIG. 227 shows each component of the upper screen unit 8020 as seen obliquely from the front. FIG. 228 shows the components of the upper screen unit 8020 viewed obliquely from behind. FIG. 229 shows how the upper screen unit 8020 is cut along a horizontal plane near the center. FIG. 230 shows a partially enlarged upper screen unit 8020 shown in FIG. FIG. 231 shows a state in which the upper screen unit 8020 is cut along a vertical plane in the front-rear direction near the center.

As shown in FIGS. 227-231, the upper screen unit 8020 includes an outer lens 8021, an inner lens 8022, and an upper screen sheet 8023 (see FIGS. 217 and 218).

The outer lens 8021 has a substantially hemispherical shape that looks like a sphere divided in half, and is arranged so that the center of curvature is on the back side. The outer lens 8021 is mainly made of translucent polycarbonate or the like, and is formed to have a predetermined thickness. Thus, the outer lens 8021 has a front surface (front surface 8021a) and a rear surface (back surface 8021b). The outer lens 8021 is a convex lens (a so-called convex meniscus lens) in which both the front surface 8021a and the rear surface 8021b are convex toward the front side, and the central portion is thicker than the peripheral portion.

The inner lens 8022 has a substantially hemispherical shape that looks like a sphere divided in half, and is arranged so that the center of curvature is on the back side. The inner lens 8022 is mainly made of translucent polycarbonate or the like, and is formed to have a predetermined thickness. Thus, the inner lens 8022 has a front surface (front surface 8022a) and a rear surface (back surface 8022b). The inner lens 8022 is a convex lens (a so-called convex meniscus lens) in which both the front surface 8022a and the rear surface 8022b are convex to the front side, and the central portion is thicker than the peripheral portion.

The upper screen sheet 8023 has a flat screen curved shape (for example, a bowl shape obtained by cutting a sphere at a predetermined portion), and is formed to have a uniform thickness over the entire surface. . The cross-sectional shape of the upper screen sheet 8023 cut along the horizontal or vertical plane is the top view (bottom view) of the door-side right screen 9050 and the door-side left screen 9060 (see FIG. 59) described in the third embodiment. It has an arc shape similar to .

The upper screen sheet 8023, like the central screen sheet 8012, is a transmissive screen on which a projection image is projected from behind. The upper screen sheet 8023 is mainly made of, for example, a translucent glass plate, an acrylic plate, or a resin film, and exhibits a milky white, translucent, or gray color when not projected.

The upper screen sheet 8023 has a rear-side entrance surface 8023a on which light projected from the projector 9020 is incident, and a front-side display surface 8023b on which a projected image is projected by transmitting the light incident on the entrance surface. have. The upper screen sheet 8023 is arranged so that the center of curvature is on the back side. In other words, the entrance surface 8023a and the display surface 8023b of the upper screen sheet 8023 are convex toward the downstream side in the direction in which the light projected from the projector 9020 travels.

The upper screen sheet 8023 is arranged behind the inner lens 8022 , and the inner lens 8022 is arranged behind the outer lens 8021 . Specifically, the rear surface 8021b of the outer lens 8021 and the front surface 8022a of the inner lens 8022 face each other, and the rear surface 8022b of the inner lens 8022 and the display surface 8023b of the upper screen sheet 8023 face each other. For clarity, in FIG. 229, the cut surface of the outer lens 8021 is hatched, the cut surface of the inner lens 8022 is hatched, and the cut surface of the upper screen sheet 8023 is black.

As shown in FIG. 230, a slight gap (gap I) is formed between the rear surface 8022b of the inner lens 8022 and the display surface 8023b of the upper screen sheet 8023. As shown in FIG. The rear surface 8022b of the inner lens 8022 and the display surface 8023b of the upper screen sheet 8023 are substantially parallel. The distance between the back surface 8022b of the inner lens 8022 and the display surface 8023b of the upper screen sheet 8023 is about 1/3 (or about 1/10 to 2 times, 1/5 to 1 time, Or about 1/4 to 1/2). However, the rear surface 8022b of the inner lens 8022 and the display surface 8023b of the upper screen sheet 8023 may be in contact with each other partially or entirely.

Similarly, a slight gap (gap II) is formed between the rear surface 8021b of the outer lens 8021 and the front surface 8022a of the inner lens 8022 . The rear surface 8021b of the outer lens 8021 and the front surface 8022a of the inner lens 8022 are substantially parallel. The distance between the back surface 8021b of the outer lens 8021 and the front surface 8022a of the inner lens 8022 is about 1/3 (or about 1/10 to 2 times, 1/5 to 1 time, or about 1/4 to 1/2). However, the rear surface 8021b of the outer lens 8021 and the front surface 8022a of the inner lens 8022 may be partially or wholly in contact with each other.

In this embodiment, the distance between the rear surface 8021b of the outer lens 8021 and the front surface 8022a of the inner lens 8022 is slightly shorter than the distance between the rear surface 8022b of the inner lens 8022 and the display surface 8023b of the upper screen sheet 8023. . However, the distance between the rear surface 8021b of the outer lens 8021 and the front surface 8022a of the inner lens 8022 may be longer than the distance between the rear surface 8022b of the inner lens 8022 and the display surface 8023b of the upper screen sheet 8023. Either one of the distances may be zero.

As described above, the light projected from the projector 9020 is incident on the incident surface 8023a of the upper screen sheet 8023, and an image related to the game (for example, an image corresponding to predetermined characters) is displayed on the display surface 8023b of the upper screen sheet 8023. is displayed. The image is magnified by the outer lens 8021 and the inner lens 8022 to create a three-dimensional effect as if the image were floating on a sphere (crystal).

As a result, for example, the upper screen sheet 8023 is displayed in black in a normal game state, while the upper screen unit 8020 displays predetermined characters in a game state (specific game state) advantageous to the player. It can be performed. In addition, in the normal game state (non-specific game state), through the characters that appear on the upper screen unit 8020, the right to shift to the specific game state is granted (determines whether to shift to the specific game state It is also possible to perform a production that suggests that you have won the lottery for the purpose. As the specific game state, the bonus game state (BB game state, MB game state, etc.) in the pachislot game machine, the RT game state, the AT game state (ART game state), the jackpot game state in the pachinko game machine, the probability variable game state, and the time saving A game state such as a game state can be appropriately employed.

Here, it has been described that a translucent member (rear translucent plate 8013) is arranged on the back side of the central screen sheet 8012 (see FIGS. 217 and 218), but the upper screen sheet 8023 A translucent member is not arranged on the back side of the . Therefore, the light projected from the projector 9020 is directly incident on the incident surface 8023a of the upper screen sheet 8023. FIG. Therefore, for example, when a member arranged on the back side of the upper screen sheet 8023 is scratched, it is possible to avoid a situation in which the scratch is enlarged and displayed.

On the back side of the upper screen sheet 8023, a front panel relay board 8025 having no translucency is arranged in a substantially vertical direction (see FIG. 232). It is covered with the front panel relay board 8025 (see FIG. 226). However, as described above, the light projected from projector 9020 travels downward and is then reflected forward by mirror 9030 (see FIG. 64). As a result, the light reflected by the mirror 9030 travels obliquely upward, and the travel of the light is not blocked by the front panel relay board 8025 .

However, it may be configured such that part of the light reflected by the mirror 9030 is incident on the front panel relay substrate 8025 . This prevents, for example, part of the light reflected by the mirror 9030 from reaching the bottom surface 8026 of the decoration unit 8000, and prevents the light reflected by the bottom surface 8026 from entering the upper screen sheet 8023. can do. In other words, the front panel relay board 8025 can have the same function as the shielding wall member 8030 .

<Top side light emitting unit 8050>
FIG. 233 is a perspective view showing a state in which the front panel and speaker grille of the decoration unit are removed from the upper door mechanism; FIG. 234 is a perspective view of a topside lighting unit. FIG. 235 is a perspective view showing a state in which the first front panel lens, the second front panel lens and the speaker horn are removed from the top side light emitting unit. FIG. 236 is a top perspective view of the top side substrate, top side substrate cover, and top side speaker illumination lens. FIG. 237 is a bottom perspective view of the topside substrate, topside substrate cover, and topside speaker illumination lens.

As shown in FIG. 233, the upper door mechanism UD is provided with a right top side light emitting unit 8050R and a left top side light emitting unit 8050L. Since the right top side light emitting unit 8050R and the left top side light emitting unit 8050L have a symmetrical structure, only the right top side light emitting unit 8050R will be described below. Also, the right top side light emitting unit 8050R and the left top side light emitting unit 8050L are referred to as a top side light emitting unit 8050 without distinction.

The speaker grills 8005 (the right speaker grill 8005R and the left speaker grill 8005L) are attached to the front sides of the right side 8001b and the left side 8001c of the front panel 8001, respectively. Thereby, the speaker grille 8005 is positioned in front of the speaker 8042 . A plurality of holes are formed in the right side 8001b, the left side 8001c, and the speaker grille 8005, and the sound output from the speaker 8042 is emitted forward through the holes.

As shown in FIGS. 234 and 235, the topside light emitting unit 8050 includes a first front panel lens 8051, a second front panel lens 8052, a topside substrate 8060, a topside substrate cover 8070, and a speaker horn 8080. , is equipped with

The first front panel lens 8051 and the second front panel lens 8052 are made of a translucent material. The first front panel lens 8051 has protrusions 8051a and 8051b that protrude rearward. The second front panel lens 8052 has mounting portions 8052a and 8052b for mounting the projecting portions 8051a and 8051b. Most of the first front panel lens 8051 is positioned forward of the second front panel lens 8052 in a state where the projecting portions 8051a and 8051b are placed on the placement portions 8052a and 8052b, respectively. be done.

In this state, the front panel 8001 is arranged above the protrusions 8051 a and 8051 b of the second front panel lens 8052 and the first front panel lens 8051 . As a result, the second front panel lens 8052 is entirely covered with the front panel 8001 . On the other hand, the projections 8051a and 8051b of the first front panel lens 8051 are covered by the front panel 8001, while the portions other than the projections 8051a and 8051b are not covered by the front panel 8001 and are exposed.

The top side substrate 8060 is arranged substantially horizontally below the second front panel lens 8052 and is entirely covered with the second front panel lens 8052 . A plurality of upper LEDs 8062 are provided on the surface (upper surface 8061 ) of the top side substrate 8060 . The upper LED 8062 is installed to emit light upward. Thereby, the light emitted from the upper LED 8062 is guided by the second front panel lens 8052 and emitted to the outside of the gaming machine 1 from the first front panel lens 8051 .

As shown in FIG. 236, the topside substrate cover 8070 has a substrate mounting portion 8071 . The substrate mounting portion 8071 has a shape that follows the outer shape of the top side substrate 8060 . The topside substrate 8060 is mounted on the substrate mounting portion 8071 . For the sake of clarity, in FIG. 236, the substrate mounting portion 8071 is shown in black. An illumination lens installation portion 8072 is provided inside the substrate placement portion 8071 (the region surrounded by the black portion in FIG. 236, that is, the bottom side of the topside substrate 8060).

A top side speaker illumination lens 8075 is installed in the illumination lens installation portion 8072 . The top side speaker illumination lens 8075 is a component of the top side light emitting unit 8050 . The top side speaker illumination lens 8075 is made of a translucent material and has a recessed portion 8076 recessed from the surrounding surface. A light irradiation opening 8073 penetrating vertically is formed in the illumination lens installation portion 8072 . For the sake of clarity, in FIG. 236, the light irradiation opening 8073 is hatched. A connector opening 8074 is formed in the top side board cover 8070 .

As shown in FIG. 237, a plurality of lower LEDs 8064 are provided on the rear surface (lower surface 8063) of the top side substrate 8060. As shown in FIG. The LED 8064 is installed so as to emit light downward. The light emitted from the lower LED 8064 passes through the light irradiation opening 8073, reaches the speaker horn 8080, and the speaker horn 8080 is irradiated. The illumination of the speakerphone 8080 is described in greater detail below. A connector 8065 is provided on the bottom surface 8063 of the top side substrate 8060 . Connector 8065 is installed through connector opening 8074 .

<Emission of light from lower LED 8064>
FIG. 238 is a top view showing how the lower LEDs are installed when the top side speaker illumination lens is installed on the top side substrate cover. FIG. 239 is a top view showing how the lower LEDs are installed with the top side speaker illumination lens removed from the top side substrate cover. FIG. 240 is a cross-sectional view of a topside speaker illumination lens. FIG. 241 is a top view showing the positional relationship between the lower LEDs and the speakerphone.

238 shows the positional relationship between the top side speaker illumination lens 8075 and the lower LED 8064 when the top side speaker illumination lens 8075 is installed in the illumination lens installation portion 8072 of the top side substrate cover 8070. FIG. 239 shows the positional relationship between the light irradiation opening 8073 and the lower LED 8064 when the top side speaker illumination lens 8075 is not installed in the illumination lens installation portion 8072 of the top side substrate cover 8070. FIG. FIG. 240 shows how the top side speaker illumination lens 8075 is cut along a horizontal vertical plane. In FIG. 241, the other members are omitted in order to make the positional relationship between the lower LED 8064 and the speakerphone 8080 easier to understand.

As shown in FIG. 238, the lower LED 8064 is arranged at a position overlapping with the concave portion 8076 of the top side speaker illumination lens 8075 in top view. As shown in FIG. 240, the recess 8076 is stepped and has a bottom surface 8077 and an intermediate surface 8078 . The bottom surface 8077 is formed at a position lower than the intermediate surface 8078 and constitutes the bottom of the recess 8076 . The bottom surface 8077 has a zigzag shape when viewed in cross section. Specifically, the bottom surface 8077 is a surface in which an inclined surface that ascends from left to right and an inclined surface that descends from left to right are continuously formed.

As a result, light emitted from the lower LED 8064 enters the bottom surface 8077 of the top side speaker illumination lens 8075 . Light incident on the bottom surface 8077 is irregularly refracted and passes through the top side speaker illumination lens 8075 . Here, as shown in FIG. 239, the lower LED 8064 is arranged at a position overlapping the light irradiation opening 8073 of the top side substrate cover 8070 when viewed from above. Therefore, the bottom surface 8077 and the light irradiation opening 8073 overlap each other when viewed from above, and the light transmitted through the top side speaker illumination lens 8075 passes through the light irradiation opening 8073 .

As shown in FIG. 241, the lower LED 8064 is arranged at a position overlapping the speaker horn 8080 in top view. Therefore, the light passing through the light irradiation opening 8073 reaches the speakerphone 8080 . As described above, the light emitted from the lower LED 8064 illuminates the speaker horn 8080 .

<Peripheral Structure of Speaker 8042>
FIG. 242 is a front perspective view of the speakerphone. FIG. 243 is a rear perspective view of the speakerphone. FIG. 244 is a perspective view showing the peripheral structure of the speaker. FIG. 245 is a front view showing the peripheral structure of the speaker. 246 is a perspective view showing a state in which the speaker horn, speaker seal, speaker holder, speaker, and speaker harness protector are removed from the state shown in FIG. 244. FIG. FIG. 247 is a perspective view showing a state in which the speaker horn, speaker seal, speaker holder, and speaker are assembled. 248 is a perspective view showing a state in which the speaker horn is removed from the state shown in FIG. 247. FIG. FIG. 249 is a front view of the speaker seal, speaker holder and speaker. FIG. 250 is a perspective view of a speaker seal;

As shown in FIGS. 242 and 243, the speaker horn 8080 has a rectangular base 8081 and a bulge 8085 bulging forward from the base 8081 . A sound emitting opening 8082 is formed in the base 8081 . For the sake of clarity, FIG. 243 shows the rear end surface 8083 of the base 8081 shaded. The portion surrounded by the shaded portion is the sound emission opening 8082 .

The bulging portion 8085 is formed in a C shape when viewed from the front. Specifically, the bulging portion 8085 includes an upper wall portion 8086 , a lower wall portion 8087 , and a side wall portion 8088 connecting the upper wall portion 8086 and the lower wall portion 8087 . The upper wall portion 8086 is formed to protrude forward from a portion of the peripheral edge (upper edge portion) of the sound emitting opening 8082 . The lower wall portion 8087 is formed to protrude forward from a portion of the peripheral edge (lower edge portion) of the sound emitting opening 8082 . The side wall portion 8088 is formed to the left of a portion of the peripheral edge of the sound emitting opening 8082 (left edge portion). As a result, the periphery of the sound emitting opening 8082 is surrounded by the bulging portion 8085 .

As shown in FIGS. 244 and 245, the speaker 8042 is arranged on the rear side of the speaker horn 8080, and the speaker 8042 is visible through the sound emission opening 8082. As shown in FIGS. 244 and 245 show a state in which the front panel 8001, speaker grill 8005, first front panel lens 8051, second front panel lens 8052, and top side substrate 8060 are removed. Also, for clarity, in FIG. 245, the front edge of the bulging portion 8085 of the speakerphone 8080 is shown in black.

Light emitted from the lower LED 8064 enters the upper surface of the upper wall portion 8086 of the speaker horn 8080 (see FIG. 241). The light incident on the upper wall portion 8086 is diffused in the left-right direction by the upper wall portion 8086 , and part of the light reaches the side wall portion 8088 . Also, part of the light incident on the upper wall portion 8086 is transmitted through the upper wall portion 8086 and reaches the lower wall portion 8087 . As a result, the light emitted from the lower LED 8064 illuminates the entire speakerphone 8080 (that is, the periphery of the speaker 8042). The speakerphone 8080 is mainly made of translucent polycarbonate or the like, and is mixed with an opacifying agent to enhance the diffusion effect.

As shown in FIGS. 246 to 250, a speaker holder 8090 and a speaker seal 8095 are provided between the speaker 8042 and the speaker horn 8080. FIG. The speaker holder 8090 is a member for supporting the speaker 8042 and has a circular sound emission opening 8091 formed therein. The speaker 8042 is attached to the speaker holder 8090 so that sound is emitted forward through the sound emission opening 8091 .

The speaker seal 8095 includes an upper speaker seal 8095a, a right speaker seal 8095b, a lower speaker seal 8095c, and a left speaker seal 8095d. The upper speaker seal 8095a, the right speaker seal 8095b, the lower speaker seal 8095c, and the left speaker seal 8095d each have the same configuration, and are configured as rectangular parallelepiped foam sound absorbing materials. Examples of foamed sound absorbing materials include polyurethane foams, ethylene-propylene-diene rubber foams (EPDM foams), polystyrene foams, polyolefin foams, chloroprene foams, polyester foams, and the like. For example, EHW (polyurethane foam, manufactured by INOAC), EPTSEALER (registered trademark: ethylene-propylene-diene rubber foam, manufactured by Nitto Denko), etc. can be used as the speaker seal 8095 .

Speaker seal contact surfaces 8092 (upper speaker seal contact surface 8092a, right speaker seal contact surface 8092b, lower speaker seal contact surface 8092c and , left speaker seal contact surface 8092d). The speaker seal 8095 is configured such that the rear surfaces of the upper speaker seal 8095a, the right speaker seal 8095b, the lower speaker seal 8095c, and the left speaker seal 8095d are formed into an upper speaker seal contact surface 8092a, a right speaker seal contact surface 8092b, and a lower speaker seal 8092b. It is arranged to contact the speaker seal contact surface 8092c and the left speaker seal contact surface 8092d.

At this time, the front surfaces of the upper speaker seal 8095a, the right speaker seal 8095b, the lower speaker seal 8095c, and the left speaker seal 8095d come into contact with the rear end surface 8083 of the speaker horn 8080 (see FIG. 243). As a result, the structure is such that it is possible to prevent the vibration generated by the speaker 8042 from being transmitted to the speaker horn 8080 via the speaker holder 8090 . If the vibration generated by the speaker 8042 were to be transmitted to the speaker horn 8080, the speaker horn 8080 and the speaker holder 8090 would rub against each other and damage each other. is assumed. If the powder adheres to the central screen sheet 8012, there is a concern that the appearance of the image displayed on the central screen sheet 8012 will deteriorate. In this regard, in the present embodiment, the existence of the speaker seal 8095 having sound insulation properties can eliminate such concerns.

When manufacturing a new game machine different from the game machine 1, it is conceivable that the speaker 8042 and the speaker holder 8090 are reused while the speaker horn 8080 is not reused. Also in this case, there is a possibility that the speaker holder 8090 and other members will come into contact with each other in the new game machine, and there is a concern that the same situation as described above will occur. However, by using the speaker seal 8095 as described above, it is possible to effectively prevent such a situation from occurring.

The gaming machine 1 according to the ninth embodiment has been described above as one embodiment of the present invention.

<Appendix F>
2. Description of the Related Art Conventionally, there is known a gaming machine capable of producing effects by using a projector (see Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 6-035066 and Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2009-240459). According to such a game machine, a game image is projected from a projector onto a projection surface such as a screen, so that the image is displayed on the screen instead of the liquid crystal display device.

In a game machine equipped with such a projector, it is important to make the image displayed on the screen clear.

SUMMARY OF THE INVENTION It is an object of the present invention to provide a gaming machine capable of displaying clear images.

In this regard, the gaming machine 1 according to the ninth embodiment has the following features.

(F-1-1) a screen (central screen sheet 8012);
a projector (projector 9020) that projects light for displaying an image on the screen;
a non-translucent wall portion (shielding wall member 8030) disposed in the passage path of the light projected by the projector,
The wall is arranged so as to block a part of the light projected by the projector from traveling ahead of the wall.
A gaming machine characterized by:

The present inventor considers that the factors that reduce the sharpness of the image displayed on the screen (central screen sheet 8012) are the light directly incident on the screen (central screen sheet 8012) and the screen (central screen sheet 8012). ), and is indirectly incident on the screen (central screen sheet 8012). Then, in order to verify the hypothesis, the present inventor arranged a wall portion (shielding wall member 8030) having no translucency in the passage path of the light projected by the projector (projector 9020), and the projector ( A part of the light projected by the projector (projector 9020) is blocked from traveling ahead of the wall (shielding wall member 8030) (a part of the light projected by the projector (projector 9020) is blocked by the screen ( A design was made that can prevent reflection on members other than the central screen sheet 8012)). With such a configuration, the inventor succeeded in improving the definition of the image displayed on the screen (central screen sheet 8012), and came up with the gaming machine 1 according to the ninth embodiment.

(F-1-2) The gaming machine of (F-1-1),
The wall portion is formed around the opening (light passage opening 8031),
The screen is irradiated with light projected by the projector and passing through the opening.
It is characterized by

According to the gaming machine 1 according to the ninth embodiment, the wall (shielding wall member 8030) is formed around the opening (light passage opening 8031), and the projector (projector 9020) projects the opening (light The screen (central screen sheet 8012) is irradiated with the light passing through the passage opening 8031). The present inventor found that by providing such a wall portion (shielding wall member 8030), image display on the screen (central screen sheet 8012) can be performed more effectively.

(F-2-1) a screen (central screen sheet 8012);
a projector (projector 9020) that projects light for displaying an image on the screen;
a dividing member (shielding wall member 8030) that separates a portion through which the light projected by the projector passes and a portion through which the light does not pass;
The partitioning member has unevenness on a portion (lower side surface 8032a) facing a portion through which the light projected by the projector passes.
A gaming machine characterized by:

As a factor for the reduction in the sharpness of the image displayed on the screen (central screen sheet 8012), the present inventor considers that the light directly incident on the screen (central screen sheet 8012) and the screen (central screen sheet 8012) ) may be mixed with the light indirectly incident on the screen (central screen sheet 8012). Then, in order to verify the hypothesis, the present inventor set a region through which part of the light projected by the projector (projector 9020) does not pass by disposing the dividing member (shielding wall member 8030). It is possible to block the progress of part of the light projected by the projector (projector 9020), thereby preventing part of the light from being reflected by members other than the screen (central screen sheet 8012). possible). At that time, the inventor devised a method of forming unevenness in a portion (lower side surface 8032a) of the dividing member (shielding wall member 8030) facing the portion through which the light projected by the projector (projector 9020) passes. . With such a configuration, the inventor succeeded in improving the definition of an image displayed on the screen (central screen sheet 8012), and came up with the gaming machine 1 according to the ninth embodiment.

(F-2-2) The gaming machine of (F-2-1),
The partition member has an opening (light passage opening 8031) and is arranged so that the light projected by the projector passes through the opening but does not pass through the periphery of the opening,
The unevenness is formed on a portion of the partition member facing the opening,
It is characterized by

According to the game machine 1 according to the ninth embodiment, the partitioning member (shielding wall member 8030) has an opening (light passage opening 8031), and the light projected by the projector (projector 9020) passes through the opening (light 8031), but are arranged so as not to pass through the peripheral portion of the opening (light passage opening 8031). It is configured to be formed on the portion (lower side surface 8032a) facing the opening 8031). The present inventor found that by providing such a partition member (shielding wall member 8030), image display on the screen (central screen sheet 8012) can be performed more effectively.

In the ninth embodiment, the lower side surface 8032a of the shielding wall member 8030 is textured. As a result, it is possible to prevent the light projected by the projector 9020 from being reflected linearly on the lower side surface 8032a. can be In the present invention, the part where the unevenness is formed (the part subjected to texturing) is not particularly limited, and unevenness is appropriately formed on the inner wall surface (the surface in contact with the space into which light enters) of the partitioning member (shielding wall member 8030). (texturing) is possible. For example, as described above, the light reflected by the mirror 9030 is reflected by the first left inner wall surface 8033a, the second left inner wall surface 8033b, the third left inner wall surface 8033c, the fourth left inner wall surface 8033d, and the first left inner wall surface 8033d. If the light is incident on the right inner wall surface 8034a, the second right inner wall surface 8034b, the third right inner wall surface 8034c, and the fourth right inner wall surface 8034d, these inner wall surfaces are roughened (textured). ). The shape of the unevenness (wrinkle pattern) formed by embossing is not particularly limited. It is possible to appropriately form a pattern or the like that is arranged at regular intervals.

In the ninth embodiment, by providing the shielding wall member 8030, part of the light projected from the projector 9020 is directed to the left LED board 8008L and left key receiving member 8009L, and the right LED board 8008R and right key receiving member 8009R. It has been explained that it is possible to prevent the reflected light from being reflected by (the reflected light is incident on the central screen sheet 8012). In this respect, in order to prevent such unintended reflection, area I and area II (see FIG. 224) should not be included in the irradiation range in the first place. It is also conceivable to limit the irradiation range in advance so that the light does not enter the left LED board 8008L and the left key receiving member 8009L, and the right LED board 8008R and the right key receiving member 8009R. However, if the irradiation range is limited in such a manner, it is assumed that it will be difficult to adjust the irradiation range after the fact. According to the game machine 1 according to the ninth embodiment, it is possible to prevent unintended reflection as described above while securing the degree of freedom regarding adjustment of the irradiation range. The sharpness of the displayed image can be improved.

<Appendix G>
2. Description of the Related Art Conventionally, there is known a gaming machine that includes a light-emitting decorative portion and is capable of producing effects by emitting light from a light source (see Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2013-013686).

In the process of earnestly examining gaming machines equipped with such light-emitting means, the inventor of the present invention thought that it might be possible to create a new type of entertainment by devising the layout of the light-emitting means. reached.

SUMMARY OF THE INVENTION The present invention has been made in view of the above points, and an object of the present invention is to create a new entertainment value in a game machine provided with light emitting means.

In this regard, the gaming machine 1 according to the ninth embodiment has the following features.

(G-1-1) a speaker (speaker 8042);
an irradiation target member (speaker horn 8080) arranged on the front side of the speaker;
A light emitting means (lower LED 8064) capable of irradiating the irradiation target member,
The light emitting means and the irradiation target member are arranged so that the light emitted from the light emitting means is incident on the irradiation target member from above, below, or from the side.
A gaming machine characterized by:

According to the game machine 1 according to the ninth embodiment, the irradiation target member (speaker horn 8080) is arranged on the front side of the speaker (speaker 8042), and the light emitted from the light emitting means (lower LED 8064) is emitted upward. Alternatively, it is configured to be incident on the member to be irradiated (speaker horn 8080) from below or from the side. As a result, it is possible to cooperate with the effect using sound from the speaker (speaker 8042) and the effect using light from the irradiation target member (speaker horn 8080), stimulating the player's sense of hearing and sight. It is possible to create novel effects.

(G-1-2) The gaming machine of (G-1-1),
The irradiation target member has a wall surface (the upper surface of the upper wall portion 8086) formed so as to surround an opening (sound emitting opening 8082) penetrating in the front-rear direction,
The light emitting means and the member to be irradiated are arranged so that the light emitted from the light emitting means is incident on the wall surface,
It is characterized by

According to the game machine 1 according to the ninth embodiment, the member to be irradiated (speaker horn 8080) is a wall surface (of the upper wall portion 8086) formed so as to surround the opening (sound emission opening 8082) penetrating in the front-rear direction. The light emitted from the light emitting means (the lower LED 8064) is incident on the wall surface (the upper surface of the upper wall portion 8086). As a result, the sound output from the speaker (speaker 8042) is emitted to the player through the opening (sound emitting opening 8082), and the irradiation target surrounds the opening (sound emitting opening 8082). It is possible to illuminate the member (speaker horn 8080), and it is possible to make the sound effect and the light effect cooperate more attractively.

In the ninth embodiment, the light emitted from the light emitting means (lower LED 8064) is incident on the member to be irradiated (speaker horn 8080) from above. In the present invention, the incident direction of the light emitted from the light emitting means (LED) to the irradiation target member (speaker horn 8080) is not particularly limited, and the light emitted from the light emitting means (LED) is directed from below to the irradiation target. The light may be incident on the member (speaker horn 8080), or may be incident on the irradiation target member (speaker horn 8080) from the side (left or right). When the light emitted from the light emitting means (LED) is incident on the member to be irradiated (speaker horn 8080) from below, the substrate (top side substrate 8060) is arranged below the member to be irradiated (speaker horn 8080). A light-emitting means (LED) capable of emitting light upward is preferably provided on the upper surface of the substrate (top side substrate 8060). In addition, when the light emitted from the light emitting means (LED) is incident on the irradiation target member (speaker horn 8080) from the side (left or right), the irradiation target member (speaker horn 8080) side ( Left or right), the substrate (top side substrate 8060) is arranged in a substantially vertical direction, and light can be emitted in the right or left direction to the side surface (right side or left side) of the substrate (top side substrate 8060). light-emitting means (LED) should be installed.

That is, in the ninth embodiment, the light emitted from the light emitting means (lower LED 8064) is described as being incident on the upper surface of the upper wall portion 8086 of the irradiation target member (speaker horn 8080). The light emitted from may be incident on the lower surface of the lower wall portion 8087 of the irradiation target member (speaker horn 8080), or the side surface of the side wall portion 8088 of the irradiation target member (speaker horn 8080) (output from the speaker 8042 (the surface opposite to the side facing the space through which the emitted sound passes). In the present invention, the light emitted from the light emitting means (LED) is emitted from the outer wall surface of the irradiation target member (speaker horn 8080) (the surface opposite to the side facing the space through which the sound output from the speaker 8042 passes). It is possible to make the incident light from an arbitrary point in .

Further, in the ninth embodiment, the irradiation target member (speaker horn 8080) has been described as having a substantially C-shaped wall portion (bulging portion 8085) when viewed from the front. In the present invention, the shape of the wall portion (bulging portion 8085) of the member to be irradiated (speaker horn 8080) is not particularly limited, and may be approximately circular in front view or approximately elliptical in front view. may be substantially rectangular when viewed from the front, substantially U-shaped when viewed from the front, substantially U-shaped when viewed from the front, or substantially parabolic when viewed from the front. may In the ninth embodiment, the two end points (point A and point B shown in FIG. 245) of the front edge of the wall portion (bulging portion 8085) are separated, but these two points are coincident. The shape of the member to be irradiated (speaker horn 8080) may be designed so that it does (there is no end point). That is, the wall portion (bulging portion 8085) of the member to be irradiated (speaker horn 8080) may be formed in an annular shape. In the present invention, the wall portion (bulging portion 8085) of the member to be irradiated (speaker horn 8080) can have a structure in which an arbitrary portion around the opening (sound emitting opening 8082) bulges forward. is. For example, the wall portion (bulging portion 8085) of the member to be irradiated (speaker horn 8080) is any one or any combination of two of the upper wall portion 8086, the lower wall portion 8087, and the side wall portion 8088. may The wall portion (bulging portion 8085) of the member to be irradiated (speaker horn 8080) may or may not overlap the speaker (speaker 8042) when viewed from the front.

<Appendix H>
2. Description of the Related Art Conventionally, there is known a gaming machine capable of producing effects by using a projector (see Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 6-035066 and Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2009-240459). According to such a game machine, a game image is projected from a projector onto a projection surface such as a screen, so that the image is displayed on the screen instead of the liquid crystal display device.

In the process of earnestly examining a game machine equipped with such a projector, the inventor of the present invention was able to create a new type of entertainment by devising the arrangement of the screen and the translucent member. I came to the idea that it might be.

SUMMARY OF THE INVENTION The present invention has been made in view of the above points, and an object of the present invention is to create a new type of entertainment in a game machine equipped with a projector.

In this regard, the gaming machine 1 according to the ninth embodiment has the following features.

(H-1-1) a screen (upper screen sheet 8023);
a projector (projector 9020) that projects light for displaying an image on the screen;
and a translucent member (inner lens 8022) having translucency,
The screen has a convex shape on the side of a predetermined direction (front side), and the translucent member also has a convex shape on the side of the predetermined direction,
The light-transmitting member is arranged on the predetermined direction side of the screen, and a predetermined gap is provided between the light-transmitting member and the screen.
A gaming machine characterized by:

According to the gaming machine 1 according to the ninth embodiment, the screen (upper screen sheet 8023) has a convex shape toward the predetermined direction side (front side), while the translucent member (inner lens 8022) It has a convex shape on the predetermined direction side (front side). The translucent member (inner lens 8022) is arranged on the predetermined direction side (front side) of the screen (upper screen sheet 8023), and the translucent member (inner lens 8022) and the screen (upper screen sheet 8023) are arranged. A predetermined gap is provided between them. By configuring in this way, the inventors have found that it is possible to impart a desired three-dimensional effect to the image displayed on the screen (upper screen sheet 8023) and create a novel visual effect.

(H-1-2) The gaming machine of (H-1-1),
The screen and the translucent member are arranged such that a surface of the screen on the predetermined direction side and a surface of the translucent member on the opposite side to the predetermined direction are substantially parallel to each other. and

According to the gaming machine 1 according to the ninth embodiment, the screen (upper screen sheet 8023) and the translucent member (inner lens 8022) are the surfaces of the screen (upper screen sheet 8023) on the predetermined direction side (front side). and the surface of the translucent member (inner lens 8022) on the side opposite to the predetermined direction (back side) are arranged to be substantially parallel to each other. By arranging the screen (upper screen sheet 8023) and the translucent member (inner lens 8022) in this way, the present inventors have achieved a more realistic image displayed on the screen (upper screen sheet 8023). It was found that a three-dimensional expression can be realized.

(H-2-1) a screen (upper screen sheet 8023);
a projector (projector 9020) that projects light for displaying an image on the screen;
a translucent first translucent member (outer lens 8021);
A second translucent member (inner lens 8022) having translucency,
The first light-transmitting member is arranged on the outer side of the gaming machine than the second light-transmitting member, and the second light-transmitting member is arranged on the outer side of the gaming machine than the screen. there is
A gaming machine characterized by:

According to the gaming machine 1 according to the ninth embodiment, the first light-transmitting member (outer lens 8021) and the second light-transmitting member (inner lens 8022) are provided as light-transmitting members. (Outer lens 8021) is arranged on the outer side of the game machine than the second light-transmitting member (inner lens 8022), and the second light-transmitting member (inner lens 8022) is a screen (upper screen sheet 8023). It is arranged on the outer side of the game machine than. By configuring in this way, the inventors have found that it is possible to impart a desired three-dimensional effect to the image displayed on the screen (upper screen sheet 8023) and create a novel visual effect.

(H-2-2) The gaming machine of (H-2-1),
A predetermined gap is provided between the second translucent member and the screen,
It is characterized by

According to the gaming machine 1 according to the ninth embodiment, a predetermined gap is provided between the second translucent member (inner lens 8022) and the screen (upper screen sheet 8023). By arranging the screen (upper screen sheet 8023) and the second light-transmitting member (inner lens 8022) in this way, the present inventors have realized that the image displayed on the screen (upper screen sheet 8023) is more realistic. It was found that a rich three-dimensional expression can be realized.

(H-3-1) A screen (upper screen sheet 8023),
a projector (projector 9020) that projects light for displaying an image on the screen;
and a translucent member (inner lens 8022) having translucency,
The translucent member has a convex surface on the outer side of the gaming machine,
The light-transmitting member is arranged on the outer side of the game machine from the screen, while the passage path of the light projected by the projector on the inner side of the game machine from the screen has a light-transmitting property. is not placed,
A gaming machine characterized by:

According to the gaming machine 1 according to the ninth embodiment, the translucent member (the inner lens 8022) has a convex surface on the outer side of the gaming machine. The translucent member (inner lens 8022) is arranged on the outer side of the game machine than the screen (upper screen sheet 8023), while the light-transmitting member (inner lens 8022) is arranged on the inner side of the game machine than the screen (upper screen sheet 8023). A light-transmitting member is not arranged in the passage path of the light projected by the projector (projector 9020). The present inventors have found that by configuring in this way, it is possible to impart a desired three-dimensional effect to an image displayed on the screen (upper screen sheet 8023) and realize a clear image display. Thus, according to the gaming machine 1 according to the ninth embodiment, it is possible to create novel visual effects.

(H-3-2) The gaming machine of (H-3-1),
The translucent member has a concave surface on the inner side of the game machine,
The screen has a convex surface on the outer side of the game machine,
The light-transmitting member and the screen are arranged such that the concave surface of the light-transmitting member and the convex surface of the screen are substantially parallel to each other,
It is characterized by

According to the gaming machine 1 according to the ninth embodiment, the translucent member (inner lens 8022) has a concave surface on the inner side of the gaming machine, and the screen (upper screen sheet 8023) has a convex shape. The translucent member (inner lens 8022) and the screen (upper screen sheet 8023) are arranged so that the concave surface of the translucent member (inner lens 8022) and the convex surface of the screen are substantially parallel. are placed in By arranging the screen (upper screen sheet 8023) and the translucent member (inner lens 8022) in this way, the present inventors have achieved a more realistic image displayed on the screen (upper screen sheet 8023). It was found that a three-dimensional expression can be realized.

In the ninth embodiment, the first light-transmitting member (outer lens 8021) and the second light-transmitting member (inner lens 8022) are provided as light-transmitting members (lenses). By doubling the light-transmitting member (lens) in this way, it is possible to perform molding more easily and at a lower cost than in the case of using a single thick lens, thereby realizing mass productivity. Together with this, cost reduction can be achieved. However, in the present invention, only one of the first light-transmitting member (outer lens 8021) and the second light-transmitting member (inner lens 8022) may be provided. . As described above, the distance between the back surface 8021b of the outer lens 8021 and the front surface 8022a of the inner lens 8022 may be zero, in which case the outer lens 8021 and the inner lens 8022 are effectively one lens. can be viewed.

In addition, in the ninth embodiment, both the first light-transmitting member (outer lens 8021) and the second light-transmitting member (inner lens 8022) have convex surfaces on the outer side of the game machine. It has been described as having a concave surface on one side. In the present invention, the shape of the translucent member (lens) is not particularly limited, and for example, the surface on the inner side of the game machine may be convex or flat. That is, the translucent member in the present invention is not limited to a convex meniscus lens, and may be a biconvex lens or a plano-convex lens.

Further, in the ninth embodiment, on the premise that the upper screen unit 8020 is provided on the front surface of the game machine 1 (upper door mechanism UD), the screen (upper screen sheet 8023) is provided on the outer side (front side) of the screen (upper screen sheet 8023). The second light-transmitting member (inner lens 8022) is arranged, and the first light-transmitting member (outer lens 8021) is arranged on the outer side (front side) of the second light-transmitting member (inner lens 8022). did. In the present invention, the location where the upper screen unit 8020 is provided is not particularly limited, and the upper screen unit 8020 may be provided on the side surface of the upper door mechanism UD or the cabinet G. For example, when the upper screen unit 8020 is provided on the right or left side wall of the upper door mechanism UD, the second translucent member (inner lens 8022 ), and the first light-transmitting member (outer lens 8021) can be placed on the outer side (right or left side) of the second light-transmitting member (inner lens 8022).

Further, in the ninth embodiment, it has been described that no translucent member is arranged on the inner side (back side) of the upper screen sheet 8023 . In the present invention, for example, a translucent member (transparent acrylic panel) is arranged on the inner side (back side) of the screen (upper screen sheet 8023), whereby the translucent member (outer lens 8021 to inner lens 8022) and the screen (upper screen sheet 8023) may be fitted and fixed. However, in this case, friction occurs between the light-transmitting member (transparent acrylic panel) and the screen (upper screen sheet 8023) due to vibrations that occur during the game, and the light-transmitting member ( transparent acrylic panel) or the screen (upper screen sheet 8023) may be scratched. When an image displayed on the screen (upper screen sheet 8023) is magnified by the translucent members (outer lens 8021 to inner lens 8022), even a small scratch has a large effect on the displayed image. is concerned. From this point of view, it is desirable not to arrange a translucent member on the inner side (rear side) of the upper screen sheet 8023 as in the ninth embodiment.

[Tenth embodiment]
The first to ninth embodiments have been described above. The tenth embodiment will be described below. The basic configuration of the gaming machine 1 according to the tenth embodiment is the same as the gaming machine 1 according to the first to ninth embodiments. In the following description, the same components as those of the game machine 1 according to the first to ninth embodiments are denoted by the same reference numerals. In addition, the description of the portions that the descriptions of the first to ninth embodiments apply to the tenth embodiment will be omitted.

<Measures against reflection of irradiated light>
FIG. 251 is a perspective view of the central screen sheet and the rear translucent plate as seen from the rear and above. FIG. 252 is a cross-sectional view of the central screen sheet and the rear translucent plate. FIG. 253(a) is a schematic diagram showing from above how light projected from a projector is incident on a rear light-transmitting plate in this embodiment. FIG. 253(b) is a schematic diagram showing from above how light projected from a projector is incident on a rear translucent plate in another embodiment. FIG. 254 is a cross-sectional view of the central screen sheet and the rear translucent plate. FIG. 255 is a perspective view of the rear light-transmitting plate as seen from the rear and below. FIG. 256 is a partially enlarged perspective view of the rear light-transmitting plate viewed from the rear and below.

251 and 252 show a state in which the central screen sheet 8012 and the rear translucent plate 8013 are assembled. FIG. 252 shows how the central screen sheet 8012 and the rear light-transmitting plate 8013 are cut along a horizontal plane. FIG. 253 schematically shows cut surfaces of the central screen sheet 8012 and the rear translucent plate 8013 shown in FIG. In FIG. 254, the central screen sheet 8012 and the rear translucent plate 8013 shown in FIG. 252 are partially enlarged.

As shown in FIGS. 251 and 252, in this embodiment, a rear light-transmitting plate 8013 is arranged on the rear side of the central screen sheet 8012 . This point is the same as the ninth embodiment (see FIGS. 217 and 218). As in the ninth embodiment, in this embodiment as well, the central screen sheet 8012 is formed continuously from the flat portion 8012a located in the center and the left and right side edges of the flat portion 8012a toward the rear. and a curved portion 8012b. The rear light-transmitting plate 8013 includes a flat portion 8013a located in the center, and curved portions 8013b continuously formed rearward from both left and right side edges of the flat portion 8013a.

Here, in the ninth embodiment, the rear side surface of the flat portion 8012a of the central screen sheet 8012 and the front side surface of the flat portion 8013a of the rear light-transmitting plate 8013 are in close contact with each other, and the curved portion of the central screen sheet 8012 It has been described that the rear side surface of 8012b and the front side surface of curved portion 8013b of rear light-transmitting plate 8013 are in close contact with each other. On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the back side surface of the plane portion 8012a of the central screen sheet 8012 and the front side surface of the plane portion 8013a of the rear light-transmitting plate 8013 are in close contact (or close to each other (approximately A gap is formed between the rear-side surface of the curved portion 8012b of the central screen sheet 8012 and the front-side surface of the curved portion 8013b of the rear light-transmitting plate 8013. .

For clarity, in FIG. 251, the upper edge of the curved portion 8012b of the central screen sheet 8012 and the upper edge of the curved portion 8013b of the rear light-transmitting plate 8013 are shown in black. In addition, in FIG. 252, cut surfaces of the central screen sheet 8012 and the rear light-transmitting plate 8013 are shown in black. The curved portion 8013b of the rear light-transmitting plate 8013 (assuming that the curved portion 8013b is made of a material having flexibility) is pulled toward the rear (light projected from the projector 9020). It has a shape that is inclined toward the upstream side in the traveling direction).

As a result, the degree of curvature of the curved portion 8013b of the rear light-transmitting plate 8013 is smaller than the degree of curvature of the curved portion 8012b of the central screen sheet 8012 . That is, the curvature of the curved portion 8013b of the rear light-transmitting plate 8013 is smaller than the curvature of the curved portion 8012b of the central screen sheet 8012 . For example, the curvature radius of the curved portion 8013b is 5 times or more (or 10 times or more, 20 times or more, 50 times or more, 100 times or more, etc.) of the curvature radius of the curved portion 8012b. In this embodiment, it is assumed that part of the curved portion 8013b of the rear light-transmitting plate 8013 is substantially flat (curvature is 0).

As described in the eighth embodiment, the curvature is a quantity representing the degree of curvature of a curve or curved surface. called radius. For example, the curvature of a circumference of radius r is 1/r and the radius of curvature is r. The steeper the curve, the greater the curvature and the smaller the radius of curvature. If the curve is a circular arc, the radius of curvature can be represented by the radius of the circular arc. On the other hand, if the curve is different from the circular arc, the radius of curvature can be represented by a predetermined function representing the degree of curvature of the curve. can be done.

In this embodiment, similarly to the ninth embodiment, the light projected from the projector 9020 travels downward and is then reflected forward by the mirror 9030 (see FIG. 64). Accordingly, the light projected from the projector 9020 enters the rear light-transmitting plate 8013 . FIG. 253( a ) shows how the light reflected by the mirror 9030 and traveling in the direction along the straight line L is incident on the point X on the rear light-transmitting plate 8013 . A point X is a point on the curved portion 8013b of the rear light-transmitting plate 8013, and the curved portion 8013b is formed substantially flat. Therefore, the direction of the tangent (L ₁ (X)) to the curved portion 8013b at the point X substantially coincides with the forming direction of the curved portion 8013b. The straight line L and the straight line L ₁ (X) are substantially orthogonal, and the angle α formed by the straight line L and the straight line L ₁ (X) is substantially 90°. That is, the incident angle (90°−α) of the light traveling in the direction along the straight line L with respect to the curved portion 8013b is approximately 0°.

On the other hand, another embodiment shown in FIG. 253(b) corresponds to the configuration of the ninth embodiment. The curvature of the curved portion 8013b of the rear light-transmitting plate 8013 according to the ninth embodiment is larger than the curvature of the curved portion 8013b of the rear light-transmitting plate 8013 according to the present embodiment, and the curvature of the curved portion 8012b of the central screen sheet 8012 is It is substantially the same as the curvature. The curvature of the curved portion 8012b of the central screen sheet 8012 is substantially the same between this embodiment and the ninth embodiment. FIG. 253(b) shows how the light reflected by the mirror 9030 and traveling in the direction along the straight line L is incident on the point Y on the rear transparent plate 8013 . A point Y is a point on the curved portion 8013b of the rear light-transmitting plate 8013 according to the ninth embodiment, and is a point on the straight line L downstream of the point X in the traveling direction of light. The angle β formed between the straight line (L ₂ (Y)) perpendicular to the tangent (L ₁ (Y)) to the curved portion 8013b at the point Y and the straight line L, that is, the light traveling in the direction along the straight line L The incident angle with respect to the curved portion 8013b is larger than the incident angle (90°-α) in this embodiment.

Since the incident angle of the light traveling in the direction along the straight line L with respect to the curved portion 8013b is as described above, in the ninth embodiment, the light reflected at the point Y is directed toward the flat portion 8012a of the central screen sheet 8012. It is easier to progress to On the other hand, in the present embodiment, such reflection can be suppressed to prevent the reflected light from entering the central screen sheet 8012 .

As shown in FIG. 254, in the vicinity of the left end of the back surface of the curved portion 8013b of the rear light-transmitting plate 8013, texturing is applied over a predetermined range to form fine unevenness. there is In addition, in the vicinity of the left end of the curved portion 8012b of the central screen sheet 8012, fine irregularities are formed by texturing over a predetermined range. In FIG. 254, the areas where texturing is applied are indicated by oblique lines. The rear light-transmitting plate 8013 and the central screen sheet 8012 have a bilaterally symmetrical structure. Similar texturing is also applied to the vicinity of the right end of the back side surface of the curved portion 8012b of 8012 . The texture processing is as described in the ninth embodiment. This makes it possible to more effectively prevent the light projected from the projector 9020 from entering the central screen sheet 8012 due to reflection.

As shown in FIGS. 255 and 256, the rear light-transmitting plate 8013 has a rear upper end surface 8013f formed to protrude rearward from the upper end of the rear surface 8013e (surface on the rear side of the flat portion 8013a and the curved portion 8013b). have. The rear upper end surface 8013f is formed substantially perpendicular to the rear surface 8013e. For the sake of clarity, in FIG. 255, the rear upper end surface 8013f is hatched. The rear upper end surface 8013f has an arc-shaped portion 8013g and a horizontal portion 8013h as portions that are continuous with the rear surface of the flat portion 8013a. The arcuate portion 8013g is formed in an arcuate shape along the upper screen unit installation opening 8013d. The horizontal portion 8013h is formed continuously from both left and right side edges of the arc-shaped portion 8013g, and constitutes a substantially horizontal surface.

Although not shown, a black sheet is attached to the rear upper end surface 8013f. As the black sheet, a nonwoven fabric such as Himeron (registered trademark of Ambic Co., Ltd.) can be used. Accordingly, it is possible to more effectively prevent the light projected from the projector 9020 from being absorbed and the reflected light from entering the central screen sheet 8012 (or the upper screen sheet 8023). Note that instead of attaching a black sheet, texturing may be applied to the rear upper end surface 8013f, but from the viewpoint of preventing reflection of light projected from the projector 9020, it is desirable to attach a black sheet. .

<Improved strength of the central screen unit>
FIG. 257 is a perspective view of the rear translucent plate viewed from the front and below. FIG. 258 is a partially enlarged perspective view of the rear light-transmitting plate viewed from the front and below. FIG. 259 is a partially enlarged perspective view of the periphery of the first reinforcing projection. FIG. 260 is a partially enlarged perspective view showing a state in which the first reinforcing projections and the second reinforcing projections are in contact with the central screen sheet.

As shown in FIG. 257, the rear light-transmitting plate 8013 has a front upper end surface 8013j that protrudes forward from the upper end of the front surface 8013i (surface on the front side of the flat portion 8013a and the curved portion 8013b). ing. The front upper end surface 8013j is formed substantially perpendicular to the front surface 8013i. For clarity, in FIG. 257, the front upper end surface 8013j is shown in black.

The front upper end surface 8013j has a shape corresponding to the upper end edge of the front transparent plate 8011 and the upper end edge of the central screen sheet 8012 . As a result, the front light-transmitting plate 8011 and the center screen sheet 8012 are attached to the rear light-transmitting plate 8013 in a state where the upper edge of the front light-transmitting plate 8011 and the upper edge of the center screen sheet 8012 are fitted to the front upper end surface 8013j. The strength of the center screen unit 8010 is improved together with the rear upper end face 8013f.

Also, the rear light-transmitting plate 8013 has a first reinforcing projection 8014a, a second reinforcing projection 8014b, a third reinforcing projection 8014c, and a fourth reinforcing projection 8014d. Since the third reinforcing projection 8014c and the fourth reinforcing projection 8014d have structures symmetrical to the first reinforcing projection 8014a and the second reinforcing projection 8014b, respectively, the first reinforcing projection 8014c and the fourth reinforcing projection 8014d will be described below. Only the 8014a and the second reinforcing projection 8014b will be described.

As shown in FIG. 258, the first reinforcing projection 8014a is provided at the upper right corner of the rear translucent plate 8013. As shown in FIG. A screw hole 8015a and a screw hole 8015b are provided in the vicinity of the first reinforcing projection 8014a. The shielding wall member 8030 (see FIG. 223) is attached to the rear translucent plate 8013 by screws inserted through the screw holes 8015a and 8015b from the rear to the front. The first reinforcing projection 8014a, the screw hole 8015a, and the screw hole 8015b are arranged in a positional relationship such that they are the vertices of an isosceles triangle.

As shown in FIG. 259, the first reinforcing projection 8014a is formed as a projection that protrudes substantially vertically forward from the upper right flat surface 8016. As shown in FIG. The first reinforcing projection 8014a has a truncated quadrangular pyramid shape with a rounded vertex. The upper right flat surface 8016 constitutes a plane substantially parallel to the flat portion 8012a of the central screen sheet 8012 . Therefore, the projecting direction of the first reinforcing projection 8014a is substantially perpendicular to the plane portion 8012a of the central screen sheet 8012. As shown in FIG.

As shown in FIG. 258, the second reinforcing projection 8014b is formed continuously with the right end of the front upper end surface 8013j. Specifically, the second reinforcing projection 8014b is formed as a projection projecting forward from the front surface 8013i. An upper right end surface 8017 formed at the right end of the front upper end surface 8013j constitutes a side surface of the second reinforcing projection 8014b. An upper side surface 8019 is formed continuously forward from the upper edge of the front end surface 8018 of the second reinforcing projection 8014b. For the sake of clarity, in FIG. 258, the upper right end surface 8017 is hatched and the front end surface 8018 is shown in black.

As shown in FIG. 260, when the central screen sheet 8012 and the rear light-transmitting plate 8013 are assembled, the front end of the first reinforcing projection 8014a and the upper portion of the rear edge 8012c of the curved portion 8012b of the central screen sheet 8012 abuts. In addition, the front end surface 8018 of the second reinforcing projection 8014b and the upper portion of the rear surface 8012d of the central screen sheet 8012 (surface on the rear surface side of the curved portion 8012b) are in contact with each other. At this time, the upper side surface 8019 is positioned above the upper edge 8012 e of the central screen sheet 8012 . For clarity, FIG. 260 shows trailing edge 8012c hatched and top edge 8012e shaded.

In this regard, in the present embodiment, as described above, between the back surface (back surface 8012d) of the curved portion 8012b of the central screen sheet 8012 and the front surface of the curved portion 8013b of the rear light-transmitting plate 8013, , a gap is formed. As a result, there is concern that the strength of the central screen unit 8010 will decrease, but the presence of the first reinforcing projections 8014a and the second reinforcing projections 8014b makes it possible to reinforce the central screen unit 8010. .

The gaming machine 1 according to the tenth embodiment has been described above as one embodiment of the present invention.

<Appendix I>
2. Description of the Related Art Conventionally, there is known a gaming machine capable of producing effects by using a projector (see Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 6-035066 and Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2009-240459). According to such a game machine, a game image is projected from a projector onto a projection surface such as a screen, so that the image is displayed on the screen instead of the liquid crystal display device.

In a game machine equipped with such a projector, it is important to make the image displayed on the screen clear.

SUMMARY OF THE INVENTION It is an object of the present invention to provide a gaming machine capable of displaying clear images.

In this respect, the gaming machine 1 according to the tenth embodiment has the following features.

(I-1-1) a screen (central screen sheet 8012);
a projector (projector 9020) that projects light for displaying an image on the screen;
A translucent member (rear translucent plate 8013) having translucency,
the translucent member is arranged upstream in the traveling direction of the light projected by the projector,
An incident angle when the light projected by the projector is incident on the light-transmitting member, and an incident angle when the light projected by the projector is incident on the screen on the assumption that the light-transmitting member does not exist is different from
A gaming machine characterized by:

The present inventor believes that the factors that reduce the sharpness of the image displayed on the screen (central screen sheet 8012) are the light directly incident on the screen (central screen sheet 8012) and the translucent member (rear side). It was hypothesized that light indirectly entering the screen (central screen sheet 8012) due to reflection on the transparent plate 8013) may be mixed. In order to verify this hypothesis, the present inventors investigated the incident angle when the light projected by the projector (projector 9020) enters the light-transmitting member (rear light-transmitting plate 8013) and the light-transmitting member (rear Assuming that the side light-transmitting plate 8013) does not exist, the light projected by the projector (projector 9020) is different from the incident angle when it enters the screen (central screen sheet 8012) (projector (projector 9020) The design is such that the light projected by the light-transmitting member (rear light-transmitting plate 8013) is less likely to be reflected toward the screen (central screen sheet 8012). With such a configuration, the inventor succeeded in improving the definition of an image displayed on the screen (central screen sheet 8012), and came up with the gaming machine 1 according to the tenth embodiment.

(I-1-2) The gaming machine of (I-1-1),
The screen includes a first region (flat portion 8012a) formed substantially flat and a second region (curved portion 8012b) having a curved shape,
The translucent member includes a third region (curved portion 8013b) having a smaller curvature than the second region,
an incident angle when the light projected by the projector is incident on the third region of the light-transmitting member; The angle of incidence when incident on the second region is different,
It is characterized by

According to the gaming machine 1 according to the tenth embodiment, the screen (central screen sheet 8012) has a substantially flat first region (flat portion 8012a) and a curved second region (curved portion 8012b). On the other hand, the translucent member (rear translucent plate 8013) has a third region (curved portion 8013b) having a smaller curvature than the second region (curved portion 8012b). Then, the incident angle when the light projected by the projector (projector 9020) is incident on the third region (curved portion 8013b) of the light-transmitting member (rear light-transmitting plate 8013) and the light-transmitting member (rear light-transmitting plate 8013) The angle of incidence is different from that when the light projected by the projector (projector 9020) enters the second region (curved portion 8012b) of the screen (central screen sheet 8012) assuming that the plate 8013) does not exist. . The present inventors have found that such a configuration enables more effective image display on the screen (central screen sheet 8012).

In the tenth embodiment, the incident angle (90°−α) (see FIG. 253(a)) when the light projected by the projector (projector 9020) enters the translucent member (rear translucent plate 8013) is , the incident angle β (see FIG. 253(b)) when the light projected by the projector (projector 9020) is incident on the translucent member (rear translucent plate 8013) according to the ninth embodiment. explained. The "incidence angle when the light projected by the projector (projector 9020) enters the screen (central screen sheet 8012) assuming that the light-transmitting member (rear light-transmitting plate 8013) does not exist" is It can be regarded as substantially the same as the incident angle β. If the light-transmitting member (rear light-transmitting plate 8013) was not provided, the light projected by the projector (projector 9020) would be directed to the second area (curved portion 8012b) of the screen (central screen sheet 8012). It is also assumed that the light is reflected toward the first region (flat portion 8012a) when incident on the . According to the gaming machine 1 according to the tenth embodiment, it is possible to prevent the sharpness of the image displayed on the screen (central screen sheet 8012) from deteriorating due to such reflection.

From this point of view, the light-transmitting member (rear light-transmitting plate 8013) is positioned on the back side of the second area (curved portion 8012b) of the screen (central screen sheet 8012) (in the traveling direction of the light projected by the projector). upstream). For example, the light-transmitting member (rear light-transmitting plate 8013) may include only the curved portion 8013b and not the planar portion 8013a.

The incident angle (90°-α) when the light projected by the projector (projector 9020) is incident on the translucent member (rear translucent plate 8013) is not particularly limited, but may be a relatively small value (for example, 30° or less (or 15° or less, 10° or less, or 5° or less, etc.) can be adopted.

(I-2-1) a screen (central screen sheet 8012);
a projector (projector 9020) that projects light for displaying an image on the screen;
and a reinforcing member (rear translucent plate 8013) for reinforcing the screen,
The reinforcing member is arranged upstream in the traveling direction of the light projected by the projector,
an end portion of the reinforcing member is inclined toward the upstream side in the traveling direction;
A gaming machine characterized by:

The present inventor considers that the factors that reduce the sharpness of the image displayed on the screen (central screen sheet 8012) are the light directly incident on the screen (central screen sheet 8012) and the screen (central screen sheet 8012). ) is mixed with the light indirectly incident on the screen (central screen sheet 8012) by being reflected by the reinforcing member (rear translucent plate 8013) for reinforcing the rice field. Then, in order to verify the hypothesis, the inventors of the present invention determined that the end of the reinforcing member (rear translucent plate 8013) is inclined toward the upstream side in the traveling direction of the light projected by the projector (projector 9020). (The incident angle of the light projected by the projector (projector 9020) can be adjusted when it enters the reinforcing member (rear translucent plate 8013)). With such a configuration, the inventor succeeded in improving the definition of an image displayed on the screen (central screen sheet 8012), and came up with the gaming machine 1 according to the tenth embodiment.

(I-2-2) The gaming machine of (I-2-1) above,
unevenness is formed in a predetermined region near the end of the reinforcing member,
It is characterized by

According to the gaming machine 1 according to the tenth embodiment, unevenness is formed in a predetermined region near the end of the reinforcing member (rear translucent plate 8013). The present inventors have found that such a configuration enables more effective image display on the screen (central screen sheet 8012).

By arranging the reinforcing member (rear translucent plate 8013), the strength against external pressure can be ensured. (Rear side translucent plate 8013) desirably has a corresponding thickness. However, if the thickness of the reinforcing member (rear light-transmitting plate 8013) increases, the light projected by the projector (projector 9020) will be absorbed by the light-transmitting member (rear light-transmitting plate 8013) (especially at the end, that is, the irradiation by the projector). There is also concern that the light travels in an unintended direction due to the influence of refraction that occurs when the light is incident on a position away from the center of the range. In this respect, according to the gaming machine 1 according to the tenth embodiment, the end portion of the reinforcing member (rear translucent plate 8013) is inclined toward the upstream side in the traveling direction of the light projected by the projector (projector 9020). Therefore, it is possible to reduce the incident angle (90°-α) when the light projected by the projector (projector 9020) enters the translucent member (rear translucent plate 8013). refraction effects can be reduced.

In the tenth embodiment, texturing is performed near the end of the rear light-transmitting plate 8013 and near the end of the central screen sheet 8012 . However, in the present invention, the reinforcing member (rear translucent plate 8013) and the screen (central screen sheet 8012) may not be textured (the unevenness described above may not be formed). In particular, when the screen (central screen sheet 8012) is textured (embossed), there is concern that the appearance of the image displayed on the screen (central screen sheet 8012) may deteriorate. In this regard, in the tenth embodiment, even if the reinforcing member (rear translucent plate 8013) and the screen (central screen sheet 8012) were not uneven (textured), the ninth embodiment Compared to the form, it is possible to prevent the reflection of the light projected from the projector (projector 9020) accordingly.

[Eleventh embodiment]
The first to tenth embodiments have been described above. The eleventh embodiment will be described below. The basic configuration of the gaming machine 1 according to the eleventh embodiment is the same as the gaming machine 1 according to the first to tenth embodiments. In the following description, the same components as those of the game machine 1 according to the first to tenth embodiments are denoted by the same reference numerals. In addition, the descriptions of the portions that the descriptions of the first to tenth embodiments are applicable to the eleventh embodiment will be omitted.

<Light irradiation range and screen placement position>
In this embodiment, similarly to the sixth embodiment, the light projected from the projector device B2 travels upward and is then reflected forward by the mirror mechanism B3 (optical mirror B32) (see FIG. 85). . The light projected from the projector device B2 reaches the upper door mechanism UD.

The upper door mechanism UD is provided with a main screen sheet 8112 and five decorative screen sheets 8133 (see FIGS. 262-264). The light projected from the projector device B2 enters the main screen sheet 8112 and the five decorative screen sheets 8133 from behind (rear side), and an image is displayed on the front side (display surface) of these screen sheets. will be Details will be described below.

<Upper door mechanism UD>
Figure 261 is a front view of the upper door mechanism. FIG. 262 is a front perspective view of the state in which the main screen unit is removed from the upper door mechanism.

As shown in FIG. 261, a main display window DD4 (see FIG. 3) is provided slightly below the vertical center of the upper door mechanism UD. A main screen unit 8110 is provided in the upper portion of the upper door mechanism UD. Near the lower edge of the main screen unit 8110 are five decoration units 8120 (first decoration unit 8120a, second decoration unit 8120b, third decoration unit 8120c, fourth decoration unit 8120d, and fifth decoration unit 8120e). is provided.

As shown in FIG. 262, the main screen unit 8110 includes a front translucent plate 8111 and a main screen sheet 8112. As shown in FIG.

The front light-transmitting plate 8111 is mainly made of resin such as a light-transmitting acrylic plate or a glass plate, and is basically formed in a planar shape over the entire surface and is formed to have a uniform thickness. ing.

The main screen sheet 8112 is a transmissive screen on which a projection image is projected from behind, and is similar to the central screen sheet 8012 (see FIG. 217) described in the ninth embodiment. It has a rear-side incident surface on which projected light is incident, and a front-side display surface on which a projection image is projected by transmitting the light incident on the incident surface. The main screen sheet 8112 is mainly made of, for example, a translucent glass plate, an acrylic plate, or a resin film, and is basically formed in a planar shape over the entire surface and is formed to have a uniform thickness. and appear milky white, translucent, or gray when not projected.

The main screen sheet 8112 is arranged behind the front transparent plate 8111 . Specifically, the rear side surface of the front light-transmitting plate 8111 and the front side surface of the main screen sheet 8112 are in close contact with each other. Light projected from the projector device B2 is incident on the incident surface (surface on the back side) of the main screen sheet 8112 . As a result, an image (still image or moving image) relating to the game is displayed on the display surface (front surface) of the main screen sheet 8112 . The front light-transmitting plate 8111 is transparent, and basically there is no structure (except for the peripheral structure of the decoration unit 8120) that blocks the player's view in front of the front light-transmitting plate 8011. When an image is displayed on the screen sheet 8112, the image is visible to the player.

It should be noted that the light projected from the projector device B2 also enters the incident surfaces (surfaces on the back side) of the five decorative screen sheets 8133 . As a result, an image (still image or moving image) relating to the game is displayed on the display surface (surface on the front side) of each decorative screen sheet 8133 . The decorative screen sheet 8133 is a constituent element of the decorative unit 8120 . The decoration unit 8120 will be detailed later.

<Decoration unit 8120>
FIG. 263 is a front view of the decoration unit. 264 and 265 are exploded perspective views of the decoration unit. Figure 266 is a cross-sectional view of a decorative screen unit. Figure 267 is a front view of a decorative frame. FIG. 268 is a side view showing how the light projected from the projector device is incident on the decorative screen sheet. FIG. 269 is a cross-sectional view of the decoration unit.

FIG. 264 shows each component of the decoration unit 8120 viewed obliquely from the front. FIG. 265 shows the components of the decoration unit 8120 viewed obliquely from behind. FIG. 266 shows how the decorative screen unit 8130 (the decorative frame 8140 is removed from the decorative unit 8120) is cut along a horizontal plane near the center. FIG. 268 shows how the decorative screen sheet 8133 is cut along the vertical plane in the front-rear direction near the center. FIG. 269 shows how the decoration unit 8120 is cut along the vertical plane in the front-rear direction near the center.

Since the basic configuration of the five decoration units 8120 is the same, hereinafter, the first decoration unit 8120a, the second decoration unit 8120b, the third decoration unit 8120c, the fourth decoration unit 8120d, and the fifth decoration Unit 8120e will be described indiscriminately. Figure 263 and subsequent drawings show the third decoration unit 8120c as a representative of the first decoration unit 8120a, the second decoration unit 8120b, the third decoration unit 8120c, the fourth decoration unit 8120d, and the fifth decoration unit 8120e. ing.

As shown in FIGS. 263-265, the decorative unit 8120 includes a decorative screen unit 8130 and a decorative frame 8140. As shown in FIGS. The decorative screen unit 8130 has a cover member 8131 , a lens member 8132 and a decorative screen sheet 8133 .

The cover member 8131 has a curved shape (for example, a bowl shape obtained by cutting a sphere at a predetermined portion), and is arranged so that the center of curvature is on the back side. The cover member 8131 is mainly made of resin such as a translucent acrylic plate or a glass plate, and is formed to have a predetermined thickness. Thus, the cover member 8131 has a front surface (front surface 8131a) and a rear surface (back surface 8131b).

The lens member 8132 has a curved shape (for example, a bowl shape obtained by cutting a sphere at a predetermined portion), and is arranged so that the center of curvature is on the back side. The lens member 8132 is mainly made of translucent polycarbonate or the like, and is formed to have a predetermined thickness. Thus, the lens member 8132 has a front surface (front surface 8132a) and a rear surface (back surface 8132b). The lens member 8132 is a convex lens (a so-called convex meniscus lens) in which both the front surface 8132a and the rear surface 8132b are convex toward the front surface, and the central portion is thicker than the peripheral portion.

The decorative screen sheet 8133 has a flat screen curved shape (for example, a bowl shape obtained by cutting a sphere at a predetermined portion), and is formed to have a uniform thickness over the entire surface. . The cross-sectional shape of the decorative screen sheet 8133 when cut along a horizontal or vertical plane is an arc, similar to the cross-sectional shape of the upper screen sheet 8023 (see FIG. 217) described in the ninth embodiment when cut along a horizontal or vertical plane. have a shape.

Like the main screen sheet 8112, the decorative screen sheet 8133 is a transmissive screen on which a projected image is projected from behind. The decorative screen sheet 8133 is mainly made of, for example, a translucent glass plate, an acrylic plate, or a resin film, and exhibits a milky white, translucent, or gray color when not projected.

The decorative screen sheet 8133 has a rear-side entrance surface 8133a on which light projected from the projector device B2 is incident, a front-side display surface 8133b on which a projection image is projected by transmitting the light incident on the entrance surface, and have The decorative screen sheet 8133 is arranged so that the center of curvature is on the back side. That is, the incident surface 8133a and the display surface 8133b of the decorative screen sheet 8133 are convex toward the downstream side in the traveling direction of the light projected from the projector device B2.

As shown in FIG. 266, the decorative screen sheet 8133 is arranged on the rear side of the lens member 8132, and the lens member 8132 is arranged on the rear side of the cover member 8131. As shown in FIG. Specifically, the rear surface 8131b of the cover member 8131 and the front surface 8132a of the lens member 8132 face each other, and the rear surface 8132b of the lens member 8132 and the display surface 8133b of the decorative screen sheet 8133 face each other. For the sake of clarity, in FIG. 266, the cut surface of the cover member 8131 is hatched, the cut surface of the lens member 8132 is hatched, and the cut surface of the decorative screen sheet 8133 is black.

The rear surface 8131b of the cover member 8131 and the front surface 8132a of the lens member 8132 are in proximity (approximately in contact), but there is a slight gap (the rear surface 8021b of the outer lens 8021 and the front surface of the inner lens 8022 described in the ninth embodiment). 8022a) may be formed. Further, the rear surface 8132b of the lens member 8132 and the display surface 8133b of the decorative screen sheet 8133 are in close proximity (substantially abutting), but there is a slight gap between the rear surface 8022b of the inner lens 8022 described in the ninth embodiment and the display surface 8133b of the decorative screen sheet 8133. A gap similar to the gap formed between the screen sheet 8023 and the display surface 8023b may be formed (see FIG. 230).

A decorative frame 8140 is arranged from the front side to the side of the decorative screen unit 8130 configured as described above. Like the cover member 8131, the lens member 8132, and the decorative screen sheet 8133, the decorative frame 8140 has a curved shape (for example, a bowl shape obtained by cutting a sphere at a predetermined portion). The shape of the back side of the decorative frame 8140 corresponds to the shape of the front surface 8131a of the cover member 8131, so that the decorative screen unit 8130 can be fitted to the back side of the decorative frame 8140. As a result, the decorative screen unit 8130 is housed in the recessed portion on the rear side of the decorative frame 8140 .

As shown in FIG. 267, the decorative frame 8140 includes an upper portion 8141 and a lower portion 8142 formed apart from each other, and four bridges connecting the upper portion 8141 and the lower portion 8142 so as to bridge. A portion 8143 (a first bridge portion 8143a, a second bridge portion 8143b, a third bridge portion 8143c, and a fourth bridge portion 8143d) is provided. The four bridges 8143 form three openings 8144 (a left opening 8144a, a central opening 8144b, and a right opening 8144c).

The left opening 8144a is defined by a first bridge portion 8143a and a second bridge portion 8143b. The central opening 8144b is partitioned by a second bridge portion 8143b and a third bridge portion 8143c. The right opening 8144c is partitioned by a third bridge portion 8143c and a fourth bridge portion 8143d. For clarity, left opening 8144a, central opening 8144b, and right opening 8144c are hatched in FIG.

The decorative frame 8140 is decorated with a predetermined decoration, and the upper portion 8141 is provided with a shaping portion 8141a. In the first decoration unit 8120a, the second decoration unit 8120b, the third decoration unit 8120c, the fourth decoration unit 8120d, and the fifth decoration unit 8120e, the shapes of the shaping portions 8141a are different from each other.

The light projected from the projector device B2 is incident on the incident surface 8133a of the decorative screen sheet 8133, and the display surface 8133b of the decorative screen sheet 8133 displays an image (still image or moving image) relating to the game. The image is magnified by lens member 8132 . The cover member 8131 is formed transparent, and since there is no structure that blocks the player's view in front of the three openings 8144 formed in the decorative frame 8140, when an image is displayed on the decorative screen sheet 8133 , the image becomes visible to the player through the opening 8144 .

Here, as described above, the light projected from the projector device B2 travels upward and is then reflected forward by the mirror mechanism B3 (see FIG. 85). As a result, the light reflected by the mirror mechanism B3 travels obliquely downward. In FIG. 268, the light irradiation range is indicated by oblique lines. Also, for the sake of clarity, the cut surface of the decorative screen sheet 8133 is shown in black.

As shown in FIG. 268, the decorative screen sheet 8133 has a projected area 8133c as an image displayable area. A projectable area 8133d, which occupies most of the projection area 8133c, is irradiated with light projected from the projector device B2. It is difficult for the light projected from the device B2 to irradiate. In this embodiment, the upper part 8141 of the decorative frame 8140 is arranged on the front side of the projection difficult area 8133e. When viewed from the front, the difficult-to-projection region 8133e is completely covered with the upper part 8141, and the decoration frame 8140 does not have translucency, so the difficult-to-projection region 8133e is not visible to the player. It's not supposed to. As a result, it is possible to prevent deterioration in appearance due to the player visually recognizing the difficult-to-project region 8133e.

As shown in FIG. 269, since the image displayed on the decorative screen sheet 8133 is enlarged by the lens member 8132, the image actually visually recognized by the player is the image displayed on the projectable area 8133d. It becomes a part (the image displayed in the part shown in black in the figure).

<Screen unit 8150>
FIG. 270 is a front view showing the assembled state of the screen unit and the navigation lamp unit. FIG. 271 is a rear perspective view of the decorative frame. FIG. 272 is a front view of the front translucent plate. FIG. 273 is a front perspective view of the navigation lamp cover. FIG. 274 is a front view of the main screen sheet. FIG. 275 is a rear view showing a state where the front translucent plate is removed from the state where the screen unit and the navigation lamp cover are assembled. FIG. 276 is a rear perspective view of the cover member, lens member, and decorative screen sheet. FIG. 277 is a front perspective view of the cover member, the lens member, and the decorative screen sheet.

As shown in FIG. 270, the screen unit 8150 includes a main screen unit 8110 and five decoration units 8120 (a first decoration unit 8120a, a second decoration unit 8120b, a third decoration unit 8120c, a fourth decoration unit 8120d, and a third decoration unit 8120d). 5 decoration unit 8120e). The navigation lamp unit 8160 has a navigation lamp cover 8161, and the first decoration unit 8120a, the second decoration unit 8120b, the third decoration unit 8120c, the fourth decoration unit 8120d, and the fifth decoration unit 8120e are respectively , is placed on the upper surface of the navigation lamp cover 8161 .

The first decoration unit 8120a, the second decoration unit 8120b, the third decoration unit 8120c, the fourth decoration unit 8120d, and the fifth decoration unit 8120e are arranged on the front side of the main screen unit 8110, respectively. Specifically, the first decoration unit 8120a, the second decoration unit 8120b, the third decoration unit 8120c, the fourth decoration unit 8120d, and the fifth decoration unit 8120e are screwed to the front translucent plate 8111. It is attached. A more detailed description will be given below.

As shown in FIG. 271, the decorative frame 8140 is formed with two bosses 8145 (an upper boss 8145a and a lower boss 8145b). As shown in FIG. 272, the front light-transmitting plate 8111 is formed with ten screw holes (five upper screw holes 8111a and five lower screw holes 8111b). As shown in FIG. 273, the navigation lamp cover 8161 has five lower boss arrangement holes 8162 (a lower boss arrangement hole 8162a, a lower boss arrangement hole 8162b, and a lower boss arrangement hole). 8162c, a lower boss portion arrangement hole 8162d, and a lower boss portion arrangement hole 8162e) are formed.

Formation of upper boss portion 8145a of each decoration frame 8140 in five decoration units 8120 (first decoration unit 8120a, second decoration unit 8120b, third decoration unit 8120c, fourth decoration unit 8120d, and fifth decoration unit 8120e) The positions correspond to the formation positions of the five upper screw holes 8111a of the front light-transmitting plate 8111, respectively. In addition, the lower boss portion of each decoration frame 8140 in the five decoration units 8120 (first decoration unit 8120a, second decoration unit 8120b, third decoration unit 8120c, fourth decoration unit 8120d, and fifth decoration unit 8120e) The formation positions of 8145b correspond to the formation positions of the five lower screw holes 8111b of the front transparent plate 8111, respectively.

As a result, the screw inserted through the upper screw hole 8111a of the front light-transmitting plate 8111 is screwed into the hole formed in the upper boss portion 8145a of the decorative frame 8140, and the screw is inserted through the lower screw hole 8111b of the front light-transmitting plate 8111. The decorative frame 8140 can be fixed to the front side translucent plate 8111 by screwing the screws into the holes formed in the lower boss portions 8145b of the decorative frame 8140 . Since the upper boss portion 8145a and the lower boss portion 8145b are respectively formed on the back side of the decorative frame 8140, these screws are not visible to the player.

In addition, the formation positions of the five lower boss portion arrangement holes 8162 of the navigation lamp cover 8161 are the formation positions of the lower boss portions 8145b of the respective decorative frames 8140 in the five decorative units 8120 and the five positions of the front translucent plate 8111. They respectively correspond to the formation positions of the lower screw holes 8111b. When the decorative frame 8140 is attached to the front light-transmitting plate 8111 by screwing, the lower boss portion 8145b is arranged in the lower boss portion arrangement hole 8162 . The shape of the lower boss portion arrangement hole 8162 is such that the lower boss portion 8145b can be fitted therein. Note that the shape of the lower boss portion 8145b differs among the decoration frames 8140 of the five decoration units 8120, and correspondingly, the shape of the lower boss portion arrangement hole 8162 is also different from that of the lower boss portion. An arrangement hole 8162a, a lower boss arrangement hole 8162b, a lower boss arrangement hole 8162c, a lower boss arrangement hole 8162d, and a lower boss arrangement hole 8162e are different from each other.

When the decorative frame 8140 is attached to the front translucent plate 8111, the peripheral portion 8163 of the lower boss arrangement hole 8162 in the navigation lamp cover 8161 is aligned with the peripheral portion 8145c of the lower boss portion 8145b in the decorative frame 8140. and the front side of the front transparent plate 8111 . As a result, the peripheral portion 8163 of the navigation lamp cover 8161 is sandwiched between the peripheral portion 8145 c of the decorative frame 8140 and the front translucent plate 8111 .

As shown in FIG. 274, the main screen sheet 8112 is formed with five tree-like openings (light passage openings 8112a). The formation positions of the five light passage openings 8112a are the five decoration units 8120 (the first decoration unit 8120a, the second decoration unit 8120b, the third decoration unit 8120c, the fourth decoration unit 8120d, and the fifth decoration unit 8120d). 8120e). For the sake of clarity, in FIG. 274, the light passage aperture 8112a is indicated by diagonal lines.

An upper portion of the light passage opening 8112a is a screw insertion hole 8112b. As shown in FIG. 275, the formation positions of the five screw insertion holes 8112b are respectively the formation positions of the upper boss portions 8145a of the decoration frames 8140 in the five decoration units 8120 and the formation positions of the front translucent plate 8111. They respectively correspond to the formation positions of the upper screw holes 8111a. Accordingly, when attaching the decorative frame 8140 to the front light-transmitting plate 8111 by screwing, the screw can be inserted through the screw insertion hole 8112b. Further, the shape (diameter) of the screw insertion hole 8112b substantially matches the shape (diameter) of the head of the screw. It can be positioned in hole 8112b.

In addition, the formation positions of the lower openings 8112c in each of the five light passage openings 8112a are the formation positions of the lower boss portions 8145b of the decoration frames 8140 in the five decoration units 8120, They correspond to the formation positions of the five lower screw holes 8111b and the formation positions of the five lower boss arrangement holes 8162 of the navigation lamp cover 8161, respectively. Accordingly, when attaching the decorative frame 8140 to the front translucent plate 8111 and the navigation lamp cover 8161 by screwing, the screws can be inserted through the lower opening 8112c. Moreover, in the state where the screen unit 8150 is assembled, the head of the screw can be arranged in the lower opening 8112c.

The configuration of the decorative screen unit 8130 (positional relationship among the cover member 8131, the lens member 8132, and the decorative screen sheet 8133) in the assembled state of the screen unit 8150 will be supplemented below.

As shown in FIG. 276, the decorative screen sheet 8133 has a rear flat surface 8133f, a lower flat surface 8133g, an upper flat surface 8133h and a rear curved surface 8133i. The rear flat surface 8133f constitutes the rear end surface of the decorative screen sheet 8133 and is formed substantially flat. The lower flat surface 8133g has a substantially arcuate shape and is formed substantially flat and substantially perpendicular to the rear flat surface 8133f. Although not shown in FIG. 276, the upper flat surface 8133h has a substantially arcuate shape (similar to the lower flat surface 8133g), and is substantially flat and substantially perpendicular to the rear flat surface 8133f. It is formed above the flat surface 8133g. The rear curved surface 8133i has a curved shape and is formed continuously from the front edge of each of the lower flat surface 8133g and the upper flat surface 8133h. For clarity, FIG. 276 shows the rear flat surface 8133f shaded and the lower flat surface 8133g shaded.

As shown in FIG. 275, when viewed from the rear, the outer shape of the portion of the light passage opening 8112a of the main screen sheet 8112 excluding the screw insertion hole 8112b and the lower opening 8112c is roughly similar to the outer shape of the decorative screen sheet 8133. Yes. As a result, the entire rear curved surface 8133i (projectable area 8133d) overlaps the light passage opening 8112a of the main screen sheet 8112 . Therefore, most of the light that has passed through the light passage opening 8112a out of the light projected from the projector device B2 can reach the projectable area 8133d (see FIG. 268).

As shown in FIG. 271, the decorative frame 8140 has an upper projecting portion 8146 that projects downward from the lower surface 8145d of the upper boss portion 8145a and extends in the front-rear direction. The decorative frame 8140 also has a lower protruding portion 8148 that protrudes upward from the lower flat surface 8147 and extends in the front-rear direction. The lower flat surface 8147 is a surface on which the cover member 8131 is placed. On the other hand, as shown in FIGS. 276 and 277, the cover member 8131, the lens member 8132, and the decorative screen sheet 8133 have cutouts (notches 8134a, 8134b, and 8134c) at their upper ends, respectively. ) is formed. A groove 8135 is continuously formed in the notch 8134a. A groove 8136 is formed in the lower portion of the cover member 8131 .

The notch 8134a, the notch 8134b, and the notch 8134c have a shape that can be fitted with the lower surface 8145d of the upper boss portion 8145a, and the groove 8135 has a shape that can be fitted with the upper projecting portion 8146. It's becoming In addition, the groove 8136 has a shape that can be fitted with the lower projecting portion 8148 . As a result, the cover member 8131, the lens member 8132, and the decorative screen sheet 8133 are accommodated in the concave portion on the rear side of the decorative frame 8140 in a fitted state.

In this state (the state in which the decorative unit 8120 is assembled), the front flat surface 8133j (the surface opposite to the rear flat surface 8133f) of the decorative screen sheet 8133 and the rear flat surface 8132c of the lens member 8132 are substantially aligned. The front flat surface 8132d of the lens member 8132 (the surface opposite to the rear flat surface 8132c) and the rear flat surface 8131c of the cover member 8131 substantially abut. The rear flat surface 8132c constitutes the rear end surface of the lens member 8132 and is formed substantially flat. The rear flat surface 8131c constitutes the rear end surface of the cover member 8131 and is formed substantially flat. In FIG. 276, the rear flat surface 8132c and the rear flat surface 8131c are hatched. The front side flat surface 8133j is a surface formed substantially flat along the peripheral edge on the front side of the decorative screen sheet 8133 . The front side flat surface 8132d is a surface formed substantially flat along the peripheral edge on the front side of the lens member 8132 . In FIG. 277, the front flat surface 8133j and the front flat surface 8132d are hatched.

Further, the front curved surface 8133k (the surface opposite to the rear curved surface 8133i) of the decorative screen sheet 8133 and the rear curved surface 8132e of the lens member 8132 are substantially in contact with each other, and the front curved surface 8132f of the lens member 8132 (the rear curved surface 8132f) The surface opposite to the curved surface 8132e) and the rear curved surface 8131d of the cover member 8131 are substantially in contact with each other. Like the rear curved surface 8133i, the rear curved surface 8132e and the rear curved surface 8131d are curved surfaces formed on the rear side of the lens member 8132 and the cover member 8131, respectively. The front curved surface 8133k and the front curved surface 8132f are curved surfaces formed continuously with the front flat surface 8133j and the front flat surface 8132d on the front sides of the decorative screen sheet 8133 and the lens member 8132, respectively. The front curved surface 8133k corresponds to the display surface 8133b (see FIG. 264) and the projectable area 8133d (see FIG. 268). Further, the side edge 8133l of the decorative screen sheet 8133, the side edge 8132g of the lens member 8132, and the front curved surface 8131e of the cover member 8131 constitute a substantially continuous curved surface.

Further, as shown in FIG. 272, the front light-transmitting plate 8111 is formed with a first recessed portion 8121a, a second recessed portion 8121b, a third recessed portion 8121c, a fourth recessed portion 8121d, and a fifth recessed portion 8121e. The first recessed portion 8121a, the second recessed portion 8121b, the third recessed portion 8121c, the fourth recessed portion 8121d, and the fifth recessed portion 8121e are recessed portions that are slightly recessed with respect to the surrounding surface. 8120a, the second decoration unit 8120b, the third decoration unit 8120c, the fourth decoration unit 8120d, and the fifth decoration unit 8120e. As a result, the first decoration unit 8120a, the second decoration unit 8120b, the third decoration unit 8120c, the fourth decoration unit 8120d, and the fifth decoration unit 8120e are formed into the first recess 8121a, the second recess 8121b, and the third recess 8121c. , fourth recess 8121d, and fifth recess 8121e.

<Shielding wall member 8190>
FIG. 278 is a rear perspective view of the upper door mechanism; FIG. FIG. 279 is a front perspective view of the shielding wall member. FIG. 280 is a perspective view of the shielding wall member viewed from the rear and above. 281 is a perspective view showing a state in which the shielding wall member is removed from the upper door mechanism shown in FIG. 278; FIG. FIG. 282 is a rear perspective view of the front panel.

As shown in FIG. 278, a shielding wall member 8190 is arranged on the rear side of the screen unit 8150 . The shielding wall member 8190 has a function of adjusting the irradiation range of the light projected from the projector device B2, like the shielding wall member 8030 (see FIG. 221) described in the ninth embodiment.

As shown in FIGS. 279 and 280, the shielding wall member 8190 has a substantially bilaterally symmetrical structure and has a rectangular annular shape with an open center. Specifically, the shielding wall member 8190 includes a lower portion 8192 , a left portion 8193 , a right portion 8194 , and an upper portion 8195 arranged around the light passage opening 8191 .

The lower side portion 8192 has a lower side surface 8192a. The lower side surface 8192a constitutes the upper surface of the lower side portion 8192 (the surface facing the light passage opening 8191). The lower side surface 8192a is arranged with an inclination that descends toward the front.

The left side portion 8193 has a first left inner wall surface 8193a and a second left inner wall surface 8193b. The first left inner wall surface 8193a and the second left inner wall surface 8193b constitute the right side surface (surface facing the light passage opening 8191) of the left side portion 8193, and are formed substantially vertically.

The first left inner wall surface 8193a is formed continuously from the front edge of the left side portion 8193 obliquely rearward. The second left inner wall surface 8193b is continuously formed rearward from the rear end of the first left inner wall surface 8193a with a gentler slope than the first left inner wall surface 8193a. The left side portion 8193 has a left rear end portion 8193c formed by bending the rear end to the right. A front surface 8193d of the left rear end portion 8193c is continuously formed rightward from the rear end of the second left inner wall surface 8193b.

Similarly, the right side portion 8194 includes a first right inner wall surface 8194a, a second right inner wall surface 8194b, and a right rear end 8194c. The first right inner wall surface 8194a, the second right inner wall surface 8194b, and the right rear end portion 8194c are bilaterally symmetrical with the first left inner wall surface 8193a, the second left inner wall surface 8193b, and the left rear end portion 8193c, respectively. It's becoming

The left rear end portion 8193c and the right rear end portion 8194c are each formed substantially vertically. For clarity, FIG. 280 shows the rear surface 8193e of the left rear end 8193c and the rear surface 8194e of the right rear end 8194c hatched. The lower side portion 8192 has a lower rear end portion 8192b which is erected at the rear end of the lower side surface 8192a and connects the left rear end portion 8193c and the right rear end portion 8194c.

In addition, the left side portion 8193 has a left upper end portion 8193f formed continuously forward from the upper end of the left rear end portion 8193c. The left upper end portion 8193f has a shape in which the upper ends of the first left inner wall surface 8193a and the second left inner wall surface 8193b are bent rightward. Further, the right side portion 8194 has a right upper end portion 8194f formed continuously forward from the upper end of the right rear end portion 8194c. The right upper end portion 8194f has a shape in which the upper ends of the first right inner wall surface 8194a and the second right inner wall surface 8194b are bent leftward.

In this embodiment, by arranging the shielding wall member 8190 configured as described above on the back side of the screen unit 8150, for example, part of the light projected from the projector device B2 is ) (reflected light enters the main screen sheet 8112 and the decorative screen sheet 8133). The inner wall portion 8196 constitutes a wall portion facing the screen unit opening 8198 formed in the front panel 8197 (see FIG. 282). The front panel 8197 is a member forming the skeleton of the upper door mechanism UD, and the screen unit 8150 is arranged to close the screen unit opening 8198 in front view.

<Navi lamp unit 8160>
FIG. 283 is a front perspective view of the navigation lamp unit. FIG. 284 is a front perspective view of a state in which the navigation lamp cover and the navigation lamp lens are removed from the navigation lamp unit. 285 is a front perspective view of the state shown in FIG. 284 with the navigation lamp board cover removed. FIG. 286 is a front perspective view of the state shown in FIG. 285 with the navigation lamp LED board removed. FIG. 287 is a rear perspective view of the state shown in FIG. 285 with the navigation lamp LED board removed. FIG. FIG. 288 is a front perspective view of the decoration unit board cover.

As shown in FIGS. 283 to 287, the navigation lamp unit 8160 includes a navigation lamp cover 8161, a navigation lamp lens 8165, a navigation lamp board cover 8170, a navigation lamp LED board 8175, and a decoration unit board cover 8180. I have.

The navigation lamp cover 8161 is formed with three navigation lamp openings 8164 (a left navigation lamp opening 8164a, a middle navigation lamp opening 8164b, and a right navigation lamp opening 8164c). The navigation lamp cover 8161 is arranged above the main display window DD4 (see FIG. 261).

Although not shown, a reel unit RU (see FIGS. 167 and 168) is arranged behind the main display window DD4, as in the sixth embodiment. The formation position of the main display window DD4 and the arrangement position of the reel unit RU (reels) substantially match when viewed from the front. , RC, and RR can be visually recognized. The left navigation lamp opening 8164a is positioned above the left reel RL, the middle navigation lamp opening 8164b is positioned above the middle reel RC, and the right navigation lamp opening 8164c is positioned above the right reel RR. ing.

The navigation lamp lens 8165 is made of a translucent material. The navigation lamp lens 8165 is formed with convex portions 8166 (a left convex portion 8166a, a middle convex portion 8166b, and a right convex portion 8166c) that bulge slightly forward with respect to the surrounding surface. The left convex portion 8166a, the middle convex portion 8166b, and the right convex portion 8166c have shapes corresponding to the left navigation lamp opening 8164a, the middle navigation lamp opening 8164b, and the right navigation lamp opening 8164c, respectively. .

The navigation lamp lens 8165 is arranged on the rear side of the navigation lamp cover 8161 . At this time, the left convex portion 8166a, the middle convex portion 8166b, and the right convex portion 8166c are respectively fitted into the left navigation lamp opening 8164a, the middle navigation lamp opening 8164b, and the right navigation lamp opening 8164c, The left navigation lamp opening 8164a, the middle navigation lamp opening 8164b, and the right navigation lamp opening 8164c are closed by the left projection 8166a, the middle projection 8166b, and the right projection 8166c.

The navigation lamp board cover 8170 has a rectangular main surface 8171 . Five openings 8172 (a first opening 8172a, a second opening 8172b, a third opening 8172c, a fourth opening 8172d, and a fifth opening 8172e) are formed in the principal surface 8171 .

A plurality of decoration unit illumination LEDs 8177 are provided on the surface (upper surface 8176) of the navigation lamp LED board 8175. As shown in FIG. Specifically, the first decoration unit irradiation LED 8177a, the second decoration unit irradiation LED 8177b, the third decoration unit irradiation LED 8177c, the fourth decoration unit irradiation LED 8177d, and the fifth decoration unit irradiation LED 8177e Two are provided. The decoration unit irradiation LED 8177 is installed so as to emit light in the normal direction of the substrate surface.

A plurality of navigation lamp LEDs 8179 are provided on the back surface (lower surface 8178) of the navigation lamp LED board 8175. As shown in FIG. Specifically, two left navigation lamp LEDs 8179a, two middle navigation lamp LEDs 8179b, and two right navigation lamp LEDs 8179c are provided. The navigation lamp LED 8179 is installed so as to emit light in a direction parallel to the back surface of the substrate.

The decoration unit board cover 8180 has a board installation portion 8181 , and the navigation lamp LED board 8175 is installed on the board installation portion 8181 . Specifically, as shown in FIG. 288, the substrate installation portion 8181 includes a left installation portion 8181a, a right installation portion 8181b, an upper installation portion 8181c, a first lower installation portion 8181d, a second lower installation portion 8181e, and a third installation portion 8181e. It has a lower installation portion 8181f and a fourth lower installation portion 8181g. For clarity, FIG. 288 shows the left mounting portion 8181a, the right mounting portion 8181b, and the upper mounting portion 8181c in black.

The navigation lamp LED board 8175 is installed such that the left end and right end of the lower surface 8178 are placed on the left installation portion 8181a and the right installation portion 8181b, respectively, and the upper edge is in contact with the upper installation portion 8181c. In the state where the navigation lamp unit 8160 is assembled, the decoration unit board cover 8180 is arranged such that the left installation portion 8181a and the right installation portion 8181b slope downward from the rear toward the front. Accordingly, the navigation lamp LED substrate 8175 is also arranged to have a similar inclination.

The first lower installation portion 8181d, the second lower installation portion 8181e, the third lower installation portion 8181f, and the fourth lower installation portion 8181g are each formed as a projection projecting forward. The first lower installation portion 8181d is formed continuously from the front end of the left installation portion 8181a, and the fourth lower installation portion 8181g is formed continuously from the front end of the right installation portion 8181b. As a result, the lower edge of the navigation lamp LED board 8175 is aligned with the upper surface of each of the first lower installation portion 8181d, the second lower installation portion 8181e, the third lower installation portion 8181f, and the fourth lower installation portion 8181g. It is designed to be placed on

Six openings 8182 are formed in the decoration unit board cover 8180 . The left and right edges of each opening 8182 have the same inclinations as the left installation part 8181a and the right installation part 8181b (inclinations that descend from the rear toward the front). The leftmost opening 8182 is larger than the other openings 8182 .

<Irradiation of Light from Navigation Lamp LED Board 8175>
FIG. 289 is a front perspective view of the navigation lamp LED board and the navigation lamp board cover. FIG. 290 is a front perspective view of the navigation lamp LED board, the navigation lamp board cover, and the five decoration units. FIG. 291 is a cross-sectional view of the navigation lamp LED board, the navigation lamp board cover, and the decoration unit.

FIG. 292 is a rear perspective view of the navigation lamp LED board, the navigation lamp board cover, and the navigation lamp lens. 293 is an exploded perspective view showing the navigation lamp LED board, the navigation lamp board cover, and the navigation lamp lens shown in FIG. 292. FIG. FIG. 294 is an exploded perspective view of the navigation lamp substrate cover and the navigation lamp lens as seen from the front and below. FIG. 295 is a partially enlarged perspective view of the navigation lamp board cover viewed from the rear and below. FIG. 296 is a cross-sectional view of the navigation lamp LED board, the navigation lamp board cover, and the navigation lamp lens. FIG. 297 is a perspective view showing how the light shielding sheet is installed on the navigation lamp board cover. 298 is a perspective view showing a state in which the light shielding sheet is removed from the state shown in FIG. 297; FIG. FIG. 299 is a perspective view of the state in which the shielding wall member is removed from the upper door mechanism, viewed from the rear and above.

Light irradiation from the decoration unit irradiation LED 8177 to the decoration unit 8120 and light irradiation from the navigation lamp LED 8179 to the navigation lamp lens 8165 will be described below. In addition, as LED8177 for decoration unit irradiation and navigation lamp LED8179, a full color LED is used. Further, as the decoration unit illumination LED 8177 and the navigation lamp LED 8179, surface-mounted LEDs are used, but shell-type LEDs may be used.

First, the irradiation of light from the decoration unit irradiation LED 8177 to the decoration unit 8120 will be described with reference to FIGS. 289 to 291. FIG.

FIG. 289 shows the navigation lamp LED board 8175 and the navigation lamp board cover 8170 in the assembled state of the navigation lamp unit 8160 while maintaining their relative positional relationship. Illustration is omitted. In FIG. 290, the navigation lamp LED board 8175, the navigation lamp board cover 8170, and the five decoration units 8120 in the state where the screen unit 8150 and the navigation lamp unit 8160 are assembled, while maintaining their relative positional relationship. FIG. 2 is a diagram showing the configuration, and illustration of other components is omitted.

In FIG. 291, the navigation lamp LED board 8175, the navigation lamp board cover 8170, and the third decoration unit 8120c in the state where the screen unit 8150 and the navigation lamp unit 8160 are assembled, while maintaining their relative positional relationship. FIG. 2 is a diagram showing the configuration, and illustration of other components is omitted. FIG. 291 shows the LED board 8175, the navigation lamp board cover 8170, and the third decorative unit 8120c cut along the vertical plane in the front-rear direction near the center in the left-right direction. For the sake of clarity, the cut surface of the navigation lamp LED board 8175 is shown in black, and the cut surface of the navigation lamp board cover 8170 is shown in oblique lines. Further, the cut surface of the cover member 8131 is indicated by oblique lines, the cut surface of the lens member 8132 is indicated by hatching, and the cut surface of the decorative screen sheet 8133 is indicated by black.

As shown in FIG. 289, when the navigation lamp unit 8160 is assembled, the decoration unit irradiation LEDs 8177 (the first decoration unit irradiation LED 8177a, the second decoration unit irradiation LED 8177b, the third decoration unit irradiation LED 8177c, the fourth decoration unit irradiation LED 8177d for decoration unit irradiation, and 8177e for fifth decoration unit irradiation), and five openings 8172 formed in the navigation lamp board cover 8170 (first opening 8172a, second opening 8172b, third opening 8172c, The positions where the fourth opening 8172d and the fifth opening 8172e) are formed overlap. As a result, the decorative unit irradiation LED 8177 is exposed through the opening 8172 . Therefore, the light emitted from the decoration unit irradiation LED 8177 passes through the opening 8172 and travels forward.

As shown in FIGS. 290 and 291, the destination of the light passing through the opening 8172 includes decoration units 8120 (first decoration unit 8120a, second decoration unit 8120b, third decoration unit 8120c, fourth decoration unit 8120d, And a fifth decoration unit 8120e) is arranged. As a result, the light passing through the opening 8172 is incident on the back side of the decorative screen sheet 8133 (rear curved surface 8133i).

FIG. 291 shows how the light emitted from the third decoration unit irradiation LED 8177c passes through the third opening 8172c and irradiates the decoration screen sheet 8133 of the third decoration unit 8120c. Light emitted from the illumination LED 8177 similarly illuminates the decorative screen sheet 8133 . That is, the light emitted from the first decoration unit illumination LED 8177a passes through the first opening 8172a, illuminates the decoration screen sheet 8133 of the first decoration unit 8120a, and is emitted from the second decoration unit illumination LED 8177b. passes through the second opening 8172b and irradiates the decorative screen sheet 8133 of the second decorative unit 8120b, and the light emitted from the fourth decorative unit illumination LED 8177d passes through the fourth opening 8172d and illuminates the fourth decorative unit The decorative screen sheet 8133 of 8120d is irradiated, and the light emitted from the fifth decorative unit irradiation LED 8177e passes through the fifth opening 8172e and irradiates the decorative screen sheet 8133 of the fifth decorative unit 8120e.

As described above, the navigation lamp LED board 8175 is arranged so as to have a slope that descends from the rear toward the front, and the main surface 8171 of the navigation lamp board cover 8170 is substantially the same as the navigation lamp LED board 8175. arranged in parallel. This makes it easy to adjust the positions of the decorative unit irradiation LEDs 8177 and the formation positions of the openings 8172, so that the light emitted from the decorative unit irradiation LEDs 8177 can be irradiated to desired positions on the decorative screen sheet 8133. It is possible.

As described above, in this embodiment, it is possible to illuminate the decorative screen sheet 8133 with light emitted from the decorative unit irradiation LEDs 8177 . On the other hand, it is also possible to display an image on the decorative screen sheet 8133 with light projected from the projector device B2. Also, as described above, the decoration unit illumination LED 8177 is a full-color LED, and can emit a plurality of colors including red, blue, and green. Therefore, by emitting light of a predetermined color from the decoration unit illumination LED 8177, the color tone of the image displayed on the decoration screen sheet 8133 can be arranged.

For example, when light for displaying a red image on the decorative screen sheet 8133 is projected from the projector device B2, blue light is emitted from the decoration unit illumination LED 8177 to display the image on the decorative screen sheet 8133. can make an image appear purple. Further, when the light for displaying a red image on the decorative screen sheet 8133 is projected from the projector device B2, the red light is emitted from the decoration unit illumination LED 8177 to display the image on the decorative screen sheet 8133. It can make the image appear more vivid red.

By the way, there are cases where a gaming machine is equipped with a function (brightness adjustment function) for adjusting the brightness (amount of light) of an LED for a player or a parlor staff. This is a function that allows the player or store clerk to adjust the brightness to an appropriate level, since if the light from the LED is too strong, it is not suitable for a long game. The light emitted from the decoration unit illumination LEDs 8177 to the decoration screen sheet 8133 may be emitted without changing the luminance even when the luminance setting is changed by the luminance adjustment function. Since it is assumed that the projected light from the projector device B2 and the projected light from the decorative unit illumination LED 8177 are combined to change the color of the projected image, for example, the projected light from the projector device B2 When only the intensity of the projection light from the decoration unit illumination LED 8177 is reduced while the intensity of the projection light is kept as it is, the balance of the light intensity of the two becomes different from what was initially planned, resulting in color mixing. This is because, in some cases, the color may appear different from the intended color. It should be noted that when the brightness is adjusted by the player, etc., the brightness of the decoration unit irradiation LED 8177 is also changed (along with other LEDs) only in a part of the game state (when the color mixing effect is not performed) ( On the other hand, when a mixed color effect is performed, light is emitted from the decoration unit illumination LED 8177 at a constant light amount (initially set light amount) regardless of the brightness adjustment. It may be

Next, the irradiation of light from the navigation lamp LED 8179 to the navigation lamp lens 8165 will be described with reference to FIGS. 292 to 296. FIG.

FIG. 292 shows the navigation lamp LED board 8175, the navigation lamp board cover 8170, and the navigation lamp lens 8165 in the assembled state of the navigation lamp unit 8160 while maintaining their relative positional relationship. , and other components are omitted.

FIG. 296 shows the navigation lamp LED board 8175, the navigation lamp board cover 8170, and the navigation lamp lens 8165 in the assembled state of the navigation lamp unit 8160 while maintaining their relative positional relationship. , and other components are omitted. In addition, in FIG. 296, the navigation lamp LED board 8175, the navigation lamp board cover 8170, and the navigation lamp lens 8165 are placed in a plane passing through the right navigation lamp LED 8179c on the left side of the two right navigation lamp LEDs 8179c (vertical plane in the front-rear direction). ) is shown. For the sake of clarity, the cut surface of the navigation lamp LED board 8175 is shown in black, the cut surface of the navigation lamp substrate cover 8170 is shown with oblique lines, and the cut surface of the navigation lamp lens 8165 is shown with shading.

As shown in FIG. 292, when the navigation lamp unit 8160 is assembled, the navigation lamp LEDs 8179 (the left navigation lamp LED 8179a, the middle navigation lamp LED 8179b, and the right navigation lamp LED 8179c) 8173 and the body portion 8167 of the navigation lamp lens 8165 are positioned above.

As shown in FIGS. 293 and 294, the lower part 8173 of the navigation lamp board cover 8170 is formed in a plate shape and arranged substantially horizontally. An upper surface 8173a of the lower side portion 8173 is formed generally flat. On the other hand, the lower surface 8173b of the lower side portion 8173 has a flat portion 8173c that is substantially flat on the front and an uneven portion 8173d that is uneven on the rear. As shown in FIG. 295, the concave-convex portion 8173d is formed by continuously forming curved shapes (semi-cylindrical shapes obtained by dividing a cylinder in half), and has a so-called semi-cylindrical shape. there is

For clarity, in FIG. 293, the upper surface 8173a of the navigation lamp board cover 8170 is hatched. 295 shows an enlarged view of the structure near the left end of the lower surface 8173b of the navigation lamp board cover 8170. As shown in FIG. In addition, four grooves 8173e are formed in the lower part 8173. As shown in FIG.

A main body portion 8167 of the navigation lamp lens 8165 is formed in a plate shape and arranged so as to have a slope that rises from the rear toward the front. On the front surface 8167a of the body portion 8167, the convex portions 8166 (the left convex portion 8166a, the middle convex portion 8166b, and the right convex portion 8166c) are formed. A rear surface 8167b of the body portion 8167 is formed substantially flat as a whole.

As shown in FIG. 296 , the light emitted from the navigation lamp LED 8179 travels in a direction (diagonally downward) parallel to the back surface (lower surface 8178 ) of the navigation lamp LED board 8175 and travels downward under the navigation lamp board cover 8170 . It is incident on the upper surface 8173 a of the side portion 8173 . The navigation lamp substrate cover 8170 is made of a translucent material, and the light incident on the upper surface 8173 a passes through the navigation lamp substrate cover 8170 . The light transmitted through the navigation lamp substrate cover 8170 is incident on the rear surface 8167b of the main body portion 8167 of the navigation lamp lens 8165, and emitted to the outside from the convex portion 8166 of the front surface 8167a.

FIG. 296 shows how the light emitted from the right navigation lamp LED 8179c irradiates the right convex portion 8166c of the navigation lamp lens 8165. Similarly, the light emitted from the other navigation lamp LEDs 8179 is also convex. The portion 8166 is irradiated. That is, the light emitted from the left navigation lamp LED 8179a passes through the navigation lamp substrate cover 8170 and then irradiates the left convex portion 8166a of the navigation lamp lens 8165, and the light emitted from the middle navigation lamp LED 8179b passes through the navigation lamp substrate. After passing through the cover 8170, the central convex portion 8166b of the navigation lamp lens 8165 is irradiated.

Part of the light emitted from the navigation lamp LED 8179 passes through the uneven portion 8173 d when passing through the navigation lamp substrate cover 8170 . Since the light is irregularly refracted when passing through the uneven portion 8173d, the convex portions 8166 (the left convex portion 8166a, the middle convex portion 8166b, and the right convex portion 8166c) of the navigation lamp lens 8165 should be uniformly irradiated. can be done.

In order to enhance such an effect, as shown in FIGS. 297 and 298, a light shielding sheet 8185 may be installed on the lower side portion 8173 of the navigation lamp board cover 8170. FIG. In this example, a light shielding sheet 8185 is placed on the upper surface 8173a of the lower part 8173, and most of the upper surface 8173a is covered with the light shielding sheet 8185. As shown in FIG. The light-shielding sheet 8185 has a light-shielding property and blocks the passage of light. For the sake of clarity, the light shielding sheet 8185 is hatched in FIG.

Specifically, the light shielding sheet 8185 has substantially the same outer shape as the upper surface 8173a of the lower portion 8173 and is formed with a plurality of rectangular notches 8186 . In the state where the light shielding sheet 8185 is placed on the upper surface 8173a, the rear end of the light shielding sheet 8185 and the rear end of the upper surface 8173a are positioned so as to substantially match. A notch 8186 is formed over a predetermined length forward from the rear end. Here, the length of the notch 8186 in the front-rear direction is substantially the same as the length of the uneven portion 8173d in the front-rear direction. Therefore, substantially all of the portion of the upper surface 8173a on the side of the lower surface 8173b corresponding to the portion not covered by the light shielding sheet 8185 (the portion corresponding to the notch 8186) is an uneven portion 8173d. Therefore, substantially all of the light emitted from the navigation lamp LED 8179 that has passed through the upper surface 8173a (the portion not covered by the light shielding sheet 8185) passes through the uneven portion 8173d. Thereby, the light emitted from the navigation lamp LED 8179 can be efficiently refracted irregularly.

As described above, in this embodiment, the light emitted from the navigation lamp LED 8179 (the left navigation lamp LED 8179a, the middle navigation lamp LED 8179b, and the right navigation lamp LED 8179c) causes the convex portion 8166 of the navigation lamp lens 8165 (left It is possible to irradiate the convex portion 8166a, the middle convex portion 8166b, and the right convex portion 8166c). The left protrusion 8166a is positioned above the left reel RL, the middle protrusion 8166b is positioned above the middle reel RC, and the right protrusion 8166c is positioned above the right reel RR. As a result, using the navigation lamp LED 8179 and the navigation lamp lens 8165, it is possible to perform light emitting effects related to the rotation and stoppage of the reels RL, RC, and RR (for example, navigation effects in the order of pressing and effects associated with stopping the reels). can.

For example, through irradiation of light from the navigation lamp LED 8179 to the navigation lamp lens 8165, an effect may be performed in which information regarding the stop operation that is advantageous for the player is reported (suggested). As such an effect, for example, one of the navigation lamp LEDs 8179 (for example, the left navigation lamp LED 8179a) repeats high-luminance light emission and low-luminance light emission, so that the corresponding convex portion 8166 (for example, the left convex portion 8166a) can be presented as if it were blinking. As a result, it is advantageous for the player to perform the stop operation on one reel (for example, the left reel RL) as the first stop operation (first stop operation) (for example, a combination of symbols corresponding to a predetermined winning combination). necessary for stop display) is notified (suggested). That is, the blinking of the left convex portion 8166a corresponds to the navigation of "press left!". In addition, an effect may be performed in which the convex portion 8166 corresponding to the reel for which the stop operation has been completed is lit. As such an effect, for example, when a condition for starting a specific game state (for example, 7 sets at the start of pseudo BB) is established, each convex portion 8166 is colored in a predetermined color (for example, red-red). - red) can be mentioned.

As shown in FIG. 299, the upper end surface 8180a of the decoration unit board cover 8180 is positioned at approximately the same height as the lower inner wall portion 8196a of the front panel 8197. As shown in FIG. The lower inner wall portion 8196a is a wall portion facing the clean unit opening 8198, and constitutes a part of the inner wall portion 8196 (see FIG. 281). For the sake of clarity, in FIG. 299, the upper end surface 8180a of the decoration unit board cover 8180 is hatched, and the lower inner wall portion 8196a of the front panel 8197 is black. The navigation lamp LED board 8175 is arranged below the upper end surface 8180 a of the decoration unit board cover 8180 . Thereby, the navigation lamp LED board 8175 is positioned below the passage of the light projected from the projector device B2. Therefore, the navigation lamp LED board 8175 does not hinder the progress of the light projected from the projector device B2.

Also, FIG. 299 shows that the upper end surface 8180a of the decoration unit board cover 8180 and the lower inner wall portion 8196a of the front panel 8197 are visible. A lower side portion 8192 (see FIG. 280) of the shielding wall member 8190 is arranged on the upper side, and the upper end surface 8180a and the lower inner wall portion 8196a are covered with the shielding wall member 8190 . This can prevent part of the light projected from the projector device B2 from being reflected by the upper end surface 8180a and the lower inner wall portion 8196a. On the other hand, FIG. 299 shows that the openings 8172 (the first opening 8172a, the second opening 8172b, the third opening 8172c, the fourth opening 8172d, and the fifth opening 8172e) are visible. is the same even when the shielding wall member 8190 is provided. Since the shielding wall member 8190 is arranged so as not to cover the main surface 8171 of the navigation lamp substrate cover 8170, even if the shielding wall member 8190 is provided, the progress of the light emitted from the decoration unit illumination LED 8177 is blocked. It is not obstructed by the wall member 8190.

Although not shown, when the screen unit 8150 and the navigation lamp unit 8160 are assembled, the navigation lamp LED 8179 is visible through the opening 8182 (see FIG. 288) of the decoration unit board cover 8180. As a result, when the screen unit 8150 and the navigation lamp unit 8160 are assembled, it is easy to finely adjust the arrangement position of the navigation lamp LED 8179 . On the other hand, as described above, the left and right edges of the opening 8182 have the same inclinations as the board installation parts 8181 (the left installation part 8181a and the right installation part 8181b) of the decoration unit board cover 8180. Thereby, the penetrating direction of the opening 8182 is positioned substantially perpendicular to the navigation lamp LED substrate 8175 . Since the light emitted from the navigation lamp LED 8179 travels in a direction parallel to the navigation lamp LED substrate 8175, it is difficult for the light to exit rearward from the opening 8182. FIG. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the light emitted from the opening 8182 from being reflected in an unintended direction.

<Bonus lamp unit 8210>
Fig. 300 is a perspective view of the upper door mechanism; FIG. 301 is a perspective view showing a state in which the bonus lamp unit is removed from the upper door mechanism. 302 is a perspective view showing a state in which the front panel and the rear duct are removed from the state shown in FIG. 301. FIG. FIG. 303 is a perspective view of a bonus lamp unit. FIG. 304 is a perspective view showing a state in which the first bonus lamp lens and the second bonus lamp lens are removed from the bonus lamp unit. FIG. 305 is a perspective view of the bonus lamp board cover, bonus lamp board and front duct. FIG. 306 is an exploded perspective view of the front duct; FIG. 307 is a bottom view of the front duct base. FIG. 308 is a partially enlarged perspective view of the front duct base viewed from above. FIG. 309 is a partially enlarged perspective view of the front duct base viewed from below. FIG. 310 is a perspective view of the front duct cover viewed from the rear and below. FIG. 311 is a perspective view of the front duct seen from the rear and below.

In addition, the bonus lamp unit 8210 mainly emits light in a predetermined light-emission pattern in a state advantageous to the player during a bonus (during the operation of the accessory) or in an AT state (a state in which a stop operation instruction that is advantageous to the player is generated). It is called a "bonus lamp" because it is a production that suggests something. However, the bonus lamp unit 8210 provides a predetermined effect by light emission according to the progress of the game even in a game state other than during a bonus or AT (state suggesting effect, effect suggesting the degree of expectation of winning, light emission for error notification). etc.) is provided as a viable decorative lamp.

As shown in FIGS. 300 to 302, a bonus lamp unit 8210 is provided on the top of the upper door mechanism UD so as to protrude forward. A front panel 8197 is provided on the rear side of the bonus lamp unit 8210, and a rear duct 8250 is provided so as to be covered by the upper wall of the front panel 8197 from above.

As shown in FIGS. 303-305, the bonus lamp unit 8210 includes a first bonus lamp lens 8215, a second bonus lamp lens 8220, a bonus lamp substrate cover 8225, a bonus lamp substrate 8230, a front duct 8235, It has

The first bonus lamp lens 8215 and the second bonus lamp lens 8220 are made of translucent material. The first bonus lamp lens 8215 is arranged from the upper side to the front side of the second bonus lamp lens 8220 , so that the second bonus lamp lens 8220 is entirely covered with the first bonus lamp lens 8215 .

A bonus lamp substrate cover 8225 is arranged behind the second bonus lamp lens 8220 . A board locking piece 8226 is formed on the bonus lamp board cover 8225 , and a bonus lamp board 8230 is installed so as to be locked by the board locking piece 8226 .

The bonus lamp substrate 8230 is arranged substantially vertically so that its longitudinal direction is the left-right direction. A bonus lamp substrate 8230 is provided with a plurality of bonus lamp LEDs 8231 . The bonus lamp LED 8231 is installed so as to emit light forward. Thereby, the light emitted from the bonus lamp LED 8231 is guided by the second bonus lamp lens 8220 and emitted to the outside of the gaming machine 1 from the first bonus lamp lens 8215 .

As shown in FIGS. 306 and 307, the front duct 8235 comprises a front duct base 8240 and a front duct cover 8245. As shown in FIGS. The front duct base 8240 has a basic structure including a plate-shaped portion 8240a and ribs 8241 (left and right ribs 8241a and front and rear ribs 8241b) projecting upward from the plate-like portion 8240a. ing. That is, the front duct base 8240 has a shape similar to the back side of the reel adapter 6000 (see FIG. 162) described in the seventh embodiment.

A left opening 8242L, a central opening 8242C, and a right opening 8242R are formed behind the plate-like portion 8240a. The left opening 8242L has six openings 8242 (openings 8242a to 8242f), the central opening 8242C has ten openings 8242 (openings 8242g to 8242q), and the right opening 8242R has six openings 8242 (openings 8242r to 8242w). The openings 8242a to 8242w penetrate the flat plate portion 8240a in the vertical direction.

As shown in FIGS. 308 and 309, the left opening 8242L has a first partition 8243a extending in the left-right direction and a second partition 8243b extending in the front-rear direction. The first partitioning portion 8243a and the second partitioning portion 8243b constitute a grid partition structure. Six openings 8242 (openings 8242a to 8242f) are partitioned from each other by the first partitioning portion 8243a and the second partitioning portion 8243b. That is, the first partition 8243a and the second partition 8243b divide the large opening into six.

Similarly, in the central opening 8242C, ten openings 8242 (openings 8242g to 8242q) are partitioned from each other by a first partitioning portion 8243a and a second partitioning portion 8243b. Further, in the right opening 8242R, six openings 8242 (openings 8242r to 8242w) are partitioned from each other by a first partitioning portion 8243a and a second partitioning portion 8243b. For clarity, a portion of opening 8242 is hatched in FIGS. 308 and 309 .

As a result, the openings 8242a-8242w are each relatively small. Specifically, the diameters of the openings 8242a to 8242w are all less than a predetermined value (eg, 25 mm). The diameter is the maximum length of a line segment connecting any two points on the perimeter of the opening. Thus, the opening 8242 having the largest diameter among the openings 8242a to 8242w is the opening 8242m and the opening 8242n. The diameters of the openings 8242m and 8242n can be defined as the longer diagonal of the two diagonals when these openings are assumed to be rectangular.

The lower end of the first partition portion 8243a and the lower end of the second partition portion 8243b are substantially the same in the vertical direction and positioned above the lower surface 8240b of the plate-like portion 8240a. On the other hand, the upper end of the second partition 8243b is positioned above the upper end of the first partition 8243a. That is, the vertical length of the first partition 8243a is shorter than the vertical length of the second partition 8243b. The upper ends of the second partitions 8243b are continuous with the upper ends of the left and right ribs 8241a.

The left opening 8242L and the central opening 8242C are partitioned by a third partition 8243c. The third partition 8243c has rounded left and right edges, and has a central portion in the left-right direction that bulges upward. Although not shown, the right opening 8242R and the central opening 8242C are similarly partitioned by a third partition 8243c.

As shown in FIG. 310, the front duct cover 8245 has a front side 8246a and an upper side 8246b. The front side surface 8246a is the rear surface of the front wall of the front side duct cover 8245 and is formed substantially flat. The upper side surface 8246b is continuous with the front side surface 8246a and is formed substantially perpendicular to the front side surface 8246a in the front-rear direction. As a result, the front side surface 8246a and the upper side surface 8246b form a space that is open downward and rearward. For clarity, FIG. 310 shows the front side 8246a hatched and the top side 8246b shaded. For convenience, the space is divided into a left space 8247L, a central space 8247C, and a right space 8247R, but these spaces are actually connected. The central space 8247C has a lower upper wall than the left space 8247L and the right space 8247R.

As shown in FIG. 306, the front duct base 8240 is formed with boss portions 8244 (boss portion 8244a, boss portion 8244b, and boss portion 8244c). On the other hand, the front duct cover 8245 is formed with screw holes 8248 (screw holes 8248a, 8248b, and 8248c). The formation position of each boss portion 8244 corresponds to the formation position of each screw hole 8248 . As a result, the front duct cover 8245 can be fixed to the front duct base 8240 by screwing the screws inserted through the respective screw holes 8248 into the holes formed in the respective boss portions 8244 .

The front duct cover 8245 is formed with screw holes 8249 (screw holes 8249a, 8249b, and 8249c). The front duct cover 8245 is fastened to the bonus lamp board cover 8225 with screws inserted through the screw holes 8249 .

FIG. 311 shows the state in which the front duct base 8240 and the front duct cover 8245 are assembled by screw fastening as described above (front duct 8235). In the front duct 8235, the left opening 8242L communicates with the left space 8247L. Also, the central opening 8242C communicates with the left space 8247L, the central space 8247C, and the right space 8247R. Also, the right opening 8242R communicates with the right space 8247R.

<Formation of Air Flow Path>
FIG. 312 is a front view showing a partially enlarged front panel. FIG. 313 is a perspective view of the rear duct base; FIG. 314 is a perspective view of the rear duct cover viewed from the front and below. FIG. 315 is a rear perspective view of the rear duct and duct seal; FIG. 316 is a front perspective view of the duct seal attached to the rear duct. FIG. 317 is a perspective view of the upper door mechanism as seen from slightly below. Figure 318 is a cross-sectional view of the bonus lamp unit, front panel, rear duct and duct seal.

As shown in FIG. 312, the front panel 8197 has a first air passage opening 8199a, a second air passage opening 8199b, a third air passage opening 8199c, and a fourth air passage opening 8199c above the screen unit opening 8198. An air passage opening 8199d is formed. For clarity, FIG. 312 shows the first air passage opening 8199a, the second air passage opening 8199b, the third air passage opening 8199c, and the fourth air passage opening 8199d hatched.

As shown in FIG. 313, the rear duct base 8255 includes a plate-shaped lower wall portion 8256, and a first side wall portion 8257 and a second side wall portion 8257 and a second side wall portion erected upward from the lower wall portion 8256. 8258 is provided. The first side wall portion 8257 is formed generally in the front-rear direction at the left portion of the rear duct base 8255 . The second side wall portion 8258 is formed to be inclined to the left as it goes from the front to the rear in the right portion of the rear duct base 8255 . For clarity, in FIG. 313, the upper edge of the first side wall portion 8257 and the upper edge of the second side wall portion 8258 are shown in black.

A duct seal 8260 is arranged near the rear ends of the first side wall portion 8257 and the second side wall portion 8258 . Further, the rear duct base 8255 is formed with screw holes 8259 (screw holes 8259a and 8259b). The rear duct base 8255 is fastened to the front panel 8197 with screws passing through screw holes 8259 .

As shown in FIG. 314, the rear duct cover 8265 includes an upper wall portion 8266 formed in a plate shape, and a first side wall portion 8267 and a second side wall portion 8267 formed downwardly projecting from the upper wall portion 8266 . A portion 8268 is provided. The first side wall portion 8267 is formed generally in the front-rear direction at the left portion of the rear duct cover 8265 . The second side wall portion 8268 is formed to be inclined to the left as it goes from the front to the rear in the right portion of the rear duct cover 8265 . For clarity, FIG. 314 shows the lower edge of the first side wall 8267 and the lower edge of the second side wall 8268 in black.

Further, the rear duct cover 8265 is formed with boss portions 8269 (boss portions 8269a, 8269b, 8269c, 8269d, and 8269e). The rear duct cover 8265 is fastened to the rear duct base 8255 by screws screwed into holes formed in the boss portions 8269, thereby forming the rear duct 8250 (see FIG. 302). FIG. 315 shows the rear duct 8250 assembled in this way.

The shape of the first side wall portion 8267 and the shape of the second side wall portion 8268 in the rear duct cover 8265 correspond to the shape of the first side wall portion 8257 and the shape of the second side wall portion 8258 in the rear side duct base 8255, respectively. It has become. Thus, in the rear duct 8250, the first side wall portion 8267 of the rear duct cover 8265 is arranged on the left side of the first side wall portion 8257 along the first side wall portion 8257 of the rear duct base 8255. . Also, the second side wall portion 8268 of the rear duct cover 8265 is arranged behind the second side wall portion 8258 along the second side wall portion 8258 of the rear duct base 8255 .

315, the rear edge 8267a of the first side wall portion 8267, the rear edge 8268a of the second side wall portion 8268, and the rear edge 8267a and the rear edge 8268a of the rear duct cover 8265 are connected on the upper side. The seal abutting portion 8263a that contacts is indicated by oblique lines. In addition, a rear edge 8257a of the first side wall portion 8257 and a rear edge 8258a of the second side wall portion 8258 in the rear side duct base 8255, and a seal contact that connects the rear edge 8257a and the rear edge 8258a on the lower side. The contact portion 8263b is shown in black. The trailing edge 8257a, the trailing edge 8258a, the trailing edge 8267a, the trailing edge 8268a, the seal contact portion 8263a, and the seal contact portion 8263b are each formed substantially flat and on substantially the same plane. is formed so as to be positioned in

As described above, an opening 8263 surrounded by the rear edge 8257a, the rear edge 8258a, and the seal contact portions 8263a and 8263b is formed on the rear side of the rear duct 8250. FIG. The duct seal 8260 has a rectangular shape with a large center opening, and has an upper side portion 8262a, a lower side portion 8262b, a left side portion 8262c and a right side portion 8262d. As a result, an opening (air passage opening 8261) surrounded by the upper portion 8262a, the lower portion 8262b, the left portion 8262c, and the right portion 8262d is formed. The shape of the air passage opening 8261 is substantially the same as the shape of the opening 8263 .

In the duct seal 8260, front surfaces of the upper side portion 8262a, the lower side portion 8262b, the left side portion 8262c, and the right side portion 8262d are the seal contact portions (seal contact portion 8263a, seal contact portion 8263b, seal contact portion 8263a, seal contact portion 8263b, seal It is arranged so as to contact the contact portion 8263c and the seal contact portion 8263d). The seal abutting portion 8263c is configured by part of the rear edge 8257a of the rear duct base 8255 and part of the rear edge 8267a of the rear duct cover 8265. As shown in FIG. The seal abutting portion 8263d is configured by part of the rear edge 8258a of the rear duct base 8255 and part of the rear edge 8268a of the rear duct cover 8265. As shown in FIG. By placing the duct seal 8260 on the rear side of the rear duct 8250, the air passage opening 8261 communicates with the opening 8263, and these openings are integrated.

Also, as shown in FIG. 316, the front side of the rear duct 8250 is formed with an opening surrounded by a front edge 8264 . The front edge 8264 is the front edge of the lower wall portion 8256 of the rear duct base 8255, the front edge of the first sidewall portion 8257, the front edge of the second sidewall portion 8258, and the front edge of the upper wall portion 8266 of the rear duct cover 8265. Consists of For clarity, the leading edge 8264 is shown in black in FIG. The upper wall portion 8266 is curved so that the front portion is lower than the rear portion. As a result, the vertical length of the opening surrounded by the front edge 8264 is shorter than the vertical length of the opening 8263 (air passage opening 8261). Note that FIG. 316 shows that the air passage opening 8261 is visible through the opening on the front side (the opening surrounded by the front edge 8264), and the air passage opening 8261 is hatched.

As shown in FIG. 317, when the upper door mechanism UD is viewed from below, a left opening 8242L, a central opening 8242C, and a right opening 8242R of the front duct base 8240 can be seen above the screen unit 8150. can. As described above, the front duct cover 8245 has a left space 8247L, a central space 8247C, and a right space 8247R (see FIG. 310), and the left opening 8242L communicates with the left space 3247L. , the central opening 8242C communicates with the left space 3247L, the central space 8247C, and the right space 8247R, and the right opening 8242R communicates with the right space 8247R.

The front panel 8197 is formed with a first air passage opening 8199a, a second air passage opening 8199b, a third air passage opening 8199c, and a fourth air passage opening 8199d (see FIG. 312). ). The front panel 8197 is arranged on the rear side of the front duct base 8240 and the front duct cover 8245, and the formation positions of the first air passage opening 8199a and the second air passage opening 8199b overlap the left space 3247L in front view. However, the formation positions of the third air passage opening 8199c and the fourth air passage opening 8199d overlap with the right space 8247R in front view. The front panel 8197 and the front side duct cover 8245 are arranged so as to substantially abut each other, whereby the first air passage opening 8199a and the second air passage opening 8199b are continuous with the left space 3247L, and the third air passage opening 8199b is connected to the left space 3247L. 8199c and the fourth air passage opening 8199d are continuous with the right space 8247R. Therefore, air passage openings 8199 (first air passage opening 8199a, second air passage opening 8199b, third air passage opening 8199c, and fourth air passage opening 8199d) and space 8247 (left space 8247L, The central space 8247C and the right space 8247R) are all communicated.

A rear duct 8250 is arranged on the rear side of the front panel 8197, and in this state, the front edge 8264 (see FIG. 316) of the rear duct 8250 coincides with the peripheral edge of the air passage opening 8199 in the front panel 8197. Nearly abut. That is, the front duct 8235 and the rear duct 8250 are arranged with a predetermined distance therebetween, and the front panel 8197 is arranged so as to fill the gap between the front duct 8235 and the rear duct 8250. . Also, the vertical length of the front edge 8264 is substantially the same as the vertical length of the air passage opening 8199 . Thereby, the air passage opening 8199 communicates with the internal space of the rear duct 8250 . The internal space of the rear duct 8250 is opened rearward by the air passage opening 8261 of the duct seal 8260 .

From the above, as shown in FIG. 318, when air is taken in from the outside of the game machine 1 (below the left opening 8242L) through the left opening 8242L of the front duct base 8240 (I in the figure), For example, after passing through the left space 8247L of the front duct cover 8245 and the first air passage opening 8199a of the front panel 8197 (II in the figure), the air advances rearward through the inner space of the rear duct 8250. , reaches the air passage opening 8261 of the duct seal 8260 (III in the figure). Although detailed description is omitted, similarly, the air taken in through the central opening 8242C to the right opening 8242R of the front duct base 8240 also passes through the space 8247 of the front duct cover 8245 and the air passage opening of the front panel 8197. After passing through 8199, it travels backward through the interior space of the rear duct 8250 and reaches the air passage opening 8261 of the duct seal 8260.

In FIG. 318, the bonus lamp unit 8210, the front panel 8197, the rear duct 8250, and the duct seal 8260 are shown when the upper door mechanism UD is cut along the plane passing through the left opening 8242L (vertical plane in the front-rear direction). It is extracted and shown. For clarity, the cut surface of the front duct base 8240 is shown in black, the cut surface of the front duct cover 8245 is hatched, the cut surface of the front panel 8197 is hatched, and the rear duct 8250 (rear duct base 8255 and rear duct cover 8265) are shown in black. The duct seal 8260 is hatched, including portions other than the cut surface. Also, the upper wall portion 8197X of the front panel 8197 and the upper wall portion 8215X of the first bonus lamp lens 8215 are shown in black. The upper wall portion 8197X and the upper wall portion 8215X constitute the upper wall of the upper door mechanism UD together with the upper wall portion 8225X of the bonus lamp substrate cover 8225 arranged continuously therewith (see FIG. 299). Further, the cut surface of the first bonus lamp lens 8215 and the cut surface of the second bonus lamp lens 8220 are indicated by shading, and the cut surface of the bonus lamp substrate cover 8225 is indicated by oblique lines. Two lamps 8200 are embedded in the front panel 8197 through an opening provided in the upper wall portion 8197X (see FIG. 299).

Inside the cabinet G, the cover portion B2000 (see FIG. 124) described in the sixth embodiment is arranged. The air passage opening 8261 of the duct seal 8260 is positioned in the vicinity of the opening B2108e of the cover portion B2000 (at a position at least partially overlapping with the opening B2108e in front view). As a result, the air reaching the air passage opening 8261 is taken into the cover portion B2000 via the opening B2108e. As in the sixth embodiment, the air entering the cover portion B2000 moves backward and downward in the space P (see FIG. 128), passes through the opening B2010 (see FIG. 130), and enters the intake port B22A. (See FIG. 22) to enter the inside of the case B22. The air entering the case B22 moves to the right while absorbing the heat generated in the case B22, and exits the case B22 through the exhaust port B22E (see FIG. 23). The air coming out of the case B22 is naturally discharged to the outside of the gaming machine 1 through holes of the gaming machine 1 (for example, the medal payout port DD14 or gaps formed in the side walls of the cabinet G).

In this manner, the heat generated in the projector device B2 can be discharged to the outside of the gaming machine 1. FIG. In the second embodiment, the intake port B22A is provided on the right side of the case B22, while the exhaust port B22E is provided on the left side of the case B22 (see FIGS. 22 and 23). On the other hand, in this embodiment, similarly to the sixth embodiment, an air intake port B22A is provided on the left side of the case B22, while an air outlet B22E is provided on the right side of the case B22 (see FIG. 138). .

In addition, in order to facilitate the formation of the air flow as described above, an intake fan or an exhaust fan may be provided as appropriate. For example, as described in the second embodiment, an intake fan may be installed inside the case B22. Also, a fan similar to the opening vicinity fan B700 (see FIG. 33) may be installed in the opening B2108 of the duct cover B2100. Further, the duct seal 8260 may be arranged so that the rear surface of the duct seal 8260 contacts the opening B2108e (the front edges of the wall surfaces B2108a to 2108d forming the opening B2108). As the duct seal 8260, a cushioning member (for example, rubber packing) can be appropriately employed. For example, like the speaker seal 8095 (see FIG. 250) described in the ninth embodiment, EPTSEALER (registered trademark: ethylene-propylene-diene rubber foam, manufactured by Nitto Denko) may be used. As a result, the space between the rear duct 8250 and the duct cover B2100 can be sealed, and the air taken in from the outside of the gaming machine 1 can be efficiently transported to the inside of the case B22 (located position of the projector device B2). can do.

The gaming machine 1 according to the eleventh embodiment has been described above as one embodiment of the present invention.

<Appendix J>
2. Description of the Related Art Conventionally, there is known a gaming machine capable of producing effects by using a projector (see Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 6-035066 and Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2009-240459). According to such a game machine, a game image is projected from a projector onto a projection surface such as a screen, so that the image is displayed on the screen instead of the liquid crystal display device.

In a game machine equipped with such a projector, it is important to improve the appearance including the image displayed on the screen.

SUMMARY OF THE INVENTION It is an object of the present invention to provide a gaming machine capable of achieving good visibility.

In this regard, the gaming machine 1 according to the eleventh embodiment has the following features.

(J-1-1) a screen member (decorative screen sheet 8133) having a projection target portion at least partially curved;
A projector (projector device B2) capable of projecting an image onto the screen member,
A predetermined member (decorative frame 8140) that makes it difficult for a player to see a predetermined area near the edge of the projected portion is arranged on the outer side of the gaming machine than the screen member.
A gaming machine characterized by:

According to the gaming machine 1 according to the eleventh embodiment, the screen member (decorative screen sheet 8133) has at least a partially curved projected portion, and the screen member (decorative screen sheet 8133) is more suitable for the gaming machine than the screen member (decorative screen sheet 8133). A predetermined member (decorative frame 8140) is arranged on the outer side of to make the predetermined area in the vicinity of the edge of the projected portion difficult for the player to see. By configuring in this way, the present inventor succeeded in improving the appearance including the image displayed on the projection target portion, and came up with the gaming machine 1 according to the eleventh embodiment.

(J-1-2) The gaming machine of (J-1-1),
The predetermined area includes an area where it is difficult to project an image from the projector, and an area where the visibility of the projected image is lower than other areas when the image is projected from the projector, containing at least one region of
It is characterized by

According to the gaming machine 1 according to the eleventh embodiment, when the projector (projector device B2) projects an image in an area where it is difficult to project an image, or when the projector (projector device B2) projects an image, the image is projected. It is possible to make it difficult for the player to see the area where the visibility of the image is lower than that of other areas. As a result, it is possible to effectively improve the appearance including the image displayed on the projection target portion.

In the eleventh embodiment, the upper edge of the projection target area (projection target area 8133c) is positioned on the outer side of the gaming machine (downstream in the traveling direction of the light projected by the projector) from the screen member (decorative screen sheet 8133). It has been explained that the predetermined member (decorative frame 8140) is arranged to make the nearby predetermined area (difficult-to-project area 8133e) difficult to be visually recognized by the player. In the present invention, the location where the predetermined member (decorative frame 8140) is arranged is not particularly limited, and may be an area where it is difficult to project an image from the projector (projector device B2) or an area where an image is projected from the projector (projector device B2). A predetermined member (decorative frame 8140) is placed on the outer side of the area where the visibility of the projected image is lower than other areas (downstream in the traveling direction of the light projected by the projector) when is performed. can be placed. For example, a predetermined member (decorative frame 8140) is placed on the front side (downstream side in the traveling direction of light projected by the projector) in the vicinity of the lower edge of the projected portion (front curved surface 8133k) of the screen member (decorative screen sheet 8133). It may be arranged. Also, the side (downstream side in the traveling direction of the light projected by the projector) near the side edge (left edge or right edge) of the projection target portion (front curved surface 8133k) in the screen member (decorative screen sheet 8133) A predetermined member (decorative frame 8140) may be arranged in the .

As for the “region where it is difficult to project an image from the projector”, for example, the light projected by the projector (projector device B2) reaches due to the structure near the edge of the projection target portion (the front curved surface 8133k). Inaccessible or hard-to-reach areas (areas where shadows occur) can be mentioned. In addition, as the “area where the visibility of the projected image is lower than other areas when the projected image is projected from the projector”, for example, the projected portion (the front curved surface 8133k) is excessively curved. There are areas where the distortion of the image becomes extremely large due to the fact that the image is disturbed due to the influence of unintended reflection or refraction of the light projected by the projector (projector device B2). One can cite areas to be stored. For example, in the vicinity of the lower edge of the projected portion (the front curved surface 8133k), the light reflected by the lower flat surface 8133g (see FIG. 276) is incident on the rear curved surface 8133i, causing the light to be displayed on the front curved surface 8133k. Since there is a possibility that the projected image may be disturbed, a predetermined member (decorative frame 8140) is placed on the outer side (front side) near the lower edge of such a projected portion (front curved surface 8133k). can be arranged.

In particular, when both the "area where it is difficult to project the image from the projector" (area where shadows are generated) and the normal projection area are visually recognized by the player, the existence of an area where the image is partially not displayed. There is a concern that the player will be able to see that the game is being played, and the appearance will be very bad. According to the gaming machine 1 according to the eleventh embodiment, by arranging the predetermined member (decorative frame 8140), it is possible to blindfold the area where such a shadow occurs, so that the deterioration of the appearance can be prevented. can be prevented. Here, in the eleventh embodiment, the front side of the predetermined member (decorative frame 8140) is given a predetermined decoration. As a result, it is possible for the player to see the predetermined member (decorative frame 8140) as a design component, and the predetermined member (decorative frame 8140) is arranged with the intention of blindfolding as described above. can be made difficult for the player to be conscious of.

In the eleventh embodiment, the cover member 8131 and the lens member 8132 are arranged between the screen member (decorative screen sheet 8133) and the predetermined member (decorative frame 8140). By disposing the cover member, it is possible to prevent the screen member (decorative screen sheet 8133) and the lens member from being damaged. In addition, by arranging the lens member, it is possible to create a three-dimensional effect by enlarging the image displayed on the screen member (decorative screen sheet 8133), and visibility with more reality (for example, , a way of showing that the flame is shaking inside the predetermined member (decorative frame 8140). In addition, by enlarging the image displayed on the screen member (decorative screen sheet 8133), it is possible to make the region in which the above-described shadows are produced less noticeable. However, in the present invention, one or both of the cover member and the lens member may be omitted.

When a cover member is provided, the cover member may also be used as a decorative member by applying a predetermined color or decoration to the cover member. Further, when lens members are provided, the number of lens members is not particularly limited, and the number of the first light-transmitting member (outer lens 8021) and the second light-transmitting member (inner lens 8022) described in the ninth embodiment is , a plurality of translucent members (lens members) may be arranged. Also, such a light-transmitting member (lens member) may be produced by bonding two light-transmitting members (lens members) together with an adhesive or the like. Here, in order to effectively exhibit the function of enlarging an image, it is necessary to give the translucent member (lens member) a predetermined thickness. When it is attempted to manufacture, there is a concern that the mass productivity will be lowered because it is difficult to perform die cutting. Moreover, in order to manufacture a resin component having such a thickness, a large mold is required, which may increase the cost. In this regard, if two light-transmitting members (lens members) are bonded together to produce one light-transmitting member (lens member), mass productivity can be improved and costs can be kept low. be able to.

In the eleventh embodiment, the decorative unit 8120 is an integrated unit (a unit in which the decorative frame 8140, the cover member 8131, the lens member 8132, and the decorative screen sheet 8133 are integrated). As a result, manufacturing efficiency can be improved, and parts can be easily replaced when damaged.

Further, in the eleventh embodiment, the description has been given assuming that the front side translucent plate 8111 is arranged on the back side of the screen member (decorative screen sheet 8133). Since gaps are likely to occur in the vicinity of the edges of the screen member (decorative screen sheet 8133) having a curved shape, it is feared that a wire-shaped device may be inserted through the gaps, causing fraudulent acts. be done. In this respect, in the eleventh embodiment, since the front side translucent plate 8111 is arranged on the back side of the screen member (decorative screen sheet 8133), it is possible to prevent this kind of bullying. On the other hand, in the ninth embodiment, no translucent member is arranged on the inner side of the game machine than the screen (upper screen sheet 8023) and in the passage path of the light projected by the projector (projector 9020). explained as. In this way, in the present invention, the member (the front side transparent sheet) which has translucency in the passage path of the light projected by the projector (projector device B2) on the inner side of the gaming machine than the screen member (decorative screen sheet 8133). The light plate 8111) may not be arranged.

In the eleventh embodiment, the front light-transmitting plate 8111 has a rectangular shape as shown in FIG. 272 . The shape of the front light-transmitting plate 8111 is not particularly limited, and the decoration units 8120 (the first decoration unit 8120a, the second decoration unit 8120b, the third decoration unit 8120c, the fourth decoration unit 8120d, and the fifth decoration unit 8120e). (The entire decoration unit 8120 overlaps with the opening when viewed from the front). shape). FIGS. 319 and 320 show such modifications.

FIG. 319 is a front view of the front translucent plate. FIG. 320 is a schematic diagram for explaining how the decoration unit is attached. As shown in FIG. 319, the front light-transmitting plate 8111 according to this modification has a shape obtained by removing the shaded portion from the front light-transmitting plate 8111 according to the eleventh embodiment. As shown in FIG. 320, the front translucent plate 8111 is not present on the rear side of the decoration unit 8120, but instead of the front translucent plate 8111, a decoration unit back cover is provided. The decoration unit back cover has a substantially elliptical shape and is made of a translucent material like the front translucent plate 8111 . Further, screw holes similar to the upper screw hole 8111a and the lower screw hole 8111b of the front light-transmitting plate 8111 are formed in the decoration unit rear cover. The screw inserted through the upper screw hole of the decoration unit back cover is screwed into the hole formed in the upper boss portion 8145 a of the decoration frame 8140 , and the screw inserted through the lower screw hole of the decoration unit back cover is screwed into the decoration frame 8140 . The decoration unit back cover can be fixed to the decoration unit 8120 by screwing it into the hole formed in the lower boss portion 8145b. By adopting such a configuration, the arrangement position of the decoration unit 8120 is not restricted by the front translucent plate 8111, and the degree of freedom regarding the arrangement of the decoration unit 8120 can be increased. For example, it is possible to arrange the decoration unit 8120 so as to be embedded in the back side of the gaming machine 1 . As a result, the position of the decorative screen sheet 8133 is also on the far side of the game machine 1 compared to the eleventh embodiment, so that the light projected by the projector device B2 can reach easily. A lower portion of the decoration unit 8120 is attached to the decoration unit holding member. For example, the lower portion of the decoration unit 8120 may be attached to a predetermined location of the navigation lamp cover 8161, or may be attached to another member.

<Appendix K>
2. Description of the Related Art Conventionally, there is known a gaming machine capable of producing effects by using a projector (see Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 6-035066 and Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2009-240459). According to such a game machine, a game image is projected from a projector onto a projection surface such as a screen, so that the image is displayed on the screen instead of the liquid crystal display device.

In the process of earnestly studying the game machine using the projector as described above, the inventor of the present invention cannot create a new entertainment property by devising the arrangement of the screen and the light emitting means. I came up with the idea.

SUMMARY OF THE INVENTION The present invention has been made in view of the above points, and an object of the present invention is to create a new entertainment value in a gaming machine equipped with a projector and a screen.

In this regard, the gaming machine 1 according to the eleventh embodiment has the following features.

(K-1-1) a screen (decorative screen sheet 8133);
a projector (projector device B2) that projects light for displaying an image on the screen;
and a light emitting means (LED 8177 for illumination of the decorative unit) capable of emitting light,
A plurality of colors are provided as colors of the light emitted from the light emitting means,
The light emitting means is arranged so as to be able to project light onto the screen,
wherein the light emitting means is capable of emitting light of a second color (blue) when the projector projects light for displaying an image containing the first color (red);
A gaming machine characterized by:

According to the gaming machine 1 according to the eleventh embodiment, the light emitting means (decorative unit irradiation LED 8177) is arranged so as to be able to project light onto the screen (decorative screen sheet 8133), and the projector (projector device B2 ) projects light for displaying an image containing the first color (red), the light emitting means (decoration unit irradiation LED 8177) can emit light of the second color (blue). is configured as As a result, it is possible to cooperate with the projection of light by the projector (projector device B2) and the projection of light by the light emitting means (decorative unit irradiation LED 8177), and the image displayed on the screen (decorative screen sheet 8133). It is possible to create a novel production effect by arranging the color of

In the eleventh embodiment, when light for displaying an image including the first color (red) is projected by the projector (projector device B2), the second color is emitted by the light emitting means (decoration unit illumination LED 8177). It has been explained that it may emit (blue) light. This makes the screen (decorative screen sheet 8133) visible in a third color (purple) produced by the first color (red) and the second color (blue). In the present invention, colors different from each other can be adopted as the first color, the second color, and the third color. may be basically the same color. For example, when the projector (projector device B2) projects light for displaying an image containing a first color (red), the light emitting means (decorative unit irradiation LED 8177) emits light of a second color (red). By emitting light, the screen (decorative screen sheet 8133) can be made visible in a third color (bright red). In this way, it is possible to create vivid colors that cannot be projected only by the projector (projector device B2) due to the limit of luminance. An image containing the first color (red) may be, for example, an image corresponding to flames of the first color (red). The image containing the first color (red) may be an image composed entirely of the first color (red), or an image containing colors other than the first color (red). good.

(K-1-2) The gaming machine of (K-1-1),
The projector and the screen are arranged so that the light projected by the projector is incident on the back side of the screen,
The light emitting means is arranged diagonally behind the screen at a position that does not block the passage of the light projected by the projector.
It is characterized by

According to the gaming machine 1 according to the eleventh embodiment, the projector (projector device B2) and the screen (decorative screen sheet 8133) are configured such that the light projected by the projector (projector device B2) is projected onto the screen (decorative screen sheet 8133). The light emitting means (decorative unit irradiation LED 8177) is positioned so as not to block the passage of the light projected by the projector (projector device B2), and the screen (decorative screen sheet 8133 ) is located diagonally behind. As a result, the screen (decorative screen sheet 8133) and the light emitting means (decorative unit illumination LED 8177) can be efficiently arranged while securing the passage path for the light projected by the projector (projector device B2). In addition, by arranging the light emitting means (decorative unit illumination LED 8177) obliquely with respect to the screen (decorative screen sheet 8133), the light emitting means (decoration unit illumination LED 8177) deviates from the center of the player's field of vision. Since it becomes difficult to visually recognize the light source, the design can be improved.

(K-1-3) The gaming machine of (K-1-1) or (K-1-2),
At least part of the projection surface of the screen is curved,
It is characterized by

According to the game machine 1 according to the eleventh embodiment, since an image is displayed on the curved projection surface, it is possible to give a three-dimensional effect to the displayed image, and to realize an image expression with more reality. can be realized.

(K-2-1) a screen (decorative screen sheet 8133);
a projector (projector device B2) that projects light for displaying an image on the screen;
and a light emitting means (LED 8177 for illumination of the decorative unit) capable of emitting light,
The light-emitting means is arranged so as to be able to project light onto the screen, and is a directional member (a bullet-shaped lens included in the bullet-shaped LED) that directs the projected light toward a specific position on the screen. with
wherein the light emitting means is capable of emitting light of a second color (blue) when the projector projects light for displaying an image containing the first color (red);
A gaming machine characterized by:

According to the gaming machine 1 according to the eleventh embodiment, the light emitting means (decorative unit irradiation LED 8177) is arranged so as to be able to project light onto the screen (decorative screen sheet 8133), and the projector (projector device B2 ) projects light for displaying an image containing the first color (red), the light emitting means (decoration unit illumination LED 8177) can emit light of the second color (blue). is configured as As a result, it is possible to cooperate with the projection of light by the projector (projector device B2) and the projection of light by the light emitting means (decorative unit illumination LED 8177), and the image displayed on the screen (decorative screen sheet 8133). It is possible to create a novel production effect by arranging the color of In addition, the light emitting means (decorative unit illumination LED 8177) is provided with a directional member (cannonball-shaped lens of the cannonball-shaped LED) that directs projected light toward a specific position on the screen (decorative screen sheet 8133). Therefore, it is possible to realize an image expression that emphasizes the display of a specific position.

When an LED is used as the light emitting means in the present invention, the type of the LED is not particularly limited, and a so-called surface-mounted LED or a so-called cannonball-type LED may be employed. As the surface-mounted LED, one formed by placing a light-emitting element in a recessed housing and filling the light-emitting element with resin can be used. As the bullet-shaped LED, it is possible to use one in which the shape of the resin forming the outer surface is formed into a bullet shape. Since bullet-shaped LEDs are provided with a bullet-shaped encapsulating resin, they generally have directivity and a narrower irradiation range than surface-mounted LEDs. As a result, for example, when a bullet-shaped LED (narrow-angle type LED with a transparent resin bullet-shaped cap) is used as the light emitting means (decorative unit irradiation LED 8177), a predetermined portion of the screen (decorative screen sheet 8133) can be locally irradiated. For example, when an image corresponding to the character's face is displayed on the screen (decorative screen sheet 8133), it is possible to perform an effect such as illuminating the part corresponding to the character's eyes.

On the other hand, when surface-mounted LEDs (LEDs with light diffusing members) are used as the light emitting means (decorative unit illumination LEDs 8177), a relatively wide range of the screen (decorative screen sheet 8133) can be evenly illuminated. This makes it possible for the light emitted from the light emitting means (decorative unit illumination LED 8177) to reach substantially the entire projection target area (projection target area 8133c) on the screen (decorative screen sheet 8133). In addition, by illuminating from the obliquely downward direction, it is possible to give the player the impression of being brightly illuminated from below. Furthermore, since the amount of light included per unit solid angle is reduced, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to recognize the position of the light source. In this regard, if the position of the light source (the grain of the LED) is completely visible to the player, it is feared that the appearance will deteriorate. It is difficult, and good design can be secured. In addition, when a surface-mounted LED is used as the light emitting means (navigation lamp LED 8179), it is possible to increase the amount of light passing through the uneven portion 8173d, so that the convex portion 8166 of the navigation lamp lens 8165 is evenly illuminated. can also In addition, as a light-emitting means in the present invention, a full-color LED may be used, or a single-color LED may be used.

(K-2-2) The gaming machine of (K-2-1),
The projector and the screen are arranged so that the light projected by the projector is incident on the back side of the screen,
The light emitting means is arranged diagonally behind the screen at a position that does not block the passage of the light projected by the projector.
It is characterized by

According to the gaming machine 1 according to the eleventh embodiment, the projector (projector device B2) and the screen (decorative screen sheet 8133) are configured such that the light projected by the projector (projector device B2) is projected onto the screen (decorative screen sheet 8133). The light emitting means (decorative unit illumination LED 8177) is positioned so as not to block the passage of the light projected by the projector (projector device B2), and the screen (decorative screen sheet 8133 ) is located diagonally behind. As a result, the screen (decorative screen sheet 8133) and the light emitting means (decorative unit illumination LED 8177) can be efficiently arranged while ensuring the path for the light projected by the projector (projector device B2). In addition, by arranging the light emitting means (decorative unit illumination LED 8177) obliquely with respect to the screen (decorative screen sheet 8133), the light emitting means (decoration unit illumination LED 8177) deviates from the center of the player's field of vision. Since it becomes difficult to visually recognize the light source, the design can be improved.

(K-2-3) The gaming machine of (K-2-1) or (K-2-2),
At least part of the projection surface of the screen is curved,
It is characterized by

According to the gaming machine 1 according to the eleventh embodiment, since an image is displayed on the curved projection surface, it is possible to give a three-dimensional effect to the displayed image, and to realize an image representation rich in reality. can be realized.

(K-3-1) A screen (decorative screen sheet 8133),
a projector (projector device B2) that projects light for displaying an image on the screen;
A light emitting board (navigation lamp LED board 8175) on which a light source is arranged,
A light-emitting decorative portion (navigation lamp lens 8165) that is visible to the player,
The light emitting substrate is provided with a first light emitting means (decorative unit irradiation LED 8177) and a second light emitting means (navi lamp LED 8179) as light sources,
The first light emitting means is arranged so as to be able to project light onto the screen,
The second light emitting means is arranged so as to be able to project light onto the light emitting decorative portion,
When the projector projects light for displaying an image containing a first color (red), the first light emitting means is capable of emitting light of a second color (blue).
A gaming machine characterized by:

According to the gaming machine 1 according to the eleventh embodiment, the first light emitting means (decorative unit irradiation LED 8177) is arranged so as to be able to project light onto the screen (decorative screen sheet 8133), and the projector (projector When the device B2) projects light for displaying an image containing the first color (red), the first light emitting means (decoration unit illumination LED 8177) emits light of the second color (blue). is configured in such a way that As a result, it is possible to cooperate with the projection of light by the projector (projector device B2) and the projection of light by the first light emitting means (decorative unit illumination LED 8177), and display on the screen (decorative screen sheet 8133). It is possible to create a novel production effect by arranging the color tone of the image. In addition, the second light emitting means (navi lamp LED8179) is arranged so as to be able to project light to the light emitting decorative portion (navi lamp lens 8165), the first light emitting means (decorative unit irradiation LED8177) and the second Both of the light emitting means (navigation lamp LED 8179) are arranged on one light emitting substrate (navigation lamp LED substrate 8175). As a result, it is possible to effectively utilize the space related to the arrangement of the first light emitting means (decorative unit illumination LED 8177) and the second light emitting means (navigation lamp LED 8179). A wide passage path for light can be secured.

The light-emitting decorative portion may be wholly translucent, or may be partially translucent. For example, the navigation lamp lens 8165 and the navigation lamp cover 8161 may constitute the light-emitting decorative portion. The navigation lamp cover 8161 basically does not have translucency, but may partially have translucency.

(K-3-2) The gaming machine of (K-3-1),
The projector and the screen are arranged so that the light projected by the projector is incident on the back side of the screen,
The light-emitting substrate is arranged obliquely behind the screen at a position that does not block the passage of light projected by the projector.
It is characterized by

According to the gaming machine 1 according to the eleventh embodiment, the projector (projector device B2) and the screen (decorative screen sheet 8133) are configured such that the light projected by the projector (projector device B2) is projected onto the screen (decorative screen sheet 8133). The light-emitting substrate (navigation lamp LED substrate 8175) is positioned so as not to block the passage of light projected by the projector (projector device B2), and the screen (decorative screen sheet 8133 ) is located diagonally behind. As a result, the screen (decorative screen sheet 8133) and the light-emitting substrate (navigation lamp LED substrate 8175) can be efficiently arranged while ensuring the path for the light projected by the projector (projector device B2). In addition, by arranging the light-emitting substrate (navigation lamp LED substrate 8175) obliquely with respect to the screen (decorative screen sheet 8133), the light-emitting means (decorative unit illumination LED 8177) deviates from the center of the player's field of vision. Since it becomes difficult to visually recognize the light source, the design can be improved.

(K-3-3) The gaming machine of (K-3-1) or (K-3-2),
At least part of the projection surface of the screen is curved,
It is characterized by

According to the game machine 1 according to the eleventh embodiment, since an image is displayed on the curved projection surface, it is possible to give a three-dimensional effect to the displayed image, and to realize an image expression with more reality. can be realized.

In the eleventh embodiment, the light projected by the first light emitting means (decorative unit illumination LED 8177) is incident on the back side of the screen (decorative screen sheet 8133). In the present invention, the light projected by the first light emitting means (decorative unit irradiation LED 8177) may be configured to enter the front side of the screen (decorative screen sheet 8133). In the eleventh embodiment, the light emitting substrate (navigation lamp LED substrate 8175) is arranged obliquely below the screen (decorative screen sheet 8133), but the light emitting substrate (navigation lamp LED substrate 8175) is It may be arranged obliquely above the screen (decorative screen sheet 8133). In this case, as described in the ninth embodiment, the light projected from the projector may travel obliquely upward. As the configuration related to the projector and the mirror in the present invention, the configuration described in the ninth embodiment may be adopted, or the configuration described in the eleventh embodiment may be adopted. Further, the projector in the present invention may be a rear projector that projects from the rear side, or a transmissive liquid crystal projector that projects from the front side.

<Appendix L>
2. Description of the Related Art Conventionally, there is known a gaming machine capable of producing effects by using a projector (see Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 6-035066 and Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2009-240459). According to such a game machine, a game image is projected from a projector onto a projection surface such as a screen, so that the image is displayed on the screen instead of the liquid crystal display device.

However, since projectors tend to generate heat and reach high temperatures more easily than liquid crystal display devices and the like, there is a problem that they do not function properly unless the generated heat is released.

SUMMARY OF THE INVENTION It is an object of the present invention to provide a gaming machine capable of dissipating heat generated by electronic components.

In this regard, the gaming machine 1 according to the eleventh embodiment has the following features.

(L-1-1) a predetermined electronic component (projector device B2);
a first space forming portion (cover portion B2000) having a first air passing space (space P) communicating with the space in which the predetermined electronic component is arranged;
a second space forming portion (front duct 8235) having a second air passage space (left space 8247L, central space 8247C, and right space 8247R) communicating with the first air passage space;
The second space forming portion includes openings (left opening 8242L, central opening 8242C, and right opening 8242R) communicating with the outside of the gaming machine,
The opening is open downward,
A gaming machine characterized by:

According to the gaming machine 1 according to the eleventh embodiment, the first space forming portion (cover portion B2000) includes the first air passing space ( A space P) is formed. In addition, the second space forming portion (front duct 8235) is formed with a second air passage space (left space 8247L, central space 8247C, and right space 8247R) communicating with the first air passage space (space P). In addition, openings (left opening 8242L, central opening 8242C, and right opening 8242R) communicating with the outside of the gaming machine are formed. As a result, a first air passage space (space P), a second air passage space (left space 8247L, central space 8247C, and right space 8247R) and a space in which predetermined electronic components (projector device B2) are arranged are formed. Heat generated by a predetermined electronic component (projector device B2) can be released through the flow of air moving between . Also, the openings (the left opening 8242L, the central opening 8242C, and the right opening 8242R) are formed to open downward. As a result, the openings (the left opening 8242L, the central opening 8242C, and the right opening 8242R) may be blocked by objects placed thereon, and the openings (the left opening 8242L) may be blocked from the outside of the gaming machine. , central opening 8242C, and right opening 8242R) can be effectively prevented from entering foreign matter such as liquid.

(L-1-2) The gaming machine of (L-1-1),
the predetermined electronic component is a projector capable of projecting a predetermined image,
It is characterized by

According to the gaming machine 1 according to the eleventh embodiment, the first air passage space (space P) and the second air passage space (left space 8247L, central space 8247C, and right space 8247R) and a projector (projector device B2) The heat generated by the projector (projector device B2) can be released through the flow of air moving between the installation spaces of the . In addition, it is possible to protect the projector (projector device B2) from foreign matter such as liquid that may come in from the outside of the game machine, and prevent the projector (projector device B2) from malfunctioning due to the foreign matter. can be avoided.

(L-2-1) a predetermined electronic component (projector device B2);
a first space forming portion (cover portion B2000) having a first air passage space (space P) through which air directed toward the predetermined electronic component can pass;
a second space forming portion (front duct 8235) having a second air passage space (left space 8247L, central space 8247C, and right space 8247R) communicating with the first air passage space;
The second space forming portion has openings (left opening 8242L, central opening 8242C, and right opening 8242R) through which air outside the gaming machine can enter,
the opening allows air below the opening to enter the second air passage space;
The air that has passed through the second air passage space and the first air passage space and reached the predetermined electronic component is discharged into the game machine.
A gaming machine characterized by:

According to the gaming machine 1 according to the eleventh embodiment, the first space forming portion (cover portion B2000) includes the first air passage space (space P ) is formed. In addition, the second space forming portion (front duct 8235) is formed with a second air passage space (left space 8247L, central space 8247C, and right space 8247R) communicating with the first air passage space (space P). In addition, openings (left opening 8242L, central opening 8242C, and right opening 8242R) through which air outside the game machine can enter are formed. The air that has passed through the second air passage space (left space 8247L, central space 8247C, and right space 8247R) and the first air passage space (space P) and reached the predetermined electronic component (projector device B2) is , is discharged into the game machine. As a result, the air passing through the second air passage space (left space 8247L, central space 8247C, and right space 8247R) and the first air passage space (space P) is allowed to flow into the predetermined electronic component (projector device B2). After that, the air warmed by the heat generated by the predetermined electronic component (projector device B2) can be discharged, and the predetermined electronic component (projector device B2) can be cooled through the flow of the air. can. In addition, the openings (left opening 8242L, central opening 8242C, and right opening 8242R) are exposed to air below the openings (left opening 8242L, central opening 8242C, and right opening 8242R). can enter the second air passage space (left space 8247L, central space 8247C, and right space 8247R). That is, since the openings (left opening 8242L, central opening 8242C, and right opening 8242R) are formed to open downward, when an object is placed, the openings (left opening 8242L, The central opening 8242C and the right opening 8242R) are blocked, and the liquid from the outside of the gaming machine through the openings (the left opening 8242L, the central opening 8242C, and the right opening 8242R). It is possible to effectively prevent the entry of foreign matter such as

(L-2-2) The gaming machine of (L-2-1),
the predetermined electronic component is a projector capable of projecting a predetermined image,
It is characterized by

According to the gaming machine 1 according to the eleventh embodiment, the air passing through the second air passing space (left space 8247L, central space 8247C, and right space 8247R) and first air passing space (space P) is sent to the projector ( The heat generated by the projector (projector device B2) can be released through the air flow. In addition, it is possible to protect the projector (projector device B2) from foreign matter such as liquid that may come in from the outside of the game machine, and prevent the projector (projector device B2) from malfunctioning due to the foreign matter. can be avoided.

(L-3-1) a predetermined electronic component (projector device B2);
a first space forming portion (cover portion B2000) having a first air passing space (space P) communicating with the space in which the predetermined electronic component is arranged;
a second space forming portion (front duct 8235) having a second air passage space (left space 8247L, central space 8247C, and right space 8247R) communicating with the first air passage space;
The second space forming portion includes openings (left opening 8242L, central opening 8242C, and right opening 8242R) communicating with the outside of the gaming machine,
The opening is formed below the second space forming portion and has a plurality of individual vents (openings 8242a to 8242w),
The plurality of individual vents are partitioned from each other by a partition structure (first partition 8243a and second partition 8243b),
A gaming machine characterized by:

According to the gaming machine 1 according to the eleventh embodiment, the first space forming portion (cover portion B2000) includes the first air passing space ( A space P) is formed. In addition, the second space forming portion (front duct 8235) is formed with a second air passage space (left space 8247L, central space 8247C, and right space 8247R) communicating with the first air passage space (space P). In addition, openings (left opening 8242L, central opening 8242C, and right opening 8242R) communicating with the outside of the gaming machine are formed. As a result, a first air passage space (space P), a second air passage space (left space 8247L, central space 8247C, and right space 8247R) and a space in which predetermined electronic components (projector device B2) are arranged are formed. Heat generated by a predetermined electronic component (projector device B2) can be released through the flow of air moving between . Also, the openings (left opening 8242L, central opening 8242C, and right opening 8242R) are formed below the second space forming portion (front duct 8235). As a result, the openings (the left opening 8242L, the central opening 8242C, and the right opening 8242R) may be blocked by objects placed thereon, and the openings (the left opening 8242L) may be blocked from the outside of the gaming machine. , central opening 8242C, and right opening 8242R) can be effectively prevented from entering foreign matter such as liquid. Furthermore, the plurality of individual vents (openings 8242a to 8242w) are partitioned from each other by partition structures (first partition 8243a and second partition 8243b). This makes it possible to reduce the diameter of each of the individual vents (openings 8242a to 8242w), and allows foreign matter to enter through the openings (left opening 8242L, central opening 8242C, and right opening 8242R). It is possible to further reduce the possibility of coming.

(L-3-2) The gaming machine of (L-3-1),
the predetermined electronic component is a projector capable of projecting a predetermined image,
It is characterized by

According to the gaming machine 1 according to the eleventh embodiment, the first air passage space (space P) and the second air passage space (left space 8247L, central space 8247C, and right space 8247R) and a projector (projector device B2) The heat generated by the projector (projector device B2) can be released through the flow of air moving between the installation spaces of the . In addition, it is possible to protect the projector (projector device B2) from foreign matter such as liquid that may come in from the outside of the game machine, and prevent the projector (projector device B2) from malfunctioning due to the foreign matter. can be avoided.

In the eleventh embodiment, second air passage spaces (left space 8247L, central space 8247C, and right space 8247R) are introduced from the openings (left opening 8242L, central opening 8242C, and right opening 8242R). and the air passing through the first air passing space (space P) flows into the predetermined electronic component (projector device B2). In the present invention, the air traveling direction is not limited to this example, and the air passing through the predetermined electronic component (projector device B2) travels through the first air passing space (space P) and the second air passing space (left space 8247L). , central space 8247C, and right space 8247R), and may be discharged from the openings (left opening 8242L, central opening 8242C, and right opening 8242R). As the predetermined electronic component, it is possible to appropriately adopt an electronic component that generates heat during operation. , solenoids, sensors, and the like. As an image output device, in addition to a projector, for example, a liquid crystal display device (liquid crystal panel) can be cited.

In addition, in the eleventh embodiment, an air passage (air intake path) from the openings (left opening 8242L, central opening 8242C, and right opening 8242R) to predetermined electronic components (projector apparatus B2) is provided. duct) is provided, but the air passage path (exhaust duct) after passing through the predetermined electronic component (projector device B2) is not provided. Even if an exhaust duct is not provided, the air (air discharged from the case B22 into the cabinet G) after passing through predetermined electronic components (projector device B2) is discharged through the holes of the game machine 1 (for example, , medal payout port DD14 or a gap formed in the side wall of the cabinet G), the tokens are naturally discharged to the outside of the gaming machine 1. FIG. However, in the present invention, an exhaust duct may be provided. The duct structure from the openings (left opening 8242L, central opening 8242C, and right opening 8242R) to predetermined electronic components (projector device B2) may be configured continuously. , a gap may be formed between one duct and another duct. For example, the first space forming portion (cover portion B2000) and the second space forming portion (front duct 8235) may be directly connected or may be spaced apart. When the first space forming part (cover part B2000) and the second space forming part (front duct 8235) are arranged apart from each other, the first space forming part (cover part B2000) and the second space forming part (front duct 8235), the air may be once discharged into the cabinet (outside the duct). Even in this case, the first air passage space (space P) and the second air passage space (left space 8247L, central space 8247C, and right space 8247R) communicate through the space in the cabinet. It can be said that there are

In the eleventh embodiment, the openings (left opening 8242L, central opening 8242C, and right opening 8242R) are formed below the second space forming portion (front duct 8235). did. That is, the openings (left opening 8242L, central opening 8242C, and right opening 8242R) are formed at positions visible when the second space forming portion (front duct 8235) is viewed from the bottom. As a result, it is possible to prevent the player from pouring a liquid such as a drink through the openings (the left opening 8242L, the central opening 8242C, and the right opening 8242R). Therefore, there is no need to provide a structure for storing liquid (see FIG. 36), and a wide projection area can be secured by the projector (projector device B2). At the same time, it is possible to prevent dust from accumulating inside the duct. Furthermore, the openings (the left opening 8242L, the central opening 8242C, and the right opening 8242R) may be formed at positions that are difficult or invisible in front view or side view. As a result, the openings (the left opening 8242L, the central opening 8242C, and the right opening 8242R) can be made difficult for the player to see, and good decorativeness (beauty) can be achieved.

In the eleventh embodiment, as shown in FIG. 261, which is a front view, it is difficult to visually recognize the openings of the front duct base 8240 (the left opening 8242L, the central opening 8242C, and the right opening 8242R) in the front view. It has become. Only when looking in from almost directly below as shown in Fig. 317, a part of the opening can be seen, and from slightly below the front (the general position where the player sits for the game). Even when viewed, the opening can be made inconspicuous (compared to an embodiment in which the opening is arranged facing the front). In this way, by arranging the opening facing downward to make it difficult to see or stand out when viewed from the front, it is possible to enhance the appearance of the game machine when viewed from the front.

In addition, it is also possible to employ the following modifications. FIG. 321 is a schematic diagram for explaining the layout of the front duct base. As shown in FIG. 321, the front side duct base 8240 may be inclined so that the front side (player side) of the gaming machine is lower and the depth side (housing side (cabinet side)) is higher. With such an arrangement, the opening can be made more difficult to see when viewed from the front. In addition, at least part of the bottom surface of the front duct base 8240 is provided with an inclined portion that is inclined so that the front side (player side) of the gaming machine is lower and the depth side (housing side (cabinet side)) is higher. Alternatively, openings (a left opening 8242L, a central opening 8242C, and a right opening 8242R) may be provided in the inclined portion. Even with such a configuration, it is possible to similarly enhance the effect of making the opening inconspicuous when viewed from the front. Furthermore, even if the front duct base 8240 is provided with an inclined portion and then the front duct base 8240 is arranged to be inclined, the same effect can be obtained.

Further, in the eleventh embodiment, the second space forming portion (front duct 8235) is configured as part of the bonus lamp unit 8210. In the present invention, the duct may be configured integrally with the decorative portion (light emitting unit) in this way. That is, the air passage may be provided inside the decorative portion (light emitting unit). As a result, it is possible to effectively utilize the space for arranging the ducts, and it is possible to ensure a wider projection area for the projector (projector device B2).

Further, in the eleventh embodiment, the explanation has been given assuming that the plurality of individual vents (openings 8242a to 8242w) are partitioned from each other by the partition structure (first partition 8243a and second partition 8243b). As a result, the diameters of the individual vents (openings 8242a to 8242w) are all less than a predetermined value (eg, 25 mm). Therefore, since the diameter of each of the individual vents (openings 8242a to 8242w) is smaller than the diameter of the medals, it is possible to prevent the player from throwing medals through the individual vents (openings 8242a to 8242w). can. In the present invention, the diameter of the individual vents (openings 8242a to 8242w) is not particularly limited. It may be designed to be Also, the individual vents (openings 8242a to 8242w) may be designed to a size that does not allow a human finger to be caught. As a result, it is possible to prevent a situation in which a finger is caught in the individual ventilation holes (openings 8242a to 8242w) and injured when the game machine 1 is assembled or transported. In addition, it is possible to prevent the player from sticking his/her finger in mischief. The partition structure is not particularly limited as long as the opening can be finely divided while ensuring air permeability. , a mesh structure (mesh structure) such as punching B450 shown in FIG. 31, or a structure in which a large number of small through holes are formed such as punching B450 shown in FIG. good. By adopting such a partition structure, even if a player inserts a wire-shaped device, it is difficult for it to penetrate deep into the game machine (the device can only reach the projector through the duct). , it is also possible to prevent cheating.

[Twelfth embodiment]
The first to eleventh embodiments have been described above. The twelfth embodiment will be described below. The basic configuration of the gaming machine 1 according to the twelfth embodiment is the same as the gaming machine 1 according to the first to eleventh embodiments. In the following description, the same components as those of the gaming machine 1 according to the first to eleventh embodiments are denoted by the same reference numerals. In addition, the descriptions of the portions in which the descriptions of the first to eleventh embodiments are also applicable to the twelfth embodiment will be omitted.

<Right side decoration unit 8310>
FIG. 322 is a perspective view of the upper door mechanism; FIG. 323 is a front view of the right decoration unit. FIG. 324 is a perspective view showing the right light emitting unit removed from the right decoration unit and the right light emitting unit exploded.

As shown in FIG. 322, a right lamp unit 8301 is provided on the right side of the screen unit 8150 described in the eleventh embodiment, and a left lamp unit 8302 is provided on the left side of the screen unit 8150. FIG. The right lamp unit 8301 and the left lamp unit 8302 are arranged to protrude forward from the front panel 8197 similarly to the bonus lamp unit 8210 . The top of the right lamp unit 8301 and the top of the left lamp unit 8302 are connected to the right and left ends of the bonus lamp unit 8210, respectively.

A right decorative unit 8310 shown in FIG. 323 has a configuration that can be arranged in front of the front panel 8197 instead of the right lamp unit 8301 in the eleventh embodiment. Although not shown, it is also possible to employ a left decorative unit instead of the left lamp unit 8302 in the eleventh embodiment. Since the left decorative unit has a symmetrical structure with the right decorative unit 8310, only the right decorative unit 8310 will be described below.

As shown in FIG. 323, a speaker punching 8311 is provided near the top of the right decorative unit 8310 . The speaker punching 8311 is arranged in front of the speaker 8042 (see FIG. 246). A plurality of holes are formed in the speaker punching 8311, and the sound output from the speaker 8042 is emitted forward through the holes. Although not shown, the front panel 8197 of this embodiment has a structure in which a plurality of holes are formed (see FIG. 233), similar to the right side 8001b and left side 8001c of the front panel 8001 of the ninth embodiment (see FIG. 233). speaker sound emitting part). The speaker punching 8311 is attached to the front side of the speaker sound emitting portion.

The right decoration unit 8310 has a right light emitting unit 8320 below the speaker punching 8311 . As shown in FIG. 324, the right light emitting unit 8320 includes a right LED board 8330, a right board cover 8340, a right first lens 8350, a right second lens 8370, and a right third lens 8380. .

The right LED board 8330 is installed on the front side of the right board cover 8340 so that the surface thereof substantially coincides with the horizontal vertical plane. On the surface of the right LED substrate 8330, a plurality of first side irradiation LEDs 8331 (first side irradiation LED 8331a, first side irradiation LED 8331b, first side irradiation LED 8331c, and first side irradiation LED 8331d), and , a plurality of second side irradiation LEDs 8332 (second side irradiation LED 8332a, second side irradiation LED 8332b, second side irradiation LED 8332c, and second side irradiation LED 8332d) are provided.

The first side illumination LED 8331 and the second side illumination LED 8332 are installed so as to emit light forward. In addition, the first side irradiation LED 8331 (first side irradiation LED 8331a, first side irradiation LED 8331b, first side irradiation LED 8331c, and first side irradiation LED 8331d), and second side irradiation LED 8332 (second The second side irradiation LED 8332a, the second side irradiation LED 8332b, the second side irradiation LED 8332c, and the second side irradiation LED 8332d) are arranged side by side on a straight line (vertical straight line).

The right first lens 8350 is arranged in front of the right LED substrate 8330 , the right second lens 8370 is arranged in front of the right first lens 8350 , and the right third lens 8380 is arranged in front of the right second lens 8370 . Located on the front side. As a result, the right side first lens 8350 is covered with the right side second lens 8370 from the front. In addition, the right second lens 8370 is covered from the front side by the right third lens 8380 . The right first lens 8350, the right second lens 8370, and the right third lens 8380 are each made of a translucent material. As a result, the light emitted from the first side illumination LED 8331 and the light emitted from the second side illumination LED 8332 are emitted from the right third lens 8380 to the outside of the gaming machine 1. there is

<Right First Lens 8350>
FIG. 325 is a front perspective view of the right first lens. FIG. 326 is a perspective view of the right first lens viewed from below and from the left. 327 and 328 are partial enlarged perspective views of the vicinity of the third protrusion. 329 and 330 are partial enlarged perspective views of the vicinity of the first protrusion and the second protrusion. FIG. 331 is a partially enlarged perspective view of the front surface of the right first lens. FIG. 332 is a perspective view of the right first lens as seen from the rear. FIG. 333 is a cross-sectional view of the right first lens viewed from behind.

As shown in FIG. 325, the right first lens 8350 includes a body portion 8351, and left and right portions 8352 and 8353 formed by bending the left end and right end of the body portion 8351 backward, respectively. The body portion 8351 is arranged so as to be substantially parallel to the right LED board 8330 . The front surface 8354 (surface on the front side) of the body portion 8351 includes a first front surface 8354a, a second front surface 8354b, a third front surface 8354c, a fourth front surface 8354d, a fifth front surface 8354e, a sixth front surface 8354f, and a third front surface 8354f. It has a seventh front surface 8354g, an eighth front surface 8354h, and a ninth front surface 8354i.

The first front surface 8354a is provided with a first protrusion 8355a and a second protrusion 8356a that protrude forward. The second front surface 8354b is provided with a third protrusion 8357a formed to protrude forward. The third front surface 8354c is provided with a first projecting portion 8355b and a second projecting portion 8356b that project forward. The fourth front surface 8354d is provided with a third protrusion 8357b formed to protrude forward. The fifth front surface 8354e is provided with a first protrusion 8355c and a second protrusion 8356c that protrude forward. The sixth front surface 8354f is provided with a third protrusion 8357c that protrudes forward. The seventh front surface 8354g is provided with a first projecting portion 8355d and a second projecting portion 8356d that project forward. The eighth front surface 8354h is provided with a third projecting portion 8357d that projects forward.

As shown in FIG. 326, the forward protrusion length (from the front surface 8354 to the third protrusion 8354) of the third protrusion 8357 (the third protrusion 8357a, the third protrusion 8357b, the third protrusion 8357c, and the third protrusion 8357d) 3 length to the front end of the projecting portion 8357) is the forward projection of the first projecting portion 8355 (the first projecting portion 8355a, the first projecting portion 8355b, the first projecting portion 8355c, and the first projecting portion 8355d). length (the length from the front surface 8354 to the front end of the first protrusion 8355). In addition, the forward projection length of the first projecting portion 8355 (the first projecting portion 8355a, the first projecting portion 8355b, the first projecting portion 8355c, and the first projecting portion 8355d) The length to the front end) is the forward projection length (from the front surface 8354 to length to the front end of the second projecting portion 8356).

The first protrusion 8355a is arranged on the right side of the second protrusion 8356a. On the other hand, the first protrusion 8355b, the first protrusion 8355c, and the first protrusion 8355d are arranged to the left of the second protrusion 8356b, the second protrusion 8356c, and the second protrusion 8356d, respectively. It is In FIG. 326, the second protrusion 8356b, the second protrusion 8356c, and the second protrusion 8356d are almost obscured by the first protrusion 8355b, the first protrusion 8355c, and the first protrusion 8355d. It has become.

First protrusion 8355 (first protrusion 8355a, first protrusion 8355b, first protrusion 8355c, and first protrusion 8355d) and second protrusion 8356 (second protrusion 8356a, second protrusion The portion 8356b, the second projecting portion 8356c, and the second projecting portion 8356d) are each formed to extend in the vertical direction. First projecting portion 8355 (first projecting portion 8355a, first projecting portion 8355b, first projecting portion 8355c, and first projecting portion 8355d) and second projecting portion 8356 (second projecting portion 8356a, second projecting portion 8356b, second projecting portion 8356c, and second projecting portion 8356d) are arranged at predetermined intervals.

Further, the second projecting portion 8356a, the first projecting portion 8355b, the first projecting portion 8355c, and the first projecting portion 8355d are arranged on a substantially straight line (the first straight line in the vertical direction). The first projecting portion 8355a, the second projecting portion 8356b, the second projecting portion 8356c, and the second projecting portion 8356d are arranged on a substantially straight line (a second straight line substantially parallel to the first straight line).

FIG. 327 shows the vicinity of the third projecting portion 8357d viewed from below and left. FIG. 328 shows the vicinity of the third projecting portion 8357d viewed from below and from the right. The third projecting portion 8357a, the third projecting portion 8357b, and the third projecting portion 8357c have the same configuration as the third projecting portion 8357d. The third projecting portion 8357a is arranged slightly to the right of the third projecting portion 8357b, the third projecting portion 8357c, and the third projecting portion 8357d.

As shown in FIGS. 327 and 328, the third protruding portion 8357d has a substantially pentagonal shape (like a shogi piece) when viewed from the bottom or the top, and has unevenness on the periphery. Specifically, the peripheral edge of the third projecting portion 8357d includes a left uneven portion 8357e, a left front uneven portion 8357f formed from the front end of the left uneven portion 8357e toward the right side (over the front end of the third projecting portion 8357d), and a right side uneven portion 8357e. It has an uneven portion 8357g and a right front uneven portion 8357h formed from the front end of the right uneven portion 8357g toward the left side (to the front end of the third projecting portion 8357d).

The left uneven portion 8357e is configured by continuously forming a convex curved surface 8357i (a semi-cylindrical shape obtained by dividing a cylinder in half). The left front uneven portion 8357f is configured by continuously forming a convex curved surface 8357j and a concave curved surface 8357k. The right uneven portion 8357g is configured by continuously forming a concave curved surface 8357l (a semi-cylindrical shape obtained by dividing a cylinder in half). The right front uneven portion 8357h is configured by continuously forming a convex curved surface 8357m and a concave curved surface 8357n.

As a result, the left front concave-convex portion 8357f and the right front concave-convex portion 8357h are configured as smooth curved surfaces as a whole, while the left concave-convex portion 8357e has a sharp contact point with the adjacent convex curved surface 8357i. , the right uneven portion 8357g has a shape in which the contact point of the adjacent concave curved surface 8357l is sharp. The convex curved surface 8357i, the convex curved surface 8357j, the concave curved surface 8357k, the concave curved surface 8357l, the convex curved surface 8357m, and the concave curved surface 8357n are each formed to extend in the vertical direction.

FIG. 329 shows the vicinity of the first projecting portion 8355d and the second projecting portion 8356d viewed from below and left. FIG. 330 shows the vicinity of the first projecting portion 8355d and the second projecting portion 8356d viewed from below and right. The first projecting portion 8355a, the first projecting portion 8355b, and the first projecting portion 8355c have the same configuration as the first projecting portion 8355d, and the second projecting portion 8356a, the second projecting portion 8356b, Also, the second projecting portion 8356c has the same configuration as the second projecting portion 8356d.

As shown in FIGS. 329 and 330, the first projecting portion 8355d and the second projecting portion 8356d have a columnar shape, and their front surfaces (front surfaces) are formed in a zigzag shape in cross section. Specifically, the front surface of the first projecting portion 8355d is a surface in which an inclined surface 8355e that descends from the front to the rear and an inclined surface 8355f that descends from the rear to the front are continuously formed. The front surface of the second projecting portion 8356d is a surface in which an inclined surface 8356e that descends from the front to the rear and an inclined surface 8356f that descends from the rear to the front are continuously formed.

In the first protruding portion 8355d, the inclined surface 8355e is formed so that the normal direction is diagonally forward right, and the inclined surface 8355f is formed so that the normal direction is diagonally forward left. In addition, in the second protruding portion 8356d, the inclined surface 8356e is formed so that the normal direction is diagonally forward right, and the inclined surface 8356f is formed so that the normal direction is diagonally forward left. . The normal direction to the inclined surface 8356e has a larger rightward component than the normal direction to the inclined surface 8355e. The normal direction to the inclined surface 8355f has a larger leftward component than the normal direction to the inclined surface 8356f.

FIG. 331 shows the vicinity of the third projecting portion 8357d viewed from below and left. As shown in FIG. 331, the ninth front surface 8354i has a shape in which a large number of hexagonal pyramids having apexes in the rear and open bottoms are arranged in a matrix. That is, the ninth front surface 8354i has a shape in which a large number of triangular slopes 8354j with different normal directions are laid out. As a result, the ninth front surface 8354i has a zigzag structure when viewed in cross section. The first front surface 8354a, the third front surface 8354c, the fifth front surface 8354e, and the seventh front surface 8354g have the same structure as the ninth front surface 8354i. The first projecting portion 8355 and the second projecting portion 8356 are provided on the front side of such a structure.

On the other hand, the eighth front surface 8354h is a surface in which an inclined surface 8354k that descends from the front to the rear and an inclined surface 8354l that descends from the rear to the front are continuously formed. The inclined surface 8354k and the inclined surface 8354l are each formed to extend in the horizontal direction. Thereby, the eighth front surface 8354h is formed in a zigzag shape when viewed in cross section. The second front surface 8354b, the fourth front surface 8354d, and the sixth front surface 8354f have the same structure as the eighth front surface 8354h. The third projecting portion 8357 is provided on the front side of such a structure.

As shown in FIG. 332, the rear surface 8358 (rear side surface) of the main body 8351 includes rear projections 8359 (rear projections 8359a, 8359b, 8359c, and rear projections 8359a, 8359b, 8359c, projecting portion 8359d), first rear uneven portion 8360 (first rear uneven portion 8360a, first rear uneven portion 8360b, first rear uneven portion 8360c, and first rear uneven portion 8360d), and A second rear uneven portion 8361 is formed.

The rear protrusion 8359 (rear protrusion 8359a, rear protrusion 8359b, rear protrusion 8359c, and rear protrusion 8359d) is similar to the third protrusion 8357 (third protrusion 8357a, It is provided at a position overlapping with the third projecting portion 8357b, the third projecting portion 8357c, and the third projecting portion 8357d). The first rear uneven portion 8360 (the first rear uneven portion 8360a, the first rear uneven portion 8360b, the first rear uneven portion 8360c, and the first rear uneven portion 8360d) has a first Protruding portions 8355 (first protruding portion 8355a, first protruding portion 8355b, first protruding portion 8355c, and first protruding portion 8355d) and second protruding portions 8356 (second protruding portion 8356a, second protruding portion 8356b, second 2 projecting portion 8356c and the second projecting portion 8356d). The second rear uneven portion 8361 constitutes a portion of the rear surface 8358 other than the rear protrusion 8359 and the first rear uneven portion 8360 .

FIG. 333 shows a state in which the right first lens 8350 is cut along the vertical plane in the front-rear direction (the plane passing through the second projecting portion 8356a, the first projecting portion 8355b, the first projecting portion 8355c, and the first projecting portion 8355d). showing. As shown in FIG. 333, the second rear uneven portion 8361 has a wavy structure in which an inclined surface 8361e that descends from the rear to the front and an inclined surface 8361f that descends from the front to the rear are alternately formed. have.

The rear protruding portion 8359 has a rectangular parallelepiped shape and is formed to protrude rearward from the second rear uneven portion 8361 . The first rear concave-convex portion 8360 has a wavy structure in which an inclined surface 8360e that descends from the rear to the front and an inclined surface 8360f that descends from the front to the rear are alternately formed. The inclined surfaces 8360e and 8360f are each formed to extend in the left-right direction. The first rear uneven portion 8360 is formed to protrude rearward from the second rear uneven portion 8361 . The rear projection length of the rear protrusion 8359 is longer than the rear projection length of the first rear concave-convex portion 8360 . As a result, the rear end (rear end surface 8359 e ) of the rear protrusion 8359 is positioned rearward of the rear end of the first rear uneven portion 8360 . The rear end surface 8359e is a rectangular plane.

The inclined surfaces 8360e and 8360f of the first rear uneven portion 8360 extend straight in the horizontal direction, whereas the inclined surfaces 8361e and 8361f of the second rear uneven portion 8361 extend horizontally. It extends to draw a curve. The curves drawn by the inclined surface 8361e and the inclined surface 8361f are symmetrical with the rear protrusion 8359 as a boundary. The inclined surfaces 8361e and 8361f of the second rear uneven portion 8361 are formed from the left end to the right end of the rear surface 8358, whereas the inclined surfaces 8360e and 8360f of the first rear uneven portion 8360 are formed in the second Compared to the inclined surfaces 8361e and 8361f of the rear uneven portion 8361, the length in the left-right direction is shorter. Thereby, the second rear uneven portion 8361 is formed to extend to the right side portion of the first rear uneven portion 8360 . In the right portion of the first rear uneven portion 8360, the curvature of the curve drawn by the second rear uneven portion 8361 is larger than the other portions. In particular, near the center of the first rear uneven portion 8360 in the vertical direction, the second rear uneven portion 8361 is formed to have an arcuate curved surface 8361g.

<Irradiation of Light from the Right LED Board 8330>
FIG. 334 is a rear perspective view of the right first lens, the first side illumination LED, and the second side illumination LED. 335 is a partially enlarged perspective view of the right first lens, the first side illumination LED, and the second side illumination LED shown in FIG. 334. FIG. 336 and 337 are sectional views of the right first lens, the first side illumination LED, and the second side illumination LED shown in FIG. 334. FIG. FIG. 338 is a perspective view of the right second lens viewed from below and right. FIG. 339 is a perspective view of the right second lens viewed from below and from the left. FIG. 340 is a perspective view of the right second lens as seen from the rear. FIG. 341 is a partially enlarged perspective view of the right second lens as seen from the rear. FIG. 342 is a cross-sectional view of the right light emitting unit. FIG. 343 is a front perspective view of the right third lens. FIG. 344 is a perspective view of the right third lens as seen from the rear.

334 to 337, the right first lens 8350, the first side illumination LED 8331, and the second side illumination LED 8332 in the assembled state of the right light emitting unit 8320 are maintained in their relative positional relationship. 1 is a diagram showing only one part, and illustration of other components is omitted. Also, in FIG. 336, the right first lens 8350, the first side irradiation LED 8331, and the second side irradiation LED 8332 in the state shown in FIG. is shown. Also, in FIG. 337, the right first lens 8350, the first side irradiation LED 8331, and the second side irradiation LED 8332 in the state shown in FIG. It shows a state cut along a horizontal plane near the center.

As shown in FIGS. 334 and 335, the first side-illumination LED 8331 (first side-illumination LED 8331a, first side-illumination LED 8331b, first side-illumination LED 8331c, and first side-illumination LED 8331d) When viewed, it overlaps with the first rear uneven portion 8360 (the first rear uneven portion 8360a, the first rear uneven portion 8360b, the first rear uneven portion 8360c, and the first rear uneven portion 8360d). is provided. The first side illumination LED 8331 is positioned near the center in the vertical direction and near the center in the horizontal direction of the first rear uneven portion 8360 .

The second side irradiation LED 8332 (the second side irradiation LED 8332a, the second side irradiation LED 8332b, the second side irradiation LED 8332c, and the second side irradiation LED 8332d) has a rear protrusion 8359 (rear 8359a, 8359b, 8359c, and 8359d). The second side irradiation LED 8332 is positioned near the center in the vertical direction and near the center in the horizontal direction of the rear protrusion 8359 .

The vertical length of the second side irradiation LED 8332 is substantially equal to the vertical length of the rear protrusion 8359 . As a result, the upper edge and lower edge of the second side irradiation LED 8332 substantially match the upper edge and lower edge of the rear end surface 8359e of the rear protrusion 8359, respectively, when viewed from the rear. Also, the vertical length of the third protruding portion 8357 is substantially equal to the vertical length of the rear protruding portion 8359 . As a result, the distance between the upper surface 8359f (upper surface) and the lower surface 8359g (lower surface) of the rear protrusion 8359 (thickness of the rear protrusion 8359) is equal to the upper surface 8357p (upper surface) of the third protrusion 8357. surface) and the lower surface 8357q (lower surface) (the thickness of the third projecting portion 8357). In addition, the upper surface 8359f and the lower surface 8359g of the rear protrusion 8359 and the upper surface 8357p and the lower surface 8357q of the third protrusion 8357 are formed substantially flat. They are formed substantially on the same plane as the upper surface 8357p and the lower surface 8357q of the third projecting portion 8357, respectively.

As shown in FIG. 336, the second side irradiation LED 8332d is arranged at a predetermined distance (adjacent) to the rear end surface 8359e of the rear protrusion 8359d. Although not shown, the rear protruding portion 8359d is arranged such that the rear end surface 8359e is substantially parallel to the right LED substrate 8330 . The light emitted from the second side illumination LED 8332d enters the rear end surface 8359e, passes through the rear protrusion 8359d, the eighth front surface 8354h, and the third protrusion 8357d, and then reaches the periphery of the third protrusion 8357d. The light is emitted to the outside of the right first lens 8350 from (left uneven portion 8357e, left front uneven portion 8357f, right right uneven portion 8357g, and right front uneven portion 8357h).

Although only the second side irradiation LED 8332d is shown in FIG. 336, other second side irradiation LEDs 8332 (second side irradiation LED 8332a, second side irradiation LED 8332b, and second side irradiation LED 8332c) Similarly, it is arranged close to the rear end surface 8359e of the rear protrusion 8359 (rear protrusion 8359a, rear protrusion 8359b, and rear protrusion 8359c). Alternatively, the second side irradiation LED 8332 may be substantially in contact with the rear end surface 8359 e of the rear protrusion 8359 .

As a result, the light emitted from the second side irradiation LED 8332a enters the rear end surface 8359e of the rear protrusion 8359a, and passes through the rear protrusion 8359a, the second front surface 8354b, and the third protrusion 8357a. After that, it is emitted to the outside of the right first lens 8350 from the periphery of the third projecting portion 8357a (the left uneven portion 8357e, the left front uneven portion 8357f, the right right uneven portion 8357g, and the right front uneven portion 8357h). The light emitted from the second side irradiation LED 8332b enters the rear end surface 8359e of the rear protrusion 8359b, passes through the rear protrusion 8359b, the fourth front surface 8354d, and the third protrusion 8357b. The light is emitted to the outside of the right first lens 8350 from the peripheral edges of the three projecting portions 8357b (the left uneven portion 8357e, the left front uneven portion 8357f, the right right uneven portion 8357g, and the right front uneven portion 8357h). The light emitted from the second side irradiation LED 8332c enters the rear end face 8359e of the rear protrusion 8359c, passes through the rear protrusion 8359c, the sixth front surface 8354f, and the third protrusion 8357c, and then passes through the third protrusion 8357c. The light is emitted to the outside of the right first lens 8350 from the peripheral edges of the three projecting portions 8357c (the left uneven portion 8357e, the left front uneven portion 8357f, the right right uneven portion 8357g, and the right front uneven portion 8357h).

Here, as described above, the peripheral edges of the third projecting portion 8357 (the left uneven portion 8357e, the left front uneven portion 8357f, the right uneven portion 8357g, and the right front uneven portion 8357h) are uneven. The left uneven portion 8357e, the left front uneven portion 8357f, the right uneven portion 8357g, and the right front uneven portion 8357h each have predetermined concave portions or convex portions (convex curved surface 8357i, convex curved surface 8357j to concave curved surface 8357k, concave curved surface 8357l, or a repeating structure of convex curved surfaces 8357m to concave curved surfaces 8357n). The repeating structure is densely formed, and the pitch of the recesses or projections (the average distance between recesses or the average distance between projections) is relatively small. Adjacent recesses or protrusions are arranged in the front-rear direction or in the left-right direction. Therefore, the direction of the normal to any point on the left uneven portion 8357e, the left front uneven portion 8357f, the right uneven portion 8357g, and the right front uneven portion 8357h basically includes a horizontal component.

As a result, the light emitted from the second side irradiation LED 8332 is emitted to the outside of the right first lens 8350 from the left uneven portion 8357e, the left front uneven portion 8357f, the right front uneven portion 8357g, and the right front uneven portion 8357h. At this time, the light is in a relatively condensed state in a specific range centered on the left-right direction. Also, the second side illumination LED 8332 is a full-color LED, and can emit a plurality of colors including red, blue, and green. Therefore, it is possible to make the portion where the third projecting portion 8357 is formed shine strongly in a specific color (for example, red) centering on the left-right direction.

Part of the light emitted from the second side illumination LED 8332 may be diffusely reflected and emitted from the left side 8352 to the right side 8353 to the outside of the right first lens 8350 . The left side surface of the left side portion 8352 is formed in a zigzag shape when viewed in cross section. Specifically, on the left surface of the left portion 8352, an inclined surface 8352a descending from left to right and an inclined surface 8352b descending from right to left are continuously formed. On the other hand, the right side surface of the right side portion 8353 is formed substantially flat. The shape of the left side surface of the left side portion 8352 and the right side surface of the right side portion 8353 are not particularly limited. good.

As shown in FIG. 337, the first side-illumination LED 8331d is provided such that its central portion in the horizontal direction is positioned between the first projecting portion 8355d and the second projecting portion 8356d. Although only the first side irradiation LED 8331d is shown in FIG. 337, other first side irradiation LEDs 8331 (first side irradiation LED 8331a, first side irradiation LED 8331b, and first side irradiation LED 8331c) Similarly, the center portion in the left-right direction is the first protrusion 8355 (first protrusion 8355a, first protrusion 8355b, and first protrusion 8355c) and the second protrusion 8356 (second protrusion 8356a, It is provided so as to be positioned between the second projecting portion 8356b and the second projecting portion 8356c). As a result, the first side illumination LED 8331 (the first side illumination LED 8331a, the first side illumination LED 8331b, the first side illumination LED 8331c, and the first side illumination LED 8331d) is, in rear view (front view), Part overlaps with the first protrusion 8355 (first protrusion 8355a, first protrusion 8355b, first protrusion 8355c, and first protrusion 8355d), and part overlaps with the second protrusion 8356 ( It overlaps with the second projecting portion 8356a, the second projecting portion 8356b, the second projecting portion 8356c, and the second projecting portion 8356d).

Light emitted from the first side illumination LED 8331d enters the first rear uneven portion 8360d and passes through the first rear uneven portion 8360d and the seventh front surface 8354g. Part of the light transmitted through the seventh front surface 8354g enters the first protrusion 8355d and is emitted to the outside of the right first lens 8350 from the front surface of the first protrusion 8355d. Part of the light that has passed through the seventh front surface 8354g enters the second protrusion 8356d and is emitted to the outside of the right first lens 8350 from the front surface of the second protrusion 8356d. Part of the light that has passed through the seventh front surface 8354g is emitted to the outside of the right first lens 8350 as it is without entering the first protrusion 8355d and the second protrusion 8356d.

Similarly, the light emitted from the first side illumination LED 8331a enters the first rear uneven portion 8360a and passes through the first rear uneven portion 8360a and the first front surface 8354a. Part of the light transmitted through the first front surface 8354a enters the first protrusion 8355a and is emitted to the outside of the right first lens 8350 from the front surface of the first protrusion 8355a. Part of the light transmitted through the first front surface 8354a enters the second protrusion 8356a and is emitted to the outside of the right first lens 8350 from the front surface of the second protrusion 8356a. Also, part of the light transmitted through the first front surface 8354a is emitted to the outside of the right first lens 8350 as it is without entering the first protrusion 8355a and the second protrusion 8356a.

Light emitted from the first side irradiation LED 8331b enters the first rear uneven portion 8360b and passes through the first rear uneven portion 8360b and the third front surface 8354c. Part of the light transmitted through the third front surface 8354c enters the first protrusion 8355b and is emitted to the outside of the right first lens 8350 from the front surface of the first protrusion 8355b. Part of the light transmitted through the third front surface 8354c enters the second protrusion 8356b and is emitted to the outside of the right first lens 8350 from the front surface of the second protrusion 8356b. Part of the light that has passed through the third front surface 8354c is emitted to the outside of the right first lens 8350 as it is without entering the first protrusion 8355b and the second protrusion 8356b.

Also, the light emitted from the first side irradiation LED 8331c enters the first rear concave-convex portion 8360c and passes through the first rear concave-convex portion 8360c and the fifth front surface 8354e. Part of the light transmitted through the fifth front surface 8354e enters the first protrusion 8355c and is emitted to the outside of the right first lens 8350 from the front surface of the first protrusion 8355c. Part of the light transmitted through the fifth front surface 8354e enters the second protrusion 8356c and is emitted to the outside of the right first lens 8350 from the front surface of the second protrusion 8356c. Part of the light that has passed through the fifth front surface 8354e is emitted to the outside of the right first lens 8350 as it is without entering the first protrusion 8355c and the second protrusion 8356c.

Here, as described above, the first projecting portion 8355 and the second projecting portion 8356 are formed to extend in the vertical direction. The front surfaces of the first projecting portion 8355 (slanted surfaces 8355e and 8355f) and the front surface of the second projecting portion 8356 (slanted surfaces 8356e and 8356f) are uneven. The front surface of the first protruding portion 8355 has a repeated structure of predetermined concave portions or convex portions (inclined surfaces 8355e to 8355f). The front surface of the second protruding portion 8356 has a repeated structure of predetermined concave portions or convex portions (inclined surfaces 8356e to 8356f). The pitch of the recesses or projections (the average distance between recesses or the average distance between projections) is relatively large (than the pitch at the periphery of the third projection 8357). .

As a result, when the light emitted from the first side illumination LED 8331 is emitted from the first projecting portion 8355 and the second projecting portion 8356 to the outside of the right first lens 8350, the light is centered in the vertical direction. It will be in a state of being diffused in a wide range. Also, the first side illumination LED 8331 is a full-color LED, and can emit a plurality of colors including red, blue, and green. Therefore, it is possible to faintly illuminate a predetermined color (eg, blue) around the vertical direction at the locations where the first projecting portion 8355 and the second projecting portion 8356 are formed.

In addition, like the light emitted from the second side illumination LED 8332, part of the light emitted from the first side illumination LED 8331 passes through the diffused reflection, and passes through the left side portion 8352 to the right side portion 8353 to the right side first lens 8350. You may make it discharge|release to the exterior of.

As described above, for example, blue light is emitted from the first side irradiation LED 8331 (the first side irradiation LED 8331a, the first side irradiation LED 8331b, the first side irradiation LED 8331c, and the first side irradiation LED 8331d). , When red light is emitted from the second side illumination LED 8332 (second side illumination LED 8332a, second side illumination LED 8332b, second side illumination LED 8332c, and second side illumination LED 8332d), it glows blue. You can separate the part and the part that glows red. In addition, it is possible to make it look as if a portion that shines red in the horizontal direction is mixed with the portion that shines in blue in the vertical direction.

When the light emitted from the first side illumination LED 8331 and the light emitted from the second side illumination LED 8332 pass through the right first lens 8350 , these lights enter the right second lens 8370 .

As shown in FIGS. 338 and 339, the right second lens 8370 has a triangular prism shape with one side open, and is arranged so that the open side faces the rear. The right side surface 8371 has a right flat portion 8372 (a right flat portion 8372a, a right flat portion 8372b, a right flat portion 8372c, and a right flat portion 8372d). The right flat portion 8372 is formed substantially flat and straight from the front end to the rear end (right end) of the right side surface 8371 . A portion of the right side surface 8371 other than the right flat portion 8372 is a right uneven portion 8373 formed in a zigzag shape when viewed in cross section. Like the left side portion 8352 of the right side first lens 8350, the right side uneven portion 8373 has a shape in which inclined surfaces in different directions are alternately arranged. The depth of unevenness of the right side uneven portion 8373 is shallower than that of the left side portion 8352 .

The left side surface 8374 has a left flat portion 8375 (a left flat portion 8375a, a left flat portion 8375b, a left flat portion 8375c, and a left flat portion 8375d). The left flat portion 8375 is formed substantially flat and straight from the front end to the rear end (left end) of the left side surface 8374 . The left flat portion 8375a, the left flat portion 8375b, the left flat portion 8375c, and the left flat portion 8375d are formed at the front end with the right flat portion 8372a, the right flat portion 8372b, the right flat portion 8372c, and the right flat portion 8372d, respectively. Contiguous. A portion of the left side surface 8374 other than the left flat portion 8375 is a left uneven portion 8376 formed in a zigzag shape when viewed in cross section. The left uneven portion 8376 has a shape in which a large number of truncated pyramidal projections are arranged irregularly.

As shown in FIGS. 340 and 341, the rear surface 8377 (rear surface) of the right second lens 8370 has a rear flat portion 8378 (rear flat portion 8378a, rear flat portion 8378b, rear flat portion 8378c, and a rear flat portion 8378d). The rear flat portion 8378 is formed substantially flat and straight from the front end to the rear end (left end and right end) of the rear surface 8377 . A portion of the rear surface 8377 other than the rear flat portion 8378 is a rear uneven portion 8379 . Similar to the second rear uneven portion 8361 of the right first lens 8350, the rear uneven portion 8379 has a wave-like structure in which inclined surfaces in different directions (an inclined surface 8379a and an inclined surface 8379b) are alternately formed. have.

The inclined surface 8379a and the inclined surface 8379b extend straight from the front to the right on the back side of the right side surface 8371, while on the back side of the left side surface 8374, they curve from the front to the left. extended. The curvature of the curves drawn by the inclined surfaces 8379a and 8379b increases with increasing distance from the rear flat portion 8378, and the curves are symmetrical with the center of the two rear flat portions 8378 as a boundary. In the vicinity of the center of the two rear flat portions 8378, symmetrical inclined surfaces 8379a and 8379b are connected to form a semi-elliptical shape.

FIG. 342 shows a state in which the right light emitting unit 8320 is cut along a horizontal plane passing through the third projecting portion 8357d (near the center of the third projecting portion 8357d in the thickness direction). For clarity, the cut surface of the right LED board 8330 and the cut surface of the right board cover 8340 are shown in black, and the cut surface of the right first lens 8350, the cut surface of the right second lens 8370, and the cut surface of the right third lens 8380 are shown in black. The cut surface of is indicated by shading.

Formation position of right flat portion 8372 (right flat portion 8372a, right flat portion 8372b, right flat portion 8372c, and right flat portion 8372d) in right second lens 8370, left flat portion 8375 (left flat portion 8375a, left flat portion) 8375b, left flat portion 8375c, and left flat portion 8375d), and rear flat portion 8378 (rear flat portion 8378a, rear flat portion 8378b, rear flat portion 8378c, and rear flat portion 8378d) correspond to the formation positions of the third protrusions 8357 (third protrusions 8357a, 8357b, third protrusions 8357c, and third protrusions 8357d) in the first right lens 8350. is doing.

Specifically, right flat portion 8372 (right flat portion 8372a, right flat portion 8372b, right flat portion 8372c, and right flat portion 8372d), left flat portion 8375 (left flat portion 8375a, left flat portion 8375b, left flat portion 8375c and left flat portion 8375d) and the rear flat portion 8378 (rear flat portion 8378a, rear flat portion 8378b, rear flat portion 8378c and rear flat portion 8378d), The upper surface 8357p of the third projecting portion 8357 (the third projecting portion 8357a, the third projecting portion 8357b, the third projecting portion 8357c, and the third projecting portion 8357d) substantially matches the position in the vertical direction. In addition, right flat portion 8372 (right flat portion 8372a, right flat portion 8372b, right flat portion 8372c, and right flat portion 8372d), left flat portion 8375 (left flat portion 8375a, left flat portion 8375b, left flat portion 8375c, and left flat portion 8375d) and the rear flat portion 8378 (rear flat portion 8378a, rear flat portion 8378b, rear flat portion 8378c, and rear flat portion 8378d). The lower surfaces 8357q of the projecting portions 8357 (the third projecting portion 8357a, the third projecting portion 8357b, the third projecting portion 8357c, and the third projecting portion 8357d) are substantially aligned in the vertical direction. Therefore, the cutting plane in FIG. 342 passes through the third projecting portion 8357d and also passes through the right flat portion 8372d, the left flat portion 8375d, and the rear flat portion 8378d.

As described above, the second side irradiation LED 8332 (the second side irradiation LED 8332a, the second side irradiation LED 8332b, the second side irradiation LED 8332c, and the second side irradiation LED 8332d) emits light from the third projecting portion 8357. Most of the light emitted from the periphery (the left uneven portion 8357e, the left front uneven portion 8357f, the right uneven portion 8357g, and the right front uneven portion 8357h) is emitted from the rear flat portion 8378 (the rear flat portion 8378a, the rear flat portion 8378b, rear flat portion 8378c, and rear flat portion 8378d), and enter the right flat portion 8372 (right flat portion 8372a, right flat portion 8372b, right flat portion 8372c, and right flat portion 8372d), or The light is emitted to the outside of the right second lens 8370 from the left flat portion 8375 (the left flat portion 8375a, the left flat portion 8375b, the left flat portion 8375c, and the left flat portion 8375d).

In this way, the light transmitted through the right second lens 8370 enters the right third lens 8380 . As shown in FIGS. 343 and 344 , the right third lens 8380 has an external shape similar to that of the right second lens 8370 . The front surface (front side surface) of the right third lens 8380 is generally formed substantially flat (excluding the portion where the side surface is bent). The back surface (rear surface) of the right third lens 8380 has a right inner wall surface 8381 and a left inner wall surface 8382 . A part of the right inner wall surface 8381 and the left inner wall surface 8382 serves as a rear uneven portion 8383 . The rear uneven portion 8383 has a wave-like structure in which convex curved surfaces are repeatedly formed. The light incident on the third right lens 8380 is transmitted through the third right lens 8380 and emitted to the outside of the gaming machine 1 .

The gaming machine 1 according to the twelfth embodiment has been described above as one embodiment of the present invention.

<Appendix M>
2. Description of the Related Art Conventionally, there is known a gaming machine that includes a light-emitting decorative portion and is capable of producing effects by emitting light from a light source (see Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2013-013686).

In the process of earnestly studying game machines equipped with such light-emitting means, the inventor of the present invention found that it was possible to create new entertainment by devising ways to guide the light emitted from the light-emitting means. I came to the idea that it might be.

SUMMARY OF THE INVENTION The present invention has been made in view of the above points, and an object of the present invention is to create a new entertainment value in a game machine provided with light emitting means.

In this regard, the gaming machine 1 according to the twelfth embodiment has the following features.

(M-1) a plurality of light emitting means capable of emitting light (first side illumination LED 8331 and second side illumination LED 8332);
a first light guide portion (first projecting portion 8355) capable of guiding light emitted from one of the light emitting means;
and a second light guide portion (third projecting portion 8357) capable of guiding light emitted from one of the light emitting means,
The first light guide section can guide the light emitted from one of the light emitting means in a wider range than the second light guide section.
A gaming machine characterized by:

According to the gaming machine 1 according to the twelfth embodiment, the first light guide portion (first projecting portion 8355) has one light emitting means (the third It is configured to be able to guide the light emitted from the first side illumination LED 8331 or the second side illumination LED 8332 over a wide range. By providing such a first light guide portion (first projecting portion 8355) and a second light guide portion (third projecting portion 8357), the present inventor skillfully selected a brightly lit portion and a vaguely lit portion. Considering that it is possible to design, by guiding light using the first light guide portion (first protrusion 8355) and the second light guide portion (third protrusion 8357), an attractive light emission effect I have found that it can be done.

(M-2) The gaming machine of (M-1),
The first light guide portion extends in a predetermined direction (vertical direction),
The length of the second light guide section along the predetermined direction is shorter than the length of the first light guide section along the predetermined direction,
It is characterized by

According to the gaming machine 1 according to the twelfth embodiment, the first light guide portion (first projecting portion 8355) extends in a predetermined direction (vertical direction), and the second light guide portion (third projecting portion 8357) along the predetermined direction (vertical direction) is configured to be shorter than the length along the predetermined direction (vertical direction) of the first light guide portion (first projecting portion 8355). By configuring the first light guide portion (first projecting portion 8355) and the second light guide portion (third projecting portion 8357) in this way, the present inventor has found that the first light guide portion (first projecting portion 8355) ) is dimly lit, while the second light guide portion (third projecting portion 8357) is brightly lit. Found it.

(M-3) The gaming machine of (M-1) or (M-2),
The first light guide section has unevenness (slanted surface 8355e and slanted surface 8355f) formed on the end face in the traveling direction of the light emitted from the light emitting means,
The second light guide portion has unevennesses (left unevenness portion 8357e, left front unevenness portion 8357f, right unevenness portion 8357g, and right front unevenness portion 8357h) formed on the end face in the traveling direction of the light emitted from the light emitting means. cage,
The distance between one concave portion and another concave portion or the interval between one convex portion and another convex portion in the unevenness formed in the first light guide portion is equal to the distance between the unevenness formed in the second light guide portion. Longer than the distance between the recess and the other recess or the distance between the one protrusion and the other protrusion,
It is characterized by

According to the gaming machine 1 according to the twelfth embodiment, in the first light guide portion (first projecting portion 8355) and the second light guide portion (third projecting portion 8357), the light emitting means (first side irradiation LED 8331 Alternatively, unevenness is formed on the end face on the traveling direction side of the light emitted from the second side irradiation LED 8332). The distance between one concave portion and another concave portion or the distance between one convex portion and another convex portion in the unevenness (inclined surface 8355e and inclined surface 8355f) formed in the first light guide portion (first projecting portion 8355) The interval between one recess and the other in the unevenness (the left uneven portion 8357e, the left front uneven portion 8357f, the right right uneven portion 8357g, and the right front uneven portion 8357h) formed in the second light guide portion (the third projecting portion 8357). , or the distance between one projection and another projection. By configuring the first light guide portion (first projecting portion 8355) and the second light guide portion (third projecting portion 8357) in this way, the present inventor has found that the first light guide portion (first projecting portion 8355) ) is dimly lit, while the second light guide portion (third projecting portion 8357) is brightly lit. Found it.

(M-4) The gaming machine according to any one of (M-1) to (M-3) above,
The first light guide portion extends in a predetermined direction (vertical direction),
In the second light guide portion, the end face on the side of the traveling direction of the light emitted from the light emitting means is oriented in a direction closer to the specific direction out of the predetermined direction and a specific direction (horizontal direction) perpendicular to the predetermined direction. formed in a shape that allows the light to be emitted from
It is characterized by

According to the gaming machine 1 according to the twelfth embodiment, the first light guide section (first projecting section 8355) extends in the predetermined direction (vertical direction). In the second light guide portion (third projecting portion 8357), the end face on the traveling direction side of the light emitted from the light emitting means (second side irradiation LED 8332) is oriented in a predetermined direction (vertical direction) and in the predetermined direction (vertical direction). direction), the light can be emitted from the end surface in a direction closer to the specific direction (horizontal direction) than the specific direction (horizontal direction). By configuring the first light guide portion (first projecting portion 8355) and the second light guide portion (third projecting portion 8357) in this way, the present inventor has found that the first light guide portion (first projecting portion 8355) ) is set in a vague light emission state centering on a predetermined direction (vertical direction), while the formation location of the second light guide portion (third projecting portion 8357) is set in a direction close to a specific direction (horizontal direction). It has been found that it is possible to effectively achieve a bright light emission state centering on .

In the second light guide portion (third projecting portion 8357), the end surface on the traveling direction side of the light emitted from the light emitting means (second side irradiation LED 8332) is set in a specific direction (horizontal direction) rather than a predetermined direction (vertical direction). There is no particular limitation on the means for forming a shape that allows the light to be emitted from the end face in a direction close to the . For example, in a repeating structure of predetermined concave portions or convex portions (convex curved surfaces 8357i, convex curved surfaces 8357j to concave curved surfaces 8357k, concave curved surfaces 8357l, or convex curved surfaces 8357m to concave curved surfaces 8357n), adjacent concave portions or convex portions It is possible to arrange the convex portion in a direction closer to a specific direction (horizontal direction) than to a predetermined direction (vertical direction). On the other hand, in the repeating structure of the unevenness (inclined surface 8355e and inclined surface 8355f) formed in the first light guide portion (first projecting portion 8355), the adjacent concave or convex portions are arranged in a predetermined direction rather than in a specific direction (horizontal direction). It is possible to arrange them in a direction close to the direction (vertical direction).

(M-5) The gaming machine according to any one of (M-1) to (M-4),
The length of the first light guide section along the traveling direction of the light emitted from the light emitting means is shorter than the length of the second light guiding section along the traveling direction of the light emitted from the light emitting means.
It is characterized by

According to the gaming machine 1 according to the twelfth embodiment, the length of the first light guide portion (first projecting portion 8355) along the traveling direction of the light emitted from the light emitting means (first side irradiation LED 8331) is It is configured to be shorter than the length of the second light guide portion (third projecting portion 8357) along the traveling direction of the light emitted from the light emitting means (second side irradiation LED 8332). By configuring the first light guide portion (first projecting portion 8355) and the second light guide portion (third projecting portion 8357) in this way, the present inventor has found that the first light guide portion (first projecting portion 8355) ) is dimly lit, while the second light guide portion (third projecting portion 8357) is brightly lit. Found it.

(M-6) The gaming machine according to any one of (M-1) to (M-5) above,
A plurality of the second light guide portions are provided,
The first light guide section is arranged between one of the second light guide sections and another of the second light guide sections,
It is characterized by

According to the gaming machine 1 according to the twelfth embodiment, a plurality of second light guide portions (third projecting portion 8357) are provided, and the first light guide portion (first projecting portion 8355) It is arranged between the light guide portion (third protrusion 8357) and the other second light guide portion (third protrusion 8357). By configuring the first light guide portion (first projecting portion 8355) and the second light guide portion (third projecting portion 8357) in this way, the present inventor has found that the first light guide portion (first projecting portion 8355) ) can be separated by the formation location of the second light guide portion (third projecting portion 8357).

A second light guide portion (third protrusion portion 8357) is arranged between one first light guide portion (first protrusion portion 8355) and another first light guide portion (first protrusion portion 8355). You can do it. In this way, when the first light guide portions (first protrusions 8355) and the second light guide portions (third protrusions 8357) are alternately arranged, the first light guide portions (first protrusions 8355) In the light emission at the formation location (the region where the light is diffused mainly in the vertical direction and shines widely), the light emission at the formation location of the second light guide portion (the third projecting portion 8357) (the light is mainly emitted in the left and right direction ( A region that is diffused and linearly illuminated) can be sandwiched. In addition, the emission color of the light emitting means (first side illumination LED 8331) capable of emitting light that can be guided by the first light guide portion (first protrusion 8355) and the second light guide portion (third protrusion 8357) can emit light that can be guided by the light emitting means (second side illumination LED 8332). By adopting the configuration as in the twelfth embodiment, even when the light emission colors of the adjacent light sources are different in this way, it is possible to partition the light emitting regions of different colors without providing a partition plate. It is possible and the light emission by each color can be expressed appropriately. As a result, it is possible to deal well with the case where there is no space for providing the partition plate or the case where the number of man-hours is required for designing the partition plate.

(M-7) The gaming machine according to any one of (M-1) to (M-6),
Further comprising a third light guide portion (second projecting portion 8356) capable of guiding light emitted from one of the light emitting means,
The third light guide section can guide the light emitted from the one light emitting means in a wider range than the second light guide section,
The first light guide section and the third light guide section extend in substantially the same direction,
It is characterized by

According to the gaming machine 1 according to the twelfth embodiment, compared to the second light guide portion (third projecting portion 8357), the light emitted from one light emitting means (first side irradiation LED 8331 or second side irradiation LED 8332) A third light guide portion (second projecting portion 8356) capable of guiding the light to be emitted over a wide range is provided. 8356) extend in substantially the same direction. By configuring the first light guide portion (first projecting portion 8355) and the third light guide portion (second projecting portion 8356) in this way, the present inventor has found that the first light guide portion (first projecting portion 8355) ) can be more effectively brought into a vague luminous state.

(M-8) The gaming machine according to any one of (M-1) to (M-7),
Further comprising a third light guide portion (second projecting portion 8356) capable of guiding light emitted from one of the light emitting means,
The third light guide section can guide the light emitted from the one light emitting means in a wider range than the second light guide section,
The first light guide section is arranged so that light emitted from one of the light emitting means (the first side illumination LED 8331) can enter, while the third light guide section arranged so that light emitted from the means can enter,
It is characterized by

According to the gaming machine 1 according to the twelfth embodiment, compared with the second light guide portion (third projecting portion 8357), one light emitting means (first side irradiation LED 8331 or second side irradiation LED 8332) emits light A third light guide portion (second projection portion 8356) capable of guiding the light emitted over a wide range is provided. The third light guide portion (second projecting portion 8356) is also arranged so that light emitted from the LED 8331) can enter, while the third light guide portion (second projecting portion 8356) is also emitted from the one light emitting means (first side irradiation LED 8331). It is arranged so that light can enter it. By configuring the first light guide portion (first projecting portion 8355) and the third light guide portion (second projecting portion 8356) in this way, the present inventor has found that the first light guide portion (first projecting portion 8355) ) can be more effectively brought into a vague luminous state.

(M-9) The gaming machine according to any one of (M-1) to (M-8),
The first light guide section is formed to protrude from the first surface (first front surface 8354a, third front surface 8354c, fifth front surface 8354e, and seventh front surface 8354g),
The second light guide section is formed to protrude from the second surface (second front surface 8354b, fourth front surface 8354d, sixth front surface 8354f, and eighth front surface 8354h),
The first surface has a greater degree of diffusion of light emitted from the light emitting means than the second surface.
It is characterized by

According to the gaming machine 1 according to the twelfth embodiment, the first light guide portion (the first projecting portion 8355) includes the first surfaces (the first front surface 8354a, the third front surface 8354c, the fifth front surface 8354e, and the 7 front surface 8354g), and the second light guide portion (third projecting portion 8357) is formed so as to protrude from the second surface (second front surface 8354b, fourth front surface 8354d, sixth front surface 8354f, and eighth front surface 8354h), and the first surface (first front surface 8354a, third front surface 8354c, fifth front surface 8354e, and seventh front surface 8354g) is formed so as to protrude from the second surface (second surface 8354h). 2 front surface 8354b, 4th front surface 8354d, 6th front surface 8354f, and 8th front surface 8354h), degree of diffusion of light emitted from the light emitting means (first side irradiation LED 8331 or second side irradiation LED 8332) is getting bigger. In addition to the first light guide portion (first projecting portion 8355) and the second light guide portion (third projecting portion 8357), the present inventors By configuring the front surface 8354e and the seventh front surface 8354g) and the second surfaces (the second front surface 8354b, the fourth front surface 8354d, the sixth front surface 8354f and the eighth front surface 8354h) in this way, the first guide It is effectively realized that the part where the light part (the first projecting part 8355) is formed is in a vague light emitting state and the part where the second light guide part (the third projecting part 8357) is formed is in a bright light emitting state. found that it is possible to

The degree of diffusion of light on the first surface (first front surface 8354a, third front surface 8354c, fifth front surface 8354e, and seventh front surface 8354g) is compared to the second surface (second front surface 8354b, fourth front surface 8354d, fourth front surface 8354d). There is no particular limitation on means for increasing the degree of diffusion of light from the 6th front surface 8354f and the 8th front surface 8354h). For example, a predetermined number (for example, two) of the second surfaces (second front surface 8354b, fourth front surface 8354d, sixth front surface 8354f, and eighth front surface 8354h) are surfaces having different normal directions. On the other hand, the first surfaces (the first front surface 8354a, the third front surface 8354c, the fifth front surface 8354e, and the seventh front surface 8354g) are specified as surfaces having different normal directions than a predetermined number. It can be configured to have a number (eg, six) of faces. Alternatively, while the second surfaces (second front surface 8354b, fourth front surface 8354d, sixth front surface 8354f, and eighth front surface 8354h) are formed substantially flat, the first surfaces (first front surface 8354a, third front surface 8354c, the fifth front surface 8354e, and the seventh front surface 8354g) may be uneven.

(M-10) The gaming machine according to any one of (M-1) to (M-9),
A first light-transmitting member (first right lens 8350) having the first light guide section and the second light guide section,
The distance between the light emitting means (the first side illumination LED 8331) capable of emitting light that can be guided by the first light guide section and the first light transmitting member is Longer than the distance between the light emitting means (second side irradiation LED 8332) capable of emitting the obtained light and the first light transmitting member,
It is characterized by

According to the gaming machine 1 according to the twelfth embodiment, the first light transmitting member (right first lens 8350), and includes a light emitting means (first side irradiation LED 8331) capable of emitting light that can be guided by the first light guide portion (first projecting portion 8355) and a first light transmitting member (right first lens 8350) is the distance between the light emitting means (the second side illumination LED 8332) capable of emitting light that can be guided by the second light guide portion (the third projecting portion 8357) and the first translucent member (the right side 8350). 1 lens 8350). The inventor of the present invention configured the positional relationship between the light emitting means (the first side irradiation LED 8331 and the second side irradiation LED 8332) and the first translucent member (right first lens 8350) as described above, thereby achieving the first It is effective to set the formation location of the light guide portion (first projecting portion 8355) in a vague light emission state and set the formation location of the second light guide portion (third projection portion 8357) in a bright light emission state. We have found that it is possible to implement

(M-11) The game machine according to any one of (M-1) to (M-10),
a first light transmitting member (right first lens 8350) having the first light guide portion and the second light guide portion;
a second light-transmitting member (right second lens 8370) disposed so that light emitted from the light emitting means and transmitted through the first light-transmitting member can enter;
The second light transmitting member includes a first light passing portion (a right uneven portion 8373, a left uneven portion 8376, and a rear uneven portion 8379) through which light transmitted through the first light guide portion can pass; A second light passing portion (a right flat portion 8372, a left flat portion 8375, and a rear flat portion 8378) through which light transmitted through the two light guide portions can pass,
The first light passage part has a greater degree of diffusion of the light emitted from the light emitting means than the second light passage part,
It is characterized by

According to the gaming machine 1 according to the twelfth embodiment, the first light transmitting member (right first lens 8350) and the light emitting means (the first side illumination LED 8331 or the second side illumination LED 8332) and transmitted through the first translucent member (right first lens 8350) can be incident thereon. and a second light-transmitting member (right second lens 8370). The second light-transmitting member (right second lens 8370) includes first light passing portions (right uneven portion 8373, left uneven portion 8376, and a rear uneven portion 8379) and a second light passing portion (a right flat portion 8372, a left flat portion 8375, and a rear flat portion 8378). The first light passing portion (the right uneven portion 8373, the left uneven portion 8376, and the rear uneven portion 8379) is combined with the second light passing portion (the right flat portion 8372, the left flat portion 8375, and the rear flat portion 8378), the degree of diffusion of light emitted from the light emitting means (the first side illumination LED 8331 or the second side illumination LED 8332) is increased. The inventors have found that by configuring the second light transmitting member (right second lens 8370) in addition to the first light transmitting member (right first lens 8350) in this way, the first light guide section (first protrusion 8355) is in a vague luminous state, while the formation location of the second light guide portion (third projecting portion 8357) is in a bright luminous state. I found out.

The degree of diffusion of light in the first light passage portion (the right uneven portion 8373, the left uneven portion 8376, and the rear uneven portion 8379) is compared with the second light passage portion (the right flat portion 8372, the left flat portion 8375, and the rear uneven portion 8379). There is no particular limitation on means for increasing the degree of diffusion of light in the side flat portion 8378). For example, while the second light passing portion (right flat portion 8372, left flat portion 8375, and rear flat portion 8378) is formed substantially flat, the first light passing portion (right uneven portion 8373, left uneven portion 8376, In addition, it is possible to form unevenness on the rear uneven portion 8379). Alternatively, the second light passing portion (right flat portion 8372, left flat portion 8375, and rear flat portion 8378) is connected to the second surface (second front surface 8354b, fourth front surface 8354d, sixth front surface 8354f, and , eighth front surface 8354h), a predetermined number (for example, two) of surfaces having different normal directions are provided, while the first light passing portion (right uneven portion 8373, left uneven portion 8376, and the rear concave-convex portion 8379) are different in normal direction from each other like the first surface (the first front surface 8354a, the third front surface 8354c, the fifth front surface 8354e, and the seventh front surface 8354g). It may be configured to have a specific number of faces (for example, six) that is larger than the predetermined number.

In the twelfth embodiment, the left side (player side) of the left side portion 8352 is formed in a zigzag cross-sectional view. As a result, the light emitted from the first side illumination LED 8331 to the second side illumination LED 8332 is irregularly refracted, making it difficult for the player to see the position of the light source (LED grain). design can be ensured. On the other hand, if the right surface of the right side portion 8353 is formed in a zigzag shape in cross section, it is possible to make it difficult for customers who are not playing games to see the position of the light source (the grain of the LED). In addition, the forward projection length of the first projection 8355 is longer than the forward projection length of the second projection 8356, and the first projection 8355b, the first projection 8355c, and the first The protrusion 8355d has been described as being arranged on the left side (player side) of the second protrusion 8356b, the second protrusion 8356c, and the second protrusion 8356d, respectively. As a result, the player's side can be illuminated more strongly at the locations where the first projecting portion 8355 and the second projecting portion 8356 are formed.

[Thirteenth Embodiment]
The first to twelfth embodiments have been described above. The thirteenth embodiment will be described below. The basic configuration of the gaming machine 1 according to the thirteenth embodiment is the same as the gaming machine 1 according to the first to twelfth embodiments. In the following description, the same components as those of the gaming machine 1 according to the first to twelfth embodiments are denoted by the same reference numerals. In addition, the descriptions of the portions in which the descriptions of the first to twelfth embodiments also apply to the thirteenth embodiment will be omitted.

<Screen unit 9200>
FIG. 345 is a perspective view schematically showing the appearance of the upper door mechanism. FIG. 346 is an exploded perspective view of the upper door mechanism and display unit; FIG. 347 is an exploded front view of the screen unit. FIG. 348(a) is a front view of the screen unit. 348(b) and 348(c) are plan views of the left screen portion, the right screen portion, and the center screen portion of the screen unit. FIG. 349 is a side view showing the main configuration of the screen unit. FIG. 350(a) is a side view showing the main configuration of the screen unit. FIG. 350(b) is a front view showing the main configuration of the screen unit.

In this embodiment, a display unit 9000 is arranged inside the cabinet G, as in the third embodiment. In the third embodiment, the display unit 9000 is provided with the unit housing 9010, the projector 9020, the mirror 9030, and the cabinet-side screen 9040 (see FIG. 52). In contrast, in this embodiment, instead of the cabinet-side screen 9040, a screen unit 9200 is provided.

Further, in this embodiment, similarly to the third embodiment, the light projected from the projector 9020 travels downward and is then reflected forward by the mirror 9030 (see FIG. 55). The light projected from the projector 9020 is incident on the screen unit 9200 from behind (rear side), and an image is displayed on the front side (display surface) of each screen constituting the screen unit 9200. .

Specifically, as shown in FIGS. 345 to 347, the upper door mechanism UD according to this embodiment includes an upper display window UD1 and a transparent panel UD11 that transmits light. The upper display window UD1 is composed of a frame body with an opening 9150 formed in the center. The opening 9150 is composed of a rectangular main opening 9151 and a rectangular sub-opening formed continuously above the main opening 9151. 9152. A transparent panel UD11 is attached to this opening 9150 . The door-side right screen 9050 and the door-side left screen 9060 (see FIG. 58) described in the third embodiment are not provided.

The display unit 9000 includes a unit housing 9010 (see FIG. 55), a projector 9020, a mirror 9030, and a screen unit 9200. When the upper door mechanism UD is closed, the screen unit 9200 faces the transparent panel UD11 with a predetermined distance (proximity) to the upper door mechanism UD, and the image displayed on the screen unit 9200 is displayed on the transparent panel. It becomes visible to the player through the UD11.

The screen unit 9200 includes a left screen portion 9200L, a right screen portion 9200R, a central screen portion 9200C, an upper screen portion 9200U, a lower screen portion 9200Lo, and a top screen portion 9200T. The left screen portion 9200L, the right screen portion 9200R, the upper screen portion 9200U, and the lower screen portion 9200Lo are each formed in an equiangular trapezoidal shape. The central screen portion 9200C and the top screen portion 9200T are each formed in a rectangular shape.

The left screen portion 9200L, the right screen portion 9200R, the central screen portion 9200C, the upper screen portion 9200U, the lower screen portion 9200Lo, and the top screen portion 9200T (six screens) each have a uniform thickness over the entire surface. formed. Each of these six screens is a transmissive screen in which a projection image is projected from behind and displayed. and a display surface on the front side onto which a projection image is projected by transmitting light emitted from the display surface. Each of the six screens is mainly made of a translucent glass plate, an acrylic plate, or a resin film, and exhibits a milky white, translucent, or gray color when not projected.

Of the two parallel sides of the left screen portion 9200L, the long side 9200La is positioned forward, and the short side 9200Lb is positioned rearward. The short side 9200Lb is located on the right side of the long side 9200La, so that the left screen portion 9200L is arranged with an inclination toward the right as it goes from the front to the rear. Of the two parallel sides of the right screen portion 9200R, the long side 9200Ra is positioned forward, and the short side 9200Rb is positioned rearward. The short side 9200Rb is located on the left side of the long side 9200Ra, so that the right screen portion 9200R is arranged with an inclination toward the left as it goes from the front to the rear.

Of the two parallel sides of the upper screen portion 9200U, the long side 9200Ua is positioned forward, and the short side 9200Ub is positioned rearward. The short side 9200Ub is positioned below the long side 9200Ua, so that the upper screen portion 9200U is arranged with an inclination that descends from the front toward the rear. Of the two parallel sides of the lower screen portion 9200Lo, the long side 9200Loa is positioned forward, and the short side 9200Lob is positioned rearward. The short side 9200Lob is positioned above the long side 9200Loa, so that the lower screen portion 9200Lo is arranged with an inclination that rises from the front to the rear.

The position of the short side 9200Lb in the left screen portion 9200L substantially coincides with the position of the left side 9200Ca in the central screen portion 9200C. Also, the length of the short side 9200Lb and the length of the left side 9200Ca are substantially the same. The position of the short side 9200Rb of the right screen portion 9200R substantially coincides with the position of the right side 9200Cb of the central screen portion 9200C. Also, the length of the short side 9200Rb and the length of the right side 9200Cb are substantially the same.

The position of the short side 9200Ub in the upper screen portion 9200U may substantially match the position of the upper side 9200Cc in the central screen portion 9200C. , the upper portion of the central screen portion 9200C is covered from the front by the upper screen portion 9200U). Also, the position of the short side 9200Lob in the lower screen portion 9200Lo may substantially match the position of the lower side 9200Cd in the central screen portion 9200C, but in the following, the short side 9200Lob is positioned above the lower side 9200Cd. (that is, the lower portion of the central screen portion 9200C is covered from the front by the lower screen portion 9200Lo).

Further, in the following description, the left screen portion 9200L and the right screen portion 9200R are formed in a rectangular shape. For convenience, of the two vertical sides of the left screen portion 9200L, the front side (corresponding to the long side 9200La) is referred to as the front side 9200La, and the rear side (corresponding to the short side 9200Lb) is referred to as the front side 9200La. side) is denoted as rear side 9200Lb. Of the two vertical sides of the right screen portion 9200R, the front side (corresponding to the long side 9200Ra) is referred to as the front side 9200Ra, and the rear side (corresponding to the short side 9200Rb) is referred to as the front side 9200Ra. side) is denoted as rear side 9200Rb.

As shown in FIGS. 348(a) and 348(b), the left screen portion 9200L and the right screen portion 9200R are each connected to the central screen portion 9200C. Specifically, the rear side 9200Lb of the left screen portion 9200L is arranged so as to overlap the left side 9200Ca of the central screen portion 9200C, and the rear side 9200Lb and the left side 9200Ca are fixed by screwing. A rear side 9200Rb of the right screen portion 9200R is arranged so as to overlap a right side 9200Cb of the central screen portion 9200C, and the rear side 9200Rb and the right side 9200Cb are fixed by screwing.

The left screen portion 9200L and the right screen portion 9200R are movable screens and driven by the left screen drive mechanism and the right screen drive mechanism, respectively. Although not shown, the left screen drive mechanism and the right screen drive mechanism each include a drive motor, a motor shaft gear to which the drive shaft of the drive motor is connected, and a drive force transmission member (a drive force transmission member meshed with the motor shaft gear). gears, crank members, etc.). As a result, the rotational driving force of the drive motor can be transmitted to the left screen portion 9200L to the right screen portion 9200R via the driving force transmission member. Since such a drive mechanism is conventionally known, detailed description thereof will be omitted. The drive motor can be controlled by the sub-controller SS (see FIG. 11).

The front side 9200La of the left screen portion 9200L is arranged to face the left edge of the main opening 9151, and the upper and lower ends of the front side 9200La are rotatably supported by the unit casing 9010. As a result, the left side screen portion 9200L is rotatable about the front side 9200La and the rear side 9200Lb. Specifically, the rear side 9200Lb can move between the position of point A and the position of point B shown in FIG. 348(b) in plan view.

Similarly, the front side 9200Ra of the right screen portion 9200R is arranged to face the right edge of the main opening 9151, and the upper and lower ends of the front side 9200Ra are rotatably supported by the unit casing 9010. ing. As a result, the right screen portion 9200R can rotate the rear side 9200Rb with the front side 9200Ra as the center of rotation. Specifically, the rear side 9200Rb can move between the position of point C and the position of point D shown in FIG. 348(b) in plan view.

Here, the left screen portion 9200L and the right screen portion 9200R are not flexible, while the central screen portion 9200C is made of a flexible material. Further, as described above, the left side 9200Ca of the central screen portion 9200C is connected to the rear side 9200Lb of the left screen portion 9200L, and the right side 9200Cb of the central screen portion 9200C is connected to the rear side 9200Rb of the right screen portion 9200R. ing. A front side 9200La of the left screen portion 9200L and a front side 9200Ra of the right screen portion 9200R are fixed to the unit housing 9010, respectively.

When the rear edge 9200Lb of the left screen portion 9200L is at point A shown in FIG. 348(b) and the rear edge 9200Rb of the right screen portion 9200R is at point C shown in FIG. 9200C has a substantially flat shape as a whole. On the other hand, the left screen portion 9200L is rotated so that the rear side 9200Lb moves from the position of point A shown in FIG. When the right screen portion 9200R is rotated so as to move from the position of point C to the position of point D, the central screen portion 9200C assumes a curved shape as shown in FIG. 348(c).

As described above, the left screen portion 9200L and the right screen portion 9200R are movable screens, but the upper screen portion 9200U and the lower screen portion 9200Lo are also configured as movable screens. The upper screen portion 9200U and the lower screen portion 9200Lo are driven by drive mechanisms similar to the left screen drive mechanism and the right screen drive mechanism, respectively.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 349, the long side 9200Ua of the upper screen portion 9200U is arranged to face the upper edge of the main opening 9151, and the left and right ends of the long side 9200Ua are unit housings 9010. is rotatably supported on the As a result, the upper screen portion 9200U can rotate the short side 9200Ub around the long side 9200Ua. Further, the long side 9200Loa of the lower screen portion 9200Lo is arranged to face the lower edge of the main opening 9151, and the left end and right end of the long side 9200Loa are rotatably supported on the unit casing 9010. It is As a result, the lower screen portion 9200Lo is rotatable about the long side 9200Loa and the short side 9200Lob.

As described above, the upper screen portion 9200U is basically arranged with an inclination that descends from the front to the rear. can be changed to the state placed in In addition, the lower screen portion 9200Lo is basically arranged with an inclination that rises from the front to the rear, but by rotating the short side 9200Lob downward, it is arranged substantially horizontally. can be changed to the

In this state, by rotating the left screen portion 9200L and the right screen portion 9200R so as to displace from the state shown in FIG. 348(b) to the state shown in FIG. The right screen portion 9200R, center screen portion 9200C, upper screen portion 9200U, and lower screen portion 9200Lo are arranged as shown in FIGS. 350(a) and 350(b). In this state, the left screen portion 9200L and the right screen portion 9200R are arranged substantially straight in the horizontal direction. An upper screen portion 9200U and a lower screen portion 9200Lo are respectively arranged above and below the left screen portion 9200L, the right screen portion 9200R, and the center screen portion 9200C. The portion 9200C is not covered by the upper screen portion 9200U and the lower screen portion 9200Lo.

Note that the top screen portion 9200T is installed in the upper portion on the back side of the upper door mechanism UD. The top screen part 9200T is arranged so as to face the part of the transparent panel UD11 covering the sub-opening 9152 . The top screen portion 9200T may be provided in the unit housing 9010. FIG. Also, the top screen portion 9200T may be formed so as to be continuous from the upper screen portion 9200U, and may be formed so as to extend upward from the central portion of the long side of the central screen C, for example.

As described above, in this embodiment, six screens (left screen portion 9200L, right screen portion 9200R, center screen portion 9200C, upper screen portion 9200U, lower screen portion 9200Lo, and top screen portion 9200T) are arranged. , and the light projected from the projector 9020 is applied to a range including six screens.

<Production display example>
351(a) and 351(b) are diagrams showing examples of images displayed on the screen unit.

While the player is playing a game on the gaming machine 1, the display surfaces of the left screen portion 9200L, the right screen portion 9200R, the central screen portion 9200C, the upper screen portion 9200U, the lower screen portion 9200Lo, and the top screen portion 9200T ( An image (still image or moving image) relating to the game is displayed on the front side surface).

348(a), 348(b), and 349 show the basic position of the screen unit 9200. FIG. At this time, the display surface of the central screen portion 9200C is held in a substantially flat state (flat state) due to tension acting from both sides (see FIG. 348(b)). As a result, when the gaming machine 1 is viewed from the front, the central portion of the central screen portion 9200C is arranged in the central portion of the main opening portion 9151 . Normally during a game, an image is displayed centering on the central portion (planar display surface) of such a central screen portion 9200C.

Here, as the player progresses the game, as shown in FIG. 351(a), the characters "BONUS confirmed", for example, are displayed in a distorted manner in the central portion of the central screen portion 9200C. Sometimes. When such a display is performed, the short side 9200Ub of the upper screen portion 9200U rotates upward, and at the same time, the short side 9200Lob of the lower screen portion 9200Lo rotates downward. Accordingly, the upper screen portion 9200U and the lower screen portion 9200Lo are arranged substantially horizontally above and below the left screen portion 9200L, the right screen portion 9200R, and the center screen portion 9200C, respectively.

Thereafter, the rear side 9200Lb of the left screen portion 9200L rotates forward (clockwise), and at the same time, the rear side 9200Rb of the right screen portion 9200R rotates forward (counterclockwise). Then, when the surface of the left screen portion 9200L and the surface of the right screen portion 9200R are positioned substantially on the same plane (see FIG. 348(c)), the left screen portion 9200L and the right screen portion 9200R are rotated. motion stops.

While the left screen portion 9200L and the right screen portion 9200R are respectively rotating, the central screen portion 9200C moves forward while gradually curving so as to expand rearward (the central portion is bent). Then, when the rotation of the left screen portion 9200L and the rotation of the right screen portion 9200R are stopped, the central screen portion 9200C is curved rearward to a certain degree (see FIG. 348(c)).

As described above, before the left screen portion 9200L and the right screen portion 9200R are rotated, the characters "BONUS confirmed" are displayed in a distorted manner. When the left screen portion 9200L and the right screen portion 9200R rotate, the distortion of the characters is corrected as the central screen portion 9200C curves. Then, when the rotation of the left screen portion 9200L and the rotation of the right screen portion 9200R are stopped, the distortion of the characters is eliminated and the display contents of "BONUS confirmed" can be seen, as shown in FIG. 351(b). easily visible.

As described above, in the present embodiment, by changing the degree of curvature (curvature) of the central screen portion 9200C over time, it is possible to realize a more interesting effect display. As described in the eighth embodiment, the curvature is a quantity that represents the degree of curvature of a curve or curved surface. called radius. For example, the curvature of a circumference of radius r is 1/r and the radius of curvature is r. The steeper the curve, the greater the curvature and the smaller the radius of curvature. If the curve is an arc, the radius of curvature can be represented by the radius of the arc. On the other hand, if the curve is different from the arc, the radius of curvature can be represented by a predetermined function representing the degree of curvature of the curve. can be done.

Further, in the state shown in FIG. 351(a), the upper screen portion 9200U is arranged with an inclination that descends from the front to the rear, and the lower screen portion 9200Lo rises from the front to the rear. It is arranged with an inclination that At this time, if a predetermined image is displayed on the upper screen portion 9200U and the lower screen portion 9200Lo, it is possible to realize image expression with a sense of depth (stereoscopic effect) due to the tilt. In the above description, the upper part and the lower part of the central screen part 9200C are covered from the front by the upper screen part 9200U and the lower screen part 9200Lo, respectively. However, the central screen portion 9200C may be made smaller so that the light projected from the projector 9020 directly enters the upper screen portion 9200U and the lower screen portion 9200Lo (does not enter the central screen portion 9200C).

The gaming machine 1 according to the thirteenth embodiment has been described above as one embodiment of the present invention.

<Appendix N>
2. Description of the Related Art Conventionally, there is known a gaming machine capable of producing effects by using a projector (see Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 6-035066 and Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2009-240459). According to such a game machine, a game image is projected from a projector onto a projection surface such as a screen, so that the image is displayed on the screen instead of the liquid crystal display device.

In the process of earnestly examining gaming machines using projectors such as those described above, the present inventor came to the idea that it would be possible to create a new type of entertainment by devising screens. rice field.

SUMMARY OF THE INVENTION The present invention has been made in view of the above points, and an object of the present invention is to create a new entertainment aspect in a gaming machine equipped with a projector and a screen.

In this respect, the gaming machine 1 according to the thirteenth embodiment has the following features.

(N-1) a projector (projector 9020);
A predetermined screen (central screen portion 9200C),
The predetermined screen is capable of changing the curvature of a predetermined area that is at least part of the projection surface.
A gaming machine characterized by:

According to the gaming machine 1 according to the thirteenth embodiment, the predetermined screen (central screen portion 9200C) is configured to be able to change the curvature of the predetermined area that is at least part of the projection surface. . As a result, it is possible to change the appearance of the image displayed on the projection surface through the change in the curvature, and to create a novel presentation effect.

(N-2) The gaming machine of (N-1),
The predetermined screen is movable in the position of one end,
When the one end is at the first position, the curvature of the predetermined region is the first curvature, while when the one end is at the second position, the curvature of the predetermined region is the first curvature. 2 curvature,
It is characterized by

According to the gaming machine 1 according to the thirteenth embodiment, the predetermined screen (central screen portion 9200C) can move the position of one end, and when the end is at the first position, the predetermined The curvature of the region is configured to be the first curvature, while the curvature of the predetermined region is configured to be the second curvature when the end is at the second position. Thus, by moving the position of the end portion, the degree of curvature of the predetermined area (the degree of distortion of the image) can be arbitrarily changed according to the game situation.

(N-3) The gaming machine of (N-1) or (N-2),
a first specific screen (left screen portion 9200L);
A second specific screen (right screen part 9200R),
The first specific screen and the second specific screen are respectively movable screens,
One end of the predetermined screen is connected to the first specific screen, while the other end of the predetermined screen is connected to the second specific screen,
The predetermined screen is movable in position of the one end from a first position to a second position in response to driving of the first specific screen, while the position of the second specific screen is movable. the position of the other end is movable from a third position to a fourth position in response to actuation;
The curvature of the predetermined region is a curvature corresponding to the position of the one end and the position of the other end,
It is characterized by

According to the gaming machine 1 according to the thirteenth embodiment, one end of the predetermined screen (central screen portion 9200C) is connected to the first specific screen (left screen portion 9200L), while the predetermined screen The other end of (central screen portion 9200C) is connected to a second specific screen (right screen portion 9200R). In addition, the predetermined screen (central screen portion 9200C) moves from the first position to the second position in accordance with the driving of the first specific screen (left screen portion 9200L). While it is possible, the position of the other end can be moved from the third position to the fourth position according to the driving of the second specific screen (right screen portion 9200R). The curvature of the predetermined area is configured to be a curvature corresponding to the position of the one end and the position of the other end. As a result, by driving the first specific screen (left screen section 9200L) to the second specific screen (right screen section 9200R), the degree of curvature of the predetermined area (the degree of image distortion) can be arbitrarily adjusted according to the game situation. can be changed.

In the thirteenth embodiment, one end of the predetermined screen (center screen portion 9200C) is connected to the first specific screen (left screen portion 9200L), while the other end of the predetermined screen (center screen portion 9200C) is connected to the first specific screen (left screen portion 9200L). is connected to the second specific screen (right screen portion 9200R). In the present invention, the member to which the predetermined screen (central screen portion 9200C) is connected is not limited to the screen, and the predetermined screen (central screen portion 9200C) is appropriately fixed to any member other than the screen. It is possible to In addition, it is possible to change the curvature of a predetermined screen (central screen portion 9200C) through the driving of the members other than the screen while the members are drivable. At this time, of the member connected to one end of the predetermined screen (central screen portion 9200C) and the member connected to the other end of the predetermined screen (central screen portion 9200C), both The curvature of the predetermined screen (central screen portion 9200C) may be changed by driving one member, or the curvature of the predetermined screen (central screen portion 9200C) may be changed by driving one member. good. Also, a portion other than the end portion of the predetermined screen (central screen portion 9200C) may be connected to the member. In this case, the curvature of the predetermined screen (central screen portion 9200C) is changed by moving the position of the portion other than the end portion by driving the member.

Means for connecting the predetermined screen (central screen portion 9200C) and other members are not particularly limited, and arbitrary fixing means can be employed as appropriate. For example, when a predetermined screen (central screen portion 9200C) and a specific screen (left screen portion 9200L to right screen portion 9200R) are fixed by screw fastening, an image may be constantly displayed on the screens of the connecting portion. . As a result, it is possible to hide the screw in the image and make it difficult to see, and it is possible to ensure good design. Alternatively, from the viewpoint of securing design, a predetermined screen (central screen portion 9200C) and specific screens (left screen portion 9200L to right screen portion 9200R) may be connected by engagement or adhesion.

Such driving of the member connected to the predetermined screen (central screen portion 9200C) can be triggered by the establishment of a predetermined condition. For example, when a game state (specific game state) advantageous to the player starts, the curvature of a predetermined screen (central screen portion 9200C) may be changed by driving the member. Then, while the specific game state continues, the curvature may be maintained. Also, when the right to shift to a specific game state is granted (a lottery for determining whether to shift to a specific game state is won), a predetermined screen (central screen part 9200C ) may be changed. As a result, an effect suggesting that the right to shift to the specific game state has been granted (that the lottery for determining whether to shift to the specific game state has been won) may be performed. As the specific game state, the bonus game state (BB game state, MB game state, etc.) in the pachislot game machine, the RT game state, the AT game state (ART game state), the jackpot game state in the pachinko game machine, the probability variable game state, and the time saving A game state such as a game state can be appropriately employed.

Note that the curvature of the predetermined screen (central screen portion 9200C) before driving the member connected to the predetermined screen (central screen portion 9200C) and the curvature of the predetermined screen (central screen portion 9200C) after the driving is not particularly limited. Any one of the curvature of the predetermined screen (central screen portion 9200C) before driving and the curvature of the predetermined screen (central screen portion 9200C) after driving may be 0 (substantially flat). , may be curved and their curvatures may be different from each other.

[14th embodiment]
The first to thirteenth embodiments have been described above. The fourteenth embodiment will be described below. The basic configuration of the gaming machine 1 according to the fourteenth embodiment is the same as the gaming machine 1 according to the first to thirteenth embodiments. In the following description, the same components as those of the gaming machine 1 according to the first to thirteenth embodiments are denoted by the same reference numerals. In addition, descriptions of the portions that the descriptions of the first to thirteenth embodiments are also applicable to the fourteenth embodiment will be omitted.

<Screen unit 9200>
FIG. 352(a) is a front view schematically showing the upper door mechanism and the display unit. Figure 352(b) is a side view of the upper door mechanism and display unit shown in Figure 352(a). 353 is an exploded perspective view of the upper door mechanism and display unit shown in FIG. 352(a). FIG. FIG. 354(a) is an exploded perspective view of the rotating screen portion as seen from the rear. FIG. 354(b) is an exploded perspective view of the rotating screen portion as seen from the front. FIG. 355 is a schematic diagram for explaining the arrangement state of the rotating screen unit.

In this embodiment, a display unit 9000 is arranged in the cabinet G, and the display unit 9000 includes a screen unit 9200, as in the thirteenth embodiment. The light projected from projector 9020 travels downward and is then reflected forward by mirror 9030 (see FIG. 55). The light projected from the projector 9020 is incident on the screen unit 9200 from the rear (rear side), and an image is displayed on the front side (display surface) of each screen constituting the screen unit 9200. .

Each screen constituting the screen unit 9200 is formed to have a uniform thickness over the entire surface, as in the thirteenth embodiment. Each of these screens is of a transmissive type in which a projected image is projected from behind and displayed. and a display surface on the front side onto which a projection image is projected by transmission of the . Each of these screens is made mainly of a translucent glass plate, an acrylic plate, or a resin film, and presents a milky white, translucent, or gray color when not projecting. The upper door mechanism UD has basically the same configuration as that of the thirteenth embodiment.

As shown in FIGS. 352 and 353, the screen unit 9200 according to this embodiment differs in configuration from the screen unit 9200 according to the thirteenth embodiment. The screen unit 9200 includes a left screen portion 9201L, a right screen portion 9201R, a rotating screen portion 9201RT, and a top screen portion 9201T. The left screen portion 9201L, the right screen portion 9201R, and the top screen portion 9201T are each formed in a rectangular shape.

The left screen portion 9201L and the right screen portion 9201R are opposed to the left area and the right area of the main opening 9151, respectively, similarly to the left screen portion 9200L and the right screen portion 9200R (see FIG. 348) described in the thirteenth embodiment. It is installed in the unit housing 9010 so as to do so. Note that the door-side left screen 9060 and the door-side right screen 9050 (see FIG. 58) described in the third embodiment may be provided instead of the left screen portion 9201L and the right screen portion 9201R. The top screen portion 9201T is arranged to face the portion of the transparent panel UD11 covering the sub-opening 9152, like the top screen portion 9200T (see FIG. 348) described in the thirteenth embodiment.

The rotating screen portion 9201RT is installed in the unit housing 9010 so as to be arranged between the left screen portion 9201L and the right screen portion 9201R in front view. The rotating screen portion 9201RT is formed to have a columnar outer shape with a bottom surface of a partially circular shape (a shape obtained by removing an arch from a circle). The rotating screen part 9201RT is a movable screen, and is driven by the drive mechanism described in the thirteenth embodiment. As a result, the rotating screen part 9201RT rotates and stops in a manner similar to a reel (clockwise or counterclockwise when viewed from the side). The rotating screen unit 9201RT will be described in detail below.

As shown in FIGS. 354( a ) and 354 ( b ), the rotating screen portion 9201RT includes a screen portion 9301 , a support portion 9302 and a support portion 9303 . The screen portion 9301 includes a flat screen portion 9310 , a curved screen portion 9320 and an open portion 9330 . The rotating screen part 9201RT has the outer shape of the above-mentioned columnar body, and its inside is hollow. For the sake of clarity, in FIGS. 354(a) and 354(b), the plane screen portion 9310 is shaded and the curved screen portion 9320 is shaded.

The plane screen portion 9310 is formed substantially flat, and the linear portion (the chord that defines the arcuate shape) in the partial circular shape: the line segment ab connecting the points a and b shown in FIG. It has a rectangular shape including a line segment de) connecting . The curved screen portion 9320 is continuous from the lower end of the flat screen portion 9310, and is an arc portion in the partial circular shape (an arc ac connecting points a and c and an arc connecting points d and f shown in FIG. 354). df). As a result, the curved screen portion 9320 constitutes a part of the side surface of the pillar and has a curved surface similar to the side surface of the cylinder. The flat screen portion 9310 and the curved screen portion 9320 constitute the transmissive screen described above.

Point b (upper right corner of flat screen portion 9310) and point c (right rear corner of curved screen portion 9320) are bridged in an arc, and point e (upper left corner of flat screen portion 9310) and point f ( The left rear corner portion of the curved screen portion 9320 is bridged in an arc shape, but the side surfaces corresponding to these arc portions are open. As a result, as an opening surrounded by the arc bc, the arc ef, the line segment be (the upper edge of the plane screen portion 9310), and the line segment cf (the edge of the curved screen portion 9320 on the side opposite to the plane screen portion 9310), An opening 9330 is formed.

The length of the line segment ab and the length of the line segment bc are set to be substantially equal, and the length of the line segment de and the length of the line segment df are set to be substantially equal. In addition, the length of the line segment ab and the length of the line segment de (length in the vertical direction in the plane screen portion 9310) are the length in the vertical direction in the left screen portion 9201L and the length in the vertical direction in the right screen portion 9201R. It is set to be approximately equal to the length.

The support portion 9302 is a member attached to one side of the screen portion 9301 in the axial direction (horizontal direction), and has a rotating shaft 9302a. The support portion 9303 is a member attached to the other side of the screen portion 9301 in the axial direction (horizontal direction), and has a rotating shaft 9303a. When the support portion 9302 and the support portion 9303 are attached to the screen portion 9301, the rotation shaft 9302a and the rotation shaft 9303a are arranged on the central axis of a column (cylinder) including the arcs ab and de. As a result, the rotating shaft 9302a and the rotating shaft 9303a are arranged to extend outward from both ends of the screen portion 9301 in the axial direction. The rotating shaft 9302a and the rotating shaft 9303a are rotatably supported at predetermined portions of the unit housing 9010. As shown in FIG.

FIG. 355(a) shows an arrangement state when the rotary screen portion 9201RT is at the basic position. In this state, the flat screen portion 9310 is arranged to face the main opening portion 9151 . At this time, the flat screen portion 9310 is arranged between the left screen portion 9201L and the right screen portion 9201R, and the display surface of the flat screen portion 9310, the display surface of the left screen portion 9201L, and the display surface of the right screen portion 9201R are displayed. The faces are positioned substantially coplanar.

FIG. 355(b) shows an arrangement state when the rotating screen part 9201RT is rotated by 90° (clockwise when viewed from the right side) from the basic position. In this state, the curved screen portion 9320 is arranged to face the main opening portion 9151 . At this time, the curved screen portion 9320 is arranged in a forwardly convex state and is positioned forward of the main opening portion 9151 . On the other hand, in the upper door mechanism UD, the transparent panel UD11 is mounted so as to protrude forward from the upper display window UD1. Thereby, a gap is formed between the main opening 9151 and the transparent panel UD11, and the curved screen part 9320 is arranged so as to be accommodated in the gap.

As described above, in this embodiment, by rotating the rotating screen portion 9201RT, the screen visible to the player through the transparent panel UD11 can be switched between the flat screen portion 9310 and the curved screen portion 9320. can be done.

<Production display example>
FIG. 356(a) is a diagram showing an example of an image displayed on the flat screen unit. FIG. 356(b) is a diagram showing an example of an image displayed on the curved screen section. FIG. 357(a) is a schematic diagram for explaining the arrangement state of the rotating screen portion. FIG. 357(b) is a diagram showing an example of an effect performed in the state shown in FIG. 357(a).

While the player is playing a game on the gaming machine 1, an image (still image or moving image) relating to the game is displayed on the display surface (front surface) of the rotating screen portion 9201RT (flat screen portion 9310 and curved screen portion 9320). is displayed.

For example, projector 9020 projects an image in which number patterns are moved from top to bottom like in a slot game. FIG. 356(a) shows how such a number pattern is displayed in the state shown in FIG. 355(a). At this time, the image displayed on the flat screen portion 9310 allows the player to visually recognize the number patterns as if they were moving from top to bottom. On the other hand, FIG. 356(b) shows how such a number pattern is displayed in the state shown in FIG. 355(b). At this time, the image displayed on the curved screen portion 9320 allows the player to visually recognize the number patterns as if they were rotating in addition to moving from top to bottom.

As described above, in the present embodiment, by switching the screen capable of displaying the image projected from the projector 9020 between the flat screen portion 9310 and the curved screen portion 9320, the same image can be played with a different impression. can give to anyone.

FIG. 357(a) shows an arrangement state when the rotating screen portion 9201RT is rotated 270° from the basic position (clockwise when viewed from the right side). In this state, the curved screen portion 9320 is arranged to face the main opening portion 9151 . At this time, the curved screen portion 9320 is arranged in a rearward convex state, opposite to the state shown in FIG.

Further, the flat screen portion 9310 is arranged substantially horizontally at a height near the lower end portion of the main opening portion 9151 . A predetermined gap is formed between the front end of the flat screen portion 9310 and the upper display window UD1. Here, below the gap, a patrol lamp 9350 (luminous effect member) is housed as a vertically movable effect member. When the rotating screen portion 9201RT is in the arrangement state shown in FIG.

As a result, as shown in FIG. 357(b), an effect using the image displayed on the curved screen portion 9320, the images displayed on the left screen portion 9201L, the right screen portion 9201R, and the top screen portion 9201T. , a more attractive effect can be realized by cooperating with the light emitting effect using the patrol lamp 9350.

The gaming machine 1 according to the fourteenth embodiment has been described above as one embodiment of the present invention.

<Appendix O>
2. Description of the Related Art Conventionally, there is known a gaming machine capable of producing effects by using a projector (see Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 6-035066 and Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2009-240459). According to such a game machine, a game image is projected from a projector onto a projection surface such as a screen, so that the image is displayed on the screen instead of the liquid crystal display device.

In the process of earnestly examining gaming machines using projectors such as those described above, the present inventor came to the idea that it would be possible to create a new type of entertainment by devising screens. rice field.

SUMMARY OF THE INVENTION The present invention has been made in view of the above points, and an object of the present invention is to create a new entertainment value in a gaming machine equipped with a projector and a screen.

In this respect, the gaming machine 1 according to the fourteenth embodiment has the following features.

(O-1) a predetermined screen (rotating screen unit 9201RT);
a projector (projector 9020) that projects light for displaying an image on the predetermined screen;
The predetermined screen is a movable screen, and includes a first projection surface (flat screen portion 9310) and a second projection surface (curved screen portion 9310) having a curvature different from that of the first projection surface. part 9320), and
When the predetermined screen is in the first arrangement state, an image is displayed on the first projection surface, and when the predetermined screen is in the second arrangement state, the image is displayed on the second projection surface. the image is displayed in the
A gaming machine characterized by:

According to the gaming machine 1 according to the fourteenth embodiment, the predetermined screen (rotating screen portion 9201RT) is a movable screen, and the projection surfaces are the first projection surface (flat screen portion 9310) and the second projection surface. It has a first projection surface (flat screen portion 9310) and a second projection surface (curved screen portion 9320) having a different curvature. When the predetermined screen (rotating screen portion 9201RT) is in the first arrangement state, an image is displayed on the first projection surface (planar screen portion 9310), while the predetermined screen (rotating screen portion 9201RT) is displayed. is in the second arrangement state, an image is displayed on the second projection surface (curved screen portion 9320). As a result, it is possible to change how an image displayed on the projection surface is displayed through changes in the arrangement state of the predetermined screen (rotating screen unit 9201RT) (changes in the curvature of the projection surface). You can create a dramatic effect.

(O-2) The gaming machine of (O-1),
The predetermined screen has a portion that serves as a passage path for the light projected by the projector when in the first arrangement state, and a passage for the light projected by the projector when in the second arrangement state. Having an opening (opening part 9330) in a part that serves as a passage route,
It is characterized by

According to the gaming machine 1 according to the fourteenth embodiment, the predetermined screen (rotating screen part 9201RT) is a part that becomes a passage path for light projected by the projector (projector 9020) in the first arrangement state, In addition, an opening (open portion 9330) is provided at a portion that serves as a passage path for light projected by the projector (projector 9020) in the second arrangement state. As a result, it is possible to appropriately secure a passage path for the light projected by the projector (projector 9020).

(O-3) The gaming machine of (O-1) or (O-2),
The predetermined screen is rotatable clockwise or counterclockwise in side view,
It is characterized by

According to the gaming machine 1 according to the fourteenth embodiment, the predetermined screen (rotating screen portion 9201RT) is configured to be rotatable clockwise or counterclockwise when viewed from the side. As a result, through the rotation of the predetermined screen (rotating screen portion 9201RT), the arrangement state of the predetermined screen (rotating screen portion 9201RT) can be easily changed (switching between the first projection surface and the second projection surface). be able to.

In the fourteenth embodiment, one of the curvature of the first projection surface (flat screen portion 9310) and the curvature of the second projection surface (curved screen portion 9320) (flat screen portion 9310) is 0 (substantially flat). described as something. In the present invention, any one of the curvature of the first projection surface (flat screen portion 9310) and the curvature of the second projection surface (curved screen portion 9320) can be set to 0 (substantially flat). is. Also, both the first projection surface (flat screen portion 9310) and the second projection surface (curved screen portion 9320) may be curved and have different curvatures.

A predetermined screen (rotating screen unit 9201RT) can be driven when a predetermined condition is satisfied. For example, when a game state (specific game state) advantageous to the player starts, the layout state of the predetermined screen (rotating screen portion 9201RT) is changed to the first layout by driving the predetermined screen (rotating screen portion 9201RT). The state (the state shown in FIG. 355(a)) may be switched to the second arrangement state (the state shown in FIG. 355(b)). Then, while the specific game state continues, the arrangement state may be maintained. In addition, when the right to shift to a specific game state is granted (a lottery for determining whether to shift to a specific game state is won), a predetermined screen (rotating screen unit 9201RT) is driven. The arrangement state of the screen (rotating screen unit 9201RT) may be switched from the first arrangement state (the state shown in FIG. 355(a)) to the second arrangement state (the state shown in FIG. 355(b)). . As a result, an effect suggesting that the right to shift to the specific game state has been granted (that the lottery for determining whether to shift to the specific game state has been won) may be performed. As the specific game state, the bonus game state (BB game state, MB game state, etc.) in the pachislot game machine, the RT game state, the AT game state (ART game state), the jackpot game state in the pachinko game machine, the probability variable game state, and the time saving A game state such as a game state can be appropriately adopted.

Also, for example, when the right to shift to the specific game state is granted (won the lottery for determining whether to shift to the specific game state), the arrangement state of the predetermined screen (rotating screen unit 9201RT) is switched from the first arrangement state (state shown in FIG. 355 (a)) to the second arrangement state (state shown in FIG. 355 (b)), and when the specific game state starts, a predetermined 355(b)) to the third arrangement (state shown in FIG. 357(a)). . Also, when the specific game state starts, the arrangement state of the predetermined screen (rotating screen portion 9201RT) is changed from the first arrangement state (the state shown in FIG. 355(a)) to the second arrangement state (the state shown in FIG. 355(b) )), and when the game state transitions to a more advantageous game state than the specific game state during the specific game state, the layout state of the predetermined screen (rotating screen portion 9201RT) is changed to the second layout. The state (the state shown in FIG. 355(b)) may be switched to the third arrangement state (the state shown in FIG. 357(a)).

In the third arrangement state (the state shown in FIG. 357(a)), it is possible to cooperate with the presentation using the screen and the presentation using the movable accessory (the patrol lamp 9350). In the fourteenth embodiment, the gap between the flat screen portion 9310 and the upper display window UD1 is used as the space for moving the movable accessory (the patrol lamp 9350). As the space, an opening (open portion 9330) formed in a predetermined screen (rotating screen portion 9201RT) may be used. For example, while the movable accessory (patrump 9350) is stored above a predetermined screen (rotary screen part 9201RT), the movable accessory (patrol 9350) is placed downward (curved surface) in the state shown in FIG. 357(a). It may be moved to the front of the screen part 9320). In addition, while storing the movable accessory (patrump 9350) below the predetermined screen (rotary screen part 9201RT), in the state shown in FIG. (behind the screen unit 9320). The movable accessory is not particularly limited, and for example, a movable member having a light emitting means (LED) can be configured to rotate along a predetermined circumference in front of or behind the rotating screen part 9201RT. is.

A plurality of modes may be provided for moving the predetermined screen (rotating screen section 9201RT), and the predetermined screen (rotating screen section 9201RT) may be moved in a mode according to the game situation. Examples of such a movement mode include a mode of rotating at high speed, a mode of moving momentarily with rattling, a mode of slowly rotating, and the like.

[15th embodiment]
The first to fourteenth embodiments have been described above. The fifteenth embodiment will be described below. The basic configuration of the gaming machine 1 according to the fifteenth embodiment is the same as the gaming machine 1 according to the first to fourteenth embodiments. In the following description, the same components as those of the gaming machine 1 according to the first to fourteenth embodiments are denoted by the same reference numerals. In addition, the explanations of the parts that the explanations of the first to fourteenth embodiments are applicable to the fifteenth embodiment will be omitted.

<Upper Door Mechanism UD and Display Unit 9000>
FIG. 358 is an exploded perspective view of the upper door mechanism and display unit; FIG. 359(a) is a front view schematically showing the upper door mechanism and the display unit. FIG. 359(b) is a side view of the upper door mechanism and display unit shown in FIG. 359(a). FIG. 360(a) is a perspective view of the rear screen portion as seen from the front. FIG. 360(b) is a perspective view of the rear screen portion as seen from the rear. FIG. 361(a) is a front view schematically showing the upper door mechanism and the display unit. FIG. 361(b) is a side view of the upper door mechanism and display unit shown in FIG. 361(a).

In this embodiment, as in the thirteenth embodiment, a display unit 9000 is provided inside the cabinet G, and the display unit 9000 includes a screen unit 9200 . The light projected from projector 9020 travels downward and is then reflected forward by mirror 9030 (see FIG. 55). The light projected from the projector 9020 is incident on the screen unit 9200 from behind (rear side), and an image is displayed on the front side (display surface) of each screen constituting the screen unit 9200. .

Each screen constituting the screen unit 9200 is formed to have a uniform thickness over the entire surface, as in the thirteenth embodiment. Each of these screens is of a transmissive type in which a projected image is projected from behind and displayed. and a display surface on the front side onto which a projected image is projected by transmission of the . Each of these screens is made mainly of a translucent glass plate, an acrylic plate, or a resin film, and presents a milky white, translucent, or gray color when not projecting.

As shown in FIG. 358, the upper door mechanism UD according to this embodiment differs in configuration from the upper door mechanism UD according to the thirteenth embodiment. An illumination unit 9210 and a liquid crystal panel 9220 are arranged in the upper door mechanism UD. The illumination unit 9210 is arranged along the edge of the opening 9150 on the front side of the upper display window UD1. The liquid crystal panel 9220 is arranged behind the transparent panel UD11.

Although not shown, the illumination unit 9210 includes a translucent lens formed in a U shape (along the shape of the opening 9150), an LED substrate arranged on the back side of the lens, and a plurality of LEDs provided on the surface of the LED substrate. The LED is installed so as to emit light forward, and the light is emitted to the outside of the game machine 1 from the lens. As a result, the illumination unit 9210 lights up along the edge of the transparent panel UD11. Alternatively, the lighting unit 9210 may have the same configuration as the indirect lighting unit 1060 (see FIG. 66).

The liquid crystal panel 9220 has substantially the same shape as the transparent panel UD11 when viewed from the front. The liquid crystal panel 9220 is controlled by the sub-controller SS (see FIG. 11) and has a configuration capable of displaying game-related images (still images and moving images). In addition, the liquid crystal panel 9220 has transparency so that the rear region can be viewed from the front, and constitutes a transmissive liquid crystal display device. By controlling the transmittance of light, the transmissive liquid crystal display device can make the back side of the liquid crystal panel 9220 visible to the player and invisible or difficult to see the back side of the liquid crystal panel 9220. It is possible to switch between the state and .

As shown in FIG. 359, the screen unit 9200 according to this embodiment differs in configuration from the screen unit 9200 according to the thirteenth embodiment. The screen unit 9200 includes a left screen portion 9202L, a right screen portion 9202R, an upper screen portion 9202U, a lower screen portion 9202Lo, a top screen portion 9202T, and a rear screen portion 9202B.

The left screen portion 9202L, the right screen portion 9202R, the upper screen portion 9202U, and the lower screen portion 9202Lo are each formed in an equiangular trapezoidal shape, and are similar to the left screen portion 9200L and the right screen described in the thirteenth embodiment. It has the same configuration as the portion 9200R, the upper screen portion 9200U, and the lower screen portion 9200Lo (see FIG. 347). The top screen portion 9202T is formed in a rectangular shape and has the same configuration as the top screen portion 9200T (see FIG. 348) described in the thirteenth embodiment.

Specifically, the front edge 9200La (see FIG. 347) of the left screen portion 9202L is arranged to face the left edge of the main opening 9151, and the front edge 9200Ra (see FIG. 347) of the right screen portion 9200R is The long side 9200Ua (see FIG. 347) of the upper screen portion 9202U is arranged to face the right edge of the main opening 9151, and the lower screen is arranged to face the upper edge of the main opening 9151. A long side 9200Loa (see FIG. 347) of the portion 9202Lo is arranged to face the lower edge of the main opening 9151 . Also, the top screen portion 9202T is arranged so as to face the portion of the transparent panel UD11 covering the sub-opening portion 9152 .

In this state, the left screen portion 9202L, the right screen portion 9202R, the upper screen portion 9202U, and the lower screen portion 9202Lo are installed in the unit casing 9010. FIG. The two oblique sides of the left screen portion 9202L are arranged to overlap the left oblique side of the upper screen portion 9202U and the left oblique side of the lower screen portion 9202Lo, respectively. The two oblique sides of the right screen portion 9200R are arranged so as to overlap the right oblique side of the upper screen portion 9202U and the right oblique side of the lower screen portion 9202Lo, respectively.

As a result, the left screen portion 9202L, the right screen portion 9202R, the upper screen portion 9202U, and the lower screen portion 9202Lo form a truncated quadrangular pyramid whose front and rear sides are open. The front opening 9401 has substantially the same shape as the main opening 9151, and the rear opening 9402 is smaller. The rear screen portion 9202B has a shape substantially matching the opening 9402 in a front view, and is arranged so as to close the opening 9402 .

As shown in FIG. 360, the rear screen portion 9202B includes a curved screen portion 9420, a support portion 9421, and a support portion 9422. The curved screen portion 9420 constitutes the transmissive screen described above, and has a shape in which the vertical sides (the left side and the right side) of a rectangular screen are curved. The upper side of the curved screen portion 9420 is arranged close to the short side 9200Ub (see FIG. 347) of the upper screen portion 9202U, and the lower side of the curved screen portion 9420 is located near the short side 9200Lob of the lower screen portion 9202Lo (see FIG. 347). are placed in close proximity to each other.

The supporting portion 9421 is a flat plate member that is attached to the left edge of the curved screen portion 9420 (curve connecting point g and point h shown in FIG. 360) and has the shape of a figure surrounded by the curve gh and line segment gh. is. The support portion 9421 has a rotating shaft 9421a projecting leftward from the midpoint of the line segment gh. The supporting portion 9422 is attached to the right edge of the curved screen portion 9420 (curve connecting points i and j shown in FIG. 360), and has a shape of a figure surrounded by the curve ij and the line segment ij. is. The support portion 9422 has a rotating shaft 9422a that protrudes rightward from the midpoint of the line segment ij. The supporting portion 9421 and the supporting portion 9422 are made of a transparent member.

The rotating shaft 9421 a and the rotating shaft 9422 a are arranged to extend outside the curved screen portion 9420 . Holes are formed in the centers of the rear ends of the left screen portion 9202L and the right screen portion 9202R, respectively. It is rotatably pivoted. The curved screen portion 9420 is a movable screen, and is driven by the drive mechanism described in the thirteenth embodiment. As a result, the curved screen portion 9420 can rotate clockwise or counterclockwise in a side view about the axis of the rotating shaft 9421a and the axis of the rotating shaft 9422a.

The length of the curved screen portion 9420 in the rotation axis direction (horizontal direction) (X in the drawing) is set slightly shorter than the short side 9200Ub of the upper screen portion 9202U and the short side 9200Lob of the lower screen portion 9200Lo (see FIG. 347). It is The length (Y in the drawing) between both ends in the curved direction (vertical direction) of the curved screen portion 9420 is set slightly shorter than the rear side 9200Lb of the left screen portion 9200L and the rear side 9200Rb of the right screen portion 9200R. That is, the rectangle formed by connecting the four corners of the curved screen portion 9420 is set slightly smaller than the opening 9402 . This secures a space for the curved screen portion 9420 to rotate near the opening 9402 .

FIG. 359 shows the arrangement state when the curved screen portion 9420 is in the basic position. In this state, the curved screen portion 9420 is arranged in a rearward convex state. On the other hand, FIG. 361 shows the arrangement when the curved screen portion 9420 is rotated 180° from the basic position (clockwise when viewed from the right side). In this state, the curved screen portion 9420 is arranged in a forward convex state. In this way, by rotating the curved screen portion 9420, the display surface of the screen visible to the player through the transparent panel UD11 can be switched between a concave surface and a convex surface.

<Production display example>
FIG. 362(a) is a diagram showing an example of an effect performed in the state shown in FIG. FIG. 362(b) is a diagram showing an example of an effect performed in the state shown in FIG.

While the player is playing a game on the gaming machine 1, the display surfaces ( An image (still image or moving image) relating to the game is displayed on the front side surface).

For example, when the player wins a regular bonus (RB) (the symbol combination corresponding to RB is stopped and displayed), as shown in FIG. A character "REG BONUS" is displayed on the concave surface. As a result, the character can be visually recognized by the player in a state in which the central portion is recessed. Also, at this time, the illumination unit 9210 emits light in a predetermined color (for example, blue).

Also, when the player wins the big bonus (BB) (the symbol combination corresponding to BB is stopped and displayed), the display surface of the curved screen portion 9420 becomes convex as shown in FIG. A character "BIG BONUS" is displayed on the convex surface. As a result, the character can be visually recognized by the player in a state in which the central portion is swollen. Also, at this time, the lighting unit 9210 emits light in a color (for example, red) different from that shown in FIG. 362(a).

Also, the characters "REG BONUS" are displayed on the liquid crystal panel 9220 in the case shown in FIG. 362(a), and the characters "BIG BONUS" are displayed on the liquid crystal panel 9220 in the case shown in FIG. is also possible. As a result, the characters displayed on the liquid crystal panel 9220 and the characters displayed on the curved screen portion 9420 can be superimposed, and the characters "REG BONUS" to "BIG BONUS" are presented to the player in three dimensions. can also be visually recognized.

While the player is playing a game on the gaming machine 1, basically, images are displayed only on the liquid crystal panel 9220, and the left screen portion 9202L, the right screen portion 9202R, the upper screen portion 9202U, and the lower screen portion are displayed. No image is displayed on 9202Lo, top screen portion 9202T, and rear screen portion 9202B. At that time, the liquid crystal display device is controlled so that the back side of the liquid crystal panel 9220 is in a state in which the player cannot or cannot visually recognize the liquid crystal panel 9220 . Triggered by the occurrence of a specific situation, the rear side of the liquid crystal panel 9220 is switched to a state in which the player can view, and an image is displayed on each screen. This makes it possible to realize a more attractive effect by cooperating the image display on the liquid crystal panel 9220 and the image display on the screen.

The gaming machine 1 according to the fifteenth embodiment has been described above as one embodiment of the present invention.

<Appendix P>
2. Description of the Related Art Conventionally, there is known a gaming machine capable of producing effects by using a projector (see Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 6-035066 and Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2009-240459). According to such a game machine, a game image is projected from a projector onto a projection surface such as a screen, so that the image is displayed on the screen instead of the liquid crystal display device.

In the process of earnestly examining gaming machines using projectors such as those described above, the present inventor came to the idea that it would be possible to create a new type of entertainment by devising screens. rice field.

SUMMARY OF THE INVENTION The present invention has been made in view of the above points, and an object of the present invention is to create a new entertainment aspect in a gaming machine equipped with a projector and a screen.

In this regard, the gaming machine 1 according to the fifteenth embodiment has the following features.

(P-1) a liquid crystal display device (liquid crystal panel 9220);
a screen (curved screen portion 9420);
a projector (projector 9020) that projects light for displaying an image on the screen;
The liquid crystal display device is arranged on the front side of the screen at a position that does not block the passage of the light projected by the projector,
A gaming machine characterized by:

According to the gaming machine 1 according to the fifteenth embodiment, a liquid crystal display device (liquid crystal panel 9220) and a screen (curved screen portion 9420) are provided, and the liquid crystal display device (liquid crystal panel 9220) is a projector (projector 9020 ), and is located on the front side of the screen (curved screen portion 9420). Accordingly, it is possible to cooperate with the presentation using the liquid crystal display device (liquid crystal panel 9220) and the presentation using the screen (curved screen portion 9420), and it is possible to create a novel presentation effect.

(P-2) The gaming machine of (P-1),
The screen is arranged so that light projected by the projector is incident from the back side, and an image can be displayed on the front side by the light incident from the back side.
It is characterized by

According to the gaming machine 1 according to the fifteenth embodiment, the screen (curved screen portion 9420) is arranged so that the light projected by the projector (projector 9020) is incident from the back side, and the light incident from the back side An image can be displayed on the front side. This makes it easier to arrange the liquid crystal display device (liquid crystal panel 9220) and the screen (curved screen portion 9420) in such a manner as not to block the passage of light projected by the projector (projector 9020). can appropriately secure the passage path of the projected light.

(P-3) The gaming machine of (P-1) or (P-2),
At least part of the projection surface of the screen is curved,
It is characterized by

According to the gaming machine 1 according to the fifteenth embodiment, since the image is displayed on the curved projection surface, it is possible to give a three-dimensional effect to the image displayed on the screen (curved screen section 9420). Together with an image displayed on the liquid crystal display device (liquid crystal panel 9220), more realistic image expression can be realized.

In the fifteenth embodiment, it is assumed that the liquid crystal display device (liquid crystal panel 9220) has transparency so that the rear region can be viewed from the front. In the present invention, in place of the liquid crystal display device (liquid crystal panel 9220), it is also possible to appropriately adopt a device having transparency that allows the rear region to be viewed from the front. Examples of such devices include display devices such as organic or inorganic electroluminescence (EL) panels, in addition to liquid crystal display devices. Further, in the fifteenth embodiment, the description has been made on the assumption that a rear projector that projects from the back side is used. It is desirable to employ such a rear projector as the projector in the present invention. When a rear projector is employed, the liquid crystal display device (liquid crystal panel 9220) and the screen (curved screen portion 9420) can be easily arranged close to each other while not blocking the passage of the light projected by the projector. Accordingly, it is possible to facilitate cooperation between the presentation using the liquid crystal display device (liquid crystal panel 9220) and the presentation using the screen (curved screen portion 9420). However, the projector in the present invention is not limited to the rear projector, and may be a transmissive liquid crystal projector that projects from the front side. When a transmissive liquid crystal projector is used, the liquid crystal display device (liquid crystal panel 9220) and the screen (curved screen portion 9420) should be spaced apart to some extent in order to secure a path for the light projected by the projector. .

Further, in the fifteenth embodiment, a state (first state) in which the player cannot or cannot visually recognize behind the liquid crystal panel 9220 and a state (second state) in which the player can visually recognize the rear of the liquid crystal panel 9220 are described. ) and can be switched. In the present invention, the timing of switching between the first state and the second state is not particularly limited, and the switching can be performed when a predetermined condition is satisfied. For example, it is possible to switch from the first state to the second state when a game state (specific game state) that is advantageous to the player starts, while maintaining the first state during normal times. Then, while the specific game state continues, the second state may be maintained. Also, when the right to shift to a specific game state is granted (a lottery for determining whether to shift to a specific game state is won), switching from the first state to the second state good too. As a result, an effect suggesting that the right to shift to the specific game state has been granted (that the lottery for determining whether to shift to the specific game state has been won) may be performed. As the specific game state, the bonus game state (BB game state, MB game state, etc.) in the pachislot game machine, the RT game state, the AT game state (ART game state), the jackpot game state in the pachinko game machine, the probability variable game state, and the time saving A game state such as a game state can be appropriately employed.

Also, in the fifteenth embodiment, it has been described that a plurality of layout states (the state shown in FIG. 359 and the state shown in FIG. 361) are provided as the layout state of the screen (curved screen portion 9420). In the present invention, a plurality of conditions are provided as the predetermined conditions, and each condition corresponds to one arrangement state. The arrangement state of the screen (curved screen portion 9420) may be set to the arrangement state according to the established condition. For example, when the first condition is established as the predetermined condition, the arrangement state of the screen (the curved screen portion 9420) is set to the first arrangement state (the state shown in FIG. 359), while the first condition is set as the predetermined condition. When a second condition that is more advantageous for the player than condition (1) is established, the screen (curved screen portion 9420) may be placed in the second arrangement state (state shown in FIG. 361).

Also, for example, when the right to shift to a specific game state is granted (a lottery for determining whether to shift to a specific game state is won), the state of the liquid crystal display device is changed from the first state to the second state. While switching to state 2, the screen (curved screen portion 9420) is set to the first layout state (state shown in FIG. 359), and further, when the specific game state starts, the state of the liquid crystal display device is changed. While maintaining the second state, the arrangement state of the screen (curved screen portion 9420) is switched from the first arrangement state (state shown in FIG. 359) to the second arrangement state (state shown in FIG. 361). good too. Also, when the specific game state starts, the state of the liquid crystal display device is switched from the first state to the second state, and the layout state of the screen (curved screen portion 9420) is changed to the first layout state (Fig. 359 ), and when the game state is shifted to a more advantageous game state than the specific game state during the specific game state, the screen (curved screen portion 9420) is displayed while maintaining the state of the liquid crystal display device in the second state. may be switched from the first arrangement state (the state shown in FIG. 359) to the second arrangement state (the state shown in FIG. 361).

Note that when the liquid crystal display device is in the second state, an image may or may not be displayed on the liquid crystal display device (liquid crystal panel 9220). As a result, by appropriately switching between planar image display on the liquid crystal display device (liquid crystal panel 9220) and three-dimensional image display on the screen (curved screen portion 9420), the presentation effect may be enhanced.

[16th embodiment]
The first to fifteenth embodiments have been described above. The sixteenth embodiment will be described below. The basic configuration of the gaming machine 1 according to the sixteenth embodiment is the same as the gaming machine 1 according to the first to fifteenth embodiments. In the following description, the same components as those of the gaming machine 1 according to the first to fifteenth embodiments are denoted by the same reference numerals. In addition, descriptions of the portions that the descriptions of the first to fifteenth embodiments apply to the sixteenth embodiment will be omitted.

<Upper Door Mechanism UD and Display Unit 9000>
FIG. 363(a) is a front view schematically showing the upper door mechanism and the display unit. FIG. 363(b) is a side view of the upper door mechanism and display unit shown in FIG. 363(a).

In this embodiment, a display unit 9000 is arranged in the cabinet G, and the display unit 9000 includes a screen unit 9200, as in the thirteenth embodiment. The light projected from projector 9020 travels downward and is then reflected forward by mirror 9030 (see FIG. 55). The light projected from the projector 9020 is incident on the screen unit 9200 from the rear (rear side), and an image is displayed on the front side (display surface) of each screen constituting the screen unit 9200. .

Each screen constituting the screen unit 9200 is formed to have a uniform thickness over the entire surface, as in the thirteenth embodiment. Each of these screens is of a transmissive type in which a projected image is projected from behind and displayed. and a display surface on the front side onto which a projection image is projected by transmission of the . Each of these screens is made mainly of a translucent glass plate, an acrylic plate, or a resin film, and presents a milky white, translucent, or gray color when not projecting.

As shown in FIGS. 363(a) and 363(b), the upper door mechanism UD according to this embodiment is similar to the upper door mechanism UD according to the fifteenth embodiment except that the liquid crystal panel 9220 is not provided. It has the same configuration as Note that the door-side left screen 9060 and door-side right screen 9050 (see FIG. 58) described in the third embodiment may be provided on the side of the illumination unit 9210 . Alternatively, a liquid crystal panel 9220 may be provided. The screen unit 9200 according to this embodiment includes a left screen portion 9203L, a right screen portion 9203R, a central screen portion 9203C, an upper screen portion 9203U, a lower screen portion 9510, and a top screen portion 9203T.

The left screen portion 9203L, the right screen portion 9203R, and the upper screen portion 9203U are each formed in an equiangular trapezoidal shape. It has the same configuration as the screen unit 9200U (see FIG. 347). The top screen portion 9202T is formed in a rectangular shape and has the same configuration as the top screen portion 9200T (see FIG. 348) described in the thirteenth embodiment. The central screen portion 9203C is formed in a rectangular shape and has a substantially flat shape unlike the rear screen portion 9202B described in the fifteenth embodiment.

The lower screen portion 9510 is different from the lower screen portion 9200Lo (see FIG. 347) described in the thirteenth embodiment, and has a rectangular notch extending forward including part of the short side 9200Lob. It has a U shape. A half-mirror portion 9511 is arranged to fit in the notch portion. For the sake of clarity, in FIG. 363(a), the half mirror portion 9511 is hatched.

The half mirror section 9511 has a rectangular half mirror 9511a. The half mirror 9511a is a mirror with a light transmittance of about 50%, reflects part of the incident light, and transmits part of the incident light. The left end and right end of the rear side of the half mirror 9511a are provided with rotating shafts (not shown) projecting leftward and rightward from the left end and right end, respectively. These rotating shafts are rotatably supported at predetermined portions of the unit housing 9010 . The half mirror 9511a is driven by the drive mechanism described in the thirteenth embodiment, and can rotate clockwise or counterclockwise around the rotation axis in a side view.

A lower side portion 9203Lo composed of a lower side screen portion 9510 and a half mirror portion 9511 has a rear edge 9511b similar to the short side 9200Lob of the lower side screen portion 9200Lo described in the thirteenth embodiment. The edge 9511b substantially coincides with the central axis of rotation of the half mirror 9511a. In addition, the rear edge 9511b, the rear side 9200Lb (see FIG. 347) of the left screen portion 9203L, the rear side 9200Rb (see FIG. 347) of the right screen portion 9203R, and the short side 9200Ub (see FIG. 347) of the upper screen portion 9203U , an opening similar to the opening 9402 (see FIG. 359) described in the fifteenth embodiment is formed. The central screen portion 9203C has substantially the same shape as the opening, and is arranged so as to block the opening.

As described above, the half mirror 9511a can rotate in the space surrounded by the left screen portion 9203L, the right screen portion 9203R, the upper screen portion 9203U, and the lower portion 9203Lo. A state in which the half mirror 9511a is fitted to the lower screen portion 9510 is the basic position of the half mirror 9511a.

A liquid crystal panel 9512 is arranged below the half mirror portion 9511 . The liquid crystal panel 9512 is arranged with an inclination that descends from the front toward the rear. The liquid crystal panel 9512 constitutes a liquid crystal display device, and is controlled by the sub-controller SS (see FIG. 11) to display an image (still image or moving image) related to the game in a display area provided on the upper surface. It is possible. The liquid crystal panel 9512 may be arranged substantially horizontally.

The half mirror 9511a is arranged with an inclination that rises from the front to the rear in the basic position. When the half-mirror 9511a rotates to an arrangement state in which it is inclined downward from the front to the rear (for example, a state forming an angle of 45° with respect to the horizontal plane), an image is displayed on the liquid crystal panel 9512. A player can see the image through the half mirror 9511a.

<Production display example>
FIG. 364 is a diagram showing an example of an effect using a half mirror.

While the player is playing a game on the gaming machine 1, the display surfaces ( An image (still image or moving image) relating to the game is displayed on the front surface).

In FIG. 364, the half mirror 9511a is arranged with an inclination that descends from the front toward the rear. After rotating the half mirror 9511a by about 60° (clockwise when viewed from the right side) from the basic position, by stopping the rotation, the arrangement state of the half mirror 9511a can be set to the state shown in FIG. . In this state, when a predetermined image (for example, a character image) is displayed on the liquid crystal panel 9512, a mirror image of the predetermined image is displayed on the half mirror 9511a.

Also, in this state, the half mirror 9511a is arranged on the front side of the central screen portion 9203C, and the half mirror 9511a and the central screen portion 9203C overlap when viewed from the front. Here, since the half mirror 9511a has a predetermined transmittance, when an image projected from the projector 9020 is displayed on the central screen portion 9203C, the image can be seen by the player. This allows the player to visually recognize the mirror image displayed on the half mirror 9511a and the image displayed on the central screen portion 9203C in a superimposed manner. For example, the characters displayed on the half mirror 9511a can be displayed in the background displayed on the central screen portion 9203C. In this way, by cooperating the image display on the half mirror 9511a and the image display on the central screen portion 9203C, a more attractive effect can be realized.

<Modification>
FIG. 365(a) is a front view schematically showing the upper door mechanism and the display unit. Figure 365(b) is a side view of the upper door mechanism and display unit shown in Figure 365(a). FIG. 366(a) is a front view schematically showing the upper door mechanism and the display unit. Figure 366(b) is a side view of the upper door mechanism and display unit shown in Figure 366(a).

Although the half mirror section 9511 has one half mirror 9511a in the above description, the half mirror section 9511 may have a plurality of half mirrors.

In the example shown in FIG. 365, the half mirror section 9511 includes a half mirror 9511L, a half mirror 9511C, and a half mirror 9511R. The half mirror 9511L, the half mirror 9511C, and the half mirror 9511R have the size and shape of the half mirror 9511a equally divided into three. The half mirror 9511L, the half mirror 9511C, and the half mirror 9511R can be individually driven. It can rotate clockwise or counterclockwise when viewed from the side.

In FIG. 365, the degree of displacement (angle of rotation) from the basic position is different for each of the half mirror 9511L, the half mirror 9511C, and the half mirror 9511R. In this state, the rotation of the half mirror 9511L is completed, the half mirror 9511C is just rotating, and the half mirror 9511R is still arranged at the basic position. For example, the half mirror 9511L, the half mirror 9511C, and the half mirror 9511R can be driven in conjunction with stopping the rotation of the reels RL, RC, and RR (see FIG. 168). . As a result, the rotation of the reels RL, RC, and RR is stopped (operation of the stop buttons DD7L, DD7C, and DD7R), and mirror images are sequentially displayed on the half mirrors 9511L, 9511C, and 9511R. You can perform like this.

Although the half mirror portion 9511 is arranged near the lower screen portion 9510 in the above description, the half mirror portion 9511 may be arranged near the upper screen portion 9203U.

In the example shown in FIG. 366, the half mirror section 9511 is arranged along the lower surface of the upper screen section 9203U in the basic position. The front side of the half mirror 9511a is arranged close to the long side 9200Ua (see FIG. 347) of the upper screen portion 9200U. A rotating shaft (not shown) protruding rightward is provided. These rotating shafts are rotatably supported at predetermined portions of the unit housing 9010 . As a result, the half mirror 9511a can rotate clockwise or counterclockwise when viewed from the side, with the axis in the horizontal direction close to the long side 9200Ua of the upper screen portion 9200U as the central axis of rotation. .

Also, in this example, the lower screen portion 9510 is not provided. As a result, when the half mirror 9511a rotates and becomes an arrangement state having an inclination that descends from the front toward the rear (for example, a state forming an angle of 45° with respect to the horizontal plane), the liquid crystal panel 9512 The image displayed in , can be visually recognized by the player through the half mirror 9511a.

The gaming machine 1 according to the sixteenth embodiment has been described above as one embodiment of the present invention.

<Appendix Q>
2. Description of the Related Art Conventionally, there is known a gaming machine capable of producing effects by using a projector (see Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 6-035066 and Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2009-240459). According to such a game machine, a game image is projected from a projector onto a projection surface such as a screen, so that the image is displayed on the screen instead of the liquid crystal display device.

In the process of earnestly examining gaming machines using projectors such as those described above, the present inventor came to the idea that it would be possible to create a new type of entertainment by devising screens. rice field.

SUMMARY OF THE INVENTION The present invention has been made in view of the above points, and an object of the present invention is to create a new entertainment value in a gaming machine equipped with a projector and a screen.

In this regard, the gaming machine 1 according to the sixteenth embodiment has the following features.

(Q-1) A predetermined screen (central screen portion 9203C);
a projector (projector 9020) that projects light for displaying an image on the predetermined screen;
a half mirror (half mirror 9511a);
and a display means (liquid crystal panel 9512) different from the predetermined screen,
The image displayed on the display means can be reflected to the front side by the half mirror arranged on the front side of the predetermined screen.
A gaming machine characterized by:

According to the gaming machine 1 according to the sixteenth embodiment, the predetermined screen (central screen portion 9203C), the half mirror (half mirror 9511a), and the predetermined screen (central screen portion 9203C) different display means (liquid crystal panel 9512) are provided, and an image displayed on the display means (liquid crystal panel 9512) is displayed on the front side by a half mirror (half mirror 9511a) arranged on the front side of a predetermined screen (central screen portion 9203C). is configured to be able to reflect As a result, it is possible for the player to superimpose the image displayed on the predetermined screen (central screen portion 9203C) and the mirror image displayed on the half mirror (half mirror 9511a). can create a visual effect.

(Q-2) The gaming machine of (Q-1) above,
The predetermined screen is arranged so that the light projected by the projector is incident from the back side, and the light incident from the back side can display an image on the front side.
It is characterized by

According to the gaming machine 1 according to the sixteenth embodiment, the predetermined screen (central screen portion 9203C) is arranged so that the light projected by the projector (projector 9020) is incident from the back side. It is possible to display an image on the front side by light. As a result, it is possible to prevent the passage of light projected by the projector (projector 9020) from being blocked by the half mirror (half mirror 9511a). ) can be made easier to design.

(Q-3) The gaming machine of (Q-1) or (Q-2) above,
A driving mechanism for driving the half mirror,
The half mirror can be moved from a first position to a second position by being driven by the drive mechanism. It is possible to reflect the image displayed on the front side,
It is characterized by

According to the gaming machine 1 according to the sixteenth embodiment, the half mirror (half mirror 9511a) can be moved from the first position to the second position by being driven by the driving mechanism, When arranged at the second position, the image displayed on the display means (liquid crystal panel 9512) can be reflected to the front side. As a result, when the effect using the predetermined screen (central screen portion 9203C) and the effect using the half mirror (half mirror 9511a) are cooperated, the half mirror (half mirror 9511a) is set to the predetermined screen (central screen portion 9203C), and when these effects are not cooperated, the half mirror (half mirror 9511a) can be removed from the front side of the predetermined screen (central screen portion 9203C), and the effect can be performed. It is possible to prevent the half mirror (half mirror 9511a) from hindering the visibility of the image displayed on the predetermined screen (central screen portion 9203C) when not cooperated.

In the sixteenth embodiment, the image displayed on the display means (liquid crystal panel 9512) can be reflected to the front side by the half mirror (half mirror 9511a). The display means in the present invention is not limited to a liquid crystal panel, and any means capable of displaying an image can be adopted. For example, an organic or inorganic electroluminescence (EL) panel may be used as display means, or a screen different from the predetermined screen (central screen portion 9203C) may be used as display means. Alternatively, in the present invention, the image of a physical object other than the image may be configured to be reflected to the front side by a half mirror (half mirror 9511a). For example, instead of the display means (liquid crystal panel 9512), a light-emitting character (for example, a movable member having an LED) is provided, and the image of the light-emitting character is displayed by a half mirror (half mirror 9511a). It may be reflected to the front side. As a result, it is possible to superimpose the image displayed on the predetermined screen (central screen portion 9203C) on the mirror image of the light-emitting character, thereby allowing the player to visually recognize the image.

The half mirror (half mirror 9511a) in the present invention is not limited to one having a light transmittance of 50%, and a half mirror having an arbitrary transmittance can be appropriately adopted. The transmittance may be, for example, about 5% to 30%, or about 30% to 60%. Such a half mirror can be manufactured by appropriately adjusting the amount of silver or aluminum to be vapor-deposited. When the front side of the half mirror (half mirror 9511a) is brighter than the back side, the image displayed on the half mirror (half mirror 9511a) is higher than the image displayed on the predetermined screen (central screen portion 9203C). The mirror image of the object will be more clearly visible. The predetermined screen (central screen portion 9203C) in the present invention may be a screen having a substantially flat projection surface or a screen having a curved projection surface. Further, as the predetermined screen (central screen portion 9203C), a movable screen as described in the fifteenth embodiment may be adopted.

Further, in the sixteenth embodiment, a rear projector that projects from the rear side is used. It is desirable to adopt such a rear projector as the projector in the present invention. When a rear projector is employed, the half mirror (half mirror 9511a) and the predetermined screen (central screen portion 9203C) can be easily arranged close to each other while not blocking the passage of the light projected by the projector. . As a result, it is possible to facilitate cooperation between the effect using the half mirror (half mirror 9511a) and the effect using the predetermined screen (central screen portion 9203C). However, the projector in the present invention is not limited to the rear projector, and may be a transmissive liquid crystal projector that projects from the front side. When a transmissive liquid crystal projector is employed, the half mirror (half mirror 9511a) and the predetermined screen (central screen portion 9203C) should be spaced apart to some extent in order to secure the path for the light projected by the projector. good.

In the sixteenth embodiment, the half mirror (half mirror 9511a) can be moved from the first position (the position shown in FIG. 363(a)) to the second position (the position shown in FIG. 364). described as something. In the present invention, the timing of moving the half mirror (half mirror 9511a) from the first position to the second position is not particularly limited, and the movement can be triggered by the establishment of a predetermined condition. is. For example, while the half mirror (half mirror 9511a) is normally placed at the first position, when a game state (specific game state) advantageous to the player starts, the position changes from the first position to the second position. It may be moved to . Then, while the specific game state continues, the second position may be maintained. Also, when the right to shift to the specific game state is granted (the lottery for determining whether to shift to the specific game state is won), it is moved from the first position to the second position. may be As a result, an effect suggesting that the right to shift to the specific game state has been granted (that the lottery for determining whether to shift to the specific game state has been won) may be performed. In normal times (when the half mirror (half mirror 9511a) is arranged at the first position), no image is displayed on the display means (liquid crystal panel 9512), and the half mirror (half mirror 9511a) is An image may be displayed on the display means (liquid crystal panel 9512) when arranged at the second position. As the specific game state, the bonus game state (BB game state, MB game state, etc.) in the pachislot game machine, the RT game state, the AT game state (ART game state), the jackpot game state in the pachinko game machine, the probability variable game state, and the time saving A game state such as a game state can be appropriately adopted. It should be noted that the half mirror in the present invention may be non-movable, and may be configured to always be arranged at the second position.

[17th embodiment]
The first to sixteenth embodiments have been described above. The seventeenth embodiment will be described below. The basic configuration of the gaming machine 1 according to the seventeenth embodiment is the same as that of the gaming machine 1 according to the first to sixteenth embodiments. In the following description, the same components as those of the gaming machine 1 according to the first to sixteenth embodiments are denoted by the same reference numerals. In addition, descriptions of the portions that the descriptions of the first to sixteenth embodiments are applicable to the seventeenth embodiment will be omitted.

<Upper Door Mechanism UD and Display Unit 9000>
FIG. 367(a) is a front view schematically showing the upper door mechanism and the display unit. FIG. 367(b) is a side view of the upper door mechanism and display unit shown in FIG. 367(a).

In this embodiment, a display unit 9000 is arranged in the cabinet G, and the display unit 9000 includes a screen unit 9200, as in the thirteenth embodiment. The light projected from projector 9020 travels downward and is then reflected forward by mirror 9030 (see FIG. 55). The light projected from the projector 9020 is incident on the screen unit 9200 from the rear (rear side), and an image is displayed on the front side (display surface) of each screen constituting the screen unit 9200. .

Each screen constituting the screen unit 9200 is formed to have a uniform thickness over the entire surface, as in the thirteenth embodiment. Each of these screens is of a transmissive type in which a projected image is projected from behind and displayed. and a display surface on the front side onto which a projection image is projected by transmission of the . Each of these screens is made mainly of a translucent glass plate, an acrylic plate, or a resin film, and presents a milky white, translucent, or gray color when not projecting.

As shown in FIGS. 367(a) and 367(b), the upper door mechanism UD according to this embodiment has the same configuration as the upper door mechanism UD according to the sixteenth embodiment. Note that the illumination unit 9210 may not be provided. Also, the display unit 9000 according to this embodiment does not include the half mirror portion 9511 and the liquid crystal panel 9512 . The screen unit 9200 according to this embodiment also includes a left screen portion 9204L, a right screen portion 9204R, a central screen portion 9204C, an upper screen portion 9204U, a lower screen portion 9204Lo, and a top screen portion 9204T.

The left screen portion 9204L, the right screen portion 9204R, and the upper screen portion 9204U are each formed in an equiangular trapezoidal shape, and the left screen portion 9203L, the right screen portion 9203R, and the upper screen portion 9203L described in the sixteenth embodiment. It has the same configuration as the screen section 9203U (see FIG. 363). The lower screen portion 9204Lo is formed in an equiangular trapezoidal shape and has the same configuration as the lower screen portion 9202Lo (see FIG. 359) described in the fifteenth embodiment. The central screen portion 9204C and the top screen portion 9204T are each formed in a rectangular shape and have the same configuration as the central screen portion 9203C and the top screen portion 9203T (see FIG. 363) described in the sixteenth embodiment. there is

On the back side of the screen unit 9200, illumination units 9215 (illumination unit 9215a, illumination unit 9215b, illumination unit 9215c, and illumination unit 9215d) are provided. The illumination unit 9215a is arranged to extend along the boundary between the left screen portion 9204L and the upper screen portion 9204U. The illumination unit 9215b is arranged to extend along the boundary between the left screen portion 9204L and the lower screen portion 9204Lo. The illumination unit 9215c is arranged to extend along the boundary between the right screen portion 9204R and the upper screen portion 9204U. The illumination unit 9215d is arranged to extend along the boundary between the right screen portion 9204R and the lower screen portion 9204Lo.

Specifically, the illumination unit 9215a has substantially the same length as the upper oblique side of the left screen portion 9204L and the left oblique side of the upper screen portion 9204U, and is arranged so as to overlap with these oblique sides in a front view. . The illumination unit 9215b has substantially the same length as the lower oblique side of the left screen portion 9204L and the left oblique side of the lower screen portion 9204Lo, and is arranged so as to overlap with these oblique sides in front view. The illumination unit 9215c has substantially the same length as the upper oblique side of the right screen portion 9204R and the right oblique side of the upper screen portion 9204U, and is arranged so as to overlap with these oblique sides in a front view. The illumination unit 9215d has substantially the same length as the lower oblique side of the right screen portion 9204R and the right oblique side of the lower screen portion 9204Lo, and is arranged so as to overlap with these oblique sides in front view.

Each of the lighting unit 9215a, the lighting unit 9215b, the lighting unit 9215c, and the lighting unit 9215d is composed of an LED array in which a plurality of LEDs are installed on an LED substrate. A plurality of LEDs are arranged in parallel along the extending direction of each illumination unit 9215, and each LED is installed so as to emit light forward. This makes it possible to irradiate the vicinity of the boundary between two adjacent screens with the light emitted from the LEDs. The LED substrate is composed of a transparent flexible substrate having a light transmittance of 80% or more (for example, about 90%). Also, as the LED, a very small LED (for example, about 1.0 mm to 1.6 mm in length and about 0.5 mm to 0.8 mm in width) is used. This makes it difficult for the shadow of the illumination unit 9215 to appear on the screen. Since the illumination unit 9215 is provided on the back side of the screen unit 9200, it is basically invisible from the front. An illumination unit 9215c and an illumination unit 9215d are shown.

<Production display example>
FIG. 368 is a diagram showing an example of an effect using an illumination unit. FIG. 369 is a diagram showing an example of an effect using an illumination unit.

While the player is playing a game on the gaming machine 1, the display surfaces of the left screen portion 9204L, the right screen portion 9204R, the central screen portion 9204C, the upper screen portion 9204U, the lower screen portion 9204Lo, and the top screen portion 9204T ( An image (still image or moving image) relating to the game is displayed on the front surface).

In FIG. 367, the illumination unit 9215a, the illumination unit 9215b, the illumination unit 9215c, and the illumination unit 9215d are arranged on the rear side of the screen unit 9200. FIG. In the example shown in FIG. 368, an illumination unit 9215a, an illumination unit 9215b, an illumination unit 9215c, and an illumination unit 9215a, an illumination unit 9215b, an illumination unit 9215c, and an illumination unit 9215a, 9215b, 9215c, and 9215b are arranged on the back side of the screen unit 9200 so as to be close to (almost in contact with) the back surface of the screen unit 9200. In addition to the unit 9215d, an illumination unit 9215e, an illumination unit 9215f, an illumination unit 9215g, and an illumination unit 9215h are arranged.

The illumination unit 9215e is arranged to extend along the boundary between the central screen portion 9204C and the left screen portion 9204L. The illumination unit 9215f is arranged to extend along the boundary between the central screen portion 9204C and the right screen portion 9204R. The illumination unit 9215g is arranged to extend along the boundary between the central screen portion 9204C and the upper screen portion 9204U. The illumination unit 9215h is arranged to extend along the boundary between the central screen portion 9204C and the lower screen portion 9204Lo.

Specifically, the illumination unit 9215e has substantially the same length as the left side of the central screen portion 9204C and the rear side of the left side screen portion 9204L, and is arranged so as to overlap with these sides in a front view. The illumination unit 9215f has substantially the same length as the right side of the central screen portion 9204C and the rear side of the right side screen portion 9204R, and is arranged so as to overlap with these sides in front view. The illumination unit 9215g has substantially the same length as the upper side of the central screen portion 9204C and the rear side of the upper screen portion 9204U, and is arranged so as to overlap with these sides in front view. The illumination unit 9215h has substantially the same length as the lower side of the central screen portion 9204C and the rear side of the lower screen portion 9204Lo, and is arranged so as to overlap with these sides when viewed from the front.

These four illumination units 9215 (illumination unit 9215e, illumination unit 9215f, illumination unit 9215g, and illumination unit 9215h) are equivalent to the above-described four illumination units 9215 (illumination unit 9215a, illumination unit 9215b, lighting unit 9215c, and lighting unit 9215d), and it is possible to illuminate the vicinity of the boundary between two adjacent screens. Eight illumination units 9215 (illumination unit 9215a, illumination unit 9215b, illumination unit 9215c, illumination unit 9215d, illumination unit 9215e, illumination unit 9215f, illumination unit 9215g, and illumination unit 9215h) Each LED can be individually controlled to emit light by the sub-controller SS (see FIG. 11).

For example, as shown in FIG. 368(a), four illumination units 9215 (illumination unit 9215a, illumination unit 9215b, illumination unit 9215c, and illumination unit 9215c) radially extend from four corners of the central screen portion 9204C. In the decoration unit 9215d), the LEDs are sequentially illuminated from the front to the rear. As a result, it is possible to make the light appear to run from the outside toward the center side (center screen portion 9204C) in the periphery of the center screen portion 9204C, thereby drawing the player's attention to the center screen portion 9204C.

Also, as shown in FIG. 368(b), when all the LEDs in the lighting unit 9215a, the lighting unit 9215b, the lighting unit 9215c, and the lighting unit 9215d have finished emitting light, the peripheral edge of the central screen part 9204C All the LEDs in the four lighting units 9215 (the lighting unit 9215e, the lighting unit 9215f, the lighting unit 9215g, and the lighting unit 9215h) arranged along the line are caused to emit light. This makes it possible to irradiate along the four sides of the central screen portion 9204C at the same time that the light reaches the central screen portion 9204C, thereby further emphasizing the effect performed on the central screen portion 9204C.

Also, as an effect different from the example shown in FIG. 368, for example, a roulette effect can be performed. As shown in FIG. 368, by lighting each illumination unit 9215, it is possible to present an appearance as if the adjacent screens were partitioned. By using this, the display mode of each screen is sequentially changed (highlighted in order), thereby realizing an image expression as if roulette is being played.

Alternatively, the light emission of LEDs in the three illumination units 9215 (illumination unit 9215a, illumination unit 9215b, and illumination unit 9215e) arranged along the periphery of the left screen portion 9204L and the periphery of the upper screen portion 9204U Light emission of LEDs in the three illumination units 9215 (illumination unit 9215a, illumination unit 9215c, and illumination unit 9215g) arranged along the , and three illumination units arranged along the periphery of the right screen part 9204R Light emission of LEDs in the illumination unit 9215 (illumination unit 9215c, illumination unit 9215d, and illumination unit 9215f) and three illumination units 9215 (illumination A roulette may be represented by repeating the light emission of the LEDs in the unit 9215b, the illumination unit 9215d, and the illumination unit 9215h.

Further, in the example shown in FIG. 369, the illumination unit 9215a, the illumination unit 9215b, the illumination unit 9215c, and the illumination unit 9215d are driven by the drive mechanism described in the thirteenth embodiment and rotated. It is configured so that it is possible to Specifically, the illumination unit 9215a can rotate about an axis passing through points near the upper end of the front side of the left screen portion 9204L and the left end of the front side of the upper screen portion 9204U. The illumination unit 9215b is rotatable about an axis passing through points near the lower end of the front side of the left screen portion 9204L and the left end of the front side of the lower screen portion 9204Lo. The illumination unit 9215c can rotate about an axis passing through points near the upper end of the front side of the right screen portion 9204R and the right end of the front side of the upper screen portion 9204U. The illumination unit 9215d is rotatable about an axis passing through points in the vicinity of the lower end of the front side of the right screen portion 9204R and the right end of the front side of the lower screen portion 9204Lo.

As a result, the illumination unit 9215a can move from the position shown in FIG. 369(a) to the position shown in FIG. there is The illumination unit 9215b can be moved from the position shown in FIG. 369(a) to the position shown in FIG. 369(b) (a position substantially coinciding with the front side of the left screen portion 9204L). The lighting unit 9215c can move from the position shown in FIG. 369(a) to the position shown in FIG. The illumination unit 9215d can be moved from the position shown in FIG. 369(a) to the position shown in FIG. 369(b) (a position substantially coinciding with the front side of the right screen portion 9204R).

Here, the length of the illumination unit 9215a and the length of the illumination unit 9215b are each approximately half the length of the front side of the left screen portion 9204L. Thus, in the state shown in FIG. 369(b), the illumination unit 9215a and the illumination unit 9215b are arranged so as to extend over the entire front side of the left screen portion 9204L. Also, the length of the illumination unit 9215c and the length of the illumination unit 9215d are each approximately half the length of the front side of the right screen portion 9204R. Thus, in the state shown in FIG. 369(b), the illumination unit 9215c and the illumination unit 9215d are arranged so as to extend over the entire front side of the right screen portion 9204R.

In this way, by switching the arrangement state of the four illumination units 9215 (illumination unit 9215a, illumination unit 9215b, illumination unit 9215c, and illumination unit 9215d), X The illumination units 9215 can be lit in a letter shape (X-line shape), or in a straight line (vertical line on both sides) as shown in FIG. 369(b). As a result, together with the image displayed on the screen unit 9200, various effects can be performed.

In the example shown in FIG. 369, the illumination unit 9215a may be set longer than the upper oblique side of the left screen portion 9204L and the left oblique side of the upper screen portion 9204U. It may be set longer than the lower oblique side of the portion 9204L and the left oblique side of the lower screen portion 9204Lo. The illumination unit 9215d may be set longer than the lower oblique side of the right screen portion 9204R and the right oblique side of the lower screen portion 9204Lo. A part of the illumination unit 9215a, a part of the illumination unit 9215b, a part of the illumination unit 9215c, and a part of the illumination unit 9215d are arranged on the back side of the central screen part 9204C. You can do it. In this case, in the state shown in FIG. 369(a), among the illumination unit 9215a, the illumination unit 9215b, the illumination unit 9215c, and the illumination unit 9215d, the portion overlapping the central screen portion 9204C in front view is , the LED may not emit light.

Also, the extending direction of the illumination unit 9215a, the illumination unit 9215b, the illumination unit 9215c, and the illumination unit 9215d is not limited to the direction along the boundary between the two adjacent screens. For example, the direction along the diagonal of the rectangle (opening 9401 shown in FIG. 359(a)) formed by the front sides of the left screen portion 9204L, the right screen portion 9204R, the upper screen portion 9204U, and the lower screen portion 9204Lo. Furthermore, the illumination unit 9215a, the illumination unit 9215b, the illumination unit 9215c, and the illumination unit 9215d may be extended. The illumination unit 9215e, the illumination unit 9215f, the illumination unit 9215g, and the illumination unit 9215h may be omitted.

<Modification 1>
FIG. 370(a) is a front view schematically showing the upper door mechanism and the display unit. Figure 370(b) is a side view of the upper door mechanism and display unit shown in Figure 370(a). FIG. 371 is a diagram showing an example of an effect using an illumination unit.

Although the illumination unit 9215 is arranged on the back side of the screen unit 9200 in the above description, the illumination unit 9215 may be arranged on the front side of the screen unit 9200 .

In the example shown in FIG. 370, the illumination unit 9215 (illumination unit 9215A, illumination unit 9215B, illumination unit 9215C, and illumination unit 9215D) is arranged on the front side of the screen unit 9200. In the example shown in FIG. The illumination unit 9215A, the illumination unit 9215B, the illumination unit 9215C, and the illumination unit 9215D each include a translucent lens and the lens, similarly to the illumination unit 9210 described in the fifteenth embodiment. and a plurality of LEDs provided on the surface of the LED board. The LED is installed so as to emit light forward, and the light is emitted to the outside of the game machine 1 from the lens. As with the lighting unit 9215a, the lighting unit 9215b, the lighting unit 9215c, and the lighting unit 9215d, a transparent flexible substrate may be used as the LED substrate, or a very small LED may be used as the LED. may be

Each lens provided in the illumination unit 9215A, the illumination unit 9215B, the illumination unit 9215C, and the illumination unit 9215D has a triangular pyramid shape. Specifically, the lens provided in the illumination unit 9215A is a triangular pyramid with the top left corner of the central screen portion 9204C as its apex and including the left screen portion 9204L, the upper screen portion 9204U, and the central screen portion 9204C as three surfaces. Configure. The lens provided in the illumination unit 9215B forms a triangular pyramid with the left lower corner of the central screen portion 9204C as the apex and including the left screen portion 9204L, the lower screen portion 9204Lo, and the central screen portion 9204C as three surfaces. there is The lens provided in the illumination unit 9215C forms a triangular pyramid with the upper right corner of the central screen portion 9204C as the apex and including the right screen portion 9204R, the upper screen portion 9204U, and the central screen portion 9204C as three surfaces. . The lens provided in the illumination unit 9215D forms a triangular pyramid with the right-side screen portion 9204R, the lower-side screen portion 9204Lo, and the center-screen portion 9204C as the apex, which is the lower right corner of the central screen portion 9204C. there is

As a result, the center screen portion 9204C has an appearance as if the four corners were cut off in a triangular shape, and can be visually recognized as an octagonal shape. Note that each lens included in the illumination unit 9215A, the illumination unit 9215B, the illumination unit 9215C, and the illumination unit 9215D may be decorated.

Using the illumination unit 9215A, the illumination unit 9215B, the illumination unit 9215C, and the illumination unit 9215D, an effect as shown in FIG. 371 is performed. In the example shown in FIG. 371(a), an image prompting the user to press the effect button is displayed on the central screen portion 9204C. In this state, when the player presses the effect button, an image indicating whether or not the predetermined effect (effect for notifying whether or not the bonus is won) continues is displayed on the central screen portion 9204C. . In the example shown in FIG. 371(b), an image indicating that the effect will continue is displayed on the central screen portion 9204C, and the illumination unit 9215A, the illumination unit 9215B, the illumination unit 9215C, and the illumination unit Each LED of the 9215D is emitting light. As a result, in the vicinity of the four corners of the central screen portion 9204C, the illumination units 9215 are illuminated in a triangular shape, and the central screen portion 9204C has an appearance as if it were octagonal. can be made conspicuous, and the player's expectation for the bonus winning can be increased.

In this example, the illumination unit 9215A, the illumination unit 9215B, the illumination unit 9215C, and the illumination unit 9215D are described as having a triangular pyramid shape. Similar to the illumination unit 9215a, the illumination unit 9215b, the illumination unit 9215c, and the illumination unit 9215d, the illumination unit 9215C and the illumination unit 9215D are arranged along the boundary between two adjacent screens. It is good also as arrange|positioning so that it may extend linearly in a direction.

<Modification 2>
FIG. 372(a) is a front view schematically showing the upper door mechanism and the display unit. Figure 372(b) is a side view of the upper door mechanism and display unit shown in Figure 372(a). FIG. 373 is a diagram showing an example of an effect using an illumination unit.

In the example shown in FIG. 372, the screen unit 9200 cuts out the rear four corners of the screen unit 9200 shown in FIG. It has a shape in which four screen portions (upper left screen portion 9204UL, lower left screen portion 9204LoL, upper right screen portion 9204UR, and lower right screen portion 9204LoR) are arranged.

As a result, in a front view, a rectangle (opening 9401 shown in FIG. 359(a)) formed by the front sides of the left screen portion 9204L, the right screen portion 9204R, the upper screen portion 9204U, and the lower screen portion 9204Lo. Inside are a left screen portion 9204L, a right screen portion 9204R, a central screen portion 9204C, an upper screen portion 9204U, a lower screen portion 9204Lo, an upper left screen portion 9204UL, a lower left screen portion 9204LoL, an upper right screen portion 9204UR, and a lower right screen. Nine screens are formed, part 9204LoR. The central screen portion 9204C is formed in an octagonal shape.

Although detailed description is omitted, a plurality of illumination units 9215 are arranged on the rear side of the screen unit 9200 so as to be close to (substantially abut against) the rear surface of the screen unit 9200 . Each illumination unit 9215 is arranged so as to extend linearly in the direction along the boundary between two adjacent screens, as in FIG. Thus, a total of 16 illumination units 9215 are provided. Each illumination unit 9215 has the same configuration as the illumination unit 9215 described above (illumination unit 9215a, illumination unit 9215b, illumination unit 9215c, and illumination unit 9215d).

Using such 16 illumination units 9215, an effect as shown in FIG. 373 is performed. In the example shown in FIG. 373(a), an image prompting the user to press the effect button is displayed on the central screen portion 9204C. Also, the LEDs of the eight illumination units 9215 arranged along the eight sides of the central screen portion 9204C emit light. This can arouse the player's desire to press the effect button. In this state, when the player presses the effect button, an image indicating whether or not the predetermined effect (effect for notifying whether or not the bonus is won) continues is displayed on the central screen portion 9204C. . In the example shown in FIG. 373(b), an image indicating that the effect will continue is displayed on the central screen portion 9204C, and the LEDs of the remaining eight illumination units 9215 are emitting light. As a result, the peripheral edge of the central screen portion 9204C (octagonal) is bordered, and an appearance as if triangles protrude in all directions is exhibited. It can raise people's expectations.

<Modification 3>
FIG. 374(a) is a front view schematically showing the upper door mechanism and the display unit. Figure 374(b) is a side view of the upper door mechanism and display unit shown in Figure 374(a). FIG. 375 is a diagram showing an example of an effect using an illumination unit. FIG. 376(a) is a front view schematically showing the upper door mechanism and the display unit. Figure 376(b) is a side view of the upper door mechanism and display unit shown in Figure 376(a). FIG. 377 is a diagram showing an example of an effect using an illumination unit.

In the example shown in FIG. 374, screen unit 9200 has only one screen 9205 . An illumination unit 9215X and an illumination unit 9215Y are arranged on the left side and right side of the screen 9205 so as to be close to (substantially abut against) the front surface of the screen 9205, respectively. The illumination unit 9215X and the illumination unit 9215Y, similarly to the illumination unit 9215A, the illumination unit 9215B, the illumination unit 9215C, and the illumination unit 9215D, respectively, have translucent lenses and rear surfaces of the lenses. and a plurality of LEDs provided on the surface of the LED substrate. The LED is installed so as to emit light forward, and the light is emitted to the outside of the game machine 1 from the lens.

Each lens included in the illumination unit 9215X and the illumination unit 9215Y has a rod-like (linear) shape. As a result, the illumination unit 9215X and the illumination unit 9215Y, respectively, similarly to the illumination unit 9215a and the illumination unit 9215b and the illumination unit 9215c and the illumination unit 9215d in the state shown in FIG. It is arranged so as to extend in the vertical direction. The extension direction of the illumination unit 9215X and the extension direction of the illumination unit 9215Y are substantially parallel.

Using such an illumination unit 9215X and an illumination unit 9215Y, an effect as shown in FIG. 375 is performed. In the example shown in FIG. 375(a), when the stop button is pressed, an image indicating a pattern (for example, "7") to be stopped is displayed on the screen 9205, and each of the illumination unit 9215X and the illumination unit 9215Y The LED is emitting light. In this state, if the player succeeds in stopping the indicated symbol, screen 9205 displays the advantageous content that the player can obtain. In the example shown in FIG. 375(b), the number of games advantageous to the player (for example, the number of times AT is added) is displayed on the screen 9205, and each LED of the illumination unit 9215X and the illumination unit 9215Y It emits light (for example, blinks) in a manner different from that in FIG. 375(a). This makes it possible to emphasize the effect performed on the screen 9205 .

Also, the lighting unit 9215X and the lighting unit 9215Y can rotate like the lighting unit 9215a, the lighting unit 9215b, the lighting unit 9215c, and the lighting unit 9215d in the example shown in FIG. It can be configured as For example, in the effect shown in FIG. 375, before the player presses the stop button, the illumination unit 9215X and the illumination unit 9215Y are arranged so as to extend in the left-right direction, and the indicated pattern is displayed. Triggered by the player's successful stop, the electrical decoration unit 9215X and the electrical decoration unit 9215Y may be rotated and arranged so as to extend in the vertical direction.

In the example shown in FIG. 376, on the front side of the screen 9205, an illumination unit 9215p, an illumination unit 9215q, an illumination unit 9215r, and an illumination unit 9215s are arranged. The illumination unit 9215p, the illumination unit 9215q, the illumination unit 9215r, and the illumination unit 9215s have the same configurations as the illumination unit 9215X and the illumination unit 9215Y, respectively. The illumination unit 9215p, the illumination unit 9215q, the illumination unit 9215r, and the illumination unit 9215s are arranged so as to extend diagonally radially from the four corners of the virtual rectangular area in the center of the screen 9205. .

Using the illumination unit 9215p, the illumination unit 9215q, the illumination unit 9215r, and the illumination unit 9215s, an effect as shown in FIG. 377 is performed. In the example shown in FIG. 377( a ), an image prompting the user to press the effect button is displayed in the center of the screen 9205 . Also, the LEDs of the illumination unit 9215p, the illumination unit 9215q, the illumination unit 9215r, and the illumination unit 9215s emit light. This can arouse the player's desire to press the effect button. In this state, when the player presses the effect button, a privilege advantageous to the player may be granted. In the example shown in FIG. 377(b), the number of times of games advantageous to the player (for example, the number of AT times added) is added, and this fact is displayed in the center of the screen 9205, and the illumination unit 9215p, Each LED of the lighting unit 9215q, the lighting unit 9215r, and the lighting unit 9215s emits light (for example, blinks) in a manner different from that in FIG. 377(a). This makes it possible to emphasize the effect performed on the screen 9205 .

The illumination unit 9215p, the illumination unit 9215q, the illumination unit 9215r, and the illumination unit 9215s are respectively the illumination unit 9215a, the illumination unit 9215b, the illumination unit 9215c, and the illumination unit 9215c in the example shown in FIG. As with the lighting unit 9215d, it may be configured to be rotatable. As a result, as shown in FIG. 369, a state in which the illumination units 9215 are lit in an X shape (X line) and a state in which the illumination units 9215 are lit linearly (vertical lines on both sides) are divided into two states. You may enable it to switch. For example, in the effect shown in FIG. 377, before the player presses the effect button, the illumination unit 9215p, the illumination unit 9215q, the illumination unit 9215r, and the illumination unit 9215s move vertically (see FIG. 369 ( b)), and when the production button is pressed, the illumination unit 9215p, the illumination unit 9215q, the illumination unit 9215r, and the illumination unit 9215s are rotated. It is also possible to arrange them by moving them so as to extend in an oblique direction (see FIG. 377(b)).

In the above description, the illumination unit 9215X, the illumination unit 9215Y, the illumination unit 9215p, the illumination unit 9215q, the illumination unit 9215r, and the illumination unit 9215s are arranged on the front side of the screen 9205. However, they may be placed behind the screen 9205 . In this case, as the configuration of these illumination units 9215, it is possible to employ the same configuration as the above-described illumination unit 9215a, illumination unit 9215b, illumination unit 9215c, and illumination unit 9215d. .

The gaming machine 1 according to the seventeenth embodiment has been described above as one embodiment of the present invention.

<Appendix R>
2. Description of the Related Art Conventionally, there is known a gaming machine capable of producing effects by using a projector (see Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 6-035066 and Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2009-240459). According to such a game machine, a game image is projected from a projector onto a projection surface such as a screen, so that the image is displayed on the screen instead of the liquid crystal display device.

In the process of earnestly studying the game machine using the projector as described above, the inventor of the present invention cannot create a new entertainment property by devising the arrangement of the screen and the light emitting means. I came up with the idea.

SUMMARY OF THE INVENTION The present invention has been made in view of the above points, and an object of the present invention is to create a new entertainment value in a gaming machine equipped with a projector and a screen.

In this regard, the gaming machine 1 according to the seventeenth embodiment has the following features.

(R-1-1) screens (left screen portion 9204L, right screen portion 9204R, center screen portion 9204C, upper screen portion 9204U, and lower screen portion 9204Lo);
a projector (projector 9020) that projects light for displaying an image on the screen;
a light-emitting unit (illumination unit 9215) having a light-emitting means capable of emitting light,
The light-emitting unit can emit light by the light-emitting means in a state where at least a portion of the light-emitting unit overlaps with the screen when viewed from the front.
A gaming machine characterized by:

According to the gaming machine 1 according to the seventeenth embodiment, at least a part of the light emitting unit (electrical decoration unit 9215) is a screen (left screen portion 9204L, right screen portion 9204R, center screen portion 9204C, upper screen 9204U and the lower screen portion 9204Lo), the light emitting means can emit light. As a result, the player can see the image display mode on the screens (left screen portion 9204L, right screen portion 9204R, center screen portion 9204C, upper screen portion 9204U, and lower screen portion 9204Lo) and light emission by the light emitting means. It is possible to visually recognize the aspect in a superimposed manner, and a novel visual effect can be created.

(R-1-2) The gaming machine of (R-1-1),
As the screens, a first screen (left screen portion 9204L) and a second screen (upper screen portion 9204U) are provided,
The first screen and the second screen are arranged so that a part thereof is close to each other,
The light emitting unit is arranged to extend along a boundary between the first screen and the second screen.
It is characterized by

According to the gaming machine 1 according to the seventeenth embodiment, the first screen (the left screen portion 9204L) and the second screen (the upper screen portion 9204U) are arranged so that parts of them are close to each other. The unit (electrical decoration unit 9215) is arranged to extend along the boundary between the first screen (left screen portion 9204L) and the second screen (upper screen portion 9204U). As a result, it is possible to present an appearance as if the first screen (left screen portion 9204L) and the second screen (upper screen portion 9204U) were partitioned by the light emitting unit (illumination unit 9215). The image displayed on the second screen (left screen portion 9204L) and the image displayed on the second screen (upper screen portion 9204U) can be displayed separately.

(R-1-3) The gaming machine of (R-1-1) or (R-1-2),
A driving mechanism for driving the light emitting unit,
The light-emitting unit can be driven by the drive mechanism to move from a first position (the position shown in FIG. 369(a)) to a second position (the position shown in FIG. 369(b)). It is possible, and when it is arranged at least at the second position, it is possible for the light emitting means to emit light in a state where at least a part thereof overlaps with the screen in a front view. be,
It is characterized by

According to the game machine 1 according to the seventeenth embodiment, the light-emitting unit (electrical decoration unit 9215) is driven by the driving mechanism, thereby moving from the first position (the position shown in FIG. 369(a)) to the second position. position (the position shown in FIG. 369(b)), and when it is arranged at least in the second position (the position shown in FIG. 369(b)), at least one the screen (left screen portion 9204L, right screen portion 9204R, center screen portion 9204C, upper screen portion 9204U, and lower screen portion 9204Lo). is configured to allow As a result, the game on the screen (left screen portion 9204L, right screen portion 9204R, center screen portion 9204C, upper screen portion 9204U, and lower screen portion 9204Lo) is performed according to the arrangement state of the light emitting units (electrical decoration units 9215). It is possible to change the way the person's consciousness is directed, and it is possible to perform a variety of productions.

(R-2-1) screens (left screen portion 9204L, right screen portion 9204R, center screen portion 9204C, upper screen portion 9204U, and lower screen portion 9204Lo);
a projector (projector 9020) that projects light for displaying an image on the screen;
a light-emitting means capable of emitting light (an LED included in the illumination unit 9215),
The light emitting means is arranged in a passage path of the light projected by the projector,
The light emission mode by the light emitting means and the display mode of the image on the screen are superimposed and visible,
A gaming machine characterized by:

According to the gaming machine 1 according to the seventeenth embodiment, the light emitting means (the LED provided in the illumination unit 9215) is arranged in the passage path of the light projected by the projector (the projector 9020). At a position close to the display area of the image on the screen (left screen portion 9204L, right screen portion 9204R, center screen portion 9204C, upper screen portion 9204U, and lower screen portion 9204Lo), light emitting means (illumination unit 9215 It is easy to cause light emission by the LED provided in the. As a result, the light emission mode by the light emitting means (the LED provided in the illumination unit 9215) and the screen (the left screen portion 9204L, the right screen portion 9204R, the central screen portion 9204C, the upper screen portion 9204U, and the lower screen portion 9204Lo). It is possible to effectively create a situation in which the display mode of an image can be superimposed and visually recognized. It is possible to realize a novel production in collaboration with.

(R-2-2) The gaming machine of (R-2-1),
The projector and the screen are arranged so that the light projected by the projector is incident on the back side of the screen,
The light emitting means is arranged so as to be able to project light from the back side of the screen.
It is characterized by

According to the game machine 1 according to the seventeenth embodiment, the projector (projector 9020) and the screen (left screen portion 9204L, right screen portion 9204R, center screen portion 9204C, upper screen portion 9204U, and lower screen portion 9204Lo) , the light projected by the projector (projector 9020) is incident on the rear side of the screen (left screen portion 9204L, right screen portion 9204R, center screen portion 9204C, upper screen portion 9204U, and lower screen portion 9204Lo). , and the light emitting means (LEDs provided in the illumination unit 9215) are provided on the screens (left screen portion 9204L, right screen portion 9204R, center screen portion 9204C, upper screen portion 9204U, and lower screen portion 9204Lo). On the other hand, it is arranged so that light can be projected from the rear side. As a result, the light emitting means (the LEDs provided in the illumination unit 9215) emit light on the rear side of the screens (the left screen portion 9204L, the right screen portion 9204R, the central screen portion 9204C, the upper screen portion 9204U, and the lower screen portion 9204Lo). By doing so, screens (left screen portion 9204L, right screen portion 9204R, central screen portion 9204C, upper screen portion 9204U, and lower It is possible to illuminate the part of the side screen part 9204Lo), and by cooperating the image display in this part and the illumination by the light emitting means (LED provided in the illumination unit 9215), a more attractive effect is performed. be able to.

(R-2-3) The gaming machine of (R-2-1) or (R-2-2),
The light emitting means is arranged on a predetermined substrate having translucency,
It is characterized by

According to the game machine 1 according to the seventeenth embodiment, the light emitting means (the LEDs included in the electrical decoration unit 9215) are arranged on the predetermined translucent substrate. This makes it easier for the light projected by the projector (projector 9020) to pass through the substrate, and it is possible to create a situation in which a shadow is less likely to occur at the placement position of the substrate.

In the seventeenth embodiment, the light-emitting units (illumination units 9215) are arranged along the boundary between adjacent screens. In the present invention, the arrangement position of the light emitting unit (electrical decoration unit 9215) is not particularly limited, and the light emitting unit (electrical decoration unit 9215) may be arranged regardless of the boundary portion. In addition, the light-emitting unit (illumination unit 9215) may be arranged in close proximity (approximately in contact) with the screen on the front side or the back side of the screen, or may be arranged at a predetermined distance from the screen. good. The light-emitting unit (electrical decoration unit 9215) can be attached to any member (for example, front panel, etc.) placed near the screen.

Further, the specific configuration of the light emitting unit is not particularly limited, and the light emitting units described in the above-described embodiments (for example, the indirect lighting unit 1060, the navigation lamp unit 8160, the right light emitting unit 8320, and the left light emitting unit that is symmetrical therewith, etc.) ) can be adopted as appropriate. Also, the light emitting means (LED) in the present invention may be smaller than the LED provided in the light emitting unit described in the above embodiments. For example, in addition to the lighting unit 9215, the gaming machine of the present invention may include the light emitting units described in the above-described embodiments (for example, the indirect lighting unit 1060, the navigation lamp unit 8160, or the right light emitting unit 8320 and a symmetrical light emitting unit 8320). The left side light emitting unit) may be provided, and the LED included in the illumination unit 9215 may be smaller than the LED included in the light emitting unit. Further, the screen (the left screen portion 9204L, the right screen portion 9204R, the central screen portion 9204C, the upper screen portion 9204U, and the lower screen portion 9204Lo) in the present invention may be a screen having a substantially flat projection surface. Alternatively, the screen may have a curved projection surface. By arranging the light emitting means (LEDs provided in the lighting unit 9215) on a flexible substrate, it is easy to arrange the light emitting means (LEDs provided in the lighting unit 9215) close to the curved projection surface. can be done.

In the present invention, the timing of making the light emitting unit (electrical decoration unit 9215) emit light is not particularly limited, and the light emitting unit (electrical decoration unit 9215) can be made to emit light when a predetermined condition is satisfied. As the predetermined condition, for example, as described in the above-described embodiment, the condition that a game state (specific game state) advantageous to the player starts, or the right to shift to the specific game state is granted ( It is possible to adopt a condition that the lottery for determining whether to shift to the specific game state has been won). Further, when a movable light-emitting unit (illumination unit 9215) is adopted, the position of the light-emitting unit (illumination unit 9215) is changed when such a predetermined condition is met. may At this time, for example, the light-emitting unit (electrical unit 9215) before driving does not overlap the screen (left screen portion 9204L, right screen portion 9204R, center screen portion 9204C, upper screen portion 9204U, and lower screen portion 9204Lo). 9204L, right screen portion 9204R, center screen portion 9204C, upper screen portion 9204U, and lower screen portion 9204Lo). You may make it arrange|position in the position to overlap. In addition, while the light emitting unit (electrical decoration unit 9215) before driving is arranged in a portion different from the boundary portion (for example, the portion shown in FIG. 369(b)), the light emitting unit (electrical decoration unit 9215) after driving is arranged. may be arranged along the boundary portion (for example, the portion shown in FIG. 369(a)).

<Appendix (Other)>
Conventionally, a plurality of reels each having a plurality of patterns arranged on its surface are inserted with game medals, coins, etc. (“medals, etc.”), and it is detected that the start lever has been operated by the player, and a plurality of reels are generated. Detects that the player has pressed a start switch requesting the start of rotation of the reel and a stop button provided corresponding to each of a plurality of reels, and outputs a signal requesting the rotation of the reel to stop. a stepping motor provided corresponding to each of a plurality of reels to transmit the respective driving force to each reel; and the operation of the stepping motor based on signals output from the start switch and the stop switch. and a reel control unit for controlling the rotation and stopping of each reel, and when it detects that the start lever has been operated, a lottery is conducted based on a random number value, and the result of this lottery ("internal winning combination") 2. Description of the Related Art There is known a so-called pachislot gaming machine that stops the rotation of reels based on the detection timing of operation of a stop button.

However, since conventional pachislot machines do not have the configuration and functions of the gaming machine of the present invention, it has not been possible to effectively improve interest. SUMMARY OF THE INVENTION It is an object of the present invention to provide a gaming machine capable of enhancing the interest of a game.

The first to seventeenth embodiments have been described above. In the above-described embodiment, the case where the present invention is applied to a pachislot gaming machine has been described, but the present invention can also be applied to other gaming machines (for example, pachinko gaming machines, slot machines, etc.).

As described above, the first to seventeenth embodiments of the present invention have been described, but these are merely examples, and the present invention is not particularly limited. It is possible. Moreover, the effects described in the embodiments of the present invention are merely enumerations of the most suitable effects resulting from the present invention, and the effects of the present invention are limited to those described in the embodiments of the present invention. is not.

In addition, in the above detailed description, the characteristic parts have been mainly described so that the present invention can be understood more easily. The present invention is not limited to the embodiments set forth in the foregoing detailed description, but may be applied to other embodiments and its scope of application is diverse. Moreover, the terms and usage used in this specification are used to describe the present invention precisely, and are not used to limit the interpretation of the present invention. In addition, it is believed that those skilled in the art can easily conceive of other configurations, systems, methods, etc. included in the concept of the present invention from the concept of the invention described herein. Therefore, the claims should be considered to include equivalent configurations within the scope of the technical idea of the present invention. In addition, the purpose of the abstract is to facilitate understanding of the technical content and essence of the application by the Patent Office, general public institutions, and engineers in this technical field who are unfamiliar with patents, legal terms, or technical terms. It is intended to make it possible to make a quick judgment through a thorough investigation. The Abstract, therefore, is not intended to limit the scope of the invention, which should be evaluated by the claims. In addition, in order to fully understand the purpose of the present invention and the unique effects of the present invention, it is desired that the description should be interpreted with due consideration given to the literatures that have already been disclosed.

The foregoing detailed description includes computer-implemented processes. The above explanations and representations are provided for the purpose of most efficient understanding by those skilled in the art. As used herein, each treatment used to derive a result of 1 should be understood as a self-consistent treatment. In each process, transmission/reception, recording, etc. of electrical or magnetic signals are performed. Note that the operations in each process represent such signals as bits, values, symbols, characters, terms, numbers, etc., which are used merely for convenience of explanation. There is a need. In addition, the processing in each processing may be described in terms common to human behavior, but the processing described in this specification is basically executed by various devices. Also, other configurations required to perform each process are self-explanatory from the above description.

1 Game Machine A Display Unit B Irradiation Unit C Screen Device D Fixed Screen Mechanism G Cabinet E1 Front Screen Mechanism F1 Reel Screen Mechanism UD Upper Door Mechanism DD Lower Door Mechanism

Claims (1)

a plurality of light emitting means including a first light emitting means and a second light emitting means capable of emitting light;
a first light guide section capable of guiding light emitted from the first light emitting means; a second light guide section capable of guiding light emitted from the second light emitting means; and the first light emitting means a third light guide section capable of guiding light emitted from the light transmitting member;
a distance between the first light emitting means and the translucent member is longer than a distance between the second light emitting means and the translucent member;
The first light guide section and the third light guide section extend in substantially the same direction,
The third light guide has a first end and a second end, and the second light guide is opposite to the first end with respect to the second end. is located in the
A gaming machine characterized by:

Images